Workplace Diversity: Nestle India

profilejhh19970724
sbp.zip

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/1. SBP��Ŀ˵��/SBP Structure and Contents.pptx

SBP Structure and Contents

It is suggested that you adopt the following format in presenting your SBP:

1. Title Page: Please use the standard cover page attached as per prescribed in SBP Handbook.

2. Abstract: It should provide a brief summary of the SBP not exceeding 300 words

3. Acknowledgements: Acknowledgements of outside help and support.

4. Table of Contents: It should list the sequence with page numbers of all relevant subdivisions of the dissertation; i.e. chapter headings, section and sub-section (if appropriate).

5. List of Tables

6. List of Figures / Illustrations

SBP Structure and Contents

7. Chapter 1: Introduction

8. Chapter 2: Literature Review

9. Chapter 3: Theoretical Framework and Research Methodology

10. Chapter 4: Data Presentation, Analysis and Findings

11. Chapter 5: Conclusion (s) and Recommendations

12. Reference List: The SB should include a list of all relevant texts / journals used following the Harvard Referencing System / Style. Please refer to Referencing Guide .

13. Appendices: The appendices should only include material that is not central to the arguments in the main text.

SBP Marking Criteria/ Guide

  Percentage Margin (up to 5%)
  Supervisor Examiner 2 Supervisor Examiner 2
Abstract, introduction, continuity and presentation (15%)        
Literature review (25%)        
Research Methods (20%)        
Results & Discussion ( 30%)        
       
Conclusion & Recommendations( 10%)        

1. Abstract, introduction, continuity and presentation (15%)

In general, your markers will assess the clarity of stated aims and objectives, relevance to sector related issues, feasibility of aims of SBP, the rationale and significance of the research undertaken.

Title: is the title focused, summative, and does it reflect the proposed SBPcontent?

Abstract: is it short (300 words), self-contained, summative, objective, precise and easy to read.

Introduction: is background information included? Is an introduction to current research included and developed? An introduction to the organisation (if applicable)?

1. Abstract, introduction, continuity and presentation (15%)

Have you demonstrated the relevance of your SBP to the field and is it theoretically grounded? Links to relevant literature and academic debates, the evidence of extensive reading will be valued.

Aim(s): is the aim feasible and manageable (have resource and data accessibility been taken into account)? Is the aim original and does it have the potential to add insights to the field of study? Does it conform to the right aim format?

Rationale and Significance of Study: is the sound rationale to undertake the study included? Are the benefits / significance of this study presented?

2. Literature Review (25%)

In general: Search for relevant literature. Critical assessment of literature. Awareness of contribution of other researchers. Awareness of relevant theories, concepts, models and methodology. Direct linkage to SBP aims and objectives identified.

Provide a critical review of relevant academic literature

Critique existing research and link it to aims / objectives

Review key academic theories

d. Demonstrate relevance to contemporary / current debates

2. Literature Review (25%)

Be current (not outdated sources)

Be related to previous published and “recognised” work

Be critical (sources that both support and oppose aims and objectives)

Be able to differentiate fact and opinion

Assess strengths and weaknesses of previous work

Be objective, unbiased, coherent and cohesive

k. Adhere to the Harvard Referencing System

3. Theoretical Framework and Research Methodology (20%)

In general: Choice and use of research methods are appropriate to the aims and objectives. Sound justification provided, including evidence of secondary data supporting choice of methods.

The type (s) of research undertaken

The theoretical / conceptual framework

The research methods

The research design

The data collection (i.e. sampling)

Ethical issues

Reliability and validity of the study

h. Limitations

4. Data Presentation, Analysis and Results/Findings (30%)

In general: Presentation, analysis and interpretation of data followed by your findings. Clear relationship made between aims & objectives, literature and findings.

Is the data appropriately presented i.e. graphically (quantitative research) or verbatim (qualitative research)?

Is the data presentation factual or interpretative?

Does the analysis answer the research questions?

Does the analysis relate or is linked to previous knowledge in the field?

Is the analysis built from the findings?

Is the analysis linked to the literature review?

g. Is the analysis analytical or merely descriptive?

5. Conclusions and Recommendations (10%)

In general: Aims and objectives are satisfied and appropriate course (s) of action is / are recommended.

Are the conclusions drawn from the findings?

Are the conclusions linked to the literature?

Are the conclusions linked to aims and objectives?

Are the suggested recommendations linked to the deficiencies identified in the research findings?

e. Are the suggested recommendations practical and workable?

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/1. SBP��Ŀ˵��/SBP Structure with Details.pdf

8.0 RESEARCH METHODS

These guidelines address postgraduate students who have completed course

requirements and assumed to have sufficient background experience of high-level

engagement activities like recognizing, relating, applying, generating, reflecting and

theorizing issues. It is an ultimate period in our academic life when we feel confident

at embarking on independent research.

It cannot be overemphasized that we must enjoy the experience of research process

and not look at it as an academic chore.

To enable such a desired behaviour, these guidelines consider the research process

in terms of the skills and knowledge needed to develop independent and critical

styles of thinking in order to evaluate and use research as well as to conduct fresh

research.

The guidelines should be viewed as briefs which the Research Supervisors are expected

to exemplify based on their own experience as well as expertise.

8.1 Chapter 1 - Introduction

INTRODUCE the subject or problem to be studied. This might require the

identification of key managerial concerns, theories, laws and governmental rulings,

critical incidents or social changes, and current environmental issues, that make the

subject critical, relevant and worthy of managerial or research attention.

• To inform the Reader (stylistically - forthright, direct, and brief / concise),

• The first sentence should begin with `This Study was intended

to’….’ And immediately tell the Reader the nature of the study for the

reader's interest and desire to read on.

8.1.1 The Research Problem

What is the statement of the problem? The statement of the problem or problem

statement should follow logically from what has been set forth in the background of

the problem by defining the specific research need providing impetus for the

study, a need not met through previous research. Present a clear and precise

statement of the central question of research, formulated to address the need.

8.1.2 The Purpose of the Study

What is the purpose of the study? What are the RESEARCH QUESTION (S) of

the study? What are the specific objective (s) of the study? Define the specific

research objective (s) that would answer the research Question (s) of the study.

8.1.3 The Rationale of the Study:

1. Why in a general sense?

2. One or two brief references to previous research or theories critical in structuring

this study to support and understand the rationale.

3. The importance of the study for the reader to know, to fully appreciate the need

for the study - and its significance.

4. Own professional experience that stimulated the study or aroused interest in the

area of research.

5. The Need for the Study - will deal with valid questions or professional concerns

to provide data leading to an answer - reference to literature helpful and

appropriate.

8.1.4 The Significance of the Study:

1. Clearly describe the significance of the study.

2. Justify why the subject requires attention.

3. Identify key contributions of the research that can be achieved.

4. Highlight the contributions that the study seeks to achieve towards - management

practices; theoretical and methodological applications; governmental procedures,

policies and laws; nation building.

8.1.5 The Scope of the Study:

1. Break general research problem down to specific sub problems

2. Major analysis of the data exposed as one of sub problems

3. Identify the dimensions / population of the subject that you plan to study.

4. Discussion on issues such as types of data the subjects or sources of information

utilised, the time period involved and the geographic locations covered in the research

may be discussed in this section.

5. What aspects of the subject do you intend to study? What are the key questions to

be investigated?

8.1.6 Definition of Terms

Define the terms used in the study that are not usually encountered by readers, generally.

If the study focuses on only one institution or company then a short background history

of it should be included in this chapter.

8.1.7 Summary

A synopsis of the contents of the chapter that leads to the introduction of the

following chapter.

8.2 Chapter 2 - Literature Review

1. Identify the appropriate academic and / or professional fields

2. Evaluate and critique the literature - challenge the assumptions

3. Be highly selective and include only those aspects of the research literature and

non-research or conceptual literature that are relevant to developing the foundation

of the current study.

4. Each major previous study is discussed in a separate paragraph (s) with the findings

summarised collectively - same as with non-research or conceptual literature by

authorities who hold similar views.

5. A review of literature should read as a synthesis, written by someone who has

read all of the literature and so is able to look across it all, select the highlights,

and synthesise these into a totally integrated section in the context of the current

study, for further use when writing the discussion of the results and conclusions.

8.2.1 History of Research:

Provide a brief history of the empirical research on the subject. Pioneering studies,

thrust of prior research on the subject i.e. which issues have received attention, theories

explored, viewpoints expressed, and research methods typically used.

8.2.2 Review of Key Studies

1. Identify and summarise the key empirical studies that have a bearing on the

research.

2. Provide a tabular summary of the subjects, issues studied, research methods used

and other pertinent details relating to the studies.

3. Summarise the findings of the studies.

8.2.3 Evaluation of Key Studies:

1. Evaluate the findings of the studies in the light of your concerns.

2. What has been accomplished and what remains to be done?

3. How do you intend to use the experience of these studies in your research?

8.2.4 Summary:

A synopsis of the contents of the hypotheses / research questions and the

rationale derived from the researcher's experience and from the readings of

research and conceptual literatures should be stated effectively at the

conclusion of the review of literature chapter that leads on to the following chapter.

8.3 Chapter 3 - Theoretical Framework and Research Methodology

THEORETICAL / CONCEPTUAL FRAMEWORK - using material from the previous

chapter, produce the working definitions of the main concepts you will use in your study.

If possible, form them into a conceptual framework of theories or hypotheses to be

tested.

8.3.1 Research Methodology

1. Discuss the nature of the questions you are asking and choose an appropriate

methodological stance for answering them.

2. Justify the research methods you are using.

3. Describe the practical and technical aspects of conducting the research.

8.3.2 Theoretical Framework

Identify the various variables investigated in the study. Illustrate how the

variables interact with each other as hypothesised in the research by the aid of

diagram (s) (if possible).

8.3.3 Research Approach

Describe the approach adopted in the study, justification for

using the approach and issues related to adopting the approach.

8.3.4 Research Subjects

1. Provide details about the population and sample used.

2. What sectors of the labour force, industry or groups is the sample drawn?

3. What are the characteristics of the population sample?

4. What are the strong points and limitations of the sample?

5. What is the justification of choosing the sample?

6. Can the findings be generalised to the population?

8.3.5 Questionnaire

1. Describe the questionnaire used in the study

2. Background of the questionnaire

3. Is it original? If any items are taken from existing questionnaire, identify the

sources

4. Describe the question categories

5. Describe the scaling methods used and state the reasons for choosing them

6. Issues on validity and reliability

7. Pilot test to check the clarity and appropriateness of the survey questionnaire prior

to the actual conduct of the actual survey.

8.3.6 Administration of the Questionnaire

1. Describe how the questionnaire was administered

2. Discuss problems encountered, if any, that affected the results relating to sample

characteristics and their potential impact on reliability and validity of the data.

3. Ensure that in collecting the data, individual respondents / organization were duly

briefed and made aware of the ethical practices including ensuring the

confidentiality of the information gathered and data protection, voluntary and non

- monetary inducement to participate in the intended research. Full consent of

participations by individual respondents is solicited without any form of coercion.

8.3.7 Statistical Methods

1. Discuss the selected Descriptive and Inferential Statistical methods [as in the

SPSS] used in analysing the results. Having selected the variables for your study,

you assume that they would either help to define your problem (dependent

variable/s) and its different components or that they were contributory factors to

your problem (independent variable).

2. The purpose of data analysis is to identify whether these assumptions were correct

or not, and to highlight possible new views on the problem under study.

3. The ultimate purpose of analysis is to answer the research questions outlined in

the objectives with your data.

8.3.8 Summary

1. A synopsis of the contents of what has been written about in the Theoretical /

Conceptual Framework and Research Methodology used.

2. The description of the sample used.

3. Descriptive data and the instrument used.

4. The design of the study and the way data were collected.

5. The way data were analysed - assumptions and limitations of the study.

8.4 Chapter 4 - Data Presentation, Analysis and Findings

1. Describe what you found out and what it means.

2. Refer back to the Literature Review and your Theoretical/ Conceptual

Framework.

3. Present the Data in the form of tables, figures, charts or other illustrations as

needed and sequenced in terms of the research questions or hypotheses tested.

4. Discuss your findings in terms of what the data actually means in terms of each

segment or cell of data gathered.

8.4.1 Summary

State the findings as concretely as possible in terms of each segment or cell of

data gathered to answer the research questions and hypotheses.

8.5 Chapter 5 - Conclusions and Recommendations

1. As an introduction to the chapter, Summarise [recapitulate] the argument of the

dissertation in terms of what you attempted to find out and what you

accomplished i.e. address the research questions / hypothesis(es).

2. The final chapter is entitled `Conclusions and Recommendations'. Conclusions

here mean that for each of the findings that address the research questions and

hypotheses, the researcher draws a conclusion.

3. Recommendations mean that for each Conclusion, the researcher suggests a

recommendation.

4. Consider:

a. Discussion: Discuss the findings of Study in terms of the main Research

Questions and Hypotheses as well as the Title of the Research and relate the findings

to the Literature Review. In addition, try to explain the significance and non-

significance of the results using available theory, data and facts as well as the

validity and reliability of the findings and

arguments in the dissertation as a whole.

b. Implications: What are the substantive implications of the experience for -

Management, unions and other interest groups; for public policy; Nation building. -

The Methodological or procedural implications of the experience for other

researchers.

c. Limitations of Research: Describe the possible limitations faced in the study

especially from the methodological perspective.

d. Suggestions for Further or Additional Research: Provide concrete suggestions

for FURTHER RESEARCH in the field or additional research (if possible) in the

research methodological areas encountered in the study The researcher's last

Recommendation will be Suggestions for Further

Research.

e. The FINAL CONCLUSION to the chapter addresses the TITLE of the Research as

the title reflects the whole study. Discuss how the objectives and research questions

of the study have been met with the research.

f. Highlight the key findings, implications, etc. that the research has revealed.

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/1. SBP��Ŀ˵��/uws-sbp-wb-en-GB (1).pdf

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 1

Strategic Business Project Workbook

Stuart Paul

Release 1.1 2014

www.uws.ac.uk

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 2

Published by the University of the West of Scotland.

© 2014 University of the West of Scotland

The right of Stuart Paul to be identified as author of this work has been asserted by him in accordance with Sections 77 and 78 of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988.

Apart from any fair dealing for the purpose of research or private study, or criticism or review, as permitted under the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988, this publication may only be reproduced, stored or transmitted, in any form or by any means, with the prior permission in writing of the publishers, or in the case of reprographic reproduction in accordance with the terms and licenses issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency.

www.uws.ac.uk

Captured, authored, published, delivered and managed in XML CAPDM Limited, Edinburgh, Scotland www.capdm.comCapdm

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 3

Strategic Business Project iii

Contents

1 An Introduction to Business Research and Your MBA Project Report 1 2 Literature Review 13 3 Quantitative Research Methods 20 4 Qualitative Research Methods 42 5 Writing Up Your MBA Project Report 55

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 4

Strategic Business Project iv

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 5

1

An Introduction to Business Research and Your MBA Project Report

Learning outcomes

After completing the study of this topic you should be able to:

• know the main approaches to business research;

• be equipped to begin planning your MBA project.

The prescribed reading for this topic is from the core text: Sekaran and Bougie (2010) Research Methods for Business, Chapters 1 and 3.

Introduction

This short topic about business research and the MBA project will set out the following key areas:

• What is business research?

• Approaches to business research

• Planning Your MBA research project.

1.1 What is business research?

The core text for the module describes business research as a ‘systematic and organized effort to investigate a specific problem in the work setting, which needs a solution’. Most business degrees at both undergraduate and postgraduate levels require students to undertake some form of research. As such it can be one of the most interesting parts of any degree course. It offers you a degree of control and autonomy over what you learn and how you do it. Of course, a supervisor will be appointed to help you as you go through the MBA project, but it is very much down to you to manage your time and effort to ensure a successful completion of your MBA. Collis & Hussey (2009) suggest that the purpose of research can be:

• Review or synthesize existing knowledge

• Investigate existing situations or problems

• Provide solutions to problems

• Explore and analyse more general issues

• Construct or create new procedures or systems

• Explain new phenomenon

• Generate new knowledge

• Or a combination of any of the above!

Therefore, you are about to embark on a journey on which you will not only learn about research and how to do it, but you will also (with a bit of luck!) contribute to knowledge and understanding in an area of your choosing.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 6

Strategic Business Project

2

1.2 Approaches to business research

Business research provides the necessary information that guides managers in mak- ing informed decisions to successfully deal with problems, determine strategies and arrive at solutions. This information (data) can either be quantitative or qualitative.

• Quantitative data are data in the form of numbers and are generally gathered through structured questions, often utilising structured questionnaires. Quant- itative research concentrates on measuring the scale, range and the frequency of phenomena. Data from quantitative research are usually highly detailed and structured and are presented statistically.

• Qualitative data are data in the form of words as generated from broad answers to questions in interviews or from responses to open-ended questions in a questionnaire. Qualitative research is more subjective in nature and usually involves investigating less tangible aspects of a research subject, for example, values and perceptions.

These are two descriptions applied to types of research with which you should become familiar. Research is often described as:

• basic or applied, and as either

• inductive or deductive.

1.2.1 Basic or applied research

The focus of basic research is to improve knowledge generally whereas applied research addresses a particular situation or problem. For example, a product may not be selling well and the organisation wishes to address this issue− this as applied research. In your MBA project, you are required to engage in applied research by addressing a specific business or management issue. Ideally, the research which you undertake for your MBA project should be applied in that it should have practical value. To this extent it can be said to be similar to a management consultancy report.

1.2.2 Inductive or deductive research

In an inductive approach to research, a researcher begins by collecting data that are relevant to his or her topic of interest. Once substantial amounts of data have been collected, the researcher will then look for patterns in the data, working to develop an explanation or theory for those patterns. In other words, this research approach moves from data to explanation (and sometimes theory), or from the specific to the general. Most qualitative based research studies are inductive.

Researchers adopting a deductive approach take the steps described earlier for inductive research and reverse their order. They start with a theory that they find compelling and then test its implications with data. That is, they move from a more general level to a more specific one. A deductive approach to research is the one that people typically associate with scientific investigation. The researcher studies what others have done, reads existing theories of whatever phenomenon he or she is studying, and then tests hypotheses that emerge from those theories. Most quantitative research studies are deductive in approach.

Reflective exercise 1.1

Every research approach has its advantages (i.e. its positive features) and dis- advantages (i.e. its points of criticism). Take a few minutes to note down key points in answer to the following two questions.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 7

An Introduction to Business Research and Your MBA Project Report

3

What are the advantages of applying an inductive/qualitative approach utilising interviews to a research project?

What are the advantages of applying a deductive/quantitative approach util- ising a structured questionnaire to a research project?

Once you have answered these two questions, consider the points below. Do your answers match these?

Inductive/qualitative approach

Advantages

• You can use a relatively small sample for your research.

• Data can be gathered which is ‘rich’ in personal comment and personal insights.

• The ‘why’ is automatically addressed in the data.

• With interviews, respondents are free to answer any way they would like− they aren’t constrained to a pre-determined set of possible responses as you might see on a survey.

Disadvantages

• The findings are subjective and it can be difficult to generalise from the research.

• Your research would be very hard to reproduce if another researcher wanted to reproduce your research and test your findings.

• A qualitative approach is often time consuming − interviewing people takes time.

• And, because time is very often linked with cost, qualitative approaches can be expensive.

Deductive/quantitative approach

Advantages

• It can be an extremely efficient approach for gathering data, especially for large groups of people.

• Quantitative methods are easier to replicate and this can make it easier for other researchers to test your findings.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 8

Strategic Business Project

4

Disadvantages

• Not a particular good approach to take if you are trying to explain why things happen.

• Assumes that researchers can be objective, but researchers may allow their own values and interests to influence the research.

• You need to use a large sample to be able to make generalisations from the results.

For your MBA project, the decision to adopt a qualitative/inductive approach or a quantitative/deductive approach will be determined by:

• The issue you wish to research; and by

• Your own skills and preferences.

1.3 Planning your MBA project research

Experience has shown that the main stages of an MBA project research can be sub- divided into 8 main stages. However, in practice these stages are likely to overlap and the transition between one stage and another is not always clear-cut. In practice, it is often necessary to move back and forth between stages to, for example, read additional material, collect additional data, or adjust a timescale. It is rare for an MBA project to proceed smoothly and in a ‘straight line’. Indeed, it is arguable that one of the distinguishing features of the successful MBA researcher is her/his ability to capitalise on opportunities, manage setbacks and still deliver a quality project on- time. Notwithstanding, timeous delivery of an MBA project will be greatly enhanced if a student carefully works out a timetable for each stage of the research. The 8 main stages of an MBA project are shown below. Think about what you want to achieve in your MBA project. Can you put in tentative dates to each of the stages?

Stage 1. Establish a general field of interest− discuss with supervisor/tutor

Stage completed by:

Stage 2. Undertake background reading on your research area and consider appro- priate research approach.

Stage completed by:

Stage 3. Refine your ideas to develop a research proposal and give it a title. Decide on the most appropriate methods for gathering data, e.g. questionnaire, interviews. Continue reading and writing for your literature review and about main research approaches.

Stage completed by:

Stage 4. Prepare information gathering ‘tools’, e.g. questionnaires, interview guide. The questions you ask in a questionnaire or at interview will be determined in large measure by key points to emerge from your literature review. Continue reading and writing for your literature review.

Stage completed by:

Stage 5. Collect data for your research project. Continue reading for your literature review. Finish draft of your methodology chapter.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 9

An Introduction to Business Research and Your MBA Project Report

5

Stage completed by:

Stage 6. Analyse your research data. Draft results chapter. Your literature review should be 90% written by this stage.

Stage completed by:

Stage 7. Draft the analysis and conclusions chapter of you project report.

Stage completed by:

Stage 8. Finish writing your project and submit.

Reflective exercise 1.2

You can make a start on Stage 1 of your MBA project now! Consider the questions below and start writing.

What research interests do you have?

What is your area of interest?

For example, is it marketing, human resources, finance, operations, etc? Write down your thoughts. At this stage, keep your ideas broad and general. Save these to file.

Reflective exercise 1.3

Following on from reflective exercise 1.2, why are you interested in this area? Set out your reasons.

Then, think about how you would research this area. Would you adopt a quant- itative/deductive approach, for example gathering data through questionnaires? Or, would you adopt a qualitative/inductive approach by conducting a series of

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 10

Strategic Business Project

6

interviews? Do you have access to those you wish to complete questionnaires or be available for interview? Set out your thinking.

The answers to the above questions will enable you to contact your supervisor and receive expert advice and guidance.

1.4 Planning your MBA project proposal

The template in this section provides an overview of the project proposal. You should to start thinking about the content of your proposal. The proposal is worth 25% of your project mark so really needs to be well developed effort. You might make a preliminary proposal which can be discussed with your module tutor before you provide a more detailed proposal for submission.

Template−MBA Project Proposal Form Your project proposal must give as much information as possible about what you intend to do and how you will go about it. It must be typed on A4 size paper and contain the following:

1. Your Contact Details

Name, Degree and Class Name, Registration ID Number, email address, phone number where you can be reached during your project work

2. Project Title

Give the title of your proposed project. Later, as you delve more deeply into your subject, you may wish to change the original title to more accurately reflect what your project is about. Your supervisor will advise you on this.

3. Purpose of the Project and your Reasons for Choosing it

State clearly and concisely the purpose and motivation for your project.

4. Project Question(s)

What is your research question(s), what do you expect your work to accom- plish, and what conclusions do you hope to draw from it? Please remember to confine your aims to what you really can accomplish in the time avail- able and with the resources at your disposal. If you are going to work with a hypothesis−what is it?

5. Personal Learning Objectives

What do you personally want to gain from carrying out the research and how you will know if you have achieved it?

6. Relevant Past Studies

What theories will you draw on to shape your research? What do ‘leading authorities’ in your subject area have to say about it? This information will help you (a) to develop and support your own views, and (b) to demonstrate to your readers that you are aware of such previous work in your field. Always include references.

7. Sources of Data

What types of information will you need to collect in order to answer your project question(s), where will you get it from and how accessible is it.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 11

An Introduction to Business Research and Your MBA Project Report

7

Can you get access to a Company or organisation(s)? There are two kinds of data: primary, which you collect yourself, perhaps by using interviews, questionnaires or observation, and secondary, which has already been published and collated for some other purpose, such as annual reports, management reports, company surveys or the Internet, and which you can re-analyse to help answer your research question. Be specific about what sources of primary and/or secondary data you will use in your project.

8. Proposed Methodology

What is your proposed research approach and research strategy? What methods will you use to collect and analyse your data? For example, if you are going to investigate a problem in a particular organisation, what ‘tools’, such as interviews, questionnaires, personal observations, examination of written records or of systems will you employ and how will you process the results? In short, how are you going to get your information and use it in order to answer your project question(s)?

9. Anticipated Problems

What difficulties might you have to overcome in conducting your project? Is it going to be difficult for you to gain access to the information, either primary or secondary, that you will need? If so, what can you do about it? Can you foresee any other snags that might hinder your work and how do you propose to deal with them? Pre-planning will improve the chances of project success.

10. Outline of Chapters

Give a very brief summary of the contents of each of your proposed chapters. This provides you and your supervisor with an outline plan to work to. You may have to make some changes as you obtain more inform- ation, but it is essential to create such a framework at the outset.

11. Expected Schedule

How long do you expect to take to complete your project? State as precisely as you can:

• the overall time scale, including key milestones;

• the target date for completion of your first two chapters;

• other deadlines which you intend to set yourself;

• when you expect your final draft to be ready, and the target date for completion of your project.

Final point − Your proposal should be 2,500−3,000 words. Once your pro- posal has been submitted it will be marked and sent to academic staff in the business school staff so that supervision can be arranged.

A copy of this proposal should be sent to Jean Shields in the business school office.

12. Supervision

The supervisor’s role is to guide you through your project and to monitor your progress.

Supervisor’s Name: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 12

Strategic Business Project

8

Supervisor’s Signature: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Date: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Having read through the proposal template, now move on to look at reflective exercise 1.4 and critique research proposal.

Reflective exercise 1.4

Read the ‘CAP AIRLINES’ research proposal then attempt the questions at the end of the proposal.

Daniel Lourenço is a Portuguese International Business student. Born in Reguen- gos de Monsaraz, he is an active sportsman, excelling in football and swimming. As a young man Daniel has developed a keen interest in aviation. He has just started writing his master thesis and he has handed in his research proposal to his company advisor, Leonor Soares Henriques Pais. Leonor is a senior oper- ations manager for CAP airlines, a Portuguese aviation company. Leonor has been working for CAP airlines since 2008 and he is responsible for ensuring that business operations are efficient in terms of using as little resources as needed, and effective in terms of meeting customer requirements. Leonor’s job is quite hectic and ever since he has started, Leonor has been working long hours. Daniel and Leonor have agreed to meet in a few days to discuss Daniel’s research proposal.

RESEARCH PROPOSAL

1.1 Introduction

The story below is one of the many typical complaints posted on an airline complaint website (http://www.airlinecomplaints.org) describing passengers’ experiences with CAP Portugal. CAP is the airline of PLC Travel Group, a leading international travel corporation based in Lisbon.

CAP−Nightmare

On 23 September 2010 I was flying from Milan to Lisbon and then to Faro with CAP Portugal having the worst experience ever in my life. First of all, the delay from Milan to Lisbon made me to miss flight to Faro. They put me in the next flight 7 hours later which was also delayed for 3 hours and made me to have a total time of 16 hours spend from Milan to Faro which is more than unacceptable. I have had delays with other airlines as well in the past but CAP is something different. They didn’t grant me the entrance to their Lounge in order to find some quietness and make some phone calls to reschedule all my appointments which I lost due to their delays. I had to wait for 45 minutes at the transfer desk which was manned only with 4 people; the slowest people I ever seen in my life, helping to form a queue at Lisbon airport of more than 200 meters with people who lost their planes. CAP People were rude, barely English speaking, not helpful at all and when we at last got on a plane they served us a lousy sandwich. From Lisbon to Faro they didn’t had the smallest dignity to give us a glass of water, although they knew that we were waiting the whole evening at terminal 2 at Lisbon where we could not even get a sandwich to eat. At my return on 27 September from Faro to Lisbon the CAP Pilot made the worst landing I have ever had in my life

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 13

An Introduction to Business Research and Your MBA Project Report

9

with the most people in the plane praying. CAP means for me “Choose Another Plane!”

PLC Travel Group was formed eight years ago by the merger of First Interna- tional Holidays with the tourism division of NTI Portugal. PLC Travel Group car- ries the brands ‘Arches’, ‘Portugal International’ and ‘CAP’, and it is the largest tour operator in Portugal. PLC Portugal has its own airline company (CAP) and owns a franchise chain of CAP travel agencies. CAP carries out charter and regu- lar flights to medium haul destinations such as the Mediterranean, North Africa and the Red Sea and to long haul destinations such as the Caribbean. Today CAP’s fleet consists of three (new) Boeings 737-800 and four (outdated) Boeings 767-300. Because the Boeings 767 are rather outdated they need more main- tenance than the average airplane. Despite an intense maintenance program, these planes have a lot of technical problems. Consequently, the long haul fleet of CAP has dealt with a lot of delays recently. New long haul planes have been ordered, but these planes will not be delivered before 2016. This means that more delays will inevitably occur. For this reason CAP needs to obtain more knowledge on the wait experience of passengers during delays and the effects of this experience on customer satisfaction and the evaluation of the service CAP provides.

This research proposal will address the problem and problem statement in section 1.2. Section 1.3 details the research questions that will help to answer the problem statement. Next, section 1.4 discusses the relevance of the project. Section 1.5 provides a brief description of the research design, whereas section 1.6 includes information on the time frame of this study. Finally, this research proposal will provide a selected bibliography.

1.2 Problem Indication and Problem Statement

Prior research has claimed that service waits can be controlled by two tech- niques: operations management and/or management of perceptions. For CAP it is very difficult to obtain ‘zero defects’ (no delays). Hence, this project will focus on managing the perceptions of the wait experience: because CAP cannot control the actual amount of delays and wait duration (recall that they work with a number of outdated planes), the company must focus on controlling the customer’s perception of the waiting experience. To do this successfully it is important to know the variables that influence the perception of this wait- ing experience and the possible impact of waiting on customer satisfaction and service evaluations. More specifically, this project focuses on the following problem statement:

How do delays affect consumers’ service evaluations?

Drawing from prior research in the areas of waiting, service evaluations, attri- bution theory, and mood theory, hypotheses are generated regarding the rela- tionships among a delay, affect, and service evaluations. The hypothesized relationships are tested in a field setting involving delayed CAP airline passen- gers.

1.3 Research Questions

To deal with the preceding problem statement, the following research questions are answered:

1. How does a delay affect service evaluations?

2. What are the affective consequences of delays and how does affect mediate the relationship between waiting and service evaluations?

3. How do situational variables (such as filled time) influence customer reac- tions to the delay?

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 14

Strategic Business Project

10

1.4 Relevance

Regarding the practical usefulness of the research project; this project gives CAP an indication of their level of performance during delays and shows what the effects of this performance are. The results of this project allow CAP to improve its service, to keep people even during delays ’smiling’.

1.5 Research Design

The hypotheses of this study will be tested with a standardized questionnaire. Data will be collected from passengers on delayed medium and long haul flights over a period of two months by the cabin crew. Delays on outbound and inbound flights will be used to gather data from passengers. Flights are only sampled if the post-schedule wait is more than one hour. The passengers are asked to fill out and hand in the questionnaire at the end of the flight (approximately one hour before the airplane will land). Post-flight services, such as luggage pick-up, are ignored for practical reasons. Asking the passengers to fill out a questionnaire after they leave the plane will cause a further delay.

1.6 Time Frame

The time frame necessary for this project is approximately six months. During these six months, periodic reports will be provided on the progress being made.

1.7 Selected Bibliography

Folkes, V. S., Koletsky, S., and Graham, J. L. (1987). A Field Study of Causal Infer- ences and Consumer Reaction: The View from the Airport. Journal of Consumer Research, 13, 534−539.

Oliver, R. L. (1996). Satisfaction: A Behavioral Perspective on the Consumer. New York: McGraw-Hill.

Richins, M. L. (1987). A Multivariate Analysis of Responses to Dissatisfaction. Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, 15, 24-31.

Smith, A. K. and Bolton, R. N. (2002). The Effect of Customers’ Emotional Responses to Service Failures on Their Recovery Effort Evaluations and Sat- isfaction Judgments. Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, 30, 5-23.

Taylor, S. (1994). Waiting for Service: The Relationship Between Delays and Evaluations of Service. Journal of Marketing, 58, 56-69.

Westbrook, R. A. (1987). Product/Consumption-Based Affective Responses and Postpurchase Processes. Journal of Marketing Research, 24, 258-270.

Provide an evaluation of Daniel’s problem statement and research questions. Use the following criteria:

a. The background of the problem is clear.

b. The goal of the research project is clear.

c. The problem statement is formulated in a neutral and unambiguous way.

d. The problem statement is precise and specific.

e. The problem statement is relevant.

f. The problem statement is feasible.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 15

An Introduction to Business Research and Your MBA Project Report

11

g. The specific research questions follow logically from the problem state- ment.

h. The specific research questions are precisely written and lead to observable outcomes.

Improve the section “Relevance”.

Do you think that the section “Research Design” provides enough information? Why (not)?

Does the section “Time Frame” provide enough information? Improve this section if necessary.

Explain how a literature review helps Daniel to solve CAP’s problem.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 16

Strategic Business Project

12

Topic summary

There are two key points to always keep in mind to ensure success in delivering a good MBA project on time.

1. Think carefully about your research approach. Will it be deductive and quantit- ative? Or, will it be inductive and qualitative? This is key project and will determ- ine, in large measure, whether you will successfully address your research objectives.

2. Delivering your MBA project on time requires careful planning and execution. Develop a plan and stick to it.

If you feel ready to attempt the End of Unit Progress Test for Topic 1, follow this link.

References

© Collis, J. and Hussey, R. (2009) Business Research: A practical guide for undergraduate and postgraduate students, (3rd edn.). New York: Palgrave Macmillan.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 17

13

Literature Review

Learning outcomes

After completing the study of this topic you should be able to:

• understand the concept of a literature review;

• know how to select sources and search them for information;

• know the structure and features of a good MBA literature review.

The prescribed reading for this topic is from the core text: Sekaran and Bougie (2010) Research Methods for Business, Chapter 4.

2.1 What is a literature review?

A literature review is a selective analysis of existing research which is relevant to your topic, showing how it relates to your project. Therefore, it is both the selection and the evaluation of published or unpublished documents available about your proposed topic. Such a review will help to develop a conceptual or theoretical background for your research. It shows that you are familiar with earlier research on the topic and that there is continuity between this earlier research and the research which you propose. Thus, a good MBA literature review should synthesise available information, ideas, data and evidence on the topic selected for the MBA project.

An MBA project should enable you to look at a management or business issue from a specific angle, to shape your thinking, and to spark useful insights on the topic of your research. A good literature review should tell the reader about the key factors, frameworks and theory about the management or business issue that you have chosen to research.

2.2 Why is a literature review required?

Your literature review is required in order to:

• Find out what other scholars have written about the topic you intend to research.

• To learn about the methods and approaches that other scholars have used in researching the topic you intend to research. What methods have they used? Should you be using the same or different methods?

• To learn about the theory that underpins the area you intend to research.

• To demonstrate to your audience that your contribution is new−different from everyone else’s.

Finally, always remember that nobody will take your research seriously unless you can demonstrate through the literature review that you know what other researchers have found about the area you have chosen for your MBA project.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 18

Strategic Business Project

14

2.3 Sources

The first stage in a literature review involves the identification of published (and sometimes in an MBA project unpublished) sources of material about the topic you will be researching in your MBA project. The quality of a literature review depends on the selection of sources. These may include books, academic journals, reports, theses, conference proceedings, and the like. For an MBA project the most useful sources are books and journal articles. Books published by reputable publishers will have been edited and reviewed while articles in academic journals are peer reviewed. The literature review in a good MBA project tends to rely heavily on journal articles.

An enormous amount of data can also be found on the World Wide Web. Please note that the Internet is unregulated and unmonitored. Therefore, reports and other information which can be sourced through the Web should be used with caution. Think about who has placed the data on the Internet. For an MBA project the internet can be source of up-to-date and relevant information but be careful about its reliability.

Reflective exercise 2.1

Books versus journal articles versus the Web. Think about which tend to be the best for:

Currency?

Authority?

2.4 Searching the literature

Over the past 20 years, information and communication technologies have trans- formed the way in scholars conduct a literature search. Almost every library has online computer systems which facilitate the location of published data. This data can usually be accessed remotely, for example, from your home and office. The UWS library is at the forefront of many of these developments and provides a wonderful resource when conducting an MBA project. You will gain greatly by investing time to become familiar with the services the UWS library provides. In particular you should become familiar how to access journals electronically. UWS subscribes to many of these online and they provide an invaluable resource to the MBA researcher.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 19

Literature Review

15

Many of you will already be familiar with literature search techniques. Notwith- standing, here is an exercise that will help you recap some key points about search- ing academic literature. You should keep these in mind in order to make the most effective use of your time.

Reflective exercise 2.2

First, conduct a keyword search on the business or management topic that you have chosen for your MBA project. Place a key word(s) about your research topic into one of the main search engines such as Google.

Second, scan though the results and focus on those with academic domain names such as . . . ac.uk or . . . edu.au. Academic sites are more likely to provide reliable data. Download the information and see where it leads you.

Third, in parallel with the above approach, conduct a key word search on one of the selected academic search engines such as Science Direct. The objective here to find a recent academic journal article(s) covering the topic that you have chosen for your own research. Such an article(s) will have an up-to-date set of references covering your area of research; you can then set about reading the articles that have been referenced.

TipRemember to learn word search techniques. There are there are three in partic- ular which you should become adept at using.

1. Learn to use AND & OR. If you want to enter more than one term into a search engine you should link the terms with either the connecting word and or the connecting word or. Linking two terms with and will narrow your search to find only results that contain both terms.

For example, a search using entrepreneurs and growth will find only the results that contain both the term entrepreneurs and the term growth. It won’t find any results that just refer to entrepreneurs on their own or just refer to growth without any mention of entrepreneurs.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 20

Strategic Business Project

16

For example, a search using entrepreneurs or growth will find results that just mention entrepreneurs, results that just mention growth AND results that men- tion both entrepreneurs and growth. 2. This is a method of broadening a search by retrieving all words with

2. Learn to use TRUNCATION. This is a method of broadening a search by retriev- ing all words with the same stem but with variant endings. To search, use the stem of the word followed (without a gap) by the truncation symbol. The truncation symbol may vary between databases but commonly * or ? are used.

For example: Recruit* would retrieve: recruit, recruitment, recruiting, recruits, etc.

3. Learn to use Wildcards.

Wildcards are another method of broadening a search where a word has more than one possible spelling or you are unsure of the spelling. One or more characters within the word are replaced with a wildcard symbol (again the symbol differs depending on the database used).

For example: Organi*ation would retrieve: organisation, organization

A question which is often asked by MBA students is: ‘how many references should be included in a project?’ These can be no definitive answer to this−what we expect is that a good MBA project will have comprehensive set of references. However, as a rule of thumb a good project will reference in excess of 30−40 journal articles, books and web citations. In addition another 5−10 references on research methods would be contained in the methodology section. These references should be as up-to-date as possible with most being from sources published in the previous 10 or so years.

2.5 Writing your literature review

A good MBA literature review is logically structured and clear. Let’s take the example of a student whose topic is on the subject of organisational culture. A possible structure for an MBA literature review on this topic could be as follows:

• Introduction− this section sets out briefly the structure of the literature review.

• What is organisational culture?− in this section the concept of organisational culture could be discussed along with how scholars define it.

• Why is organisational culture important? − in this section of the literat- ure review research about the significance of organisational culture could be reviewed.

• Frameworks of organisational culture− the key typologies from the literature could be set out and reviewed.

• How is organisational culture assessed? − the main ways in which organisa- tional culture is measured/assessed could be set out and reviewed.

• How can organisational culture be shaped and changed?− the literature about this area could be summarised.

• Summary and conclusion− the key points to emerge from the literature review.

Having read through the proposal template, now move on to look at reflective exercise 1.4 and critique research proposal.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 21

Literature Review

17

Reflective exercise 2.3

Think about the area you wish to research. Using the above example, sketch out a possible structure for your literature review.

2.6 Managing the literature

You will need to devise a system to build a comprehensive literature review. Pro- fessional researchers usually use bibliographic file management software such as Endnote. Many MBA students use Excel or other software packages to keep man- age their references; others use a simple card index system. Whatever system you choose is up to you − but you are strongly advised to be organized and diligent when it comes to keeping references.

TipOne useful tip in conducting an MBA literature review is to aim to find a small number of recent journal articles in your research area. Look at how these scholars have written their literature review. What do these literature reviews have in com- mon in terms of writing style? Also, look at the references in these journal articles. These are the articles that you should be reading for your own MBA literature review.

2.7 Referencing

Referencing is acknowledging your source in sufficient detail so that anyone wishing to find the work you are citing can do so for themselves. In an academic body of work, it is important to show the source of materials you have used or else you may lose marks for poor referencing; and, if you do not reference properly your work may be regarded as plagiarism. Hence if you use Lewin’s Change model without referencing Lewin, it will be assumed that you are claiming the change model as your own− even if your name is not Lewin.

In an MBA project, the sources are acknowledged briefly in the body of your text and then at the end of your MBA project full details of each reference are presented in a reference list. This is the standard academic way of writing and presenting refer- ences. Look at any academic journal article and you will see that this pattern is fol- lowed. However, you will see that the precise way of referencing varies from journal to journal and from book to book. MBA students must adhere to what is known as the Harvard Referencing System. There are various ways in which this referencing sys- tem is interpreted. The version that you must use is set out on the UWS library web- site at: http://www.uws.ac.uk/about-uws/services-for-students/library/guides- and-online-help

The importance of following the UWS rules on referencing cannot be over-stated. See the appendix in chapter 4 of the core text for referencing and citing sources.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 22

Strategic Business Project

18

Reflective exercise 2.4

Read through the Anchoring effects in stock return estimates, then answer the questions.

Anchoring effects in stock return estimates Charles Bradley is a finance student who loves to play the stock market in his spare time. He likes the thrill of rapid price movements and he knows that if he can catch the right price to buy and sell he will make lot of money. Charles has a strong interest in irrational financial decision making and the systematic errors that market participants make. These errors do not only affect stock prices and returns, they also create market inefficiencies. Charles is convinced that at some time or another he will be able to take advantage of these inefficiencies.

Charles is currently engaged in a research project on anchoring. Anchoring is a term used in psychology to describe the common human tendency to rely too heavily, or anchor, on specific information when making decisions, even though this information may have no logical relevance to the decision at hand. People often anchor, or overly rely, on a specific value − for instance a recent stock price− and then adjust to that value; once the anchor is set there is a bias toward that anchor. Along these lines, investors frequently invest in the stocks of companies that have fallen considerably in a very short amount of time. In this case, investors are anchoring on a recent ‘high’ that the stock has achieved and consequently believe that the drop in price provides an opportunity to buy the stock at a discount.

Charles sometimes feels that anchoring is like driving a car only by looking in the rear view mirror; it will only show you what is behind you. He believes that if one drives one’s car based only on what one sees in the rear view mirror, one will end up with an accident. “In the late 1990s, for example, the stock market was going up and investors simply jumped on the bandwagon and kept buying more and more shares,” Charles explains to his roommate and best friend David. “Even though this resulted in a stock market bubble, investors’ general tendency was to just leave things be without making the effort to take any proper decisions with respect to asset allocation and risk − decisions that could have helped them to fare better in the future, when the markets turned. If investors anchor themselves to the idea that the market will keep going up, they will inevitably find themselves in a risk category that isn’t the right fit for them, and they’ll be putting themselves at a great risk when that market turns”, Charles continued. “Conversely, in a period of prolonged market downturn, people tend to anchor themselves to the idea that stock prices are just going to keep going down. This leads to an absolute disregard for investing in the equity market, and results in a situation where individuals end up in a risk category that does not fit them either.” Charles believes that what we are currently seeing is negative anchoring, where people are framing their investments in the context of the most recent financial crisis and all the negative news that they are constantly getting about the economy, unemployment, bankruptcies and the like. Charles’ research project focuses on whether and how market participants’ long-term stock return expectations are influenced by anchoring effects and to what extent expertise reduces these effects. After having developed a research proposal and a problem statement Charles is now ready to engage in a critical review of the literature.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 23

Literature Review

19

Explain the various functions of the critical literature review that Charles is about to take on.

“The first step of a literature review includes the identification of the various unpublished and published materials that are available on the topic of interest, and gaining access to these.”

Discuss at least three different data sources that Charles could use and explain how Charles will benefit from using these specific data sources.

Topic summary

In this topic we discussed the critical literature review. We started this topic by describing various functions of the literature review. Subsequently, we discussed various aspects of carrying out the literature review: data sources, searching for literature, evaluating the literature, and documenting the literature review. This topic also considered how to structure and write a literature review. Finally, we discussed two pitfalls you have to be aware of when you summarize, add to, or challenge the work of others: misrepresenting the work of others and plagiarism. Referencing theory and concepts is something you have been doing throughout your MBA and it is assumed by the time you are doing your MBA project you will be well capable of acknowledging the work of others. The appendix to chapter 4 of the core text offers information on (1) online databases, (2) bibliographical indexes, (3) the APA format for references, and (4) notes on referencing previous studies and quoting original sources in the literature review section.

If you feel ready to attempt the End of Unit Progress Test for Topic 2, follow this link.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 24

20

Quantitative Research Methods

Learning outcomes

After completing the study of this topic you should be able to:

• understand the quantitative approach to business and management research;

• identify a range of quantitative research methods applicable to different management and business research topics;

• understand and apply key methods of quantitative data analysis;

• be able to design questionnaires to tap different variables;

• be able to evaluate questionnaires, distinguishing the “good” and “bad” questions therein.

The prescribed reading for this topic is from the core text: Sekaran and Bougie (2010) Research Methods for Business, Chapters 2, 9, 14 and 15.

Introduction

Quantitative methods are used and accepted in business and management research. Throughout your MBA you will have been involved in quantitative analysis. Any time you have analysed the figures in a case study or exercise you will have been quantifying data. In the work place if you are looking at sales trends or trying to discern relationships between resources used (inputs) against outcomes achieved you will be carrying out quantitative analysis.

In quantitative research we are interested in what has happened, or how often something has occurred or how much has been produced. Quantitative research is particularly appropriate when we want to apply a measure − in other words to quantify.

Using a quantitative approach to our data means that we assume that a numerical analysis of our data can yield valuable insights into the way that people make decisions as these will impact the data. When we do quantitative analysis we are involved in counting and measuring data in different ways, in estimating means and in finding similarities and difference between groups. The point of this is not just to produce impressive tables of statistics, but to give the reader an idea of what our data looks like and what makes it interesting and meaningful. Note we are not attempting to turn you into a statistician or a mathematician. The only objective

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 25

Quantitative Research Methods

21

here is give you the confidence to engage with numbers in your strategic business project.

Quantitative researchers tend to be concerned about four areas:

1. Measurement − the need to have measures for concepts and the ability to map concept properties. There is a focus on rules and procedures need to be followed to ensure the research can be replicated. The measures need to be able to reliable and valid for what is being measured. For example how would you measure concepts like motivation or business ethics?

2. Causality − the researchers want to explain why things are the way they are. They seek to identify relationship between dependent and independent vari- ables. They also want to have confidence in their findings that the causal infer- ences hold true.

3. Generalization − the researchers want to know if the findings can be gener- alised beyond the confines of the particular context. The research will have been based on a sample can the findings be generalised from sample to popu- lation? To a certain extent the ability to generalise findings will depend on how representative the samples are.

4. Replication − is another concern of researchers and as such they wish to minimise contamination from researcher biases or values. The will be explicit in their description of procedures and control of conditions of study. The concern is the ability to replicate in differing contexts.

Quantitative research has also been criticised for a number of reasons:

One criticism is that quantitative researchers fail to distinguish people and social institutions from real world. Another view is that the measurement processes adop- ted possesses an artificial and spurious sense of precision and accuracy. Other criticisms indicate the view that an over reliance on instruments and procedures hinders the connection between research and everyday life. A final criticism is that the analysis of relationships between variables creates a static view of social life that is independent of people’s lives. An awareness of these views provides you with a balanced understanding of the differences between the qualitative and quantitative researchers stand points.

There is no particular best approach and at times perhaps students have preferred to follow a qualitative approach because it may seem easier to carry out interviews or focus groups due to a fear of numbers and statistics associated with quantitative techniques. As has been stated in earlier sessions it is possible to have a mixed methods approach to your research. For example you can use questionnaires and interviews, or you may find that your questionnaires also have questions that enable respondents to provide written responses as well as numerate one. Qualitative and quantitative research approaches can complement each other. For further enlight- enment consider reading up on triangulation.

3.1 The process of quantitative research

The approach to quantitative research can follow a process similar to Figure 3.1. Note there is no guarantee you will follow every step but at least you are aware of the possible steps.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 26

Strategic Business Project

22

Figure 3.1 The typical steps in the quantitative research process

Chapter 2 in the core text provides an example of the steps followed.

1. Identify a broad problem area − for example a drop in sales, frequent pro- duction interruptions, incorrect accounting results, low-yielding investments, disinterestedness of employees in their work, customer switching.

2. Define the problem statement − to find solutions for identified problems, a problem statement that includes the general objective and research questions of the research should be developed. Gathering initial information about the factors that are possibly related to the problem will help us to narrow the broad problem area and to define the problem statement.

3. Develop hypotheses − In this step, variables are examined to ascertain their contribution or influence in explaining why the problem occurs and how it can be solved. The network of associations identified among the variables is then theoretically woven, together with justification as to why they might influence the problem. From a theorised network of associations among the variables, certain hypotheses or educated conjectures can be generated. The hypothesis must be testable (see Chapter 2). A hypothesis must also be falsifiable. That is, it must be possible to disprove the hypothesis.

4. Determine measures − unless the variables in the theoretical framework are measured in some way, we will not be able to test our hypotheses. For example to test the hypothesis that unresponsive employees affect customer switch- ing, we need to operationalize unresponsiveness and customer switching. See measurement of variables in Chapter 11 and Chapter 12.

5. Data collection− after we have determined how to measure our variables, data with respect to each variable in the hypothesis need to be obtained. These data then form the basis for data analysis. Data collection is extensively discussed in Chapter 7 to Chapter 12.

6. Data analysis − in the data analysis step, the data gathered are statistically analysed to see if the hypotheses that were generated have been supported. For instance, to see if unresponsiveness of employees affects customer switching, we might want to do a correlational analysis to determine the relationship between these variables. Hypotheses are tested through appropriate statistical analysis, as discussed in Chapter 15.

7. Interpretation of data− now we must decide whether our hypotheses are sup- ported or not by interpreting the meaning of the results of the data analysis. For instance, if it was found from the data analysis that increased responsiveness of employees was negatively related to customer switching (say, 0.3), then we can deduce that if customer retention is to be increased, our employees have to be trained to be more responsive. Another inference from this data analysis is that

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 27

Quantitative Research Methods

23

responsiveness of our employees accounts for (or explains) 9% of the variance in customer switching (0.32). Based on these deductions, we are able to make recommendations on how the “customer switching” problem may be solved (at least to some extent); we have to train our employees to be more flexible and communicative.

Note that even if the hypothesis on the effect of unresponsiveness on customer switching is not supported, our research effort has still been worthwhile. Hypo- theses that are not supported allow us to refine our theory by thinking about why it is that they were not supported. We can then test our refined theory in future research. In summary, there are seven steps involved in identifying and resolving a problematic issue, (see Application of the hypothetico-deductive method in organizations− The CIO Dilemma).

Reflective exercise 3.1

Consider what you have read in the study guide and Chapter 2 in the core text, then go on to comment on the following situation.

Hint: Essentially you need to consider how the management problem could have been researched.

The dilemmas of Dorothy Dunning

Dorothy Dunning, Chief Production Manager, was on top of the world just two years ago. In her non-traditional job, she was cited to be the real backbone of the company, and her performance was in no small measure responsible for the mergers the institution was contemplating with other well-known global corporations. Of late, though, the products of the company had had to be recalled several times owing to safety concerns. Quality glitches and production delays also plagued the company. To project a good image to consumers, Dunning developed a very reassuring website and made sweeping changes in the manufacturing processes to enhance the quality of the product, minimise defects, and enhance the efficiency of the workers. A year after all these changes, the company continues to recall defective products!

3.2 Data collection techniques

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 28

Strategic Business Project

24

3.2.1 Questionnaire design

A questionnaire is a pre-formulated written set of questions to which respondents record their answers, usually within rather closely defined alternatives. They are an efficient data collection mechanism when a study is descriptive or explanatory in nature. Questionnaires are generally less expensive and time consuming than interviews and observation, but they also introduce a much larger chance of non- response and non-response error.

Questionnaires provide a critical communication link between the researcher and the respondent, see Chapter 3 of the core text. To be effective the questionnaire must:

1. communicate to the respondent what the researcher is asking for.

2. communicate to the researcher what the respondent has to say.

Questionnaires can be administered in a number of ways. The advantages and disadvantages of personally administered questionnaires, mail questionnaires, and electronic questionnaires are presented in Table 9.1 in the core text. Questionnaires can also be administered over the phone. With all approaches the main issue is response. How many questionnaires will be returned and even then a bigger issue how many have been completed! This leads to a key aspect re questionnaires − getting the design right. Figure 9.1 in the core text provides an excellent overview of the design process and the questions that need asked.

A starting point would be to ask three questions:

1. Who are you targeting with your questionnaire? Consider business executives, they are busy people and may get a number of requests for information−what does this mean for your questionnaire?

2. What is the best way to contact them?

3. Who will complete the questionnaire − you or the respondent (target)? This has implications on your time and questionnaire accuracy and return.

The questions you will use will require some thought. To a certain extent questions can be standardised. There are initial considerations how complex is the inform- ation you are seeking. This may require you to think carefully the sequence of questions, what we might call a ‘funnel’ approach, see Figure 3.2. Respondents may not be comfortable providing sensitive information so you need to think through the question sequence to lead them there.

Figure 3.2 Question sequence

The number of questions is important, do you need to ask all the questions a common fault in questionnaires is the number, too many questions leads to many pages and a respondent who may not wish to complete.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 29

Quantitative Research Methods

25

You need to consider if the respondent will understand the questions. So there is a need to consider the terminology used, also the jargon, for example asking a manager a question about the BCG (Boston Consulting Group matrix) assumes they know what you are talking about!

The question content is important, but there is also a need to consider if the ques- tions are necessary, the dilemma is the number of questions to ask and if the questions are sufficient.

We can also make assumption about data availability. If you think about it will the respondents be well informed and willing to take part in the questionnaire, and will they be able to recall or remember the experiences you are seeking, for example people often get confused about adverts they have seen. Some questions might be embarrassing and some respondents may provide you with what they think you want to hear. Equally if the question is one that may reflect badly on them they inflate answers (bluffing), for example if you ask about a respondent’s salary they may give a higher salary.

The questions can be designed in a way to ask for spontaneous answers, for example what adverts have you seen recently? Or the questions could use prompts, for example what soft drinks adverts have you seen recently? This might be seen as minor prompting, showing the respondent the advert and asking them if they have seen it is prompting.

Question phrasing is important, you should make the question easy to understand and easy to answer. This requires clear and simple words. There is a need to avoid biased words or vague/ambiguous words. You should be avoiding leading questions and double barrelled questions.

In terms of respondent response you have options in terms of open ended and close ended. You can also have multiple-choice. For example:

• open ended

“What do you think of the choice of food available in the University canteen?”

• closed ended

Are you a student at UWS? Yes No

• multiple-choice

Which daily newspaper do you read?

A. The Herald

B. The Daily Record

C. The Scotsman

D. The Sun

E. Other please state . . . .

In terms of design and multiple-choice you have to think about options such as:

• number of questions to include

• position bias (favour the first on the list)

• balance (positives and negatives)

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 30

Strategic Business Project

26

• ranking questions

• attitude scales

As we stated earlier in the topic there is a need to think about the question sequence (remember Figure 3.2). The questions at the start should engage interest then move from general to specific and end with personal questions (if required). One approach to thinking about question sequence is the acronym ORDER, see below.

Opening questions: simple;

Rudimentary or basic information obtained first;

Difficult questions toward the end;

Examine influence on subsequent questions;

Review the sequence to ensure a logical order.

Questionnaire layout is also important, you need to consider the paper quality, the length of the questionnaire, spacing, font/colour/borders, routing and use a variety of questioning techniques. The object is to get who you send the questionnaire to complete it.

A final task is the process of pre-test, revision and final version. Questionnaires need piloted, ideally 10−15 people (or 10% of your sample size), you are checking for clarity, logical flow, routing and length.

Reflective exercise 3.2

The following questions are taken from a questionnaire issued to new car owners by a local car showroom.

Considering each of the questions in turn state whether you think the ques- tions could be improved. If so suggest an alternative. Once you have worked through your answer have a look at the suggested answer.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 31

Quantitative Research Methods

27

Reflective exercise 3.3

The next questionnaire is looking at Outsourcing IT: Strategy, Benefits and Lessons Learnt in today’s Global Energy Organisations. Consider what you see as the good points and bad points.

Questionnaire: Outsourcing my organisation is:

A. Major international EP company (operates in more than 10 countries glob- ally)

B. Mid size international EP company (operates in 10 or less countries glob- ally)

C. Regional EP company (operates within the region of <5 countries)

D. National oil company

E. Service company (including contractor)

Comments:

which part, if any, of your IT function is/planned to be outsourced (select 1 or more)?

A. Infrastructure (Telecoms, Computing, Helpdesk etc)

B. Applicatons (Software development, Apps support etc)

C. Information Management (Data, Document, Knowledge mgt)

D. Programme and Project Management

E. All

Comments:

what strategy did/will you employ in achieving your IT outsouring objectives?

A. Multiple suppliers

B. Strategic partnerships with key suppliers

C. Spin-off IT company from existing organisation

D. Single supplier

E. Others . . . please specify

Comments:

what are your main concerns/issues on IT outsourcing (please rank 1 to 5)?

A. Service quality

B. Information security

C. Supplier management

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 32

Strategic Business Project

28

D. Innovation

E. Others . . . please specify

Comments:

what are/were the primary business drivers for outsourcing IT (please rank 1 to 5)?

A. Cost reductions

B. Improve IT service levels

C. Streamline organisation structure

D. Globalisation

E. Others . . . please specify

Comments:

what do you now see as the cost vs benefits of IT outsourcing in your organisa- tion?

A. Benefits far outweigh the costs

B. Not much difference so far

C. Visible impact on bottomline

D. A mistake

E. Others . . . please specify

Comments:

how do you see IT outsourcing developing in the next 3 to 5 years?

A. More IT services will be ’commoditised’ and outsourced by more organ- isations

B. IT is seen as an EP core competency and insourced rather than outsourced

C. More competitive suppliers driving standardisation and lower costs

D. Reduced IT outsourcing due to other factors e.g. Govt regulatory compli- ance

E. Others . . . please specify

Comments:

what model of IT outsourcing is likely to emerge over the next 5 to 10 years (rank 1 to 5)

A. outsourcing maturing into hosting service i.e. pay per use

B. shared services to multiple companies including competitors (cost shar- ing)

C. shared services provided by national oil company or its suppliers

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 33

Quantitative Research Methods

29

D. Others . . . please specify

E. Others . . . please specify

Comments:

What would do to improve it? Once you have worked through your answers you can look at the suggested answer.

3.2.2 Observation

An alternative approach to gathering data is observation. This is a different form to what has been described as observation in the core text. For example if you wished to investigate interactions in a class room then you might count the number of times this happened. If it was a mixed class you might want to look at the interactions between a tutor and the female and male students, and you might also wish to look at interactions between students (male to male, male to female, female to female). So counting and noting instances can allow you to generate and then analyse data quantitatively. Equally you could be observing people working, or customers in a queue, reviewing production quality, customer service, etc. At the end of the day if we can measure the activity we can use quantitative techniques to analyse the data.

3.3 Quantitative data analysis 1

You may already have gathered some data in the course of the exercises you have carried out in this module. This may have come from a pilot survey/interview, from observations or as a result of examining secondary data in annual reports. You may have an initial impression from your data. For example, you may believe that a firm’s financial performance has improved beyond that of its competitors. Your impressions of the firm, and those expressed in the media, may not be related to the actual figures− but you cannot tell unless you analyse it first.

Unless your data is clearly structured and analysed you will not be able to understand it and analyse it and you certainly will not be able to convince others. This is why being able to organise and describe your data adds value to your project. If you organise your data well you will also give the reader more confidence in your project as a whole. Unless you are downloading secondary collections of data, you will probably find that the data you gather is not in a structure that will enable you to analyse it. For example, you may have survey responses. You may also have data from different sources. You will need to collect the data together and put it into form that you can understand and process.

Is there any best way to organise data? To some extent it depends on the type of data that you have. If you have data that extends over a period of time (time series data) you will often begin with a vertical column of dates or years. The main point is that the organisation can be easily understood and analysed. For example, if you wanted to find out the impact of recent tax changes on the business community, you may have used questionnaires to gather data. The answers to your questions will provide you with initial data about your sample, such as age, marital status and employment

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 34

Strategic Business Project

30

status. Hopefully you have designed your questionnaire so that the different options are easy to organise. If you assign a number to each questionnaire they will be easier to identify later. Some of the questions will have numerical answers such as age, but to others you will have to assign codes for the various responses. If you can put these into your questionnaire design initially it will save you time later.

3.3.1 Presenting quantitative data

There are a number of standard techniques for presenting quantitative data in projects. These include tables, graphs, bar and pie charts, and histograms.

When to use Tables

Tables which summarise raw data can be useful aids for analysis and interpretation. They are also useful for presenting your findings in your project. Tables are also useful for displaying category and variable data. If you choose to use tables to display your data you need to ensure that it is clearly labelled with all the information your readers need in order to interpret it for themselves. Some of the information is given in the caption for the table and some is in the table itself. Writing an appropriate caption for a table is very important, as captions should contain information which helps the reader interpret the table. Clearly labelled tables with captions speak for themselves, they save you having to describe your data in words.

It is also important when using a table is that it should not contain too much information. Tables that are less complex can have much more impact, even if they contain information that can be extrapolated from their larger parent tables.

When to use Bar Charts, Pie Charts and Histograms

Bar charts, pie charts and histograms are sometimes more effective ways of rep- resenting data than tables. Bar and pie charts should be used to represent discrete category data. Histograms are normally used for continuous data. Bar charts repres- ent categories as columns and are commonly used to draw attention to differences between two or more categories.

Like bar charts, pie charts are useful for presenting discrete data. Each slice of the pie represents a particular category. The number of slices depends on the number of categories in the raw data (make sure you don’t have too many or too few). Pie charts are extremely useful for representing data expressed as percentages. If you want to compare two pies, the size of each circle must be in proportion to the number of cases it contains.

Histograms should be used whenever you have continuous data. The main differ- ence between a histogram and a bar chart is that the columns of a histogram are

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 35

Quantitative Research Methods

31

allowed to touch, whereas the bars of a bar chart should not touch. This is because the scale on the horizontal axis should always describe a continuous variable (such as ‘age group’) whereas on a bar chart, the horizontal axis should describe a dis- crete category. As with tables, the labelling of the axes of bar charts, pie charts and histograms, needs to be accurate, and captions must be thought out carefully.

When to use graphs

As well as histograms, graphs can be used to plot continuous data. They should not be used for discrete data because it makes no sense to draw lines joining discrete data points. Graphs are useful for looking at relationships between continuous variables. Both axes need to be clearly labelled, when you plan graphs choosing the scales for the axes is all important. Large effects can be diminished by an inappropriate scale. Conversely, small effects can be exaggerated.

When it comes to analysing quantitative data, there is less scope for individuality. Certain conventions have to be observed. Discrete data must be treated in a different way from data obtained from the measurement of continuous variables. However people do develop different styles/preferences of presenting and analysing data.

Misleading diagrams

From what we have read so far we can see it is important to consider how we present our data. At every step we make decisions on what to keep what to leave in so even before we start to present our data we are introducing bias. The decisions we make in what axis to use and colours also influences our readers.

Reflective exercise 3.4

Look at Figure 3.3.

Source: http://img0.tuicool.com/2eyYfe.png

Figure 3.3 Apple SmartPhone market share

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 36

Strategic Business Project

32

Can you see any bias or manipulation of the data? Make some notes then check the suggested answer.

Reflective exercise 3.5

Look at Figure 3.4.

Source: http://media.nbcchicago.com/images/410*307/Fox’s+Pie+Chart.jpg

Figure 3.4 The 2012 Presidential Run

Can you see any bias or manipulation of the data? Make some notes then check the suggested answer.

Reflective exercise 3.6 continues the theme by looking at graphs.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 37

Quantitative Research Methods

33

Reflective exercise 3.6

Look at Figures 3.5A and B.

Source: unknown

Figure 3.5 Cellular phone usage

Can you see any bias or manipulation of the data? Which graph appears to show a greater increase in the use of cellular phones? Make some notes then check the suggested answer.

Presenting data effectively is important and Figure 3.6 gets this message across very well. See reflective exercise 3.7.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 38

Strategic Business Project

34

Reflective exercise 3.7

Look at Figure 3.6.

Figure 3.6 Total expenditures

Can you see any problem with the display of the data? Make some notes then check the suggested answer.

Making sense of diagrams

The ACCENT principles for effective graphical display are useful guidelines on how to display data and these are helpful when it comes to considering the data you want to display and who your audience might be Burn (1993). See the criteria below:

Apprehension− are the links between variables maximised?

Clarity−are the most important elements or relations visually most prominent?

Consistency − are the elements, symbol shapes and colours consistent with their use in previous graphs?

Efficiency− is the graph easy to interpret?

Necessity− Is the graph a more useful way to represent the data than alternat- ives (table, text)?

Truthfulness− are the graph elements accurately positioned and scaled?

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 39

Quantitative Research Methods

35

Reflective exercise 3.8

Consider the ACCENT principles and revisit reflective exercises 3.4 to 3.7.

Are the ACCENT principles a useful approach to reviewing diagrams?

What lessons can you learn for your project?

3.4 Quantitative data analysis 2

There are three measures of central tendency: the mean, the median, and the mode. Measures of dispersion include the range, the standard deviation, the variance (where the measure of central tendency is the mean), and the interquartile range (where the measure of central tendency is the median).

3.4.1 Measures of central tendency

The mean, or the average, is a measure of central tendency that offers a general picture of the data without unnecessarily inundating one with each of the obser- vations in a data set. For example, the production department might keep detailed records on how many units of a product are being produced each day. However, to estimate the raw materials inventory, all that the manager might want to know is how many units per month, on average, the department has been producing over the past six months. This measure of central tendency - that is, the mean −might offer the manager a good idea of the quantity of materials that need to be stocked. The mean or average of a set of, say, ten observations, is the sum of the ten individual observations divided by ten (the total number of observations).

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 40

Strategic Business Project

36

The median is the central item in a group of observations when they are arrayed in either an ascending or a descending order.

In some cases, a set of observations does not lend itself to a meaningful repres- entation through either the mean or the median, but can be signified by the most frequently occurring phenomenon. For instance, in a department where there are 10 white women, 24 white men, 3 African American women, and 2 Asian women, the most frequently occurring group - the mode - is the white men. Neither a mean nor a median is calculable or applicable in this case. There is also no way of indicating any measure of dispersion. We have illustrated how the mean, median, and the mode can be useful measures of central tendency, based on the type of data we have.

The three measurements of dispersion connected with the mean are the range, the variance, and the standard deviation.

Range refers to the extreme values in a set of observations. The range is between 30 and 50 for Company A (a dispersion of 20 units), while the range is between 10 and 70 units (a dispersion of 60 units) for Company B.

Another more useful measure of dispersion is the variance. The variance is cal- culated by subtracting the mean from each of the observations in the data set, taking the square of this difference, and dividing the total of these by the number of observations. In the above example, the variance for each of the two companies is:

Variance for Company A = (30−40) 2+(40−40)2+(50−50)2

3 = 66.7

Variance for Company B = (10−40) 2+(40−40)2+(70−40)2

3 = 600

As we can see, the variance is much larger in Company B than Company A. This makes it more difficult for the manager of Company B to estimate how many goods to stock than it is for the manager of Company A. Thus, variance gives an indication of how dispersed the data in a data set are.

The standard deviation, which is another measure of dispersion for interval and ratio scaled data, offers an index of the spread of a distribution or the variability in the data. It is a very commonly used measure of dispersion, and is simply the square root of the variance. In the case of the above two companies, the standard deviation for Companies A and B would be√66.7 and√600 or 8.167 and 24.495, respectively. The mean and standard deviation are the most common descriptive statistics for interval and ratio scaled data.

Example 3.1

So to recap as we stated, a statistic is a number that describes a feature of your data.

Imagine we carried out a survey of students who enrolled at UWS in 2014.

The sample size is 598 and for the ages of those surveyed in 2014 the:

• average is 24 years and 11 months

• minimum value is 16

• maximum value is 73

The average, minimum, maximum and sample size are examples of statistics we can use to describe our data.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 41

Quantitative Research Methods

37

Generally we use two statistics per data item. The first of these are measures of central tendency − a single value the data appears to clusters around, so we have the:

• Mean: the average over the values.

• Median: the middle value.

• Mode: most frequently occurring value.

We also use measures of dispersion − how spread out the data is Standard deviation, Quartiles and Percentiles. If we look at Figures 3.8 and 3.9 we can see a situation where the mean is the same but the standard deviation is different.

Figure 3.7 Average Age on enrolment (1)

Figure 3.8 Average Age on enrolment (2)

Use dispersion to distinguish between the two. Note the standard deviation in the

• first distribution of ages is 9.5

• second distribution of ages is 2.0

The data that is more spread out has larger standard deviation. So statistics allow us to describe our data.

3.4.2 Relationships between variables

In a research project that includes several variables, beyond knowing the descriptive statistics of the variables, we would often like to know how one variable is related to another. When two variables are seen as independent. This can be statistically confirmed by the chi-square (χ2) test - a nonparametric test - which indicates whether or not the observed pattern is due to chance. The χ2 test compares the

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 42

Strategic Business Project

38

expected frequency (based on probability) and the observed frequency, and the χ2

statistic is obtained by the formula:

χ2 = (Oi− Ei) 2

Ei

where χ2 is the chi-square statistic; Oi is the observed frequency of the ith cell; and Ei is the expected frequency. The χ2 statistic with its level of significance can be obtained for any set of nominal data through computer analysis (Excel). See Table 14.2 in the core text for an example of a contingency table.

Thus, in testing for differences in relationships among nominally scaled variables, the χ2 (chi-square) statistic comes in handy. The null hypothesis would be set to state that there is no significant relationship between two and the alternate hypo- thesis would state that there is a significant relationship. The chi-square statistic is associated with the degrees of freedom (df), which denote whether or not a signi- ficant relationship exists between two nominal variables. The number of degrees of freedom is one less than the number of cells in the columns and rows. If there are four cells (two in a column and two in a row), then the number of degrees of freedom would be 1: [(2 - 1) × (2 - 1)]. The chi-square statistic for various df is provided in Table III in the statistical tables toward the end of the core text.

Example 3.2

A manufacturing company has introduced Just-in-Time manufacturing and purchasing systems and is conscious that a vital factor is the quality of bought- in components.

As part of the programme of quality control, an investigation has been carried out on Part No 8766. This part is bought in from three suppliers X, Y and Z − and the results of a Good Inwards Quality Control Check on a sample of 500 components were as follows.

Product quality

Good Minor fault Major fault

Supplier X 95 3 2

Supplier Y 190 7 3

Supplier Z 195 3 2

The sample size of 500 was chosen on the basis of the proportion of Part No 8766 supplied by each of the three suppliers.

Hint: expected number is the (row total× column total) / Grand total, e.g.

Supplier X: Expected value for Good = (480× 100) 500

= 96

Required − investigate whether, based on the sample evidence, there is any relationship between quality levels and supplier.

Solution

Follow the steps.

1. You have the Observed values.

2. Set up your null hypothesis − no difference between supplier and quality of product provided.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 43

Quantitative Research Methods

39

3. Set up the contingency table and include row and column totals. The contingency table in this example should have 3 rows and 3 columns

4. Calculate the expected values: Total column× Total row all divided by the grand total.

Product quality

Good Minor fault Major fault Total

Oi Ei Oi Ei Oi Ei

Supplier X 95 96 3 2.6 2 1.4 100

Supplier Y 190 192 7 5.2 3 2.8 200

Supplier Z 195 192 3 5.2 2 2.8 200

Total 480 480 13 13 7 7 500

5. Calculate (Oi− Ei)

6. Calculate (Oi − Ei)2 / Ei this gives a chi-square value for each observation in your table. You will need to calculate this value 9 times because you have 9 observations, add all these values together to get the Chi Square χ2 value for the investigation. In this case the χ2 = 2.1935.

7. Next you need to calculate the number of degrees of freedom, this comes from the contingency table (rows −1) × (columns − 1), so (3 − 1)(3 − 1) = 4. Looking up the chi-square table, choose 5% as your benchmark (it is normally 5%). At the 5% probability and 4 degrees of freedom we get a χ2

= 9.49. Our value of 2.1935 is less than the critical value of 9.49 so there is no evidence of any significant difference between suppliers.

3.4.3 Correlation

A Pearson correlation matrix will indicate the direction, strength, and significance of the bivariate relationships among all the variables that were measured at an interval or ratio level. The correlation is derived by assessing the variations in one variable as another variable also varies. For the sake of simplicity, let us say we have collected data on two variables - price and sales - for two different products. The volume of sales at every price level can be plotted for each product, as shown in the scatter diagrams in Figure 14.7(a) and Figure 14.7(b). We can check for correlation between the variables. If the scatter diagram slopes upward from left to right then we can say it is a positive correlation, if the plots have no pattern then there is no correlation and if the scatter diagram slopes downward from left to right we could state it a negative correlation.

A correlation coefficient that indicates the strength and direction of the relationship can be computed by applying a formula that takes into consideration the two sets of figures - in this case, different sales volumes at different prices. Theoretically, there could be a perfect positive correlation between two variables, which is represen- ted by 1.0 (plus 1), or a perfect negative correlation which would be −1.0 (minus 1). However, neither of these will be found in reality when assessing correlations between any two variables expected to be different from each other.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 44

Strategic Business Project

40

3.4.4 Hypothesis testing

A hypothesis (also referred to as significance testing) is some testable belief or opinion, and hypothesis testing is the process by which the belief is tested by statistical means. The purpose of hypothesis testing is to determine accurately if the null hypothesis can be rejected in favour of the alternate hypothesis. Based on the sample data the researcher can reject the null hypothesis (and therefore accept the alternate hypothesis) with a certain degree of confidence: there is always a risk that the inference that is drawn about the population is incorrect.

A correlation coefficient that indicates the strength and direction of the relationship can be computed by applying a formula that takes into consideration the two sets of figures - in this case, different sales volumes at different prices. Theoretically, there could be a perfect positive correlation between two variables, which is represen- ted by 1.0 (plus 1), or a perfect negative correlation which would be −1.0 (minus 1). However, neither of these will be found in reality when assessing correlations between any two variables expected to be different from each other.

Results of hypothesis testing

There are 4 possible results:

• We accept a true hypothesis− a correct decision

• We reject a false hypothesis− a correct decision

• We reject a true hypothesis− an incorrect decision (known as a Type I error)

• We accept a false hypothesis− an incorrect decision (known as a Type II error)

• Tease out key themes from the data by applying a systematic analytical frame- work such as coding.

Significance levels

When a sample is taken to test some hypothesis it is likely that the information gleaned from the sample does not completely support the hypothesis. The differ- ence could be due to either the original hypothesis being wrong or the sample being slightly unrepresentative. It is important to test which of the two possibil- ities is more likely. The tests will show whether any differences can be attributed to ordinary random factors or not. If the difference is probably not due to chance factors the difference is said to be statistically significant. As we are dealing with samples and random factors, we cannot say with a 100% certainty that a difference is significant. Various levels of significance are chosen, most commonly 5% or 1%. Thus the result of a particular test might be expressed as:

‘the difference between the sample mean and the hypothetical population mean is significant at the 5% level’.

See sections 15.3 and 15.4 in the core text for t-tests. The one sample t-test is used to test the hypothesis that the mean of the population from which a sample is drawn is equal to a comparison standard. We can also do a (paired samples) t-test to examine the differences in the same group before and after a treatment. For example, would a group of employees perform better after undergoing training than they did before? In this case, there would be two observations for each employee, one before the training and one after the training. We would use a paired samples t-test to test the null hypothesis that the average of the differences between the before and after measure is zero. Note it is also possible to test the differences between the proportions of a given attribute found in two random samples.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 45

Quantitative Research Methods

41

Topic summary

This topic introduced quantitative research methods. Essentially any data that is numerate can be analysed using quantitative techniques. Quantitative research methods can complement qualitative research methods and it is worth considering how you might combine both approaches in your project. The topic indicates that questionnaires are an appropriate tool for gathering data. Care must be taken in questionnaire design and it is best to pilot the questionnaire to resolve any issues before it goes ‘live’. Observation was also discussed as a method for collecting quantitative data. The topic indicates that the researcher has number of choices in how the organise and present the data. These choices can introduce bias and researchers need to be aware of how they might introduce bias in the design of their research instruments as well as the administration of the instruments and the presentation of the results. The data can be analysed using statistical concepts and it is possible to describe the data in terms of range, ‘average’ and standard deviation. Software such as Excel can carry much of the quantitative analysis and this enables the researcher to consider relationships between variables and carry out hypothesis testing.

If you feel ready to attempt the End of Unit Progress Test for Topic 3, follow this link.

References

© Burn, D.A. (1993) “Designing Effective Statistical Graphs”. In C. R. Rao, ed., Handbook of Stat- istics, Vol. 9, Chapter 22.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 46

42

Qualitative Research Methods

Learning outcomes

After completing the study of this topic you should be able to:

• understand the qualitative approach to business and management research;

• identify a range of qualitative research methods applicable to different management and business research topics;

• understand and apply key methods of qualitative data analysis.

The prescribed reading for this topic is from the core text: Sekaran and Bougie (2010) Research Methods for Business, Chapters 1, 7, 8, 9, 13 and 16.

Introduction

Qualitative methods are increasingly used and accepted in business and man- agement research. If a manager needs to know only what has happened, or how often something has occurred or how much has been produced, then quantitative approaches to research would suffice. Such approaches are particularly appropriate when we want to apply a measure− in other words to quantify. However, in order to understand meanings that people place on their experiences, a qualitative approach is often required. In very simple terms quantitative approaches tell us what things have happened, qualitative approaches tell us why things happen as they do. The choice between qualitative and quantitative research approaches depends on the area of investigation and the purpose of the research. Neither is better; indeed, some research projects incorporate both approaches, often called a mixed methods approach.

4.1 The process of qualitative research

The purpose of qualitative research is to gather data which provides an in-depth description of situations, events and interactions between people and things. Some- times, it is called interpretive research as it seeks to develop a thorough understand- ing of a phenomenon and requires the researcher to play a major role in interpreting the data which is generated. As a result, researchers become immersed in the sub- ject being investigated. A researcher chooses a qualitative methodology only after taking into account the following factors:

• The purpose and objectives of the research. This is the paramount considera- tion. Ask yourself: is a qualitative approach the best means to achieve the purpose and objectives of my MBA project?

• What are my skills? Do I have the necessary skill, personality and enthusiasm to conduct qualitative research?

The process of qualitative research invariably involves a much smaller sample size than quantitative research. While sample sizes will vary with the qualitative tech- nique employed, these are generally small. For example, a dental surgery may wish to carry out a patient satisfaction survey. If the surgery has 400 patients, a quantitat- ive approach may involve asking 100 of these patients to complete a questionnaire.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 47

Qualitative Research Methods

43

A qualitative approach aimed at assessing patient satisfaction may only require one or two focus groups or 8-12 in-depth interviews.

Qualitative research involves non-probability sampling − that is, the researcher is not attempting to generate a representative sample. Three main types of non- probability sampling are common:

• Convenience sampling. As the name implies, convenience sampling refers to the collection of data from those who are conveniently able to provide it. For example, this could mean stopping people on a street corner as they pass by; it could also mean surveying friends, students, or colleagues that the researcher has regular access to. Convenience sampling is most often used in the explor- atory phase of a research project and enables a researcher to obtain some basic information quickly. It can be used in an MBA project but a student would need to justify the use of a convenience sample in preference to a purposive or snowball sample (see below).

• Purposive sampling. Instead of obtaining data form those who are most con- veniently available, a purposive sample, also commonly called a judgmental sample, is one that is selected based on the knowledge of a population and the purpose of the study. The subjects are selected because of some charac- teristic. Researchers who you might often see at a mall or in shopping centre carrying a clipboard and stopping various people to interview are often con- ducting research using purposive sampling. For example, they may wish to ask shoppers about their experiences of a particular shopping outlet. Another example would be a researcher wishing to establish the views of senior busi- ness executives about the importance of health and safety issues at places of employment. The researcher could attend a business conference in order to ask those attending for a short interview on this subject. In this instance, the researcher is attempting to focus on the target group. Purposive sampling can be very useful for situations such as an MBA project where a researcher needs to reach a targeted sample quickly and where a representative sample is not the main concern.

• Snowball sampling. This is a subset of a purposive sample. A snowball sample is achieved by asking a participant to suggest someone else who might be willing or appropriate for the study. Snowball samples are particularly useful in hard-to-track populations, such as truants, drug users, etc. It can also be used in business and management research and may be appropriate for some MBA projects. For example, an MBA project may be aimed at establishing the views of senior finance managers towards adopting a particular aspect of ICT technology. If the MBA researcher only knows a very few such senior managers, he/she could ask these senior finance managers for referrals to other interviewees. The snowball effect would occur as more and more referrals are acquired.

4.2 Data collection techniques This section focuses on the primary data collection technique for gathering data in qualitative research, namely the interview. The main types of interview are discussed including how the data collected can be applied to develop a case study approach to qualitative enquiry.

There are two key questions which the researcher must decide before embarking on an interview programme:

• First, should interviews be conducted on a one-to-one basis or a group basis?

• Second, to what extend should the interviews be structured?

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 48

Strategic Business Project

44

4.2.1 Individual versus group interviews

There is no absolute rule stating whether individual or group interviews are better. Your decision will be driven by the focus of your research; but you will also have to take a pragmatic view of the availability of possible interviewees. Participants for individual interviewees are usually selected for their knowledge and experience of the subject which is being researched. Where possible, such interviews should be face-to face. Such interviews are often recorded and subsequently transcribed in order to provide the interviewer with a rich detail of the subject being researched. However, permission for recording must be agreed with the interviewee and is usu- ally accompanied by an assurance that the transcript will remain confidential and the recording destroyed upon completion of the MBA project. There will, however, be those interviewees who are uncomfortable with recordings of their interview. This may be due to the sensitivity of the subject matter or the preferences of the individual being interviewed. In such cases the interviewer should make extensive notes during the interview− again, assurances of confidentially should be given. It should be noted that face-to face interviews may not be possible where the inter- viewees are widely scattered geographically. In such cases telephone interviews or video conferencing may provide viable alternatives. Telephone interviews do not provide the same level of interaction and thus the quality of rich detail obtained may suffer. It may be possible to address this issue, at least in part, by the use of techno- logy such as Skype. Overall, the MBA researcher must take a pragmatic approach to the format of individual interviews.

A group interview is an interview which involves more than one interviewee. The number of interviews at a group interview can vary from two (sometimes referred to as a dyad) to four or five. When the number of individuals exceeds this number, the researcher is, in essence, conducting a focus group (see below). In general, the smaller the number of interviewees, the more in-depth a group interview can be. In larger group interviews, a greater range of ideas and views can be covered. In terms of composition, groups can be homogeneous, that is comprised of similar individuals who share the same or similar backgrounds and experiences. Groups can also be heterogeneous, that is, comprised of individuals who have different backgrounds and experiences. For an MBA project with a focused research topic it is likely that group interviews will comprise of individuals who are homogeneous. Larger group interviewing, for example of more than 6 individuals, usually takes the form of a focus group. Those being interviewed are usually chosen on the basis of their expertise and/or experience of the topic on which information is sought, thus focus group members are likely to be described as homogeneous. For example, human resource managers may be brought together in order to discuss the key factors in the recruitment of specialist ICT staff. Focus groups are used extensively in market research and, with use of technology, their use is being extended with ever-greater use being made of online focus groups. Whatever the precise form that a focus group takes, a skilled moderator is required if this method is to successfully address a research topic. Moderation skills require specific training and experience. Thus, unless you have existing experience of running focus groups, this technique is not generally recommended for an MBA project. Your supervisor will advise on this.

4.2.2 How many interviews?

MBA students carrying out qualitative research frequently ask ‘how many inter- views is enough?’ While there are other factors that affect sample size in qualitative studies, researchers generally use saturation as a guiding principle during their data collection. Data saturation occurs when the researcher is no longer obtaining new information from the interview process. Unlike quantitative researchers who wait until the end of the study to analyse their data, qualitative researchers usually

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 49

Qualitative Research Methods

45

analyse their data throughout their study. Generally, for an MBA project in-depth interviews involving 6−8 individuals would be expected.

4.2.3 Conducting a research interview

There are three main types of research interview − unstructured, semi-structure and structured. Each approach can be applied to individual and group interviews. An unstructured interview is so described as the interviewer does not enter the interview with a planned set of questions. This approach is only recommended for an expert researcher who has gained experience in applying this approach. With a structured interview, the interviewer has a set of pre-determined questions to be asked. This approach makes it difficult to obtain rich data which is usu- ally the rationale for adopting a qualitative approach. Hence, most MBA projects which adopt a qualitative approach will utilise a semi-structured interview. With this approach, the interviewer develops and uses an interview guide, sometimes called an interview protocol. This is a list of questions and topics that need to be covered during the conversation, usually in a particular order. The researcher follows the guide, but during the interview, she/he follows-up interesting points made by the interviewee. An effective semi-structured interview is one in which the researcher probes for and obtains additional data and insights from the interviewee.

The development of the questions for a semi-structured interview programme takes into consideration:

• the focus of your research;

• what has been learned from the literature review, for example, this should have established the key issues pertinent to your research question; and

• what you want to learn from the people to be interviewed.

It is important, however, to recognize that the interviewer must be a good listener, and that the best probing is that which is responsive to what the interviewee is saying. Silence (on the part of the interviewer) is golden and can give the interviewee time to think and speak. If you intend using a semi-structured interviews, you must develop an interview guide or protocol in advance. An example of an interview protocol is shown below. This protocol was developed and used by an experienced qualitative researcher who conducted a series of individual face-to-face interviews with experienced business angel investors. Two key points can be seen in this protocol. Note how:

• this researcher’s protocol recognised that an interview typically passes through a number of stages or phases − starting with an introductory phase and con- cluding with a wrap-up in which thanks are extended to the interviewee;

• the protocol includes reminders to the researcher about what to ask the Busi- ness Angels. For example, in phase 4 the researcher prompts himself/herself to ask a key question of each interviewee.

Example− Interview Protocol: Interviews with Business Angel Investors

Objective − to address the research question: what are the decision criteria against which investment opportunities are assessed?

Note this example followed several phases and each phase required different actions by the interviewer.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 50

Strategic Business Project

46

Phase 1

a. Introductions and explanation of research − expand on previous email correspondence with the business angel in which the research project was explained− provide additional background information as required.

b. Underline that anonymity of interviewees will be maintained.

c. Ask if the interview can be recorded.

Phase 2

a. Ask interviewees about their business background.

b. Ask about how and why they became a business angel.

Phase 3

a. Use the angel investment process to provide structure and to get the busi- ness angel talking.

b. Identification of investment opportunity − How did you learn about it? From whom did you learn about it? What attracted you to the opportunity?

c. Initial assessment of opportunity− criteria? Assessment of entrepreneur(s) behind the opportunity− criteria?

d. Committing to the opportunity−criteria? Finance, marketing, team behind the opportunity.

e. Managing the investment− how?

f. Throughout the interview, bring interviewee back to reasons for the invest- ment. Focus on specific reasons− try to avoid generalities, where possible.

Phase 4

a. Attempt to get interviewees to talk about critical incidents. Ask: what do you know now that you wish you had known when you started out as a business angel?

b. Follow-up and develop interviewee’s responses.

Phase 5

a. Wrap-up. Ask interviewee if any significant factors have been missed in relation to learning to be successful as a producer.

b. Thank interviewee and ask if you could, if necessary, contact then again to clarify any points.

c. Emphasise again the anonymity of interviewees.

Tips

The good interviewer

a. Always chooses a setting with the least distraction and in which the interview will feel comfortable.

b. Indicates how long the interview will last.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 51

Qualitative Research Methods

47

c. Occasionally verifies that the recorder is working, (worth doing before the inter- view as well!).

d. Asks one question at a time.

e. Attempts to remain neutral by keeping her/his opinions and views to her- self/himself.

f. Reviews notes and recordings as soon as is practicable.

Reflective exercise 4.1

Take a few minutes to sketch out a first draft of an interview guide for use in your MBA project. Begin by thinking about the topic of your research. Then envision yourself conducting a one-to-one interview. What phases would the interview go through?

Note: Experienced researchers find that preparing an interview guide takes several iterations. Therefore, keep your first attempt at preparing an interview guide. This may well be the draft you refine several times to arrive at your final interview guide.

4.2.4 The case study approach

One powerful research approach that is sometimes adopted for an MBA project is that of case study. Case studies focus on gathering data about a specific object, event or activity. In the context of an MBA project this may mean focusing on a particular organization or business unit; sometimes, the focus is on two organisations in order to allow the project to contrast and compare business practices. In essence it is about going deep in order to better understand a real-life situation. The researcher does this by examining the real-life situation form various angles and perspectives using multiple methods of data collection. For example, the researcher may wish to focus on the effectiveness of the recruitment and selection process in a particular organ- ization− perhaps in the organisation in which she/he is employed. The researcher could extract quantitative data from the organization’s records about this area, for example retention rates among staff. In-depth interviews would then be conducted with those who manage the recruitment process as well as with a selection of recent recruits. In this way, the researcher gains and in-depth understanding of the issues in a particular organization. This approach could be replicated in another organ- isation in order to enable the researcher to contrast and compare the respective organisations. The results of study could be compared to best practice (established by the literature review) and recommendations made to how the recruitment and selection process could be improved.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 52

Strategic Business Project

48

Reflective exercise 4.2

Imagine that you wish to use interviews to gather the data for your MBA pro- ject which focused on HR recruitment practices. In designing the project you are trying to decide on two approaches. The first is a case study approach where you will interview a number of HR professionals from within your own organisation. The second approach would be to interview the Head of Recruit- ment from your own organisation and a number of similar HR professionals from organisations in a field of activity similar to your own organisation. The first option entails interviewing internal subjects; the second approach entails interviewing mainly external subjects.

Consider the advantages and disadvantages of interviewing internal and external subjects. Write down these down.

4.3 Qualitative data analysis

There are many different ways to analyse qualitative data. Usually, what the researcher is trying to do is to identify, analyse and report patterns or themes in the data. For an MBA project, the qualitative data is usually in the form of interview transcripts. Interviews produce many pages of transcripts. This data requires critical examin- ation and careful interpretation. Rigorous qualitative analysis discovers patterns, coherent themes, meaning¬ful categories, and new ideas. The analysis of the data should occur throughout the course of a project. Do not wait until all the interviews are concluded before beginning the analysis process. Begin the analysis of inter- views as soon as is reasonably practicable. Remember, the objective of qualitative analysis is to find the ‘meaning’ embedded within the data.

The cornerstone of qualitative analysis is the coding of the interview transcripts. Coding requires the researcher to transcribe the interviews and then to read the transcripts several times to pin-point the themes which have emerged. For example, what did the interviewees say that was surprising? What was said that was common to all or a number of the interviewees? At a basic level, coding is simply any way of categorising and sorting data for the purposes of analysis. In qualitative research coding can be done at the end of the interview programme or as each interview is completed. In an MBA project it is recommended that you analyse each interview as soon as possible.

The first stage of the coding process is a ‘trawl’ through the interview transcripts to see what is there − what patterns are emerging from the data? As you read the transcripts note down the thoughts and ideas that occur to you as you read the data − it is advisable to write these down as you read. One tip is to format your interview transcripts with a wide margin that gives you the space in which to write. From this reading or ‘sort’ of the data you will have developed an initial coding scheme. The second stage of the coding process is to re-read your data in order to refine, expand or reject initial categories. Once you have identified the significant elements in your data these need to be ‘tagged’ or coded. A code is essentially a way of identifying

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 53

Qualitative Research Methods

49

significant parts of the data, so it can be in any form of letters or numbers that make sense to you.

Qualitative research: Coding exercise

Source: University of Plymouth− an open educational resource

This exercise requires you read through this verbatim interview transcript between an experienced researcher and an interviewee. The subject matter was about under- taking sporting activity as a means of keeping fit.

Interview transcript

Male, age 35

Q: Can you tell me how you became interested in sport?

A: Well I don’t think there was any one reason− it was always there, my parents encouraged me to be active and then we did sport and PE and stuff like that at school, so no one reason, like many young lads I dreamed of being a footballer.

Q: What sport or sports do you take part in?

A: I still play football but not much, I can’t keep up with the younger lads anymore! Sounds daft as I don’t think of myself as being old but the eighteen, nineteen year olds just run faster than me, even though I go jogging every day.

Q: Do you think you need to do that to keep fit?

A: Oh yeah, I hurt my knee a while back, got a knock in a match and couldn’t do much for a couple of months, I started putting on weight just sitting around, all the blokes in our family are a bit big and working in an office means I don’t get any exercise at work so yeah, I need to do it.

Q: Football and jogging are very different, one’s a team game and the other you do on your own, or do you go jogging with anyone else?

A: When I was playing regularly I was jogging anyway, you need to do that to keep your stamina up but yeah, playing football is all about the team, it’s like no one’s bigger that the team−well in theory (laughs)− so it’s a lot about having mates and you’re all in it together as much as actually kicking the ball around. Sometimes we would train together − well that sounds a bit serious but it was like that, so we would go jogging together once a week or sometimes more. But then people move on, they change jobs or whatever and stop coming along. Sorry, what was the question again?

Q: When you go out jogging now, do you go on your own?

A: Oh right, yes. The missus came out with me a few times but she couldn’t keep up, she goes to the gym now with her friends. So I go out on my own.

Q: How many times a week?

A: I try and go every day, once you get into it you notice the difference when you don’t.

Q: Even when it’s raining?

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 54

Strategic Business Project

50

A: Mostly, but not if it’s pelting down, playing footie you get used to that, it just comes with the territory, I’ve played footie in the pouring rain, you see I think if you’re going to do it you can’t get all picky and stop going because it’s cold or dark, no point in that, so unless it’s really tipping it down I’ll go out.

Q: How far do you jog?

A: Half an hour or so, I go round the estate on the quiet roads.

Q: Just before, you mentioned the social side of sport, with the football team, can you tell me a bit more about that?

A: That goes way back to school, I was picked for the first team a couple of times and for a while thought I was going to be pulling on an England shirt but (laughs) I guess every other kid in the team was thinking that! But yeah, it was part of something, even when I was in the second team and tagged along I still had the feeling that I belonged. Then when I went to sixth form college I joined a team there and that was great, we had a lot of laughs, some good nights in the pub after a match, stuff like that, and then I used to go and watch Aldershot when they played at home, with them being my local team.

Q: So this idea of belonging still important to you?

A: Well not so much now, I mean when I was a kid all the lads supported teams and some went for the big ones like Man United or Arsenal, but to me and some of the lads it was Aldershot as they were our local team, they were like ours, right? But that’s all about having a good time with your mates really.

Q: Do you still follow them?

A: Yeah, well I went last Easter when I was down there visiting the parents, some of the old crowd are still there and I met up with them, it was a laugh, if they came up this way for a cup match I’d probably go.

Q: Have you ever played other sports?

A: Yeah well in school we did some, but to me it was always football, I never liked cricket, rugby’s Ok, I watch that if it’s on the box.

Q: Do you watch much sport on the box then?

A: Match of the day, most matches that are on, world cup of course, rugby, maybe some athletics, I like the Olympics but that’s it, I’m not that much of a sports nut.

Q: Does your wife watch it as well?

A: (laughs) No, well sometimes if she can’t be bothered moving of the sofa, she’d rather watch East Enders and girly stuff like that, but we’ve got two tellies in the house so we can both watch different things if we want, and we have broadband as well but the kids are on that all the time.

Q: I know what you mean, we do that in our house as well. Now you said your wife goes to the gym, have you ever thought of that?

A: Yeah, yeah, tried it a couple of times but I didn’t like it.

Q: You didn’t like it, why was that?

A: Well, you go in, and there’s all this music, and people on machines wearing all these fancy clothes and they’re like jogging on these machines but they aren’t

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 55

Qualitative Research Methods

51

going nowhere, well I just didn’t like it, I mean why pay money to jog nowhere, when you can jog somewhere for nothing? Even if it’s just round the estate.

Q: Well I suppose it doesn’t rain in a gym.

A: Now you’re sounding like my missus! But I don’t really care about that, I just didn’t like it, tried it and fair enough for them that like it but it’s not for me. Do you go to a gym?

Q: Me? No, to be honest it doesn’t appeal to me either.

A: Well there you go, it was just like that for me, I didn’t like it.

After reading the interview once, print a paper copy. Read it again marking directly onto the paper copy any key points or themes which emerge from the transcript as you read. What you are doing is coding!

4

Once you have tried coding this interview, look at the way an experienced researcher has done this.

Qualitative research: Coding exercise− an initial descriptive coding

This is what initial coding may look like. The initial codes are shown in in red pen, and then the researcher has added some notes as reminders to herslf in a different colour. These personal notes are kept distinct from the initail codes by using a different colour ink− in this case black.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 56

Strategic Business Project

52

Codes are often developed in terms of main categories and subsidiary ones. So in the example above we would have:

Main code: Types of sport

Subsidiary codes: Football, Jogging

If we were to read through more transcripts of the interviews, we may probably add to those so we could end up with something that looked like this:

Types of sport:

Football

Jogging

Rugby

Badminton

Cricket

Now one way of assigning codes could be this:

Main code A Types of sport

Subsidiary codes

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 57

Qualitative Research Methods

53

A1 Football

A2 Jogging

A3 Rugby

A4 Badminton

A5 Cricket

Exactly how one develops a coding scheme varies from researcher to researcher. What is important is to use and develop a system that works for you and that you would be prepared to explain to your supervisor. What your supervisor is looking for is that you have approached the task of data analysis with rigour and thoroughness. Always remember that the process of coding is simply a way of sorting your data for analysis, it is not the analysis itself.

Coding is not always a continuous process in which you go from document 1 to 2 to 3 until you reach the end. It is not uncommon to be reading a transcript and then remember one you had read a while ago, so quite often you will find yourself dipping in and out of your transcripts, adding new ideas and new codes, the important point is that you subject all your material to a close reading.

Some people argue that you need to approach the data without preconceptions and allow the themes to emerge from the data. This is not possible if the data you are using has been gathered by you. If you have been interviewing people then you cannot help but begin thinking about it from the moment you hear it. This is not a problem but you need to be aware of it.

Themes do not emerge by themselves, you have to pull them out!

Finally, you will recall that we addressed the question about how many qualitative interviews should be conducted. In similar vein, a question often asked by MBA students is ‘how many main codes should emerge from a research interview?’ This is a difficult question on which to give specific guidance. It will depend on both the subject matter of the interview and the ability of the researcher to keep the interviewee focused on key issues. As a general guideline, an experienced researcher would expect 3−6 main codes to emerge. These would then be consolidated into a similar number of themes by comparing the findings from all the interviews.

Reflective exercise 4.3

What are the advantages and disadvantages on face-to-face and telephone interviews?

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 58

Strategic Business Project

54

What do you judge would be your biggest challenge in conducting research interviews?

What would be the challenge in gaining cooperation from interviewees?

What would be the challenges of your own interviewing skills?

Topic summary

Rigorous qualitative research is challenging. Experienced researchers in this area:

1. Acknowledge that it is usually difficult to obtain a representative sample and, hence, generalise research results.

2. Know the advantages and disadvantages of the main types of interview− indi- vidual, group, internal and external.

3. Recognise that the number of interviews in a qualitative research study is seldom pre-determined; rather, interviewing ceases when data saturation is reached.

4. Know that rigorous interviews are facilitated by a well-developed interview guide/protocol.

5. Tease out key themes from the data by applying a systematic analytical frame- work such as coding.

If you feel ready to attempt the End of Unit Progress Test for Topic 4, follow this link.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 59

55

Writing Up Your MBA Project Report

Learning outcomes

After completing the study of this topic you should be able to tailor your MBA project report to meet the UWS requirements.

The prescribed reading for this topic is from the core text: Sekaran and Bougie (2010) Research Methods for Business, Chapter 17.

5.1 The written report

A well-written MBA project report should be clear, concise, and coherent, with a good organisation of paragraphs and with a smooth transition between topics. Grammar and spelling mistakes need to be avoided and facts or reflective thoughts instead of simple opinions should be provided. Heading and subheadings should help the researcher to organise the report in a logical manner and allow the reader to follow the ‘story’. You are not writing an essay − essentially what we expect is a management report with references. There are a number of ways of writing up your project and the outline which follows is the one we recommend. We do not wish to stifle originality but this format has worked well for MBA students at UWS for many years. Your supervisor will guide you on the appropriate structure for your project, which often depends on your subject discipline, and which may vary a little from this format. However, please note that each project should contain, in one format or another, each of the following chapters: introduction, literature, methodology, results, analysis and conclusion. In addition your project should begin with an abstract (see below). Your project should be between 10,000 and 15,000 words and the word limits below are given as a guide. However, try to keep to them. If your project is too long, then it may well be unfocused. If it is too short, then you may not have covered all the ground.

5.2 How to structure your MBA project report

This section presents the different parts of the report including the importance of an executive summary, a clear table of contents, concise introductory chapter, the different parts of the body of the report, and the final part of the report.

Abstract−Maximum 300 words

The abstract should be a brief account of the entire research study. You will become familiar with the term from reading academic journal articles. While abstracts can vary greatly in what they contain, in an MBA project we would typically expect you to provide one (possibly two) well-developed paragraph that is coherent and concise, and is able to stand alone as a unit of information. It covers all the essential elements of the MBA project and provides the reader with your project in a ‘nutshell’. Please note that that an abstract usually does not include any references. The abstract is important as it will be the first impression you will give to the examiners of your project. It is recommended that the abstract is written at the end of your project by which time you will have a clearer picture of all your findings and conclusions.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 60

Strategic Business Project

56

Table of Contents

The Table of Contents will offer to the reader an understanding of the logical struc- ture of the report. The reader will be able to identify the main heading and sub- heading and consequently the main topics of the report/dissertation. The example given in your core text is shown below and contains useful advice.

Example

TiasNimbas Business School guidelines for the table of contents

The table of contents contains the headings and subheadings of the chapters and sections of your research project, with the numbers of the pages on which these chapters and sections begin. The outer cover page and management summary are not entered in the table of contents and therefore the first item to be listed is the preface.

The minimum content of the table of contents should be the preface, each chapter or main division title, each appendix and the bibliography. All head- ings should correspond exactly in wording, arrangement, punctuation, and capitalisation with the headings as they appear in the body of the dissertation.

A main heading or chapter title is given entirely in capitals and begins at the left-hand margin of the page. Main subheadings should be indented and typed in upper and lower case. Subordinate subheadings should also be inden- ted. Chapters, sections of chapters, and subsections, etc., are numbered using Arabic numerals in a decimal sequence. Thus the third subsection of the second section of chapter three is numbered 3.2.3.

The number of the page on which the division begins in the text of the man- agement project is given in the table of contents in Arabic numerals flush with the right-hand margin of the page. Double-spacing is used except for overrun lines, which are single-spaced.

Introduction− about 750−1,200 words This chapter sets the scene and introduces the reader to your project. You should therefore give a clear account of the research problem that you set out to invest- igate, introduce your model/framework and make sure that you have covered the relevant theoretical and empirical issues involved. If you have added to, eliminated or substituted research aims and objectives during the course of your work, outline succinctly both the changes and the problem you have finally tackled. The core text suggests the following structure for the introduction chapter of a research report which you may find useful for your MBA project

The introductory section

The layout of the first chapter is more or less standard. This chapter could contain, in the following order:

1. Introduction (§1.1).

2. Reason for the research (problem indication) and the purpose of the research (§1.2).

3. Problem statement and research questions (§1.3).

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 61

Writing Up Your MBA Project Report

57

4. The scope of the study (§1.4).

5. Research method (approach) (§1.5).

6. Managerial relevance (§1.6).

7. Structure and division of chapters in the research report (§1.7).

The introductory section starts with a short introduction providing background information on why and how the study was initiated. The introduction is fol- lowed by a section describing the reason for and the purpose of the research project, and a section providing the statement of the problem under invest- igation. Brief (!) descriptions of the scope of the study, the research method, and the managerial relevance of the study are also provided in the introduct- ory section. The last section offers an overview of the structure and division of chapters in the research report.

You will see from the above that the last section of your introduction should set out the overall structure of your project. Here is an example of how one MBA student wrote this short section − the project focused on customer satisfaction in the manufacturing of fast-moving consumer goods.

This strategic project is set out in the following way. This introduction is followed by a literature review chapter which appraises the main theoretical models and existing literature in the area of customer satisfaction in the manufacturing of fast-moving consumer goods. A description of the quantitative methodology employed to conduct the empirical research on customer satisfaction levels is then set out. Results of the research are then reported followed by a chapter discussing the key findings in relation to the existing literature. The project concludes by setting out a series of recommendations for the company to consider in developing its future customer satisfaction strategy.

Literature Review− between 2,500−4,000 words Your literature review should be selective, but structured in such a way as to demon- strate your familiarity with the general field in which your question lies. It is often important to identify and discuss gaps in the current literature. Most literature reviews will contain the elements set out below. Check that you have included these (where appropriate), but please note that this list is a checklist, not a format for the structure of the chapter:

a. an introduction to the literature review;

b. a discussion of the theoretical perspectives which previous writers have used for investigations in your chosen field;

c. a summary of the main empirical findings of previous research, together with data from other sources, stressing those ideas and empirical findings which are important to your work and including those which you challenge and reject as well as those that you have used for your own study;

d. a justification of your choice of any model/framework that you propose to use in your research;

e. a conclusion, which summarises the building blocks you have selected as a basis for your own work, and which leads the reader into the following chapters.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 62

Strategic Business Project

58

TipDo not overuse direct quotes from articles and books in this chapter − in this way any direct quotes that you do use can have an impact.

Methodology− between 1,750−2,500 words

This chapter sets out the research strategy and methods you have used in your MBA project. The examiner will expect you to show the reliability and validity of your choices. The chapter should include:

a. An introduction.

b. A brief outline of the research approach you selected and the reasons for your choice; for example, justify why you selected a quantitative or qualitative approach, or a combination of both.

c. A detailed account of how the data was collected. For example, was it by inter- views/questionnaires? How many interviews? How many questionnaires dis- tributed/returned?

d. How the data collection was analysed.

e. A discussion of any problems or difficulties you encountered or any changes you made during the course of your research.

f. Limitations of your methodological approach− every method has its strengths and weaknesses. summarises the building blocks you have selected as a basis for your own work, and which leads the reader into the following chapters.

g. Any ethical considerations.

Note: This chapter of an MBA project would normally contain references on research methods, particularly in relation to the choice of research approach and the methods used to collect and analyse the data. Such references would usually cite key books on research methods that you have consulted during your MBA project. As a rule, a good MBA project would cite about 3−6 sources.

Results− between 2,750−4,250 words

In this chapter you show the reader the information you have discovered as a result of your research. However, at this stage you are setting out the data you have discovered, not analysing it. That is for the next chapter.

You should give careful consideration as to how you will present your findings. You will have a range and volume of data, which you need to summarise and present and you may use a variety of methods, including tables, charts, diagrams, verbatim quotes etc. You will also need to contextualise the data and point out any weaknesses/ omissions in your material. Also, remember that this chapter also needs a short introduction and conclusion.

Note: you would usually cite any references in this chapter of your project − your focus is on presenting your results.

TipIf you have used interview questions, remember to include some actual quota- tions that support the points you are making.

TipImagine that your MBA project is about how to develop an effective recruitment strategy. If, for example, your literature review has led you to suggest that there appear to be, say, 6 key factors to consider when developing a recruitment strategy, you may wish to consider using these 6 factors things as sub-headings as a frame- work for presenting your findings. If there are additional factors that you have found

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 63

Writing Up Your MBA Project Report

59

in your research these should also be noted here, as these lead on to your Analysis and Conclusions chapter.

Analysis and Conclusions− between 2,750−4,250 words Your analysis and conclusions chapter should normally be at least as long as your results chapter and is the chapter in which you analyse and discuss your findings. Its purpose is to address your research aims. You should consider what you have been able to establish in your research, giving attention to replications and refutations of previous writers’ findings, as well as showing new or innovative data. You should also relate your results back to what you found in the literature in this area. Therefore, one would normally find some the literature being cited for a second time in this chapter of your project. If there are practical implications for your research then you need to decide whether or not you wish to make specific recommendations, or just draw out the general implications of your work. You should be explicit about the types of context/situation for which your conclusions are relevant, and the limits beyond which they do not or may not apply. A good way to finish is to outline ‘suggested areas for further research’. This is good academic practice in that it demonstrates that your investigations have opened up further interesting avenues.

Please note that on occasions this chapter is split into two: analysis and conclusions.

TipTo follow on from the last tip given on the results chapter, you should highlight in this chapter what can be added to existing theory or our general academic know- ledge in the light of your investigation. For example, the literature might suggest 6 key factors, but your investigations may have led you to suggest a few more or that only four mattered.

References

Full details of any references cited in your project should be set out in a reference list. There is no need to set a bibliography of any texts or articles not referenced in your project.

Appendices

Appendices are placed at the end of your project after your References and do not count towards the overall word count of your MBA project. This is where to put material that is not crucial to your project but which provides support for, or background to, your research. This is a way of getting bulk material out of the main body but it is not a dumping ground.

Good examples of what might appear in your Appendices might be:

• a summary of a recent industry report

• blank copies of any questionnaires/interview schedules

• an extract form an interview transcript

• survey data

• company policy documents that relate to your investigation.

Bad examples include:

• photocopies of journal articles/book chapters

• copies of theoretical models/frameworks/diagrams− if you think that these are important to your theoretical background incorporate them into your literature review.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 64

Strategic Business Project

60

TipBig does not mean better. Expecting an examiner to search through pages of data is unprofessional.

Finally, experience of supervising MBA students over a number of years suggests 7 key writing tips which will help you approach the MBA project professionally.

1. Good writers continually revise and rewrite until they are satisfied with the final result. Don’t underestimate how long this can take.

2. Always keep in mind your original research aims and research questions and remind the reader of these at regular intervals.

3. Start writing early. Do not try writing the report all at once. Give yourself plenty of time for revision, correcting and for formatting the document − this can be very time-consuming. Discuss and agree with your supervisor arrangements for sending and returning completed text to each other.

4. ‘Write with your ear’. A sentence may look correct on paper, but often sounds jumbled or rambling if read aloud. Listen to your sentences in your head as you write.

5. ‘Write for the eye’. Make your project report visually appealing, (see the guidelines on line spacing and type font in your MBA project handbook).

6. Make your writing clear and simple. Avoid long, convoluted sentences. Don’t use twenty words, if ten will do. Be ruthless by editing out redundant words and sentences.

7. If you are concerned about your spelling and grammar, have your chapters proof read before you hand them to your supervisor. A good proof reader will point out any spelling or grammatical errors− but leave you to decide whether to make the corrections or not. Do not expect your supervisor to act as a proof reader.

Reflective exercise 5.1

Critique Report 3 in the Appendix of Chapter 17 . Discuss it in terms of good and bad research, suggesting how the study could have been improved, what aspects of it are good, and how scientific it is.

Topic summary Three key points should always be kept in mind:

1. We expect you MBA project to be between 10−15,000 words. Make every one count.

2. Keep to the structure suggested − only depart from it with the agreement of your supervisor.

3. Follow the writing advice given in this chapter− it has worked for other students and, therefore, is likely to work for you.

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 65

Writing Up Your MBA Project Report

61

See Appendix 5.1 for the MBA marking scheme, this should provide an overview of the structure for your project as well as the questions you need to ask as you draft each section.

If you feel ready to attempt the End of Unit Progress Test for Topic 5, follow this link.

5.3 Appendix 5.1

In assessing a dissertation examiners are asked to consider the following questions:

I. Introduction

i. Does the introduction set out the overall aim and reasons for the study?

ii. Are objectives clearly stated? Are they relevant?

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 66

Strategic Business Project

62

iii. Are organisational considerations given? Do they add to the reasons for the study? Are other pertinent issues discussed?

iv. Can an understanding of the methods and approach be gleaned?

v. Is a structure given for the document?

II. Literature review

i. Does it inform the hypotheses to be investigated?

ii. Is it balanced, reflective of major developments and cognisant of major trends in relevant disciplines?

iii. Is the literature review critical? Is the candidate evaluative?

iv. Does this review suggest research approaches, strategies and data-collection methods?

III. Methods

i. Are the methodology and data-collection methods appropriate?

ii. Is there a link to the literature review and the theory and approaches dis- cussed there?

iii. Has selection of them been well argued?

iv. Does the candidate demonstrate capacity for application and accurate, appropriate use of techniques?

IV. Results and discussion

i. Are these parts of the dissertation appropriately structured or separated?

ii. Is a distinction maintained between what was discovered and the judge- ments made on the basis of discoveries?

iii. Are findings presented clearly and cogently? You might consider whether there is a relationship between objectives and/or themes and order of presentation of findings.

iv. Is the presentation of results analytical? Is there clarification of relationships between data items and their component parts?

v. Does the candidate demonstrate a capacity for synthesis of results, theory and the work of others when discussing the findings?

V. Conclusions

i. Is there awareness of the limitations of the research?

ii. Are conclusions and recommendations valid? That is, have they been reached logically? Does the evidence support them?

iii. Are organisational implications treated appropriately? Have additions to the literature been made and recognised by the candidate? What are the implications for the current state of knowledge and practice?

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 67

Writing Up Your MBA Project Report

63

VI. Continuity and presentation

i. Does the document build on an Introduction and Abstract to provide a coherent story that can be followed from chapter to chapter?

ii. Is the document appropriately structured? Does it conform with the Guidelines on the MBAOW site?

iii. Do you have an overall sense that the student has considered a flow of activity involving the broad questions:

What is the question? What is its answer? What evidence led to the answer?

iv. Are there linkages between sections and/or chapters?

v. Where appropriate, is there an Executive Summary?

vi. Are the conclusions germane? Are the ideas in the introduction and conclu- sion appropriately linked?

vii. Is the dissertation documented and referenced in a consistent, academic manner? Is the text free of spelling, punctuation and grammatical errors?

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 68

Strategic Business Project

64

uws-sbp-wb-en-GB August 19, 2014 - 16:45 69

  • Topic 1: An Introduction to Business Research and Your MBA Project Report
    • 1.1 What is business research?
    • 1.2 Approaches to business research
      • 1.2.1 Basic or applied research
      • 1.2.2 Inductive or deductive research
    • 1.3 Planning your MBA project research
    • 1.4 Planning your MBA project proposal
  • Topic 2: Literature Review
    • 2.1 What is a literature review?
    • 2.2 Why is a literature review required?
    • 2.3 Sources
    • 2.4 Searching the literature
    • 2.5 Writing your literature review
    • 2.6 Managing the literature
    • 2.7 Referencing
  • Topic 3: Quantitative Research Methods
    • 3.1 The process of quantitative research
    • 3.2 Data collection techniques
      • 3.2.1 Questionnaire design
      • 3.2.2 Observation
    • 3.3 Quantitative data analysis 1
      • 3.3.1 Presenting quantitative data
    • 3.4 Quantitative data analysis 2
      • 3.4.1 Measures of central tendency
      • 3.4.2 Relationships between variables
      • 3.4.3 Correlation
      • 3.4.4 Hypothesis testing
  • Topic 4: Qualitative Research Methods
    • 4.1 The process of qualitative research
    • 4.2 Data collection techniques
      • 4.2.1 Individual versus group interviews
      • 4.2.2 How many interviews?
      • 4.2.3 Conducting a research interview
      • 4.2.4 The case study approach
    • 4.3 Qualitative data analysis
  • Topic 5: Writing Up Your MBA Project Report
    • 5.1 The written report
    • 5.2 How to structure your MBA project report
    • 5.3 Appendix 5.1

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/2. �ƻ���/SBP Proposal Sample.pdf

University of the West of Scotland

Module Name: Strategic Project Proposal

Module Code: BUSN 11076

Module Co-ordinator: Dr Christian Harrison

What is the Leadership Styles Preference among Millennials

Workforce? A Case Study from AIG Malaysia Insurance Ltd

Student: XYZ Banner ID: B00304074

- 2 -

Table of Contents

1. Contact Details ................................................................................................................... - 3 -

2. Project Title ........................................................................................................................ - 3 -

3. Purpose of Project and Reasons For Choosing it ............................................................... - 3 -

4. Research Questions ........................................................................................................... - 4 -

5. Preliminary Literature Review and Relevant Past Studies …………………………………-5-

6. Source of Data ................................................................................................................... - 7 -

7. Proposed Methodology ...................................................................................................... - 9 -

8. Anticipated Problems ....................................................................................................... - 11 -

9. Expected Schedule…………………………………………………………………………….. - 12-

10. Reference…………………………………………………………………………………………- 13-

- 3 -

1. Contact Details

Name: XYZ

Degree: Master of Business Administration (MBA)

Banner ID: B00304074

Email Address: B00304074@[email protected]

Contact Number: +6012-3161948

2. Project Title

“What is the Leadership Styles Preference among Millennials Workforce? A Case Study from AIG

Malaysia Insurance Ltd”

3. Purpose of Project and Reasons For Choosing The Topic

The researcher works in a multinational company which comprises of three generations of

workforce, namely Baby Boomers (born between 1946 and 1964), Generation X (born between

1965 and 1980) and Millennials (born between 1981 and 2000). Each of these generation

workforces adore specific leadership styles; and managing a team by a superior of different

generation somehow hardly to reach equilibrium among team members. According to Tay (2011),

management’s bigger task is to manage how employees from different generations perceive or

think of each other. If employees perceive that their expectations of others are met, a state of

equilibrium would occur. Leadership traits also vary between these generation workforce. Cheng

et al (2015) discovered that Millennials tends to prefer supportive leadership style where they are

being guided in their early state of their career, whereas Generation Xers X prefer more directive

leadership style, more individualistic, resilient, adaptable and have strong sense of independence.

Thus, the researcher aspires to carry out an in-depth study to analyse the Millennials’ preference

of leadership styles, assess the correlation between each leadership styles amongst Millennials.

In addition, the researcher would analyse the outcome of the survey to determine some critical

factors that are influencing leadership styles preferences among Millennials workforce.

The objective of the project is to determine the preferred leadership styles by Millennials workforce

in AIG, be it transformational, transactional or non-transactional. The researcher believes that

- 4 -

Millennials enthused to be transformational leader such as Steve Jobs who challenge and inspire

others with purpose and excitement. Next, the researcher explores that Millennials’ leadership

style is more incline to relationship-behaviour in comparison to task-behaviour. The researcher

believes that Millennials embrace freedom and individual responsibility, thus task-oriented goals

are not suitable for them. After the researcher established both answers, next step would be

examining Millennials belief on the authenticity of leaders. Upon understanding the leadership

style the Millennials preferred, the research aspires to find out how to manage them effectively.

American International Group mentioned its mission statement encompasses “ (1) they have the

courage to make difficult promises and the integrity to keep them, (2) learn and collaborate to

solve clients' problems, (3) AIG value the diversity of perspectives that comes from all places and

people” as reported in AIG annual report (2005). This research coincides with the mission

statement of AIG especially in relation to integrity and diversity, whereby integrity links to authentic

leadership analysis and diversity links to cross-generation workforce demographics.

4. Research Questions

The research questions are listed as follows:

i) What is the preferred leadership style amongst Millennials in AIG?

→ Hypotheses #1: There is a positive correlation that Millennials prefer

transformational leadership to transactional leadership

ii) How far Situational Leadership Style affecting Millennials workforce in AIG?

→ Hypotheses #2: There is a positive correlation that Millennials prefer supportive

behaviours to directive behaviours of leaders

iii) What is the stand of Millennials on leaders are genuine and real?

→ Hypotheses #3: There is a positive correlation between Millennials and Authentic

Leadership Style

- 5 -

5. Preliminary Literature Review and Relevant Past Studies

Millennials, or sometimes known as Generation Y, is the latest inclusion of workforce globally.

Generally, there are three generations serving as workforce globally now, namely Baby Boomers,

Generation X and Millennials. This generation to some extent is of uniqueness in comparison to

previous generations, who sometimes clueless on how to react to these young people. This

generation is perceived as narcissistic, shallow and selfish by generations older than them (Bolser

& Gosciej, 2015).

Baby Boomers were born between 1946 to 1964, a time of complex changes coupled with major

event like World World II and Kennedy assassination. According to Cates et al. (2013), Baby

Boomers view work as an exciting adventure. The perceived leadership style that is preferred is

mutually and seeks consensus from those involved, which they feel everyone is important and

can make valued contribution. Kaifi et al. (2012) added that Baby Boomers possess traits that are

shared among the members of other generations. In addition, Tay (2011) echoed that their

working philosophy is proactive, whereby they live to work. They do not have many opportunities

to access to computers and technologies during early stage of their career. Thus, they are the

most computer-illiterate among the three generations.

Generation Xers were born between 1965 and 1980. They view work as contractual and difficult

challenges, do not view themselves as the boss, but more of a team player (Cates et al, 2013).

Bolser & Gosciej (2015) also observed that Generation X committed to work, to the team they

work with, and the boss they work for. Generation Xers’ working philosophy is reactive, whereby

they work to live (Tay, 2011). This generation has more access to computers and technology than

Baby Boomers, so they will easily familiarize to technological advancement. Kaifi et al. (2012)

suggested that this generation has proved to be more powerful force in the workforce owing to

their technological proficiencies.

Millennials were born between 1981 and 2000, grown up in the digital age and somehow showed

greater familiarity than Generation X with media, communication and digital technologies, as

mentioned by Kaifi et al. (2012). Dannar (2013) also opined that Millennials are not just

comfortable with technologies; it is an integral part of who they are. This generation is proficient

at the use of computers and technology as it has grown up with it (Cates et al, 2013). They view

work as means to an end, they value a working environment which is fun and provides

- 6 -

opportunities for communication and recognition. They adore career development opportunities

and workplace flexibility.

This project is intended to research on the leadership styles preference of Millennials. In

consideration of numerous leadership theories and styles developed throughout the century, the

researcher decided to limit and focus on transformation leadership, situational leadership and

authentic leadership. Within transformational leadership, leaders emphasize higher motive

development and arouse followers’ motivation by means of creating an inspiring vision of the

future (Bass, 1997). In contrast, transactional leaders rely on a clear defined system of contracts

and rewards. Situational leadership stresses that leadership is composed of both a directive and

a supportive dimension, and that each has to be applied appropriately in a given situation. This

model was developed by Hersey and Blanchard (1969). Effective leadership occurs when the

leader can accurately diagnose the development level of subordinates in a task situation and then

exhibit the prescribed leadership style that matches that situation. Hence, the researcher aims to

investigate whether Millennials is equipped with such ability.

Besides, there were multiple literature reviews on leadership styles and Millennials published in

Malaysia. Cheng et al. (2015) observed that Millennials would prefer a directive leadership style

and an achievement-oriented leadership. It was asserted by the research that Millennials support

clear directions and managerial support from superior. They often choose the best solutions to

achieve goals where older generations would never have considered. Moorthy (2014) found out

that Millennials prefers leaders that are competent, hardworking and accountable of their action.

These traits corresponded with the high preference for idealized influence factors under the

transformational leadership styles.

It is imperative to understand Millennials preferred leadership styles before moving on to manage

them. Once the understanding is established and right strategy is applied, Millennials would not

be deemed as problem makers to an organization, instead they could be the most valuable assets

to the organization. The future of the organization lies in Millennials’ hand.

- 7 -

6. Source of Data

The researcher shall obtain data from both primary and secondary source. Primary data refers to

the first-hand information obtained by the researcher via questionnaires from targeted

respondents, as well as observation gathered during interaction with the respondents. Meanwhile,

secondary data comprises of company annual reports, company profiles, company survey

reports, industry analyses offered by the media and the Internet. Focus will be emphasised on

primary data as secondary data could possibly become obsolete, and not meeting the specific

needs of the particular situation or setting. Hence, it is important to refer to sources that offer

current and up-to-date information.

Consequently, the researcher will gather all secondary data pertaining to AIG Malaysia from the

sources that offer current and up-to-date information. Company profile, organizational structure,

product offerings, market penetration, financial performance, market shares and the likes will also

be obtained from reliable source. Other publicly published materials such as company annual

reports, industry journals and industry newsletter would be amassed too.

In respect of primary data, the researcher is intended to distribute questionnaires to 169 targeted

respondents below age 35 that are chosen randomly. Population was sampled through the use

of simple random sampling. Sekaran & Bougie (2013) observed that all elements in the population

are considered and each element has an equal chance of being chosen as the subject. The

sample size of 169 is derived from population size of 300 (total number of AIG Malaysia

employees) based on confidence level of 95% and confidence interval of 5%. The calculation of

sample size is performed via Surveysystem.com website (URL:

www.surveysystem.com/sscalc.htm).

AIG Malaysia has over 60 years of experience operating in Malaysia. It is a wholly-owned

company by AIG based in New York. Currently, AIG Malaysia has 15 branches nationwide with

300 employees spanning across three working generations, namely the Baby Boomers,

Generation X and Millennials. In pursuit of answers to the research questions, the researcher

plans to use the following tools:

(i) General Demographics of Respondents

- 8 -

This section consists of six (6) basic questions pertaining to respondent’s gender, age,

working experience, leadership experience, working designation and involvement in

non-working related activities provided by AIG.

(ii) Part 1: Multifactor Leadership Questionnaire (MLQ)

This questionnaire consist of 21 items which measures respondent’s leadership on

seven factors related to transformational leadership. It is extracted and adapted to use

from Northouse (2013). This questionnaire is using Likert system with four (4) options

ranging from 1–Never to 4–Always. If the respondent answers all items appropriately,

the result will demonstrate leadership preference of the respondent between

transformational, transactional or nontransactional (laissez-faire).

(iii) Part 2: Task and Relationship Questionnaire (TRQ)

This questionnaire consist of 10 items which measures respondent’s inclination

towards task-behaviour or relationship-behaviour. It is extracted and adapted to use

from Northouse (2013). This questionnaire is using Likert system with four (4) options

ranging from 1–Never to 4–Always. However, the researcher has intentionally

removed the option for “Sometimes” as answer. Past experiences indicated that local

respondents occasionally take a neutral standpoint when such option is provided. If

the respondent answers all items appropriately, the result will demonstrate leadership

styles of the respondent between directive-behaviour and supportive-behaviour.

(iv) Part 3: Authentic Leadership Questionnaire (ALQ)

This questionnaire consist of 16 items which measures respondent’s authentic

leadership by assessing four components. It is extracted and adapted to use from

Northouse (2013). This questionnaire is using Likert system with four (4) options

ranging from 1–Strongly Disagree to 4–Strongly Agree. Again, the researcher has

intentionally removed the option for “Neutral” as answer. If the respondent answers all

items appropriately, the result will demonstrate respondent has stronger or weaker

authentic leadership.

- 9 -

7. Proposed Methodology

Sekaran and Bougie (2013) pointed that business research can be described as a systematic and

organized effort to investigate a specific problem encountered in the work setting which leads to

a solution. Kothari (2014) echoed the same view by stating that research is to find out the truth

which is hidden and which has not been discovered as yet. Hence, the researcher aims to answer

the research questions by using hybrid methodology of both quantitative approach and qualitative

approach.

In quantitative approach, the researcher will be distributing questionnaires to targeted

respondents of sample size of 169. Questionnaires is a powerful quantitative instrument as it

employs strategies of inquiry such as survey, and collects data on predetermined format that yield

statistical data (Creswell, 2003). This source will provide the main feedback for data analysis in

answering all the three research questions. The data will be processed electronically via statistical

software such as Microsoft Excel or SPSS to determine the relativity of this case study. On the

other hand, qualitative approach comprises of observations and interviews to targeted

respondents. The researcher collects open-ended, emerging data with the primary intent of

developing themes from the data source. The result could provide some understanding on critical

factors that are influencing leadership styles preferences among Millennials workforce. Creswell

(2003) recognised that all methods have limitations; researchers felt that biases inherent in any

single method could neutralize or cancel the biases of other methods. Consequently, by applying

mixed method approach (both quantitative and qualitative), the researcher would able to keep the

degree of bias at minimum.

With respect to research question #1, the researcher is adapting Multifactor Leadership

Questionnaire (MLQ) to appraise targeted respondents on their preferred leadership styles.

Multifactor Leadership Questionnaire was firstly developed by Bernard M. Bass and Bruce J.

Avolio in 1992. This questionnaire incorporates seven different factors, which measures self-

perception of leadership behaviours and measurement of leadership itself. Based on the grouping

of these seven factors that distinguishes amongst transformational leadership style, transactional

leadership style or non- transactional leadership style (laissez-faire), the researcher will have

better comprehension of Millennials preference of leadership style.

Next, the researcher is adapting Task and Relationship Questionnaire to devise whether

Millennials’ personal styles in leadership is more incline to task behaviours or relationship

- 10 -

behaviours. According to Northouse (2013), situational leadership style consists of the behaviour

pattern of a person who attempts to influence others, which includes both directive (task)

behaviours and supportive (relationship) behaviours. Bresman (2015) indicated that Millennials

want their managers to empower their employees, their manager is technical expert in the field

they are managing, their manager is a role model for them and their manager gives them goal-

oriented fwork. In addition, Millennials often talk about work-life balance, prioritize their life and

early retirements. This generalization of Millennials suggested that their leadership styles’

inclination is more to relationship and supportive behaviour rather than task and directive

behaviour. Hence, the researcher is eager to ascertain the above hypothesis.

In respect of research question #3, the researcher is adapting Authentic Leadership

Questionnaire (ALQ) to assess the belief of Millennials that leaders are authentic, genuine and

trustworthy. Authentic Leadership Questionnaire (ALQ) was created by Walumbwa and

associates (2008). This 16-item instrument measures four factors of authentic leadership, namely

self-awareness, internalized moral perspective, balanced processing and relational transparency

which serve as the foundation of authentic leadership. This questionnaire is projected for practical

applications to help respondent to understand the complexities of authentic leadership. Bresman

(2015) discovered that Millennials has chosen high future earnings as the most attractive theme

in a managerial/ leadership role. The society is demanding for genuine and trustworthy leadership

as a result of major leadership failures and corporate scandals in public and private sectors, such

as AIG, Enron and Worldcom. Consequently, measurement of how authentic, genuine and

trustworthy of Millennials leadershio is essential in their pursuit to become the leaders of

tomorrow.

- 11 -

A proposed research framework is depicted in Figure 1.

Figure 1: Research Framework

Based on the above illustrated research framework, the researcher wishes to develop a robust

conclusion that answers research questions which well supported by high data accuracy. These

valuable findings would enable the researcher to present Millennials preferred leadership style to

the management team of AIG, thus the management team able to develop and lead this group of

young workforce to achieve greater heights. In addition, by understanding Millennials preference

on this topic, AIG is well prepared and stand out from other companies in terms of talent retention

as well as talent acquisition.

8. Anticipated Problems

The researcher would anticipate some challenges when conducting the case study, namely:

i) Difficulties in collecting all distributed questionnaires on time from all parties

ii) Prospective likelihood of incomplete questionnaires received from all parties

iii) Returned questionnaires with answers not suitable for analysis

Variables

Research Questions

1. What is the preferred leadership style amongst Millennials in AIG?

2. How far Situational Leadership Style affecting Millennials workforce in

AIG?

3. What is the stand of Millennials on leaders are genuine and real?

Research Methodology

 Questionnaires

 Observations

 Interviews

 Data Analysis

 Research Findings

 Conclusion

 Recommendation

Leadership Styles

Transformational Leadership

Situational Leadership

Authentic Leadership

- 12 -

Nonetheless, the researcher shall use his best endeavours to minimise the above scenario by

emphasizing the importance of the research. This is done via repetitive reminders to the

respondent during distribution of questionnaires.

9. Expected Schedule

This research project is scheduled to be completed before submission due date, i.e. 21st April

2017. The progress timeline is shown in Figure 3.

W 1 W 2 W 3 W 4 W 1 W 2 W 3 W 4 W 1 W 2 W 3 W 4 W 1 W 2 W 3 W 4 W 1 W 2 W 3 W 4

1 Complete Chapter

1 01/12/16 31/12/16

2 Complete Chapter

2 01/01/17 21/01/17

3

Distribute

Questionnaires &

Complete Chapter

3

22/01/17 18/02/17

4

Analysis of Data &

Complete Chapter

4

19/02/17 11/03/17

5 Complete Chapter 5 12/03/17 01/04/17

6 Review Project

Paper Final Draft 02/04/17 08/04/17

7 Final Discussion

with Supervisor 09/04/17 14/04/17

8 Completion &

Submission 15/04/17 15/04/17

Jan-17 Feb-17 Mar-17 Apr-17No Task Name Start

Date

Finish

Date

Dec-16

Figure 3: Gantt Chart of Strategic Project Paper Timeline

10. Reference

American International Group, Inc. (2015) 2015 Annual Report. [Online] Available from:

http://www.aig.com/content/dam/aig/america-canada/us/documents/investor-relations/2015-

annual-report.pdf [Accessed: 15th November 2016]

- 13 -

Bolser, K & Gosciej, R. (2015) Millennials: Multi-Generational Leaders Staying Connected.

Journal of Practical Consulting. 5 (2), pp.1-9.

Bresman, H. (2015) What Millennials Want from Work, Charted Across the World. Harvard

Business Review, 23rd February 2015, pp.1-5.

Cates, S.V., Cojanu, K.A. & Pettine, S. (2013) Can You Lead Effectively? An Analysis of the

Leadership Styles of Four Generations of American Employees. International Review of

Management and Business Research. 2 (4), pp.1025-1041.

Cheng, W.H, Isa. M.F. & Tantasuntisakul, W. (2015) A Comparative Study of Leadership Styles

and Leadership Traits between Gen X & Y: Malaysia as a Case Study. Australian Journal of

Basic and Applied Sciences. 9 (28), pp.39-44.

Chou, S.Y. (2012) Millennials in the Workplace: A Conceptual Analysis of Millennials’ Leadership

and Followership Styles. International Journal of Human Resource Studies. 2 (2), pp.71-83.

Creswell, J.W. (2003) Research Design Qualitative, Quantitative, and Mixed Methods

Approaches. 2nd ed. United States of America: Sage Publication Inc.

Dannar, P.R. (2013) Millennials: What They Offer Our Organizations and How Leaders Can Make

Sure They Deliver. The Journal of Values-Based Leadership. 6 (1), pp.1-12.

Howe, H. & Strauss, W. (2007) The Next 20 Years: How Customer and Workforce Attitudes Will

Evolve. Harvard Business Review, July-August Edition, pp.1−12.

Kothari, C.R. (2004) Research Methodology. 2nd ed. India: New Age International (P) Ltd.

Kaifi, B.A, Nafei, W.A., Khanfar, N.M & Kaifi, M.M. (2012) A Multi-Generational Workforce:

Managing and Understanding Millennials. International Journal of Business and Management.

7 (24), pp.88-93.

Northouse, P. G. (2013) Leadership: Theory and Practise. London: Sage Publications Inc.

- 14 -

Moorthy, R. (2014) An Empirical Study of Leadership Theory Preferences among Gen Y in

Malaysia. Review of Integrative Business & Economics Research. 3 (2), pp.398-420.

Sekaran, U & Bougie, R. (2013) Research Methods for Business. 6th ed. Scotland: John Wiley &

Sons, Inc.

Tay, A. (2011) Managing Generational Diversity at the Workplace: Expectation and Perceptions

of Different Generations of Employees. African Journal of Business Management. 5 (2),

pp.249-255.

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/2. �ƻ���/Sample SBP Proposal( For Disussion).pdf

1

Module Name: Strategic Business Project

Module Code: BUSN 11076

Module Coordinator: Dr Nondas Pitticas

Proposal

“EVALUATION ON BUSINESS PROCESS OUTSOURCING DECISION. A CASE STUDY ON A MULTINATIONAL COMPANY”

STUDENT: XYZ

BANNER ID: B00XXXXXX

2

Table of Contents

1. Contact Details ………………………………………………………………………….

2. Project Title………………………………………………………………………………

3. Purpose of Project and Reasons for Choosing It…………………………………………

4. Research Questions………………………………………………………………………

5. Preliminary Literature Review and Relevant Past Studies………………………………

6. Source of Data……………………………………………………………………………

7. Proposed Methodology…………………………………………………………………..

8. Anticipated Problems…………………………………………………………………….

9. Expected Schedule……………………………………………………………………….

10. Reference…………………………………………………………………………………

3

1. Contact Details

Name: XYZ

Programme: Master of Business Administration

Banner ID: B00XXXXXX

Email Address: B00XXXXXXdentmail.uws.ac.uk

Contact Number: 603-XXXXXXXX

2. Project Title

“Evaluation on Business Process Outsourcing Decision. A Case Study On A

Multinational Company”

3. Purpose of Project and Reasons for Choosing the Topic

The researcher has been working in the Finance Department in a multinational company

(MNC) for the past twenty-seven years. The MNC, Ecolab Sdn. Bhd. is a wholly owned

subsidiary of a Fortune 500 company, Ecolab Inc. which is listed in the New York

Stock Exchange. It offers premium cleaning and sanitizing products and cleaning

solutions to food beverage, hospitality and cleaning industries. The local management

consists of people employed locally to run the subsidiary company, adhering to global

policies set by the head office in United States (US). The local management reports to a

Regional Office in Singapore, who makes decision on management matters relating to

4

all the various functions, namely Sales and Marketing, Supply Chain and Logistics,

Finance, Human Resources and Facilities. Initially started as a very small company,

there were little investments on assets, technologies and manpower was kept to a

minimal. Throughout the years, the subsidiary has expanded tremendously, moving into

bigger premises and has sought the services of third-party logistics company for its

logistic functions. At the back office, the functional duties that comprise of accounting,

supply chain and sales administration had increased significantly, has not been out

sourced, the work being managed by a team of support staff who are highly experienced

and competent in their own areas of, amidst having heavy workload and tied reporting

deadlines to the US head office.

It has been a topic of discussion amongst the senior management of the company that

steps have to be taken to help its employees maintain a work-life balance, since this has

been the culture of Ecolab for a long time. At the same time, the company must

strategically work towards reducing operational costs whilst maintaining employees

work efficiency. To reduce workload, the management is considering getting additional

headcount to do the extra work which would mean incurring additional costs. The

consideration would be to outsource the work to an outsource service provider which

might be less costly and more efficient.

The reason for choosing outsourcing as the topic of study is for the researcher to assist

in determining the feasibility of outsourcing of Ecolab’s business processes. The result

of the research will show the impact on the company’s management decisions and

besides that it will also show how the move is going to affect its employees well- being

and feelings. The researcher will do so by exploring the variables influencing

outsourcing that is benefit, the employees and management decisions. Relationships

5

between the perception of outsourcing, job satisfaction and employees’ competencies

will be evaluated in the study. There were some studies done in the past that determined

success from theoretical point of view, but the researcher believes that besides the cost

benefits, the management of Ecolab will need to consider other problems that might

arise. The result of this research will also provide the management with some hind sight

on the consequences of outsourcing.

4. Research Questions

The research intends to answer the following questions:

i) What is the extend of benefit of outsourcing in terms of efficiency?

Hypothesis #1: There is positive correlation between outsourcing and

efficiency.

ii) What is the implication of outsourcing of functions on job satisfaction of

employees?

Hypothesis #2: There is positive correlation between outsourcing and

employee job satisfaction.

iii) What is the effect of outsourcing on the company’s focus on core competencies?

Hypothesis #3: There is no positive correlation between outsourcing and the

company’s focus on core competencies.

5. Preliminary Literature Review and Relevant Past Studies

The term “outsourcing” came from the term “outside resourcing”. Outsourcing

refers to contracting one or more activities of a company to a third party who

provides a service in their specialized area (Brown and Allen, 2001, p.2530).

6

This term “outsourcing” was first used in the 1980s when companies started sub-

contracting functions relating to information systems to service providers (Espino

Rodriguez and Padron-Robaina 2004: Hussey and Jenster 2003).

When business processes are outsourced, there is fewer capital investments

required for process improvements, resulting in lower employment and

administrative costs (Rittenberg and Covaleski, 43 2001; Espino Rodríguez and

Padrón-Robaina, 2004; Kotabe and Mol, 2009).

Since the 1990s, Business Process Outsourcing (BPO) is becoming a trend in

today’s business environment. BPO is believed to benefit companies by lowering

costs on labour and will increase productivity, and companies will have more free

resources to focus on the companies’ core business activities (Hamzah et al., 2010;

O ‘Connor and Martinsons, 2006).

Past studies have shown that the reasons companies outsource are:

1. Lowering and controlling operating cost, as in labour costs and training costs

2. Can have better knowledge and technological resources from the

service provider

3. Increasing efficiency for time consuming functions by streamlining the

functions

4. Freeing internal resources as in labour, and using the free resources to focus

on more profitable activities

Bigger companies find that outsourcing provide better flexibility on budgeting of

costs on labour and related expenses. As compared to having to hire employees to do

the work they would rather pay for the services when needed, in that sense they have

better control on expenses related to labour. These companies can save on training

7

costs on own employees, at the same time they can mitigate risk of incurring more

cost on redundant staff.

Generally, the business functions that are outsourced are the non-core functions,

namely accounting, human resources, warehousing and logistics and administration

services. (Chanvarasuth, 2008) (Hecker & Kretschmer, 2010)

In previous surveys conducted on small manufacturing enterprises, it was found that

these companies are able to reduce their working capital, increase their tax efficiency

and reduce their capital expenditure when they outsource their accounting activities

(CIMA, 2008; Hamzah et al., 2010).

On the other hand, Benson and Littler (2002) in a study did not find any relationship

between outsourcing and companies’ performance from a survey done on 1222 large

Australian firms.

In the current years, despite having some costs advantages, some companies have

reversed their decisions to outsource. Initially, these companies took risks to

experiment with outsourcing without really understanding the connection between its

the internal tasks and the people responsible for the tasks and the results did not turn

out as expected. Some other drawbacks of outsourcing are miscommunications

between the company and service providers, quality of service and delays in

providing support when needed. Other factors found to influence the decision to

drawback on outsourcing are innovation of products, improved transportation and

when there is a need for direct communication with own employees. These are some

of the factors that have made companies reconsider their decision to outsource their

business processes.

8

Aside from the financial benefit derived from BPO there are some unintended

consequences. Many of these relates to employees and of employers. Outsourcing is

found to affect the level of job satisfaction of employees which in turn affects their

loyalty, efficiency and their quality of life. When employees see their fellow

colleagues ‘jobs being outsourced, they will be thinking when their turn and this is

causes stress in the workplace. The result will be employees will withdraw the

loyalty to the company. Stress in the workplace can cause a lot of other problems like

interpersonal conflict between employees, reduced work efficiency and lowers

quality of work.

6. Source of Data

The researcher intends to use both primary and the secondary for this research study.

Cohen (1989) defines a questionnaire as a self-report instrument that is used for

collecting data for research study. The researcher shall gather primary data by

distributing survey questionnaires to the targeted employees of the company. As for

secondary data, the researcher will be looking at:

i) Internal secondary data which is in the form of annual reports of Ecolab,

various company survey reports, data analysis reports of the employees like

leave and absenteeism reports by Human Resources department.

ii) External secondary data from the published sources like books, magazines

and most conveniently, the journals and past studies by researchers that is

easily obtainable from the internet.

Upon doing the preliminary review on this topic, the researcher found that there were

not many studies done in this area. The researcher intends to rely more on primary

9

data to derive the answers to the research questions. As such, the research

questionnaires will be the focus of this study. The researcher intends to select a

bigger population of samples, and will include all the different functions namely

Finance, Supply Chain, Logistics, Human Resource, Facilities, Administration,

Safety and the Sales and Marketing divisions throughout all the branches in Malaysia.

At the same time, the researcher will conduct interviews with selected management

levels employees to get additional data for more conclusive answers. Observations

and interaction with the employees throughout the time of research period will assist

to provide clearer views on this study.

Ecolab has been in operation in Malaysia for twenty-eight years, after acquiring

another business, it now has a total of 230 employees and has 6 branches throughout

the whole of Malaysia. In respect of collection of primary data, the researcher intends

to disseminate survey questionnaires to 100 targeted employees. The researcher feels

that employees in all the functions should be involved in the survey. To ensure that

employees in all the functions in the company is involved in the study, the researcher

will randomly select 10 employees from each function in which one of them will be

at management level.

The format of the questionnaire is as follows:

General Demographic of Respondents

This section consists of six (6) basic questions relating to the respondents’

information, pertaining to:

~ Age

~ Gender

10

~ Work Designation

~ Number of years working in Ecolab

~ Name of Function in Ecolab

~ Involvement in Other Functions in Ecolab

(i) Part 1: Efficiency Assessment Questionnaire (EAQ)

This questionnaire consists of 25 items that will assess employees’ knowledge on

outsourcing, and how supportive they are on the move to outsource their job

functions.

The questionnaire is designed using the Likert system with four options ranging from

1- Strongly Agree to 4- Strongly Disagree. The researcher has excluded the

“Neutral” option to avoid “neutral’ answers from respondents.

(ii) Part 2: Employees’ Job Satisfaction Questionnaire (EJQ)

This questionnaire consists of 15 items that measures employees’ concerns relating

to the move to outsource their job responsibilities. The questionnaire is designed

using the Likert system with four options ranging from 1-Strongly Agree to 4-

Strongly Disagree. In this part, the researcher intends to exclude neutral response to

get more positive results.

(iii) Part 3: Core Competencies Questionnaire (CCQ)

This questionnaire consists of 15 items that measures the effect of the move to

BPO on Ecolab’s focus on core competencies. The questionnaire is designed using

11

the Likert system with four options ranging from 1-Strongly Agree to 4- Strongly

Disagree. As in Part 1 and 2 above, the “neutral” response will be excluded.

7. Proposed Methodology

Avasarikar (2007) pointed out that primary data is gathered for an objective and is

adapted to the needs of the researcher and will focus explicitly on the researcher’s

current study. The researcher will be using primary data collected via the

questionnaires, which is one of the most important research instruments in this study.

The data collected from the sample population selected by the researcher will more

accurate and might not be unbiased.

The researcher will use the quantitative approach to answer the research questions. In

quantitative approach method, data collected which are in numbers or values are then

statistically analysed into various formats that will help the researcher to answer the

research questions. Quantitative method requires a shorter time to complete

compared to qualitative method, and it is much easier to make a comparison of the

findings.

In the questionnaire, the close-ended questions designed by the researcher will

narrow down undesired responses from the employees. It will be easier for the

researcher to analyse the data if the responses are fixed and direct (Patton, 1990) at

the same time many questions can be answered in a short time.

The researcher intends to send out 100 questionnaires to targeted employees selected

based on their functions, and supervisory level. The data collected from this source

will form the basis for data analysis to answer the three research questions. This data

12

will be processed using electronic tool in Microsoft Excel format called the SPSS to

derive the result of the study.

In Part #1 of the questionnaire, the researcher will concentrate on questions that will

assess the employees understanding of what business process outsourcing is and its

relevance in improving efficiency in workplace. The result may indicate the support

of the employees and management on the move to outsourcing.

Part #2 of the questionnaire will indicate the response of the employees if their job

responsibilities are outsourced to service provider. The result will highlight either the

positive or negative effect of outsourcing on the feelings of the employees which will

affect their job satisfaction level. Based on this result, the researcher will be able to

gage the stress level of the employees when their jobs are outsourced.

Next in Part #3, the researcher is questioning whether the benefits derived from

outsourcing is going to have an impact on the company performance and its

employees. The result will assist the management to change their management plan

going forward to focus on more productive action plan that will benefit both the

company and its employees.

13

The framework of the proposed research is as shown in Figure 1.

Figure 1: Research Framework

As illustrated in the framework, the researcher will be able to conclude and make

recommendations to the management of the company on the viability of outsourcing

business processes as a choice of managing workload of the back- office functions.

The questionnaires distributed to the employees for the study provide highly accurate

data for the management to plan for appropriate action to be taken for cost savings,

VVVaaarrriiiaaabbbllleeesss

Employee

Job

Satisfaction

Core

Competency

RRReeessseeeaaarrrccchhh QQQuuueeessstttiiiooonnnsss

1. What is the extend of benefit of

outsourcing in terms of efficiency?

2. What is the implication of outsourcing

of functions on the existing

employees?

3. What is the effect of outsourcing

on the company’s focus on core

competencies?

Efficiency

• Data Analysis

• Research Findings

• Conclusion

• Recommendation

RRReeessseeeaaarrrccchhh

MMMeeettthhhooodddooolllooogggyyy

1. Observations

2. Questionnaires

3. Interviews

14

work efficiency and at the same time retaining employee’s engagement in their

current jobs.

8. Anticipated Problems

During the process of the case study, the researcher may encounter the following

problems:

i. The researcher may encounter difficulty in getting back all the questionnaires

distributed as some employees may not want to provide their opinion on the

research questions

ii. The employees may not be truthful when answering the questionnaires

iii. The questionnaires returned may not be complete, to be of use to the researcher

iv. The non-response rate may be higher than anticipated by the researcher

The researcher shall minimize the above anticipated problems by highlighting the

importance of the research to the employees of the company. Further, the researcher

who is a senior employee of the company, will be able to get support from working

colleagues to assist in the research. The management will also be able to help if

assistance is needed as the research study will be used by the management of Ecolab

as a reference for future management plans.

15

9. Expected Schedule

The expected schedule of the research project is shown in the Gantt chart below. The

research project is to be completed and submitted on 25th March 2019, before the due

date on 31st March 2019.

16

10. References

Ajayi, Victor. (2017). Primary Sources of Data and Secondary Sources of Data.

10.13140/RG.2.2.24292.68481.

Bryman, A. and Bell, E. (2015) Business Research Methods ,4th Edition, Oxford,

Oxford University Press

Cameron, S. and Price, D. (2009) Business Research Methods: A Practical Approach,

London, CIPD

Carr, L. T. (1994). The strengths and weaknesses of quantitative and qualitative

research: what method for nursing? Journal of advanced nursing, 20(4), 716-721.

Chanvarasuth, P., 2008. The Impact of Business Process Outsourcing on Firm Performance.

[Online]

Available at: http://dblp.uni-trier.de/db/conf/itng/itng2008.html

[Accessed 18 10 2018].

Chotiwetchakarn, S., 2003. The importance of outsource. Management Accounting

Business Newspaper, Thai Business, March 10-16, 2003

17

Corbett, M.F., 2002. Managing the people impact of outsourcing. Michael F. Corbett

& Associates Ltd., International Association of Outsourcing Professionals (IAOP),

Lagrangeville, NY., USA., September 2002.

Corbett, M.F., 2004. The Outsourcing Revolution: Why it Makes Sense and How to

Do it Right. Kaplan Publishing, Dearborn, ISBN: 9780793192144, Pages: 244.

Gewald, H., 2010. The perceived benefits of business process outsourcing: An

empirical study of the German banking industry. Strat. Outsourcing: Int. J., 3: 89-105.

Giertl, G., Potkány, M. & Gejdoš, M., 2015. Evaluation of Outsourcing Efficiency through

Costs for its Use. Procedia. Economics and finance, , 26(), pp. 1080-1085.

Hecker, A. & Kretschmer, T., 2010. Outsourcing decisions: the effect of scale economies and

market structure. Strategic Organization, , 8(2), pp. 155-175.

Henrik Agndal, Fredrik Nordin, (2009) "Consequences of outsourcing for

organizational capabilities: Some experiences from best

practice", Benchmarking: An International Journal, Vol. 16 Issue: 3, pp.316-

334, https://doi.org/10.1108/14635770910961353

J, H., 2008. Probing the benefits of outsourcing.. Health estate, , 62(5), pp. 28-29.

Miller, J. A., 2008. A total benefits strategy is a valuable approach in HR outsourcing.

Employment Relations Today, , 34(4), pp. 55-61.

18

Mary C Lacity, Shaji A Khan and Aihua Yan, Review of the empirical business

services sourcing literature: an update and future directions, Journal of Information

Technology, 10.1057/jit.2016.2, 31, 3, (269-328), (2016).

McLeod, S. A. (2017, Dec 05). Qualitative vs. quantitative research. Retrieved from

https://www.simplypsychology.org/qualitative-quantitative.html

Peslak, A. R., 2011. Outsourcing and offshore outsourcing of information technology in

major corporations. Management Research Review, , 35(1), pp. 14-31.

Sarode, A. P. & Gade, S., 2012. An analysis of factors affecting outsourcing of

human resource. Journal of Commerce and Management Thought, , 3(1), pp. 112-

121

Steven Mints,2011.Outsourcing Effects Workplace Satisfaction. [Online]

Available at: https://www.workplaceethicsadvice.com/2011/09/outsourcing-effects-

workplace-satisfaction.html [Accessed 17 10 2018].

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/2. �ƻ���/Student Proposal.pdf

A Student Research Proposal

Lian was a student from China. Lian was interested in the applicability of organisational

citizenship behaviour theory to Chinese workers. An abbreviated version of Lian’s research

proposal follows. It has been deliberately modified to allow you to evaluate and improve it by

working through the case study questions.

Title: The applicability of organisational citizenship behaviour theory to a Chinese

organisation.

Background

The early definition of organisational citizenship behaviour (OCB) viewed this as discretionary

behaviours by employees that were not recognised through the reward system (Organ 1988;

Organ et al. 2006). Partly because such behaviours could subsequently be recognised through

reward, OCB was redefined as ‘performance that supports the social and psychological

environment’ within which work occurs (Organ 1997: 95). It has been adopted by researchers

such as Bolino et al. (2002) to indicate situations where employees work beyond contractual

requirements to support one another, to subordinate individual interests to organisational

ones and to demonstrate organisational commitment. In this way OCBs may contribute to

organisational performance and potentially offer a source of competitive advantage.

Podsakoff et al. (2009) report finding over 650 published articles on OCB, mainly examining

the categories of behaviour that make up OCB (its dimensions), what causes employees to

engage in these behaviours (the determinants or antecedents of OCB) and how OCB is related

to these other variables. An early, influential study to identify its dimensions used interviews

with managers in a manufacturing company to ‘identify instances of helpful, but not

absolutely required job behaviour’ to help to define OCB (Smith et al. 1983). This and other

early studies led to the identification of five categories of OCBs (Organ 1988). These were

labelled as altruism (helping a co-worker with a workplace task); civic virtue (participating in

the organisation); conscientiousness (working beyond the minimum requirements for the

job); courtesy (considering how one’s own behaviour might affect others and acting to

facilitate harmony); and sportsmanship (not complaining even in less than ideal situations)

(e.g. Organ 1988). Further research led to new dimensions of OCB being proposed (Organ et

al. 2006), although these five original categories have remained the most commonly tested.

However, continuing to use some of these dimensions of OCB and the measurement scales

associated with them (Organ 1988; Podsakoff et al. 1990) has been questioned for two

important reasons. Firstly, the nature of work has changed since the 1980s and 1990s.

Manufacturing and manual work is now less important in many economies while knowledge

work is much more important. Based on research, Dekas et al. (2013) developed an OCB scale

for knowledge workers that reflects the nature of knowledge-based work, such as working

flexibly and taking personal initiative. This new scale overlaps with some earlier OCB

dimensions but replaces or eliminates outdated items related to willingly obeying rules or

regimented working practices.

Secondly, questions have been asked about the transferability of OCB scales to other cultures.

OCB studies may apply only to the cultural context within which they are conducted (Choi

2009). The applicability of OCB to other cultural settings therefore requires further research.

Hui et al.

(2004) examined the relationships between psychological contract constructs and OCBs in

China. They adopted the OCB scale developed by Podsakoff et al. (1990) (see earlier) and, in

part, found that that more research is required to understand how culture affects the

applicability of OCB.

Farh et al. (1997) examined the relationships between organisational justice theory and OCBs

in China, using a Chinese OCB scale they developed. They found that the relationships

between organisational justice and OCB were moderated by cultural (attitudes about either

modernity or tradition) and gender factors. Some behaviour of Chinese employees may be

due to socialisation or broader cultural norms and be more personally focused than

organisationally related (Farh et al. 1997; Hui et al. 2004). This raises questions about the

applicability of OCB in China and whether organisational justice and psychology contract

constructs may be determinants or antecedents of OCB. In addition, Hui et al. (2004) point

out that organisational type may affect OCB; for example, they cite research saying that

Chinese employees may prefer working for a foreign-owned company rather than a state-

owned enterprise.

Research question and research objectives

The research question is:

To what extent are organisational citizenship behaviour, organisational justice and

psychological contract theories applicable to Chinese organisations and why?

The research objectives are:

1. To identify suitable measurement scales for each theory, to use in the case study

Chinese organisation.

2. To examine the relationship in the case study organisation between findings from

the organisational justice scale and findings from the organisational citizenship

behaviour scale.

3. To examine the relationship in the case study organisation between findings from

the psychological contract scale and findings from the organisational citizenship

behaviour scale.

4. To examine the relationship between findings in the case study organisation from

the organisational citizenship behaviour scale and findings in other national

contexts from organisational citizenship behaviour research.

5. To draw conclusions from the relationships observed in objectives 2, 3 and 4, to

evaluate the applicability of these concepts in a Chinese organisation.

Method

Research design

This research is designed to test the applicability of these theories in a case study, Chinese

organisation. The research will use a survey strategy incorporating existing scales from peer-

reviewed, high-quality academic journals. The research will be cross-sectional in nature.

Participants

The intended participants in this study work for [company name] in China. Its management

have agreed to grant me access to a representative sample of employees drawn from the

different grades and occupations and between males and females employed within the

organisation [email attached]. I am currently in correspondence with the manager of the

human resource department to finalise a stratified random sample to represent the

characteristics of the organisation’s workforce. It is envisaged that the sample size will be 200

employees.

Techniques

The scales for organisational citizenship behaviour, organisational justice and the

psychological contract will be incorporated into a questionnaire that will also collect data

about respondents’ demographic characteristics. This questionnaire will be administered in

Chinese. It will be checked for accuracy of translation and pilot tested by some of my fellow

students. Amendments will be made where necessary. It will then be administered in paper

form. My data will be analysed quantitatively using IBM SPSS Statistics. A range of statistical

techniques will be used to analyse these data and the results from these will be used to

identify relationships between the concepts identified in the research objectives and to allow

comparison with previously published research.

Ethical considerations and procedures

I will compose a letter to be sent to members of the sample that informs them about who I

am and the purpose of my research project, and to assure them that their responses to each

of the questionnaire items will be seen and used only by me. Respondents will not be asked

for their name on the questionnaire. The questionnaire will ask for only limited personal data

about each participant [for example, whether they are male or female as previous research

has found this to be a significant factor in the applicability of organisational justice and

organisational citizenship behaviours in a Chinese context (Farh et al. 1997)].

Completed questionnaires will be posted into a sealed container that will be returned to me

to ensure respondent confidentiality and the anonymity of the data that they provide. These

questionnaires will be given an anonymous code and the data they contain entered into a

spreadsheet by me. Once I have input the data and it has been checked carefully to ensure

accuracy the questionnaires will be shredded by me.

Ensuring confidentiality and anonymity should mean that no harm should result from

participating in this research. Part of my covering letter will state that participation is entirely

voluntary and if an intended participant does not wish to take part, they are not under any

obligation to do so. Another matching employee will be sent a copy of my letter and asked if

they would like to receive a copy of my questionnaire. If he or she is willing to complete the

questionnaire, he or she will be informed to post it personally into the sealed container.

Timelines

Resources

I will be responsible for producing and copying the questionnaire. I will pay for the cost of

posting these to China. I also have access to IBM SPSS Statistics and am competent in the

analytical techniques required to analyse the data and interpret this analysis. The company

has kindly agreed to pay the costs of returning the completed questionnaires to me. Once I

have received these questionnaires I will be responsible for inputting the data into the

software

to analyse it. There should not be any other resource requirements in order to be able to

undertake this research project.

Choose research area

Preliminary research

Decide research topic

Decide methodology

Submit/present proposal

Finalise methodology

Conduct research

Analyse data

Write up

Submit assignment

W k

9

W k

1 0

W k

1 1

W k

6

W k

7

W k

8

W k

2 4

W k

2 3

W k

1 2

W k

1 3

W k

1 4

W k

1 5

W k

1 6

W k

1 7

W k

1 8

W k

1 9

W k

2 0

W k

2 1

W k

2 2

References

Bolino, M.C., Turnley, W.H. and Bloodgood, J.M. (2002) ‘Citizenship behaviour and the

creation of social capital in organizations’, Academy of Management Review, Vol. 27, No. 4,

pp. 505–22.

Choi, J.N. (2009) ‘Collective dynamics of citizenship behaviour: What group characteristics

promote group-level helping?’, Journal of Management Studies, Vol. 46, No. 8, pp. 1396–420.

Dekas, K.H., Bauer, T.N., Welle, B., Kurkoski, J. and Sullivan, S. (2013) ‘Organizational

citizenship behavior, version 2.0: A review and qualitative investigation of OCBs for

knowledge workers at Google and beyond’, Academy of Management Perspectives, Vol. 27,

No. 3, pp. 219–37.

Farh, J.L., Earley, P.C. and Lin, S.C. (1997) ‘Impetus for action: A cultural analysis of justice and

organizational--citizenship behaviour in Chinese society’, Administrative Science Quarterly,

Vol. 42, No. 3, pp. 421–44.

Hui, C., Lee, C. and Rousseau, D.M. (2004) ‘Psychological contract and organizational

citizenship ­behaviour in China: Generalizability and Instrumentality’, Journal of Applied

Psychology, Vol. 89, No. 2, pp. 311–21.

Organ, D.W. (1988) Organizational Citizenship Behaviour: The Good Soldier Syndrome.

Lexington, MA: Lexington Books.

Organ, D.W. (1997) ‘Organizational citizenship behaviour: It’s construct cleanup time’, Human

Performance, Vol. 10, No. 2, pp. 85–97.

Organ, D.W., Podsakoff, P.M. and MacKenzie, S.B. (2006) Organizational Citizenship

Behaviour: Its Nature, Antecedents, and Consequences. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.

Podsakoff, P.M., MacKenzie, S.B., Moorman, R.H. and Fetter, R. (1990) ‘Transformational

leader ­behaviours and their effects on followers’ trust in leader, satisfaction, and

organizational citizenship behaviors’, Leadership Quarterly, No. 1, pp. 107–42.

Podsakoff, N.P., Whiting, S. W., Podsakoff, P.M. and Blume, B.D. (2009) ‘Individual and

organizational level consequences of organizational citizenship behaviors: a meta-analysis’,

Journal of Applied Psychology, Vol. 94, No. 1, pp. 122–41.

Smith, C.A., Organ, D.W., and Near, J.P. (1983) ‘Organizational citizenship behavior: Its nature

and antecedents’, Journal of Applied Psychology, Vol. 68, No. 4, pp. 653–63.

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/3. ��������˵��/S0 SBP Requirements and Regulations.ppt

WELCOME TO

UWS Strategic Business Project

Research Methodology Workshop

Facilitator: Associate Professor Dr Chan Chee Seng

LEARNING OUTCOMES OF THE WORKSHOP

  • Gain an understanding of business research approaches to undertake the SBP
  • Gain guidance to meet standard and timeline for
  • SBP Proposal.
  • Know the requirements expected to complete the full SBP successfully
  • Apply a systematic approach when undertaking business research
  • Selecting the method or methods most appropriate for undertaking the SBP
  • Present information ( findings ) to meet the needs of the recipients
  • Know the required and prescribed format of documentation for the research report.

SCOPE OF THE SBP

This module is designed to develop the research skills, knowledge and confidence in designing, developing, compiling and delivering strategic business projects.

Working with an identified host organisation, the student will investigate and produce recommendations in a practical business environment.

Initially, students will participate in a series of workshops which will equip them with knowledge and understanding of a range of business research methods and techniques.

Thereafter students will submit their research proposals and undertake the data collection for the project. Each student is allocated a suitable supervisor with whom they communicate directly throughout the Masters stage.

SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS FOR SBP

  • Thorough, rigorous and well organised and involve undertaking systematic research
  • Use appropriate methods to systematically collect and analyse the data, it will argue why the results obtained are meaningful and explain any limitation that are associated with them

  • Critically examining the relevant literature and research

  • Demonstrate the students capacity for rigorous analysis, perceptive observation and critical assessment

  • Display clear and coherent expression, discussion and presentation

  • Analyse and develop issues arising from the research

and make appropriate recommendations for improvements

Strategic Business Project Assessment Requirements

There will be 2 components namely:

  • Research Project Proposal with a word count of between 2500-3000 words worth 25%
  • Final SBP with a word count of between 10,000 -15,000 words worth 75%

REQUIREMENTS FOR RESEARCH PROPOSAL( 25% of SBP)

Your project proposal must provide detailed information about what you intend to do and how you will go about it. It must be typed on A4 size paper and contain the following:

•Your contact details and project title

•Purpose of the Project and Reasons for choosing it

•A preliminary literature review – relevant past studies

•Sources of data

•Proposed methodology

•Anticipated problems

•Expected schedule

•References.

It should be submitted online after turnitin plagiarism check prior to marking and approval on deadlines stipulated

1. Contact details and project title

The first page of your project proposal must contain the following information:

Your name, Banner registration ID Number, email address, phone number where you can be reached during your project work, and the title of your project.

You need a working title for your strategic research. You may improve on the wording later but make sure the title you begin with means something. Project titles should be reasonably short but still convey clearly to the reader the subject matter of your enquiry and that your project has a focus. For example, “Developing an entry strategy for a new business start-up - the case of XYZ company” is more helpful than “Venture Strategies for start-ups” – this is too general, unfeasible and insufficiently focused.

2. Purpose of the project and the reasons for choosing it

You must inform the reader what your project is about. Why you think this area/question is worth investigating? Explain your interest or any previous work you have done on the topic. Also, describe any reading or any personal experience that has lead you to want to research on the topic. Do you have a personal interest in this area? Is this an important area in academic terms? Is this area important in terms of your future career aspirations?

Please remember to confine your ambitions to what you really can accomplish in the time available and with the resources at your disposal. Work with existing theories and frameworks. You do not have the time, resources skills or credibility to invent completely new models of business and/or management.

3. A preliminary literature review - relevant past studies

The SBP you eventually submit will contain a critical literature review. In your project proposal, you are required to demonstrate you have a good knowledge and understanding of your field of study. You do this by completing a preliminary literature review. This requires you to set out the theories you will draw on to shape your research. To discuss what "leading authorities" in your subject area have to say. You will want to refer to, and where appropriate quote from, key works in your area. This is the largest section of your proposal and the one that requires the most preliminary research.. You do not need to discuss every work in your area, but you need to present a competent outline of your area of study. This information will help you (a) to develop and support your own views, and (b) to demonstrate to your readers that you are aware of such previous work in your field. Always include references.

4. Sources of data

In this section of your strategic project proposal you will tell the reader about what types of information will be collecting in order to answer your project question(s). Where will you get this data from and how accessible is it? Can you get access to a Company or organisation(s)? There are two kinds of data: primary, which you collect yourself, perhaps by using interviews, questionnaires or observation, and secondary data, which has already been published and collated for some other purpose, such as annual reports, management reports, company surveys or the Internet, and which you can re-analyse to help answer your research question. Be specific about what sources of primary and/or secondary data you will use in your project.

5 Proposed methodology

What is your proposed research approach and research strategy? Why have you chosen this methodology? What methods will you use to collect and analyse your data? For example, if you are going to investigate a problem in a particular organisation, what research instruments, such as interviews, questionnaires, personal observations, examination of written records or of systems will you employ and how will you analyse the results? In short, how are you going to get your information and use it in order to answer your project question(s)?

6 Anticipated problems

What difficulties might you have to overcome in conducting your project? Is it going to be difficult for you to gain access to the information, either primary or secondary, that you will need? If so, what can you do about it? Can you foresee any other snags that might hinder your work and how do you propose to deal with them? Pre-planning will improve the chances of project success.

7.Expected schedule( Gantt Chart)

How long do you expect to take to complete your project? State as precisely as you can:

•the overall time scale, including key milestones e.g. when are you going to conduct your interviews/issue your questionnaires?

•the target date for completion of your first two chapters,

•other deadlines which you intend to set yourself,

•when you expect your final draft to be ready, and the target date for completion of your project.

In considering your schedule of work, you are advised to work back from the final submission date of your project.

GANTT Chart for Research Proposal and Project Completion.

12th May 2019

11th August 2019

Key Deadlines

Research Proposal submission 12th May 2019

Final SBP submission 11th August 2019

PROPOSAL submit (Petaling Jaya-Mar19)

Those studying at the Knowledge Universe in the Macau and Petaling Jaya campuses and registered for the Strategic Business Project as top-up students in March 2019, should use this link to submit their PROPOSAL by 5:00pm GMT on Sunday 12th May 2019 or 01:00hrs local time of Wednesday 13th May. Do note that there is a separate link for the submission of the dissertation, make sure the correct links are used. In case of any difficulties, please e-mail the Module Coordinator [email protected]

DISSERTATION submit (Pet Jaya-Mar19)

Those studying at the Knowledge Universe in the Macau and Petaling Jaya and registered for the Strategic Business Project as top-up students in March 2019, should use this link to submit their DISSERTATION by 5:00pm GMT on Sunday 11th August 2019 or 01:00hrs local time of Wednesday 12th August. Do note that there is a separate link for the submission of the proposal, make sure the correct links are used. In case of any difficulties, please e-mail the Module Coordinator [email protected]

8. References

In this final section of your proposal set out the references which have been used.

In your academic career to date you may have used a number of different referencing systems. In this respect, please remember that there a number of variations of what is called the Harvard system of referencing and that this can confuse the inexperienced researcher.

To avoid any confusion or doubt, you must set out any references in accordance with the University guidelines which are set out on the library section of the UWS web-site.

Final point - Your proposal should be 2,500-3,000 words and pass the plagiarism turnitin check before submitting for marking followed by supervisor assigned to provide student supervision to complete the project.

 Project Proposal Marking Criteria
 
Comprehensiveness of explanation and justification of research (20%)
Identification of research problem/question and explanation of significance to business and to the student. (20%)
Relevant theoretical justification and overview (20%)  
Appropriateness and justification of overall research design (20%)
 
Identification of realistic timelines (10%) Quality of arguments, logic, referencing and clarity (10%)

9. Other requirements include:

Online learning activities after the SBP workshop

Go through learning materials

Formal Assessment Test

Digital Workbook

Interacting with your supervisor

Proposal Checklist. Have you done these?

  • Have I explained what am I going to do?

  • Have I explained why I am doing this?

  • Have I said why it is worth doing?

  • Have I explained how it relates to what has

been done before in my subject area?

  • Have I stated which theory or theories will inform what I am doing and how I will use it or them?

  • Have I stated my research question(s), research aim and my research objectives?

Proposal Checklist. Have you done these?

  • Have I outlined how I will conduct my research?

  • Have I outlined my research design?

  • Have I outlined what data I need?

  • Have I stated who and where my intended
  • participants are?

  • Have I explained how I will select my participants?

  • Have I explained how I will gain access?

Proposal Checklist. Have you done these?

  • Have I outlined how I will collect my data?

  • Have I outlined how I will analyse my data?

  • Have I outlined what anticipated problems I might encounter?

  • Have I outlined how I will seek to overcome these problems?

  • Have I considered the ethical issues I might

encounter at each stage of my research?

  • Have I outlined how I will address these?
  • Have I inserted the Gantt Chart?
  • Have I provided the reference list using Harvard Referencing System?

SUPERVISION PROCEDURES AND RULES

What students expect of their supervisors

•To be supervised

•Their work to be read in advance of meetings

•Their supervisor to be available

•Their supervisor to be approachable

•Their supervisor to be constructively critical

•Their supervisor to have a good knowledge of the research process

•That receipt of work sent electronically will be acknowledged within a maximum of a working week except where the supervisor is on approved annual leave.

What supervisors expect of their research students

•That their students be independent learners

•That their students produce and submit work at least 48 hours before any scheduled meetings

•That their students seek advice and comment on their work from peers and others.

•That students listen to advice and make informed decisions before accepting or rejecting it

•That their students accept that it is their responsibility to take the initiative in arranging regular meetings with their supervisors. In the case of remote campus students that they are responsible for the regular electronic transmission of work in progress.

•That students make and keep appointments or give adequate notice (a minimum of 24 hours) of cancellation

•That students be honest when reporting progress

The supervisor IS responsible for:

•Collaborating with the student to produce a research timetable

•Advising on the structure of the project and the feasibility of the methodology

•Critiques of draft chapters

•Giving advice regarding submission of the project.

The supervisor IS NOT responsible for:

•Designing the fieldwork

•Editing and proofreading of a student’s project.

•Arrangement of meetings

Please note that the frequency of meetings will be decided between the student and supervisor. At least two Progress Reports (see Appendix 1) will be required and the frequency of these will be the prerogative of the supervisor. Please remember that it is your responsibility, and yours alone, to maintain regular contact with your supervisor. Some comment and advice arises from the above. It is essential that you make use of spell and grammar check.

Do not expect that your supervisor will correct your English usage and spelling – that is not their responsibility. What they will do, however, is tell you if your work is deficient in these areas. You are responsible for ensuring that your work is up to the expected standards in these areas

Rules governing contact with supervisors

Another area that causes problems is related to the fact that some students, for various reasons, fail to maintain regular contact with their supervisors. This practice can have several outcomes and, depending on severity, can attract penalties.

The most serious outcome of lack of contact with supervisors is where students attempt to submit completely unsupervised projects. Such projects will not be accepted for consideration of the award of MBA, as all MBA projects must be supervised.

Remember regular contact assures the supervisor that the work you are submitting to them is not plagiarised from the work of others. University regulations pertaining to plagiarism are detailed in Appendix 2.

Ethical considerations

Once your supervisor is appointed you are advised to make contact with him/her as soon as is practical. There are two broad categories into which an MBA project fits – ‘low risk’ or ‘high risk’. The overwhelming majority of MBA projects are low risk.

All MBA students are required to read the University’s Guidelines for Ethical Practice in Research & Scholarship. These can be found on the University web site. You should consider how ethical concerns may impact upon your research process, your findings and future dissemination of results.

Following a discussion on ethical considerations in relation to your project, you will complete the form shown as Appendix 3 and return it to your supervisor for her/his signature. Thereafter, the supervisor will forward the form to the University.

Submission of a draft strategic project

All students who progress to the MBA Strategic Project are given the opportunity of handing in a draft copy of their final document. Your supervisor will advise you in good time as to the latest date when you can do this.

The date(s) set depend upon

  • allowing sufficient time for your research supervisor to read your draft and comment on it, and

  • allowing sufficient time for you to take account of any comments and suggestions made by your supervisor so that you can incorporate any required changes into your final document.

Submission of final research project

The specific date for handing in your final project is generally dependent upon the graduation event for which you are aiming. There may be other times agreed on an ad hoc basis and if one of these times applies to you, you will be informed. Regardless of what date applies, you will be informed in good time as to the specific date when you are required to submit your work. This date is final and non-negotiable. However, in extenuating circumstances your supervisor may advise you to apply for a short extension. In all cases any extension granted would mean that you will submit for the next graduation date after the one that was previously allocated.

All MBA projects are also to be submitted through TurnItIn. You should consult with your supervisor if you are unsure how to do this..

When you submit your project you will be asked to complete and sign a declaration (see Appendix 4). This addresses a number of issues. First, whether or not all or any part of your project content contains confidential data. Confidential projects are only read by internal and external examiners and are not made available to others. Second, a declaration related to sourcing that declares that you have not plagiarised the work of others:

I certify that all material in this project which is not my own is duly acknowledged. I have read and understand the University’s policy on plagiarism.

It is therefore essential that you read and understand University regulations pertaining to plagiarism (Appendix 2).

Marking guidelines

All MBA research projects are double marked. The first marker is your research supervisor. The second marker is another research supervisor. Both markers assess your work independently, only when the project has been read and marked by both assessors independently do they get together to discuss your work and agree a final mark. Should both markers find difficulty in agreeing a final mark, a third marker may be necessary although this is not usually the case.

A sample project mark sheet that details the assessment criteria is shown in Appendix 5. A sample of projects is sent to the Programme External Examiner for scrutiny, comment and approval.

It is essential that you are aware that University regulations do not allow staff to disclose the grade awarded for projects to students. The University will communicate final grades and decisions to all students after the Examination Programme panel has been held and scrutiny has taken place. Please do not pester your supervisor in an effort to have them disclose this information to you, as they are duty bound to refuse

Reference and presentation requirements

Requirements relating to the manner in which you present references are given in Appendix 6. Details of all other presentation requirements (e.g., spacing font size, margins, binding etc) that you must follow are given in Appendix 7. The title page format for the strategic project was shown earlier (Appendix 4).

GUIDELINES for LAYOUT of the MBA PROJECT( 75%)

Refer to Appendix 7

of

SBP Module Handbook

ASSESSMENT / MARKING CRITERIA FOR THE PROJECT

Abstract, introduction, continuity and presentation 15%

Literature review 25%

RESEARCH METHODOLOGY 20%

Results & Discussion 30%

Conclusion and Recommendations 10%

TOTAL: 100%

STEPS IN A SYSTEMATIC RESEARCH

  • PLAN THE RESEARCH

2 GATHER INFORMATION

3 ANALYSE THE INFORMATION

4 DETERMINE THE SOLUTIONS

5 DOCUMENT THE REPORT

6 SUBMIT FOR MARKING

STEP 1: PLAN THE RESEARCH

STATING THE RESEARCH PROBLEM

SETTING THE PARAMETERS / BOUNDARIES

DETERMINING THE AUDIENCE

DECIDING ON THE RESEARCH PROCESSES

STEP 2: GATHER THE INFORMATION

SECONDARY SOURCES via TRADITIONAL and

ELECTRONIC MEDIA

PRIMARY SOURCES including SURVEYS, FOCUS

GROUP, INTERVIEWS, EXPERIMENTS and

OBSERVATIONS

ACCURACY OF INFORMATION

TIMELINESS

RELEVANCE

APPROACH

OUTLET

AUTHOR

PRINT SOURCE

TYPE / PURPOSE

SPONSOR

PERSPECTIVE

AUTHOR/ CONTACT INFORMATION

COMPLETENESS

ATTRIBUTION

TIMELINESS

ELECTRONIC SOURCE

STEP 3: ANALYSING THE INFORMATION

TO ANALYSE MEANS TO LOOK AT THE PARTS OF

THINGS SEPARATELY OR IN RELATIONSHIP TO THE

WHOLE. THE VARIOUS PARTS OF YOUR INFORMATION

ARE COMPARED AND CONSTRASTED IN AN EFFORT

TO TRY TO DEVELOP NEW OR BETTER IDEAS.

SEPARATE FACTS AND FIGURES ARE INTERPRETED

BY EXPLAINING WHAT THEY MEAN – WHAT

SIGNIFICANCE THEY HAVE.

YOU SHOULD NOT ALLOW PERSONAL BIAS OF ANY

KIND TO ENTER INTO ANALYSIS, YOU NEED TO BE

OBJECTIVE RATHER THAN EMOTIONAL.

STEP4: DETERMINING THE SOLUTIONS

Your solution or solutions will be framed as CONCLUSIONS

And RECOMMENDATIONS.

A conclusion is an INFERENCE drawn from FACTS. It is a

Reasoned judgement that you make from your analysis.

If you will to select the most critical or important ideas

Suggested by your analysis, these ideas would be your

Conclusions.

Based on your conclusions, you could state the research

answer or recommendation – the research solution.

In formal reports you can draw conclusions from your

analysis and state them separately from the recommendations.

The conclusions and recommendations must be based on the

Findings and your objective analysis, not your personal opinion

Of what a good solution would be.

STEP 5: WRITING THE REPORT

  • DRAFT

2 REVISE

3 EDIT

STEPS FOR WRITING ANALYTICAL REPORT

  • Consider the word count and time frame

2 Analyse the topic carefully

3 Make an initial plan

4 Locate your information and take notes

5 Prepare the first draft

6 Evaluate your draft carefully

MECHANICS OF FORMAL REPORTS

  • COVER

  • MARGINS

  • SPACING

  • HEADINGS

  • PAGE NUMBERS

  • NUMBERING

REFERENCING AND CITATION

  • WHAT IS REFERENCING?
  • WHY SHOULD YOU REFERENCE?
  • WHICH REFERENCING SYSTEM SHOULD BE USED?
  • REFERENCE LISTS
  • BIBLIOGRAPHY
  • SHOULD YOU PARAPHASE OR USE QUOTATIONSS?

Choose research area

Preliminary research

Decide research topic

Decide methodology

Submit/present proposal

Finalise methodology

Conduct research

Analyse data

Write up

Submit assignment

Wk9

Wk10

Wk11

Wk6

Wk7

Wk8

Wk24

Wk23

Wk12

Wk13

Wk14

Wk15

Wk16

Wk17

Wk18

Wk19

Wk20

Wk21

Wk22

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/3. ��������˵��/S1 Intro to Business Research.ppt

Business
Research Methods

SESSION 1:

Introduction to Research

*

Business research is defined as the systematic and objective process of generating information for aid in making business decisions.

The discovery of the solution is undertaken through a detailed study of the situational factors related or associated with the problem.

Business Research Defined

*

Business Research

  • Research information is neither intuitive nor haphazardly gathered.
  • Literally, research (re-search) -“search again”
  • Business research must be objective
  • Detached and impersonal rather than biased
  • It facilitates the managerial decision process for all aspects of a business.

*

Information
Reduces
Uncertainty

I don’t know

if we

should

offer on-site

child care?

*

PURPOSE OF RESEARCH

Reporting

Description

Explanation

Prediction

Basic research

Applied research

Business Research Types

*

Basic Research

  • Attempts to expand the limits of knowledge.
  • Not directly involved in the solution to a pragmatic problem.

*

Basic Research Example

  • Is executive success correlated with high need for achievement?
  • Are members of highly cohesive work groups more satisfied than members of less cohesive work groups?

*

Applied Research

  • Conducted when a decision must be made about a specific real-life problem

*

Applied Research Examples

  • Should McDonalds add Italian pasta dinners to its menu?
  • Business research told McDonald’s it should not?
  • Should Procter & Gamble add a high-priced home teeth bleaching kit to its product line?
  • Research showed Crest Whitestrips would sell well at a retail price of $44

*

Scientific Method

  • The analysis and interpretation of empirical evidence (facts from observation or experimentation) to confirm or disprove prior conceptions.

*

TYPES OF RESEARCH

Quantitative Research

Qualitative Research

QUANTITATIVE RESEARCH

Study that employs empirical data to investigate phenomena

QUALITATIVE RESEARCH

In depth study of phenomena by observing a particular case

or unit of analysis.

Research that produce descriptive data i.e people’s own written

or spoken words and observable behaviour.

Phenomenological perspective is central to qualitative

methodology

Major Topics for Research in Business

  • General Business Conditions and Corporate Research
  • Financial and Accounting Research
  • Management and Organizational Behavior Research
  • Sales and Marketing Research
  • Information Systems Research
  • Corporate Responsibility Research

*

Examples of Business Research Areas

Employee behaviours such as performance, absenteeism and turnover

Employee attitudes such as job satisfaction, loyalty and organisational

commitment.

Strategy formulation and implementation

Organisational outcomes such as increased sales, market share, profits,

growth and effectiveness

Distribution channels, advertising effectiveness and effective test

marketing strategies.

Brand loyalty, product life cycle and product innovation

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

Basic research Applied research

Purpose:

• expand knowledge of processes of business

and management

• results in universal principles relating to the

process and its relationship to outcomes

• findings of significance and value to society in

general

Purpose:

• improve understanding of particular business or

management problem

• results in solution to problem

• new knowledge limited to problem

• findings of practical relevance and value to

manager(s) in organisation(s)

Context:

• undertaken by people based in universities

• choice of topic and objectives determined by

the researcher

• flexible time scales

Figure 1.1 Basic and applied research

Context:

• undertaken by people based in a variety of

settings including organisations and universities

• objectives negotiated with originator

• tight time scales

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/3. ��������˵��/S2 Business Research Process.ppt


Business
Research Methods

SESSION 2

The Business Research Process

*

Stages of the Research Process

Catalyst for Research

Problem Definition/ Statement

Research Objectives

Data Gathering

Interpretation of findings

Conclusions and Report

Preliminary information

Gathering / Literature Review

Framework

Development

Data Analysis

Research Design

*

RESEARCH PROCESS

The “ Theoretical” Stage

The “ Empirical “ Stage

The “ Analysis of Results” Stage

The Research Report / Documentation

1: Theoretical Stage

Pre data collection involving constant bibliographical work

Identify research problem

Develop conceptual framework

Postulate hypothesis

Operationalise variables

2: Empirical Stage

Research Design

Sampling

Data source and collection

3: Analysis of Results Stage

Post data collection stage

Data analysis

Description of data

Hypothesis testing

4: Research Report

Style , Structure, Format, Word Count etc,

*

*

Chapter 1   Business and management research, reflective diaries and the purpose of this book

Wish to do

research

Formulate and clarify your

research topic (Chapter 2)

Critically review the literature

(Chapter 3)

Understand your philosophy

and approach (Chapter 4)

Writing ideas in prose (and reflecting)

Formulate your research

design (Chapter 5)

Negotiate access and address

ethical issues (Chapter 6)

Plan your data collection and collect data using one or more of:

Sampling Secondary Observation Semi-structured, Questionnaires

(Chapter 7) data (Chapter 9) in-depth and (Chapter 11)

(Chapter 8)

group interviews

(Chapter 10)

Analyse your data using one or both of:

Quantitative methods Qualitative methods

(Chapter 12) (Chapter 13)

Write your project report and

prepare your presentation

(Chapter 14)

Forward

Submit your project report

Reflection

planning

and give your presentation

and revision

Figure 1.2 The research process

Source: © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2015

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/3. ��������˵��/S3 Problem Definition-Literature Review .ppt

BUSINESS
RESEARCH METHODS

SESSION 3

Preliminary Information Gathering and Problem Definition/ Statement

*

Catalyst for Business Research

Examples of catalysts for research areas that a manager could observe

at the workplace are as follows:

  • Training programmes are perhaps not as effective as expected
  • The sales volume of a product is not picking up
  • The newly installed MIS is not being used by the managers for

whom it was primarily designed.

  • The introduction of flexible work hours has created more problems

than it has solved in many departments in a company

  • The anticipated results of a recent merger have not been forthcoming
  • The inventory control is not effective.

Preliminary Information Gathering

It allows the researcher to gain a wider perspective on the possible

problem or business opportunity. It is important to recognise that

at this stage the information gathering is indeed preliminary.

The researcher is gathering information to answer two fundamental

questions:

  • Is the problem or opportunity worth ongoing investigation?
  • How can the problem or opportunity be clearly and efficiently

described?

The preliminary investigation is a quick run through readily available

information to provide a fundamental direction for the later research

investigation

SOURCES OF INFORMATION

  • Organisational records
  • Knowledge of staff
  • Internet
  • Library search

Nature of the Information to be gathered

The information to be gathered at this preliminary stage can be

classified as SPECIFIC to the PROBLEM or CHALLENGE yet

BROAD in nature.

SPECIFIC information

Although the problem or opportunity has been initially identified, the

researcher normally need to clarify the situation, that is , the researcher

needs to be able to describe what the issue is and what is not.

This can be achieved through asking several questions as outlined .

Clarifying Questions

  • When was the issue first noticed?
  • How do we know that the issue exists?
  • Are any indicators available?
  • Are these indicators quantitative or qualitative?
  • If quantitative, are the measures hiding more complex issues?
  • If qualitative, are the opinions or feelings widespread and / or

do they have significant impact?

  • Who is affected by the issues?
  • What is the perceived impact of the issue?
  • Is the impact best described in quantitative or qualitative terms

or a combination of both?

  • What are the perceived causes?

BROADER ISSUES and CONTEXT

The researcher cannot only concentrate solely on the specific problem

or opportunity. Indeed, possible causes and impacts demand that the

researcher take a wider view. In addition, the researcher needs to place

the specific issue within the context of the organisation and the e

external environment in which the organisation operates.

This BROADER information is also essential to the researcher in the

next phase of the research process – developing a Conceptual or

Theoretical framework.

BROADER INFORMATION

The nature of this broader information can be classified as:

  • Background information of the organisation- that is, the contextual

factors

  • Managerial philosophy, company policies and other structural aspects
  • Perceptions, attitudes and behavioural responses of organisational

members and client systems ( as applicable )

LITERATURE REVIEW

The search and documentation of a comprehensive review of the

Published and unpublished work from secondary sources of data

in the areas of specific interest to the researcher.

LITERATURE REVIEW

  • Past research on the phenomenon under investigation must play

key role in the process of problem formulation

  • A literature review is not a listing of studies but a CRITICAL

EVALUATION of previous research or studies

  • A literature review requires a researcher to find, evaluate, and

integrate past research into present investigation.

LITERATURE REVIEW

  • The literature review examines the following:

- What others have said about the research topic

- What theories address the research problem

- What previous research exist

- Are findings of previous research consistent or do the studies

disagree.

- Are there flaws in the body of existing research that can be

remedied or avoided now that you are undertaking similar

area of research.

LITERATURE REVIEW

  • When reading literature , critically evaluate the following:

- The objectives of the research

- The theoretical rationale

- The research design

- The measures used

- The analysis employed

- The findings obtained

- Inferences and implications made by the author/researcher

- Limitations

Sources

A ) NON ELECTRONIC

The Library is a rich source of secondary data, and information

derived from books, journals, magazines, newspapers, conference

proceedings, dissertations, government publications and reports.

B) ELECTRONIC

The Internet and various computerise databases are now readily

available

EXAMPLES

  • DATABASES FOR BUSINESS INFORMATION

ABI/INFORM Global – provide the capability to search most major

business, management, trade and industry,

and scholarly journals.

Anbar Management Intelligence Library – includes a comprehensive

coverage of 450 journals

in Management

Asian Business – provides 75 Asian business periodical titles in full

text

EXAMPLES

2) NEWSPAPER INDEXES

  • Electric Library – covers 235 international newspapers
  • Wall Street Journal Index – published monthly, gives a complete

report on current business. Grouped

under ‘ Corporate News’ and ‘ General

News’, the subject index of all articles

that appeared in the Journal I also given.

EXAMPLES

3) ON THE WORLD WIDE WEB

Writing the Literature Review

  • When writing a review, it is necessary to provide references for

all materials that the researcher did not think of him/herself.

  • References are cited briefly in the text and in detail at the end.
  • All references must be cited to:

- Acknowledge the source

- Allow the reader to verify the data

- Provide information so that the reader can consult the

source independently.

Writing the Literature Review

  • References must be provided for:

- Quotation: using exact words from source

- Paraphrase: using ideas in different words

- Summarise: using main points of someone else’s opinions,

theories or data

CITING REFERENCES

  • Harvard system
  • APA
  • The Chicago Manual of Style
  • Turabian’s Manuual for writers
  • Modern Language Association.

The chosen style is HARVARD SYSTEM

If you do not know where you are going,
any road will take you there.

*

PROBLEM DEFINITION/ STATEMENT

After information has been gathered from within and outside

the organisation, the researcher is in a position to narrow down

the situation highlighted by the catalyst for research from its

original broad base and define more clearly the issues of concern.

It is critical that the focus for further research be unambiguously

identified and defined. No amount of good research can find solutions

If the critical issue to be studied is not clearly pinpointed.

Problem Statement/ Research Problem

Definition

A research problem is a definite or clear expression [statement] about an area of concern, a condition to be improved upon, a difficulty to be eliminated, or a troubling question that exists in scholarly literature, in theory, or within existing practice that points to a need for meaningful understanding and deliberate investigation. A research problem does not state how to do something, offer a vague or broad proposition, or present a value question.

Bryman, Alan. “The Research Question in Social Research: What is its Role?” International Journal of Social Research Methodology 10 (2007): 5-20.

A Research Problem does not necessarily imply that something

is seriously wrong with a current situation which needs to be

corrected immediately.

It could simply indicate an interest in an issue and a sense that

finding the right answers might help to improve an existing

situation.

Thus it is useful to define a Research Problem as “ any situation

where a gap exists between the actual and the desired ideal states.”

Problem Definition or Problem Statement

It involves a succinct statement of the question or issue that is

to be investigated with the goal of finding an answer or solution.

Problem statement therefore could pertain to:

  • existing business problems to which a manager is looking for

a solution.

  • situation that may not pose any current problems but that the

manager feels can bring about improvement

  • areas in which the researcher is trying to answer a research

question empirically because of interest in the topic.

Purpose of Problem Statement

The purpose of a problem statement is to:

  • Introduce the reader to the importance of the topic being studied. The reader is oriented to the significance of the study and the research questions, hypotheses, or assumptions to follow.
  • Place the topic into a particular context that defines the parameters of what is to be investigated.
  • Provide the framework for reporting the results and indicates what is probably necessary to conduct the study and explain how the findings will present this information.

EXAMPLES

  • To what extent has the new advertising campaign been successful

in creating the high quality, customer-centred corporate image that

it was intended to produce?

2. How has the new packaging affected the sales of the product?

  • How do price and quality rate in consumers’ evaluation of products?
  • Does expansion of international operations result in an enhancement

of the firm’s image and value?

5. Can cultural differences account for differences in the nature of

hierarchical relationships between superiors and subordinates in

Malaysia, India and Australia?

  • What specific factors should be considered in creating a data

warehouse for a manufacturing company?

Sample Problem Statement

Absenteeism is a phenomenon that is afflicting most organisations big and small, private and public and is attributed to various reasons, such as sick leave, family responsibilities and regular appointments. Absenteeism has a significant effect on staff morale as they have to take on extra workload and working longer shifts. This situation leads to unsatisfactory clients as a result of poor service delivery. Ultimately, the unresolved absenteeism issue leads to various cost implications in terms of replacement for the same job, and the quality of service in general being affected. These absences range from single days to long term and despite existing laws and regulations, solutions to curb absenteeism remain rather far. Therefore, the study was required to provide a better understanding of the problem and identify ways manage it better.

Research Questions linked to Problem Statement

Based on the statement of the problem, the study attempted to answer the following research questions:

1. How do the staff view absenteeism?

2. What are the factors influencing and contributing to absenteeism?

3. What effect does absenteeism have on morale and henceforth productivity?

4. What are the different strategies/recommendations needed to manage and minimise absenteeism?

*

*

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/3. ��������˵��/S4 A Initial Literature Review.ppt

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Session 4
Critically reviewing the literature

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Reasons for reviewing the literature

  • To conduct a ‘preliminary’ search of existing material
  • To organise valuable ideas and findings
  • To identify other research that may be in progress
  • To generate research ideas
  • To develop a critical perspective

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

The literature review process

Source: Saunders et al. (2003)

Figure 3.1 The literature review process

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

The Critical Review (1)

Approaches used

Deductive -

Develops a conceptual framework from the literature which is then tested using the data

Inductive -

Explores the data to develop theories which are then tested against the literature

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

The Critical Review (2)

Key purposes

  • To further refine research questions and objectives

  • To discover recommendations for further research

  • To avoid repeating work already undertaken

  • To provide insights into strategies and techniques appropriate to your research objectives

Based on Gall et al. (2006)

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Adopting a critical perspective (1)

Skills for effective reading

  • Previewing

  • Annotating

  • Summarising

  • Comparing and contrasting

Harvard College Library (2006)

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Adopting a critical perspective (2)

The most important skills are

  • The capacity to evaluate what you read

  • The capacity to relate what you read to other information

Wallace and Wray (2006)

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Adopting a critical perspective (3)

Questions to ask yourself

Why am I reading this?

What is the author trying to do in writing this?

How convincing is is this?

What use can I make of this reading?

Adapted from Wallace and Wray (2006)

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Content of the critical review

You will need to

  • Include key academic theories

  • Demonstrate current knowledge of the area

  • Use clear referencing for the reader to find the original cited publications

  • Acknowledge the research of others

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Structure of the literature review

Three common structures

  • A single chapter

  • A series of chapters

  • Throughout the report

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

The key to a critical literature review

  • Demonstrate that you have read, understood and evaluated your material

  • Link the different ideas to form a cohesive and coherent argument

  • Make clear connections to your research objectives and the subsequent empirical material

Saunders et al. (2009)

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Categories of Literature Sources

  • Primary (published and unpublished)

  • Secondary

  • Tertiary

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Literature sources available

Literature sources available

Saunders et al. (2009)

Figure 3.2 Literature sources available

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

The literature search strategy (1)

Write down

  • parameters of your search
  • key words and search terms to be used
  • databases and search engines to be used
  • criteria for selection of relevant and useful studies

And

Discuss these with a tutor (if possible)

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

The literature search strategy (2)

  • Define the research parameters

  • Generate key words

  • Discuss your research

  • Brainstorm ideas

  • Construct Relevance trees - use computer software

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Conducting a literature search (1)

Approaches can include

  • Searching tertiary literature sources

  • Obtaining relevant literature

  • Scanning and browsing secondary literature
  • Searching using the Internet

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Conducting a literature search (2)

Searching using tertiary literature

  • Ensure key words match controlled index language

  • Search appropriate printed and database sources

  • Note precise details used – including search strings

  • Note the FULL reference of each search found

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Conducting a literature search (3)

  • Printed sources

  • Databases – use of Boolean logic and free text searching

  • Scanning and browsing

  • Searching the Internet

Saunders et al. (2009)

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Conducting a literature search (4)

Searching the Internet

Saunders et al. (2003)

Figure 3.3 Searching the Internet

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Conducting a literature search (5)

Searching the Internet

Saunders et al. (2003)

Figure 3.3 Searching the Internet (Continued)

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Evaluating the literature

  • Define the scope of your review

  • Assess relevance and value
  • Assess sufficiency

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Recording the literature

Make notes for each item you read

Record –

  • Biographic details

  • Brief summary of content

  • Supplementary information

Sharp et al. (2002)

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Recording the literature

  • Bibliographic details

  • Brief summary

  • Supplementary information

Saunders et al. (2009)

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Plagiarism

Four common forms

  • Stealing material from another source

  • Submitting material written by another

  • Copying material without quotation marks

  • Paraphrasing material without documentation

Adapted from Park (2003), cited in Easterby-Smith et al. (2008)

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Summary: Chapter 3

The critical literature review

  • Sets the research in context

  • Leads the reader into later sections of the report

  • Begins at a general level and narrows to specific topics

Slide 3.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Summary

A literature search requires

  • Three main categories of sources
  • Clearly defined research questions and objectives
  • Defined parameters
  • Use of techniques – ( brainstorming and relevance trees)

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/3. ��������˵��/S4 B 2nd REVIEW OF LITERATURE.ppt

SECOND REVIEW OF LITERATURE

*

SECOND REVIEW

OF

LITERATURE

*

SECOND REVIEW OF LITERATURE

  • Having a achieved thorough knowledge of the research problem, it is advisable to return to the literature for a second and Highly Focused review of conceptual and previous research literature.
  • After having identified a problem you should read a substantial amount of the research and conceptual literature relevant to your problem.

SECOND REVIEW OF LITERATURE

  • This can help you begin from a position of logical concepts, relationships and expectations based on current thinking in this area and help you to build a conceptual framework into which your idea can be placed - giving definition, orientation and direction to your thinking.
  • Take note of the Summary of the results of previous research and ideas for the Data – Gathering Approaches, Methods, and Techniques.
  • Take note of Suggestion for Future Research Work.

*

QUOTE

“Knowledge doesn’t exist in a vacuum, and your work only has value in relation to other people’s. Your work and your findings will be significant only to the extent that they are the same as, or different from, other people’s work and findings”

 

(Jankowicz, 1995 cited by Saunders, M.e.t al 1997)

*

WHY LITERATURE REVIEW IS IMPORTANT?

  • Literature Review :
  • Helps to generate and refine research ideas.
  • Enables the making of critical reviews, which is important to the research project
  • Provides you with the means of getting to the frontier in your particular field of knowledge.
  • Helps build the foundation of knowledge for your research without which work will be shallow.

*

WHY LITERATURE REVIEW IS IMPORTANT?

  • Literature Review (contd) :
  • Gives insight and knowledge that lead to a better - designed project and greatly improves the chances of obtaining important and significant results.
  • Helps you develop a thorough understanding and insight into previous work and the trends that have emerged.
  • Can help you in limiting the research problem and in defining it better.

*

*

THE PURPOSE OF CRITICAL REVIEW

  • A critical literature review forms the foundation on which the research is built
  • Helps develop good understanding and insight into relevant previous research and the trend that have emerged
  • Show how your research relates to previously published research.

*

THE PURPOSE OF CRITICAL REVIEW

  • Asses the strengths and weaknesses of previous work including omissions or bias and take these into account in your arguments.
  • Justify your arguments by referencing previous research literature.
  • Fully acknowledge the work of others and avoid charges of plagiarism and the associated penalties.

*

THE PURPOSE OF CRITICAL REVIEW

  • Link together the different ideas you find in the literature to form a coherent and cohesive argument in which the subsequent parts of your research report must follow on from this as a continuation of the argument.
  • In all projects reports, you should return to the key issues from the literature in your conclusions

*

SOURCES OF LITERATURE

  • Primary Literature Sources
  •  Are the first occurrence of a piece of work.
  • Include published sources such as reports and some central and local government publications such as white paper and planning documents like the NEP, eight or ninth Malaysia plans.
  • Also includes reports, theses, conference reports, company reports and market research reports.

*

SOURCES OF LITERATURE

  • Secondary Literature Sources
  •  Books, Journals, newspapers
  • Many new resources have appeared since 1990s especially in electronic form on CD-ROM and via the Internet

*

SOURCES OF LITERATURE

  • Tertiary Literature Sources
  • Also called as “search tools” are designed either to help locate primary and secondary literature or to provide an introduction to a topic.
  • Include indexes, abstracts, bibliographies, catalogues etc.

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/3. ��������˵��/S5 FRAMEWORK DEVELOPMENT.ppt

Business
Research Methods

SESSION 5

Framework Development

FRAMEWORK DEVELOPMENT

A framework offers a model of how to make logical

sense of the relationships among several factors

identified as important to the research

Purpose of the framework

The framework discusses the inter-relationships among the

concepts and/ or variables that are deemed to be integral to

the dynamics of the situation being investigated.

Developing such a framework helps us to formulate research

questions and, perhaps, postulates or hypothesise and test

certain relationships so as to Improve our understanding of the

dynamics of the situation.

From the framework, then research objectives can be

developed to examine whether relationships formulated are

valid or not. The suggested relationships can thereafter be

tested through appropriate analyses.

Being able to test and replicate the findings will also further

convince you of the rigour of your research.

The framework is then the basis on which the entire research

rests.

The theoretical framework is a logically developed, described

and elaborated network of associations among concepts or

variables deemed relevant to the problem situation, which

have been identified through preliminary information

gathering and literature review.

Experience and intuition also guide you in developing the

framework.

CONCEPT and VARIABLES

A Concept is an idea expressed as a symbol or in words eg. Motivation, Culture

Concepts are obscure and difficult to operationalise and measure

Eg. Organisational culture is difficult to operationalise and measure.

A Variable is something that can be observed and measured

Eg. Absenteeism and examination score.

FRAMEWORK CONSTRUCTION

Whether a concept can be ‘converted’ to a variable has a

significant bearing on the framework.

If the researcher remains at the concept level, then a

Conceptual Framework is developed.

If the researcher operationalise the concwepts to variables,

a Theoretical Framework can be formulated.

A Theoretical Framework allows a more precise

hypothesing of the relationship between variables.

TYPES OF VARIABLES

DEPENDENT VARIABLE

INDEPENDENT VARIABLE

MODERATING VARIABLE

INTERVENING VARIABLE

  • DEPENDENT VARIABLE
  • Is the primary variable of interest
  • The researcher’s goal is to understand and describe the dependent variable, or to explain its variability or predict it

2) INDEPENDENT VARIABLE

  • Variable that influence the dependent variable
  • The variance in the dependent variable is accounted for by the independent variable (s )

3) MODERATING VARIABLE

  • A variable that has a strong contingent effect on the independent variable-dependent variable relationship.
  • The presence of the moderating variables modifies the original relationship between the independent variable and the dependent variable

4) INTERVENING VARIABLE

  • Variable that surfaces between the time the independent variable

operates to influence the dependent variable and its impact on the

dependent variable

  • An intervening variable is both the product of the independent

variable and a cause of the dependent variable

  • There is a time dimension to the intervening variable

SUMMARY OF THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK

The Literature Review help identify the variables that are important

to the research.

The TF elaborates the relationship among the variables

The TF explains the theory underlying the relationship

The TF also describes the nature and direction of the relationship

A good TF provides the logical base for developing testable hypotheses.

EXAMPLES

A manager is concerned that the sales of a new product introduced after

test marketing is not as high as he had expected. The dependent variable

here is SALES. Because the sales of the product can vary- can be low,

medium or high – it is a variable, since sales is the main factor of interest

to the manager, it is the dependent variable.

EXAMPLE

Research studies indicate that successful new product development

has an influence on the share market price of a company. Here the

development of a successful new product influences the share market

price and explains the variance in it, that is, the more successful

the new product turns out to be, the higher will be the share market

price of the firm.

Therefore, the success of the new product is the independent variable

and the share market price is the dependent variable.

EXAMPLE

Work force

diversity

Organisational

effectiveness

Work force

diversity

Organisational

effectiveness

Managerial

expertise

Independent variable

Dependent variable

Independent variable

Dependent variable

Moderating variable

EXAMPLE

Work force

diversity

Creative

synergy

Organisational

effectiveness

Independent variable

Intervening variable

Dependent variable

Managerial

expertise

Moderating variable

Time: T1

T2

T3

EXAMPLE

XYZ Airline

With airline deregulation, price wars among the various airlines cut costs in different ways. According to reports, XYZ Airline faced charges of air-safety violations after several midair collisions and two accidents that resulted in 366 deaths in 2005.

The four most important factors seem to have influenced these accidents are

poor communication among the cockpit crew, members themselves, poor communication between ground staff and cockpit crew, minimal training given to the cockpit crew and a management philosophy that encouraged a decentralised structure. It would be helpful to know if these factors did indeed contribute to the safety violations, and if so, to what extent.

THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK

Air –safety

violations

Communication among

Cockpit members

Commuunication between

Ground control and cockpit

Decentralisation

Training cockpit crew

INDEPENDENT VARIABLES

DEPENDENT VARIABLE

The TF identified and labelled the dependent and independent variables.

the relationships among the variables were discussed, establishing that

the 4 independent variables are related to the dependent variable, and

that the independent variable, DECENTRALISATION, is related to the other

two independent variables namely, communication among cockpit crew

members and between ground control staff and the cockpit crew.

The nature and direction of the relationship of decentralisation to the two

independent variables were clearly stated. For example, it was stated that

the lower the training level of the cockpit crew, the greater the chances

of air-safety violations. Thus , as training levels are lowered, the hazard is

increased, or conversely, the higher the training levels, the less likely the

air-safety violations, indicating a negative relationship between the two

variables

THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK INCLUDING MODERATING VARIABLE

Air –safety

violations

Communication among

Cockpit members

Commuunication between

Ground control and cockpit

Decentralisation

Training

INDEPENDENT VARIABLES

MODERATING VARIABLE

DEPENDENT VARIABLE

HYPOTHESIS

Definition: A hypothesis can be defined as a logically conjectured

relationship between two or more variables expressed in the form

of a testable statement.

Relationships are conjectured on the basis of the network of

Associations established in the TF formulated for the research study.

By testing the hypothesis and confirming the conjectured relationships,

It is expected that solutions can be found to correct the problem encountered.

HYPOTHESIS DEVELOPMENT

The formulation of testable statements to confirm or reject relationships

between variable.

From the example of XYZ Airline TF, one of them could be as follows:

If the pilots are given adequate training to handle midair

crowded situations, air-safety violations will be reduced.

The above is a testable statement. By measuring the extent of training given to the various pilots and the number of safety violations committed by them over a period of time, we can statistically examine the relationship between the two variables to see if there is a significant negative

correlation between the two.

If we do find a significant negative correlation, then the hypothesis is

Substantiated. That is, giving more training to pilots in handling crowded

airspace will reduce safety violations.

If a significant negative correlation is not found, then the hypothesis would

not have been substantiated. By convention in social science, to call a

relationship ‘ statistically significant’, it should be possible to find the observed

relationship by chance only 5 times out of 100. To put it differently, we

should be confident that 95 times out of 100 the observed relationship will

hold true.

Types of Hypothesis

  • DIRECTIONAL HYPOTHESIS

If, in stating the relationship between two variables or comparing two groups,

terms such as POSITIVE, NEGATIVE, MORE THAN or LESS THAN are used,

then these hypotheses are DIRECTIONAL.

2) NON DIRECTIONAL HYPOTHESIS

On the other hand, non directional hypotheses postulate a relationship or

difference, but offer no indication of the direction of these relationships or

differences.


Types of Hypothesis

3) NULL HYPOTHESIS ( H0 )

The NULL hypothesis is a proposition that states a DEFINITE, EXACT

relationship between two variables.That is, it states that the population

correlation between two variables is equal to zero or that the difference

in the means of the two groups in the population is equal to zero

( or some definite number )

In general, the NULL hypothesis is expressed as no ( significant ) relationship

between two variables or no ( significant ) difference between two groups.

4) ALTERNATE HYPOTHESIS ( HA )

The Alternate Hypothesis, which is the opposite of the NULL hypothesis, is

a statement expressing a relationship between two variables or indicating

differences between groups

HYPOTHESIS TESTING

  • State the Null and Alternate Hypotheses
  • Choose the appropriate statistical test depending on whether the data

collected are parametric or non-parametric

3) Determine the level of significance desired ( p=0.05 , or more, or less )

  • See if the output results from your statistical analysis indicate that the

significance level is met

5) When the resultant value is larger than the critical value, the NULL hypothesis

is rejected and the Alternate hypothesis accepted. If the calculated value is

less than the critical value, the NULL is accepted and the ALTERNATE rejected.

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/3. ��������˵��/S6 Research Design.ppt


BUSINESS
RESEARCH METHODS

SESSION 6

The Business Research Design

*

WHAT IS RESEARCH DESIGN?

  • A PLAN FOR SELECTING THE SOURCES AND TYPES OF INFORMATION USED TO ANSWER RESEARCH QUESTIONS.
  • A FRAMEWORK FOR SPECIFYING THE RELATIONSHIPS AMONG THE STUDY VARIABLES.
  • A BLUEPRINT THAT OUTLINES EACH PROCEDURE FROM THE HYPOTHESIS TO THE ANALYSIS.

RESEARCH DESIGN DECISIONS

  • THE PURPOSE/ APPROACH OF THE STUDY
  • STUDY SETTING
  • UNIT OF ANALYSIS
  • TIME DIMENSION
  • OPERATIONALISATION AND MEASUREMENT
  • SAMPLING
  • DATA COLLECTION
  • DATA ANALYSIS

Purpose

Of

Study

Types

Of

Investigation

Extent of

Researcher

interference

Measurement

And

Measures

Qualitative

Data

collection

RESEARCH DESIGN

Exploratory

Descriptive

Hypothesis

Testing

Case study

Clarification

Causal

Correlation

Experimental

Minimal

Manipulative

Operational

definition

Items

( measure )

Scaling

Interviews

Focus Groups

Observation

P

R

O

B

L

E

M

S

T

A

T

E

M

E

N

T

Data

Analysis

Qualitative

Quantitative

Unit of

Analysis

Study

setting

Time

dimension

Sampling

design

Quantitative

Data

collection

Individuals

Dyads

Groups

Organiations

Contrived

Non contrived

Cross sectional

Longitudinal

Probability

Non Probability

Sample size

Questionnaires

Experimental

designs

PURPOSE OF STUDY

  • EXPLORATORY

It is undertaken when little is known about the situation at hand, or when

no information is available on how similar problems or research issues

have been resolved in the past.

In such cases, extensive preliminary work needs to be done to gain

familiarity with the phenomena in the situation, and understand what

is occurring, before we develop a model and set up a appropriate design

for comprehensive investigation.

In short, exploratory studies are undertaken to better understand the nature

of the problem that has been the subject of very few studies,

Exploratory studies are important for obtaining a good grasp of the

phenomena of interest and for advancing knowledge through good

theory building and hypothesis testing.

EXAMPLE

The manager of a multinational corporation is curious to know if the work

ethic values of employees working in its subsidiaries in Malaysia are

different from those of Americans. Since there is considerable controversy

about what work ethics values mean to people in other cultures, the

manager’s curiosity can only be addressed by an exploratory study,

interviewing employees in organisations in Malaysia. Religion, political,

economic and social conditions, upbringing and cultural values all play a

big part in how people in different parts of the world view work ethics.

Because very little is known about work ethic values in Malaysia, an

exploratory study will have to be undertaken.

PURPOSE OF STUDY

2) DESCRIPTIVE STUUDY

A descriptive study is undertaken in order to ascertain and be able to describe

the characteristics of the variables of interest in a situation.

Descriptive studies are also undertaken to gain understanding of the

characteristics of organisation that follows certain common practices.

For example, one might want to know and be able to describe the characteristics

of the organisations that implement ERP ( Enterprise Resource Planning )

The goal of a descriptive study, therefore is to offer a profile or to describe

relevant aspects of the phenomenon of interest to the researcher from an

individual, organisational, industry or other perspective.

In many cases, such information may be vital before even considering certain

corrective steps such as changing the organisational practices.

EXAMPLE

A bank Credit Manager wants a profile of the individuals who have loan

payments outstanding for 6 months or more. It should include details such

as their average age, earnings, type of occupation and employment status.

This information might help him to ask for further information or make an

immediate decision on the types of individuals to whom he would not

extend loans in the future.

PURPOSE OF STUDY

3) HYPOTHESIS TESTING

Studies that engage in hypothesis testing usually explain the nature of certain

relationships, or establish the differences among groups or the independence

of two or more factors in a situation.

Hypothesis testing is undertaken to explain the variance in the dependent

variable or to predict organisational outcomes.

The testing of a hypothesis such as: More men than women are whistle

blowers establishes the difference between two groups – men and women

– in regard to whistle blowing behaviours.

EXAMPLE

A Marketing Manager would like to know if the sales of the company will

increase if he doubles the advertising dollars. Here, the Manager wants

to know the nature of the relationship between advertising and sales that

can be established by testing the hypothesis:

If advertising is increased, then sales will also go up

PURPOSE OF STUDY

4) CASE STUDIES

When using the case studies approach, the researcher systematically gathers

in-depth information on a single entity – an individual, a group, an organisation

or a community – using a variety of data gathering methods

TYPES OF INVESTIGATIONS

  • CLARIFYING: RESEARCHER TRY TO GAIN A CLEAR UNDERSTANDING OF THE CONCEPTS INVOLVED IN THE RESEARCH PROBLEM

  • CASUAL: WHEN THE RESEARCHER WANTS TO DELINEATE THE CAUSE OF ONE OR MORE PROBLEMS

  • CORRELATION: WHEN THE RESEARCHER IS INTERESTED IN DELINEATING THE IMPORTANT VARIABLES THAT ARE ASSOCIATED WITH THE PROBLEM

EXAMPLES

CAUSAL STUDY QUESTION: Does smoking cause cancer?

CORRELATION STUDY QUESTION: Are smoking and cancer related?

Are smoking, drinking and chewing

tobacco associated with cancer? If so,

which of these contributes most to the

variance in the dependent variable?

RESEARCHER INTERFERENCE

  • MINIMAL

If a researcher wants to study the factors influencing training effectiveness

( a descriptive study ), the individual simply has to develop a TF, collect

the relevant data and analyse them to come up with the findings. Although

there is some disruption to the normal flow of work as the researcher

interviews employees and administers questionaires in the workplace, the

researcher’s interference in the system is minimal compared with that in

casual studies.

  • MANIPULATION

In studies conducted to establish cause and effect relationships, the

researcher tries to manipulate certain variables so as to study the effects

of such manipulation on the dependent variable of interest.

STUDY SETTING

  • NON CONTRIVED

Where business research is undertaken in the natural environment where

work proceeds normally.

  • CONTRIVED

Where business research is undertaken in an artificial, simulated and

manipulated environment.

CLASSIFICATIONS OF DESIGNS:
THE RESEARCH ENVIRONMENT

FIELD CONDITIONS: THE ACTUAL ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS WHERE THE DEPENDENT VARIABLE OCCURS.

LABORATORY CONDITIONS: STUDIES THAT OCCUR UNDER CONDITIONS THAT DON’T SIMULATE ACTUAL ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS.

SIMULATIONS: REPLICATE THE ESSENCE OF A SYSTEM OR PROCESS.

UNIT OF ANALYSIS

  • INDIVIDUALS AS UNIT OF ANALYSIS

The CEO of a manufacturing company wants to know how many of the

staff would be interested in attending a three day seminar on making

appropriate investment decisions. For this purpose, data will have to be

collected from each individual staff member and the unit of analysis is the

individual.

  • DYADS AS UNIT OF ANALYSIS

Having read about benefits of mentoring, an HR Manager wants first

to identify the number of employees in three departments of the organisation

who are in mentoring relationships, and then to find out the jointly perceived

benefits of such relationship are.

Here, once the mentor and mentored pairs are identified, their joint

perceptions can be obtained by treating each pair as one unit. Thus, the

unit of analysis here is the dyad.

  • GROUPS AS THE UNIT OF ANALYSIS

A Manager wants to see the patterns of usage of the newly installed

Information System by the production, sale and operations personnel.

Three groups of personnel are involved and information on the number

of times the IS is used by each member in each of the three groups, and

other relevant issues, will be collected and analysed. The final results will

indicate the mean usage of the system per day or month for each group.

Here the unit of analysis is the group.

  • DIVISIONS AS THE UNIT OF ANALYSIS.

Proctor and Gamble wants to find out which of its various divisions ( soap,

paper, oil etc. ) have made profits of more than 12% during the current year.

Here the profits of each of the divisions will be examined and the information

aggregated across the various geographical units of the division. In this

case, the unit of analysis will be the division.

5) INDUSTRY AS THE UNIT OF ANALYSIS

An employment survey specialist wants to know the proportion of the work

force employed by the health care, tourism, utilities and manufacturing

industries. In this case, the researcher has to aggregate the data relating to

each of the sub units of each of the industries and report the proportions of

the work force employed at the industry level. The health care industry, for

instance includes hospitals, nursing homes, mobile units, small and large

clinics, and other health care providing facilities. The data from these sub

units will have to be aggregated to see how many employees are employed

by the health care industry.

CLASSIFICATIONS OF DESIGNS:
THE TIME DIMENSION

  • CROSS-SECTIONAL STUDIES ARE CARRIED OUT ONCE AND REPRESENT A SNAPSHOT OF SINGLE POINT IN TIME
  • LONGITUDINAL STUDIES ARE REPEATED FOR THE SAME PHENOMENON OVER AN EXTENDED PERIOD OF TIME

EXAMPLE: CROSS-SECTIONAL

A study can be carried out in which data are collected just ONCE, perhaps over a

period of days, weeks or months, in order to meet a research objective.

Data were collected from sharebrokers between April and June of last year to

study their concerns in a turbulent share market. Data with respect to this

particular research had never been collected from these sharebrokers, nor will

they be collected again from them for this research

EXAMPLE: LONGITUDINAL STUDY

In some cases, the researcher might want to study people or phenomena

at more than one point in time in order to meet the research objective. For

example, the researcher might want to study employees’behaviour BEFORE

and AFTER a change in the top management to learn the effects of the change.

Here the data are gathered at TWO DIFFERENT points in time

A Marketing Manager is interested in tracing the pattern of sales of a particular

product in four different regions of the country on a quarterly basis for the next

two years. Since data are collected several times to answer the same issue,

the study is an example of longitudinal study.

*

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/3. ��������˵��/S7 Sampling.ppt

BUSINESS
RESEARCH METHODS

SESSION 7:

Sample Designs and Sampling Procedures

*

Sampling Terminology

  • Sample
  • Population or universe
  • Population element
  • Census

*

Sample

  • Subset of a larger population
  • Comprises some members selected not all

*

Population

  • Any complete group which constitute the research interest or study:
  • People
  • Sales territories
  • Stores

*

ELEMENT

An element is a single member of the population

If 500 blue collar workers in a particular organisation happen to

be the population of interest to a researcher, each single blue

collar worker is an element

Census

  • Investigation of all individual elements that make up a population

*

SAMPLING

The process of selecting a sufficient number of elements from the population

so that by studying the sample, and understanding the properties or

characteristics of the sample subjects, it would be possible to generalise

the properties or characteristics of the population elements

Define the target population

Select a sampling frame

Conduct fieldwork

Determine if a probability or nonprobability

sampling method will be chosen

Plan procedure

for selecting sampling units

Determine sample size

Select actual sampling units

Stages in the

Selection

of a Sample

*

Target Population

  • Relevant population
  • Operationally define

*

Sampling or Population Frame

  • A list of all the elements in the population from which the sample may be drawn
  • Example: The payroll of an organisation would serve as the sampling frame if its members were to be studied.

*

Two Major Categories of Sampling

  • Probability sampling
  • Known, nonzero probability for every element
  • Nonprobability sampling
  • Probability of selecting any particular member is unknown

*

Nonprobability Sampling

  • Convenience
  • Judgment
  • Quota
  • Snowball

*

Probability Sampling

  • Simple random sample
  • Systematic sample
  • Stratified sample
  • Cluster sample
  • Multistage area sample

*

Convenience Sampling

  • Also called haphazard or accidental sampling
  • The sampling procedure of obtaining the people or units that are most conveniently available

*

Judgment Sampling

  • Also called purposive sampling
  • An experienced individual selects the sample based on his or her judgment about some appropriate characteristics required of the sample member

*

Quota Sampling

  • Ensures that the various subgroups in a population are represented on pertinent sample characteristics
  • To the exact extent that the investigators desire
  • It should not be confused with stratified sampling.

*

Snowball Sampling

  • A variety of procedures
  • Initial respondents are selected by probability methods
  • Additional respondents are obtained from information provided by the initial respondents

*

Simple Random Sampling

  • A sampling procedure that ensures that each element in the population will have an equal chance of being included in the sample

*

Systematic Sampling

  • A simple process
  • Every nth name from the list will be drawn

*

Stratified Sampling

  • Probability sample
  • Subsamples are drawn within different strata
  • Each stratum is more or less equal on some characteristic
  • Do not confuse with quota sample

*

Internet Sampling is Unique

  • Internet surveys allow researchers to rapidly reach a large sample.
  • Speed is both an advantage and a disadvantage.
  • Sample size requirements can be met overnight or almost instantaneously.
  • Survey should be kept open long enough so all sample units can participate.

Internet Sampling

  • Major disadvantage
  • lack of computer ownership and Internet access among certain segments of the population
  • Yet Internet samples may be representative of a target populations.
  • target population - visitors to a particular Web site.
  • Hard to reach subjects may participate

Web Site Visitors

  • Unrestricted samples are clearly convenience samples
  • Randomly selecting visitors
  • Questionnaire request randomly "pops up"
  • Over- representing the more frequent visitors

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/3. ��������˵��/S8 Measurement.ppt

Business
Research Methods

SESSION 8:

Measurement and Measures

*

OPERATIONAL DEFINITION

Operationally defining a concept is basically to render that

concept or concepts measurable.

This is achieved by looking at the behavioural dimensions,

facets or properties denoted by the concept.

Measures for many concepts has already been developed by

researchers. Eg. Work values ( developed by Bowling Green

University ).

When reviewing the literature note reference that discusses

instrument used to measure a concept of study.

EXAMPLE

Learning is an important concept in education and training.

Teachers and trainers tend to measure students or trainee

learning by giving exams or tests. Students quite often feel,

probably correctly, that exams or tests do not really measure

learning – at least not the multiple-choice questions asked

in exams.

How then, might we measure the abstract concept called

learning?

We need to define the concept operationally and break it down

to observable and measurable behaviours

LEARNING

UNDERSTANDING

RETENTION

APPLICATION

Answers

questions

correctly

Give

appropriate

examples

Recall

materials

Solve

problems

applying

concepts

Or

tools

Integrate

With

Other

Relevant

materials

C

D

D

D

E

E

E

E

E

C: Concept

D: Dimension

E: Elements

A MEASURE OF STUDENT LEARNING

An exam that measures LEARNING in students would include the

following questions:

Define the concept of motivation ( recall )

State the various theories of motivation and explain them,

giving examples ( understanding and recall )

Describe three different situations in which a manager of

a work organisation would use equity theory, the expectancy

theory and job design to motivate employees ( application )

Chapter 8

Measurement

Measurement

Measurement: Assigning numbers to empirical events in compliance with a set of rules.

Selecting observable empirical events

Using numbers or symbols to represent aspects of the events

Measurement

Gender: Male (M or 1)

Female (F or 0)

Evaluation:

Completely Agree (1)

Agree (2)

Neutral (3)

Disagree (4)

Completely Disagree (5)

What is Measured?

Objects:

  • Things of ordinary experience
  • Some things not concrete

Properties: characteristics of objects

Characteristics of Data

Classification: Numbers are used to group or sort responses.

Order: Numbers are ordered.

Distance: Differences or intervals between numbers are ordered.

Origin of number series: The number series has a unique origin indicated by 0.

7-4

Slide 8 - 3

MEASUREMENT SCALE

A scale is a tool or mechanism by which individuals are distinguished

on how they differ from one another on the variables of interest to our

study.

There are 4 types of measurement scale:

Nominal scale

Ordinal scale

Interval scale

Ratio scale

NOMINAL SCALE

A nominal scale is one that allows the researcher to assign subjects

to certain categories or groups. For example, with respect to the

variable GENDER, respondents can be grouped into TWO categories-

MALE and FEMALE. These two groups can be assigned code numbers

1 and 2.

These numbers serve as a simple and convenient category labels

with no intrinsic value, other than to assign respondents to one of

two non-overlapping or mutually exclusive categories.

Thus nominal scales categorise individuals or objects into mutually

exclusive and collectively exhaustive groups.

The information that can be generated from nominal scaling is to

calculate the percentage ( or frequency ) of males and females in

our sample of respondents.

ORDINAL SCALE

An ORDINAL scale not only categorises the variables in such a way

as to denote differences amongst the various categories, it also

RANK-ORDERS the categories in some meaningful way.

With any variable for which the categories are to be ordered according

to some preference, the ordinal scale would be used.

Example:

Rank the following 5 characteristics in a job in terms of how important

they are for you. You should rank the most important item as 1 , the

next in importance as 2, and so on.

Job characteristics Ranking of importance

The opportunity provided by the job to:

1) interacts with others ---------------

2) use a number of different skills ---------------

3) complete a task from beginning to end ---------------

4) serve others ----------------

5) work independently ----------------

The ORDINAL scale helps the researcher to determine the

percentage of respondents who consider interaction with others

to be most important, those who consider using a number of

different skills to be the most important, and so on.

Such knowledge might help in designing jobs that would be seen

as most enriched by the majority of employees

You will see that ORDINAL scale provides more information than

The NOMINAL scale. The ORDINAL scale goes beyond differentiating

The categories to providing information on how respondents

Distinguish among them rank-ordering them.

INTERVAL SCALE

An interval scale allows us to perform certain arithmetical operations

on the data collected from the respondents. Whereas the nominal scale

allows us to distinguish groups only qualitatively by categorising them

into mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive sets, and the Ordinal

Scale to rank-order the preferences, the INTERVAL scale allows us to

measure the DISTANCE between two points on the scale.

This helps us to compute the means and the standard deviations of the

responses on the variables. In other words, the INTERVAL scale not

only groups individuals according to certain categories and taps the

order of these groups, it also measures the MAGNITUDE of the differences

in the preferences among the individuals.

If for example, employees think that (1) it is more important for them to

have a variety of skills in their jobs than to complete a task from beginning

to end, and (2) it is more important for them to serve people than to work

independently on the job, then the interval scale would indicate whether

the first preference is to the same extent, a lesser extent or a greater

extent than the second

EXAMPLE

Indicate the extent to which you agree with the following statements as

they relate to your job, by circling the appropriate number against each,

using the response scale given below:

Strongly disagree Disagree Neither agree Agree Strongly

nor disagree agree

1 2 3 4 5

The following opportunities offered by the job are very important to me:

  • Interacting with others 1 2 3 4 5
  • Using a number of different skills 1 2 3 4 5
  • Completing a task from beginning to end 1 2 3 4 5
  • Serving others 1 2 3 4 5
  • Working independently 1 2 3 4 5

RATIO SCALE

Ratio scale are usually used in business research when exact numbers

on objective ( as oppose to subjective ) factors are required for, as in

The following questions:

  • How many other organisations did you work for before joining this one?
  • Please indicate the number of children you have in each of the following

categories:

- below 3 years of age

- between 3 and 6 years

- over 6 years but under 12

- 12 years and over

  • How many outlets do you operate?

The responses to the questions could range from 0 to any reasonable figure

SCALING METHODS

The assigning of numbers or symbols to elicit the responses of the

subjects towards objects, events or persons.

There are two main categories of response scale namely:

  • RATING SCALE
  • RANKING SCALE

Rating scale have several response categories and are used to elicit

responses with regard to the object, event or person studied.

Ranking scale, on the other hand, make comparisons between or

among objects, events or persons, and elicit the preferred choices

and ranking among them.

RATING SCALE

Dichotomous scale

Category scale

Likert scale

Numerical scale

RANKING SCALE

Paired comparison

Forced choice

Comparative scale

Sources of Measurement Errors

Random Error: Unpredictable error that is caused primarily by sampling techniques.

Measurement Error: How well or poorly a particular instrument performs.

Respondent

Situational factors

Measurer or researcher

Data collection instrument

The Characteristics of Sound Measurement

Validity refers to the extent to which a test measures what we actually wish to measure.

Reliability has to do with the accuracy and precision of a measurement procedure.

Practicality is concerned with a wide range of factors of economy, convenience and interpretability.

Validity

Validity: The ability of a research instrument to measure what is supposed to measure. It includes the following:

1. Content Validity

2. Criterion-Related Validity

  • Predictive
  • Concurrent

3. Construct Validity

Validity: Content Validity

  • Degree to which the content of the items adequately represents the universe of all relevant items under study.
  • What elements constitute adequate coverage?
  • Determination of content validity is judgmental: (1) Definition of the topics of concern; (2). A panel of persons to judge how well the instrument meets the standards.

Validity: Criterion-Related Validity
Concurrent Validity of A Pain Index

Alisha develops a new four-item index to assess pain tolerance in a group of patients scheduled for surgery. The items draw information from patients’ memory of their past experiences with pain. The results from the four items are summed to form a Pain Tolerance Index score. The higher the score, the greater the tolerance for pain. Her index is self-administrated and takes about 1 minute for patients to complete. To assess concurrent validity, Alisha administers her four items together with a published pain tolerance survey instrument that has been in use for more than decade in anesthesiology research. It contains 45 items, requires an interviewer, and takes an average of 1 hour to complete. It is also scored as a sum of item responses. It generally accepted as the gold standard in the field.

Validity: Criterion-Related Validity
Concurrent Validity of A Pain Index

Alisha uses both survey instruments to gather data from a sample of 24 patients. Alisha calculates the correlation coefficient to be 0.92 between the two tests of pain tolerance. She concludes that her index has high concurrent validity with the gold standard. Because hers is much shorter and easier to administrator, she convinces the principal investigator in a large national study of postoperative pain to use her more efficient index. Alisha publishes her findings and is awarded a generous academic scholarship as a result of her work.

Validity: Criterion-Related Validity
Predictive Validity of SAT Scores

Bob is the dean of students at brook college, a small liberal arts school in Arizona, and decides to look into whether the SAT scores of entering freshmen predict how well the students will perform during their first semester at Brook. The dean looks back into the registrar’s records for the past 5 years and gathers two data elements for each freshmen: SAT score and first-semester grade point average. The dean enters the two data sets into his laptop computer and calculates a correlation coefficient between the two. To his surprise, he finds the statistic to be 0.45. The students’ SAT scores do not appear to have high predictive validity for early success at Brook College. He immediately writes a memo to the dean of admissions asking for evaluation policies be revised to reflect this important information.

Validity: Criterion-Related Validity
Predictive Validity of SAT Scores

When Jackie, the dean of admissions at Brook, receive Bob’s memo, she decides to do a little investigating of her own. She takes Bob’s data and breaks them down year by year. Using the same formula, she calculates correlation coefficients with her own laptop computer and finds that over the past 5 years the predictive validity of SAT scores have been 0.21, 0.36, 0.39, 0.57, and 0.72. Jackie writes a memo back to Bob, suggesting that although SAT scores did not previously have much predictive validity, they have become increasingly more useful in recent years. Jackie proudly sends a copy of her memo to the chancellor for consideration in her upcoming decision on who should be promoted to provost.

Validity: Construct Validity

  • Measure or infer the presence of abstract characteristics for which no empirical validation seems possible.
  • Construct Validity: Identify the underlying constructs being measured determine how well the test represents them.
  • This form of validity is often determined only after years of experience with a survey instrument.

Reliability

Reliability: A measure is reliable to the degree it supplies consistent results.

(1) Stability

  • Test-retest

(2) Equivalence

  • Parallel forms

(3) Internal Consistency

  • Split-half
  • KR20
  • Cronbach’s alpha

Reliability: Stability

Stability: A measure is said to be reliable if you can secure consistent results with repeated measurements of the same person with the same instrument.

Same test is administrated twice to same subjects over an interval of less than 6 months. (Test-Retest)

Reliability: Stability

Ron wants to assess energy levels in the deputy police chiefs to find out whether crime rates cause burnout among the officers. He designs an item that asks how fresh and energetic they feel today. He administers the same energy question at two time points 4 weeks apart but finds that for this item the correlation coefficient is only 0.32. Ron knows this item does not produce responses that are stable over time because energy levels are are much more likely to change from day to day and from week to week. Various factors may be influencing the changing responses. Perhaps energy levels are not dependent on crime rate in urban areas. Perhaps energy levels are more related to salary or whether the chief had a chance to eat breakfast. Because Ron doesn't know what those factors are, he can’t control for them. Ron is forced to drop this energy item from his survey instrument. Its test retest reliability is too low.

Reliability: Equivalence

Equivalence: Degree to which alternative forms of the same measure produce same or similar results.

Equivalence is concerned with variations at one point in time among observers and samples of items.

One test for equivalence is to use parallel forms of the same test administrated to the same persons simultaneously.

Reliability: Equivalence

Item 1: How often in the past month have you felt all alone in the world?

Every day……………..1

Some days…………….2

Occasionally………….3

Never………………… 4

Reliability: Equivalence

Item 2:During past 4 weeks, how often have you felt a sense of loneliness?

All of the time……………. .1

Sometimes……………… …2

From time to time…………3

Never…………………… …4

Reliability: Internal Consistency

Internal Consistency: Degree to which instrument items are homogenous and reflect the same underlying characteristics.

It is applied not to single items but to group of items that are thought to measure different aspects of the same concept.

Reliability: Internal Consistency

In the RAND health survey, emotional health is assessed with three items:

Have you been a very nervous person?

Have you felt downhearted and blue?

Have you felt so down in the dumps that nothing could cheer you up?

Practicality

  • Economy

  • Convenience

  • Interpretability

7-9

*

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/3. ��������˵��/S9 Questionaire Data Collection.ppt

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009


Collecting primary data using questionnaires

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Use of questionnaires (1)

Definition of Questionnaires

Techniques of data collection in which each person is asked to respond to the same set of questions in a predetermined order

Adapted from deVaus (2002)

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Use of questionnaires (2)

When to use questionnaires

  • For explanatory or descriptive research

  • Linked with other methods in a multiple-methods research design

  • To collect responses from a large sample prior to quantitative analysis

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Use of questionnaires (3)

Types of questionnaire

Saunders et al. (2009)

Figure 11.1 Types of questionnaire

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Choice of questionnaire

Related factors

  • Characteristics of the respondents and access

  • Respondents answers not being contaminated or distorted

  • Size of sample required for analysis

  • Type and number of questions required
  • Available resources including use of computer software

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Data collection

Key factors

  • Precisely defined questions

  • Representative and accurate sampling

  • An understanding of the organisational context

  • Relationships between variables – dependent, independent and extraneous
  • Types of variable

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Ensuring essential data are collected

Data requirements table

Saunders et al. (2009)

Table 11.2 Data requirements table

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Designing the questionnaire (1)

Stages that must occur if a question is to be valid and reliable

Source: developed from Foddy (1994)

Figure 11.2 Stages that must occur if a question is to be valid and reliable

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Designing the questionnaire (2)

Assessing validity

  • Internal
  • Content
  • Criterion – related (predictive)
  • Construct

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Designing the questionnaire (3)

Testing for reliability- the 3 stage process

  • Test re-test

  • Internal consistency

  • Alternative form

Mitchell (1996)

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Examples of question types (1)

Open questions

Please list up to three things you like about your job

1…………………………………………

2…………………………………………

3…………………………………………

Saunders et al. (2009)

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Examples of question types (2)

List questions

What is your religion?

Please tick  the appropriate box

Buddhist  None 

Christian  Other 

Hindu 

Jewish 

Muslim 

Sikh 

Saunders et al. (2009)

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Examples of question types (3)

Category questions

8 How often do you visit the shopping centre?

Interviewer: listen to the respondent’s answer and tick  as appropriate

 First visit

 Once a week

 Less than fortnightly to once a month

 2 or more times a week

Less than once a week to fortnightly

Less often

Saunders et al. (2009)

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Examples of question types (4)

Ranking questions

Please number each of the factors listed below in order of importance to you in choosing a new car. Number the most important 1, the next 2 and so on. If a factor has no importance at all, please leave blank.

Factor Importance

Carbon dioxide emissions [ ]

Boot size [ ]

Depreciation [ ]

Price [ ]

Adapted from Saunders et al. (2009)

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Examples of question types (5)

Rating questions

10 For the following statement please tick the box that matches your view most closely

Agree Tend to agree Tend to disagree Disagree

I feel employees’    

views have

influenced the

decisions taken

by management

Saunders et al. (2009)

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Examples of question types (6)

Quantity questions

What is your year of birth?

(For example, for 1988 write: )

Saunders et al. (2009)

1

1

9

9

8

8

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Designing individual questions (1)

Other considerations

  • Adopting or adapting existing questions – remember to check copyright

  • Question wording

  • Translating questions into other languages
  • Question coding

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Designing individual questions (2)

Checklist Box 11.11

Complete the Checklist in Box 11.11

to help you with the wording of your questions

Saunders et al. (2009)

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Constructing the questionnaire

Main considerations

  • Order and flow of questions

  • Questionnaire layout
  • Beware of BAISES in questions

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Biases in Questions

  • Double Barrelled Questions
  • Ambiguous Questions
  • Leading Questions
  • Loaded Questions

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Examples

  • Do you think there is a good market for the product?

and

2) Do you think the product will sell well?

‘To what extent would you say you are happy?

Don’t you think that in these days of escalating costs of

living, employees should be given good pay rise?

To what extent do you think management is likely to be

vindictive if the union decide to go on strike?

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Explaining the purpose and testing

Key points

  • The covering letter

  • Introducing and closing the questionnaire

  • Pilot testing and assessing validity

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Administering the questionnaire

Points to consider

  • Internet and intranet-mediated responses
  • Postal questionnaires
  • Delivery and Collection
  • Telephone questionnaires
  • Structured interviews

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Summary: Chapter 11

  • Questionnaires are often used to collect descriptive and explanatory data

  • Five main types of questionnaire are Internet- or intra-net mediated, postal, delivery and collection, telephone and interview schedule

  • Precise data that meet the research objectives can be produced by using a data requirements table

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Summary: Chapter 11

  • Data validity and reliability and response rate depend on design, structure and rigorous pilot testing

  • Wording and order of questions and question types are important considerations

  • Closed questions should be pre-coded to facilitate data input and analysis

Slide 11.*

Saunders, Lewis and Thornhill, Research Methods for Business Students, 5th Edition, © Mark Saunders, Philip Lewis and Adrian Thornhill 2009

Summary: Chapter 11

  • Important design features are a clear layout, a logical order and flow of questions and easily completed responses

  • Questionnaires should be carefully introduced and pilot tested prior to administration

  • Administration needs to be appropriate to the type of questionnaire

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/4. ����/Appendix_1_Referencing_Systems.pdf

688

Preferred styles of referencing differ both between universities and between depart-

ments within universities. Even styles that are in wide use such as ‘Harvard’ vary in

how they are used in practice by different institutions. When this is combined with the

reality that some lecturers apply an adopted style strictly, while others are more lenient,

it emphasises the need for you to use the precise style prescribed in your assessment

criteria. Within business and management, two author–date referencing systems pre-

dominate, the Harvard style and the American Psychological Association (APA) style,

both of which are author–date systems. The alternative, numeric systems, is used far

less widely.

Six points are important when referencing:

• Full credit must be given to the author or originator (the person or organisation taking main responsibility for the source) when quoting or citing others’ work.

• Adequate information must be provided in the reference to enable that work to be located.

• References must be consistent, complete and accurate. • References must be recorded using precisely the style required by your university and

are often part of the marking criteria.

• Wherever you directly quote an author you should use ‘quotation marks’ to show this and also record the precise location (normally page number).

• If you fail to reference fully, you are likely to be accused of plagiarism (Section 3.9).

As you will see later in this appendix, when referring to an electronic document, prin-

cipally a journal article, accessed online, it is becoming more usual to include that

document’s DOI (digital object identifier) as part of the reference. The DOI provides a

permanent and unique identifier for that document. Where there is no DOI, it is usual

to include the document’s URL (uniform resource locator – usually its web address).

As the URL is not permanent, the date when it was accessed is also included in the

reference.

Author–date systems

The Harvard style

Referencing in the text

The Harvard style is an author–date system, a variation of which we use in this book. It

appears to have its origins in a referencing practice developed by a professor of anatomy

at Harvard University (Neville 2010) and usually uses the author’s or originator’s name

and year of publication to identify cited documents within the text. All references are

Appendix 1 Systems of referencing

Author–date systems

689

listed alphabetically at the end of the text. Common institutional variations within the

Harvard style which are applied consistently include (Neville 2010):

• Where there are more than two authors, the names of the second and subsequent authors may or may not be replaced in the text by et al. This phrase may be in italics

and is usually followed by a full stop to signify it is an abbreviation of et alia.

• Name(s) of authors or originators may or may not be in UPPER CASE in the list of references.

• The year of publication may or may not be enclosed in (brackets) in the list of references.

• Capitalisation of words in the title is usually kept to a minimum rather than being used for Many of the Words in the Title.

• The title of the publication may be in italics or may be underlined in the list of references.

The style for referencing work in the text and in the list of references or bibliography is

outlined in Table A1.1, additional conventions for referencing in the text being given in

Table A1.2.

Table A1.1 Conventions when using the Harvard style to reference

To cite In the text In the list of references/bibliography

General format Example General format Example

Books

Book (first edition)

1 author: (Family name year)

2 or 3 authors: (Family name, Family name and Family name year)

4+ authors: (Family name et al. year)

1 author: (Silverman 2007)

2 or 3 authors: (Berman Brown and Saunders 2008)

4+ authors: (Millmore et al. 2010)

Family name, Initials. (year). Title. Place of publication: Publisher.

Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. (year). Title. Place of publication: Publisher.

Family name, Initials., Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials [can be discretionary to include more than first author] (year). Title. Place of publication: Publisher.

Silverman, D. (2007). A Very Short, Fairly Interesting and Reasonably Cheap Book about Qualitative Research. London: Sage.

Berman Brown, R. and Saunders, M. (2008). Dealing with Statistics: What You Need to Know. Maidenhead: Open University Press.

Millmore, M., Lewis, P., Saunders, M., Thornhill, A. and Morrow, T. (2007). Strategic Human Resource Management: Contemporary Issues. Harlow: FT Prentice Hall.

Book (other than first edition)

As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Anderson et al. 2014)

Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. (year). Title. (# edn). Place of publication: Publisher.

Anderson, D.L., Sweeney, D.J., Williams, T.A., Freeman, J. and Shoesmith, E. (2014). Statistics for Business and Economics. (3rd edn). Andover: Cengage Learning EMA.

(Continued )

Appendix 1 Systems of referencing

690

To cite In the text In the list of references/bibliography

General format Example General format Example

Book (edited) As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Saunders et al. 2010)

Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. (eds.) (year). Title. Place of publication: Publisher.

Saunders, M.N.K, Skinner, D., Gillespie, N., Dietz, G. and Lewicki, R.J. (eds.) (2010). Organizational Trust: A Cultural Perspective. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.

Book (not in English language)

As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Fontaine et al. 2010)

Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. (year). Title [English translation of title]. Place of publication: Publisher.

Fontaine, C., Salti, S. and Thivard, T. (2010). 100 CV et lettres de motivation [100 CV and cover letters]. Paris: Studyrama.

Book (translated into English)

As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Hugo 2003) Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. (year). Title. (Initials of translator. Family name of translator. Trans). Place of publication: Publisher. (Original work published year).

Hugo, V. (2003). Les Miserables. (N. Denny. Trans.). London: Penguin. (Original work published 1862).

Republished book

As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Marshall 1981)

Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. (year). Title. Place of publication: Publisher (originally published by Publisher year).

Marshall, J.D. (1981). Furness and the Industrial Revolution. Beckermont: Michael Moon (originally published by Barrow Town Council 1958).

E-book As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Saunders 2013)

Family name, Initials. (year). Title. [name of e-book reader]. Place of publication: Publisher.

Saunders, J.J. (2013). The Holocaust: History in an Hour [Kindle e-book]. London: William Collins.

Online book As for ‘Book (first edition)’ or ‘Edited book’

(Sungsoo 2013)

Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. (year). Title. (# edn) Place of publication: Publisher. [Accessed day month year from Database name].

Sungsoo, P. (ed.) (2013). Benchmarks in Hospitality and Tourism. New York: Routledge. [Accessed 6 Apr. 2014 from MyLibrary.com]

Chapters in books

Chapter in a book

As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Robson 2011) Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. (year). Title. Place of publication: Publisher. Chapter #.

Robson, C. (2011). Real World Research. (3rd edn). Oxford: Blackwell. Chapter 3.

Table A1.1 (Continued )

Author–date systems

691

To cite In the text In the list of references/bibliography

General format Example General format Example

Chapter in an edited book containing a collection of articles (sometimes called a reader)

(Chapter author family name year)

(King 2012) Family name, Initials. (year). Chapter title. In Initials. Family name and Initials. Family name (eds) Title. Place of publication: Publisher. pp. ###–###.

King, N. (2012). Doing template analysis. In G. Symon and C. Cassell (eds) Qualitative Organizational Research. London: Sage. pp. 426–50.

Chapter in an online book

(Chapter author family name year)

(Roper 2007) Chapter author family name, Initials. (year). Chapter title. In Initials. Family name and Initials. Family name (eds) Title. Place of publication: Publisher. pp. ###–###. [Accessed day month year from Database name].

Roper, A. (2007). The international marketing management decisions of UK ski tour operators. In M. Saunders, P. Lewis and A. Thornhill. Research Methods for Business Students. (4th edn) Harlow: FT Prentice Hall. pp. 158–9. [Accessed 6 Apr. 2014 from MyLibrary.com]

Dictionaries and other reference books

. . . where author known

As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Vogt and Johnson 2011)

Family name, Initials. (year). Title. (# edn). Place of Publication: Publisher. pp. ###–###.

Vogt, W.P. and Johnson, R.B. (2011). Dictionary of Statistics and Methodology: A Nontechnical Guide for the Social Sciences. (4th edn). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage. pp. 31–2.

. . . where no author or editor

(Publication title year)

(The right word at the right time 1985)

Publication title. (year). (# edn). Place of Publication: Publisher. pp. ###–###.

The right word at the right time. (1985). Pleasantville, NY: Readers Digest Association. pp. 563–4.

. . . where editor known and author for particular entry

(Entry author family name data)

(Watson 2008) Entry author family name, Initials. (year). Entry title. In Initials. Family name and Initials. Family name (eds) Title. Place of publication: Publisher. pp. ###–###.

Watson, T. (2008). Field research. In R. Thorpe and R. Holt (eds) The SAGE Dictionary of Qualitative Management Research. London: Sage. pp. 99–100.

. . . where accessed online and is no author or editor

(Publication title year)

(Encyclopaedia Britannica Online 2014)

Publication title. (year). Available at http://www. remainderoffullInternet address/ [Accessed day month year].

Encyclopaedia Britannica. Online. (2014). Available at http://www.britannica.com/ [Accessed 4 Mar. 2014].

(Continued )

Appendix 1 Systems of referencing

692

To cite In the text In the list of references/bibliography

General format Example General format Example

. . . where accessed online and no author or editor for a particular entry

(Publication title year)

(Encyclopaedia Britannica Online 2014)

Publication title. (year). Title of entry. Available at http://www .remainderoffullInternet address/ [Accessed day month year].

Encyclopaedia Britannica Online. (2014). Definition of ‘Marketing’. Available at http://www.britannica.com/ EBchecked/topic/365730/ marketing [Accessed 4 Mar. 2014].

Reports

Report As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Gray et al. 2012)

Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. (year). Title. Place of publication: Publisher.

Gray, D.E., Saunders M.N.K. and Goregaokar, H. (2012). Success in Challenging Times: Key Lessons for UK SMEs. London: Kingston Smith LLP.

Report (no named author)

(Originator name or Publication title year)

(Mintel Marketing Intelligence 2008)

Originator name or Publication title. (year). Title. Place of publication: Publisher.

Mintel Marketing Intelligence. (1998). Designerwear: Mintel marketing intelligence report. London: Mintel International Group Ltd.

Organisation’s annual report

As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Tesco Plc 2013)

Organisation name. (year). Title. Place of publication: as author.

Tesco Plc. (2013). Working to make what matters better, together: Annual report 2013. Cheshunt: as author.

Online report As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Thorlby et al. 2014)

Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. (year). Title of report. Available at http://www. remainderoffullInternet address/ [Accessed day month year].

Thorlby, R., Smith, J., Williams, S. and Dayan, M. (2014). The Francis Report: One year on. Available at: http://www.nuffieldtrust. org.uk/sites/files/nuffield/ publication/140206_the_ francis_inquiry.pdf. [Accessed 20 Mar. 2014].

Online report (no named author)

(Originator name or Publication title year)

(Mintel 2013) Originator name. (year). Title of report. Available at http://www. remainderoffullInternet address/ [Accessed day month year].

Mintel (2013) – Online Retailing in China – May 2013. Available at: http:// academic.mintel.com/ display/642908/#atom0 [Accessed 3 Oct. 2013].

Government and governmental bodies’ publications

Parliamentary papers including acts and bills

(Country of origin year)

(United Kingdom 2013)

Country of origin. (year). Title. Place of publication: Publisher.

United Kingdom. (2013). The Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act. London: TSO (The Stationery Office).

Table A1.1 (Continued )

Author–date systems

693

To cite In the text In the list of references/bibliography

General format Example General format Example

Parliamentary debates (Hansard)

(Country Parliament year)

(United Kingdom Parliament 2013)

Country Parliament. House of Commons (HC) or House of Lords (HL) Deb. day month year. Command paper #.

United Kingdom Parliament HC Deb. 20 November 2013. Command paper 8655.

Other As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Francis 2013) As for ‘Book (first edition)’ Francis, R. (2013). Report of the Mid Staffordshire NHS Foundation Trust Public Inquiry: Executive Summary. London: The Stationery Office.

Other (no named author or editor)

(Department name or Committee name year)

(United Nations 2013)

Department name or Committee name. (year). Title. Place of publication: Publisher.

United Nations. (2013). The Millennium Development Goals Report 2013. New York: United Nations.

Other (online) (Family name year)

(Browne and Alstrup 2006)

Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. (year). Title of report. Available at http://www.remainderoffull Internetaddress/ [Accessed day month year].

Browne, L. and Alstrup, P. (Eds.) (2006). What exactly is the Labour Force Survey? Available at http://www. statistics.gov.uk/downloads/_ theme_labour/_What_ exactly_is_LFS1.pdf [Accessed 25 Dec. 2007].

Other (no named author or editor; online)

(Department name or Committee name year)

(Department for Business Innovation and Skills 2014)

Department name or Committee name. (year). Title. Available at http:// www.remainderoffull Internetaddress/ [Accessed day month year].

Department for Business Innovation and Skills. (2014). Women on Boards: Voluntary Code for Executive Search firms. Available at: https:// www.gov.uk/government/ uploads/system/uploads/ attachment_data/file/286342/ bis-14–640-women-on- boards-voluntary-code-for- executive-search-firms-taking- the-next-step-march-2014. pdf [Accessed 20 Mar. 2014].

Journal articles

Journal article (print form or facsimile of print form accessed via full text database)

As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Rojon et al. 2011)

Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. (year). Title of article. Journal name. Vol. ##, No. ##, pp. ###–####.

Rojon, C., McDowall, A. and Saunders, M.N.K. (2011). On the Experience of Conducting a Systematic Review in Industrial, Work and Organizational Psychology: Yes, It Is Worthwhile. Journal of Personnel Psychology. Vol. 10, No. 3, pp. 133–8.

(Continued )

Appendix 1 Systems of referencing

694

To cite In the text In the list of references/bibliography

General format Example General format Example

Journal article (facsimile of print form, where full text database details required by University)

As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Rojon et al., 2011)

Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. (year). Title of article. Journal name. Vol. ##, No. ##, pp. ###–####. [Accessed day month year from Database name].

Rojon, C., McDowall, A. and Saunders, M.N.K. (2011). On the Experience of Conducting a Systematic Review in Industrial, Work and Organizational Psychology: Yes, It Is Worthwhile. Journal of Personnel Psychology. Vol. 10, No. 3, pp. 133–8. [Accessed 6 Apr. 2010 from PsycARTICLES].

Journal article which is forthcoming but published online, prior to appearing in the journal; available in facsimile form

As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Saunders and Rojon 2014)

Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. (year). Title of article, Journal name. Available at full doi or Internet address [Accessed day month year].

Saunders, M.N.K. and Rojon, C. (2014) There’s no madness in my method: explaining how your coaching research findings are built on firm foundations. Coaching: An International Journal of Theory, Research and Practice. Available at DOI: 10.1080/ 17521882.2014.889185 [Accessed 6 Mar. 2014].

Journal article only published online, which is not published in print or facsimile form

As for ‘Journal article made available by the publisher in advance online . . .’

(Yang and Banamah 2013)

As for ‘Journal article made available by the publisher in advance online . . .’

Yang, K. and Banamah, A. (2013). Quota Sampling as an Alternative to Probability Sampling? An Experimental Study. Sociological Research Online. Vol. 18, No. 4. Available at http://www. socresonline.org.uk/19/1/29. html [Accessed 4 Mar. 2014].

Magazine articles

Magazine article

As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Saunders 2004)

Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. (year). Title of article. Magazine name. Vol. ##, No. ## (or Issue or day and/or month), pp. ###–###.

Saunders, M. (2004). Land of the long white cloud. HOG News UK. Issue 23, Oct. pp. 24–6.

Magazine article (no named author)

(Originator name or Publication name year)

(People Management 2014)

Originator name or Publication name. (year). Title of article. Magazine name. Vol. ##, No. ## (or Issue or day and/or month), pp. ###–###.

People Management. (2014). Efficiency rule was misused. People Management. Mar. p. 17.

Table A1.1 (Continued )

Author–date systems

695

To cite In the text In the list of references/bibliography

General format Example General format Example

News articles including newspapers and online news

Newspaper article

As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Frean 2014) Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. Title of article. Newspaper name, day month year, p. ###.

Frean, A. Credit Suisse bankers ‘assisted tax evasion’. The Times. 27 Feb. 2014, p. 35.

Newspaper article (no named author)

(Newspaper name year)

(The Times 2014)

Newspaper name. Title of article, day month year, p. ##.

The Times. Budweiser’s early win, 27 Feb. 2014, p. 33.

Newspaper article (published online)

As for other News articles

(Rankin 2014) Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. Title of article. Newspaper name, day month year. Available at http://www. full-Internetaddress/ [Accessed day month year].

Rankin J. Record number of women make 28th annual Forbes’ billionaires list. The Guardian. 4 Mar. 2014. Available at http://www.theguardian. com/business/2014/mar/03/ record-number-women- forbes-28th-billionaires-list. html?src=linkedin [Accessed 4 Mar. 2014].

Newspaper article (from electronic database)

As for other News articles

(Anderson 2009)

Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. Title of article. Newspaper name, day month year, p. ### (if known). [Accessed day month year from Database name].

Anderson, L. How to choose a Business School. Financial Times, 23 Jan. 2009. [Accessed 20 Mar. 2010 from ft.com].

News article (from news web site)

As for other News articles

(Gordon 2014) Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. Title of article. News web site, day month year. Available at http://www.full- Internetaddress/ [Accessed day month year].

Gordon, O. Keeping crowdsourcing honest. Can we trust the reviews? BBC News, 14 Feb. 2014. Available at: http://www.bbc.co.uk/ news/technology-26182642 [Accessed 4 Mar. 2014].

CD-ROMS

CD-ROM As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Friedman et al. 2007)

Family name, Initials. and family name, initials. (year). Title of CD-ROM. [CD-ROM]. Place of publication: Publisher.

Friedman, M., Friedman, R. and Adams, J. (2007). Free to chase. [CD-ROM]. Ashland, OR: Blackstone Audiobooks.

CD-ROM (no named author)

(CD-ROM title year)

(Encarta 2006 Encyclopaedia 2005)

Title of CD-ROM. (year). [CD-ROM]. Place of publication: Publisher.

Encarta 2006 Encyclopaedia. (2005). [CD-ROM]. Redmond, WA: Microsoft.

(Continued )

Appendix 1 Systems of referencing

696

To cite In the text In the list of references/bibliography

General format Example General format Example

Brochures and Media/Press releases

Brochure (Originator name or Brochure title year)

(BMW AG 2013)

Originator name or Brochure title. (year). Title. Place of publication: as author.

BMW AG. (2013). Mini Hatch. Mini Convertible. Mini Clubman. Munich: as author.

Media/press releases

(Originator name or Release title year).

(BBC 2014) Originator name or Release title. (year). Title. Place of publication: as author.

BBC. (2014). BBC Trust approves proposals for BBC store. London: as author.

Online/websites

Internet site or specific site pages

(Source organisation year)

(European Commission 2014)

Source organisation. (year). Title of site or page within site. Available at http:// www.remainderoffull Internetaddress/ [Accessed day month year].

European Commission. (2014). Eurostat – structural indicators. Available at http:// epp.eurostat.ec.europa.eu/ portal/page/portal/ structural_indicators/ introduction [Accessed 5 Mar. 2014].

Blogs (weblogs), web forums, Wikis

Blogs (weblogs)

(Owners family name year of posting)

(Kitces 2014) Owner’s family name, Owner’s Initials. (year of posting). Specific subject. Title of blog. Day Month Year (of posting). [Blog] Available at http://www. remainderoffull Internetaddress/ [Accessed day month year].

Kitces, M. (2014). Best practice in client communication for financial advisors Nerd’s Eye View. 3 Mar. 2014. [Blog] Available at http://www.kitces.com/ blog/weekend-reading- for-financial-planners- mar-1–2/ [Accessed 7 Mar. 2014].

Web forums (Usenet groups, bulletin boards etc.)

(Author’s family name year of posting)

(Manchip 2013)

Authors family name, Authors initials. (year of posting). Title of posting. Name of forum. Posted day month year (of posting).

Manchip, S. (2013). Physical accessibility. Access to transport for people with physical disabilities web forum. Posted 5 Jun. 2013.

Name of forum. Posted day month year (of posting). [Web forum]. Available at http://www.remainderoffull Internetaddress/ [Accessed day month year].

[Web forum] Available at http:// www.parliament.uk/business/ committees/committees-a-z/ commons-select/transport- committee/inquiries/ parliament-2010/disabled- access-to-transport/web-forum/ physical-accessibility/ [Accessed 9 Mar. 2014].

Table A1.1 (Continued )

Author–date systems

697

To cite In the text In the list of references/bibliography

General format Example General format Example

Wiki (Originator name or Wiki title year of posting)

(Microformats Wiki 2014)

Originator name or Wiki title. Title of Wiki. Day Month Year (of posting). [Wiki article]. Available at http://www. remainderoffull Internetaddress/ [Accessed day month year].

Microfromats Wiki. Chat: brainstorming. 5 Mar. 2014. [Wiki article] Available at http://microformats.org/wiki/ chat-brainstorming [Accessed 9 Mar. 2014].

Discussion list email (where email sender known)

(Author’s family name year of posting)

(Cox 2013) Sender’s Family name, Sender’s Initials. (year of posting). Re. Subject of discussion. Posted day month year. Sender’s email address (see note below). [Accessed day month year].

Cox, F. (2013). Census 2011 link to longitudinal studies. Posted 10 Feb. 2013. fion . . . @mail.com [Accessed 19 Mar. 2014].

Letters and personal emails

Letter (Sender’s family name year)

(Saunders 2014)

Sender’s family name, Sender’s Initials. (year). Unpublished letter to Recipient’s Initials. Recipient’s Family name re. Subject matter, day, month, year.

Saunders, J.J. (2014). Unpublished letter to M.N.K. Saunders re. Holocaust, 10 Sept. 2014.

Personal email

(Sender’s family name year)

(Harrison 2013) Sender’s family name, Sender’s initials. (year). Email to recipient’s initials. recipient’s family name re. Subject matter, day month year.

Harrison, D. (2013). Email to M.N.K. Saunders re. Reviewers’ feedback, 27 Nov. 2013.

Online images and diagrams

Online image or diagram

As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Gilroy 1936) Author’s name, Author’s initials. (year of production if available). Title of image or diagram. Format, name and place of source if available. Available at http://www.remainderoffull Internetaddress/ [Accessed day month year].

Gilroy, J. (1936). Lovely day for a Guinness. Advertising poster, Guinness Webstore. Available at http://www .guinnesswebstore.com/ imagesEdp/p82866b.jpg [Accessed 23 Mar. 2014].

(Continued )

Appendix 1 Systems of referencing

698

To cite In the text In the list of references/bibliography

General format Example General format Example

Online image or diagram (no named author)

(Diagram or image title year)

Iron Maiden, A matter of life and death 2006)

Title of image or diagram. (year of production if available). Format, name and place of source if available. Available at http:// www.remainderoffull Internetaddress/ [Accessed day month year].

Iron Maiden, A matter of life and death. (2006). Tour poster, Starstore.com. Available at http://www .starstore.com/acatalog/ Starstore_Catalogue_IRON_ MAIDEN_POSTERS__IRON_ MAIDEN_POSTER_1815.html [Accessed 20 Mar. 2014].

Conference papers

Conference paper published as part of proceedings

As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Saunders 2009)

Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. (year). Title of paper. In Initials. Family name and Initials. Family name (eds) Title. Place of publication: Publisher. pp. ###–###.

Saunders, M.N.K. (2009). A real world comparison of responses to distributing questionnaire surveys by mail and web. In J. Azzopardi (Ed.) Proceedings of the 8th European Conference on Research Methods in Business and Management. Reading: ACI, pp. 323–30.

Unpublished conference paper

As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Saunders et al. 2010)

Family name, Initials. and Family name, Initials. (year). Title of paper. Unpublished paper presented at ‘Conference name’. Location of conference, day month year.

Saunders, M.N.K., Slack, R. and Bowen, D. (2010). Location, the development of swift trust and learning: insights from two doctoral summer schools. Unpublished paper presented at the ‘EIASM 5th Workshop on Trust Within and Between Organizations’. Madrid, 28–29 January 2010.

Film, Video, TV, Radio, Downloads

Television or radio programme

(Television or radio programme title year)

(Today Programme 2014)

Programme title. (year of production). Transmitting organisation and nature of transmission, day month year of transmission.

The Today Programme. (2014). British Broadcasting Corporation Radio broadcast, 11 Apr. 2014.

Television or radio programme that is part of a series

(Television or radio programme series title year)

(Money Programme 2011)

Series title. (year of production). Episode. episode title. Transmitting organisation and nature of transmission, day month year of transmission.

The Money Programme. (2011). Episode. BP $30 Billion Blowout. British Broadcasting Corporation Television broadcast, 3 Mar. 2011.

Table A1.1 (Continued )

Author–date systems

699

To cite In the text In the list of references/bibliography

General format Example General format Example

Commercial DVD

(DVD title year) (Bruce Springsteen live in New York City 2003)

DVD title. (Year of production). [DVD]. Place of publication: Publisher.

Bruce Springsteen live in New York City (2003). [DVD]. New York: Sony.

Commercial DVD that is part of a series

(DVD series title year)

(The Office complete series 1 and 2 and the Christmas specials 2005)

DVD series title (Year of production) Episode. Episode title. [DVD]. Place of publication: Publisher.

The Office complete series 1 and 2 and the Christmas specials. (2005). Episode. Series 1 Christmas Special. [DVD]. London: British Broadcasting Corporation.

Video download (e.g. YouTube)

(Company name or Family name year)

(Miller 2008) Company name or Family name, Initials. (year). Title of audio download. YouTube. Available at http://www .remainderoffull Internetaddress/ [Accessed day month year].

Miller, L. (2008). Harvard style referencing made easy. YouTube. Available at http://www.youtube .com/watch?v=RH1lzyn7Exc [Accessed 5 Mar. 2014].

Audio CD (Family name or Artist or Group year)

(Goldratt 2005) Family name, Initials. or Artist. or Group. (year). Title of CD. [Audio CD]. Place of Publication: Publisher.

Goldratt, E.M. (2005). Beyond the goal. [Audio CD]. Buffalo NY: Goldratt’s Marketing Group.

Audio download (e.g. Podcast)

(Company name or Family name year)

(Friedman 2014)

Company name or Family name, Initials. (year). Title of audio download. Title of series ### [Audio podcast] Available at http://www .remainderoffull Internetaddress/ [Accessed day month year].

Friedman, S.D. (2014). Is work family conflict reaching a tipping point? Harvard Business IdeaCast 394. [Audio podcast] Available at https://itunes.apple.com/ gb/podcast/hbr-ideacast/ id152022135?mt=2 [Accessed 9 May 2014].

Course materials and online teaching materials from virtual learning environments (VLEs)

Lecture* (Lecturer family name year)

(Saunders 2013)

Lecturer family name, Initials. (year). Lecture on title of lecture. Module title. Year (if appropriate) and course title. Place of lecture: Institution. Day month year.

Saunders, M.N.K. (2013). Lecture on Using Secondary Data. Research Methods (MANM169). MSc International Business Management. Guildford: University of Surrey. 17 Oct. 2013.

Module and course notes*

As for ‘Book (first edition)’

(Bell 2013) Lecturer family name, Initials. (year). Title of material. Module title (if appropriate). Level (if appropriate) and course title. Institution, Department or School.

Bell, J. (2013). Postgraduate dissertation handbook 2013–14. MSc Management. University of Surrey, Faculty of Business Economics and Law.

(Continued )

Appendix 1 Systems of referencing

700

To cite In the text In the list of references/bibliography

General format Example General format Example

Materials available on a VLE*

(Author family name year)

(Saunders 2014)

Author family name, Initials. (year of production). Title of material [nature of material]. Module title (if appropriate). Level (if appropriate) and course title. Institution name of VLE [online]. Available at http://www.remainderoffull Internetaddress/ [Accessed day month year].

Saunders, MNK. (2014). New developments in trust, distrust and the management of change [PowerPoint slides]. New Directions in Management Research (MANM295). Integrated PhD. University of Surrey SurreyLearn [online]. Available at surreylearn.surrey.ac.uk/ d2l/home/102366 [Accessed 10 Mar. 2014].

Notes: Where date is not known or unclear, follow conventions outlined towards the end of Table A1.2.

Email addresses should not be included except when they are in the public domain. Even where this is the case, permission should be obtained or the email

address replaced by ‘. . .’ after the fourth character, for example: ‘abcd . . . @isp.ac.uk’.

*Be warned, most lecturers consider citing of lectures as ‘lazy’ scholarship.

Table A1.2 Additional conventions when using the Harvard style to reference in the text

To refer to Use the general format For example

Work by different authors generally (Family name year, Family name year) in alphabetical order

(Cassell 2014, Dillman 2009, Robson 2011)

Different authors with the same family name

(Family name Initial year) (Smith J. 2008)

Different works by the same author (Family name year, year) in ascending year order

(Saunders 2012, 2013)

Different works by the same author from the same year

(Family name year letter), make sure the letter is consistent throughout

(Tosey 2014a)

An author referred to by another author where the original has not been read (secondary reference)*

(Family name year, cited by Family name year)

(Cassell 2012, cited by Lanham-New 2014)

A work for which the year of publication cannot be identified

(Family name or Originator name nd), where ‘nd’ means no data

(Woollons nd)

(Family name or Originator name c. year) where ‘c.’ means circa

(Hattersley c. 2004)

A direct quotation (Family name or Originator name year, p. ###) where ‘p.’ means ‘page’ and ### is the page in the original publication on which the quotation appears

“A card sort offers the simplest form of sorting technique” (Saunders 2012, p. 112)

*For secondary references, whilst many universities only require you to give details of the source you looked at in your list of references, you may also be required

the reference for the original source in your list of references.

Table A1.1 (Continued )

701

Numeric systems

Referencing in the list of references or bibliography

In the list of references or bibliography all the sources are listed alphabetically in one list

by the originator or author’s family name, and all authors’ family names and initials are

normally listed in full. If there is more than one work by the same author or originator,

these are listed chronologically. A style for referencing work in the list of references or

bibliography is outlined in Table A1.1. While it would be impossible for us to include an

example of every type of reference you might need to include, the information contained

in this table should enable you to work out the required format for all your references.

If there are any about which you are unsure, Colin Neville’s (2010) book The Complete

Guide to Referencing and Avoiding Plagiarism is one of the most comprehensive sources

we have found.

For copies of journal articles from printed journals that you have obtained electroni-

cally online it is usually acceptable to reference these using exactly the same format as

printed journal articles (Table A1.1), provided that you have obtained and read a facsim-

ile (exact) copy of the article. Facsimile copies of journal articles have precisely the same

format as the printed version, including page numbering, tables and diagrams, other than

for the copy, which is published ‘online first’. Online first refers to forthcoming articles

that have been published online, prior to them appearing in journals. They therefore do

not have a volume or part number, and the page numbering will not be the same as the

final copy. When referencing an ‘online first’ copy in the list of references, you should

always include the DOI. A facsimile copy usually obtained by downloading the article as

a pdf file that can be read on the screen and printed using Adobe Acrobat Reader.

Finally, remember to include a, b, c etc. immediately after the year when you are ref-

erencing different publications by the same author from the same year. Do not forget to

ensure that these are consistent with the letters used for the references in the main text.

The American Psychological Association (APA) style The American Psychological Association style or APA style is a variation on the author–

date system. Like the Harvard style it dates from the 1930s and 1940s, and has been

updated subsequently. The latest updates are outlined in the latest edition of the

American Psychological Association’s (2009) Concise Rules of the APA Style, which is

likely to be available for reference in your university’s library.

Relatively small but significant differences exist between the Harvard and APA styles,

and many authors adopt a combination of the two styles. The key differences are outlined

in Table A1.3.

Numeric systems

Referencing in the text When using a numeric system such as the Vancouver style, references within the project

report are shown by a number that is either bracketed or in superscript. This number

refers directly to the list of references at the end of the text, and it means it is not neces-

sary for you to include the authors’ names or year of publication:

‘Research1 indicates that . . .’

1 Ritzer, G. The McDonaldization of Society. (6th edn). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage, Pine Forge Press, 2011.

Appendix 1 Systems of referencing

702

Referencing in the list of references The list of references in numeric systems is sequential, referencing items in the order they

are referred to in your project report. This means that they are unlikely to be in alphabeti-

cal order. When using the numeric system you need to ensure that:

• The layout of individual references is that prescribed by the style you have adopted. This is likely to differ from both the Harvard and APA styles (Table A1.3) and will

be dependent upon precisely which style has been adopted. The reference to Ritzer’s

book in the previous sub-section (indicated by the number and the associated endnote

at the end of this appendix) follows the Vancouver style. Further details of this and

other numeric styles can be found in Neville’s (2010) book.

• The items referred to include only those you have cited in your report. They should therefore be headed ‘References’ rather than ‘Bibliography’.

• Only one number is used for each item, except where you refer to the same item more than once but need to refer to different pages. In such instances you use standard

bibliographic abbreviations to save repeating the reference in full (Table A1.4).

Table A1.3 Key differences between Harvard and APA styles of referencing

Harvard style APA style Comment

Referencing in the text

(Lewis 2001) (Lewis, 2001) Note punctuation

(McDowall and Saunders 2010) (McDowall & Saunders, 2011) ‘&’ not ‘and’

(Altinay et al. 2014) (Altinay, Saunders & Wang, 2014) For first occurrence if three to five authors

(Millmore et al. 2007) (Millmore et al., 2007) For first occurrence if six or more authors; note punctuation and use of italics

(Tosey et al. 2012) (Tosey et al., 2012) For subsequent occurrences of two or more authors; note punctuation and use of italics

Referencing in the list of references or bibliography

Berman Brown, R. and Saunders, M. (2008). Dealing with Statistics: What You Need to Know. Maidenhead: Open University Press.

Berman Brown, R. & Saunders, M. (2008). Dealing with Statistics: What You Need to Know. Maidenhead: Open University Press.

Note: use of ‘and’ and ‘&’

Varadarajan, P.R. (2003). Musings on relevance and rigour of scholarly research in marketing. Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science. Vol. 31, No. 4, pp. 368–76. [Accessed 6 Apr. 2010 from Business Source Complete].

Varadarajan, P.R. (2003). Musings on relevance and rigour of scholarly research in marketing. Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science. 31 (4): 368–376. doi: 10.1177/0092070303258240

Note:

Volume, part number and page numbers;

DOI (digital object identifier) number given in APA. Name of database not given in APA if DOI number given;

Date accessed site not included in APA.

703

Table A1.4 Bibliographic abbreviations

Abbreviation Explanation For example

Op. cit. (opere citato) Meaning ‘in the work cited’. This refers to a work previously referenced, and so you must give the author and year and, if necessary, the page number

Robson (2011) op. cit. pp. 23–4.

Loc. cit. (loco citato) Meaning ‘in the place cited’. This refers to the same page of a work previously referenced, and so you must give the author and year

Robson (2011) loc. cit.

Ibid. (ibidem) Meaning ‘the same work given immediately before’. This refers to the work referenced immediately before, and replaces all details of the previous reference other than a page number if necessary

Ibid. p. 59.

References

American Psychological Association (2009) Concise Rules of the APA Style. Washington, DC:

American Psychological Association.

Neville, C. (2010) The Complete Guide to Referencing and Avoiding Plagiarism (2nd edn).

Maidenhead: Open University Press.

Further reading

American Psychological Association (2009) Concise Rules of the APA Style. Washington, DC:

American Psychological Association. The most recent version of this manual contains full details

of how to use this form of the author–date system of referencing as well as how to lay out tables,

figures, equations and other statistical data. It also provides guidance on grammar and writing.

Neville, C. (2010) The Complete Guide to Referencing and Avoiding Plagiarism (2nd edn).

Maidenhead: Open University Press. This fully revised edition provides a comprehensive, up-to-

date discussion of the layout required for a multitude of information sources including online.

It includes guidance on the Harvard, American Psychological Association, numerical and other

referencing styles as well as chapters on plagiarism and answering frequently asked questions.

Taylor & Francis (nd) Taylor & Francis Reference Style APA Quick Guide. Available at www.tandf.co.uk/

journals/authors/style/quickref/tf_A.pdf [Accessed 27 November 2013]. This document provides

an excellent one-page guide to using the American Psychological Association author–date system

as well as a direct link to a document providing full details of this style including how to cite

references in the text.

University of New South Wales (2009) Harvard Referencing Electronic Sources. Available at

www.lc.unsw.edu.au/onlib/pdf/elect_ref.pdf [Accessed 27 November 2013]. This document

provides an excellent guide to referencing electronic sources and has useful ‘troubleshooting’ and

‘frequently asked questions’ sections.

Further reading

  • Appendices
    • Appendix 1 Systems of referencing

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/4. ����/Sample References Listing.pdf

References

Al- Alawi, A.I., Al- Marzooqi, N.Y and Mohammed, Y.F. (2007) Organisational Culture

and Knowledge Sharing: Critical Success Factors. ‘Journal of Knowledge

Management’, Vol 11(2) pp22-42

Andrew, S and Halcomb, E.J. (2009) Mixed Method Research for Nursing and the

Health Sciences, 1st edn. Blackwell Publishing Limited (E-book)

Available at:

http://medical.iauyazd.ac.ir/files/NURSING/EBooks/Mixed_Methods_Research_for_

Nursing_and_the_Health_Sciences.pdf#page=139

[Accessed date: 17th February 2017]

Armstrong, M. (2006). Armstrong’s Hand Book of Human Resource Management

Practice, 10th edn. Kogan Page

Australian Absence Management in the Public service-Audit Report. (2003).

Available at: https://www.anao.gov.au/sites/g/files/net616/f/anao_report_2002-

2003_52.pdf

[Accessed date: 22nd July 2017]

Avey, J.B., Patera, J.L and West, B.J. (2006).The Implications of positive

Psychological capital on Employee Absenteeism. ‘Journal Of leadership and

Organisational Studies’, Vol13 (2) pp42-60

Aziz, M.M and Javed, M.F. (2015) Factors Affecting Employee Absenteeism ‘Journal

for Studies and Management and Planning’ Vol1 (3) pp390-405

Available at:

https://edupediapublications.org/journals/index.php/JSMaP/article/view/1802/1696

[Accessed date: 22nd July 2017]

Bartzak, P.J. (2010) Professional work Ethics: Strategies to Motivate bedside Nurses

to Deliver High- Quality patient Care. ‘Medsurg Nursing’, Vol 19 pp 85-89

Available at: https://search.proquest.com/nahs/publicationbrowse?accountid=13056

[Accessed date: 07th August 2017]

Bell, J.(1993) Doing your Research Project: A guide for first time researchers in

Education and Social Science, 4th edn.(E-book)

Available at: http://www.worldcat.org/title/doing-your-research-project-a-guide-for-

first-time-researchers-in-education-health-and-social-

science/oclc/244174868/editions?sd=desc&referer=di&se=yr&qt=facet_yr%3A&editi

onsView=true&fq=yr%3A1993

[Accessed date: 29th July 2017]

Bell, J. (2005) Doing your Research Project: A guide for first time researchers in

Education, Health and Social Science, 4th edn.(E-book)

Available at: http://www.worldcat.org/title/doing-your-research-project-a-guide-for-

first-time-researchers-in-education-health-and-social-

science/oclc/244174868/editions?sd=desc&referer=di&se=yr&qt=facet_yr%3A&editi

onsView=true&fq=yr%3A2005

[Accessed date: 29th July 2017]

Bolman, L.C and Deal, T.E. (1984) Modern Approaches to Understanding and

Managing Organisation, San Francisco: Jossey- Bass.

Bonn, M. A and Forbringer, L. R. (1992) Reducing Turnover in Hospitality Industry:

An Overview on Recruitment, Selection and Retention. ‘International Journal

Hospitality Management’, Vol 11 pp47-63

Available

at:https://www.researchgate.net/profile/Mark_Bonn/publication/222794588_Reducing

_turnover_in_the_hospitality_industry_an_overview_of_recruitment_selection_and_r

etention/links/53d943250cf2a19eee840c26.pdf

[Accessed date: 24th July 2017]

Brink, P .J and Wood, M.J. (1998) Advanced Design in nursing Research. 2ndedn.

(Online)

Available at:

https://books.google.co.uk/books?hl=en&lr=&id=D5E5DQAAQBAJ&oi=fnd&pg=PP1

&dq=brink+1998-

+qualitative+research&ots=h5x0UfWHVj&sig=O7G2R8bb7pFYkek7ESODWmg3Um

E#v=onepage&q&f=false

Bryman, A. (1992) Quantitative and Qualitative Research: Further reflections on their

Integration, In Branneb J. Ed. ‘Mixing Methods: Quantitative and Qualitative

Research’, Avebury Aldershop pp 57-78

Bryman, A. (2006) Integrating Quantitative and Qualitative Research: how is it done?

‘Qualitative Research, Vol 61 (1) pp 97-113

Carcary, M. (2009) The Research Audit Trial- Enhancing Trustworthiness in

Qualitative Inquiry. ‘The Electronic Journal of Business Research Methods’, Vol 7(1)

pp 11-24 Available at: www.ejbrm.com

[Accessed date: 12th March 2018]

Cascio, W.F. (1987) Applied Psychology in Personnel Management, 3rdedn.

Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice- Hall

Creswell, J. W. (2003) Research Design: Qualitative, Quantitative and Mix Method

Approaches. A Framework for Design

Available at:

https://www.cluteinstitute.com/ojs/index.php/JBER/article/viewFile/2532/2578

[Accessed date: 24th July 2017]

Cohen, L and Manion, L. (1994) Research Methods in Education, 4th edn. Routledge,

London.

Cohen, L., Manion, L and Morrison, K. (2007) Research Methods in Education (E-

book)

Available at:

https://www.academia.edu/10078252/Cohen_Louis_et_al_RESEARCH_METHODS_

IN_EDUCATION_6th_ed._2007_

[Accessed date: 29th July 2017]

Cooper, D. R and Schindler, P.S. (2003). Business Research Methods, 8th edn. New

York: McGraw Hill/Irwin

Cucchiella, F., Gastaldi, M and Ranieri, L. (2014) Managing Absenteeism in the

Workplace: The case of an Italian Multi-utility company. ‘Procedia- Social and

Behavioural Sciences’, Vol105 pp 1157-1166

Available at: http://www.sciencedirect.com/science/article/pii/S1877042814051805

[Accessed date: 01st July 2017]

Dalton, D and Mesch, D. (1990) The Impact Of flexible Scheduling on Employee

Attendance and Turnover. ‘Administrative Science Quarterly’, Vol 35 pp370-388

Dane, B. (1990) Applied calculus, Tokyo: Sunders College Publishing House.

David, M and Sutton, C. D. (2004) Social Research the Basics, London: Sage

Publications.

De Villiers, J .D. (2011) Employee Turnover and Absenteeism in a Workforce as a

Factor Of recruitment.

Available at:

http://repository.up.ac.za/bitstream/handle/2263/17973/DeVilliers_Employee(2011).p

df?sequence=1

[Accessed date: 22nd July 2017]

Driver, R.W and Watson, C.J. (1989) Construct Validity of Voluntary and Involuntary

Absenteeism. ‘Journal of Business and Psychology’ Vol 4 pp109-110

Available at: https://link.springer.com/article/10.1007/BF01023041

[Accessed date: 20th August 2017]

Fort, A.L., Deussom, R., Burlew, R., Gilroy, K and Nelson, D. (2017) The Human

Resource for Health Effort Index: A tool to assess and inform strategic Health

Workforce Investments. ‘Human Resources for Health ’, Vol 47 pp1-11

Available at: https://human-resources-health.biomedcentral.com/track/pdf/

10.1186/s12960-017-0223-2?site=human-resources-health.biomedcentral.com

[Accessed date: 07th August 2017]

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/4. ����/Sample Title, Abstract etc.pdf

1

Research Title: Exploring Absenteeism as a

Phenomenon in the Rehabilitation Services at

Government Hospitals in Malaysia

ABSTRACT

Absenteeism is a major problem that is crippling most organisations. It has worsened over

time due to lack of proper management or strategies to deal with those absences. In normal

circumstances all employees are provided with various benefits such as annual leave,

maternity and paternity leave, sick leave and few more in accordance with legislations and

policies, but with employees’ disengagement, motivation, dissatisfaction, and empowerment,

the issue of absenteeism has escalated, and it would seem most management has no forth

coming solutions to address this issue. It is nevertheless worth noting that no-one is healthy

and anybody can go off work at any time; it is therefore best that when these employees go

off work, for management to get involved as early as possible.

Therefore, the research aimed to establish the factors and other contributors resulting in

absenteeism and of its effects on staff morale and productivity in the rehabilitation services.

A mix-method (qualitative and quantitative) approached was adopted using semi-structured

interviews and questionnaires to collect data. The design provided ample information on the

issues surrounding absenteeism at work, specifically the Rehabilitation Department.

Identifying these perceptions helped to establish the links between the employees and

employers and also to improve understanding of absenteeism in the workplace. The results

provided insights on the relationship between the different factors, personal, organizational

and services with highlights on the importance in relation to personal and professional

management. Based on the wealth of the existing knowledge and those provided by the

research participants, useful strategies have been identified to assist in redressing the

absenteeism in the Rehabilitation Department and possibly Ministry of Health in general.

Key Words: Absenteeism, Retention, Recruitment, Management of absenteeism, Leadership

and absenteeism, Laissez- faire, Productivity, Absenteeism and staff morale, Job satisfaction,

Motivation, Disengagement.

2

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

It would have been impossible to complete this study without the contribution and support

of a number of individuals and organisations. To all those who have assisted me through

support, encouragement, professional advice, assistance and suggestions, I wish to express

my sincere appreciation. I wish to express my gratitude to the Health Care Agency (HCA) for

allowing me to carry out this study.

My heartfelt thanks and support to my family and everyone for their encouragement and

patience.

It is with great appreciation, that I thank my supervisor, Associate Professor C S Chan, for his

dedicated input and critical comments on the many drafts of this Strategic Business Project.

Finally much appreciation to the rehabilitation staffs, who participated in this study and

found time to be interviewed or completed the questionnaires.

3

1.0 CHAPTER 1

1.1 Introduction

Absenteeism is characterised as the failure to report or stay at work as scheduled whatever

the reason (Mayfield and Mayfield, 2009). Avey, Patera and West (2006), identified two forms

of absenteeism, the “voluntary and involuntary type”. Involuntary absenteeism is defined by

Sanders and Nauta (2004, p.724), as an unavoidable type, also termed “white absenteeism”,

whilst voluntary absences are avoidable, and often the employee chose to do so; classified as

the “black or grey absenteeism”. The latter definition suggests that had employees chosen to

do, some absences could have been avoided. Nevertheless, we also need to acknowledge

that it is not a problem to go off at some instances; as in being sick or for emergencies (Avey,

Patera and West, 2006), but there must be an understanding of how this affects and impacts

on others.

The Ministry of Health, Malaysia is the unique health care provider offering rehabilitation to

the inpatient and outpatient services, across the three levels of health care system (primary,

secondary and tertiary). Currently, it is perceived that there is a growing surge of staff being

away from work, thus contributing to various issues within the health sector, specifically the

rehabilitation services. As this problem takes its toll, more staff chose to escape by being

absent, henceforth creating a vicious cycle.

Most departments are faced with staff commonly absenting, thus giving rise to workplace

dissatisfaction, as other staff have to occasionally bear the burden of work, that of their

colleagues. Consequently, this cycle of absenting, affects others, and leads to possible

withdrawal behaviour; this behaviour triggers down, especially in team work, affecting other

staff, and thereby eventually develops into further absenteeism (Sagie, 1998; Schaufeli et. al,

2009). This tendency of absenting has been interpreted as a “Laissez Faire” attitude, where

it would seem to have a profound effect on other staff (Ohemeng and Soale, 2014).

Absenteeism has resulted in employees exiting from the stressful environment through

regular absences.

High level of absenteeism disrupts productivity, especially, if the tasks are interrelated, or

where level of service has to be maintained (Aziz and Javed, 2015). The impact of

absenteeism may have a wider implication than financial cost alone; the extra workload

created by absenteeism falls on the presenteeism (Staff), resulting in significant impact on

their engagement, and well-being (Aziz and Javed, 2015; Tauntan et. al, (1989) cited in Harter,

2001). Henceforth, creating higher stress level, poor health outcomes, staff turnover and

thereby leading to greater absenteeism and loss of productivity.

It is further suggested that during absences the integral work output decreases, and the

unresolved burden is added to the present staff affecting their own primary responsibilities

and motivation; employees become demoralised as they work alone and even if they are

present, they are not fully engaged, and therefore lose enthusiasm (Aziz and Javed, (2015).

4

In addition, employees who are constantly present monitor their colleagues’ absences and in

the case that management does not respond appropriately, staff morale is affected, and they

in turn stay away, and in other instances loose respect for leaders (ibid).

1.2 Purpose of the study

The study was to explore absenteeism in the workplace as a phenomenon, and also this study

attempted to identify and explain the possible factors causing absenteeism in the workplace.

Another focus was on exploring the consequences of absenteeism on the service, staff

morale, well-being and productivity. It was anticipated that the survey would provide some

ways to help management mitigate the problem. This phenomenon was briefly explored in

Seychelles nine years back, and with significant changes in the context and nature of the work,

there is a need to understand the phenomenon in the current state.

1.3 Problem statement and research questions

Absenteeism is a phenomenon that is afflicting most organisations big and small, private and

public and is attributed to various reasons, such as sick leave, family responsibilities and

regular appointments. Absenteeism has a significant effect on staff morale as they have to

take on extra workload and working longer shifts. This situation leads to unsatisfactory clients

as a result of poor service delivery. Ultimately, the unresolved absenteeism issue leads to

various cost implications in terms of replacement for the same job, and the quality of service

in general being affected. These absences range from single days to long term and despite

existing laws and regulations, solutions to curb absenteeism remain rather far. Therefore, the

study was required to provide a better understanding of the problem and identify ways

manage it better.

1.3.1 Research aim and objectives

The aim of the research was to explore the reason and consequences of (rehabilitation)

employees being regularly absent and consequently to ascertain their views and perspectives

on factors that contribute to absenteeism, and how it affects morale and productivity. It was

also anticipated that the study, would further contribute to an understanding of what possible

solutions and recommendations to redress these issues and irregularities in the workplace.

For this study the following are the main objectives:

1. To identify the main causes and factors relating to absenteeism.

2. To establish the effects of absenteeism on morale and productivity.

3. To propose recommendations to help management in addressing absenteeism.

1.3.2 Research Questions

Based on the statement of the problem, the study attempted to answer the following

research questions:

1 How do the staff view absenteeism?

2 What are the factors influencing and contributing to absenteeism?

5

3 What effect does absenteeism have on morale and henceforth productivity?

4 What are the different strategies/recommendations needed to manage absenteeism?

1.4 Scope of the study

The study was conducted with the focus on exploring the effects of absenteeism in

government hospitals in Malaysia specifically at the Rehabilitation Services of the public

health system. For instance, loss of productivity and the demoralising impact on the

workplace have been reported to interplay in the nature of absenteeism; therefore, the study

was undertaken with twelve research participants from the different rehabilitation services

settings, to establish the effects of such on morale and productivity. To collect the qualitative

data, interviews were used, and the quantitative aspect was through the use of

questionnaires.

1.5 Research Methods

The research will employ a mix-method (qualitative and quantitative) approach, which was

chosen because it was seen to be the best strategy to get a deep insight of the views of the

employees with regards to absenteeism and its contributing factors (Morse, 1991).

1.6 Rationale and Managerial Relevance

The need to conduct the study was identified based on the significant problems associated

with increasing absences in the rehabilitation department. It was also anticipated that

reasons pertaining to absenteeism would be identified and hopefully help determine the true

status of absenteeism as a subject of interest. The information generated could assist the

Ministry of Health and the Rehabilitation Department on necessary and relevant strategies

that would be of benefit to the employers, employee and clients.

1.7 Structure and organisation of the report

This study consists of five chapters that are illustrated below:

Chapter One: This chapter introduces the purpose, problem statement and scope of the

research. The objectives of the study, and finally the research questions are also presented.

Chapter Two: The relevant literature highlighting the effects, factors and causes contributing

to absenteeism and the key concepts of absenteeism are explored in this chapter.

Chapter Three: The research methodology, the data collection techniques applied, validity,

reliability and ethical considerations are described here.

Chapter Four: This chapter contains the analysis and the interpretation of the data collected

from the rehabilitation services staff and resulting findings.

Chapter Five: Finally, chapter five presents the conclusions and recommendations arising

from the analysis undertaken from data collected in addressing absenteeism.

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/4. ����/Understanding Null Hypothesis Testing �C Research Methods in Psychology.pdf

Home Read Sign in

CONTENTS RESEARCH METHODS IN PSYCHOLOGY

LICENSE

Understanding Null Hypothesis Testing by Paul C. Price, Rajiv Jhangiani, & I-Chant A. Chiang is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution-NonCommercial-ShareAlike 4.0 International License, except where otherwise noted.

SHARE THIS BOOK

Powered by Pressbooks

Open Source | Open Textbooks | Open Book Publishing | Learn More

Search in book …

Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics

Understanding Null Hypothesis TestingUnderstanding Null Hypothesis Testing

Learning Objectives

1. Explain the purpose of null hypothesis testing, including the role of sampling error.

2. Describe the basic logic of null hypothesis testing.

3. Describe the role of relationship strength and sample size in determining statistical significance and make reasonable judgments about statistical significance based on these two factors.

  The Purpose of Null Hypothesis TestingThe Purpose of Null Hypothesis Testing

As we have seen, psychological research typically involves measuring one or more variables for a sample and computing descriptive statistics for that sample. In general, however, the researcher’s goal is not to draw conclusions about that sample but to draw conclusions about the population that the sample was selected from. Thus researchers must use sample statistics to draw conclusions about the corresponding values in the population. These corresponding values in the population are called parameters. Imagine, for example, that a researcher measures the number of depressive symptoms exhibited by each of 50 clinically depressed adults and computes the mean number of symptoms. The researcher probably wants to use this sample statistic (the mean number of symptoms for the sample) to draw conclusions about the corresponding population parameter (the mean number of symptoms for clinically depressed adults).

Unfortunately, sample statistics are not perfect estimates of their corresponding population parameters. This is because there is a certain amount of random variability in any statistic from sample to sample. The mean number of depressive symptoms might be 8.73 in one sample of clinically depressed adults, 6.45 in a second sample, and 9.44 in a third—even though these samples are selected randomly from the same population. Similarly, the correlation (Pearson’s r) between two variables might be +.24 in one sample, −.04 in a second sample, and +.15 in a third—again, even though these samples are selected randomly from the same population. This random variability in a statistic from sample to sample is called sampling error. (Note that the term error here refers to random variability and does not imply that anyone has made a mistake. No one “commits a sampling error.”)

One implication of this is that when there is a statistical relationship in a sample, it is not always clear that there is a statistical relationship in the population. A small difference between two group means in a sample might indicate that there is a small difference between the two group means in the population. But it could also be that there is no difference between the means in the population and that the difference in the sample is just a matter of sampling error. Similarly, a Pearson’s r value of −.29 in a sample might mean that there is a negative relationship in the population. But it could also be that there is no relationship in the population and that the relationship in the sample is just a matter of sampling error.

In fact, any statistical relationship in a sample can be interpreted in two ways:

There is a relationship in the population, and the relationship in the sample reflects this.

There is no relationship in the population, and the relationship in the sample reflects only sampling error.

The purpose of null hypothesis testing is simply to help researchers decide between these two interpretations.

The Logic of Null Hypothesis TestingThe Logic of Null Hypothesis Testing

Null hypothesis testing is a formal approach to deciding between two interpretations of a statistical relationship in a sample. One interpretation is called the null hypothesis (often symbolized H and read as “H-naught”). This is the idea that there is no relationship in the population and that the relationship in the sample reflects only sampling error. Informally, the null hypothesis is that the sample relationship “occurred by chance.” The other interpretation is called the alternative hypothesis (often symbolized as H ). This is the idea that there is a relationship in the population and that the relationship in the sample reflects this relationship in the population.

Again, every statistical relationship in a sample can be interpreted in either of these two ways: It might have occurred by chance, or it might reflect a relationship in the population. So researchers need a way to decide between them. Although there are many specific null hypothesis testing techniques, they are all based on the same general logic. The steps are as follows:

Assume for the moment that the null hypothesis is true. There is no relationship between the variables in the population.

Determine how likely the sample relationship would be if the null hypothesis were true.

If the sample relationship would be extremely unlikely, then reject the null hypothesis in favour of the alternative hypothesis. If it would not be extremely unlikely, then retain the null hypothesis.

Following this logic, we can begin to understand why Mehl and his colleagues concluded that there is no difference in talkativeness between women and men in the population. In essence, they asked the following question: “If there were no difference in the population, how likely is it that we would find a small difference of d = 0.06 in our sample?” Their answer to this question was that this sample relationship would be fairly likely if the null hypothesis were true. Therefore, they retained the null hypothesis—concluding that there is no evidence of a sex difference in the population. We can also see why Kanner and his colleagues concluded that there is a correlation between hassles and symptoms in the population. They asked, “If the null hypothesis were true, how likely is it that we would find a strong correlation of +.60 in our sample?” Their answer to this question was that this sample relationship would be fairly unlikely if the null hypothesis were true. Therefore, they rejected the null hypothesis in favour of the alternative hypothesis—concluding that there is a positive correlation between these variables in the population.

A crucial step in null hypothesis testing is finding the likelihood of the sample result if the null hypothesis were true. This probability is called the p value. A low p value means that the sample result would be unlikely if the null hypothesis were true and leads to the rejection of the null hypothesis. A high p value means that the sample result would be likely if the null hypothesis were true and leads to the retention of the null hypothesis. But how low must the p value be before the sample result is considered unlikely enough to reject the null hypothesis? In null hypothesis testing, this criterion is called α (alpha) and is almost always set to .05. If there is less than a 5% chance of a result as extreme as the sample result if the null hypothesis were true, then the null hypothesis is rejected. When this happens, the result is said to be statistically significant. If there is greater than a 5% chance of a result as extreme as the sample result when the null hypothesis is true, then the null hypothesis is retained. This does not necessarily mean that the researcher accepts the null hypothesis as true—only that there is not currently enough evidence to conclude that it is true. Researchers often use the expression “fail to reject the null hypothesis” rather than “retain the null hypothesis,” but they never use the expression “accept the null hypothesis.”

The Misunderstood The Misunderstood pp Value Value

The p value is one of the most misunderstood quantities in psychological research (Cohen, 1994) . Even professional researchers misinterpret it, and it is not unusual for such misinterpretations to appear in statistics textbooks!

The most common misinterpretation is that the p value is the probability that the null hypothesis is true—that the sample result occurred by chance. For example, a misguided researcher might say that because the p value is .02, there is only a 2% chance that the result is due to chance and a 98% chance that it reflects a real relationship in the population. But this is incorrect. The p value is really the probability of a result at least as extreme as the sample result if the null hypothesis were true. So a p value of .02 means that if the null hypothesis were true, a sample result this extreme would occur only 2% of the time.

You can avoid this misunderstanding by remembering that the p value is not the probability that any particular hypothesis is true or false. Instead, it is the probability of obtaining the sample result if the null hypothesis were true.

“Null Hypothesis” retrieved from http://imgs.xkcd.com/comics/null_hypot hesis.png (CC-BY-NC 2.5)

Role of Sample Size and Relationship StrengthRole of Sample Size and Relationship Strength

Recall that null hypothesis testing involves answering the question, “If the null hypothesis were true, what is the probability of a sample result as extreme as this one?” In other words, “What is the p value?” It can be helpful to see that the answer to this question depends on just two considerations: the strength of the relationship and the size of the sample. Specifically, the stronger the sample relationship and the larger the sample, the less likely the result would be if the null hypothesis were true. That is, the lower the p value. This should make sense. Imagine a study in which a sample of 500 women is compared with a sample of 500 men in terms of some psychological characteristic, and Cohen’s d is a strong 0.50. If there were really no sex difference in the population, then a result this strong based on such a large sample should seem highly unlikely. Now imagine a similar study in which a sample of three women is compared with a sample of three men, and Cohen’s d is a weak 0.10. If there were no sex difference in the population, then a relationship this weak based on such a small sample should seem likely. And this is precisely why the null hypothesis would be rejected in the first example and retained in the second.

Of course, sometimes the result can be weak and the sample large, or the result can be strong and the sample small. In these cases, the two considerations trade off against each other so that a weak result can be statistically significant if the sample is large enough and a strong relationship can be statistically significant even if the sample is small. Table 13.1 shows roughly how relationship strength and sample size combine to determine whether a sample result is statistically significant. The columns of the table represent the three levels of relationship strength: weak, medium, and strong. The rows represent four sample sizes that can be considered small, medium, large, and extra large in the context of psychological research. Thus each cell in the table represents a combination of relationship strength and sample size. If a cell contains the word Yes, then this combination would be statistically significant for both Cohen’s d and Pearson’s r. If it contains the word No, then it would not be statistically significant for either. There is one cell where the decision for d and r would be different and another where it might be different depending on some additional considerations, which are discussed in Section 13.2 “Some Basic Null Hypothesis Tests”

Table 13.1 How Relationship Strength and Sample Size Combine to Determine Whether a Result Is Statistically

Significant

Relationship strength

Sample Size Weak Medium Strong

Small (N = 20) No No

d = Maybe

r = Yes

Medium (N = 50) No Yes Yes

Large (N = 100)

d = Yes

r = No Yes Yes

Extra large (N = 500) Yes Yes Yes

Although Table 13.1 provides only a rough guideline, it shows very clearly that weak relationships based on medium or small samples are never statistically significant and that strong relationships based on medium or larger samples are always statistically significant. If you keep this lesson in mind, you will often know whether a result is statistically significant based on the descriptive statistics alone. It is extremely useful to be able to develop this kind of intuitive judgment. One reason is that it allows you to develop expectations about how your formal null hypothesis tests are going to come out, which in turn allows you to detect problems in your analyses. For example, if your sample relationship is strong and your sample is medium, then you would expect to reject the null hypothesis. If for some reason your formal null hypothesis test indicates otherwise, then you need to double-check your computations and interpretations. A second reason is that the ability to make this kind of intuitive judgment is an indication that you understand the basic logic of this approach in addition to being able to do the computations.

Statistical Significance Versus Practical SignificanceStatistical Significance Versus Practical Significance

Table 13.1 illustrates another extremely important point. A statistically significant result is not necessarily a strong one. Even a very weak result can be statistically significant if it is based on a large enough sample. This is closely related to Janet Shibley Hyde’s argument about sex differences (Hyde, 2007) . The differences between women and men in mathematical problem solving and leadership ability are statistically significant. But the word significant can cause people to interpret these differences as strong and important—perhaps even important enough to influence the college courses they take or even who they vote for. As we have seen, however, these statistically significant differences are actually quite weak—perhaps even “trivial.”

This is why it is important to distinguish between the statistical significance of a result and the practical significance of that result. Practical significance refers to the importance or usefulness of the result in some real-world context. Many sex differences are statistically significant—and may even be interesting for purely scientific reasons—but they are not practically significant. In clinical practice, this same concept is often referred to as “clinical significance.” For example, a study on a new treatment for social phobia might show that it produces a statistically significant positive effect. Yet this effect still might not be strong enough to justify the time, effort, and other costs of putting it into practice—especially if easier and cheaper treatments that work almost as well already exist. Although statistically significant, this result would be said to lack practical or clinical significance.

“Conditional Risk” retrieved from http://imgs.xkcd.com/comics/conditional_risk.png (CC-BY- NC 2.5)

Key Takeaways

Null hypothesis testing is a formal approach to deciding whether a statistical relationship in a sample reflects a real relationship in the population or is just due to chance.

The logic of null hypothesis testing involves assuming that the null hypothesis is true, finding how likely the sample result would be if this assumption were correct, and then making a decision. If the sample result would be unlikely if the null hypothesis were true, then it is rejected in favour of the alternative hypothesis. If it would not be unlikely, then the null hypothesis is retained.

The probability of obtaining the sample result if the null hypothesis were true (the p value) is based on two considerations: relationship strength and sample size. Reasonable judgments about whether a sample relationship is statistically significant can often be made by quickly considering these two factors.

Statistical significance is not the same as relationship strength or importance. Even weak relationships can be statistically significant if the sample size is large enough. It is important to consider relationship strength and the practical significance of a result in addition to its statistical significance.

Exercises

1. Discussion: Imagine a study showing that people who eat more broccoli tend to be happier. Explain for someone who knows nothing about statistics why the researchers would conduct a null hypothesis test.

2. Practice: Use Table 13.1 to decide whether each of the following results is statistically significant.

a. The correlation between two variables is r = −.78 based on a sample size of 137.

b. The mean score on a psychological characteristic for women is 25 (SD = 5) and the mean score for men is 24 (SD = 5). There were 12 women and 10 men in this study.

c. In a memory experiment, the mean number of items recalled by the 40 participants in Condition A was 0.50 standard deviations greater than the mean number recalled by the 40 participants in Condition B.

d. In another memory experiment, the mean scores for participants in Condition A and Condition B came out exactly the same!

e. A student finds a correlation of r = .04 between the number of units the students in his research methods class are taking and the students’ level of stress.

1. Cohen, J. (1994). The world is round: p < .05. American Psychologist, 49, 997–1003. ↵

2. Hyde, J. S. (2007). New directions in the study of gender similarities and differences. Current Directions in Psychological Science, 16, 259–263. ↵

0

1

[1]

[2]

Previous: Chapter 13: Inferential Statistics Next: Some Basic Null Hypothesis Tests

Increase Font Size

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/4. ����/Writing Research Aims, Questins and Objectives.pdf

Writing Research Aims, Objectives and Research Questions

As well as your research question, you may also be required to formulate a research aim. A

research aim is a brief statement of the purpose of the research project. It is often written as

a sentence stating what you intend to achieve through your research. To illustrate this, the

examples of research questions in Table 1 have been matched to their research aims in Table

2. You will see the close relationship between these – one stated as a question, the other as

an aim.

Table 1: Examples of research ideas and resulting general focus research questions

Research Idea Research Question

Media campaign following product recalls How effective is a media campaign designed to increase consumer trust in [company name] following a series of product recalls?

Graduate recruitment via the Internet To what extent and in what type of context is Internet based recruitment and selection of graduates effective and why?

Supermarket coupons as a promotional device

In what ways do the issue of coupons at supermarket checkouts affect buyer behaviour?

Your research question and research aim are complementary ways of saying what your

research is about. However, neither gives sufficient detail about the steps you will need to

take to answer your question and achieve your aim.

To do this you will need to devise a set of investigative questions or research objectives.

Your research question may be used to generate more detailed investigative questions, or

you may use it as a base from which to write a set of research objectives.

Objectives are more generally acceptable to the research community as evidence of the

researcher’s clear sense of purpose and direction. Once you have devised your research

question and research aim, we believe that research objectives are likely to lead to greater

specificity than using investigative questions.

Table 2: Examples of research questions and related research aims

Research Question Research Aim(s)

How effective is a media campaign designed to increase consumer trust in [company name] following a series of product recalls?

The aim of this research is to assess the effectiveness of a media campaign by [company name] designed to increase consumer trust following a series of recalls of its products

In which situations and to what extent is Internet-based recruitment and selection of graduates effective and why?

The aim of this research is to understand situations within which Internet-based recruitment and selection of graduates is effective and why

In what ways do the issue of coupons at supermarket checkouts affect buyer behaviour?

The aim of this research is to explore how the issue of coupons at supermarket checkouts affects buyer behaviour

Research objectives allow you to operationalise your question – that is, to state the steps you

intend to take to answer it. A similar way of thinking about the difference between questions,

aims and objectives is related to ‘what’ and ‘how’. Research questions and aims express

‘what’ your research is about. Research objectives express ‘how’ you intend to structure

the research process to answer your question and achieve your aim. In this way, research

objectives can be seen to complement a research question and aim, through providing the

means to operationalise them. They provide a key step to transform your research question

and aim into your research project.

Writing useful research objectives requires you to fulfil a number of fit-for-purpose criteria.

Table 3 sets out criteria to help you devise research objectives to operationalise your research

question and aim. Each of these criteria is also rephrased as a short question, which you can

use as a checklist to evaluate your own draft research objectives.

Table 3: Criteria to devise useful research objectives

Criterion Purpose

Transparency (What does it mean?)

The meaning of the research objective is clear and unambiguous

Specificity (What I am going to do?)

The purpose of the research objective is clear and easily understood, as are the actions required to fulfil it

Relevance (Why I am going to do this?)

The research objective’s link to the research question and wider research project is clear

Interconnectivity (How will it help to complete the research project?)

Taken together as a set, the research objectives illustrate the steps in the research process from its start to its conclusion, without leaving any gaps. In this way, the research objectives form a coherent whole

Answerability (Will this be possible?) (Where shall I obtain data?)

The intended outcome of the research objective is achievable. Where this relates to data, the nature of the data required will be clear or at least implied

Measurability (When will it be done?)

The intended product of the research objective will be evident when it has been achieved

The following provides an example set of objectives at the stage when a student’s research

question and aim were developed into a sequence of research objectives.

Example

Tom was a part-time student who worked for a large power and gas company employing

several thousand employees across many different sites. Tom had been undertaking an

employment-related project on employee engagement and had decided to focus his

university research project on employee communication. His employing organisation had

been increasingly focusing its employee communication towards Internet- and intranet-based

channels. Tom had noted the following comment in the CIPD Factsheet on employee

communication (2012: 5): ‘A communication process needs to be reviewed regularly, to see

if it is meeting the needs of both the organisation and the employee. In measuring

communication it is important to assess … if appropriate methods of communication are

being used.’ Following a process of generating and refining ideas for research Tom decided

that he would like to explore the effectiveness of employee communication developments in

his employing organisation.

This idea had been approved by the internal communication management team and he was

informed that his request for access to managers would be supported.

Tom refined his research question until he was satisfied with it: ‘How effective are Internet

and intranet channels as a means to communicate with employees in [company name]?’ He

also turned this into a research aim: ‘The aim of this research is to evaluate the effectiveness

of Internet and intranet channels as a means to communicate with employees in [company

name]’. He and his project tutor felt that the scope of this research question and related aim

was ‘just about right’. They felt it was ‘doable’ and that it focused on an issue that was

important and relevant for the business.

Tom’s project tutor asked Tom to draw up a set of interconnected research objectives that

would operationalise his research and provide a set of evaluation criteria to enable him to

address his ‘how effective …’ type of question. Tom came up with the following set of research

objectives. Objective 2 allowed Tom to identify the company’s objectives for each channel

and objectives 3–6 allowed Tom to measure and then compare channels in order to draw

conclusions about ‘how effective’ they were.

1 To identify each Internet and intranet channel of employee communication used in the

company;

2 To describe the company’s objectives for each channel (e.g. conveying news about the

business, facilitating communication across the company, announcing results and targets,

bringing about behavioural change);

3 To identify and explore specific examples of how each channel has been beneficial or

influential;

4 To identify and explore specific examples where each channel has not been beneficial or

influential;

5 To determine a measure of effectiveness for each channel that shows whether and how the

channel had met, exceeded or failed to meet the objectives set for it;

6 To compare measures of effectiveness across channels related to different organisational

objectives;

7 To make recommendations about each channel’s future use and fitness for purpose.

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/4. ����/wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws (1).pdf

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 1

Research Methods for Business A Skill-Building Approach

Uma Sekaran

Roger Bougie

Release 1.1 2013

www.uws.ac.uk

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 2

Published by the University of the West of Scotland.

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

The rights of Uma Sekaran and Roger Bougie to be identified as authors of this work have been asserted by them in accordance with sections 77 and 78 of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988.

Apart from any fair dealing for the purpose of research or private study, or criticism or review, as permitted under the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988, this publication may only be reproduced, stored or transmitted, in any form or by any means, with the prior permission in writing of the publishers, or in the case of reprographic reproduction in accordance with the terms and licenses issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency.

www.uws.ac.uk

Captured, authored, published, delivered and managed in XML CAPDM Limited, Edinburgh, Scotland www.capdm.comCapdm

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 3

iii

Contents

Preface vi Acknowledgements viii

1 Introduction to research 1 1.1 WHAT IS RESEARCH? 1 1.2 BUSINESS RESEARCH 2 1.3 TYPES OF BUSINESS RESEARCH: APPLIED AND BASIC 5 1.4 MANAGERS AND RESEARCH 8 1.5 THE MANAGER AND THE CONSULTANT−RESEARCHER 9 1.6 INTERNAL VERSUS EXTERNAL CONSULTANTS/RESEARCHERS 10 1.7 KNOWLEDGE ABOUT RESEARCH AND MANAGERIAL EFFECTIVENESS 13 1.8 ETHICS AND BUSINESS RESEARCH 13

2 The scientific approach and alternative approaches to investigation 20 2.1 THE HALLMARKS OF SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH 21 2.2 THE HYPOTHETICO-DEDUCTIVE METHOD 25 2.3 SOME OBSTACLES TO CONDUCTING SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH IN THE MANAGEMENT AREA 31 2.4 ALTERNATIVE APPROACHES TO RESEARCH 31

3 The broad problem area and defining the problem statement 37 3.1 THE BROAD PROBLEM AREA 37 3.2 PRELIMINARY INFORMATION GATHERING 39 3.3 DEFINING THE PROBLEM STATEMENT 42 3.4 THE RESEARCH PROPOSAL 46 3.5 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS 48 3.6 ETHICAL ISSUES IN THE PRELIMINARY STAGES OF INVESTIGATION 48

4 The critical literature review 54 4.1 THE PURPOSE OF A CRITICAL LITERATURE REVIEW 55 4.2 HOW TO APPROACH THE LITERATURE REVIEW 57 4.3 ETHICAL ISSUES 62

5 Theoretical framework and hypothesis development 74 5.1 THE NEED FOR A THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK 74 5.2 VARIABLES 75 5.3 THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK 85 5.4 HYPOTHESIS DEVELOPMENT 91 5.5 HYPOTHESIS TESTING WITH QUALITATIVE RESEARCH: NEGATIVE CASE ANALYSIS 96 5.6 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS 99

6 Elements of research design 105 6.1 THE RESEARCH DESIGN 105 6.2 PURPOSE OF THE STUDY: EXPLORATORY, DESCRIPTIVE, CAUSAL 106 6.3 EXTENT OF RESEARCHER INTERFERENCE WITH THE STUDY 109 6.4 STUDY SETTING: CONTRIVED AND NONCONTRIVED 111 6.5 RESEARCH STRATEGIES 113 6.6 UNIT OF ANALYSIS: INDIVIDUALS, DYADS, GROUPS, ORGANIZATIONS, CULTURES 115 6.7 TIME HORIZON: CROSS-SECTIONAL VERSUS LONGITUDINAL STUDIES 118 6.8 REVIEW OF ELEMENTS OF RESEARCH DESIGN 119 6.9 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS 121

7 Data collection methods: Introduction and interviews 125 7.1 SOURCES OF DATA 125 7.2 METHODS OF DATA COLLECTION 129 7.3 INTERVIEWING 130 7.4 PROJECTIVE METHODS 140

8 Data collection methods: Observation 144 8.1 DEFINITION AND PURPOSE OF RESEARCH 145

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 4

Contents

iv

8.2 FOUR KEY DIMENSIONS THAT CHARACTERIZE THE TYPE OF OBSERVATION 145 8.3 TWO IMPORTANT APPROACHES TO OBSERVATION 148 8.4 ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF OBSERVATION 157

9 Data collection methods: Questionnaires 163 9.1 TYPES OF QUESTIONNAIRE 163 9.2 GUIDELINES FOR QUESTIONNAIRE DESIGN 165 9.3 INTERNATIONAL DIMENSIONS OF SURVEYS 177 9.4 REVIEW OF THE ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF DIFFERENT DATA

COLLECTION METHODS AND WHEN TO USE EACH 178 9.5 MULTIMETHODS OF DATA COLLECTION 179 9.6 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS 180 9.7 ETHICS IN DATA COLLECTION 180

10 Experimental designs 187 10.1 THE LAB EXPERIMENT 189 10.2 THE FIELD EXPERIMENT 194 10.3 TRADE-OFF BETWEEN INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL VALIDITY 195 10.4 FACTORS AFFECTING THE VALIDITY OF EXPERIMENTS 195 10.5 IDENTIFYING THREATS TO VALIDITY 199 10.6 INTERNAL VALIDITY IN CASE STUDIES 201 10.7 REVIEW OF FACTORS AFFECTING INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL VALIDITY 201 10.8 TYPES OF EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN AND VALIDITY 201 10.9 SIMULATION 207 10.10 ETHICAL ISSUES IN EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN RESEARCH 208 10.11 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS 209 10.12 Appendix: Further experimental designs 213

11 Measurement of variables: Operational definition 217 11.1 HOW VARIABLES ARE MEASURED 218 11.2 OPERATIONAL DEFINITION (OPERATIONALIZATION) 219 11.3 INTERNATIONAL DIMENSIONS OF OPERATIONALIZATION 229

12 Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity 233 12.1 FOUR TYPES OF SCALES 234 12.2 RATING SCALES 243 12.3 RANKING SCALES 249 12.4 INTERNATIONAL DIMENSIONS OF SCALING 250 12.5 GOODNESS OF MEASURES 250 12.6 REFLECTIVE VERSUS FORMATIVE MEASUREMENT SCALES 256 12.7 Appendix: Examples of some measures 261

13 Sampling 268 13.1 POPULATION, ELEMENT, SAMPLE, SAMPLING UNIT, AND SUBJECT 269 13.2 PARAMETERS 270 13.3 REASONS FOR SAMPLING 271 13.4 REPRESENTATIVENESS OF SAMPLES 271 13.5 NORMALITY OF DISTRIBUTIONS 271 13.6 THE SAMPLING PROCESS 272 13.7 PROBABILITY SAMPLING 275 13.8 NONPROBABILITY SAMPLING 280 13.9 EXAMPLES OF WHEN CERTAIN SAMPLING DESIGNS WOULD BE APPROPRIATE 284 13.10 SAMPLING IN CROSS-CULTURAL RESEARCH 289 13.11 ISSUES OF PRECISION AND CONFIDENCE IN DETERMINING SAMPLE SIZE 289 13.12 SAMPLE DATA, PRECISION, AND CONFIDENCE IN ESTIMATION 291 13.13 TRADE-OFF BETWEEN CONFIDENCE AND PRECISION 292 13.14 SAMPLE DATA AND HYPOTHESIS TESTING 293 13.15 DETERMINING THE SAMPLE SIZE 294 13.16 IMPORTANCE OF SAMPLING DESIGN AND SAMPLE SIZE 296 13.17 EFFICIENCY IN SAMPLING 296

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 5

Contents

v

13.18 SAMPLING AS RELATED TO QUALITATIVE STUDIES 298 13.19 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS 298

14 Quantitative data analysis 305 14.1 GETTING THE DATA READY FOR ANALYSIS 307 14.2 GETTING A FEEL FOR THE DATA 312 14.3 EXCELSIOR ENTERPRISES: DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS PART 1 322 14.4 TESTING GOODNESS OF DATA 324 14.5 EXCELSIOR ENTERPRISES: DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS PART 2 327

15 Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing 334 15.1 TYPE I ERRORS, TYPE II ERRORS, AND STATISTICAL POWER 335 15.2 CHOOSING THE APPROPRIATE STATISTICAL TECHNIQUE 336 15.3 TESTING A HYPOTHESIS ABOUT A SINGLE MEAN 337 15.4 TESTING HYPOTHESES ABOUT TWO RELATED MEANS 339 15.5 TESTING HYPOTHESES ABOUT TWO UNRELATED MEANS 343 15.6 TESTING HYPOTHESES ABOUT SEVERAL MEANS 344 15.7 REGRESSION ANALYSIS 345 15.8 OTHER MULTIVARIATE TESTS AND ANALYSES 353 15.9 EXCELSIOR ENTERPRISES: HYPOTHESIS TESTING 356 15.10 DATA WAREHOUSING, DATA MINING, AND OPERATIONS RESEARCH 360 15.11 SOME SOFTWARE PACKAGES USEFUL FOR DATA ANALYSIS 361

16 Qualitative data analysis 368 16.1 DATA REDUCTION 369 16.2 DATA DISPLAY 386 16.3 DRAWING CONCLUSIONS 386 16.4 RELIABILITY AND VALIDITY IN QUALITATIVE RESEARCH 387 16.5 SOME OTHER METHODS OF GATHERING AND ANALYZING QUALITATIVE DATA 389

17 The research report 392 17.1 THE WRITTEN REPORT 393 17.2 INTEGRAL PARTS OF THE REPORT 396 17.3 ORAL PRESENTATION 403 17.4 APPENDIX: Examples 407

Appendix A A FINAL NOTE TO STUDENTS 417 Appendix B STATISTICAL TABLES 419 Appendix C Bibliography 435

Glossary 443

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 6

vi

Preface

I have used previous editions of this book in various research methods courses with great success. For many years the book has helped thousands of my own students (undergraduate students, graduate students, and executive students), as well as many more around the world, to carry out their research projects. The great strength of Research Methods for Business is that students find it clear, informal, and unintimidating. I have tried to maintain these strengths in this sixth edition.

Changes in the sixth edition

The sixth edition of Research Methods for Business has been substantially revised. Whereas previous editions of the book have emphasized the scientific approach to research, the current edition explains that the scientific approach to research is only one− albeit important− view on what makes good research. Chapter 2 introduces and explains alternative approaches that are taken to research: this allows students to recognize and develop their personal ideas on research and how it should be done, to determine which kinds of research questions are important to them, and what methods for collecting and analyzing data will give them the best answer to these questions.

Chapter 3 (The Broad Problem Area and Defining the Problem Statement), Chapter 6 (Elements of Research Design), Chapter 7 (Data Collection Methods: Introduction and Interviews), and Chapter 17 (The Research Report) have also been substan- tially revised. Three new chapters (The Critical Literature Review, Data Collection Methods: Observation, and Data Collection Methods: Questionnaires) are included in this new edition of the book.

As in previous editions, the simple and informal style of presenting informa- tion has been maintained and the focus on practical skill-building preserved. The book provides numerous examples to illustrate the concepts and points presen- ted. Users will also note the variety of examples from different areas of the world − Europe, Asia, and America − as well as different areas of business − human resources management, strategic management, operations management, market- ing, finance, accounting, and information management. It is hoped that students will find research interesting, unintimidating, and of practical use.

Most chapters in the book include managerial implications of the contents dis- cussed, emphasizing the need for managers to understand research. The ethical considerations involved in conducting research are also clearly brought out. The dynamics of cross-cultural research in terms of instrument development, surveys, and sampling are discussed, which, in the context of today’s global economy, will be useful to students.

We expect that students and instructors alike will enjoy this edition. Students should become effective researchers, helped by the requisite knowledge and skills acquired by the study of this book.

How to use this sixth edition

You can read this book in a variety of ways, depending on your reasons for using this book.

If the book is part of a Business Research Methods course, the order in which you read the chapters will be prescribed by your instructor.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 7

Preface

vii

If you are reading the book because you are engaged in a project (a consultancy project, a research project, or a dissertation) then the order in which your read the chapters is your own choice. However, we recommend that you follow the structure of the book rather closely. This means that we advise you to start with reading the first three chapters that introduce research, various approaches to what makes good research, and the development of a problem statement and a research proposal. Based on the type of research questions and whether, as a result of your research questions, your study is either qualitative or quantitative in nature you may decide to read the book in the following way.

In the case of qualitative research:

4 The critical literature review

6 Research design

7, 8, and/or 9 Data collection methods

13 Sampling

16 Qualitative data analysis

17 The research report

In the case of quantitative research:

4 The critical literature review

5 Theoretical framework

6 Research design

9 Questionnaires

10 Experimental designs

11 and 12 Measurement and Scaling

13 Sampling

14 and 15 Quantitative data analysis

17 The research report

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 8

viii

Acknowledgements

Working on the sixth edition of Research Methods for Business has been a positive and rewarding experience. Many people have contributed to this in many different ways. Thank you colleagues at Tilburg University and the TiasNimbas Business School for your feedback on earlier versions of this book. Thank you for providing me with a pleasant, professional and inspiring work environment. Thank you TiasNimbas Business School students for the lively and inspiring discussions we have had during the past twelve months; I have learned a lot from these discussions. Thank you everyone at John Wiley & Sons, in particular Steve Hardman and Ellie Wilson, for your support, your patience, and your confidence. Thank you reviewers for your constructive and insightful comments on earlier drafts of this book. Roger Bougie

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 9

Chapter

1

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 1

Chapter 1

Introduction to research

Topics discussed:

� What is research?

� Business research

� Types of business research: applied and basic

� Managers and research

� The manager and the consultant−researcher

� Internal versus external consultants/researchers

� Knowledge about research and managerial eff ectiveness

� Ethics and business research

Chapter objectives

After completing Chapter 1 you should be able to:

1. Describe what research is and how it is defined.

2. Distinguish between applied and basic research, giving examples, and discussing why they fall into one or the other of the two categories.

3. Explain why managers should know about research.

4. Discuss what managers should and should not do in order to interact most effectively with researchers.

5. Identify and fully discuss specific situations in which a manager would be better off using an internal research team, and when an external research team would be more advisable, giving reasons for the decisions.

6. Discuss what research means to you and describe how you, as a manager, might apply the knowledge gained about research.

7. Be aware of the role of ethics in business research.

1.1 WHAT IS RESEARCH?

Just close your eyes for a minute and utter the word research to yourself. What kinds of images does this word conjure up for you? Do you visualize a lab with scientists at work with Bunsen burners and test tubes, or an Einstein-like character writing dissertations on some complex subject, or someone collecting data to study the impact of an advertising campaign on sales? Most certainly, all these images do represent different aspects of research. Research, a somewhat intimidating term for some, is simply the process of finding solutions to a problem after a thorough study and analysis of the situational factors. Managers in organizations constantly engage themselves in studying and analyzing issues and hence are involved in some form of research activity as they make decisions at the workplace. As is well known, sometimes managers make good decisions and the problem gets solved; sometimes

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 10

Chapter

1 Research Methods for Business

2 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

they make poor decisions and the problem persists; and on occasions they make such colossal blunders that the organization gets stuck in the mire. The difference between making good decisions and committing blunders lies in how managers go about the decision-making process. In other words, good decision making fetches a “yes” answer to the following questions: Do managers identify where exactly the problem lies? Do they correctly recognize the relevant factors in the situation needing investigation? Do they know what types of information are to be gathered and how? Do they know how to make use of the information so collected and draw appropriate conclusions to make the right decisions? And, finally, do they know how to implement the results of this process to solve the problem? This is the essence of research and to be a successful manager it is important to know how to go about making the right decisions by being knowledgeable about the various steps involved in finding solutions to problematic issues. This is what this book is all about.

1.2 BUSINESS RESEARCH

Business research can be described as a systematic and organized effort to invest- igate a specific problem encountered in the work setting, which needs a solution. It comprises a series of steps that are designed and executed with the goal of finding answers to the issues that are of concern to the manager in the work environment. This means that the first step in research is to know where the problem areas exist in the organization, and to identify as clearly and specifically as possible the problems that need to be studied and resolved. Once a problem that needs attention is clearly defined, steps can be taken to determine the factors that are associated with the problem, gather information, and analyze the data and then solve it by taking the necessary corrective measures.

This entire process by which we attempt to solve problems is called research. Thus, research involves a series of well-thought-out and carefully executed activities that enable the manager to know how organizational problems can be solved, or at least considerably minimized. Research thus encompasses the processes of inquiry, investigation, examination, and experimentation. These processes have to be car- ried out systematically, diligently, critically, objectively, and logically. The expected end result would be a discovery that helps the manager to deal with the problem situation.

Identifying the critical issues, gathering relevant information, analyzing the data in ways that help decision making, and implementing the right course of action, are all facilitated by understanding business research. After all, decision making is simply a process of choosing from among alternative solutions to resolve a problem and research helps to generate viable alternatives for effective decision making. Knowledge of research thus enables you to undertake research yourself in order to solve the smaller and bigger problems that you will encounter in your job as a treasurer, controller, brand manager, product manager, marketing and sales officer, project manager, business analyst, or consultant. What’s more, it will help you to discriminate between good and bad studies published in (professional) journals, to discriminate between good and bad studies conducted by research agencies, to discriminate between good and bad research proposals of research agencies, and to interact more effectively with researchers and consultants.

1.2.1 Definition of business research

We can now define business research as an organized, systematic, data-based, crit- ical, objective, inquiry or investigation into a specific problem, undertaken with the purpose of finding answers or solutions to it. In essence, research provides the

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 11

Chapter

1Introduction to research

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 3

necessary information that guides managers to make informed decisions to suc- cessfully deal with problems. The information provided could be the result of a careful analysis of data gathered first-hand or of data that are already available (in the company, industry, archives, etc.). These data can be quantitative (quantitat- ive data are data in the form of numbers as generally gathered through structured questions) or qualitative (qualitative data are data in the form of words as gen- erated from the broad answers to questions in interviews, or from responses to open-ended questions in a questionnaire, or through observation, or from already available information gathered from various sources such as the Internet).

1.2.2 Research and the manager

An experience common to all organizations is that the managers thereof encounter problems, big and small, on a daily basis, which they have to solve by making the right decisions. In business, research is usually primarily conducted to resolve problematic issues in, or interrelated among, the areas of accounting, finance, man- agement, and marketing. In accounting, budget control systems, practices, and pro- cedures are frequently examined. Inventory costing methods, accelerated depreci- ation, time-series behavior of quarterly earnings, transfer pricing, cash recovery rates, and taxation methods are some of the other areas that are researched. In finance, the operations of financial institutions, optimum financial ratios, mergers and acquisitions, leveraged buyouts, intercorporate financing, yields on mortgages, the behavior of the stock exchange, the influence of psychology on the behavior of financial practitioners and the subsequent effect on markets, and the like, become the focus of investigation. Management research could encompass the study of employee attitudes and behaviors, human resources management, the impact of changing demographics on management practices, production operations manage- ment, strategy formulation, information systems, and the like. Marketing research could address issues pertaining to consumer decision making, customer satisfac- tion and loyalty, market segmentation, creating a competitive advantage, product image, advertising, sales promotion, marketing channel management, pricing, new product development, and other marketing aspects.

The following list gives an idea of some commonly researched topical areas in business.

SOME COMMONLY RESEARCHED AREAS IN BUSINESS

1. Employee behaviors such as performance, absenteeism, and turnover.

2. Employee attitudes such as job satisfaction, loyalty, and organizational commitment.

3. Supervisory performance, managerial leadership style, and performance appraisal systems.

4. Employee selection, recruitment, training, and retention.

5. Validation of performance appraisal systems.

6. Human resource management choices and organizational strategy.

7. Evaluation of assessment centers.

8. The dynamics of rating and rating errors in the judgment of human per- formance.

9. Strategy formulation and implementation.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 12

Chapter

1 Research Methods for Business

4 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

10. Just-in-time systems, continuous-improvement strategies, and production efficiencies.

11. Updating policies and procedures in keeping with latest government reg- ulations and organizational changes.

12. Organizational outcomes such as increased sales, market share, profits, growth, and effectiveness.

13. Consumer decision making.

14. Customer relationship management.

15. Consumer satisfaction, complaints, customer loyalty, and word-of-mouth communication.

16. Complaint handling.

17. Delivering and performing service.

18. Product life cycle, new product development, and product innovation.

19. Market segmentation, targeting, and positioning.

20. Product image, corporate image.

21. Cost of capital, valuation of firms, dividend policies, and investment decisions.

22. Risk assessment, exchange rate fluctuations, and foreign investment.

23. Tax implications of reorganization of firms or acquisition of companies.

24. Market efficiency.

25. Banking strategies.

26. Behavioral finance: overconfidence, bounded rationality, home-bias.

27. Executive compensation.

28. Mergers and acquisitions.

29. Portfolio and asset management.

30. Financial reporting.

31. Cash flow accounting.

32. Accounting standards.

33. Outsourcing of accounting.

34. Sustainability reporting.

35. The implications of social networks on the capital markets.

36. Corporate governance.

37. Development of effective cost accounting procedures.

38. Installation of effective management information systems.

39. Advanced manufacturing technologies and information systems.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 13

Chapter

1Introduction to research

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 5

40. Auditor behavior.

41. Approaches and techniques of auditing.

42. The use of technology in auditing.

43. Decision making in auditing.

44. Installation, adaptation, and updating of computer networks and software suitable for creating effective information systems for organizations.

45. Installation of an effective data warehouse and data mining system for the organization.

46. The acceptance of new computer programs.

47. Tax audits.

48. Internal auditing.

49. Accounting fraud and auditor liability.

50. The quality of audit reports.

Not only are the issues within any subarea related to many factors within that particular system, but they must also be investigated in the context of the external environment facing the business. For example, economic, political, demographic, technological, competitive, and other relevant global factors could impinge on some of the dynamics related to the firm. These have to be scrutinized as well to assess their impact, if any, on the problem being researched.

1.3 TYPES OF BUSINESS RESEARCH: APPLIED AND BASIC

Research can be undertaken for two different purposes. One is to solve a current problem faced by the manager in the work setting, demanding a timely solution. For example, a particular product may not be selling well and the manager might want to find the reasons for this in order to take corrective action. Such research is called applied research. The other is to generate a body of knowledge by trying to comprehend how certain problems that occur in organizations can be solved. This is called basic, fundamental, or pure research.

It is quite possible that some organizations may, at a later stage, apply the knowledge gained by the findings of basic research to solve their own problems. For instance, a university professor may be interested in investigating the factors that contribute to absenteeism as a matter of mere academic interest. After gathering information on this topic from several institutions and analyzing the data, the professor may identify factors such as inflexible work hours, inadequate training of employees, and low morale as primarily influencing absenteeism. Later on, a manager who encounters absenteeism of employees in his organization may use this information to determine if these factors are relevant to that particular work setting.

In sum, research done with the intention of applying the results of the findings to solve specific problems currently being experienced in an organization is called applied research. Research done chiefly to make a contribution to existing know- ledge is called basic, fundamental, or pure research. The findings of such research contribute to the building of knowledge in the various functional areas of business; they teach us something we did not know before. Such knowledge, once generated, is usually later applied in organizational settings for problem solving.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 14

Chapter

1 Research Methods for Business

6 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

1.3.1 Applied research

The following examples, following two situations cited in BusinessWeek, should provide some idea of the scope of business research activities.

EXAMPLE

1. Apple’s iPod fueled the company’s success in recent years, helping to increase sales from $5 billion in 2001 to $32 billion in the fiscal year 2008 (which ended on September 30). Growth for the music player averaged more than 200% in 2006 and 2007, before falling to 6% in 2008. One reason for this decrease in sales is that iPod owners see little or no reason to upgrade, especially with the crumbling economy. As a result, some ana- lysts believe that the fourth quarter of 2008 will be the first quarter since the iPod was introduced in 2001 that sales will decline from the year-earlier quarter. What’s more, they believe that the number of iPods sold will drop 12% in 2009, to about 48 million units. “The reality is there’s a limited group of people who want an iPod or any other portable media player,” one analyst says. “So the question becomes, what will Apple do about it?”

2. As Chinese consumers grow wealthier, they are increasingly willing to spend extra money on more expensive, but healthier, drinks. A Chinese company, China Huiyuan Juice Group, has leveraged its early-mover advant- age and strong brand name to become the leading 100% juice and nectar beverage company in China. China Huiyuan Juice Group wants to grow bigger but it is lacking the distribution network, financial resources, and management to do so.

In an effort to diversify its presence in one of the world’s fastest-growing beverage markets, Coca-Cola has announced that it wants to buy China Huiyuan Juice Group. Three major shareholders of Huiyuan, with a collect- ive shareholding of 66% in the Chinese company, have already accepted Coca-Cola’s offer. Whether both companies will benefit from this merger is uncertain: mergers can succeed or fail for many reasons. Recent research has shown that cultural differences might be a major cause of post-merger difficulties.

The two preceding examples illustrate the need for applied research, whereby exist- ing problems can be solved through investigation and good managerial decision making.

1.3.2 Basic or fundamental research

EXAMPLE

Right from her days as a clerical employee in a bank, Sarah had observed that her colleagues, though extremely knowledgeable about the nuances and intricacies of banking, were expending very little effort to improve the efficiency and effectiveness of the bank in the area of customer relations and service. They took on the minimum amount of work, availed themselves of long tea and lunch breaks, and seemed unmotivated in their dealings with the customers and the management. That they were highly knowledgeable about banking policies and practices was clearly evident from their discussions as they processed applications from customers. Sarah herself was very hardworking and enjoyed

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 15

Chapter

1Introduction to research

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 7

her work with the customers. She always used to think what a huge waste it was for talented employees to goof off rather than to work hard and enjoy their work. When she left the bank and did the dissertation for her PhD, her topic of investigation was Job Involvement, or the ego investment of people in their jobs. The conclusion of her investigation was that the single most important contributory factor to job involvement is the fit or match between the nature of the job and the personality predispositions of the people engaged in performing it. For example, challenging jobs allowed employees with high capabilities to get job-involved, and people-oriented employees got job-involved with service activities. Sarah then understood why the highly intelligent bank employees could not get job-involved or find job satisfaction in the routine jobs that rarely called for the use of their abilities.

Subsequently, when Sarah joined the Internal Research Team of a Fortune 500 company, she applied this knowledge to solve problems of motivation, job satisfaction, job involvement, and the like, in the organization.

The above is an instance of basic research, where knowledge was generated to under- stand a phenomenon of interest to the researcher. Most research and development departments in various industries, as well as many professors in colleges and uni- versities, do basic or fundamental research so that more knowledge is generated in particular areas of interest to industries, organizations, and researchers. Though the objective of engaging in basic research is primarily to equip oneself with additional knowledge of certain phenomena and problems that occur in several organizations and industries with a view to finding solutions, the knowledge generated from such research is often applied later for solving organizational problems.

As stated, the primary purpose of conducting basic research is to generate more knowledge and understanding of the phenomena of interest and to build theories based on the research results. Such theories subsequently form the foundation of further studies on many aspects of the phenomena. This process of building on existing knowledge is the genesis for theory building, particularly in the manage- ment area.

Several examples of basic research can be provided. For instance, research into the causes and consequences of global warming will offer many solutions to minimize the phenomenon, and lead to further research to determine if and how global warming can be averted. Although research on global warming might primarily be for the purpose of understanding the nuances of the phenomenon, the findings will ultimately be applied and useful to, among others, the agricultural and building industries.

Many large companies also engage in basic research. For instance, General Electric Company generates knowledge concerning the different applications of electrical energy, their motto being “We bring good things to life.” Computer companies in the Silicon Valley are constantly engaged in generating the know-how to increase the usefulness of microcomputers in industry, which benefits managers and technicians in all organizations. This, ultimately, results in increased sales of computers for them.

University professors engage in basic research in an effort to understand and gen- erate more knowledge about various aspects of businesses, such as how to improve the effectiveness of information systems, integrate technology into the overall stra- tegic objectives of an organization, assess the impact of marketing action, increase the productivity of employees in service industries, monitor sexual harassment incidents at the workplace, increase the effectiveness of small businesses, evaluate alternative inventory valuation methods, change the institutional structure of the

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 16

Chapter

1 Research Methods for Business

8 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

financial and capital markets, and the like. These findings later become useful for application in business situations.

As illustrated, the main distinction between applied and basic business research is that the former is specifically aimed at solving a currently experienced problem within a specific organization, whereas the latter has the broader objective of gen- erating knowledge and understanding of phenomena and problems that occur in various organizational settings. Despite this distinction, both types of research may benefit from following the same steps of systematic inquiry to arrive at solutions to problems. For this reason, both basic and applied research are often carried out in a scientific manner (discussed in the next chapter) so that the findings or results generated by them can be relied upon to effectively solve the problem investigated.

1.4 MANAGERS AND RESEARCH

Managers with knowledge of research have an advantage over those without. Though you yourself may not be doing any major research as a manager, you will have to understand, predict, and control events that are dysfunctional within the organiza- tion. For example, a newly developed product may not be “taking off,” or a financial investment may not be “paying off” as anticipated. Such disturbing phenomena have to be understood and explained. Unless this is done, it will not be possible to predict the future of that product or the prospects of that investment, and how future catastrophic outcomes can be controlled. A grasp of research methods enables managers to understand, predict, and control their environment.

A thought that may cross your mind is that, because you will probably be bringing in researchers to solve problems instead of doing the research yourself, there is no need to bother to study research. The reasons for its importance become clear when one considers the consequences of failing to do so. With the ever-increasing com- plexity of modern organizations, and the uncertainty of the environment they face, the management of organizational systems now involves constant troubleshoot- ing in the workplace. It would help if managers could sense, spot, and deal with problems before they got out of hand. Knowledge of research and problem-solving processes helps managers to identify problem situations before they get out of con- trol. Although minor problems can be fixed by the manager, major problems warrant the hiring of outside researchers or consultants. The manager who is knowledge- able about research can interact effectively with them. Knowledge about research processes, design, and interpretation of data also helps managers to become dis- criminating recipients of the research findings presented, and to determine whether or not the recommended solutions are appropriate for implementation.

Another reason why professional managers today need to know about research methods is that they will become more discriminating while sifting through the information disseminated in business journals. Some journal articles are more sci- entific and objective than others. Even among the scientific articles, some are more appropriate for application or adaptation to particular organizations and situations than others. This is a function of the sampling design, the types of organizations studied, and other factors reported in the journal articles. Unless the manager is able to grasp fully what the published empirical research really conveys, she or he is likely to err in incorporating some of the suggestions such publications offer. By the same token, managers can handle with success their own problems at consid- erable cost savings by studying the results of “good” (discussed in the next chapter) published research that has addressed similar issues.

There are several other reasons why professional managers should be knowledge- able about research and research methods in business. First, such knowledge sharpens the sensitivity of managers to the myriad variables operating in a situation

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 17

Chapter

1Introduction to research

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 9

and reminds them frequently of the multicausality and multifinality of phenomena, thus avoiding inappropriate, simplistic notions of one variable “causing” another. Second, when managers understand the research reports about their organizations handed to them by professionals, they are equipped to take intelligent, educated, calculated risks with known probabilities attached to the success or failure of their decisions. Research then becomes a useful decision-making tool rather than gener- ating a mass of incomprehensible statistical information. Third, if managers become knowledgeable about scientific investigations, vested interests inside or outside the organization will not prevail. For instance, an internal research group within the organization will not be able to distort information or manipulate the findings to their advantage if managers are aware of the biases that can creep into research and know how data are analyzed and interpreted. As an example, an internal research team might state that a particular unit to which it is partial (for whatever reason) has shown increased profits and hence should be allocated more resources to buy soph- isticated equipment to further enhance its effectiveness. However, the increased profit could have been a one-time windfall phenomenon due to external environ- mental factors such as market conditions, bearing no relation whatever to the unit’s operating efficiency. Thus, awareness of the different ways in which data may be camouflaged will help the manager to make the right decision. Fourth, knowledge about research helps the manager to relate to and share pertinent information with the researcher or consultant hired for problem solving.

In sum, being knowledgeable about research and research methods helps profes- sional managers to:

1. Identify and effectively solve minor problems in the work setting.

2. Know how to discriminate good from bad research.

3. Appreciate and be constantly aware of the multiple influences and multiple effects of factors impinging on a situation.

4. Take calculated risks in decision making, knowing full well the probabilities associated with the different possible outcomes.

5. Prevent possible vested interests from exercising their influence in a situation.

6. Relate to hired researchers and consultants more effectively.

7. Combine experience with scientific knowledge while making decisions.

1.5 THE MANAGER AND THE CONSULTANT−RESEARCHER Managers often need to engage a consultant to study some of the more complex, time-consuming problems that they encounter, as in the case of Apple mentioned earlier. It is thus important to be knowledgeable about how to effectively interact with the consultant (the terms researcher and consultant are used interchange- ably), what the manager−researcher relationship should be, and the advantages and disadvantages of internal versus external consultants.

1.5.1 The manager−researcher relationship During their careers, it often becomes necessary for managers to deal with consult- ants. In such cases, the manager must not only interact effectively with the research team, but must also explicitly delineate the roles for the researchers and the man- agement. The manager has to inform the researchers what types of information may be provided to them and, more importantly, which of their records will not be made available to them. Such records might include the personnel files of the employees,

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 18

Chapter

1 Research Methods for Business

10 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

or certain trade secrets. Making these facts explicit at the very beginning can save a lot of frustration for both parties. Managers who are very knowledgeable about research can more easily foresee what information the researchers might require, and if certain documents containing such information cannot be made available, they can inform the research team about this at the outset. It is vexing for research- ers to discover, at a late stage, that the company will not let them have certain information. If they know the constraints right from the beginning, the researchers might be able to identify alternate ways of tackling the problems and to design the research in such a way as to provide the needed answers.

Beyond specifying the roles and constraints, the manager should also make sure that there is congruence in the value systems of management and the consultants. For example, the research team might very strongly believe and recommend that reduction of the workforce and streamlining would be the ideal way to significantly cut down operating costs. Management’s consistent philosophy, however, might be not to fire employees who are experienced, loyal, and senior. Thus, there might be a clash of ideologies between management and the research team. Research knowledge will help managers to identify and explicitly state, even at the outset, the values that the organization holds dear, so that there are no surprises down the road. Clarification of the issue offers the research team the opportunity to either accept the assignment and find alternative ways of dealing with the problem, or regret its inability to undertake the project. In either case, both the organization and the research team will be better off having discussed their value orientations, thus avoiding potential frustration on both sides.

Exchange of information in a straightforward and forthright manner also helps to increase the rapport and trust levels between the two parties, which in turn motivates the two sides to interact effectively. Under this setup, researchers feel free to approach the management to seek assistance in making the research more purposeful. For instance, the research team is likely to request that management inform the employees of the ensuing research and its broad purpose to allay any fears they might entertain.

To summarize, while hiring researchers or consultants the manager should make sure that:

1. The roles and expectations of both parties are made explicit.

2. Relevant philosophies and value systems of the organization are clearly stated and constraints, if any, are communicated.

3. A good rapport is established with the researchers, and between the researchers and the employees in the organization, enabling the full cooperation of the latter.

1.6 INTERNAL VERSUS EXTERNAL CONSULTANTS/RESEARCHERS

1.6.1 Internal consultants/researchers

Some organizations have their own consulting or research department, which might be called the Management Services Department, the Organization and Methods Department, R&D (research and development department), or some other name. This department serves as the internal consultant to subunits of the organization that face certain problems and seek help. Such a unit within the organization, if it exists, is useful in several ways, and enlisting its help might be advantageous under some circumstances, but not others. The manager often has to decide whether to use internal or external researchers. To reach a decision, the manager should be aware of

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 19

Chapter

1Introduction to research

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 11

the strengths and weaknesses of both, and weigh the advantages and disadvantages of using either, based on the needs of the situation. Some of the advantages and disadvantages of both internal and external teams are now discussed.

Advantages of internal consultants/researchers

There are at least four advantages in engaging an internal team to do the research project:

1. The internal team stands a better chance of being readily accepted by the employees in the subunit of the organization where research needs to be done.

2. The team requires much less time to understand the structure, the philosophy and climate, and the functioning and work systems of the organization.

3. They are available to implement their recommendations after the research findings have been accepted. This is very important because any “bugs” in the implementation of the recommendations may be removed with their help. They are also available to evaluate the effectiveness of the changes, and to consider further changes if and when necessary.

4. The internal team might cost considerably less than an external team for the department enlisting help in problem solving, because they will need less time to understand the system due to their continuous involvement with various units of the organization. For problems of low complexity, the internal team would be ideal.

Disadvantages of internal consultants/researchers

There are also certain disadvantages to engaging internal research teams for the purposes of problem solving. The four most critical ones are:

1. In view of their long tenure as internal consultants, the internal team may quite possibly fall into a stereotyped way of looking at the organization and its problems. This inhibits any fresh ideas and perspectives that might be needed to correct the problem. This is definitely a handicap for situations in which weighty issues and complex problems are to be investigated.

2. There is scope for certain powerful coalitions in the organization to influence the internal team to conceal, distort, or misrepresent certain facts. In other words, certain vested interests could dominate, especially in securing a sizable portion of the available scant resources.

3. There is also a possibility that even the most highly qualified internal research teams are not perceived as “experts” by the staff and management, and hence their recommendations may not get the consideration and attention they deserve.

4. Certain organizational biases of the internal research team might, in some instances, make the findings less objective and consequently less scientific.

1.6.2 External consultants/researchers

The disadvantages of the internal research teams turn out to be the advantages of the external teams, and the former’s advantages work out to be the disadvantages of the latter. However, the specific advantages and disadvantages of the external teams may be highlighted.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 20

Chapter

1 Research Methods for Business

12 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Advantages of external consultants/researchers

The advantages of the external team are:

1. The external team can draw on a wealth of experience from having worked with different types of organizations that have had the same or similar types of problems. This wide range of experience enables them to think both divergently and convergently rather than hurry to an instant solution on the basis of the apparent facts in the situation. They are able to ponder over several alternative ways of looking at the problem because of their extensive problem-solving experience in various other organizational setups. Having viewed the situation from several possible angles and perspectives (divergently), they can critically assess each of these, discard the less viable options and alternatives, and focus on specific feasible solutions (think convergently).

2. The external teams, especially those from established research and consulting firms, might have more knowledge of current sophisticated problem-solving models through their periodic training programs, which the teams within the organization may not have access to. Because knowledge obsolescence is a real threat in the consulting area, external research institutions ensure that their members are conversant with the latest innovations through periodic organized training programs. The extent to which internal team members are kept abreast of the latest problem-solving techniques may vary considerably from one organization to another.

Disadvantages of external consultants/researchers

The major disadvantages in hiring an external research team are as follows:

1. The cost of hiring an external research team is usually high and is the main deterrent, unless the problems are critical.

2. In addition to the considerable time the external team takes to understand the organization being researched, they seldom get a warm welcome, nor are readily accepted by employees. Departments and individuals likely to be affected by the research study may perceive the study team as a threat and resist them. Therefore, soliciting employees’ help and enlisting their cooperation in the study is a little more difficult and time-consuming for external researchers than for internal teams.

3. The external team also charges additional fees for their assistance in the imple- mentation and evaluation phases.

Keeping in mind these advantages and disadvantages of internal and external research teams, the manager who desires research services has to weigh the pros and cons of engaging either before making a decision. If the problem is a complex one, or if there are likely to be vested interests, or if the very existence of the organ- ization is at stake because of one or more serious problems, it would be advisable to engage external researchers despite the increased costs involved. However, if the problems that arise are fairly simple, if time is of the essence in solving moderately complex problems, or if there is a system-wide need to establish procedures and policies of a fairly routine nature, the internal team would probably be the better option.

Knowledge of research methods and appreciation of the comparative advantages and disadvantages of external and internal teams help managers to make decisions on how to approach problems and determine whether internal or external research- ers are the appropriate choice to investigate and solve the problem.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 21

Chapter

1Introduction to research

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 13

1.7 KNOWLEDGE ABOUT RESEARCH AND MANAGERIAL EFFECTIVENESS

As already mentioned, managers are responsible for the final outcome by making the right decisions at work. This is greatly facilitated by research knowledge. Know- ledge of research heightens the sensitivity of managers to the innumerable internal and external factors of a varied nature operating in their work and organizational environment. It also helps to facilitate effective interactions with consultants and comprehension of the nuances of the research process.

Sophisticated technology such as simulation and model building is now available and may lend itself to profitable application in certain business areas. The recom- mendations of the external consultant who is proficient in this technology and urges its application in a particular situation may make no sense to, and might create some misgivings in, the manager not acquainted with research. Even superficial know- ledge of these techniques helps the manager to deal with the researcher in a mature and confident manner, so that dealing with “experts” does not result in discomfort. As the manager, you will be the one to make the final decision on the implement- ation of the recommendations made by the research team. Remaining objective, focusing on problem solutions, fully understanding the recommendations made, and why and how they have been arrived at, make for good managerial decision making. Although company traditions are to be respected, there may be occasions where today’s rapidly changing turbulent environment demands the substitution or re-adaptation of some of these traditions, based on research findings. Thus, knowledge of research greatly enhances the decision-making skills of the manager.

1.8 ETHICS AND BUSINESS RESEARCH

Ethics in business research refers to a code of conduct or expected societal norms of behavior while conducting research. Ethical conduct applies to the organization and the members that sponsor the research, the researchers who undertake the research, and the respondents who provide them with the necessary data. The observance of ethics begins with the person instituting the research, who should do so in good faith, pay attention to what the results indicate, and, surrendering the ego, pursue organizational rather than self-interests. Ethical conduct should also be reflected in the behavior of the researchers who conduct the investigation, the participants who provide the data, the analysts who provide the results, and the entire research team that presents the interpretation of the results and suggests alternative solutions.

Thus, ethical behavior pervades each step of the research process − data collec- tion, data analysis, reporting, and dissemination of information on the Internet, if such an activity is undertaken. How the subjects are treated and how confidential information is safeguarded are all guided by business ethics. We will highlight these as they relate to different aspects of research in the relevant chapters of this book.

There are business journals such as the Journal of Business Ethics and the Busi- ness Ethics Quarterly that are mainly devoted to the issue of ethics in business. The American Psychological Association has established certain guidelines for con- ducting research, to ensure that organizational research is conducted in an ethical manner and the interests of all concerned are safeguarded. As stated, we will discuss the role of ethics in the chapters that follow, insofar as it is relevant to the various steps in the research process.

SUMMARY

In this chapter we examined what research is, the two types of research (applied and basic), some commonly researched topical areas in business, why managers should

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 22

Chapter

1 Research Methods for Business

14 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

know about research for good decision making, effective relationships between the manager and the consultant−researcher, and the advantages and disadvantages of external and internal consultants. We also saw how managerial effectiveness is enhanced by knowledge of research and highlighted some of the areas where ethical issues deserve attention in the conduct of business research. In the next chapter we will examine what “good” investigation is.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

Scenario 1 To acquire or not to acquire: that is the question Companies are very interested in acquiring other firms, even when the latter operate in totally unrelated realms of business. For example, Coca-Cola has announced that it wants to buy China Huiyuan Juice Group in an effort to expand its activities in one of the world’s fastest-growing beverage markets. Such acquisitions are claimed to “work miracles.” However, given the volatility of the stock market and the slowing down of business, many companies are not sure whether such acquisitions involve too much risk. At the same time, they also wonder if they are missing out on a great business opportunity if they fail to take such risks. Some research is needed here!

Scenario 2 Reasons for absenteeism A university professor wanted to analyze in depth the reasons for absenteeism of employees in organizations. Fortunately, a company within 20 miles of the campus employed her as a consultant to study that very issue.

Scenario 3 Effects of service recovery on customer satisfaction A research scientist wants to investigate the question: What is the most effective way for an organization to recover from a service failure? Her objective is to provide guidelines for establishing the proper “fit” between service failure and service recovery that will generalize across a variety of service industries.

Why should a manager know about research when the job entails managing people, products, events, environments, and the like?

For what specific purposes is basic research important?

When is applied research, as distinct from basic research, useful?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 23

Chapter

1Introduction to research

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 15

Why is it important to be adept in handling the manager−researcher relation- ship?

Explain, giving reasons, which is more important, applied or basic research.

Give two specific instances where an external research team would be useful and two other scenarios when an internal research team would be deployed, with adequate explanations as to why each scenario is justified for an external or internal team.

Describe a situation where research will help you as a manager to make a good decision.

Given the situations below:

discuss, with reasons, whether they fall into the category of applied or basic research;

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 24

Chapter

1 Research Methods for Business

16 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

for Scenario 1, explain, with reasons, who will conduct the research.

CASE: THE LAROCHE CANDY COMPANY

In 1864 Henricus Laroche started making high-quality chocolate in his kit- chen in Ooigem, Belgium. Henricus learned his trade at a famous chocolate shop in Paris, and he and his wife began to make chocolate in bars, wafers, and other shapes soon after Henricus had returned to Belgium to start his own business. The Belgian people loved Laroche’s chocolate and the imme- diate success soon caused him to increase his production facilities. Henricus decided to build a chocolate factory in Kortrijk, a nearby city in the Flem- ish province West Flanders. With mass-production, the company was able to lower the per-unit costs and to make chocolate, once a luxury item, affordable to everybody. The Laroche Candy Company flourished, expanded its product lines, and acquired related companies during the following decades. Within a century the company had become Belgium’s leading candy-manufacturer, employing over 2500 people.

Today, The Laroche Candy Company is one of the biggest manufacturers of chocolate and non-chocolate confectionery products in Europe. Under the present leadership of Luc Laroche the company has become truly innovative. What’s more, the company has adopted a very proactive approach to mar- keting planning and is therefore a fierce competitor in an increasingly global marketplace. The number of products the company produces and markets has increased dramatically; at this moment there are more than 250 Laroche Candy items distributed internationally in bulk, bags, and boxes.

Luc Laroche, born in 1946, is the fifth generation of his family to lead The Laroche Candy Company. He is the great-great-grandson of company founder Henricus Laroche and the current Chairman and CEO of the company. But Luc is nearing retirement. He has planned to stop working in two to three years. Whereas stepping back from power is a very difficult thing to do for a lot of people, it is an easy thing to do for Luc: He is looking forward to spending time with his grandchildren and to driving his Harley-Davidson across Europe. What’s more, he has never found the time to play golf, and he is planning to spend “three whole summers learning it” if necessary. And yet, even though “letting go” is not a problem for Luc, he still has his worries about his imminent retirement.

As in most family businesses, Luc’s two children spent their share of summers working for the company. Luc’s oldest son Davy has repeatedly worked for the accounting department whereas Davy’s younger brother Robert has infre- quently worked in the field. However, they have never shown a serious interest in the business. Davy, who is 35, currently works as an associate professor of management accounting at a reputable university in Belgium. Robert, aged 32, lives in Paris and has been working as a photographer for the past ten years. About 12 years ago, Robert told his dad, “I know you’d like me to come into the business, but I’ve got my own path to travel.” Luc recalls responding that he

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 25

Chapter

1Introduction to research

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 17

respects that and that he does not want Robert to feel constrained; “I just want you to be happy,” is what he told Robert on that particular occasion.

Ever since this conversation with Robert, Luc has put his hopes on Davy. A few days ago, Luc invited Davy to have dinner at the famous In de Wulf restaurant in Dranouter, Belgium, to discuss the future of The Laroche Candy Company. He wants to talk about his retirement and a succession plan for the company with Davy, who has serious doubts about taking over the company. Davy knows that for his dad the company is his life and, like his dad, he wants the company to be successful in the future; but he just does not know whether it is a good idea to take over from his father. In an effort to maintain a balanced perspective on the issue, Davy has done some research on it. Hence, he has become very familiar with statistics about the failure rate of family transitions. These statistics have triggered numerous concerns and fears about taking over the company from his father.

Luc and Davy discuss the future of the company during a memorable dinner in Dranouter. Luc tells Davy that he wants his son to take over the company, but Davy explains that he has qualms. He brings up his doubts and fears and alternatives such as going public, selling to a strategic acquirer or investor, or selling to employees through an employee stock ownership plan. Luc hardly listens to Davy’s concerns and strikes a blow for family business.

“History is full of examples of spectacular ascents of family business,” he said after the waiter has refilled his glass for the fourth time in just over an hour, “the Rothschilds, the Murdochs, the Waltons, and the Vanderbilts, to name only a few. The Rothschilds, for instance, not only accumulated the largest amount of private wealth the Western world has ever seen, they also changed the course of history by financing kings and monarchs. Did you know that they supported Wellington’s armies, which ultimately led to the defeat of Napoleon at Waterloo? I bet you didn’t.”

Davy raised an eyebrow. “I didn’t. But what I do know,” he replied, “is that only 50 years after the death of Cornelius Vanderbilt, who created a fortune in railroads and shipping, several of his direct descendants were flat broke. Apparently the Vanderbilts had both a talent for acquiring and spending money in unmatched numbers. Seriously, dad, I do believe that strong family values are very important but I also feel that they may place restraints on the development of the company. It is commonly known that familism in Southern Italy is one of the main reasons for the slower economic development of the south relative to the north.”

Luc sighed and looked at his son. “So, what does this all mean?”

“Well, I think that the key question is whether family firms evolve as an efficient response to the institutional and market environment, or whether they are an outcome of cultural norms that might be harmful for corporate decisions and economic outcomes,” Davy replied with a gentle smile. “Don’t you think so?”

“I . . . um . . . I guess I do.” Luc smiled back at his son. “I am not sure that I understand what you mean, but it sounds great. Let’s throw some money at it and hire a consultant who knows something about this. I’ll call McKinsey first thing tomorrow morning. Cheers.”

“Cheers dad,” Davy echoed lifting his glass.

Two weeks later, Paul Thomas Anderson, a senior McKinsey consultant, put forward the following problem statement in a meeting with Luc Laroche: What

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 26

Chapter

1 Research Methods for Business

18 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

are the implications of family control for the governance, financing, and overall performance of The Laroche Candy Company?

QUESTIONS

What is business research?

Why is the project that Paul Thomas Anderson is doing for The Laroche Candy Company a research project?

Which steps will Paul take now that he has clearly defined the problem that needs attention?

Luc Laroche has decided to hire an external consultant to investigate the prob- lem. Do you think that this is a wise decision or would it have been better to ask his son Davy or an internal consultant to do the research project?

What can (or should) Luc do to assist Paul to yield valuable research results?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 27

Chapter

1Introduction to research

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 19

How can basic or fundamental research help Paul to solve the specific problem of The Laroche Candy Company?

Try to find relevant books, articles, and research reports relating to this issue. Use, among others, electronic resources of your library and/or the Internet.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 28

Chapter

2

20 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Chapter 2

The scientific approach and alternative approaches to investigation

Topics discussed:

� The hallmarks of scientific research

� The hypothetico-deductive method

� The seven-step process of the hypothetico-deductive method

� Inductive and deductive reasoning

� Some obstacles to conducting scientific research in the management area

� Alternative approaches to research

Chapter objectives

After completing Chapter 2 you should be able to:

1. Explain what is meant by scientific investigation, giving examples of both scientific and nonscientific investigations.

2. Explain the eight hallmarks of science.

3. Describe the building blocks of science.

4. Discuss the seven steps of the hypothetico-deductive method, using an example of your own.

5. Describe the processes of induction and deduction.

6. Briefly explain why research in the organizational behavior and management areas is not always scientific.

7. Discuss alternative perspectives on what makes good research.

8. Describe positivism, constructionism, critical realism, and pragmatism.

9. Appreciate the advantages of knowledge about different perspectives on what makes good research.

Managers frequently face issues that call for critical decision making. Managerial decisions based on the results of “‘good’” research tend to be effective. In Chapter 1, we defined research as an organized, systematic, data-based, critical, objective inquiry into a specific problem that needs a solution. We also explained that both basic and applied research are often carried out in a scientific way. It is therefore important to understand what the term scientific means. Scientific research focuses on solving problems and pursues a step-by-step logical, organized, and rigorous method to identify the problems, gather data, analyze them, and draw valid conclu- sions from them. Thus, scientific research is not based on hunches, experience, and intuition (though these may play a part in final decision making), but is purposive and rigorous. Because of the rigorous way in which it is done, scientific research enables all those who are interested in researching and knowing about the same or similar issues to come up with comparable findings when the data are analyzed. Scientific research also helps researchers to state their findings with accuracy and

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 29

Chapter

2

The scientific approach and alternative approaches to investigation

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 21

confidence. This helps various other organizations to apply those solutions when they encounter similar problems. Furthermore, scientific investigation tends to be more objective than subjective, and helps managers to highlight the most critical factors at the workplace that need specific attention so as to avoid, minimize, or solve problems. Scientific investigation and managerial decision making are integral aspects of effective problem solving. The term scientific research applies, therefore, to both basic and applied research.

Do researchers always take a scientific approach to research? No. Sometimes, researchers have a different perspective on what makes good research and how research should be done. We will have more to say about this later in this chapter. At other times, the problem may be so simple that it does not call for elaborate research, and past experience might offer the necessary solution. Finally, exigencies of time (where quick decisions are called for), unwillingness to expend the resources needed for doing good research, lack of knowledge, and other factors might prompt businesses to try to solve problems based on hunches. However, the probabil- ity of making wrong decisions in such cases is high. Even such business “gurus” as Richard Branson and Steve Jobs have confessed to making big mistakes due to errors of judgment. BusinessWeek, Fortune, and the Wall Street Journal, among other business periodicals and newspapers, feature articles from time to time about organizations that face difficulties because of wrong decisions made on the basis of hunches and/or insufficient information. Many implemented plans fail because not enough research has preceded their formulation.

2.1 THE HALLMARKS OF SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH

The hallmarks or main distinguishing characteristics of scientific research may be listed as follows:

1. Purposiveness.

2. Rigor.

3. Testability.

4. Replicability.

5. Precision and confidence.

6. Objectivity.

7. Generalizability.

8. Parsimony.

Each of these characteristics can be explained in the context of a concrete example. Let us consider the case of a manager who is interested in investigating how employ- ees’ commitment to the organization can be increased. We shall examine how the eight hallmarks of science apply to this investigation so that it may be considered “scientific.”

2.1.1 Purposiveness

The manager has started the research with a definite aim or purpose. The focus is on increasing the commitment of employees to the organization, as this will be beneficial in many ways. An increase in employee commitment will translate into lower turnover, less absenteeism, and probably increased performance levels, all of which will definitely benefit the organization. The research thus has a purposive focus.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 30

Chapter

2

Research Methods for Business

22 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

2.1.2 Rigor

A good theoretical base and a sound methodological design add rigor to a purposive study. Rigor connotes carefulness, scrupulousness, and the degree of exactitude in research investigations. In the case of our example, let us say the manager of an organization asks 10 to 12 of its employees to indicate what would increase their level of commitment to it. If, solely on the basis of their responses, the manager reaches several conclusions on how employee commitment can be increased, the whole approach to the investigation is unscientific. It lacks rigor for the following reasons:

1. The conclusions are incorrectly drawn because they are based on the responses of just a few employees whose opinions may not be representative of those of the entire workforce.

2. The manner of framing and addressing the questions could have introduced bias or incorrectness in the responses.

3. There might be many other important influences on organizational commit- ment that this small sample of respondents did not or could not verbalize during the interviews, and the researcher has therefore failed to include them.

Therefore, conclusions drawn from an investigation that lacks a good theoretical foundation, as evidenced by reason 3, and methodological sophistication, as evid- ent from 1 and 2 above, are unscientific. Rigorous research involves a good the- oretical base and a carefully thought-out methodology. These factors enable the researcher to collect the right kind of information from an appropriate sample with the minimum degree of bias, and facilitate suitable analysis of the data gathered. The following chapters of this book address these theoretical and methodological issues. Rigor in research design also makes possible the achievement of the other six hallmarks of science that we shall now discuss.

2.1.3 Testability

Testability is a property that applies to the hypotheses of a study. In Chapter 5, we will define a hypothesis as a tentative, yet testable, statement, which predicts what you expect to find in your empirical data. Hypotheses are derived from theory, which is based on the logical beliefs of the researcher and on (the results of) previous, scientific research−we will have more to say about these matters in Chapter 5.

A scientific hypothesis must be testable. Not all hypotheses can be tested. Non- testable hypotheses are often vague statements, or they put forward something that cannot be tested experimentally. A famous example of a hypothesis that is not testable is the hypothesis that God created the earth.

If, after talking to a random selection of employees of the organization and study of the previous research done in the area of organizational commitment, the manager or researcher develops certain hypotheses on how employee commitment can be enhanced, then these can be tested by applying certain statistical tests to the data collected for the purpose. For instance, the researcher might hypothesize that those employees who perceive greater opportunities for participation in decision making will have a higher level of commitment. This is a hypothesis that can be tested when the data are collected. A correlation analysis will indicate whether the hypothesis is substantiated or not. The use of several other tests, such as the chi-square test and the t-test, is discussed in CChapter 14 and Chapter 15.

Scientific research thus lends itself to testing logically developed hypotheses to see whether or not the data support the educated conjectures or hypotheses that are

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 31

Chapter

2

The scientific approach and alternative approaches to investigation

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 23

developed after a careful study of the problem situation. Testability thus becomes another hallmark of scientific research.

2.1.4 Replicability

Let us suppose that the manager/researcher, based on the results of the study, con- cludes that participation in decision making is one of the most important factors that influences the commitment of employees to the organization. We will place more faith and credence in these findings and conclusion if similar findings emerge on the basis of data collected by others employing the same methods− that is, we have more faith in the findings of a study if the findings are replicated in another study. Replication demonstrates that our hypotheses have not been supported merely by chance, but are reflective of the true state of affairs in the population. The results of the tests of hypotheses should be supported again and yet again when the same type of research is repeated in similar circumstances. To the extent that this does happen (i.e., the results are replicated or repeated), we will gain confidence in the scientific nature of our research.

Replication is made possible by a detailed description of the design details of the study, such as the sampling method and the data collection methods that were used. This information should create the possibility to replicate the research. Replicability is the extent to which a re-study is made possible by the provision of the design details of the study in the research report. Replicability is another hallmark of scientific research.

2.1.5 Precision and confidence

In management research, we seldom have the luxury of being able to draw “defin- itive” conclusions on the basis of the results of data analysis. This is because we are unable to study the universe of items, events, or population we are interested in, and have to base our findings on a sample that we draw from the universe. In all probability, the sample in question may not reflect the exact characteristics of the phenomenon we are trying to study (these difficulties are discussed in greater detail in Chapter 13). Measurement errors and other problems are also bound to introduce an element of bias or error in our findings. However, we would like to design the research in a manner that ensures that our findings are as close to reality (i.e., the true state of affairs in the universe) as possible, so that we can place reliance or confidence in the results.

Precision refers to the closeness of the findings to “reality” based on a sample. In other words, precision reflects the degree of accuracy or exactitude of the results on the basis of the sample, to what really exists in the universe. For example, if I estimated the number of production days lost during the year due to absenteeism at between 30 and 40, as against the actual figure of 35, the precision of my estimation compares more favorably than if I had indicated that the loss of production days was somewhere between 20 and 50. You may recall the term confidence interval in statistics, which is what is referred to here as precision.

Confidence refers to the probability that our estimations are correct. That is, it is not merely enough to be precise, but it is also important that we can confidently claim that 95% of the time our results will be true and there is only a 5% chance of our being wrong. This is also known as the confidence level.

The narrower the limits within which we can estimate the range of our predictions (i.e., the more precise our findings) and the greater the confidence we have in our research results, the more useful and scientific the findings become. In social science research, a 95% confidence level−which implies that there is only a 5% probability

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 32

Chapter

2

Research Methods for Business

24 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

that the findings may not be correct − is accepted as conventional, and is usually referred to as a significance level of 0.05 (p = 0.05). Thus, precision and confidence are important aspects of research, which are attained through appropriate scientific sampling design. The greater the precision and confidence we aim at in our research, the more scientific is the investigation and the more useful are the results. Both precision and confidence are discussed in detail in Chapter 13 on Sampling.

2.1.6 Objectivity

The conclusions drawn through the interpretation of the results of data analysis should be objective; that is, they should be based on the facts of the findings derived from actual data, and not on our own subjective or emotional values. For instance, if we had a hypothesis that stated that greater participation in decision making would increase organizational commitment, and this was not supported by the results, it would make no sense if the researcher continued to argue that increased opportunities for employee participation would still help! Such an argument would be based not on the factual, data-based research findings, but on the subjective opinion of the researcher. If this was the researcher’s conviction all along, then there was no need to do the research in the first place!

Much damage can be sustained by organizations that implement non-data-based or misleading conclusions drawn from research. For example, if the hypothesis relating to organizational commitment in our previous example was not supported, considerable time and effort would be wasted in finding ways to create opportunities for employee participation in decision making. We would only find out later that employees still kept quitting, remained absent, and did not develop any sense of commitment to the organization. Likewise, if research shows that increased pay is not going to increase the job satisfaction of employees, then implementing a revised, increased pay system will only drag down the company financially without attaining the desired objective. Such a futile exercise, then, is based on nonscientific interpretation and implementation of the research results.

The more objective the interpretation of the data, the more scientific the research investigation becomes. Though managers or researchers might start with some ini- tial subjective values and beliefs, their interpretation of the data should be stripped of personal values and bias. If managers attempt to do their own research, they should be particularly sensitive to this aspect. Objectivity is thus another hallmark of scientific investigation.

2.1.7 Generalizability

Generalizability refers to the scope of applicability of the research findings in one organizational setting to other settings. Obviously, the wider the range of applicab- ility of the solutions generated by research, the more useful the research is to the users. For instance, if a researcher’s findings that participation in decision making enhances organizational commitment are found to be true in a variety of manu- facturing, industrial, and service organizations, and not merely in the particular organization studied by the researcher, then the generalizability of the findings to other organizational settings is enhanced. The more generalizable the research, the greater its usefulness and value. However, not many research findings can be generalized to all other settings, situations, or organizations.

For wider generalizability, the research sampling design has to be logically developed and a number of other details in the data-collection methods need to be meticu- lously followed. However, a more elaborate sampling design, which would doubtless increase the generalizability of the results, would also increase the costs of research.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 33

Chapter

2

The scientific approach and alternative approaches to investigation

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 25

Most applied research is generally confined to research within the particular organ- ization where the problem arises, and the results, at best, are generalizable only to other identical situations and settings. Though such limited applicability does not necessarily decrease its scientific value (subject to proper research), its generaliz- ability is restricted.

2.1.8 Parsimony

Simplicity in explaining the phenomena or problems that occur, and in generating solutions for the problems, is always preferred to complex research frameworks that consider an unmanageable number of factors. For instance, if two or three specific variables in the work situation are identified, which when changed would raise the organizational commitment of the employees by 45%, that would be more useful and valuable to the manager than if it were recommended that he should change ten different variables to increase organizational commitment by 48%. Such an unmanageable number of variables might well be totally beyond the manager’s control to change. Therefore, the achievement of a meaningful and parsimonious, rather than an elaborate and cumbersome, model for problem solution becomes a critical issue in research.

Economy in research models is achieved when we can build into our research framework a lesser number of variables that explain the variance far more efficiently than a complex set of variables that only marginally add to the variance explained. Parsimony can be introduced with a good understanding of the problem and the important factors that influence it. Such a good conceptual theoretical model can be realized through unstructured and structured interviews with the concerned people, and a thorough literature review of the previous research work in the particular problem area.

In sum, scientific research encompasses the eight criteria just discussed. These are discussed in more detail later in this book.

2.2 THE HYPOTHETICO-DEDUCTIVE METHOD

Scientific research pursues a step-by-step, logical, organized, and rigorous method (a scientific method) to find a solution to a problem. The scientific method was developed in the context of the natural sciences, where it has been the foundation of many important discoveries. Although there have been numerous objections to this method and to using it in social and business research (we will discuss some of these later in this chapter), it is still the predominant approach for generating know- ledge in natural, social, and business sciences. The hypothetico-deductive method, popularized by the Austrian philosopher Karl Popper, is a typical version of the sci- entific method. The hypothetico-deductive method provides a useful, systematic approach for generating knowledge to solve basic and managerial problems. This systematic approach is discussed next.

2.2.1 The seven-step process in the hypothetico-deductive method

The hypothetico-deductive method involves the seven steps listed and discussed next.

1. Identify a broad problem area.

2. Define the problem statement.

3. Develop hypotheses.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 34

Chapter

2

Research Methods for Business

26 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

4. Determine measures.

5. Data collection.

6. Data analysis.

7. Interpretation of data.

Identify a broad problem area

A drop in sales, frequent production interruptions, incorrect accounting results, low-yielding investments, disinterestedness of employees in their work, customer switching, and the like, could attract the attention of the manager and catalyze the research project.

Define the problem statement

Scientific research starts with a definite aim or purpose. To find solutions for identi- fied problems, a problem statement that includes the general objective and research questions of the research should be developed. Gathering initial information about the factors that are possibly related to the problem will help us to narrow the broad problem area and to define the problem statement. Preliminary information gath- ering, discussed in greater detail in Chapter 3, involves the seeking of information in depth, of what is observed (for instance, the observation that our company is losing customers). This could be done by a literature review (literature on customer switching) or by talking to several people in the work setting, to clients (why do they switch?), or to other relevant sources, thereby gathering information on what is happening and why. Through any of these methods, we get an idea or a “feel” for what is transpiring in the situation. This allows us to develop a specific problem statement.

Develop hypotheses

In this step, variables are examined to ascertain their contribution or influence in explaining why the problem occurs and how it can be solved. The network of associations identified among the variables is then theoretically woven, together with justification as to why they might influence the problem. From a theorized network of associations among the variables, certain hypotheses or educated con- jectures can be generated. For instance, at this point, we might hypothesize that specific factors such as overpricing, competition, inconvenience, and unresponsive employees affect customer switching.

A scientific hypothesis must meet two requirements. The first criterion is that the hypothesis must be testable. We have discussed the testability of hypotheses earlier in this chapter. The second criterion, and one of the central tenets of the hypothetico-deductive method, is that a hypothesis must also be falsifiable. That is, it must be possible to disprove the hypothesis. According to Karl Popper, this is important because a hypothesis cannot be confirmed; there is always a possibility that future research will show that it is false. Hence, failing to falsify (!) a hypo- thesis does not prove that hypothesis: it remains provisional until it is disproved. Hence, the requirement of falsifiability emphasizes the tentative nature of research findings: we can only “prove” our hypotheses until they are disproved.

The development of hypotheses and the process of theory formulation are discussed in greater detail in Chapter 5.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 35

Chapter

2

The scientific approach and alternative approaches to investigation

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 27

Determine measures

Unless the variables in the theoretical framework are measured in some way, we will not be able to test our hypotheses. To test the hypothesis that unresponsive employees affect customer switching, we need to operationalize unresponsiveness and customer switching. Measurement of variables is discussed in Chapter 11 and Chapter 12.

Data collection

After we have determined how to measure our variables, data with respect to each variable in the hypothesis need to be obtained. These data then form the basis for data analysis. Data collection is extensively discussed in Chapter 7 to Chapter 12.

Data analysis

In the data analysis step, the data gathered are statistically analyzed to see if the hypotheses that were generated have been supported. For instance, to see if unre- sponsiveness of employees affects customer switching, we might want to do a correlational analysis to determine the relationship between these variables.

Hypotheses are tested through appropriate statistical analysis, as discussed in Chapter 15.

Interpretation of data

Now we must decide whether our hypotheses are supported or not by interpreting the meaning of the results of the data analysis. For instance, if it was found from the data analysis that increased responsiveness of employees was negatively related to customer switching (say, 0.3), then we can deduce that if customer retention is to be increased, our employees have to be trained to be more responsive. Another inference from this data analysis is that responsiveness of our employees accounts for (or explains) 9% of the variance in customer switching (0.32). Based on these deductions, we are able to make recommendations on how the “customer switch- ing” problem may be solved (at least to some extent); we have to train our employees to be more flexible and communicative.

Note that even if the hypothesis on the effect of unresponsiveness on customer switching is not supported, our research effort has still been worthwhile. Hypotheses that are not supported allow us to refine our theory by thinking about why it is that they were not supported. We can then test our refined theory in future research.

In summary, there are seven steps involved in identifying and resolving a problem- atic issue. To make sure that the seven steps of the hypothetico-deductive method are properly understood, let us briefly review an example in an organizational set- ting and the course of action taken in the seven steps.

Application of the hypothetico-deductive method in organizations

The CIO Dilemma

Identifying the broad problem area

The Chief Information Officer (CIO) of a firm observes that the newly installed Management Information System (MIS) is not being used by middle managers as much as was originally expected. The managers often approach the CIO or some other “computer expert” for help or, worse still, make decisions without

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 36

Chapter

2

Research Methods for Business

28 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

facts. Recognizing there was surely a problem, the CIO develops the following broad problem statement: “What should be done to increase the use of the newly installed MIS by our middle managers?”

Defining the problem statement

Talking to some of the middle-level managers, the CIO finds that many of them have very little idea as to what the MIS is all about, what kinds of information it can provide, and how to access it and utilize the information. The CIO uses the Internet to explore further information on the lack of use of management information systems in organizations. The search indicates that many middle- level managers− especially the old-timers− are not open to new ideas or ways of solving problems. Lack of knowledge about what the MIS offers is also found to be another main reason why some managers do not use it. This information helps the CIO to narrow the broad problem area and to refine the problem state- ment: “To what extent do knowledge-related factors and openness to change affect the use of the MIS by middle managers?”

Hypothesizing

The CIO develops a theory incorporating all the relevant factors contributing to the use of the MIS by managers in the organization. From such a theory, the CIO generates various hypotheses for testing, one among them being: Knowledge of the usefulness of the MIS would help managers to put it to greater use.

Development of measures and data collection

The CIO then develops a short questionnaire measuring the various factors theorized to influence the use of the MIS by managers, such as the extent of knowledge of what the MIS is, what kinds of information the MIS provides, how to gain access to the information, and the level of openness to change of managers, and, finally, how often managers have used the MIS in the preceding three months.

Data analysis

The CIO then analyzes the data obtained through the questionnaire to see what factors prevent the managers from using the system.

Interpretation

Based on the results, the CIO deduces or concludes that managers do not use the MIS because of certain factors. These deductions help the CIO to take necessary action to rectify the situation, which might include, among other things, organizing seminars for training managers on the use of the MIS and illustrating the advantages of using the MIS to the managers.

2.2.2 Review of the hypothetico-deductive method

The hypothetico-deductive method involves the seven steps of identifying a broad problem area, defining the problem statement, hypothesizing, determining meas- ures, data collection, data analysis, and the interpretation of the results. Deductive reasoning is a key element in the hypothetico-deductive method. In deductive reasoning, we start with a general theory and then apply this theory to a specific case.

Hypothesis testing is deductive in nature because we test if a general theory (for instance, the theory that “customer satisfaction is based on the service quality

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 37

Chapter

2

The scientific approach and alternative approaches to investigation

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 29

dimensions of responsiveness, reliability, assurance, tangibles, and empathy”) is capable of explaining a particular problem; the problem that catalyzed our research project (for instance, complaints about the service quality our company provides). Hence, service quality theory is used to make predictions about relationships between certain variables in our specific situation (for instance, that there is a positive relationship between perceived employee responsiveness and satisfaction of our customers). In a similar vein, marketing researchers often deduce the con- sequences of changes in the marketing mix based on existing (marketing) models.

Inductive reasoning works in the opposite direction: it is a process where we observe specific phenomena and on this basis arrive at general conclusions. Along these lines, the observation of a first, second, and third white swan may lead to the proposition that “all swans are white.” In this example, the repeated observation of a white swan has led to the conclusion that all swans are white. According to Karl Popper it is not possible to “prove” a hypothesis by means of induction, because no amount of evidence assures us that contrary evidence will not be found. Observing 3, 10, 100, or even 10 000 white swans does not justify the conclusion that “all swans are white” because there is always a possibility that the next swan we observe will be black. Instead, Popper proposed that science is accomplished by deduction.

However, despite Popper’s criticism on induction, both inductive and deductive processes are often used in research. Indeed, many researchers have argued that both theory generation (induction) and theory testing (deduction) are essential parts of the research process.

Induction and deduction are often used in a sequential manner. John Dewey describes this process as “the double movement of reflective thought.” Induction takes place when a researcher observes something and asks, “‘Why does this hap- pen?’” In answer to this question, the researcher may develop a provisional explan- ation − a hypothesis. Deduction is subsequently used to test this hypothesis. The following example illustrates this process.

EXAMPLE

A manager may notice that frequent price promotions of a product have a negative effect on product sales. Based on this observation, the manager may wonder why price promotions have a negative − instead of a positive − effect on sales. Interviews with customers indicate that frequent price promotions have a negative effect on sales because frequent price promotions negatively affect the reputation or image of the product. Based on these interviews, the manager develops a new theory about why price promotions have a negative effect on sales − because frequent price promotions have a negative effect on the reputation of the product! Accordingly, the manager hypothesizes that frequent price promotions negatively affect the reputation of the product and hence product sales. The manager may verify this hypothesis by means of deduction.

This example shows that both inductive and deductive processes are applied in scientific investigations. Although both deductive and inductive processes can be used in quantitative and qualitative research, deductive processes are more often used in causal and quantitative studies, whereas inductive research processes are regularly used in exploratory and qualitative studies.

In sum, theories based on deduction and induction help us to understand, explain, and/or predict business phenomena. When research is designed to test some

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 38

Chapter

2

Research Methods for Business

30 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

specific hypothesized outcomes (for instance, to see if controlling aversive noise in the environment increases the performance of individuals in solving mental puzzles), the following steps ensue. The investigator begins with the theory that noise adversely affects mental problem solving. The hypothesis is then generated that if the noise is controlled, mental puzzles can be solved more quickly and cor- rectly. Based on this, a research project is designed to test the hypothesis. The results of the study help the researcher to deduce or conclude that controlling the aversive noise does indeed help the participants to improve their performance on mental puzzles. This method of starting with a theoretical framework, formulating hypotheses, and logically deducing from the results of the study is known as (you probably recognized it already) the hypothetico-deductive method. Here is another example of the hypothetico-deductive research process.

EXAMPLE

A sales manager might observe that customers are perhaps not as pleased as they used to be. The manager may not be certain that this is really the case but may experience uneasiness among consumers and observe that the number of customer complaints has increased recently. This process of observation or sensing of the phenomena around us is what gets most research − whether applied or basic − started. The next step for the manager is to determine whether there is a real problem and, if so, how serious it is. This problem iden- tification calls for some preliminary data gathering. The manager might talk casually to a few customers to find out how they feel about the products and customer service. During the course of these conversations the manager might find that the customers like the products but are upset because many of the items they need are frequently out of stock, and they perceive the salesper- sons as not being helpful. From discussions with some of the salespersons, the manager might discover that the factory does not supply the goods on time and promises new delivery dates that it fails, on occasion, to keep. Salesper- sons might also indicate that they try to please and retain the customers by communicating the delivery dates given to them by the factory.

Integration of the information obtained through the informal and formal inter- viewing process helps the manager to determine that a problem does exist and to define the central question of the study as follows: “How do delays affect customer satisfaction?” It also helps the manager to formulate a theoretical framework of all the factors contributing to the problem. In this case, there is a network of connections among the following factors: delays by the factory in delivering goods, the notification of later delivery dates that are not kept, the promises of the salespersons to the customers (in hopes of retaining them) that cannot be fulfilled, all of which contribute to customer dissatisfaction. From the theoretical framework, which is a meaningful integration of all the inform- ation gathered, several hypotheses can be generated and tested to determine if the data support them. Concepts are then operationally defined so that they can be measured. A research design is set up to decide on, among other issues, how to collect further data, analyze and interpret them, and finally, to provide an answer to the problem. The process of drawing from logical analysis an inference that purports to be conclusive is called deduction. Thus, the building blocks of science provide the genesis for the hypothetico-deductive method of scientific research.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 39

Chapter

2

The scientific approach and alternative approaches to investigation

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 31

2.3 SOME OBSTACLES TO CONDUCTING SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH IN THE MANAGEMENT AREA

In the management and behavioral areas, it is not always possible to conduct invest- igations that are 100% scientific, in the sense that, unlike in the physical sciences, the results obtained will not be exact and error-free. This is primarily because of difficulties likely to be encountered in the measurement and collection of data in the subjective areas of feelings, emotions, attitudes, and perceptions. These problems occur whenever we attempt to measure abstract and subjective constructs. Diffi- culties might also be encountered in obtaining a representative sample, restricting the generalizability of the findings. Thus, it is not always possible to meet all the hallmarks of science in full. Comparability, consistency, and wide generalizabil- ity are often difficult to obtain in research. Still, to the extent that the research is designed to ensure purposiveness, rigor, and the maximum possible testability, rep- licability, generalizability, objectivity, parsimony, and precision and confidence, we would have endeavored to engage in scientific investigation. Several other possible limitations in research studies are discussed in subsequent chapters.

2.4 ALTERNATIVE APPROACHES TO RESEARCH

Following a scientific approach to research should help the researcher to get to the truth about the subject of the research. But is there such a thing as the truth? Or is the truth subjective; something that we have only constructed in our minds? All research is based on beliefs about the world around us (the philosophical study of what can be said to exist is called ontology) and what we can possibly discover by research. Unfortunately, different researchers have different ideas about these issues.

The disagreement about the nature of knowledge or how we come to know (the appropriate name for these matters is epistemology) has a long history and it is not restricted to research in business. Questions such as “What exists?”, “What is knowledge?”, and “How do we acquire knowledge?” have fascinated philosophers and researchers in many fields for over 2000 years. At this point, we will briefly discuss the most important perspectives for contemporary research in business. We will successively deal with positivism, constructionism, critical realism, and pragmatism. Note that in order to make our point we will sometimes exaggerate the descriptions of these research perspectives. For this reason, experts on these matters may sometimes disapprove on what we have to say.

2.4.1 Positivism

In a positivist view of the world, science and scientific research is seen as the way to get at the truth− indeed, positivists believe that there is an objective truth out there − to understand the world well enough so that we are able to predict and control it. For a positivist, the world operates by laws of cause and effect that we can discern if we use a scientific approach to research. Positivists are concerned with the rigor and replicability of their research, the reliability of observations, and the generalizability of findings. They use deductive reasoning to put forward theories that they can test by means of a fixed, predetermined research design and objective measures. The key approach of positivist researchers is the experiment, which allows them to test cause-and-effect relationships through manipulation and observation. Some positivists believe that the goal of research is to only describe phenomena that one can directly observe and objectively measure. For them, knowledge of anything beyond that− such as emotions, feelings, and thoughts− is impossible.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 40

Chapter

2

Research Methods for Business

32 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

2.4.2 Constructionism

A completely different approach to research and how research should be done is constructionism. Constructionism criticizes the positivist belief that there is an objective truth. Constructionists hold the opposite view, namely that the world (as we know it!) is fundamentally mental or mentally constructed. For this reason, con- structionists do not search for the objective truth. Instead, they aim to understand the rules people use to make sense of the world by investigating what happens in people’s minds. Constructionism thus emphasizes how people construct know- ledge; it studies the accounts people give of issues and topics and how people get to these accounts. Constructionists are particularly interested in how people’s views of the world result from interactions with others and the context in which they take place. The research methods of constructionist researchers are often qualitative in nature. Focus groups and unstructured interviews allow them to collect rich data, oriented to the contextual uniqueness of the world that is being studied. Indeed, constructionists are often more concerned with understanding a specific case than with the generalization of their findings. This makes sense from the viewpoint of the constructionist; there is no objective reality to generalize about.

2.4.3 Critical realism

Between these two opposed views on research and on how research should be done, there are many intermediary viewpoints. One of these viewpoints is critical realism. Critical realism is a combination of the belief in an external reality (an objective truth) with the rejection of the claim that this external reality can be objectively measured; observations (especially observations on phenomena that we cannot observe and measure directly, such as satisfaction, motivation, culture) will always be subject to interpretation. The critical realist is thus critical of our ability to understand the world with certainty. Where a positivist believes that the goal of research is to uncover the truth, the critical realist believes that the goal of research is to progress toward this goal, even though it is impossible to reach it. According to the critical realist viewpoint, measures of phenomena such as emotions, feelings, and attitudes are often subjective in nature and the collection of data is, generally speaking, imperfect and flawed. The critical realist also believes that researchers are inherently biased. They argue that we therefore need to use triangulation across multiple flawed and erroneous methods, observations, and researchers to get a better idea of what is happening around us.

2.4.4 Pragmatism

A final viewpoint on research that we will discuss here is pragmatism. Pragmatists do not take on a particular position on what makes good research. They feel that research on both objective, observable phenomena and subjective meanings can produce useful knowledge, depending on the research questions of the study. The focus of pragmatism is on practical, applied research where different viewpoints on research and the subject under study are helpful in solving a (business) problem. Pragmatism describes research as a process where concepts and meanings (the- ory) are generalizations of our past actions and experiences, and of interactions we have had with our environment. Pragmatists thus emphasize the socially construc- ted nature of research; different researchers may have different ideas about, and explanations for, what is happening around us. For the pragmatist, these different perspectives, ideas, and theories help us to gain an understanding of the world; pragmatism thus endorses eclecticism and pluralism. Another important feature of pragmatism is that it views the current truth as tentative and changing over time. In other words, research results should always be viewed as provisional truths. Pragmatists stress the relationship between theory and practice. For a pragmatist,

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 41

Chapter

2

The scientific approach and alternative approaches to investigation

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 33

theory is derived from practice (as we have just explained) and then applied back to practice to achieve intelligent practice. Along these lines, pragmatists see theories and concepts as important tools for finding our way in the world that surrounds us. For a pragmatist, the value of research lies in its practical relevance; the purpose of theory is to inform practice.

You may have asked yourself repeatedly, “Why do I need to know this?” One answer is that we believe that it is important for you to know that there is more than one viewpoint on what makes good research. Knowledge of epistemology may help you to relate to and understand the research of others and the choices that were made in this research. Different researchers have different ideas about the nature of knowledge or on how we come to know (indeed, the scientific approach to research is only one − albeit important − view on what “good” research is). These different ideas translate into different approaches that are taken to research, into different research designs, and into different choices regarding the research methods used.

Another answer to the question “Why do I need to know this?” is that you will probably have noticed that you prefer one research perspective over the other per- spectives. Understanding your personal ideas on research and how it should be done allows you to determine which kinds of research questions are important to you and what methods for collecting and analyzing data will give you the best answer to these questions. It will also help you to make informed decisions during the research process, to have a clear understanding about what the findings of your study (do and do not) mean, and to understand the type of conclusions that your research approach allows you to draw. Like this, it helps you to put your research and research findings in perspective.

In sum, your viewpoint on the nature of knowledge and on how we come to know will have a strong influence on the research questions you ask, your research design, and the research methods you will use. The rest of this book is primarily concerned with the development of research questions, research design, and research methods, and much less with the foregoing philosophical issues. However, it is important that every so often you consider the philosophical underpinnings of your research questions, your research design, and your research methods. This is important since the value of your research findings depends on how well they relate to the methods you have used, the design you have chosen, the questions you have asked, and the research perspective you have taken.

SUMMARY

In this chapter we obtained a general understanding of what constitutes scientific research and examined the hallmarks of scientific investigations. We also reviewed, with examples, the steps involved in the hypothetico-deductive method of study- ing a problem in order to solve it. We examined inductive and deductive reason- ing and found out why both induction and deduction are essential parts of the research process. We looked at some obstacles to conducting scientific research in the management area and alternative views on “what makes good research” and “how research should be done” (and we have also learned that the difficult word for this is epistemology). More specifically, positivism, constructionism, crit- ical realism, and pragmatism were discussed. In addition, we saw how the various research perspectives are related to the research questions asked, research design, and research methods. In the rest of this book these matters are discussed in more detail.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 42

Chapter

2

Research Methods for Business

34 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

Describe the hallmarks of scientific research.

What are the steps in hypothetico-deductive research? Explain them, using your own example.

One hears the word research being mentioned by several groups such as research organizations, college and university professors, doctoral students, graduate assistants working for faculty, graduate and undergraduate students doing their term papers, research departments in industries, newspaper reporters, journ- alists, lawyers, doctors, and many other professionals and nonprofessionals. In the light of what you have learned in this chapter, which among the aforemen- tioned groups of people do you think may be doing “scientific” investigations in the areas of basic or applied research? Why?

Explain the processes of deduction and induction, giving an example of each.

If research in the management area cannot be 100% scientific, why bother to do it at all? Comment on this question.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 43

Chapter

2

The scientific approach and alternative approaches to investigation

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 35

What is epistemology and why is it important to know about different perspect- ives on research and how it should be done?

Discuss the most important differences between positivism and construction- ism.

Is there a specific perspective on research that appeals to you? Why?

Critique the following research done in a service industry as to the extent to which it meets the hallmarks of scientific investigation discussed in this chapter.

The Friendly Telephone Company

Customer complaints were mounting, and letters of complaint detailing the problems they experienced with the residential telephone lines were constantly pouring in at the Friendly Telephone Company. The company wanted to pinpoint the specific problems and take corrective action.

Researchers were called in, and they spoke to a number of customers, noting the nature of the specific problems they faced. Because the problem had to be attended to very quickly, they developed a theoretical base, collected relevant detailed information from a sample of 100 customers, and analyzed the data. The results promise to be fairly accurate with at least an 85% chance of success in problem solving. The researchers will make recommendations to the company based on the results of data analysis.

Some people think that you should choose a particular research perspective based on the research questions of your study. Others feel that a particular research perspective “chooses” you. That is, they believe that you will have a

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 44

Chapter

2

Research Methods for Business

36 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

rather strong preference for one particular research perspective; in turn, this will have an influence on the type of questions you ask. How do you feel about this matter?

Comment on the following situation.

The dilemmas of Dorothy Dunning

Dorothy Dunning, Chief Production Manager, was on top of the world just two years ago. In her nontraditional job, she was cited to be the real backbone of the company, and her performance was in no small measure responsible for the mergers the institution was contemplating with other well-known global corporations.

Of late, though, the products of the company had had to be recalled several times owing to safety concerns. Quality glitches and production delays also plagued the company.

To project a good image to consumers, Dunning developed a very reassur- ing website and made sweeping changes in the manufacturing processes to enhance the quality of the product, minimize defects, and enhance the effi- ciency of the workers. A year after all these changes, the company continues to recall defective products!

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 45

Chapter

3

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 37

Chapter 3

The broad problem area and defining the problem statement

Topics discussed:

� The broad problem area

� Preliminary information gathering

� Defining the problem statement

� The research proposal

� Managerial implications

� Ethical issues in the preliminary stages of investigation

Chapter objectives

After completing Chapter 3 you should be able to:

1. Identify problem areas that are likely to be studied in organizations.

2. Discuss how problem areas can be identified in work settings.

3. State research problems clearly and precisely.

4. Explain how primary and secondary data help the researcher to develop a problem state- ment.

5. Develop a research proposal.

6. Apply all you have learned to a group project that might be assigned.

3.1 THE BROAD PROBLEM AREA

Earlier in this book we have described business research as a systematic and organ- ized effort to investigate a specific problem encountered in the work setting. Indeed, managers have to be alert and responsive to what is going on, both within their organization and in its environment in order to take effective decisions and develop effective courses of action. The origin of most research stems from the desire to get a grip on issues, concerns, and conflicts within the company or in its environment. In other words, research typically begins with a problem.

A “problem” does not necessarily mean that something is seriously wrong with a current situation that needs to be rectified immediately. A problem could also indicate an interest in an issue where finding the right answers might help to improve an existing situation. Thus, it is fruitful to define a problem as any situation where a gap exists between the actual and the desired ideal states. Box 3.1 provides examples of problems that the manager may encounter in the work setting.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 46

Chapter

3

Research Methods for Business

38 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

BOX 3.1: EXAMPLES OF PROBLEMS

1. Long and frequent delays lead to much frustration among airline passen- gers. These feelings may eventually lead to switching behavior, negative word-of-mouth communication, and customer complaints.

2. Staff turnover is higher than anticipated.

3. The current instrument for the assessment of potential employees for man- agement positions is imperfect.

4. Minority group members in organizations are not advancing in their careers.

5. The newly installed information system is not being used by the managers for whom it was primarily designed.

6. The introduction of flexible work hours has created more problems than it has solved.

7. Young workers in the organization show low levels of commitment to the organization.

Once we have identified the management problem, it needs to be narrowed down to a researchable topic for study. Very often much work is needed to translate the broad problem into a feasible research topic.

Problems versus symptoms of problems

It is very important that symptoms of problems are not defined as the real problem. For instance, a manager might have tried to increase productivity by increasing the piece rate, but with little success. Here the real problem may be the low morale and motivation of employees who feel they are not being recognized as valuable contributors to the system and get no “praise” for the good work that they do. The low productivity may merely be a symptom of the deep-rooted morale and motivation problem. Under these conditions, a higher piece rate will not improve productivity! Thus, finding the “right” answers to the “wrong” problem definitions will not help. Hence, it should be recognized that correct problem identification is extremely critical for finding solutions to vexing issues.

Frequently, managers tend to describe the problem in terms of symptoms. Rather than accepting it as such, the researcher needs to identify the problem more accurately. One way of determining that the problem, rather than the symptom, is being addressed is to ask the question (after gathering sufficient information through interviews and literature searches), “Is this factor I have identified an antecedent, the real problem, or the consequence?” These terms can be discussed in the context of the earlier example of low productivity. The real issue or problem here is low morale and motivation. The consequence of the problem is low productivity. Note that the consequence (or effect) of low motivation can also manifest itself in absenteeism, sabotage, or any number of other adverse effects for the firm. The real problem that needs to be addressed in this case, hence, is not productivity, but motivation. The antecedent of the problem (i.e., the contributing factor) in the given situation seems to be non- recognition of the employees’ contributions. Until such time as the employees are recognized for their work, their motivation and morale will not improve, nor will their productivity, as a consequence. Without addressing the central

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 47

Chapter

3

The broad problem area and defining the problem statement

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 39

issue, if more money is given, or better equipment installed to increase pro- ductivity, the desired results will not ensue because the right problem has not been addressed.

A feasible topic for research is specific and focused. For instance, “the introduction of flexible work hours has created more problems than it has solved” provides a nice starting point for a research project, but it lacks the specificity and focus needed to investigate it. We need to transform the broad problem into a feasible topic for research by making it more specific and precise, by choosing a well-defined subject to study, by setting clear boundaries. Once we have selected the specific focus of our study, we need to select a perspective from which we investigate the subject. The selection of an academic perspective on the problem allows us to draw upon a rich body of literature to help us to solve the problem. Consider the following problem: “Long and frequent delays lead to much frustration among airline passengers. These feelings may eventually lead to switching behavior, negative word-of-mouth com- munication, and customer complaints.” Prevailing knowledge on this issue suggests that service waits are typically controlled by two techniques: operations manage- ment (perspective 1) and management of perceptions (perspective 2). The selection of an academic perspective on the problem (for instance, management of percep- tions in the foregoing example of long and frequent delays) provides us with a vast body of knowledge that will help us to shape our own thinking and spark valuable insights on the issue.

How the selection of an academic perspective will help us to narrow down our research

The selection of a particular vantage point will help us to shape our thinking on an issue and to narrow down the problem into a feasible topic for research. For instance, marketing literature on customer perceptions of service may help us to dig deeper into the problem of long and frequent delays experienced by airline passengers and resulting feelings of frustration by providing us with, among other things:

• relevant definitions of customer satisfaction and service quality and an understanding of how these two types of customer perceptions are related;

• an overview of the effects of service quality and customer satisfaction on (behavioral) responses of consumers;

• an overview of strategies for managing perceptions of service.

This will help us to structure our thinking about this issue and to narrow down the problem to a clearly defined subject.

We have just explained how we can transform (read: narrow down) the broad prob- lem area into a feasible topic for research. Preliminary information gathering via interviews and a literature review will help us to make the necessary transforma- tions.

3.2 PRELIMINARY INFORMATION GATHERING

3.2.1 Nature of information to be gathered

Preliminary information gathering via introspection, unstructured interviews, struc- tured interviews, and/or a review through existing sources of information, such as

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 48

Chapter

3

Research Methods for Business

40 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

news articles, textbooks, conference proceedings, and the Internet, will help the researcher to narrow down the broad problem area and to define a specific problem statement. Although the exact nature of the information needed for this purpose depends on the type of problem one is addressing, it may be broadly classified under two headings:

1. Background information on the organization and its environment− that is, the contextual factors.

2. Literature − the body of knowledge available to you or what is already known and written down that is relevant to your research project.

Certain types of information, such as the background details of the company, can be obtained from available published records, the website of the company, its archives, and other sources. Other types of written information, such as company policies, procedures, and rules, can be obtained from the organization’s records and docu- ments. Data gathered through such existing sources are called secondary data. That is, secondary data are data that already exist and do not have to be collected by the researcher. Some secondary sources of data are statistical bulletins, government publications, published or unpublished information available from either within or outside the organization, data available from previous research, case studies and library records, online data, company websites, and the Internet in general. In contrast, certain other types of information are best obtained by observing events, people, and objects, or by administering questionnaires to individuals. Such data gathered for research from the actual site of occurrence of events are called primary data. The term primary data refers to information that the researcher gathers first hand through instruments such as surveys, interviews, focus groups, or observa- tion. It is often beneficial to simultaneously gather primary and secondary data. On the one hand, secondary data can help you to focus further interviews more meaningfully on relevant aspects found to be important in the literature. On the other hand, the interviews may help you to search for relevant topics in secondary sources.

Background information on the organization

It is important for the researcher or the research team − especially if an outside agency conducts the research − to be well acquainted with the background of the company or organization studied. Such background information might include, among other things, the contextual factors listed below, which may be obtained from various published sources.

1. The origin and history of the company − when it came into being, business it is in, rate of growth, ownership and control, and so on.

2. Size in terms of employees, assets, or both.

3. Charter− purpose and ideology.

4. Location− regional, national, or other.

5. Resources− human and others.

6. Interdependent relationships with other institutions and the external environ- ment.

7. Financial position during the previous five to ten years, and relevant financial data.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 49

Chapter

3

The broad problem area and defining the problem statement

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 41

8. Information on structural factors (for instance, roles and positions in the organ- ization and number of employees at each job level, communication channels, control systems, workflow systems).

9. Information on the management philosophy.

Information gathered on relevant contextual factors will be useful in talking know- ledgeably with managers and other employees in the company and raising the appropriate issues related to the problem. Along these lines, an understanding of these factors might be helpful in arriving at a precise problem formulation. Depend- ing on the situation, the type of problem investigated, and the nature of some initial responses received, certain aspects may have to be explored in greater depth than others.

Literature− the body of knowledge available to you

The literature− the body of knowledge available to you as a researcher−may also help you to think about and/or better understand the problem. A careful review of textbooks, journals, conference proceedings, and other published and unpublished materials (see Chapter 4 for a detailed discussion on how to review the literature) ensures that you have a thorough awareness and understanding of current work and viewpoints on the subject area. This helps you to:

• structure your research on work already done, or in other words to build on the foundation of existing knowledge;

• develop the problem statement with precision and clarity.

Note that you will have to spend time alternating between the literature and (re)defining the problem statement. Until you have developed a first tentative problem statement you cannot decide what information is useful. However, the awareness and understanding of current work and viewpoints in the subject area may change your view on what the problem is and encourage you to refine the problem statement; a more refined problem statement may trigger the need to col- lect further information which may inspire you to reframe the problem statement . . . and so on.

A first review of the literature also helps you to make an informed decision about your research approach, as exemplified in Box 3.2. In this example (of fundamental research) an exploratory research approach is used in order to provide insight into events that typically instigate customer anger in service settings.

BOX 3.2: INSPECTION OF THE LITERATURE ON THE ANTECEDENTS OF CUS- TOMER ANGER

Customer anger has been found to lead to negative word-of-mouth commu- nication and switching, above and beyond customer dissatisfaction (Bougie, Pieters & Zeelenberg, 2003; Dubé & Maute, 1996; Nyer, 1997; Taylor, 1994). Since it is also a common emotional response to failed services, it may have strong implications for the performance and profitability of service firms. For these reasons it is critical that service firms try to avoid customer anger.

To be able to avoid customer anger, service providers need to understand what events typically instigate this emotion in customers. Surprisingly, to date, we do not know much about instigations of customer anger. Although we know that core service failures (Dubé and Maute, 1996) and waiting for service (Folkes, Koletsky & Graham, 1987; Taylor, 1994) give rise to anger, systematic research

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 50

Chapter

3

Research Methods for Business

42 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

on the precipitating events of this emotion in service settings is absent. There- fore, this exploratory study investigates and categorizes events that typically instigate customer anger to fill this void. Thus it provides a conceptual model of anger instigation in services and guidelines for service firms on how to avoid customer anger.

Note that familiarity with the literature is beneficial in both an academic (or funda- mental) and a nonacademic (or applied) context. In both cases, a good theoretical base will add rigor to the study. We have explained earlier that rigorous research allows the researcher to collect the right kind of information with a minimum degree of bias, and facilitates suitable analysis of the data gathered. This is obvi- ously important in both fundamental and applied research.

3.3 DEFINING THE PROBLEM STATEMENT

After gathering preliminary information, the researcher is in a position to narrow down the problem from its original broad base and define the issues of concern more clearly. As we have explained earlier, it is critical that the problem statement is unambiguous, specific, and focused, and that the problem is addressed from a specific academic perspective. No amount of good research can find solutions to the situation if the critical issue or the problem to be studied is not clearly pinpointed.

3.3.1 What makes a good problem statement?

Visit your interactive ebook at www.wileyopenpage.com for Author Video: What makes a good problem statement?

A good problem statement includes both a statement of the research objective(s) and the research question(s). In Chapter 2 we have explained that good research has a purposive focus. Whereas the purpose of fundamental or basic research in business is related to expanding knowledge (of processes) of business and management in general, the aim of applied research is to solve a specific problem encountered in the work setting. Providing a solution to a problem encountered in the work setting is the purpose of the study in most applied research. For instance, a manager might be interested in determining the factors that increase employee commitment to the organization, since an increase in employee commitment may translate into lower staff turnover, less absenteeism, and increased performance levels, all of which will benefit the organization. The purpose or objective of the study thus explains why the study is being done. The statement of the research objective(s) should be brief, but nonetheless communicate clearly the focus of the project.

Examples of research objectives

• To find out what motivates consumers to buy a product online.

• To study the effect of leadership style on employees’ job satisfaction.

• To investigate the relationship between capital structure and profitability of the firm.

• To establish success factors regarding the adoption and use of information systems.

• To determine the optimal price for a product.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 51

Chapter

3

The broad problem area and defining the problem statement

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 43

• To investigate the influence of the in-store shopping environment on impulse buying.

• To establish the determinants of employee involvement.

• To understand the causes of employee absence.

Once the purpose of the study has been identified, one is able to formulate the research question(s) of the study. The inclusion of one or more research questions in the problem statement further clarifies the issue to be resolved. The research question(s) specify what you want to learn about the topic. They guide and structure the process of collecting and analyzing information to help you to attain the purpose of your study. In other words, research questions are the translation of the problem of the organization into a specific need for information. Box 3.3 provides an example of a problem statement. Note that both the research objective and the research questions of the study are detailed in this example.

BOX 3.3: EXAMPLE OF A PROBLEM STATEMENT CAA Airlines carries out charter and regular flights to medium-haul destinations− such as the Mediterranean, North Africa and the Red Sea − and to long-haul destinations such as the Caribbean. Today, CAA’s fleet consists of three (new) Boeing 737-800s and four (outdated) Boeing 767-300s. Because the Boeing 767s are rather outdated they need more maintenance than the average airplane. Despite an intensive maintenance program, these planes have a lot of technical problems. Consequently, the long-haul fleet of CAA has needed to deal with a lot of delays recently. New long-haul planes have been ordered, but these planes will not be delivered before 2016. This means that more delays will inevitably occur. This may translate into much frustration among airline passengers, to switching behavior, and to negative word-of-mouth communication. These feelings and behaviors of consumers may eventually have negative effects on the performance and the profitability of the firm.

Prior research has claimed that service waits can be controlled by two techniques: operations management and management of perceptions. For CAA Airlines it is very difficult to obtain “zero defects” (no delays). Hence, this project will focus on managing the perceptions of the wait experience: because CAA Airlines cannot control the actual amount of delays and the duration, the company must focus on managing the customers’ perception of the waiting experience. The purpose of this study is twofold: (1) to identify the factors that influence the passengers’ waiting experience and (2) to investigate the possible impact of waiting on customer satisfaction and service evaluations.

Therefore, this project focuses on the following research questions:

1. What are the factors that affect the perceived waiting experience of airline passengers and to what extent do these factors affect the perception of waiting times?

2. What are the affective consequences of waiting and how does affect mediate the relationship between waiting and service evaluations?

3. How do situational variables (such as filled time) influence customer reactions to the waiting experience?

Drawing from prior research in the areas of waiting, service evaluations, and mood theory, hypotheses are generated regarding the relationships among a delay, the waiting experience, affect, and service evaluations. The hypothesized relationships are tested in a field setting involving delayed CAA airline passengers.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 52

Chapter

3

Research Methods for Business

44 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

The foregoing problem statement addresses both the research objectives and the research questions of the study. Note that the research objective and the research questions are strongly related; it would have been impossible to adequately detail the research questions if the research objective had been unclear, unspecified, or ambiguous. What’s more, note that the research questions have been clarified to the extent that it is possible to relate them to existing literature in the areas of waiting, service evaluations, and mood theory. Hence, the broad problem area has been transformed into a researchable topic for study.

Box 3.4 summarizes the problem and the problem statement of the foregoing research project.

BOX 3.4: BUSINESS PROBLEM TRANSLATED INTO PROBLEM STATEMENT

Problem statement

Problem Research objective Research questions

Frequent and long delays may translate into much frustration among airline pas- sengers, to switching behavior, and to neg- ative word-of-mouth communication. These feelings and behaviors eventually have negat- ive effects on the per- formance and the prof- itability of the firm.

The purpose of this study is twofold: (1) to identify the factors that influence the passen- gers’ waiting experience and (2) to investigate the possible impact of waiting on customer satisfaction and service evaluations.

1. What are the factors that affect the perceived wait- ing experience of airline passen- gers and to what extent do these factors affect the perception of wait- ing times?

2. What are the affect- ive consequences of waiting and how does affect medi- ate the relationship between waiting and service evalu- ations?

3. How do situational variables (such as filled time) influ- ence customer reactions to the waiting experi- ence?

By now, it should be clear that a problem statement addresses both the “why” (the specific aim or purpose of the study) and the “what” (the central research question or a set of research questions) of the research. There are three key criteria to assess the quality of a problem statement: it should be relevant, feasible, and interesting.

A problem statement is relevant if it is meaningful from a managerial perspective, an academic perspective, or both. From a managerial perspective, research is relevant if it relates to (1) a problem that currently exists in an organizational setting or (2) an area that a manager believes needs to be improved in the organization. From an academic perspective, research is relevant if: (1) nothing is known about a topic, (2) much is known about the topic, but the knowledge is scattered and not

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 53

Chapter

3

The broad problem area and defining the problem statement

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 45

integrated, (3) much research on the topic is available, but the results are (partly) contradictory, or (4) established relationships do not hold in certain situations. If you base your research report on the “nothing is known” argument, you will have to prove that your claim is right. The observation that much is known about a topic, but that the knowledge is scattered and not integrated also provides a good basis for a research report. Your task is, however, a difficult one, since it is expected that you will present an integrated overview of the topic. A research project that aims to reconcile contradictory findings or to establish boundary conditions is also a real challenge.

A good problem statement is relevant but also feasible. A problem statement is feasible if you are able to answer the research questions within the restrictions of the research project. These restrictions are possibly related to time and money, but also to the availability of respondents, the expertise of the researcher (a problem statement may be too difficult to answer), and the like. A frequent problem in terms of feasibility is that the problem statement is too broad in scope. Indeed, it is important that you develop a narrowly defined research question that can be investigated within a reasonable amount of time, and with a reasonable amount of money and effort. For instance, the problem statement “How do consumers behave?” is far too general to investigate.

A third characteristic of a good problem statement is that it is interesting to you. Research is a time-consuming process and you will go through many ups and downs before you present the final version of your research report. It is therefore vital that you are genuinely interested in the problem statement you are trying to answer, so that you can stay motivated throughout the entire research process.

Well-defined research questions

1. To what extent do the structure of the organization and type of information systems installed account for the variance in the perceived effectiveness of managerial decision making?

2. To what extent has the new advertising campaign been successful in creat- ing the high-quality, customer-centered corporate image that it was inten- ded to produce?

3. How has the new packaging affected the sales of the product?

4. Has the new advertising message resulted in enhanced recall?

5. How do price and quality rate on consumers’ evaluation of products?

6. Is the effect of participative budgeting on performance moderated by con- trol systems?

7. Does better automation lead to greater asset investment per dollar of out- put?

8. Does expansion of international operations result in an enhancement of the firm’s image and value?

9. What are the effects of downsizing on the long-range growth patterns of companies?

10. What are the specific factors to be considered in creating a data warehouse for a manufacturing company?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 54

Chapter

3

Research Methods for Business

46 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

When you have defined the problem statement you are ready to start your research. First, however, you need to communicate the problem statement and a number of other important aspects of the study− such as the scope of the study, the procedures to be followed, the time frame, and the budget− to all the parties involved.

3.4 THE RESEARCH PROPOSAL

Before any research study is undertaken, there should be an agreement between the person who authorizes the study and the researcher as to the problem to be investigated, the methodology to be used, the duration of the study, and its cost. This ensures that there are no misunderstandings or frustrations later for either party. This is usually accomplished through a research proposal, which the researcher submits and gets approved by the sponsor, who issues a letter of authorization to proceed with the study.

The research proposal drawn up by the investigator is the result of a planned, organized, and careful effort, and basically contains the following:

1. A working title.

2. Background of the study.

3. The problem statement:

a. The purpose of the study

b. Research questions.

4. The scope of the study.

5. The relevance of the study.

6. The research design, offering details on:

a. Type of study− exploratory, descriptive, and/or causal

b. Data collection methods

c. The sampling design

d. Data analysis.

7. Time frame of the study, including information on when the written report will be handed over to the sponsors.

8. The budget, detailing the costs with reference to specific items of expenditure.

9. Selected bibliography.

Such a proposal containing the above features is presented to the manager, who might seek clarification on some points, want the proposal to be modified in certain respects, or accept it in toto. A model of a simple research proposal to study the frequent turnover of newly recruited employees is presented below.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 55

Chapter

3

The broad problem area and defining the problem statement

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 47

Model 3.1: Research proposal to study retention of new employees

Purpose of the study

To find a solution to the recurring problem of 40% employee turnover within the first three years of their recruitment, and more specifically to:

1. Draw up a profile of the employees who quit;

2. Assess if there are any special needs of the new recruits that require to be met; and

3. Determine the reasons for employees leaving the organization in the first three years.

Research question

How can small to medium-sized firms increase the organizational commitment of their employees?

Scope of the study

This research analyzes the problem of high turnover of employees within small to medium-sized firms.

Relevance of the study

The cost of employee turnover to firms has been estimated to be up to 150% of the employees’ remuneration package (Schlesinger & Heskett, 1991). There are both direct and indirect costs involved. Direct costs relate to leaving costs, replacement costs, and transition costs, while indirect costs relate to the loss of production, reduced performance levels, unnecessary overtime, and low morale. The results of this study provide managers with the means to decrease the costs of employee turnover.

The research design (i.e., details of the study)

Survey instruments. First, we will interview a small number of employees who have joined the company in the previous three years. Based on these exploratory findings, we will administer a questionnaire to all of the employees who have joined the company in the past three years.

Data collection. The interviews will be conducted during office hours in the conference hall of the organization at a prearranged time convenient to the interviewees. The questionnaire will be given to the employees to be completed by them in their homes and returned anonymously to the box set up for the purpose by the specified date. They will all be reminded two days before the due date to return their questionnaires, if not already done.

Time frame

The time frame necessary for completion of this research project is approxim- ately five months. During these five months, periodic reports will be provided on the progress being made.

Budget

The budget for this project is in Appendix A.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 56

Chapter

3

Research Methods for Business

48 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Selected bibliography

Bateman, T. S. & Strasser, S. (1984) A longitudinal analysis of the antecedents of organizational commitment. The Academy of Management Journal, 27(1), 95−112.

Lachman, L. & Aranya, N. (1986) Evaluation of alternative models of commit- ments and job attitudes of professionals. Journal of Occupational Behavior, 7, 227−243.

Meyer, J. & Allen, N. (1997) Commitment in the Workplace: Theory, research and application. Thousand Oaks: Sage.

Meyer, J., Stanley, D., Herscovitch, L. & Topolnytsky, L. (2002) Affective, continu- ance and normative commitment: a meta-analysis of antecedents, correlates and consequences. Journal of Vocational Behavior, 63, 20−52.

Schlesinger, L. & Heskett, J. (1991) The service-driven service company. Harvard Business Review, 69, 71−81.

Vandenberghe, C., Bentein, K. & Stinglhamber, F. (2002) Affective commitment to the organization, supervisor and work group: antecedents and outcomes. Journal of Vocational Behavior, 64, 47−71.

Once the proposal is accepted, the researcher conducts the research, going through the appropriate steps discussed in the research design process.

3.5 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS

Managers sometimes look at the symptoms in problematic situations and treat them as if they are the real problems, getting frustrated when their remedies do not work. Understanding the antecedents−problem−consequences sequence and gathering the relevant information to get a real grasp of the problem go a long way towards pinpointing it.

Managers’ inputs help researchers to define the broad problem area and confirm their own theories about the situational factors impacting the central problem. Managers who realize that correct problem definition is critical to ultimate prob- lem solution do not begrudge the time spent in working closely with researchers, particularly at this stage.

A well-developed research proposal allows managers to judge the relevance of the proposed study. However, to make sure that the objectives of the study are actu- ally being achieved, managers must stay involved throughout the entire research process. Information exchange between the manager and the researcher during all the important stages of the research process will definitely enhance the managerial relevance and the quality of the research effort.

3.6 ETHICAL ISSUES IN THE PRELIMINARY STAGES OF INVESTIGATION

Preliminary information is gathered by the researcher to narrow the broad problem area and to define a specific problem statement. In many cases, the researcher interviews decision makers, managers, and other employees to gain knowledge of the situation so as to better understand the problem. Once a problem is specified and a problem statement is defined, the researcher needs to assess his or her research capabilities; if the researcher does not have the skills or resources to carry out the project, he or she should decline the project. If the researcher decides to carry out

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 57

Chapter

3

The broad problem area and defining the problem statement

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 49

the project, it is necessary to inform all the employees− particularly those who will be interviewed for preliminary data gathering through structured and unstructured interviews−of the proposed study (though it is not necessary to acquaint them with the actual reasons for the study, because this might bias responses). The element of unpleasant surprise will thus be eliminated for the employees. It is also necessary to assure employees that their responses will be kept confidential by the interviewer/s and that individual responses will not be divulged to anyone in the organization. These two steps make the employees comfortable with the research undertaken and ensure their cooperation. Employees should not be forced to participate in the study. When employees are willing to participate in the study, they have the right to be protected from physical or psychological harm. They also have a right to privacy and confidentiality. Attempts to obtain information through deceptive means should be avoided at all costs.

Checklist for dealing with ethical considerations and dilemmas during the first stages of the research process

• Why is this research project worth doing?

• How does the organization benefit from this project?

• What impact, if any, does your research have on the organization?

• Do you have the skills and resources to carry out this research project?

• Have you informed all the employees of the research project? Why not?

• Do you explain the purpose of your research to the participants? Why not?

• Are participants given the opportunity to decline participation?

• Are participants able to withdraw their consent at any point? How?

• Does the research cause you to have access to sensitive information? How will you ensure the confidentiality of this information?

• How will you ensure individual respondents cannot be identified from any research reports or papers that are produced?

• Are there any possible negative effects (long or short term) on your parti- cipants (including any physical or psychological harm)?

• How will you report back from the research to your participants?

• Where ethical dilemmas have arisen, what steps have you taken to resolve these?

SUMMARY

In this chapter we learned about the first steps in the research process: identifying the broad problem area, defining the problem statement, and the development of a research proposal. We have defined a problem as any situation where a gap exists between the actual and the desired ideal state. We have explained that very often much work is needed to translate the broad problem into a feasible topic for research. The process of narrowing down the broad problem area into a specific research topic is typically referred to as preliminary information gathering. Pre- liminary information gathering through interviews and a literature review is key to

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 58

Chapter

3

Research Methods for Business

50 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

defining the problem statement. After a discussion on what makes a good prob- lem statement, we ended this chapter by describing the functions and format of the research proposal. In Chapter 4 we will examine the next step in the research process: the critical literature review.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

Explain the preliminary data collection methods.

Why is it important to gather information on the background of the organiza- tion?

Should a researcher always obtain information on the structural aspects and job characteristics from those interviewed? Give reasons for your answer with examples.

“The problem definition stage is perhaps more critical in the research process than the problem solution stage.” Discuss this statement.

Why should one get hung up on problem definition if one already knows the broad problem area to be studied?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 59

Chapter

3

The broad problem area and defining the problem statement

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 51

Offer a clearly focused problem statement in the broad area of corporate culture.

Below is the gist of an article from BusinessWeek. After reading it:

While Chrysler’s minivans, pickups, and sport utility vehicles take a big share of the truck market, its cars trail behind those of GM, Ford, Honda, and Toyota. Quality problems include, among other things, water leaks and defective parts.

identify the broad problem area

explain how you would proceed further.

Define the problem statement (the why and the what) in the following situation:

Employee loyalty

Companies benefit through employee loyalty. Crude downsizing in organ- izations during the recession crushed the loyalty of millions. The economic benefits of loyalty embrace lower recruitment and training costs, higher pro- ductivity of workers, customer satisfaction, and the boost to morale of fresh recruits. In order that these benefits are not lost, some companies, while downsizing, try various gimmicks. Flex leave, for instance, is one. This helps employees receive 20% of their salary, plus employer-provided benefits, while they take a 6- to 12-month sabbatical, with a call option on their services. Others try alternatives like more communication, hand holding, and the like.

How would you define the broad problem in the following case?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 60

Chapter

3

Research Methods for Business

52 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Accounting gets radical

The GAAP (Generally Accepted Accounting Principles) do an unacceptable job of accounting for the principal activities of information age companies. Today, investors are in the dark because the accounting is irrelevant. The basic purpose of accounting is to provide useful information to help investors make rational investment, credit, and similar decisions, but today’s most important assets and activities − intellectual capital and work knowledge − are totally ignored.

Professor Robert A. Howell wants to reform the accounting system with the goal of making clear the measurement of how companies produce cash and create value.

PRACTICE PROJECTS

Visit the following websites and answer the questions below.

Visit IBM www.ibm.com and

Ford www.ford.com

What similarities and differences do you notice?

Visit Intel www.intel.com

Microsoft www.microsoft.com and

Apple www.apple.com

Write a paragraph on each of these companies.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 61

Chapter

3

The broad problem area and defining the problem statement

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 53

Gain access to the online system in your library and (a) generate a list of the references that relate to the performance of General Motors and (b) obtain the abstracts of these studies.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 62

Chapter

4

54 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Chapter 4

The critical literature review

Topics discussed:

� The purpose of a critical literature review

� How to approach the literature review

� Ethical issues

� Appendix:

F Some online resources useful for business research

F Bibliographical databases

F APA format for referencing relevant articles

F Referencing and quotation in the literature review section

Chapter objectives

After completing Chapter 4 you should be able to:

1. Understand that an essential feature of scientific research is that it is associated with the work of others.

2. Discuss the functions of a literature review.

3. Develop relevant and comprehensive bibliographies for any organizational research topic.

4. Write a literature review on any given topic, documenting the references in the prescribed manner.

5. Discuss the ethical issues of documenting the literature review.

6. Apply all you have learned to a group project that might be assigned.

In Chapter 3, we explained that a first review of the academic literature will help you to narrow down the broad problem and to develop a clear and specific problem statement. But mere definition of the problem does not solve it. How, then, does one proceed further? One answer is by going through the entire process as shown in the research process model in Figure 4.1. This figure illustrates that the next step, after you have developed a research proposal, is the critical literature review. This step is designated step 4 and it is indicated by the shaded portion in the figure. In this chapter we shall discuss the critical literature review in some depth.

A second review of the literature, or critical literature review, is essential in most research projects. A literature review is “the selection of available documents (both published and unpublished) on the topic, which contain information, ideas, data and evidence written from a particular standpoint to fulfill certain aims or express certain views on the nature of the topic and how it is to be investigated, and the effective evaluation of these documents in relation to the research being proposed” (Hart, 1998, p. 13). A critical literature review has many functions. Some of these functions depend on the specific research approach that is taken. In both inductive and deductive research, a review of the literature will help to develop a conceptual or

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 63

Chapter

4

The critical literature review

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 55

Figure 4.1 The research process and where this chapter fits in

theoretical background. A conceptual or theoretical background discusses the liter- ature pertinent to the specific issue or problem. Relevant findings, methodological issues, and major conclusions of earlier and more recent work are put forward, the logical continuity between earlier and more recent work is clarified, and controver- sial issues, when relevant, are addressed. This will allow the researcher to account for the selection of the research approach that is taken (that is for instance induct- ive or deductive in nature). In deductive research, a literature review will also help the researcher you to develop a theoretical framework and hypotheses (discussed in Chapter 5). In inductive research, you do not develop a theoretical framework. A review of the literature will thus help the researcher to get familiar with relev- ant knowledge related to the problem that one aims to solve. It will also help the researcher to look at a problem from a specific angle, thus shaping one’s thinking, and will undoubtedly spark many useful insights on the research topic. For this reason, a critical review of the literature is vital in nearly all research projects. Next, the various functions of the critical literature review are discussed in detail.

4.1 THE PURPOSE OF A CRITICAL LITERATURE REVIEW

A literature review is a step-by-step process that involves the identification of pub- lished and unpublished work from secondary data sources on the topic of interest, the evaluation of this work in relation to the problem, and the documentation of this work. In the previous chapter, we have explained how a first literature review helps the researcher to develop a good problem statement and to build on relevant knowledge developed by others. In this chapter, we will discuss the functions of the second review of the literature, often referred to as the critical literature review, in more detail.

A critical literature review ensures that no important variable that has in the past been found repeatedly to have had an impact on the problem is ignored in the

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 64

Chapter

4

Research Methods for Business

56 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

research project. Indeed, it is possible that some of the critical variables are never brought out in the preliminary data gathering stage, either because the interviewees cannot articulate them or are unaware of their impact, or because the variables seem so obvious to the interviewees that they are not specifically stated. If there are variables that are not identified during the interviews but influence the problem critically, then research done without considering them is an exercise in futility. In such a case, the true reason for the problem will remain unidentified even at the end of the research. To avoid such possibilities the researcher needs to delve into all the important research relating to the particular problem area.

Along these lines, a critical review of the literature provides researchers with a framework for their own work; this includes the identification and definition of the relevant concepts related to the study and an explanation of how and why these relevant concepts are related to each other. A review of the literature thus allows the researcher to introduce relevant terminology and to provide guiding definitions of the concepts in the theoretical framework (see Box 4.1 for an example). What’s more, it enables the researcher to provide arguments for the relationships between the variables in a conceptual model. A good literature review thus provides the foundation for developing a comprehensive theoretical framework from which hypotheses can be developed for testing.

In addition, a literature review provides the researcher with a good idea of the research methods that others have used to provide an answer to their research questions. Knowledge of the research methods used thus allows the researcher to replicate methods, which will save both time and effort. Finally, it helps the research to relate the research findings to the findings of others, and thus to contextualize the research in a wider academic debate.

The exact purpose of a critical literature review depends on the research approach that is taken. In general, a literature review ensures that:

1. The research effort is positioned relative to existing knowledge and builds on this knowledge.

2. One does not run the risk of “reinventing the wheel”; that is, wasting effort on trying to rediscover something that is already known.

3. The background is available to enable you to look at a problem from a specific angle, to shape your thinking, and to spark useful insights on the topic of your research.

4. A clearer idea emerges as to what variables will be important to consider, why they are considered important, and how they should be investigated to solve the problem.

5. The researcher is able to introduce relevant terminology and to provide guiding definitions of the concepts in the theoretical framework (see Box 4.1 for an example).

6. The researcher is able to provide arguments for the relationships between the variables in a conceptual model.

7. Testability and replicability of the findings of the current research are enhanced.

8. The research findings are related to the findings of others.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 65

Chapter

4

The critical literature review

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 57

BOX 4.1: DEFINING WAITING FOR SERVICE

Waiting for service refers to the time between the point a customer is ready to receive a service and the point the service starts (Taylor, 1994). A customer may have to wait before, during, or after a transaction. In other words, there are three kinds of waits: pre-process waits, in-process waits, and post-process waits (Dubé-Rioux, Schmitt & LeClerc 1988; Miller, Kahn & Luce, 2008). To make these different kinds of waits more concrete, imagine you are flying with an airline from point A to B. You may have to wait before you can board the plane (a pre-process wait), because the plan cannot land (an in-process wait), and because you cannot disembark immediately (a post-process wait).

4.2 HOW TO APPROACH THE LITERATURE REVIEW

The first step of a literature review involves the identification of the various pub- lished and unpublished materials that are available on the topic of interest, and gaining access to these.

4.2.1 Data sources

The quality of a literature review depends on a cautious selection and reading of books, academic and professional journals, reports, theses, conference proceedings, unpublished manuscripts, and the like. Academic books and journals are, in general, the most useful sources of information. However, other sources such as professional journals, reports, and even newspapers may also be valuable because they can provide you with specific, real-world information about markets, industries, or companies. Therefore, as a rule, you will need to use a combination of information resources. The precise combination of resources depends on the nature and the objectives of your research project.

Textbooks

Textbooks are a useful source of theory in a specific area. An advantage of textbooks is that they can cover a broad range of topics. What’s more, textbooks can cover a topic much more thoroughly than articles can. Hence, textbooks offer a good starting point from which to find more detailed sources such as journal articles, theses, and unpublished manuscripts. A downside of textbooks is that they tend to be less up to date than journals.

Journals

Both academic and professional journals are important sources of up-to-date information. Articles in academic journals have generally been peer-reviewed: this means that the articles have been subject to the scrutiny of experts in the same field before being accepted for publication. Review articles (that may or may not contain a meta-analysis: a type of data analysis in which the results of several studies are combined and analyzed as if they were the results of one large study) summarize previous research findings to inform the reader of the state of existing research. Review articles are very useful because they provide an overview of all the import- ant research in a specific area. Research articles are reports of empirical research, describing one or a few related studies. The conceptual background section of a research article provides a compact overview of relevant literature. Research art- icles also provide a detailed description of the purpose of the study, the method(s) used, and the results of the study.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 66

Chapter

4

Research Methods for Business

58 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Articles in professional journals are a valuable source of recent developments in the field and of facts and figures. What’s more, they may provide you with a feel for the practical relevance of a problem.

Theses

PhD theses often contain an exhaustive review of the literature in a specific area. Most PhD theses include several empirical chapters. These chapters often have the same structure and characteristics as academic journal articles. Note that not every empirical chapter of a thesis is eventually published in an academic journal.

Conference proceedings

Conference proceedings can be useful in providing the latest research, or research that has not (yet) been published. Conference proceedings are very up to date, and for this reason this information source is quite valuable if you are working in a relatively new area or domain. Not every manuscript presented at a conference is eventually published in an academic journal; hence you must critically assess the quality of this information source.

Unpublished manuscripts

The APA defines an unpublished manuscript as any information source that is not “officially” released by an individual, publishing house, or other company. Examples of unpublished manuscripts may include papers accepted for publication but still “in press,” data from an unpublished study, letters, manuscripts in preparation, and personal communications (including e-mails). Unpublished manuscripts are often very up to date.

Reports

Government departments and corporations commission or carry out a large amount of research. Their published findings provide a useful source of specific market, industry, or company information.

Newspapers

Newspapers provide up-to-date business information. They are a useful source of specific market, industry, or company information. Note that opinions in newspa- pers are not always unbiased.

The Internet

The amount of information that can be found on the World Wide Web is enormous. You can search for (the details of) books, journals and journal articles, and con- ference proceedings, as well as for specialized data such as company publications and reports. The number of newspapers, magazines, and journals that is available electronically is growing rapidly.

Note that the Internet is unregulated and unmonitored. Moreover, developing an Internet page is easy and cheap. For this reason, the Internet provides exceptional challenges in determining the usefulness and reliability of information. A source that may help you to assess the quality of online information is Cooke (2001). You can also find useful information on the Internet itself; several universities have developed useful guidelines to assess the quality of information found online (check, for instance, www.lib.berkeley.edu/TeachingLib/Guides/Evaluation.html).

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 67

Chapter

4

The critical literature review

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 59

Search engines such as Google and Yahoo! can help you to find relevant information. For instance, Google Scholar, which can be accessed from the Google homepage, can help you to identify academic literature, such as peer-reviewed papers, theses, books, abstracts, and articles from academic publishers, universities, and other scholarly organizations.

4.2.2 Searching for literature

You will benefit from spending some time on becoming familiar with the online resources that your library provides. Most libraries have the following electronic resources at their disposal:

• Electronic journals. Your library is probably subscribed to journals that are pub- lished or made available online. Discover which journals are provided online by your library.

• Full-text databases. Full-text databases provide the full text of the article. Find out which full-text databases are provided by your library.

• Bibliographic databases. Bibliographic databases display only the bibliographic citations; that is, the name of the author, the title of the article (or book), source of publication, year, volume, and page numbers. These contain the same information as can be found in the Bibliographic Index books in libraries, which are periodically updated, and include articles published in periodic- als, newspapers, books, and so on. Some useful indexes are provided in the appendix to this chapter.

• Abstract databases. Abstract databases also provide an abstract or summary of articles. They do not provide the full text of an article or manuscript.

Some of these databases are listed in the appendix at the end of this chapter. Some important research databases available on the World Wide Web are also provided in the appendix. Databases include, among others, listings of journal articles, books in print, census data, dissertation abstracts, conference papers, and newspaper abstracts that are useful for business research.

4.2.3 Evaluating the literature

Accessing the online system and searching for literature in the area of interest will provide a comprehensive bibliography on the subject. Because the search for literature can sometimes provide as many as 100 or more results, you will have to carefully select relevant books and articles.

A glance at the titles of the articles or books will indicate which of them may be pertinent and which others are likely to be peripheral to the contemplated study. The abstract of an article usually provides an overview of the study purpose, general research strategy, findings, and conclusions. A good abstract thus provides you with enough information to help you to decide whether an article is relevant for your study. An article’s introduction also provides an overview of the problem addressed by the research and specific research objectives. The introduction often ends with a summary of the research questions that guide the study. The problem statement, research questions, and/or the research objectives give you a feel for what the researcher is studying and thus for the relevance of the article to your study. In a similar fashion, the table of contents and the first chapter of a book may help you to assess the relevance of the book.

A good literature review needs to include references to the key studies in the field. For this reason, articles and books that are often cited by others must be included

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 68

Chapter

4

Research Methods for Business

60 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

in your literature review, even if these articles and books were written 30 or even 40 years ago. Of course, more recent work should also be incorporated in your literature survey, since recent work will build on a broader and more up-to-date stream of literature than older work.

To assess the quality of recent research (indeed, in this case you cannot use the number of citations as an indicator of the quality of an article) you could ask the following questions:

• Is the main research question or problem statement presented in a clear and analytical way?

• Is the relevance of the research question made transparent?

• Does this study build directly upon previous research?

• Will the study make a contribution to the field?

• Is there a theory that guides the research?

• Is the theory described relevant and is it explained in an understandable, struc- tured, and convincing manner?

• Are the methods used in the study explained in a clear manner (description of methods)?

• Is the choice of certain methods motivated in a convincing way (justification of methods)?

• Is the sample appropriate?

• Are the research design and/or the questionnaire appropriate for this study?

• Are the measures of the variables valid and reliable?

• Has the author used the appropriate quantitative and/or qualitative tech- niques?

• Do the conclusions result from the findings of the study?

• Do the conclusions give a clear answer to the main research question?

• Has the author considered the limitations of the study?

• Has the author presented the limitations in the article?

The quality of the journal that published an article can also be used as an indicator of the quality of an article. Important questions in this respect are: “Is the journal peer-reviewed; that is, do all articles have to undergo a review process before they are published?” and “What is the impact factor of the journal?” The impact factor of a journal can be viewed as the average number of citations in a year given to those papers in the journal that were published during a given period (usually the two preceding years). Because important articles are cited more often than articles that are not important, the impact factor of a journal is frequently used as a proxy for the importance of that journal to its field.

In sum, some criteria for assessing the value of articles or books are: the relevance of the issues that are addressed in the article or book, the importance of a book or article in terms of citations, the year of publication of the article or book, and the overall quality of the article or book.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 69

Chapter

4

The critical literature review

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 61

All the articles considered relevant to your study can be listed as references, using the appropriate referencing format, which is discussed in the appendix to this chapter.

4.2.4 Documenting the literature review

As stated earlier, the purpose of the literature review is to help the researcher to build on the work of others. A review of the literature identifies and highlights the important variables, and documents the significant findings from earlier research that will serve as the foundation on which the theoretical framework for the current investigation can be built. Documenting the literature review is important to con- vince the reader that (1) the researcher is knowledgeable about the problem area and has done the preliminary homework that is necessary to conduct the research, and (2) a theoretical framework (in deductive research) will be structured on work already done and will add to the solid foundation of existing knowledge.

A point to note is that the literature survey should bring together all relevant inform- ation in a cogent and logical manner instead of presenting all the studies in chro- nological order with bits and pieces of uncoordinated information.

There are several accepted methods of citing references in the literature survey section and using quotations. The Publication Manual of the American Psycholo- gical Association (2009) offers detailed information regarding citations, quotations, references, and so on, and is one of the accepted styles of referencing in the manage- ment area. Other formats include The Chicago Manual of Style (2010) and Turabian’s Manual for Writers (2007). As stated earlier, details of the referencing style and quo- tations based on the APA Manual are offered in the appendix at the end of this chapter.

To conclude, let us take a portion of a completed literature review and examine how the activity has helped to (1) introduce the subject of study, (2) identify the problem statement, and (3) build on previous research to offer the basis from which to get to the next steps of the theoretical framework and hypothesis development.

Organizational effectiveness

Organization theorists have defined organizational effectiveness (OE) in vari- ous ways. OE has been described in terms of objectives (Georgopolous & Tannenbaum, 1957), goals (Etzioni, 1960), efficiency (Katz & Kahn, 1966), resources acquisition (Yuchtman & Seashore, 1967), employee satisfaction (Cummings, 1977), interdependence (Pfeffer, 1977), and organizational vitality (Colt, 1995). As Coulter (2002) remarked, there is little consensus on how to conceptualize, measure, or explain OE. This should, however, not come as a surprise to us since OE models are essentially value-based classifications of the construct (the values being those of the researchers) and the potential number of models that can be generated by researchers is virtually limitless. Research- ers are now moving away from a single model and are taking contingency approaches to conceptualizing OE (Cameron, 1996; Wernerfelt, 1998; Yetley, 2001). However, they are still limiting themselves to examining the impact of the dominant constituencies served and the organization’s life cycle on OE instead of taking a broader, more dynamic approach (Dahl, 2001, p. 25).

From the above extract, several insights can be gained. The literature review (1) introduces the subject of study (organizational effectiveness), (2) highlights the problem (that we do not have a good conceptual framework for understanding what OE is), and (3) summarizes the work done so far on the topic in a manner

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 70

Chapter

4

Research Methods for Business

62 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

that convinces the reader that the researcher has indeed surveyed the work done in the area of OE and wants to contribute to the understanding of the concept, taking off on the earlier contingency approaches in a more creative way. The scholar has carefully paved the way for the next step, which is to develop a more viable and robust model of organizational effectiveness. This model will be logically developed, integrating several streams of research done in other areas (such as cross-cultural management, sociology, etc.), which will be woven further into the literature review. Once the scholar has explicated the framework as to what constitutes OE and what the factors that influence it are, the next step is to develop testable hypotheses to see if the new model is indeed viable.

4.3 ETHICAL ISSUES

Earlier in this chapter we have explained that research involves building on the work of others. When you summarize, add to, or challenge the work of others, there are two important pitfalls that you have to beware of:

1. Purposely misrepresenting the work of other authors− that is, their viewpoints, ideas, models, findings, conclusions, interpretations, and so on;

2. Plagiarism− the use of another’s original words, arguments, or ideas as though they were your own, even if this is done in good faith, out of carelessness, or out of ignorance.

Both purposely misrepresenting the work of others and plagiarism are considered to be fraud.

In today’s information age, copying and pasting information from online sources into your own research paper has become very simple. This may create a tempta- tion to copy (significant) portions of text into your work. Your task is to resist this temptation. Plagiarism is a type of fraud that is taken very seriously in the academic world, mainly because using the work of others as if it were your own does not convey much respect for the efforts that other people have put into their work. Two other reasons to take plagiarism very seriously are provided by IJzermans and Van Schaaijk (2007). They point out that:

1. Plagiarism makes it is difficult for the reader to verify whether your claims about other authors and sources are accurate.

2. You are participating in a scientific debate. You need to make your position in this debate clear by designating the authors whose work you are building on or whose ideas you are challenging.

There are many forms of plagiarism above and beyond copying and pasting text into your own work. Box 4.2 provides an overview of common forms of plagiarism. This overview may help you to avoid the pitfall of plagiarism.

BOX 4.2: COMMON FORMS OF PLAGIARISM

Sources not cited

1. “The Ghost Writer” The writer turns in another’s work, word-for-word, as his or her own.

2. “The Photocopy” The writer copies significant portions of text straight from a single source, without alteration.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 71

Chapter

4

The critical literature review

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 63

3. “The Potluck Paper” The writer tries to disguise plagiarism by copying from several different sources, tweaking the sentences to make them fit together while retaining most of the original phrasing.

4. “The Poor Disguise” Although the writer has retained the essential content of the source, he or she has altered the paper’s appearance slightly by changing key words and phrases.

5. “The Labor of Laziness” The writer takes the time to paraphrase most of the paper from other sources and make it all fit together, instead of spending the same effort on original work.

6. “The Self-Stealer” The writer “borrows” generously from his or her previous work, violating policies concerning the expectation of originality adopted by most aca- demic institutions.

Sources cited (but still plagiarized)

1. “The Forgotten Footnote” The writer mentions an author’s name for a source, but neglects to include specific information on the location of the material referenced. This often masks other forms of plagiarism by obscuring source locations.

2. “The Misinformer” The writer provides inaccurate information regarding the sources, making it impossible to find them.

3. “The Too-Perfect Paraphrase” The writer properly cites a source, but neglects to put in quotation marks text that has been copied word-for-word, or close to it. Although attrib- uting the basic ideas to the source, the writer is falsely claiming original presentation and interpretation of the information.

4. “The Resourceful Citer” The writer properly cites all sources, paraphrasing and using quotations appropriately. The catch? The paper contains almost no original work! It is sometimes difficult to spot this form of plagiarism because it looks like any other well-researched document.

5. “The Perfect Crime” Well, we all know it doesn’t exist. In this case, the writer properly quotes and cites sources in some places, but goes on to paraphrase other arguments from those sources without citation. This way, the writer tries to pass off the paraphrased material as his or her own analysis of the cited material.

Reprinted with permission from: What is Plagiarism? (n.d.), retrieved June 22, 2011, from www.plagiarism.org/learning_center/what_is_plagiarism.html.

Note that many universities use software such as Turnitin or Ephorus to detect pla- giarism. To avoid plagiarism you need to observe the rules for referencing sources, detailed in the appendix of this chapter. You may also benefit from examining the plagiarism guidelines of your own university or from checking out the integ- rity handbook of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology at the following URL: http://web.mit.edu/academicintegrity/handbook/handbook.pdf.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 72

Chapter

4

Research Methods for Business

64 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

SUMMARY

In this chapter we discussed the critical literature review. We started this chapter by describing various functions of the literature review. Subsequently, we discussed various aspects of carrying out the literature review: data sources, searching for literature, evaluating the literature, and documenting the literature review. Finally, we discussed two pitfalls you have to be aware of when you summarize, add to, or challenge the work of others: misrepresenting the work of others and plagiarism. The appendix to this chapter offers information on (1) online databases, (2) bibli- ographical indexes, (3) the APA format for references, and (4) notes on referencing previous studies and quoting original sources in the literature review section.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

What is the purpose of a critical literature review?

How would you go about doing a literature review in the area of corporate social responsibility?

Why is appropriate citation important? What are the consequences of not giving credit to the source from which materials are extracted?

After studying and extracting information from all the relevant work done pre- viously, how does the researcher know which particular references, articles, and information should be given prominence in the literature review?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 73

Chapter

4

The critical literature review

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 65

PRACTICE PROJECT

Do the project assigned below, following the step-by-step process outlined:

Compile a bibliography on any one of the following topics, or any other topic of interest to you, from a business perspective: (a) service quality; (b) product development; (c) open-market operations; (d) information systems; (e) manu- facturing technology; (f) assessment centers; (g) transfer pricing.

From this bibliography, select five to seven references that include books, aca- demic journals, and professional journals.

Based on these five to seven references, write a literature review using different forms of citation, as described in the appendix.

APPENDIX

SOME ONLINE RESOURCES USEFUL FOR BUSINESS RESEARCH

Online databases

Databases contain raw data stored in a variety of ways. Computerized databases can be purchased that deal with statistical data, financial data, texts, and the like. Computer network links allow the sharing of these databases, which are updated on a regular basis. Most university libraries have computerized databases pertaining to business information that can be readily accessed. Some of the databases useful for business research are listed below:

1. ABI/INFORM Global and ABI/INFORM provide the capability to search most major business, management, trade and industry, and scholarly journals from 1971 onward. The information search can be made by keying in the name of the author, periodical title, article title, or company name. Full texts from the

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 74

Chapter

4

Research Methods for Business

66 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

journals and business periodicals are also available on CD-ROM and electronic services.

2. The Business Periodicals Index (BPI) provides an index of business and man- agement periodicals, and is available online and on CD-ROM.

3. Dow Jones Factiva products and services provide business news and informa- tion. The collection of more than 14 000 sources includes the Wall Street Journal, Financial Times, Dow Jones and Reuters newswires, and the Associated Press, as well as Reuters Fundamentals, and D&B company profiles.

4. EconLit is a comprehensive index of journal articles, books, book reviews, collective volume articles, working papers, and dissertations.

5. The International Bibliography of the Social Sciences (IBSS) is an online resource for social science and interdisciplinary research. IBSS includes over 2.5 million bibliographic records relating to the four core social science subjects of anthropology, economics, politics, and sociology.

6. PsycINFO is an abstract database of psychological literature from the 1800s to the present. PsycINFO contains bibliographic citations, abstracts, cited refer- ences, and descriptive information of scholarly publications in the behavioral and social sciences.

7. RePEc (Research Papers in Economics) is a collaborative effort of volunteers in 63 countries to enhance the dissemination of research in economics. The heart of the project is a decentralized database of working papers, journal articles, and software components.

The following databases can also be accessed through the Internet: Business and Industry Database,∗Guide to Dissertation Abstracts, Guide to Newspaper Abstracts, Periodicals Abstract, Social Science Citation Index, STAT-USA, Conference Board Cumulative Index (covers publications in business, finance, personnel, marketing, and international operations).

Note: A cumulated annotated index to articles on accounting and in business peri- odicals arranged by subject and by author is also available. The Lexis-Nexis Universe provides specific company and industry information including company reports, stock information, industry trends, and the like.

On the Web

Some of the many websites useful for business research that can be accessed through a browser such as Internet Explorer are provided below.

General

Bureau of Census: www.census.gov

Business Researcher’s Interests: www.brint.com/interest.html

BusinessWeek Online: www.businessweek.com. The journal BusinessWeek online from 1995 until now.

Includes information on whether the company is private or public, description of business, company∗

organization and management, product lines and brand names, financial information, stock and bond

prices and dividends, foreign operations, marketing and advertising, sales, R&D, and articles available

on the company in newspapers and periodicals.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 75

Chapter

4

The critical literature review

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 67

China & World Economy: www.iwep.org.cn/wec

Company Annual Reports: www.annualreports.com

Economic Journals on the web: www.oswego.edu/˜economic/journals.htm

Euromoney Publications: www.euromoney.com/contents/publications/euromoney. The journal Euromoney online from 1995 until now. Registration required.

Eurostat: http://epp.eurostat.ec.europa.eu/portal/page?_pageid=1090, 30070682, 1090_ 33076576&_dad=portal&_schema=PORTAL. Eurostat is the site of the Statist- ical Office of the European Community. It provides direct access to the latest and most complete statistical information available on the European Union, the EU members, the euro-zone, and other countries.

Forbes Magazine: www.forbes.com/forbes. The journal Forbes Magazine online from August 1997 until now.

FT.com. TotalSearch: http://news.ft.com/home/europe. FT.com’s TotalSearch gives you access to more than ten million free newspaper and magazine articles alongside results gathered from leading online news sources. TotalSearch also incorporates a definitive web guide in association with Business.com, a leader in business website classification. You can search in the Financial Times, the Guardian, and Wall Street Journal from 1996 until now, or you can refine your search for the Finanical Times only.

Harvard Business School Publishing: www.hbsp.harvard.edu

I.O.M.A.: www.ioma.com/ioma/direct.html. This site links to business resources that include financial management, legal resources, small business, human resources, and Internet marketing.

List of Economics Journals: http://netec.mcc.ac.uk/WebEc/journals.html

STAT-USA: www.stat-usa.gov

Wall Street Executive Library: www.executivelibrary.com. Business sites on news- papers, magazines, government, financial markets, company and industry, law, marketing and advertising, statistics, etc.

Wall Street Journal: http://online.wsj.com/public/us

Accounting

ARN: www.ssrn.com/arn/index.html. The Accounting Research Network (ARN) was founded to increase communication among scholars and practitioners of account- ing worldwide. ARN encourages the early distribution of research results by pub- lishing abstracts of top quality research papers in three journals: Auditing, Litiga- tion and Tax Abstracts, Financial Accounting Abstracts, and Managerial Accounting Abstracts. The journals publish abstracts of articles dealing with empirical, experi- mental, and theoretical research in financial and managerial accounting, auditing, and tax strategy. ARN is a division of the Social Science Research Network (SSRN).

BUBL link to accounting: http://bubl.ac.uk/link/a/accountinglinks.htm. Links to accounting resources, companies, departments, societies, and journals.

Internal Auditing World Wide Web (IAWWW): www.bitwise.net/iawww. A ware- house of information and knowledge pertaining to the internal auditing profession and functions across all associations, industries, and countries.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 76

Chapter

4

Research Methods for Business

68 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Business and management

Academy of Management: www.aomonline.org

ASTD home page: www.astd.org. The ASTD (American Society for Training and Development) has information on shifting paradigms from training to performance.

Bnet: www.bnet.co.uk. Bnet is a richly interconnected knowledge bank containing information and learning materials about business and management. It is organized to deliver a wide range of information on essential skills and recommended good practice in business and management.

Business information on the Internet: www.rba.co.uk/sources. A selection of key business information sites on the Internet, compiled by Karen Blakeman.

Business information on the Internet: www.crosscut.net/research/business.html. Using the Internet for college research, maintained by Terry Dugas.

Corporate Information: www.corporateinformation.com. Starting point to find cor- porate information from around the world.

European Business Directory: www.europages.com/home-en.html

Fortune: www.fortune.com. Also contains the Fortune 500 List (500 American com- panies and 500 global companies with financial data and their home pages).

GlobalEDGE: http://globaledge.msu.edu/ibrd/ibrd.asp. A directory of international business resources categorized by specific orientation and content. Each resource has been selected and reviewed by the globalEDGE TM Team.

Kompass: www.kompass.com. Addresses and business information of 1.5 million companies worldwide.

Latest management research and practice: www.mcb.co.uk/lmrp/jourhome.htm. Internet journal (site also includes Internet links) produced by MCB University Press which is composed of articles on management previously published in other MCB University Press journals. All articles are available in full text in the Adobe Acrobat PDF format; 1996 onwards (approx. ten issues a year).

Moreover: www.moreover.com. Moreover Technologies provides companies with real-time news and information from every online source that impacts their busi- ness.

Society for Human Resource Management: www.shrm.org

Wall Street Central: www.wscentral.com. An access point for all kinds of information on companies and financial markets.

Wall Street Executive Library: www.executivelibrary.com. Business sites on news- papers, magazines, government, financial markets, company and industry, law, marketing and advertising, statistics, etc.

Financial economics

CNN financial network: http://money.cnn.com

FEN: www.ssrn.com/fen/index.html. The Financial Economic Network (FEN) is a division of the Social Science Research Network (SSRN).

FINWeb: http://finweb.com/. FINWeb is a financial economics website managed by James R. Garven. The primary objective of FINWeb is to list Internet resources

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 77

Chapter

4

The critical literature review

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 69

providing substantive information concerning economics and finance-related top- ics.

MFFAIS: www.mffais.com. Mutual Fund Facts About Individual Stocks. A reference site that shows you (among other things) which and how many mutual funds sold shares in a specific company. And the only one that lists more than just the top ten fundholders of a company.

Standard & Poor’s Micropal: www.micropal.com. A detailed and free service ana- lyzing funds from all major markets.

Marketing

Academic marketing journals: www.tilburguniversity.nl/faculties/feb/marketing/ links/journal1.html

Current research in marketing: www.bauer.uh.edu/parks/crim/crim0000.htm.

KnowThis: www.knowthis.com. Marketing virtual library, offering an objective and unbiased resource for marketing basics, market research, Internet marketing, mar- keting plans, advertising, and much more.

Marketing links: www.tilburguniversity.nl/faculties/feb/organisation/dept/mar/links. Collected by Tilburg University, Department of Marketing & Marketing Research.

BIBLIOGRAPHICAL DATABASES

The following indexes help in compiling a comprehensive bibliography on business topics.

1. Bibliographic Index. A cumulative bibliography of bibliographies − an index that lists, by subject, sources of bibliographies.

2. Business Books in Print. This indexes, by author, title, and business subject, the books in print in the areas of finance, business, and economics.

3. Business Periodicals Index. This is a cumulative subject index covering 270 business periodicals.

4. Management Information Guide. This offers bibliographic references in many business areas.

5. Human Resource Management Abstracts. This is an index of articles that deal with the management of people and the subject area of organizational behavior.

6. Psychological Abstracts. This summarizes the literature in psychology, cover- ing several hundred journals, reports, monographs, and other scientific docu- ments.

7. Public Affairs Information Service Bulletin. This has a selective subject index of books, yearbooks, directories, government documents, pamphlets, and over a thousand periodicals relating to national and international economic and public affairs.

8. Work Related Abstracts. This contains abstracts of articles, dissertations, and books relating to labor, personnel, and organizational behavior.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 78

Chapter

4

Research Methods for Business

70 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

APA FORMAT FOR REFERENCING RELEVANT ARTICLES

A distinction has to be made between a bibliography and references. A bibliography is a listing of work that is relevant to the main topic of research interest arranged in alphabetical order of the last names of the authors. A reference list is a subset of the bibliography, which includes details of all the citations used in the literature review and elsewhere in the paper, arranged, again, in alphabetical order of the last names of the authors. These citations have the goals of crediting the authors and enabling the reader to find the works cited.

At least three modes of referencing are followed in business research. These are based on the format provided in the Publication Manual of the American Psycholo- gical Association (APA) (2009), the Chicago Manual of Style (2010), and the Turabian style (2007). Each of these manuals specifies, with examples, how books, journals, newspapers, dissertations, and other materials are to be referenced in manuscripts. Since the APA format is followed for referencing by many journals in the manage- ment area, we will use this below to highlight the distinctions in how books, journals, newspaper articles, dissertations, and so on, are referenced. In the following section we will discuss how these references should be cited in the literature review section. All the citations mentioned in the research report will find a place in the References section at the end of the report.

Specimen format for citing different types of references

Book by a single author

Leshin, C.B. (1997). Management on the World Wide Web. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Book by more than one author

Cornett, M., Wiley, B.J., & Sankar, S. (1998). The pleasures of nurturing. London: McMunster Publishing.

More than one book by the same author in the same year

Roy, A. (1998a) Chaos theory. New York: Macmillan Publishing Enterprises.

Roy, A. (1998b). Classic chaos. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-Bass.

Edited book

Pennathur, A., Leong, F.T., & Schuster, K. (Eds.) (1998). Style and substance of think- ing. New York: Publishers Paradise.

Chapter in an edited book

Riley, T., & Brecht, M.L. (1998). The success of the mentoring process. In R.Williams (Ed.), Mentoring and career success, pp. 129−150. New York: Wilson Press.

Book review

Nichols, P. (1998). A new look at Home Services [Review of the book Providing Home Services to the Elderly by Girch, S.] Family Review Bulletin, 45, 12−13.

Journal article

Jeanquart, S., & Peluchette, J. (1997). Diversity in the workforce and management models. Journal of Social Work Studies, 43 (3), 72−85.

Deffenbacher, J.L., Oetting, E.R., Lynch, R.S., & Morris, C.D. (1996). The Expression of Anger and its Consequences. Behavior Research and Therapy, 34, 575−590.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 79

Chapter

4

The critical literature review

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 71

Journal article in press

Van Herpen, E., Pieters, R., & Zeelenberg, M. (2009). When Demand Accelerates Demand: Trailing the Bandwagon, Journal of Consumer Psychology, in press.

Conference proceedings publication

Yeshwant, M. (1998). Revised thinking on Indian philosophy and religion. In S.Pennathur (Ed.), Proceedings of the Ninth International Conference on Religion, (pp. 100−107). Bihar, India: Bihar University.

Doctoral dissertation

Kiren, R.S. (1997). Medical advances and quality of life. Unpublished doctoral dis- sertation, Omaha State University.

Paper presentation at conference

Bajaj, L.S. (1996, March 13). Practical tips for efficient work management. Paper presented at the annual meeting of Entrepreneurs, San Jose, CA.

Unpublished manuscript

Pringle, P.S. (1991). Training and development in the ’90s. Unpublished manuscript, Southern Illinois University, Diamondale, IL.

Newspaper article, no author

The new GM pact. (1998, July 28). Concord Tribune, p. 1.

Referencing non-print media

Film

Maas, J.B. (Producer), & Gluck, D.H. (Director). (1979). Deeper into hypnosis (film). Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall.

Cassette recording

Clark, K.B. (Speaker). (1976). Problems of freedom and behavior modification (Cas- sette Recording No. 7612). Washington, DC: American Psychological Association.

Electronic source

Author, I. (1998). Technology and immediacy of information [Online] Available at http://www.bnet.act.com

Online document, no author identified, no date

GVU’s 18th WWW customer survey. (n.d.), retrieved March 24, 2009, from http://www.bb.gotech.edu/gvu/user-surveys/survey-2008-10/

Report from private organization, available on organization’s website

Philips UK. (2009, March 23). U.S. Department of Energy honors Philips for significant advancement in LED lighting. Retrieved March 24th, 2009, from http://www.philips.co.uk/index.page

Message posted to online forum or discussion group

Davitz, J.R. (2009, February, 21). How medieval and renaissance nobles were differ- ent from each other [Msg 131]. Message posted to http://groups.yahoo.com/group/Medieval_Saints/message/131

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 80

Chapter

4

Research Methods for Business

72 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

REFERENCING AND QUOTATION IN THE LITERATURE REVIEW SECTION

Cite all references in the body of the paper using the author−year method of citation; that is, the surname of the author(s) and the year of publication are given in the appropriate places. Examples of this are as follows:

1. Todd (1998) has shown . . .

2. In recent studies of dual-career families (Hunt, 1999; Osborn, 1998) it has been . . .

3. In 1997, Kyle compared dual-career and dual-earner families and found that . . .

As can be seen from the above, if the name of the author appears as part of the narrative as in the case of (a), the year of publication alone has to be cited in paren- theses. Note that in case (b), both the author and the year are cited in parentheses, separated by a comma. If the year and the author are a part of the textual discussion as in (c) above, the use of parentheses is not warranted.

Note also the following:

1. Within the same paragraph, you need not include the year after the first citation so long as the study cannot be confused with other studies cited in the article. An example of this is:

−Gutek (1985) published her findings in the book entitled Sex and the Work Place. Gutek indicated . . .

2. When a work is authored by two individuals, always cite both names every time the reference occurs in the text.

3. When a work has more than two authors but fewer than six authors, cite all authors the first time the reference occurs, and subsequently include only the surname of the first author followed by “et al.” as per the example below:

− Sekaran, Martin, Trafton, and Osborn (1980) found . . . (first citation) Sekaran et al. (1980) found . . . (subsequent citations)

4. When a work is authored by six or more individuals, cite only the surname of the first author followed by et al. and the year for the first and subsequent citations. Join the names in a multiple-author citation in running text by the word and. In parenthetical material, in tables, and in the reference list, join the names by an ampersand (&). Examples are given below.

− As Tucker and Snell (1989) pointed out . . .

− As has been pointed out (Tucker & Snell, 1989), . . .

5. When a work has no author, cite in text the first two or three words of the article title. Use double quotation marks around the title of the article. For example, while referring to the newspaper article cited earlier, the text might read as follows:

−While examining unions (“With GM pact,” 1990), . . .

6. When a work’s author is designated as “Anonymous,” cite in text the word Anonymous followed by a comma and the date: (Anonymous, 1979). In the reference list, an anonymous work is alphabetized by the word Anonymous.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 81

Chapter

4

The critical literature review

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 73

7. When the same author has several works published in the same year, cite them in the same order as they occur in the reference list, with the in press citations coming last. For example:

− Research on the mental health of dual-career family members (Sekaran, 1985a, 1985b, 1985c, 1999, in press) indicates . . .

8. When more than one author has to be cited in the text, these should be in the alphabetical order of the first author’s surname, and the citations should be separated by semicolons as per the illustration below:

− In the job design literature (Aldag & Brief, 1976; Alderfer, 1972; Beatty, 1982; Jeanquart, 1998), . . .

9. Personal communication through letters, memos, telephone conversations, and the like, should be cited in the text only and not included in the reference list since these are not retrievable data. In the text, provide the initials as well as the surname of the communicator together with the date, as in the following example:

− L. Peters (personal communication, June 15, 1998) feels . . .

In this section we have seen different modes of citation. We will next see how to include quotations from others in the text.

Quotations in text

Quotations should be given exactly as they appear in the source. The original word- ing, punctuation, spelling, and italics must be preserved even if they are erroneous. The citation of the source of a direct quotation should always include the page number(s) as well as the reference.

Use double quotation marks for quotations in text. Use single quotation marks to identify the material that was enclosed in double quotation marks in the original source. If you want to emphasize certain words in a quotation, underline them and immediately after the underlined words, insert within brackets the words: italics added. Use three ellipsis points ( . . . ) to indicate that you have omitted material from the original source. See the example that follows below.

If the quotation is of more than 40 words, set it in a free-standing style starting on a new line and indenting the left margin a further five spaces. Type the entire quotation double spaced on the new margin, indenting the first line of paragraphs five spaces from the new margin, as shown below.

In trying to differentiate dual-earner and dual-career families, Sekaran (1986) states:

Various terms are used to refer to dual-earner families: dual-worker families, two-paycheck families, dual-income families, two-job families, and so on. Spouses in dual-earner families may both hold jobs, or one of the partners may hold a job while the other pursues a career . . .

The distinction between dual-career and dual-earner families also gets blurred when spouses currently holding jobs are preparing themselves both educa- tionally and technically to move up in their organization. (p. 4)

If you intend publishing an article in which you have quoted extensively from a copyrighted work, it is important that you seek written permission from the owner of the copyright. Make sure that you also footnote the permission obtained with respect to the quoted material. Failure to do so may result in unpleasant consequences, including legal action taken through copyright protection laws.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 82

Chapter

5

74 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Chapter 5

Theoretical framework and hypothesis development

Topics discussed:

� The need for a theoretical framework

� Variables

� Theoretical framework

� Hypothesis development

� Hypothesis testing with qualitative research: negative case analysis

� Managerial implications

Chapter objectives

After completing Chapter 5 you should be able to:

1. Identify and label variables associated with any given situation.

2. Trace and establish the links among the variables and evolve a theoretical framework.

3. Develop a set of hypotheses to be tested and state them in the null and the alternate form.

4. Apply what has been learned to a research project.

After a critical review of the literature you are ready to develop a theoretical frame- work. A theoretical framework is the foundation of hypothetico-deductive research as it is the basis of the hypotheses that you will develop. Indeed, the development of a theoretical framework is crucial in deductive, theory-testing, causal research (but not in inductive, theory-testing research where one does not develop such a framework).

As you proceed through this chapter, in various places you are instructed to work through certain exercises. Doing them at that time, before reading further, will help you in becoming adept at formulating theoretical frameworks in a logical manner without getting confused.

5.1 THE NEED FOR A THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK

A theoretical framework represents your beliefs on how certain phenomena (or variables or concepts) are related to each other (a model) and an explanation of why you believe that these variables are associated with each other (a theory). Both the model and the theory flow logically from the documentation of previous research in the problem area. Integrating your logical beliefs with published research, taking into consideration the boundaries and constraints governing the situation, is pivotal in developing a scientific basis for investigating the research problem.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 83

Chapter

5

Theoretical framework and hypothesis development

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 75

The process of building a theoretical framework includes:

1. Introducing definitions of the concepts or variables in your model.

2. Developing a conceptual model that provides a descriptive representation of your theory.

3. Coming up with a theory that provides an explanation for relationships between the variables in your model.

From the theoretical framework, then, testable hypotheses can be developed to examine whether your theory is valid or not. The hypothesized relationships can thereafter be tested through appropriate statistical analyses. Hence, the entire deductive research project rests on the basis of the theoretical framework. Even if testable hypotheses are not necessarily generated (as in some applied research projects), developing a good theoretical framework is central to examining the prob- lem under investigation.

Since the theoretical framework offers the conceptual foundation to proceed with the research, and since a theoretical framework involves nothing more than identi- fying the network of relationships among the variables considered important to the study of any given problem situation, it is essential to understand what a variable means and what the different types of variables are.

5.2 VARIABLES

A variable is anything that can take on differing or varying values. The values can differ at various times for the same object or person, or at the same time for different objects or persons. Examples of variables are production units, absenteeism, and motivation.

EXAMPLE

Production units: One worker in the manufacturing department may produce one widget per minute, a second might produce two per minute, a third might produce five per minute. It is also possible that the same member might produce one widget the first minute and five the next minute. In both cases, the number of widgets produced has taken on different values, and is therefore a variable.

Absenteeism: Today, three members in the sales department may be absent; tomorrow, six members may not show up for work; the day after, there may be no one absent. The value can thus theoretically range from “zero” to “all” being absent, on the absenteeism variable.

Motivation: The levels of motivation of members to learn in the class or in a work team might take on varying values ranging from “very low” to “very high.” An individual’s motivation to learn from different classes or in different work teams might also take on differing values. Now, how one measures the level of motivation is an entirely different matter. The factor called motivation has to be reduced from its level of abstraction and operationalized in such a way that it becomes measurable. We will discuss this in Chapter 11.

Four main types of variables are discussed in this chapter:

1. The dependent variable (also known as the criterion variable).

2. The independent variable (also known as the predictor variable).

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 84

Chapter

5

Research Methods for Business

76 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

3. The moderating variable.

4. The mediating variable.

Variables can be discrete (e.g., male/female) or continuous (e.g., the age of an indi- vidual). Scale levels of variables are discussed inChapter 12. Extraneous variables that confound cause-and-effect relationships are discussed in Chapter 10 on Exper- imental Designs. In this chapter we will primarily concern ourselves with the four types of variables listed above.

5.2.1 Dependent variable

The dependent variable is the variable of primary interest to the researcher. The researcher’s goal is to understand and describe the dependent variable, or to explain its variability, or predict it. In other words, it is the main variable that lends itself for investigation as a viable factor. Through the analysis of the dependent variable (i.e., finding what variables influence it), it is possible to find answers or solutions to the problem. For this purpose, the researcher will be interested in quantifying and measuring the dependent variable, as well as the other variables that influence this variable.

EXAMPLE

A manager is concerned that the sales of a new product, introduced after test marketing it, do not meet with his expectations. The dependent variable here is “sales.” Since the sales of the product can vary− they can be low, medium, or high − it is a variable; since sales is the main focus of interest to the manager, it is the dependent variable.

A basic researcher is interested in investigating the debt-to-equity ratio of man- ufacturing companies in southern Germany. Here, the dependent variable is the ratio of debt to equity.

A vice president is concerned that the employees are not loyal to the organiza- tion and, in fact, seem to switch their loyalty to other institutions. The depend- ent variable in this case is “organizational loyalty.” Here again, there is variance found in the levels of organizational loyalty of employees. The vice president might want to know what accounts for the variance in the loyalty of organiz- ational members with a view to controlling it. If he finds that increased pay levels would ensure their loyalty and retention, he can then offer inducement to employees by way of pay rises, which will help control the variability in organizational loyalty and keep them in the organization.

It is possible to have more than one dependent variable in a study. For example, there is always a tussle between quality and volume of output, low-cost production and customer satisfaction, and so on. In such cases, the manager is interested to know the factors that influence all the dependent variables of interest and how some of them might differ in regard to different dependent variables. These investigations may call for multivariate statistical analyses.

Now do Exercise 5.1 and Exercise 5.2.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 85

Chapter

5

Theoretical framework and hypothesis development

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 77

Exercise 5.1

Research in behavioral finance has shown that overconfidence can cause investors to underreact to new information.

What is the dependent variable in this case?

Exercise 5.2

A marketing manager believes that limiting the availability of a product increases product desirability.

What is the dependent variable here?

5.2.2 Independent variable

It is generally conjectured that an independent variable is one that influences the dependent variable in either a positive or negative way. That is, when the inde- pendent variable is present, the dependent variable is also present, and with each unit of increase in the independent variable, there is an increase or decrease in the dependent variable. In other words, the variance in the dependent variable is accounted for by the independent variable. To establish that a change in the inde- pendent variable causes a change in the dependent variable, all four of the following conditions should be met:

1. The independent and the dependent variable should covary: in other words, a change in the dependent variable should be associated with a change in the independent variable.

2. The independent variable (the presumed causal factor) should precede the dependent variable. In other words, there must be a time sequence in which the two occur: the cause must occur before the effect.

3. No other factor should be a possible cause of the change in the dependent variable. Hence, the researcher should control for the effects of other variables.

4. A logical explanation (a theory) is needed and it must explain why the inde- pendent variable affects the dependent variable.

Because of the time sequence condition, experimental designs, described in Chapter 10, are often used to establish causal relationships.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 86

Chapter

5

Research Methods for Business

78 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

EXAMPLE

Research studies indicate that successful new product development has an influence on the stock market price of the company. That is, the more success- ful the new product turns out to be, the higher will be the stock market price of that firm. Therefore, the “success of the new product” is the independent vari- able, and “stock market price” the dependent variable. The degree of perceived success of the new product developed will explain the variance in the stock market price of the company. This relationship and the labeling of the variables are illustrated in Figure 5.1.

Figure 5.1 Diagram of the relationship between the independent variable (new product success) and the dependent variable (stock market price)

Cross-cultural research indicates that managerial values govern the power dis- tance between superiors and subordinates. Here, power distance (i.e., egalit- arian interactions between the boss and the employee, versus the high-power superior in limited interaction with the low-power subordinate) is the subject of interest and hence the dependent variable. Managerial values that explain the variance in power distance comprise the independent variable. This rela- tionship is illustrated in Figure 5.2.

Figure 5.2 Diagram of the relationship between the independent variable (managerial values) and the dependent variable (power distance)

Now do Exercise 5.3 and Exercise 5.4. List the variables in these two exercises indi- vidually, and label them as dependent or independent, explaining why they are so labeled. Create diagrams to illustrate the relationships.

Exercise 5.3

An investor believes that more information increases the accuracy of his fore- casts.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 87

Chapter

5

Theoretical framework and hypothesis development

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 79

Exercise 5.4

A marketing manager believes that selecting physically attractive spokesper- sons and models to endorse their products increases the persuasiveness of a message.

5.2.3 Moderating variable

The moderating variable is one that has a strong contingent effect on the inde- pendent variable−dependent variable relationship. That is, the presence of a third variable (the moderating variable) modifies the original relationship between the independent and the dependent variables. This becomes clear through the follow- ing examples.

EXAMPLE

It has been found that there is a relationship between the availability of refer- ence manuals that manufacturing employees have access to and the product rejects. That is, when workers follow the procedures laid down in the manual, they are able to manufacture products that are flawless. This relationship is illustrated in Figure 5.3(a). Although this relationship can be said to hold true generally for all workers, it is nevertheless contingent on the inclination or urge of the employees to look in the manual every time a new procedure is to be adopted. In other words, only those who have the interest and urge to refer to the manual every time a new process is adopted will produce flawless products. Others who do not consult the manual will not benefit and will continue to produce defective products. This influence of the attributes of the worker on the relationship between the independent and the dependent variables can be illustrated as shown in Figure 5.3(b).

As in the above case, whenever the relationship between the independent variable and the dependent variable becomes contingent or dependent on another vari- able, we say that the third variable has a moderating effect on the independent variable−dependent variable relationship. The variable that moderates the rela- tionship is known as the moderating variable.

EXAMPLE

Let us take another example of a moderating variable. A prevalent theory is that the diversity of the workforce (comprising people of different ethnic ori- gins, races, and nationalities) contributes more to organizational effectiveness because each group brings its own special expertise and skills to the work- place. This synergy can be exploited, however, only if managers know how to harness the special talents of the diverse work group; otherwise they will remain untapped. In the above scenario, organizational effectiveness is the

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 88

Chapter

5

Research Methods for Business

80 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

(a) Diagram of the relationship between the independent variable (availability of reference

manuals) and the dependent variable (rejects); (b) diagram of the relationship between the

independent variable (availability of reference materials) and the dependent variable (rejects) as

moderated by the moderating variable (interest and inclination)

Figure 5.3

dependent variable, which is positively influenced by workforce diversity− the independent variable. However, to harness the potential, managers must know how to encourage and coordinate the talents of the various groups to make things work. If not, the synergy will not be tapped. In other words, the effective utilization of different talents, perspectives, and eclectic problem-solving cap- abilities for enhanced organizational effectiveness is contingent on the skill of the managers in acting as catalysts. This managerial expertise then becomes the moderating variable. These relationships can be depicted as in Figure 5.4

Figure 5.4 Diagram of the relationship among the three variables: workforce diversity, organizational effectiveness, and managerial expertise

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 89

Chapter

5

Theoretical framework and hypothesis development

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 81

The distinction between an independent variable and a moderating variable

At times, confusion is likely to arise as to when a variable is to be treated as an independent variable and when it becomes a moderating variable. For instance, there may be two situations as follows:

1. A research study indicates that the better the quality of the training programs in an organization and the greater the growth needs of the employees (i.e., where the need to develop and grow on the job is strong), the greater is their willingness to learn new ways of doing things.

2. Another research study indicates that the willingness of the employees to learn new ways of doing things is not influenced by the quality of the training pro- grams offered by the organizations to all people without any distinction. Only those with high growth needs seem to have the yearning to learn to do new things through specialized training.

In the above two situations, we have the same three variables. In the first case, the training programs and growth need strength are the independent variables that influence employees’ willingness to learn, this latter being the dependent variable. In the second case, however, the quality of the training program is the independent variable, and while the dependent variable remains the same, growth need strength becomes a moderating variable. In other words, only those with high growth needs show a greater willingness and adaptability to learn to do new things when the quality of the training program is improved. Thus, the relationship between the independent and dependent variables has now become contingent on the existence of a moderator.

The above illustration makes it clear that even though the variables used are the same, the decision as to whether to label them dependent, independent, or moder- ating depends on how they affect one another. The differences between the effects of the independent and the moderating variables may be visually depicted as in Figure 5.5(a) and (b). Note the steep incline of the top line and the relative flatness of the bottom line in Figure 5.5(b).

(a) Illustration of the influence of independent variables on the dependent variable when no moder-

ating variable operates in the situation; (b) illustration of the influence of independent variables on

the dependent variable when a moderating variable is operating in the situation

Figure 5.5

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 90

Chapter

5

Research Methods for Business

82 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Now do Exercise 5.5 and Exercise 5.6. List and label the variables in these two exercises and explain and illustrate by means of diagrams the relationships among the variables.

Exercise 5.5

A manager finds that off-the-job classroom training has a great impact on the productivity of the employees in her department. However, she also observes that employees over 60 years of age do not seem to derive much benefit and do not improve with such training.

Exercise 5.6

A manager of an insurance company finds that “fear appeals” in commercials are positively associated with consumers’ behavioral intentions to insure their house. This effect is particularly strong for people with a high inherent level of anxiety.

5.2.4 Mediating variable

A mediating variable (or intervening variable) is one that surfaces between the time the independent variables start operating to influence the dependent variable and the time their impact is felt on it. There is thus a temporal quality or time dimension to the mediating variable. In other words, bringing a mediating variable into play helps you to model a process. The mediating variable surfaces as a function of the independent variable(s) operating in any situation, and helps to conceptualize and explain the influence of the independent variable(s) on the dependent variable. The following example illustrates this point.

EXAMPLE

In the previous example, where the independent variable (workforce diversity) influences the dependent variable (organizational effectiveness), the mediat- ing variable that surfaces as a function of the diversity in the workforce is “creative synergy.” This creative synergy results from a multiethnic, multiracial, and multinational (i.e., diverse) workforce interacting and bringing together their multifaceted expertise in problem solving. This helps us to understand

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 91

Chapter

5

Theoretical framework and hypothesis development

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 83

how organizational effectiveness can result from having diversity in the work- force. Note that creative synergy, the mediating variable, surfaces at time t2, as a function of workforce diversity, which was in place at time t1, to bring about organizational effectiveness in time t3. The mediating variable of creat- ive synergy helps us to conceptualize and understand how workforce diversity brings about organizational effectiveness. The dynamics of these relationships are illustrated in Figure 5.6.

Figure 5.6 Diagram of the relationship among the independent, mediating, and dependent variables

It would be interesting to see how the inclusion of the moderating variable, “mana- gerial expertise” in the foregoing example, would change the model or affect the relationships. The new set of relationships that would emerge in the presence of the moderator is depicted in Figure 5.7. As can be seen, managerial expertise mod- erates the relationship between workforce diversity and creative synergy. In other words, creative synergy will not result from the multifaceted problem-solving skills of the diverse workforce unless the manager is capable of harnessing that synergy by creatively coordinating the different skills. If the manager lacks the expertise to perform this role, then no matter how many different problem-solving skills the diverse workforce might have, synergy will just not surface. Instead of functioning effectively, the organization might just remain static, or even deteriorate.

Figure 5.7 Diagram of the relationship among the independent, mediating, moderating, and dependent variables

It is now easy to see what the differences are among an independent variable, a mediating variable, and a moderating variable. The independent variable helps to explain the variance in the dependent variable; the mediating variable surfaces at time t2 as a function of the independent variable, which also helps us to conceptu- alize the relationship between the independent and dependent variables; and the moderating variable has a contingent effect on the relationship between two vari- ables. To put it differently, while the independent variable explains the variance in the dependent variable, the mediating variable does not add to the variance already explained by the independent variable, whereas the moderating variable has an

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 92

Chapter

5

Research Methods for Business

84 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

interaction effect with the independent variable in explaining the variance. That is, unless the moderating variable is present, the theorized relationship between the other two variables considered will not hold.

Whether a variable is an independent variable, a dependent variable, a mediating variable, or a moderating variable should be determined by a careful reading of the dynamics operating in any given situation. For instance, a variable such as motivation to work could be a dependent variable, an independent variable, a mediating variable, or a moderating variable, depending on the theoretical model that is being advanced.

Now do Exercise 5.7, Exercise 5.8, and Exercise 5.9.

Exercise 5.7

Make up three different situations in which motivation to work would be an independent variable, a mediating variable, and a moderating variable.

Exercise 5.8

Failure to follow accounting principles causes immense confusion, which in turn creates a number of problems for the organization. Those with vast exper- ience in bookkeeping, however, are able to avert the problems by taking timely corrective action. List and label the variables in this situation, explain the rela- tionships among the variables, and illustrate these by means of diagrams.

Exercise 5.9

The manager of Haines Company observes that the morale of employees in her company is low. She thinks that if their working conditions are improved, pay scales raised, and the vacation benefits made attractive, the morale will be boosted. She doubts, however, if an increase in pay scales would raise the morale of all employees. Her conjecture is that those who have supplemental incomes will just not be “turned on” by higher pay, and only those without side incomes will be happy with increased pay, with a resultant boost in morale. List and label the variables in this situation. Explain the relationships among

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 93

Chapter

5

Theoretical framework and hypothesis development

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 85

the variables and illustrate them by means of diagrams. What might be the problem statement or problem definition for the situation?

5.3 THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK

Having examined the different kinds of variables that can operate in a situation and how the relationships among these can be established, it is now possible to see how we can develop the theoretical framework for our research.

The theoretical framework is the foundation on which the entire deductive research project is based. It is a logically developed, described, and elaborated network of associations among the variables deemed relevant to the problem situation and identified through such processes as interviews, observations, and literature review. Experience and intuition also guide the development of the theoretical framework.

It becomes evident at this stage that, to arrive at good solutions to the problem, one should first correctly identify the problem, and then the variables that contribute to it. The importance of conducting purposeful interviews and doing a thorough literature review now becomes clear. After identifying the appropriate variables, the next step is to elaborate the network of associations among the variables, so that relevant hypotheses can be developed and subsequently tested. Based on the results of hypothesis testing (which indicate whether or not the hypotheses have been supported), the extent to which the problem can be solved becomes evident. The theoretical framework is thus an important step in the research process.

The relationship between the literature review and the theoretical framework is that the former provides a solid foundation for developing the latter. That is, the literature review identifies the variables that might be important, as determined by previous research findings. This, in addition to other logical connections that can be conceptualized, forms the basis for the theoretical model. The theoretical frame- work represents and elaborates the relationships among the variables, explains the theory underlying these relations, and describes the nature and direction of the relationships. Just as the literature review sets the stage for a good theoretical framework, this in turn provides the logical base for developing testable hypotheses.

5.3.1 The components of the theoretical framework

A good theoretical framework identifies and defines the important variables in the situation that are relevant to the problem and subsequently describes and explains the interconnections among these variables. The relationships among the independent variables, the dependent variable(s), and, if applicable, the moderating and mediating variables are elaborated. Should there be any moderating variable(s), it is important to explain how and what specific relationships they moderate. An explanation of why they operate as moderators should also be offered. If there are any mediating variables, a discussion on how or why they are treated as mediating variables is necessary. Any interrelationships among the independent variables themselves, or among the dependent variables themselves (in case there are two or more dependent variables), should also be clearly spelled out and adequately

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 94

Chapter

5

Research Methods for Business

86 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

explained. Note that a good theoretical framework is not necessarily a complex framework.

There are three basic features that should be incorporated in any theoretical frame- work:

1. The variables considered relevant to the study should be clearly defined.

2. A conceptual model that describes the relationships between the variables in the model should be given.

3. There should be a clear explanation of why we expect these relationships to exist.

It is not always easy to come up with generally agreed-upon definitions of the relevant variables. More often than not, there are many definitions available in the literature (for instance, there are literally dozens of definitions of “brand image,” “customer satisfaction,” and “service quality” available in the marketing literature). Still, well-chosen guiding definitions of concepts are needed, because they will help you to provide an explanation for the relationships between the variables in your model. What’s more, they will also serve as a basis for the operationalization or measurement of your concepts in the data collection stage of the research process. Hence, you will have to choose a useful definition from the literature (do not use dictionary definitions, they are usually too general). It is also important that you explain why you have chosen a particular definition as your guiding definition.

A conceptual model helps you to structure your discussion of the literature. A con- ceptual model describes your ideas about how the concepts (variables) in your model are related to each other. A schematic diagram of the conceptual model helps the reader to visualize the theorized relationships between the variables in your model and thus to obtain a quick idea about how you think that the manage- ment problem can be solved. Hence, conceptual models are often expressed in this form. However, relationships between variables can also be adequately expressed in words. Both a schematic diagram of the conceptual model and a description of the relationships between the variables in words should be given, so that the reader can see and easily comprehend the theorized relationships. This facilitates and stimu- lates discussion about the relationships between the variables in your model. It is therefore important that your model is based on a sound theory.

A theory or a clear explanation for the relationships in your model is the last com- ponent of the theoretical framework. A theory attempts to explain relationships between the variables in your model: an explanation should be provided for all the important relationships that are theorized to exist among the variables. If the nature and direction of the relationships can be theorized on the basis of the findings of previous research and/or your own ideas on the subject, then there should also be an indication as to whether the relationships should be positive or negative and linear or nonlinear. From the theoretical framework, then, testable hypotheses can be developed to examine whether the theory formulated is valid or not.

Note that you do not necessarily have to “invent” a new theory every time you are undertaking a research project. In an applied research context you apply existing theories to a specific context. This means that arguments can be drawn from previ- ous research. However, in a basic research context you will make some contribution to existing theories and models. In such a case, it is not (always) possible to use existing theories or explanations for relationships between variables. As a result, you will have to rely on your own insights and ideas.

Let us illustrate how these features are incorporated in the following example.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 95

Chapter

5

Theoretical framework and hypothesis development

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 87

Air safety violations

In April 2008, the Federal Aviation Administration announced its second effort in three years to stop its managers in Texas from covering up air safety viola- tions after a new investigation found the misconduct had continued. The FAA announced that the top managers of an air traffic control facility in Dallas-Fort Worth had been removed from their jobs. According to the FAA, the Transport- ation Department’s inspector general found that in addition to letting airlines ignore their safety directives, FAA managers in Dallas-Fort Worth routinely and intentionally misclassified instances where airplanes were flying closer together than they were supposed to.

Air safety violations put the safety of airplane passengers at risk. At worst, air safety violations have the potential to cause mid-air collisions, and at the very least, air safety violations lead to increased workload for air traffic controllers and pilots. Four important factors that seem to have influenced air safety viol- ations are poor communication among the cockpit crew members themselves, poor coordination between ground staff and cockpit crew, minimal training given to the cockpit crew, and a management philosophy that has encouraged a decentralized structure. It would be nice to know if these factors did indeed contribute to the safety violations and, if so, to what extent.

5.3.2 Theoretical framework for the example of air safety violations

The dependent variable is safety violation, which is the variable of primary interest. We attempt to explain the variance in this dependent variable by the four inde- pendent variables of (1) communication among crew members, (2) communication between ground control and the cockpit crew, (3) training received by the cockpit crew, and (4) decentralization. Communication is the process of conveying inform- ation from a sender to a receiver by the use of a medium in which the communicated information is understood the same way by both sender and receiver. Training refers to the acquisition of knowledge, skills, and competencies as a result of the teaching of vocational or practical skills and knowledge that relate to specific useful compet- encies of the cockpit crew. Decentralization is the dispersion of decision-making governance closer to the employees.

The less the communication among the crew members themselves, the greater is the probability of air safety violations since very little information is shared among them. For example, whenever safety is threatened, timely communication between the navigator and pilot is most unlikely. Each member will be preoccupied with his or her work and lose sight of the larger picture. When ground crew fails to give the right information at the right time, mishaps are bound to occur with aborted flights and collisions. Coordination between ground and cockpit crew is at the very heart of air safety. Thus, the less coordination between ground control and cockpit crew there is, the greater the possibility of air safety violations taking place. Both of the above factors are exacerbated by the management philosophy of airlines, which often emphasize decentralization. This philosophy might have worked before the deregulation of the airlines when the number of flights was manageable. But with deregulation and increased flights overall in mid-air, and with all airlines operating many more flights, centralized coordination and control assume great importance. Thus, the greater the degree of decentralization, the greater is the scope for lower levels of communication both among in-flight staff and between ground staff and cockpit crew, and the greater the scope for air safety violations. Also, when cock- pit crew members are not adequately trained, they may not have the requisite knowledge of safety standards or may suffer from an inability to handle emergency

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 96

Chapter

5

Research Methods for Business

88 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

situations and avoid collisions. Thus, poor training also adds to the probability of increased safety violations. These relationships are outlined in Figure 5.8.

Figure 5.8 Schematic diagram for the theoretical framework in the example of air safety violations

Note how the basic features of the theoretical framework have been incorporated in the example.

1. Identification and labeling of the dependent and independent variables have been done in the theoretical framework. Definitions have been provided.

2. The relationships among these variables have been schematically illustrated (see Figure 5.8).

3. The relationships among the variables were discussed, establishing that the four independent variables are related to the dependent variable, and that the independent variable, decentralization, is related to two other independent variables, namely communication among the cockpit members and between ground control and the cockpit crew. The nature and direction of the relation- ship of each independent variable with the dependent variable and the relation- ship of decentralization to two of the other independent variables were clearly stated. For example, it was indicated that the lower the training level of the cock- pit crew, the greater the chances of air safety violations. Thus, as the training level is lowered, the hazard is increased, or, conversely, the higher the training level, the less likely are air safety violations, indicating a negative relationship between the two variables. Such a negative relationship exists between each of the independent variables, with the exception of decentralization, and the dependent variable. There is also a negative relationship between decentraliza- tion and communication among cockpit members (the more decentralization, the less communication) and between decentralization and coordination (the more decentralization, the less coordination). Why these relationships are to be expected was explained through several logical statements, such as describing why decentralization, which worked before deregulation, would not now work. More specifically, it was argued that:

a. lower levels of communication among cockpit crew would fail to alert the pilot to impending hazards;

b. poor coordination between ground control and cockpit crew would be det- rimental because such coordination is the very essence of safety;

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 97

Chapter

5

Theoretical framework and hypothesis development

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 89

c. encouragement of decentralization would only reinforce poorer commu- nication and coordination efforts;

d. inadequate training of cockpit crew would fail to build survival skills.

Now, out of interest, let’s see if we can interject a mediating variable in the model. For example, we may say that lack of adequate training makes the pilots nervous and diffident, and this in turn explains why they are not able to confidently handle situations in mid-air when many aircraft share the skies. Nervousness and diffidence are functions of lack of training, and help to explain why inadequate training would result in air safety hazard. This scenario is depicted in Figure 5.9.

Figure 5.9 Schematic diagram for the theoretical framework including the mediating variable

We may also substantially change the model by using (poor) training as a moderating variable, as shown in Figure 5.10. Here, we are theorizing that poor communication, poor coordination, and decentralization are likely to result in air safety violations only in such cases where the pilot in charge has had inadequate training. In other words, those who have had adequate training in deftly handling hazardous situ- ations through simulated training sessions and so forth would not be handicapped by poor communication and coordination, and in cases where the aircraft is oper- ated by well-trained pilots, poor communication and coordination will not result in hazards to safety.

Figure 5.10 Schematic diagram for the theoretical framework including a moderating variable

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 98

Chapter

5

Research Methods for Business

90 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

These examples again illustrate that the same variable may be independent, medi- ating, or moderating, depending on how we conceptualize our theoretical model.

Now do Exercise 5.10 and Exercise 5.11.

Exercise 5.10

Avatars are virtual characters that can be used as representatives of a company that is using the Internet as a distribution channel. For instance, avatars can be used as shopping assistants, website guides, or as identification figures. A manager of an online company believes that avatar-mediated communication will have a positive effect on satisfaction with her company and on purchase intentions of consumers, because avatars enhance the value of information provided on the website and increase the pleasure of the shopping experi- ence. She also believes that the positive effect of the perceived information value on satisfaction with the company and purchase intentions is stronger when customers are highly involved. Develop a theoretical framework for this situation after stating what the problem definition of the researcher would be in this case.

Exercise 5.11

The probability of cancer victims successfully recovering under treatment was studied by a medical researcher in a hospital. She found three variables to be important for recovery:

• Early and correct diagnosis by the doctor.

• The nurse’s careful follow-up of the doctor’s instructions.

• Peace and quiet in the vicinity.

In a quiet atmosphere, the patients rested well and recovered sooner. Patients who were admitted in advanced stages of cancer did not respond to treatment, even though the doctor’s diagnosis was acted on immediately on arrival, the nurses did their best, and there was plenty of peace and quiet in the area. Define the problem and develop the theoretical framework for this situation.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 99

Chapter

5

Theoretical framework and hypothesis development

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 91

5.4 HYPOTHESIS DEVELOPMENT

Once we have identified the important variables in a situation and established the relationships among them through logical reasoning in the theoretical framework, we are in a position to test whether the relationships that have been theorized do, in fact, hold true. By testing these relationships scientifically through appropriate stat- istical analyses, or through negative case analysis in qualitative research (described later in the chapter), we are able to obtain reliable information on what kinds of relationships exist among the variables operating in the problem situation. The res- ults of these tests offer us some clues as to what could be changed in the situation to solve the problem. Formulating such testable statements is called hypothesis development.

5.4.1 Definition of a hypothesis

A hypothesis can be defined as a tentative, yet testable, statement, which predicts what you expect to find in your empirical data. Hypotheses are derived from the theory on which your conceptual model is based and are often relational in nature. Along these lines, hypotheses can be defined as logically conjectured relationships between two or more variables expressed in the form of testable statements. By testing the hypotheses and confirming the conjectured relationships, it is expected that solutions can be found to correct the problem encountered.

EXAMPLE

Several testable statements or hypotheses can be drawn from the theoretical framework formulated in the previous example. One of them might be:

If the pilots are given adequate training to handle mid-air crowded situ- ations, air safety violations will be reduced.

The above is a testable statement. By measuring the extent of training given to the various pilots and the number of safety violations committed by them over a period of time, we can statistically examine the relationship between these two variables to see if there is a significant negative correlation between the two. If we do find this to be the case, then the hypothesis is substantiated. That is, giving more training to pilots in handling crowded space in mid-air will reduce safety violations. If a significant negative correlation is not found, then the hypothesis has not been substantiated. By convention in the social sciences, to call a relationship “statistically significant,” we should be confident that 95 times out of 100 the observed relationship will hold true. There should be only a 5% chance that the relationship will not be detected.

5.4.2 Statement of hypotheses: formats

If−then statements

As already stated, a hypothesis can be defined as a testable statement of the rela- tionship among variables. A hypothesis can also test whether there are differences between two groups (or among several groups) with respect to any variable or variables. To examine whether or not the conjectured relationships or differences exist, these hypotheses can be set either as propositions or in the form of if−then statements. The two formats can be seen in the following two examples.

Employees who are more healthy will take sick leave less frequently.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 100

Chapter

5

Research Methods for Business

92 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

If employees are more healthy, then they will take sick leave less frequently.

5.4.3 Directional and nondirectional hypotheses

If, in stating the relationship between two variables or comparing two groups, terms such as positive, negative, more than, less than, and the like are used, then these are directional hypotheses because the direction of the relationship between the variables (positive/negative) is indicated, as in the first example below, or the nature of the difference between two groups on a variable (more than/less than) is postulated, as in the second example.

The greater the stress experienced in the job, the lower the job satisfaction of employees.

Women are more motivated than men.

On the other hand, nondirectional hypotheses are those that do postulate a rela- tionship or difference, but offer no indication of the direction of these relationships or differences. In other words, though it may be conjectured that there is a signi- ficant relationship between two variables, we may not be able to say whether the relationship is positive or negative, as in the first example below. Likewise, even if we can conjecture that there will be differences between two groups on a particular variable, we may not be able to say which group will be more and which less on that variable, as in the second example.

There is a relationship between age and job satisfaction.

There is a difference between the work ethic values of American and Asian employees.

Nondirectional hypotheses are formulated either because the relationships or dif- ferences have never been explored, and hence there is no basis for indicating the direction, or because there have been conflicting findings in previous research stud- ies on the variables. In some studies a positive relationship might have been found, while in others a negative relationship might have been traced. Hence, the current researcher might only be able to hypothesize that there is a significant relationship, but the direction may not be clear. In such cases, the hypotheses can be stated non- directionally. Note that in the first example there is no clue as to whether age and job satisfaction are positively or negatively correlated, and in the second example we do not know whether the work ethic values are stronger in Americans or in Asians. However, it would have been possible to state that age and job satisfaction are positively correlated, since previous research has indicated such a relationship. Whenever the direction of the relationship is known, it is better to develop direc- tional hypotheses for reasons that will become clear in our discussions in a later chapter.

5.4.4 Null and alternate hypotheses

The hypothetico-deductive method requires that hypotheses are falsifiable: they must be written in such a way that other researchers can show them to be false. For this reason, hypotheses are sometimes accompanied by null hypotheses. A null hypothesis (H0) is a hypothesis set up to be rejected in order to support an alternate hypothesis, labeled HA. When used, the null hypothesis is presumed true until statistical evidence, in the form of a hypothesis test, indicates otherwise. For instance, the null hypothesis may state that advertising does not affect sales, or that women and men buy equal amounts of shoes. In more general terms, the null hypothesis may state that the correlation between two variables is equal to zero or

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 101

Chapter

5

Theoretical framework and hypothesis development

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 93

that the difference in the means of two groups in the population is equal to zero (or some other definite number). Typically, the null statement is expressed in terms of there being no (significant) relationship between two variables or no (significant) difference between two groups. The alternate hypothesis, which is the opposite of the null, is a statement expressing a relationship between two variables or indicating differences between groups.

To explain further, in setting up the null hypothesis, we are stating that there is no difference between what we might find in the population characteristics (i.e., the total group we are interested in knowing something about) and the sample we are studying (i.e., a limited number representative of the total population or group that we have chosen to study). Since we do not know the true state of affairs in the population, all we can do is to draw inferences based on what we find in our sample. What we imply through the null hypothesis is that any differences found between two sample groups or any relationships found between two variables based on our sample are simply due to random sampling fluctuations and not due to any “true” differences between the two population groups (say, men and women), or relationships between two variables (say, sales and profits). The null hypothesis is thus formulated so that it can be tested for possible rejection. If we reject the null hypothesis, then all permissible alternate hypotheses relating to the particular relationship tested could be supported. It is the theory that allows us to have faith in the alternate hypothesis that is generated in the particular research investigation. This is one more reason why the theoretical framework should be grounded on sound, defendable logic to start with. Otherwise, other researchers are likely to refute and postulate other defensible explanations through different alternate hypotheses.

The null hypothesis in respect of group differences stated in the example “Women are more motivated than men” would be:

H0 : µM = µW

or

H0 : µM − µW = 0

where H0 represents the null hypothesis, µM is the mean motivational level of the men, and µW is the mean motivational level of the women.

The alternate for the above example would statistically be set as follows:

HA : µM < µW

which is the same as

HA : µW > µM

where HA represents the alternate hypothesis and µM and µW are the mean motiv- ation levels of men and women, respectively.

For the nondirectional hypothesis of mean group differences in work ethic values in the example “There is a difference between the work ethic values of American and Asian employees,” the null hypothesis would be:

H0 : µAM = µAS

or

H0 : µAM − µAS = 0

where H0 represents the null hypothesis, µAM is the mean work ethic value of Americans and µAS is the mean work ethic value of Asians.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 102

Chapter

5

Research Methods for Business

94 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

The alternate hypothesis for the above example would statistically be set as:

HA : µAM 6= µAS

where HA represents the alternate hypothesis and µAM and µAS are the mean work ethic values of Americans and Asians, respectively.

The null hypothesis for the relationship between the two variables in the example “The greater the stress experienced in the job, the lower the job satisfaction of employ- ees,” would be H0: There is no relationship between stress experienced on the job and the job satisfaction of employees. This would be statistically expressed by:

H0 : ρ = 0

where ρ represents the correlation between stress and job satisfaction, which in this case is equal to 0 (i.e., no correlation).

The alternate hypothesis for the above null, which has been expressed directionally, can be statistically expressed as:

HA : ρ < 0(The correlation is negative.)

For the example “There is a relationship between age and job satisfaction,” which has been stated nondirectionally, the null hypothesis would be statistically expressed as:

H0 : ρ = 0

whereas the alternate hypothesis would be expressed as:

HA : ρ 6= 0

Having formulated the null and alternate hypotheses, the appropriate statistical tests (t-tests, F-tests) can then be applied, which indicate whether or not support has been found for the alternate hypothesis− that is, that there is a significant difference between groups or that there is a significant relationship between variables, as hypothesized.

The steps to be followed in hypothesis testing are:

1. State the null and the alternate hypotheses.

2. Choose the appropriate statistical test depending on whether the data collected are parametric or nonparametric.

3. Determine the level of significance desired (p = 0.05, or more, or less).

4. See if the output results from computer analysis indicate that the significance level is met. If, as in the case of Pearson correlation analysis in Excel software, the significance level is not indicated in the printout, look up the critical values that define the regions of acceptance on the appropriate table (i.e., (t, F, χ2) − see the statistical tables at the end of this book). This critical value demarcates the region of rejection from that of acceptance of the null hypothesis. When the resultant value is larger than the critical value, the null hypothesis is rejected, and the alternate accepted. If the calculated value is less than the critical value, the null is accepted and the alternate rejected.

Note that null hypotheses are rarely presented in research reports or journal articles.

Now do Exercise 5.12, Exercise 5.13, and Exercise 5.14.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 103

Chapter

5

Theoretical framework and hypothesis development

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 95

Exercise 5.12

For the theoretical framework developed for the Haines Company in Exercise 5.9, develop five different hypotheses.

Exercise 5.13

Define the problem.

Evolve a theoretical framework.

Develop at least six hypotheses.

Exercise 5.14

Retention of minority women at the workplace is becoming more and more difficult. Not finding an influential mentor in the system who is willing to help them, lack of an informal network with influential colleagues, lack of role models, and the dearth of high-visibility projects result in dissatisfaction experienced at work and the minority women ultimately decide to leave the organization. Of course, not all minority women quit the system. Only those who have the wherewithal (e.g., resources and self-confidence) to start their

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 104

Chapter

5

Research Methods for Business

96 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

own business leave the organization. For this situation, define the problem, develop a theoretical framework, and formulate six hypotheses.

Before concluding the discussion on hypotheses, it has to be reiterated that hypo- thesis generation and testing can be done both through deduction and induction. In deduction, the theoretical model is first developed, testable hypotheses are then formulated, data collected, and then the hypotheses are tested. In the inductive process, new hypotheses are formulated based on what is known from the data already collected, which are then tested. Recall from our discussions in Chapter 2 the example of the Hawthorne experiments, where new hypotheses were developed after the data already collected did not substantiate any of the original hypotheses.

In sum, new hypotheses not originally thought of, or which have been previously untested, might be developed after data are collected. Creative insights might com- pel researchers to test a new hypothesis from existing data, which, if substantiated, would add new knowledge and help theory building. Through the broadening of our understanding of the dynamics operating in different situations using deductive and inductive processes, we add to the total body of knowledge in the area.

5.5 HYPOTHESIS TESTING WITH QUALITATIVE RESEARCH: NEGATIVE CASE ANALYSIS

Hypotheses can also be tested with qualitative data. For example, let us say that, after extensive interviews, a researcher has developed the theoretical framework that unethical practices by employees are a function of their inability to discriminate between right and wrong, or due to a dire need for more money, or the organization’s indifference to such practices. To test the hypothesis that these three factors are the primary ones that influence unethical practices, the researcher should look for data to refute the hypothesis. When even a single case does not support the hypothesis, the theory needs revision. Let us say that the researcher finds one case where an individual is deliberately engaged in the unethical practice of accepting kickbacks (despite the fact that he is knowledgeable enough to discriminate right from wrong, is not in need of money, and knows that the organization will not be indifferent to his behavior), simply because he wants to “get back” at the system, which “will not listen to his advice.” This new discovery, through disconfirmation of the original hypothesis, known as the negative case method, enables the researcher to revise the theory and the hypothesis until such time as the theory becomes robust.

We have thus far seen how a literature review is done, theoretical frameworks are formulated, and hypotheses developed. Let us now illustrate this logical sequence through a mini-example where a researcher wants to examine the organizational factors influencing women’s progress to top management positions. The literature review and the number of variables are deliberately kept small, since the purpose is merely to illustrate how a theoretical framework is developed from the literature review, and how hypotheses are developed based on the theoretical framework.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 105

Chapter

5

Theoretical framework and hypothesis development

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 97

Literature review, theoretical framework, and hypothesis development

Introduction

Despite the dramatic increase in the number of managerial women during the current decade, the number of women in top management positions continues to be very small and static, suggesting a glass-ceiling effect that women cur- rently face (Morrison, White & Vura, 1999; O’Neil, Hopkins & Bilimoria, 2008; Van Velsor, 2000). Given the projected demographics of the workplace, which forecasts that for every six or seven women entering the workforce in the future, there will only be about three white males joining the labor market, it becomes important to examine the organizational factors that might facilitate the early advancement of women to top executive positions. This study is an effort to identify the factors that currently impede women’s advancement to the top in organizations.

A brief literature review

It is often declared that since women have only recently embarked on careers and entered the managerial ranks, it will take more time for them to rise to top executive positions. However, many women in higher middle-management positions feel that there are at least two major stumbling blocks to their advance- ment: gender role stereotypes and inadequate access to critical information (Crosby, 1985; Daniel, 1998; Schein, 2007; Welch, 2001).

Gender stereotypes, or sex-role stereotypes as they are also known, are societal beliefs that men are better suited for taking on leadership roles and positions of authority and power, whereas women are more suited for taking on nur- turing and helping roles (DeArmond et al., 2006; Eagly, 1989; Kahn & Crosby, 1998; Smith, 1999). These beliefs influence the positions that are assigned to organizational members. Whereas capable men are given line positions and developed to take on higher responsibilities and executive roles in the course of time, capable women are assigned to staff positions and dead-end jobs. With little exposure to management of budgets and opportunities for significant decision making, women are seldom groomed for top-level positions.

Women are also excluded from the “old boys” network because of their gender. Information exchange, development of career strategies, clues regarding access to resources, and such important information vital to upward mobility are thus lost to women (The Chronicle, 2000). While many other factors impinge on women’s upward mobility, the two variables of gender-role stereotypes and exclusion from critical information are particularly detrimental to women’s advancement to senior level positions.

Theoretical framework

The dependent variable of advancement of women to top management posi- tions is influenced by the two independent variables − gender-role stereotyp- ing and access to critical information. The two independent variables are also interrelated as explained below.

Gender-role stereotypes adversely impact on women’s career progress. Since women are perceived as ineffective leaders but good nurturers, they are not assigned line positions in their early careers but offered staff responsibilities. It is only in line positions that managers make significant decisions, control budgets, and interact with top-level executives who have an impact on their future careers. These opportunities to learn, grow and develop on the job, and gain visibility in the system help managers to advance to top-level positions.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 106

Chapter

5

Research Methods for Business

98 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

However, since women in staff positions do not gain these experiences or have the visibility to be identified as key people in the organization with the potential to be successful top managers, their advancement to top-level positions is never considered by the system and they are always overlooked. Thus, gender-role stereotypes hinder the progress of women to the top.

Exclusion from the networks where men informally interact with one another (golf courses, bars, and so on) also precludes women from gaining access to crucial information and resources vital for their advancement. For example, many of the significant organizational changes and current events are discussed informally among men outside the work setting. Women are generally unaware of the most recent developments since they are not a part of the informal group that interacts and exchanges information away from the workplace. This definitely is a handicap. For example, knowledge of an impending vacancy for an executive position enables one to strategize to occupy that position. One can become a key contender by procuring critical information relevant to the position, get prepared to present the appropriate credentials to the right people at the right time, and thus pave the way for success. Thus, access to critical information is important for the progress of all, including women. When women do not have the critical information that is shared in informal networks, their chances of advancement to top positions also get severely restricted.

Gender-role stereotypes also hinder access to information. If women are not considered to be decision makers and leaders, but are perceived merely as support personnel, they will not be apprised of critical information essential for organizational advancement, since this is not seen as relevant for them. When both stereotyping and exclusion from critical information are in operation, there is no way that women can reach the top. These relationships are shown schematically in Figure 5.11.

Figure 5.11 Schematic diagram of the example relating to women in managerial positions

In sum, both gender-role stereotypes and access to critical information signific- antly influence women’s advancement to top-level positions in organizations and explain the variance in it.

Hypotheses

1. The greater the extent of gender stereotyping in organizations, the fewer will be the number of women at the top.

2. Male managers have more access to critical information than women man- agers in the same ranks.

3. There will be a significant positive correlation between access to information and chances for promotion to top-level positions.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 107

Chapter

5

Theoretical framework and hypothesis development

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 99

4. The greater the extent of gender-role stereotyping, the less access there will be to critical information for women.

5. Gender-role stereotyping and access to critical information will both signi- ficantly explain the variance in promotional opportunities for women to top-level positions.

5.6 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS

At this juncture, it becomes easy to follow the progression of research from the first stage, when managers sense the broad problem area, to preliminary data gathering (including the literature review), to developing the theoretical framework based on the literature review and guided by experience and intuition, to formulating hypotheses for testing.

It is also clear that once the problem is defined, a good grasp of the four different types of variables broadens the understanding of managers as to how multiple factors impinge on the organizational setting. Knowledge of how and for what purpose the theoretical framework is developed and the hypotheses are generated enables the manager to be an intelligent judge of the research report submitted by the consultant. Likewise, knowledge of what significance means, and why a given hypothesis is either accepted or rejected, helps the manager to persist in or desist from following hunches, which, while making good sense, do not work. If such knowledge is absent, many of the findings through research will not make much sense to the manager and decision making will bristle with confusion.

SUMMARY

Deductive research rests on the foundation of a theoretical framework. A theoret- ical framework represents your beliefs on how certain variables are related to each other and an explanation of why you believe that these variables are associated with each other. In this chapter we examined the four types of variables − dependent, independent, moderating, and mediating variables. We also discussed how and why the theoretical framework is developed and how testable hypotheses are generated therefrom. We saw examples where the same variable can be a dependent, inde- pendent, moderating, or mediating variable, depending on the situation. We also discussed hypotheses development. A hypothesis can be defined as a tentative, yet testable statement, which predicts what you expect to find in your empirical data. We discussed hypothesis formulation and explained when a null hypothesis should be accepted or rejected, based on whether or not the results of hypothesis testing meet the significance test. Furthermore, we also briefly discussed the test for hypo- thesis validation in qualitative research. In the next chapter we will examine the basic research design issues.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

“Because literature review is a time-consuming exercise, a good, in-depth inter- view should suffice to develop a theoretical framework.” Discuss this statement.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 108

Chapter

5

Research Methods for Business

100 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

“Good models are complex. What’s more, a good model should include both moderating and mediating variables.” Discuss this statement.

“Academic researchers usually develop more complex and elaborate models than applied researchers.” Discuss this statement.

“In an applied research context you do not need to explain the relationships between the variables in your conceptual model.” Discuss this statement.

There is an advantage in stating the hypothesis both in the null and in the alternate; it adds clarity to our thinking of what we are testing. Explain.

It is advantageous to develop a directional hypothesis whenever we are sure of the predicted direction. How will you justify this statement?

In recent decades, many service markets have been liberalized. For this reason, incumbent service firms are facing new competitors and must address cus- tomer switching. You are discussing the determinants of customer switching with a service firm manager. She believes that product quality, relationship

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 109

Chapter

5

Theoretical framework and hypothesis development

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 101

quality, and switching costs are important determinants of customer switch- ing. You agree with the contention that product quality and relationship quality are important determinants of switching. However, you believe that switching costs moderate the relationships between product quality, relationship quality, and customer switching. Provide arguments for this contention.

For the following case entitled “Sleepless nights at Holiday Inn” (published in BusinessWeek and adapted here):

Sleepless nights at Holiday Inn

Just a few years ago, Tom Oliver, the Chief Executive of Holiday Hospitality Corp., was struggling to differentiate among the variety of facilities offered to clients under the Holiday flag− the Holiday Inn Select designed for business travelers, the Holiday Inn Express used by penny pinchers, and the Crowne Plaza Hotels, the luxurious hotels meant for the big spenders. Oliver felt that revenues could be quadrupled if only clients could differentiate among these.

Keen on developing a viable strategy for Holiday Hospitality, which suffered from brand confusion, Tom Oliver conducted a customer survey of those who had used each type of facility, and found the following. The consumers didn’t have a clue as to the differences among the three different types. Many complained that the buildings were old and not properly maintained, and the quality ratings of service and other factors were also poor. Furthermore, when word spread that one of the contemplated strategies of Oliver was a name change to differentiate the three facilities, irate franchises balked. Their mixed messages did not help consumers to understand the differences, either.

Oliver thought that he first needed to understand how the different classific- ations would be important to the several classes of client, and then he could market the heck out of them and greatly enhance the revenues. Simultan- eously, he recognized that unless the franchise owners fully cooperated with him in all his plans, mere face-lifting and improvement of customer service would not bring added revenues.

Identify the problem

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 110

Chapter

5

Research Methods for Business

102 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Develop a conceptual model

Develop at least four hypotheses.

Develop a conceptual model for the scenario below.

Incidence of smoking in movies has started to increase again, after having declined for several decades. According to the National Cancer Institute, smoking is seen in at least three out of four contemporary box-office hits. What’s more, identifiable cigarette brands appeared in about one-third of all movies in 2008. Exposure to smoking in movies is an important predictor of adolescent smoking initiation: smoking in movies has been shown to affect adolescents’ intentions to start smoking. In turn, the intentions to start smoking are determined by a more positive attitude toward smoking after seeing a film character smoke. Recent research has revealed that the relationship between seeing a film character smoke and the attitude toward smoking is stronger when a person’s identification with a film character increases. These findings are consistent with social learning the- ory, which predicts that attitudes and behaviors are modeled by observing the behaviors of others.

Develop a conceptual model for the following case.

Once given, perks are extraordinarily hard to take away without sapping employee morale. The adverse effects of these cuts far outweigh the anticipated savings in dollars. Research has shown that when the reason behind the cuts is explained to employees, morale does not drop.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 111

Chapter

5

Theoretical framework and hypothesis development

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 103

Product placement is a form of advertising in which a company’s products and name are intentionally positioned in motion pictures, television programs, radio broadcasts, and the like. Product placement can take many forms: verbal mentions in dialogue; actual use by a character; or visual displays (for instance, a company logo on a vehicle or billboard). Develop a theoretical framework on this issue, based on a review of the current literature. This framework should include:

a specification and definition of an appropriate dependent variable;

a conceptual model that describes the relationships between the dependent variable, at least one independent variable, and either a moderating or a medi- ating variable;

a theory on why you would expect these relationships to exist;

an appropriate number of testable hypotheses.

PRACTICE PROJECT

For the topic you chose to work on for the project in Chapter 4, do the following:

• Go through the computer-generated bibliography again.

• Define a problem statement that, in your opinion, would be most useful for researchers to investigate.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 112

Chapter

5

Research Methods for Business

104 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

• Carry out a literature review that would seem to offer the greatest potential for developing a good theoretical framework, using about five to seven references.

• Develop the theoretical framework incorporating its three basic features, as discussed in the chapter.

• Generate a set of testable hypotheses based on the theoretical framework.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 113

Chapter

6

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 105

Chapter 6

Elements of research design

Topics discussed:

� The research design

� Purpose of the study: exploratory, descriptive, causal

� Extent of researcher interference with the study

� Study setting: contrived versus noncontrived

� Research strategies

� Unit of analysis: individuals, dyads, groups, organizations, cultures

� Time horizon: cross-sectional versus longitudinal studies

� Review of elements of research design

� Managerial implications

Chapter objectives After completing Chapter 6 you should be able to:

1. Understand the different aspects relevant to designing a research study.

2. Decide, for any given situation, the type of investigation needed, the research strategy, the study setting, the extent of researcher interference, the unit of analysis, and the time horizon of the study.

6.1 THE RESEARCH DESIGN Up to now you have made a great effort to:

• develop a problem statement;

• develop a research proposal;

• conduct a critical review of the literature;

• develop a conceptual background (in inductive research) or a theoretical frame- work (in deductive research).

The next step is to design the research in such a way that the requisite data can be gathered and analyzed to arrive at a solution for the problem that catalyzed the research project. A research design is a blueprint for the collection, measurement, and analysis of data, based on the research questions of the study.

The various issues involved in the research design and discussed in this chapter are shown comprehensively in Figure 6.1. As may be seen, issues relating to decisions regarding the purpose of the study (exploratory, descriptive, causal), the research strategy (for instance, experiments, surveys, interviews, case studies), its location (i.e., the study setting), the extent to which the study is manipulated and controlled by the researcher (extent of researcher interference), its temporal aspects (time hori- zon), and the level at which the data will be analyzed (unit of analysis), are integral to research design. These are discussed in this chapter. In addition, decisions have to be made as to the type of sample to be used (sampling design), how variables will be measured (measurement), and how they will be analyzed to test the hypotheses (data analysis). These issues are discussed in subsequent chapters.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 114

Chapter

6

Research Methods for Business

106 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Figure 6.1 The research design

As shown in Figure 6.1, each component of the research design offers several crit- ical choice points. The quality of a research study depends on how carefully the manager/researcher chooses the appropriate design alternatives, taking into con- sideration its specific purpose. For instance, if a critical financial decision to invest millions of dollars in a project is to be based on the results of a research invest- igation, then careful attention to detail is necessary to ensure that the study has precision and has the acceptable level of confidence. This implies, as we will see later in the book, that close attention will be paid to sampling, measurement, data collection, and so on. Contrast this with the research goal of testing new-product concepts on a small group of target consumers. Since the goal of a concept test is to help a company to develop some initial ideas about the appeal of a concept, such tests do not call for elaborate research design decisions.

It is important to note that the more sophisticated and rigorous the research design is, the greater the time, costs, and other resources expended on it will be. It is therefore relevant to ask oneself at every choice point whether the benefits that result from a more sophisticated design to ensure accuracy, confidence, generalizability, and so on, are commensurate with the larger investment of resources.

In this chapter we will examine the six basic aspects of research design. Specifically, we will discuss the purpose of the study, the extent of researcher interference, the study setting, research strategies, the unit of analysis, and the time horizon of the study (the shaded parts in Figure 6.1). Other aspects of research design (i.e., meas- urement, sampling design, and data analysis) will be elaborated in later chapters.

6.2 PURPOSE OF THE STUDY: EXPLORATORY, DESCRIPTIVE, CAUSAL

Studies may be either exploratory, descriptive, or causal in nature. The nature of the study−whether it is exploratory, descriptive, or causal− depends on the stage to which knowledge about the research topic has advanced. The design decisions become more rigorous as we proceed from the exploratory stage, where we attempt to explore new areas of business research, to the descriptive stage, where we try to describe certain characteristics of the phenomena on which interest centers, to the causal, hypothesis testing stage, where we examine whether or not the conjectured

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 115

Chapter

6

Elements of research design

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 107

relationships have been substantiated. We will now look at each of these in some detail.

6.2.1 Exploratory study

An exploratory study is undertaken when not much is known about the situation at hand, or no information is available on how similar problems or research issues have been solved in the past. In such cases, extensive preliminary work needs to be done to understand what is occurring, assess the magnitude of the problem, and/or gain familiarity with the phenomena in the situation. Based on this preliminary work, we may either decide that further research is not needed (if the problem is not as big as we thought) or set up a more rigorous design for further, more comprehensive investigation.

Along these lines, exploratory studies are necessary when some facts are known, but more information is needed for developing a viable theoretical framework. For instance, when we want to get at the important factors that influence the advance- ment of women in organizations, previous studies might indicate that women are increasingly taking on qualities such as assertiveness, competitiveness, and inde- pendence. There is also a perception that a judicious blend of masculine and fem- inine traits− such as being strong but not tough, kind but not soft− is conducive to women’s organizational advancement. These notions apart, there is a need for inter- viewing women managers who have made it to the top to explore all the relevant variables. This will help to build a robust theory.

Exploratory research often relies on secondary research (such as a review of the literature) and/or qualitative approaches to data gathering such as informal discus- sions (with consumers, employees, managers) and more formal approaches such as interviews, focus groups, projective methods, or case studies. The results of explor- atory studies are typically not generalizable to the population. As a rule, exploratory research is flexible in nature. Indeed, the activities of the researcher in exploratory research are quite similar to the activities of inspector Lewis, inspector Wallander, sergeant Hunter, detective Dee, or the South Florida team of forensic investigators from CSI Miami, who use old-fashioned police work, cutting-edge scientific meth- ods, or both to solve murder crimes. Whereas the focus of the research is broad at first, it becomes increasingly narrower as the research proceeds.

The following is an example where exploratory research would be necessary.

EXAMPLE

The manager of a multinational corporation is curious to know if the work ethic values of employees working in its subsidiary in Pennathur City are different from those of Americans. There is very little information about Pennathur (except that it is a small city in southern India), and since there is considerable controversy about what work ethic values mean to people in other cultures, the manager’s curiosity can be satisfied only by an exploratory study, interviewing the employees in organizations in Pennathur. Religion, political, economic, and social conditions, upbringing, cultural values, and so on play a major role in how people view their work in different parts of the world. Here, since very little is known about work ethic values in India (or even whether it is a viable concept for study in that country, as per discussions in a later chapter), an exploratory study will have to be undertaken.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 116

Chapter

6

Research Methods for Business

108 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

6.2.2 Descriptive study

The objective of a descriptive study is to describe. Descriptive studies are often designed to collect data that describe the characteristics of persons, events, or situations. Descriptive research is either quantitative or qualitative in nature. It may involve the collection of quantitative data such as satisfaction ratings, production figures, sales figures, or demographic data, but it may also entail the collection of qualitative information. For instance, qualitative data might be gathered to describe how consumers go through a decision-making process or to examine how managers resolve conflicts in organizations.

Sometimes the researcher is interested in associations among variables to describe populations, events, or situations. For instance, a researcher might be interested in the relationship between job involvement and job satisfaction, arousal seeking tendency and risk-taking behavior, self-confidence and the adoption of innovat- ive products, or goal clarity and job performance. Such studies are correlational in nature. Correlational research describes relationships between variables. While correlational studies can suggest that there is a relationship between two variables, finding a correlation does not mean that one variable causes a change in another variable.

Descriptive studies may help the researcher to:

1. Understand the characteristics of a group in a given situation (for instance the profile of a specific segment in a market).

2. Think systematically about aspects in a given situation (for instance, factors related to job satisfaction).

3. Offer ideas for further probe and research.

4. Help make certain (simple) decisions (such as decisions related to the use of specific communication channels depending on the customer profile, opening hours, cost reductions, staff employment, and the like).

Below are examples of situations warranting a descriptive study.

EXAMPLE

A bank manager wants to have a profile of the individuals who have loan pay- ments outstanding for six months and more. The profile will include details of their average age, earnings, nature of occupation, full-time/part-time employ- ment status, and the like. This might help him to elicit further information or decide right away on the types of individuals who should be made ineligible for loans in the future.

A CEO may be interested in having a description of how companies in her industry have incorporated corporate social responsibility into the business strategy of the organization. Such information might allow comparison later of the performance levels of specific types of companies.

6.2.3 Causal study

Causal studies are at the heart of the scientific approach to research. Such studies test whether or not one variable causes another to change. In a causal study, the researcher is interested in delineating one or more factors that are causing the problem. In other words, the intention of the researcher conducting a causal study

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 117

Chapter

6

Elements of research design

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 109

is to be able to state that variable X causes variable Y. So, when variable X is removed or altered in some way, problem Y is solved (note that quite often, however, it is not just one variable that causes a problem in organizations). In Chapter 5, we have already explained that in order to establish a causal relationship, all four of the following conditions should be met:

1. The independent and the dependent variable should covary.

2. The independent variable (the presumed causal factor) should precede the dependent variable.

3. No other factor should be a possible cause of the change in the dependent variable.

4. A logical explanation (a theory) is needed and it must why the independent variable affects the dependent variable.

Because of the time sequence condition, experimental designs, discussed later in this chapter and in more detail in Chapter 10, are often used to establish causal relationships.

Examples of causal studies are given below.

EXAMPLE

A marketing manager wants to know if the sales of the company will increase if he increases the advertising budget. Here, the manager would like to know the nature of the relationship that may be established between advertising and sales by testing the hypothesis: “If advertising is increased, then sales will also go up.”

A prevalent theory is that the diversity of the workforce increases organiza- tional effectiveness. A manager wants to know if this relationship holds for her organization.

A manager wants to test the hypothesis that stress experienced in the job negatively affects the job satisfaction of employees.

A researcher is interested in testing the hypothesis that women are more motiv- ated for their jobs than men.

6.3 EXTENT OF RESEARCHER INTERFERENCE WITH THE STUDY

The extent of interference by the researcher has a direct bearing on whether the study undertaken is correlational or causal. A correlational study is conducted in a natural environment (for instance, a supermarket or the factory floor) with minimal inter- ference by the researcher with the normal flow of events. For example, if a researcher wants to study the factors influencing training effectiveness (a correlational study), all that the individual has to do is delineate the relevant variables, collect the rel- evant data, and analyze them to come up with the findings. Though there is some disruption to the normal flow of work in the system as the researcher interviews employees and administers questionnaires in the workplace, the researcher’s inter- ference in the routine functioning of the system is minimal as compared to that caused during causal studies and experimental designs.

In studies conducted to establish cause-and-effect relationships, the researcher tries to manipulate certain variables so as to study the effects of such manipulation on the

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 118

Chapter

6

Research Methods for Business

110 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

dependent variable of interest. In other words, the researcher deliberately changes certain variables in the setting and interferes with the events as they normally occur. As an example, a researcher might want to study the influence of lighting on worker performance; hence he manipulates the lighting in the work situation to varying intensities. Here, there is considerable researcher interference with the natural and normal setting. In other cases the researcher might even want to create an altogether new artificial setting where the cause-and-effect relationships can be studied by manipulating certain variables and tightly controlling certain others, as in a laboratory. Thus, there could be varying degrees of interference by the researcher in the manipulation and control of variables in the research study, either in the natural setting or in an artificial lab setting.

Let us give examples of research with varying degrees of interference − minimal, moderate, and excessive.

Minimal interference

A hospital administrator wants to examine the relationship between the per- ceived emotional support in the system and the stresses experienced by the nursing staff. In other words, she wants to do a correlational study. Here, the administrator/researcher will collect data from the nurses (perhaps through a questionnaire) to indicate how much emotional support they get in the hospital and to what extent they experience stress. (We will learn in a later chapter how to measure these variables.) By correlating the two variables, the answer that is being sought can be found. In this case, beyond administering a questionnaire to the nurses, the researcher has not interfered with the normal activities in the hospital. In other words, researcher interference has been minimal.

Moderate interference

The same researcher is now no longer content with finding a correlation, but wants to firmly establish a causal connection. That is, the researcher wants to demonstrate that if the nurses had emotional support, this indeed would cause them to experience less stress. If this can be established, then the nurses’ stress can definitely be reduced by offering them emotional support. To test the cause-and-effect relationship, the researcher will measure the stress currently experienced by the nurses in three wards in the hospital, and then deliberately manipulate the extent of emotional support given to the three groups of nurses in the three wards for, perhaps, a week, and measure the amount of stress at the end of that period. For one group, the researcher will ensure that a number of lab technicians and doctors help and comfort the nurses when they face stress- ful events− for example, when they care for patients suffering excruciating pain and distress in the ward. Under a similar setup, for a second group of nurses in another ward, the researcher might arrange only a moderate amount of emo- tional support, employing only the lab technicians and excluding doctors. The third ward might operate without any emotional support. If the experimenter’s theory is correct, then the reduction in the stress levels before and after the one- week period should be greatest for the nurses in the first ward, moderate for those in the second ward, and nil for the nurses in the third ward. Here we find that not only does the researcher collect data from nurses on their experienced stress at two different points in time, but she also “plays with” or manipulates the normal course of events by deliberately changing the amount of emotional support received by the nurses in two wards, while leaving things in the third ward unchanged. Here, the researcher has interfered more than minimally.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 119

Chapter

6

Elements of research design

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 111

Excessive interference

The above researcher, after conducting the previous experiments, feels that the results may or may not be valid since other external factors might have influenced the stress levels experienced by the nurses. For example, during that particular experimental week, the nurses in one or more wards may not have experienced high levels of stress because there were no serious illnesses or deaths in the ward. Hence, the emotional support received might not be related to the level of stress experienced. The researcher might now want to make sure that such extraneous factors as might affect the cause-and-effect relationship are controlled. So she might take three groups of medical students, put them in different rooms, and confront all of them with the same stressful task. For example, she might ask them to describe in the minutest detail, the procedures in performing surgery on a patient who has not responded to chemother- apy and keep bombarding them with more and more questions even as they respond. Although all are exposed to the same intensive questioning, one group might get help from a doctor who voluntarily offers clarification and help when students stumble. In the second group, a doctor might be nearby, but might offer clarification and help only if the group seeks it. In the third group, there is no doctor present and no help is available. In this case, not only is the support manipulated, but even the setting in which this experiment is conducted is arti- ficial inasmuch as the researcher has taken the subjects away from their normal environment and put them in a totally different setting. Here, the researcher has intervened maximally with the normal setting, the participants, and their duties. In Chapter 10 we will see why such manipulations are necessary to establish cause-and-effect relationships beyond any doubt.

As we have seen, the extent of researcher interference depends on whether the study is correlational or causal and also the importance of establishing a causal relationship beyond any doubt whatever.

6.4 STUDY SETTING: CONTRIVED AND NONCONTRIVED

As we have just seen, business research can be done in the natural environment where events proceeds normally (i.e., in noncontrived settings) or in artificial, contrived settings. Correlational studies are invariably conducted in noncontrived settings, whereas most causal studies are done in contrived lab settings.

Correlational studies done in noncontrived settings are called field studies. Stud- ies conducted to establish cause-and-effect relationships using the same natural environment in which the subjects under study (employees, consumers, managers, and the like) normally function are called field experiments. Here, as we have seen earlier, the researcher does interfere with the natural occurrence of events inas- much as the independent variable is manipulated. For example, a manager wanting to know the effects of pay on performance should raise the salary of employees in one unit, decrease the pay of employees in another unit, and leave the pay of the employees in a third unit untouched. Here there is a tampering with, or manipu- lating of, the pay system to establish a cause-and-effect relationship between pay and performance, but the study is still conducted in the natural setting and hence is called a field experiment.

Experiments done to establish a cause-and-effect relationship beyond the possibil- ity of the least doubt require the creation of an artificial, contrived environment in which all the extraneous factors are strictly controlled. Similar subjects are chosen carefully to respond to certain manipulated stimuli. These studies are referred to as lab experiments. Let us give some further examples to understand the differences

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 120

Chapter

6

Research Methods for Business

112 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

among a field study (a noncontrived setting with minimal researcher interference), a field experiment (noncontrived setting but with researcher interference to a mod- erate extent), and a lab experiment (a contrived setting with researcher interference to an excessive degree).

Field study

A bank manager wants to analyze the relationship between interest rates and bank deposit patterns of clients. She tries to correlate the two by looking at deposits into different kinds of accounts (such as savings, certificates of deposit, golden passbooks, and interest-bearing checking accounts) as interest rates change. This is a field study where the bank manager has merely taken the bal- ances in various types of account and correlated them to the changes in interest rates. Research here is done in a noncontrived setting with no interference with the normal work routine.

Field experiment

The bank manager now wants to determine the cause-and-effect relationship between the interest rate and the inducement it offers to clients to save and deposit money in the bank. She selects four branches within a 60-mile radius for the experiment. For one week only, she advertises the annual rate for new certificates of deposit received during that week in the following manner: the interest rate will be 9% in one branch, 8% in another, and 10% in the third. In the fourth branch, the interest rate remains unchanged at 5%. Within the week, she will be able to determine the effects, if any, of interest rates on deposit mobilization.

The above is a field experiment since nothing but the interest rate is manipu- lated, with all activities occurring in the normal and natural work environment. Hopefully, all four branches chosen will be more or less compatible in size, num- ber of depositors, deposit patterns, and the like, so that the interest−savings relationships are not influenced by some third factor. But it is possible that some other factors might affect the findings. For example, one of the areas may have more retirees who may not have additional disposable income to deposit, despite the attraction of a good interest rate. The banker may not have been aware of this fact while setting up the experiment.

Lab experiment

The banker in the previous example may now want to establish the causal connection between interest rates and savings, beyond a doubt. Because of this, she wants to create an artificial environment and trace the true cause- and-effect relationship. She recruits 40 students who are all business majors in their final year of study and are more or less of the same age. She splits them into four groups and gives each one of them chips that count for $1000, which they are told they might utilize to buy their needs, or save for the future, or both. She offers them, by way of incentive, interest on what they save but manipulates the interest rates by offering a 6% interest rate on savings for group 1, 8% for group 2, 9% for group 3, and keeps the interest at the low rate of 1% for group 4.

Here, the manager has created an artificial laboratory environment and has manipulated the interest rates for savings. She has also chosen subjects with similar backgrounds and exposure to financial matters (business students). If the banker finds that the savings by the four groups increase progressively, keeping in step with the increasing rates of interest, she will be able to establish

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 121

Chapter

6

Elements of research design

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 113

a cause-and-effect relationship between interest rates and the disposition to save.

In this lab experiment with the contrived setting, the researcher interference has been maximal, inasmuch as the setting is different, the independent variable has been manipulated, and most external nuisance factors such as age and experience have been controlled.

Experimental designs are discussed more fully in Chapter 10. However, the above examples show us that it is important to decide the various design details before conducting the research study, since one decision criterion might have an impact on others. For example, if one wants to conduct an exploratory or a descriptive study, then the necessity for the researcher to interfere with the normal course of events will be minimal. However, if causal connections are to be established, experimental designs need to be set up either within a setting where the events normally occur (a field experiment) or in an artificially created laboratory setting (a lab experiment).

In summary, we have thus far made a distinction among (1) field studies, where various factors are examined in the natural setting in which daily activities go on as normal with minimal researcher interference, (2) field experiments, where cause- and-effect relationships are studied with some amount of researcher interference, but still in the natural setting where events continue in the normal fashion, and (3) lab experiments, where the researcher explores cause-and-effect relationships, not only exercising a high degree of control but also in an artificial and deliber- ately created setting. In Chapter 10 we will see the advantages and disadvantages of using contrived and noncontrived settings for establishing cause-and-effect rela- tionships.

6.5 RESEARCH STRATEGIES

6.5.1 Experiments

Experiments are usually associated with deductive research and a scientific or hypothetico-deductive approach to research. Earlier in this chapter, we have explained that experimental designs are often used to establish causal relationships. As you might expect, experimental designs are less useful for many other − exploratory and/or descriptive − business and management questions. Chapter 10 discusses lab experiments and field experiments, manipulation, controlling “nuisance” vari- ables, factors affecting the validity of experiments, and various types of experiments in considerable detail.

6.5.2 Survey research

A survey is a system for collecting information from or about people to describe, compare, or explain their knowledge, attitudes, and behavior (Fink, 2003). According to Fink, the survey system includes setting objectives for data collection, designing the study, preparing a reliable and valid survey instrument, administering the survey, managing and analyzing survey data, and reporting the results. The survey strategy is very popular in business research, because it allows the researcher to collect quantitative and qualitative data on many types of research questions. Indeed, surveys are used in exploratory, descriptive, and in causal research to collect data about people, events, or situations. For instance, in a business context, surveys are often taken on the subject of consumer decision making, customer satisfaction, job satisfaction, the use of health services, management information systems, and the like. A large number of such surveys are one-time surveys. Other surveys are

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 122

Chapter

6

Research Methods for Business

114 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

continuing, allowing the researcher to observe changes over time. The questions in survey instruments are typically arranged into self-administered questionnaires that a respondent completes on his/her own, either on paper or via the computer. Other survey instruments are interviews and structured observations. Interviews are discussed in Chapter 7, structured observations in Chapter 8, and self-administered questionnaires in Chapter 9.

6.5.3 Observation

A helpful strategy to collect data on actions and behavior of people is observa- tion. Observation involves going into the natural setting of people, watching what they do, and describing, analyzing, and interpreting what one has seen. Chapter 8 defines observation as the planned watching, recording, analysis, and interpreta- tion of behavior, actions, or events. Sometimes observation is labeled more broadly to involve also the use of other methods such as interviews. Various approaches of observation have been used in business research, distinguished by four key dimensions that characterize the way observation is conducted: control (are the observations conducted in an artificial or in a natural setting), whether the observer is a member of the group that is observed or not (participant versus non-participant observation), structure (to what extent the observation is focused, predetermined, systematic, and quantitative in nature), and concealment of observation (are the members of the social group under study apprised of the fact that they are being studied or not). We will have more to say about these various approaches to obser- vation in Chapter 8.

6.5.4 Case studies

Case studies focus on collecting information about a specific object, event or activity, such as a particular business unit or organization. In case studies, the case is the individual, the group, the organization, the event, or the situation the researcher is interested in. The idea behind a case study is that in order to obtain a clear picture of a problem one must examine the real-life situation from various angles and perspectives using multiple methods of data collection. Along these lines, one may define a case study as a research strategy that involves an empirical investigation of a particular contemporary phenomenon within its real-life context using multiple methods of data collection (Yin, 2009). It should be noted that case studies may provide both qualitative and quantitative data for analysis and interpretation. As in experimental research, hypotheses can be developed in case studies as well. However, if a particular hypothesis has not been substantiated in even a single other case study, no support can be established for the alternate hypothesis developed.

6.5.5 Grounded theory

Grounded theory is a systematic set of procedures to develop an inductively derived theory from the data (Strauss & Corbin, 1990). Important tools of grounded theory are theoretical sampling, coding, and constant comparison. Theoretical sampling is “the process of data collection for generating theory whereby the analyst jointly collects, codes, and analyzes the data and decides what data to collect next and where to find them, in order to develop his theory as it emerges” (Glaser & Strauss, 1967, p. 45). In constant comparison you compare data (for instance, an interview) to other data (for instance, another interview). After a theory has emerged from this process you compare new data with your theory. If there is a bad fit between data (interviews), or between the data and your theory, then the categories and theories have to be modified until your categories and your theory fit the data. In

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 123

Chapter

6

Elements of research design

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 115

constant comparison, discrepant and disconfirming cases play an important role in rendering categories and (grounded) theory.

6.5.6 Action research

Action research is sometimes undertaken by consultants who want to initiate change processes in organizations. In other words, action research methodology is most appropriate while effecting planned changes. Here, the researcher begins with a problem that is already identified, and gathers relevant data to provide a tentative problem solution. This solution is then implemented, with the knowledge that there may be unintended consequences following such implementation. The effects are then evaluated, defined, and diagnosed, and the research continues on an ongoing basis until the problem is fully resolved. Thus, action research is a constantly evolving project with interplay among problem, solution, effects or consequences, and new solution. A sensible and realistic problem definition and creative ways of collecting data are critical to action research.

6.5.7 Mixed methods

Earlier in this chapter we have explained that qualitative, exploratory studies are often carried out to better understand the nature of a problem since very few studies might have been conducted in that area. Extensive interviews with many people might have to be undertaken to get a handle on the situation and understand the phenomenon. When the data reveal some pattern regarding the phenomenon of interest, theories are developed and hypotheses formulated. More rigorous meth- ods, such as an experimental method, for instance, are subsequently used to test these hypotheses. Along these lines, combinations of methods are used in many studies. For example, Henry Mintzberg interviewed managers to explore the nature of managerial work. Based on the analysis of his interview data, he formulated the- ories of managerial roles, the nature and types of managerial activities, and so on. These have been tested in different settings through both interviews and question- naire surveys.

Triangulation is a technique that is also often associated with using mixed methods. The idea behind triangulation is that one can be more confident in a result if the use of different methods or sources leads to the same results. Triangulation requires that research is addressed from multiple perspectives. Several kinds of triangulation are possible:

• Method triangulation: using multiple methods of data collection and analysis.

• Data triangulation: collecting data from several sources and/or at different time periods.

• Researcher triangulation: multiple researchers collect and/or analyze the data.

• Theory triangulation: multiple theories and/or perspectives are used to inter- pret and explain the data.

6.6 UNIT OF ANALYSIS: INDIVIDUALS, DYADS, GROUPS, ORGANIZATIONS, CULTURES

The unit of analysis refers to the level of aggregation of the data collected during the subsequent data analysis stage. If, for instance, the problem statement focuses on how to raise the motivational levels of employees in general, then we are interested in individual employees in the organization and have to find out what we can do

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 124

Chapter

6

Research Methods for Business

116 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

to raise their motivation. Here the unit of analysis is the individual. We will be looking at the data gathered from each individual and treating each employee’s response as an individual data source. If the researcher is interested in studying two-person interactions, then several two-person groups, also known as dyads, will become the unit of analysis. Analysis of husband−wife interactions in families and supervisor−subordinate relationships in the workplace are good examples of dyads as the unit of analysis. However, if the problem statement is related to group effectiveness, then the unit of analysis will be at the group level. In other words, even though we may gather relevant data from all individuals comprising, say, six groups, we aggregate the individual data into group data so as to see the differences among the six groups. If we are comparing different departments in the organization, then the data analysis will be done at the departmental level− that is, the individuals in the department will be treated as one unit− and comparisons made by treating the department as the unit of analysis.

Our research question determines the unit of analysis. For example, if we wish to study group decision-making patterns, we will probably be examining such aspects as group size, group structure, cohesiveness, and the like, in trying to explain the variance in group decision making. Here, our main interest is not in studying indi- vidual decision making but group decision making, and we will be studying the dynamics that operate in several different groups and the factors that influence group decision making. In such a case, the unit of analysis will be groups.

As our research question addresses issues that move away from the individual to dyads, and to groups, organizations, and even nations, so also does the unit of analysis shift from individuals to dyads, groups, organizations, and nations. The characteristic of these “levels of analysis” is that the lower levels are subsumed within the higher levels. Thus, if we study buying behavior, we have to collect data from, say, 60 individuals, and analyze the data. If we want to study group dynamics, we may need to study, say, six or more groups, and then analyze the data gathered by examining the patterns in each of the groups. If we want to study cultural differences among nations, we will have to collect data from different countries and study the underlying patterns of culture in each country. Some critical issues in cross-cultural research are discussed in later chapters.

Individuals do not have the same characteristics as groups (e.g., structure, cohes- iveness), and groups do not have the same characteristics as individuals (e.g., IQ, stamina). There are variations in the perceptions, attitudes, and behaviors of people in different cultures. Hence, the nature of the information gathered, as well as the level at which data are aggregated for analysis, are integral to decisions made on the choice of the unit of analysis.

It is necessary to decide on the unit of analysis even as we formulate the research question, since the data collection methods, sample size, and even the variables included in the framework may sometimes be determined or guided by the level at which data are aggregated for analysis.

Let us examine some research scenarios that would call for different units of analysis.

Individuals as the unit of analysis

The Chief Financial Officer of a manufacturing company wants to know how many of the staff would be interested in attending a three-day seminar on making appropriate investment decisions. For this purpose, data will have to be collected from each individual staff member and the unit of analysis is the individual.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 125

Chapter

6

Elements of research design

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 117

Dyads as the unit of analysis

Having read about the benefits of mentoring, a human resources manager wants to first identify the number of employees in three departments of the organization who are in mentoring relationships, and then find out what the jointly perceived benefits (i.e., by both the mentor and the one mentored) of such a relationship are. Here, once the mentor and the mentored pairs are identified, their joint perceptions can be obtained by treating each pair as one unit. Hence, if the manager wants data from a sample of 10 pairs, he will have to deal with 20 individuals, a pair at a time. The information obtained from each pair will be a data point for subsequent analysis. Thus, the unit of analysis here is the dyad.

Groups as the unit of analysis

A manager wants to see the patterns of usage of the newly installed information system (IS) by the production, sales, and operations personnel. Here, three groups of personnel are involved and information on the number of times the IS is used by each member in each of the three groups, as well as other relevant issues, will be collected and analyzed. The final results will indicate the mean usage of the system per day or month for each group. Here, the unit of analysis is the group.

Divisions as the unit of analysis

Procter & Gamble wants to see which of its various divisions (soap, paper, oil, etc.) have made profits of over 12% during the current year. Here, the profits of each of the divisions will be examined and the information aggregated across the various geographical units of the division. Hence, the unit of analysis will be the division, at which level the data will be aggregated.

Industry as the unit of analysis

An employment survey specialist wants to see the proportion of the work- force employed by the health care, utilities, transportation, and manufacturing industries. In this case, the researcher has to aggregate the data relating to each of the subunits comprised in each of the industries and report the proportions of the workforce employed at the industry level. The health care industry, for instance, includes hospitals, nursing homes, mobile units, small and large clin- ics, and other health care providing facilities. The data from these subunits will have to be aggregated to see how many employees are employed by the health care industry. This will need to be done for each of the other industries.

Countries as the unit of analysis

The Chief Financial Officer (CFO) of a multinational corporation wants to know the profits made during the past five years by each of the subsidiaries in England, Germany, France, and Spain. It is possible that there are many regional offices of these subsidiaries in each of these countries. The profits of the various regional centers for each country have to be aggregated and the profits for each country for the past five years provided to the CFO. In other words, the data will now have to be aggregated at the country level. As can be easily seen, the data collection and sampling processes become more cumbersome at higher levels of units of analysis (industry, country) than at the lower levels (individuals and dyads). It is obvious that the unit of analysis has to be clearly identified as dictated by the research question. Sampling plan decisions will also be governed by the unit of analysis. For example, if I compare two cultures, for instance those of India and the United States −where my unit of analysis is the country − my sample size will be only two, despite the fact that I shall have to gather

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 126

Chapter

6

Research Methods for Business

118 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

data from several hundred individuals from a variety of organizations in the different regions of each country, incurring huge costs. However, if my unit of analysis is individuals (as when studying the buying patterns of customers in the southern part of the United States), I may perhaps limit the collection of data to a representative sample of a hundred individuals in that region and conduct my study at a low cost!

It is now even easier to see why the unit of analysis should be given serious consid- eration even as the research question is being formulated and the research design planned.

6.7 TIME HORIZON: CROSS-SECTIONAL VERSUS LONGITUDINAL STUDIES

6.7.1 Cross-sectional studies

A study can be undertaken in which data are gathered just once, perhaps over a period of days or weeks or months, in order to answer a research question. Such studies are called one-shot or cross-sectional studies (see the following example).

EXAMPLE

Data were collected from stock brokers between April and June of last year to study their concerns in a turbulent stock market. Data with respect to this particular research had not been collected before, nor will they be collected again for this research.

A drug company wanting to invest in research for a new obesity (reduction) pill conducted a survey among obese people to see how many of them would be interested in trying the new pill. This is a one-shot or cross-sectional study to assess the likely demand for the new product.

The purpose of the studies in the two foregoing examples was to collect data that would be pertinent to finding the answer to a research question. Data collection at one point in time was sufficient. Both were cross-sectional designs.

6.7.2 Longitudinal studies

In some cases, however, the researcher might want to study people or phenomena at more than one point in time in order to answer the research question. For instance, the researcher might want to study employees’ behavior before and after a change in the top management, so as to know what effects the change accomplished. Here, because data are gathered at two different points in time, the study is not cross- sectional or of the one-shot kind, but is carried longitudinally across a period of time. Such studies, as when data on the dependent variable are gathered at two or more points in time to answer the research question, are called longitudinal studies.

EXAMPLE

UPS experienced a shutdown for 15 days during the Teamsters’ walkout and its clients shifted their business to other carriers such as FedEx and the US Postal Service. After the termination of the strike, UPS tried to woo its customers back through several strategies and collected data month after month to see

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 127

Chapter

6

Elements of research design

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 119

what progress was being made in this regard. Here, data were collected every month to assess whether UPS had regained the business volume. Since data were collected at various points in time to answer the same research question (have we regained lost ground?), the study was a longitudinal one.

A marketing manager is interested in tracing the pattern of sales of a particular product in four different regions of the country on a quarterly basis for the next two years. Since data will be collected several times to answer the same issue (tracing pattern of sales), the study falls into the longitudinal category.

Longitudinal studies take more time and effort and cost more than cross-sectional studies. However, well-planned longitudinal studies can, among other things, help to identify cause-and-effect relationships. For example, one could study the sales volume of a product before and after an advertisement, and provided other environ- mental changes have not impacted on the results, one could attribute the increase in the sales volume, if any, to the advertisement. If there is no increase in sales, one could conclude that either the advertisement is ineffective or it will take a longer time to take effect.

Experimental designs invariably are longitudinal studies, since data are collected both before and after a manipulation. Field studies may also be longitudinal. For example, a study of the comparison data pertaining to the reactions of managers in a company toward working women now and ten years later will be a longitudinal field study. Most field studies conducted, however, are cross-sectional in nature often because of the time, effort, and costs involved in collecting data over several time periods. Longitudinal studies will certainly be necessary if a manager wants to keep track of certain factors (e.g., sales, advertising effectiveness, etc.) over a period of time to assess improvements, or to detect possible causal connections (sales promotions and actual sales data; frequency of drug testing and reduction in drug usage, etc.). Though more expensive, longitudinal studies offer some good insights.

6.8 REVIEW OF ELEMENTS OF RESEARCH DESIGN

This concludes the discussions on the basic design issues regarding the purpose of the study, the research strategy, extent of researcher interference, study setting, unit of analysis, and the time horizon. The researcher determines the appropriate decisions to be made in the study design based on the research perspective of the investigator, the problem definition, the research objectives, the research questions, the extent of rigor desired, and practical considerations. Sometimes, because of the time and costs involved, a researcher might be constrained to settle for less than the “ideal” research design. For instance, the researcher might have to conduct a cross- sectional instead of a longitudinal study, do a field study rather than an experimental design, choose a smaller rather than a larger sample size, and so on, thus suboptim- izing the research design decisions and settling for a lower level of scientific rigor because of resource constraints. This trade-off between rigor and resources will be a deliberate and conscious decision made by the manager/researcher based on the scope of, and reasons for, the study, and will have to be explicitly stated in any writ- ten research proposal. Compromises so made also account for why management studies are not entirely scientific, as discussed in Chapter 2.

The researcher has to be very clear about each aspect discussed in this chapter before embarking on data collection.

Now do Exercises 6.1, 6.2, 6.3, 6.4.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 128

Chapter

6

Research Methods for Business

120 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Exercises 6.1

Would this be a causal or a correlational study? Why?

Is this an exploratory, a descriptive, or a causal study? Why?

What kind of a study would this be: field study, lab experiment, or field experi- ment? Why?

What would be the unit of analysis? Why?

Would this be a cross-sectional or a longitudinal study? Why?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 129

Chapter

6

Elements of research design

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 121

Exercises 6.2

You want to examine how exposure to thin or heavy models in advertisements influences a person’s self-esteem. You believe that the effect of exposure to models in advertisements depends on the extremity of the model’s thinness or heaviness. Discuss the design decisions that you as a researcher will make to investigate this issue, giving reasons for your choices.

Exercises 6.3

You want to investigate the specific effects of specific emotions on customers’ behavioral responses to failed service encounters across industries. Discuss the design decisions that you as a researcher will make to investigate this issue, giving reasons for your choices.

Exercises 6.4

Dr Larry Norton of Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center predicts that can- cer treatment will undergo major changes. Several drugs are being developed to battle cancer without harming healthy tissue. It is a question of discovering which of these drugs does the job best. Design a study that would help find which drug would do the trick.

6.9 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS

Knowledge about research design issues helps the manager to understand what the researcher is attempting to do. The manager also understands why the reports sometimes indicate data analytic results based on small sample sizes, when a lot of time has been spent in collecting data from several scores of individuals, as in the case of studies involving groups, departments, or branch offices.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 130

Chapter

6

Research Methods for Business

122 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

One of the important decisions a manager has to make before starting a study per- tains to how rigorous the study ought to be. Knowing that more rigorous research designs consume more resources, the manager is in a position to weigh the gravity of the problem experienced and decide what kind of design will yield acceptable results in an efficient manner. For example, the manager might decide that know- ledge of which variables are associated with employee performance is good enough to enhance performance results and there is no need to ferret out the cause. Such a decision would result not only in economy in resources, but also cause the least disruption to the smooth flow of work for employees and preclude the need for col- lecting data longitudinally. Knowledge of interconnections among various aspects of the research design helps managers to call for the most effective study, after weighing the nature and magnitude of the problem encountered, and the type of solution desired.

One of the main advantages in fully understanding the difference between causal and correlational studies is that managers do not fall into the trap of making implicit causal assumptions when two variables are only associated with each other. They realize that A could cause B, or B could cause A, or both A and B could covary because of some third variable.

Knowledge of research design details also helps managers to study and intelligently comment on research proposals.

SUMMARY

In this chapter we examined the basic research design issues and the choice points available to the manager/researcher. We discussed the situations in which explor- atory, descriptive, and causal studies are called for. We examined causal versus cor- relational studies, and the implications of either for determining the study setting, the extent of researcher interference, the research strategy, and the time horizon of the study. We noted that the unit of analysis refers to the level at which data are aggregated for analysis, and that the time horizon of studies may be one-shot or longitudinal. Finally, we examined the circumstances in which each design decision would be appropriate.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

Scenario 1 A specific department within an organization has a high turnover rate; employees of this department have a shorter average tenure than those of other departments in the company. Skilled workers are leaving and the worker population contains a high percentage of novice workers. Ms Joyce Lynn has no idea what is going on and wants to know more about what is happening. Scenario 2 Mr Paul Hodge, the owner of several restaurants on the East Coast, is concerned about the wide differences in their profit margins. He would like to try some incentive plans for increasing the efficiency levels of those restaurants that lag behind. But before he actually does this, he would like to be assured that the idea will work. He asks a researcher to help him on this issue. Scenario 3 A manager is intrigued as to why some people seem to derive joy from work and get energized by it, while others find it troublesome and frustrating.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 131

Chapter

6

Elements of research design

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 123

What are the basic research design issues? Describe them in some detail.

Why is it important to consider basic design issues before conducting the study and even as early as at the time of formulating the research question?

Is a field study totally out of the question if one is trying to establish cause-and- effect relationships?

“An exploratory study is just as useful as a causal study.” Discuss this statement.

Why is the unit of analysis an integral part of the research design?

Discuss the interrelationships among noncontrived setting, the purpose of the study, researcher interference, research strategy, and time horizon of study.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 132

Chapter

6

Research Methods for Business

124 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Below are three scenarios. Indicate how the researcher should proceed in each case; that is, determine the following, giving reasons:

The purpose of the study

The extent of researcher interference

The study setting

The research strategy

The time horizon for the study

The unit of analysis.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 133

Chapter

7

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 125

Chapter 7

Data collection methods: Introduction and interviews

Topics discussed:

� Sources of data

� Methods of data collection

� Interviewing

� Projective methods

Chapter objectives

After completing Chapter 7 you should be able to:

1. Know the difference between primary and secondary data and their sources.

2. Know that the three main data collection methods in survey research are interviewing, observing people, and administering questionnaires.

3. Know the difference between unstructured and structured interviews.

4. Be aware of the advantages and disadvantages of personal interviews and telephone interviews.

5. Be able to demonstrate your skills in interviewing others to collect data.

Having discussed a number of basic issues in research design in the previous chapter, we will now turn to the various sources of data and the ways in which data can be gathered for answering the research questions. The three main data collection methods in survey research are interviewing, observing people, and administering questionnaires. The source of the information and the manner in which data are collected could well make a big difference to the effectiveness of the research project.

In this chapter, we will first examine the sources of data and then discuss inter- viewing and projective tests. In the next two chapters we will subsequently discuss observation and questionnaires. Managerial implications and ethics in data collec- tion are discussed in Chapter 9 after we have discussed interviewing, observation, and questionnaires in detail in the next three chapters.

7.1 SOURCES OF DATA

Data can be obtained from primary or secondary sources. Primary data refer to information obtained first-hand by the researcher on the variables of interest for the specific purpose of the study. Secondary data refer to information gathered from sources that already exist, as we saw in Chapter 3 while discussing preliminary information gathering.

Some examples of sources of primary data are individuals, focus groups, panels of respondents specifically set up by the researcher and from whom opinions may be sought on specific issues from time to time, or some unobtrusive sources such as a trash can.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 134

Chapter

7

Research Methods for Business

126 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Data can also be obtained from secondary sources, for example, company records or archives, government publications, industry analyses offered by the media, web- sites, the Internet, and so on. In some cases, the environment or particular settings and events may themselves be sources of data, for example, studying the layout of a plant.

We will first examine the four main primary sources of data − individuals, focus groups, panels, and unobtrusive methods−and then discuss the secondary sources.

7.1.1 Primary sources of data

Individuals provide information when interviewed, administered questionnaires, or observed. Group depth interviews, or focus groups, are another rich source of primary data.

Focus groups

Focus groups consist typically of eight to ten members with a moderator leading the discussions for about two hours on a particular topic, concept, or product. Members are generally chosen on the basis of their expertise in the topic on which information is sought. For example, computer specialists may be selected to form a focus group to discuss matters related to computers and computing, and women with children may compose a focus group to identify how organizations can help working mothers.

The focus sessions are aimed at obtaining respondents’ impressions, interpreta- tions, and opinions, as the members talk about the event, concept, product, or service. The moderator plays a vital role in steering the discussions in a manner that draws out the information sought, and keeps the members on track.

Focus group discussions on a specific topic at a particular location and at a specified time provide the opportunity for a flexible, free-flowing format for the members. The unstructured and spontaneous responses are expected to reflect the genuine opinions, ideas, and feelings of the members about the topic under discussion. Focus groups are relatively inexpensive and can provide fairly dependable data within a short time frame.

Role of the moderator

The selection of and role played by the moderator are critical. The moderator intro- duces the topic, observes, and takes notes and/or tapes the discussions. The moder- ator never becomes an integral part of the discussions, but merely steers the group persuasively to obtain all the relevant information, and helps the group members to get through any impasse that might occur. The moderator also ensures that all members participate in the discussion and that no member dominates the group. Someone from the research team may also observe the proceedings through a one- way mirror, listening to the verbal statements and noticing the nonverbal cues of the members.

The nature of data obtained through focus groups

It should be noted that although data obtained through these homogeneous group members are less expensive than those obtained through the various other data col- lection methods, and also lend themselves for quick analysis, the content analysis of the data so obtained provides only qualitative and not quantitative information. Also, since the members are not selected scientifically to reflect the opinions of

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 135

Chapter

7

Data collection methods: Introduction and interviews

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 127

the population at large (see Chapter 13 on Sampling for more details on this), their opinions cannot be considered to be truly representative. However, when explorat- ory information is collected as a basis for further scientific research, focus groups serve an important function. Consider, for example, the value of focus groups in exploring the concept of “intellectual property.” When animated discussions take place, there is a serendipitous flow of new ideas among the group members who discuss the nuances of each thought process. Researchers are thereby helped to obtain valuable insights from the snowballing effects of the discussions.

Videoconferencing

If regional variations in responses are expected, several focus groups could be formed, including trained moderators, at different locations. This process is eas- ily facilitated through videoconferencing. By zooming in on a particular member, the nonverbal cues and gestures of that individual can be captured, as and when desired. This also obviates the need for an observer looking through a one-way mirror.

With the great strides made in technological advancement, and with the facility for communication with the moderator by relaying instant messages, videoconferen- cing as a means of gathering information from different groups in distant locations is indeed a promising prospect for the future.

It should be noted that online focus groups are also common. Email, websites, and Internet chat rooms facilitate focus group sessions as well.

In sum, focus groups are used for:

1. Exploratory studies.

2. Making generalizations based on the information generated by them.

3. Conducting sample surveys.

Focus groups have been credited with enlightening investigators as to why certain products are not doing well, why certain advertising strategies are effective, why specific management techniques do not work, and the like.

Panels

Panels, like focus groups, are another source of primary information for research purposes. Whereas focus groups meet for a one-time group session, panels (of members) meet more than once. In cases where the effects of certain interventions or changes are to be studied over a period of time, panel studies are very useful. Individuals are randomly chosen to serve as panel members for a research study. For instance, if the effects of a proposed advertisement for a certain brand of coffee are to be assessed quickly, the panel members can be exposed to the advertisement and their intentions of purchasing that brand assessed. This can be taken as the response that could be expected of consumers if, in fact, they had been exposed to the advertisement. A few months later, the product manager might think of introducing a change to the flavor of the same product and might explore its effects on this panel. Thus, a continuing set of “experts” serves as the sample base or the sounding board for assessing the effects of change. Such expert members compose the panel, and research that uses them is called a panel study.

The Nielsen television index is based on the television viewing patterns of a panel. The index is designed to provide estimates of the size and nature of the audience for

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 136

Chapter

7

Research Methods for Business

128 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

individual television programs. The data are gathered through audimeter instru- ments hooked to television sets in approximately 1200 cooperating households. The audimeters are connected to a central computer, which records when the set is turned on and spotlights what channel is tuned. From these data, Nielsen develops estimates of the number and percentage of all TV households viewing a given TV show.

Other panels used in marketing research include the National Purchase Diary Panel, the National Family Opinion Panel, and the Consumer Mail Panel.

Static and dynamic panels

Panels can be either a static panel (i.e., the same members serve on the panel over extended periods of time) or a dynamic panel (i.e., the panel members change from time to time as various phases of the study are in progress). The main advantage of the static panel is that it offers a good and sensitive measurement of the changes that take place between two points in time − a much better alternative than using two different groups at two different times. The disadvantage, however, is that the panel members could become so sensitized to the changes as a result of the endless continuous interviews that their opinions might no longer be representative of those held by others in the population. Members could also drop out of the panel from time to time for various reasons, thus raising issues of bias due to mortality. The advantages and disadvantages of the dynamic panel are the reverse of those discussed for the static panel.

The Delphi Technique

The Delphi Technique is a forecasting method that uses a cautiously selected panel of experts in a systematic, interactive manner. These experts answer questionnaires in two or more rounds. In the first round they are asked to answer a series of questions on the likelihood of a future scenario or any other issue about which there is unsure or incomplete knowledge. The contributions from all the experts are then collected, summarized, and fed back in the form of a second-round questionnaire. After reviewing the first-round results, the experts assess the same issue once more, taking the opinions of other experts into account. This process goes on until it is stopped by the researcher. The rationale behind this iterative process is that it eventually may lead to a consensus about the issue that is being investigated.

The identity of participants is usually not revealed, even after the completion of the final report. This should prevent some experts from dominating others, allow experts to unreservedly express their opinions, and encourage experts to admit mistakes, if any, by revising their earlier judgments. The Delphi Technique has been widely used for long-run business forecasting.

In sum, a panel is a source of direct information. Panels may be static or dynamic, and are typically used when several aspects of a product are to be studied from time to time.

Unobtrusive measures

Unobtrusive measures, or trace measures as they are also called, originate from a primary source that does not involve people. One example is the wear and tear of journals in a university library, which offers a good indication of their popularity, frequency of use, or both. The number of different brands of soft drink cans found in trash bags also provides a measure of their consumption levels. Signatures on checks exposed to ultraviolet rays could indicate the extent of forgery and fraud; actuarial records are good sources for collecting data on the births, marriages, and

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 137

Chapter

7

Data collection methods: Introduction and interviews

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 129

deaths in a community; company records disclose a lot of personal information about employees, the level of company efficiency, and other data as well. Thus, these unobtrusive sources of data and their use are also important in research.

7.1.2 Secondary sources of data

Secondary data are indispensable for most business research. As discussed in Chapter 3, secondary data refer to information gathered by someone other than the researcher conducting the current study.

There are several sources of secondary data, including books and periodicals, gov- ernment publications of economic indicators, census data, statistical abstracts, databases (as discussed in Chapter 4), the media, annual reports of companies, etc. Case studies and other archival records− sources of secondary data− provide a lot of information for research and problem solving. Such data are, as we have seen, mostly qualitative in nature. Also included in secondary sources are schedules maintained for, or by, key personnel in organizations, the desk calendar of execut- ives, and speeches delivered by them. Much of this internal information, though, may be proprietary and not accessible to all.

Financial databases readily available for research are also secondary data sources. The Compustat database contains information on thousands of companies organ- ized by industry, and information on global companies is also available through Compustat.

The advantage of seeking secondary data sources is savings in time and costs of acquiring information. However, secondary data as the sole source of information has the drawback of becoming obsolete, and not meeting the specific needs of the particular situation or setting. Hence, it is important to refer to sources that offer current and up-to-date information.

Having examined the various sources of data, let us now look at data collection methods.

7.2 METHODS OF DATA COLLECTION

Data collection methods are an integral part of research design, as shown in the shaded portion of Figure 7.1. There are several data collection methods, each with its advantages and disadvantages. Problems researched with the use of appropriate methods greatly enhance the value of the research.

Data can be collected in a variety of ways, in different settings − field or lab − and from different sources, as we have just discussed. Data collection methods include interviews (face-to-face interviews, telephone interviews, computer-assisted inter- views, and interviews through electronic media); observation of individuals and events, with or without videotaping or audio recording; questionnaires, which can be personally administered, sent through the mail, or electronically administered; and a variety of motivational techniques such as projective tests. Interviewing, observing people and phenomena, and administering questionnaires are the three main data collection methods in survey research.

Projective tests and other motivational techniques are also sometimes used to tap variables. In such cases, respondents are usually asked to write a story, complete a sentence, or offer their reactions to ambiguous cues such as inkblots or unlabeled pictures. It is assumed that the respondents project into the responses their own thoughts, feelings, attitudes, and expectations, all of which can be interpreted by trained psychologists.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 138

Chapter

7

Research Methods for Business

130 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Figure 7.1 Research design and how data collection methods fit in

Although interviewing has the advantage of flexibility in terms of adapting, adopt- ing, and changing the questions as the researcher proceeds with the interviews, questionnaires have the advantage of obtaining data more efficiently in terms of researcher time, energy, and costs. Unobtrusive methods of data collection, such as extraction from company records, have the advantage of accuracy. For instance, attendance records will probably give a truer and more reliable picture of the absenteeism of employees than information elicited directly from the respond- ents. Projective tests are usually administered by researchers who have had training in administering them and interpreting the results. Though some management research has been done using projective techniques, they are more frequently used in marketing research.

Modern technology is increasingly playing a key role in shaping methods of data collection. Computer-assisted surveys, which help with both the interviewing pro- cess and with preparing and administering questionnaires electronically, are on the increase. Computer-assisted telephone interviewing (CATI), interactive electronic telephonic surveys, as well as administering questionnaires through email, are now extensively being used to facilitate data gathering.

Some of the software available for questionnaire design, response data entry, data analysis, and web and email surveys are Statpac, SumQuest, Survey Software, Pro- fessional Quest, and Perseus.

The choice of data collection method depends on the facilities available, the degree of accuracy required, the expertise of the researcher, the time span of the study, and other costs and resources associated with and available for data gathering.

We will now consider the main data collection methods. We will examine interviews in this chapter, and discuss observation and self-administered questionnaires in Chapter 8 and Chapter 9, respectively.

7.3 INTERVIEWING

One method of collecting data is to interview respondents to obtain information on the issues of interest. Interviewing is a useful data collection method, especially

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 139

Chapter

7

Data collection methods: Introduction and interviews

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 131

during the exploratory stages of research. Where a large number of interviews are conducted with a number of different interviewers, it is important to train the interviewers with care in order to minimize interviewer bias manifested in such ways as voice inflections, differences in wording, and interpretation. Good training decreases interviewer bias.

Interviews may be unstructured or structured, and conducted face to face, by tele- phone, or online. Unstructured and structured interviews will be discussed first. Some important factors to be borne in mind while interviewing will then be detailed; next, the advantages and disadvantages of face-to-face interviewing and telephone interviews are considered; and, finally, computer-assisted interviews are described.

7.3.1 Unstructured and structured interviews

Unstructured interviews

Unstructured interviews are so labeled because the interviewer does not enter the interview setting with a planned sequence of questions to be asked of the respondent. A possible objective of an unstructured interview is to bring some preliminary issues to the surface so that the researcher can determine what factors need further in-depth investigation. In Chapter 3, in the discussion of the “broad problem area,” we saw several situations where the manager might entertain a vague idea of certain changes taking place in the situation without knowing what exactly they are. Such situations call for unstructured interviews with the people concerned.

Suppose that a manager is interested in solving a problem in the work setting. In order to understand the situation in its totality, the researcher may interview employees at several levels. In the initial stages, only broad, open-ended ques- tions should be asked, and the replies to them should inform the researcher of the perceptions of the individuals. The type and nature of the questions asked of the individuals might vary according to the job level and type of work done by them. For instance, top and middle-level managers might be asked more direct questions about their perceptions of the problem and the situation. Employees at lower levels may have to be approached differently.

Clerical and other employees at lower hierarchical levels may be asked broad, open- ended questions about their jobs and the work environment during unstructured interviews. Supervisors may be asked broad questions relating to their department, the employees under their supervision, and the organization. The following ques- tion, for instance, may be put to them during the unstructured interview stage:

Tell me something about your unit and department, and perhaps even the organization as a whole, in terms of work, employees, and whatever else you think is important.

Such a question might elicit an elaborate response from some people; others may just say that everything is fine. Following the leads from the more vocal persons is easy, especially when the interviewer listens carefully to the important messages that they might convey in a very casual manner while responding to a general, global question. As managers and researchers, we should train ourselves to develop these listening skills and identify the critical topics that are touched on. However, when some respondents give a monosyllabic, crisp, short reply that is not informative, the interviewer will have to ask questions that call for details and cannot be answered in one or two words. Such questions might be phrased like the one below:

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 140

Chapter

7

Research Methods for Business

132 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

I would like to know something about your job. Please describe to me in detail the things you do in your job on a typical day, from eight in the morning to four in the afternoon.

Several questions might then be asked as a follow-up to the answer. Some examples of such follow-up questions include:

Compared to other units in this organization, what are the strengths and weaknesses of your unit?

If you could have a problem solved in your unit, or a bottleneck eliminated, or something attended to that blocks your effectiveness, what would that be?

If the respondent answers that everything is fine and she has no problems, the interviewer could say: “That is great! Tell me what contributes to this effectiveness of your unit, because most other organizations usually experience several difficulties.” Such a questioning technique usually brings the respondent’s defenses down and makes him or her more amenable to sharing information. Typical of the revised responses to the original question would be something like, “Well, it is not that we never have a problem; sometimes there is delay in getting the jobs done, crash jobs have some defective items, . . . ” Encouraging the respondent to talk about both the good things and those not-so-good in the unit can elicit a lot of information. Whereas some respondents do not need much encouragement to speak, others do, and they have to be questioned broadly. Some respondents may show reluctance to be interviewed, and subtly or overtly refuse to cooperate. The wishes of such people must be respected and the interviewer should pleasantly terminate such interviews.

Employees at the shop-floor level, and other nonmanagerial and nonsupervisory employees, might be asked very broad questions relating to their jobs, work environ- ment, satisfactions and dissatisfactions at the workplace, and the like− for example:

What do you like about working here?

If you were to tell me which aspects of your job you like and which you do not, what would they be?

Tell me something about the reward systems in this place.

If you were offered a similar job elsewhere, how willing would you be to take it and why?

If I were to seek employment here and request you to describe your unit to me as a newcomer, what would you say?

After conducting a sufficient number of such unstructured interviews with employ- ees at several levels and studying the data obtained, the researcher would know the variables that needed greater focus and called for more in-depth information.

This sets the stage for the interviewer to conduct further structured interviews, for which the variables will have been identified.

Structured interviews

Structured interviews are those conducted when it is known at the outset what information is needed. The interviewer has a list of predetermined questions to be asked of the respondents either personally, through the telephone, or via the computer. The questions are likely to focus on factors that surfaced during the unstructured interviews and are considered relevant to the problem. As the respond- ents express their views, the researcher notes them down. The same questions will

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 141

Chapter

7

Data collection methods: Introduction and interviews

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 133

be asked of everybody in the same manner. Sometimes, however, based on the exigencies of the situation, the experienced researcher might take a lead from a respondent’s answer and ask other relevant questions not on the interview pro- tocol. Through this process, new factors might be identified, resulting in a deeper understanding. However, to be able to recognize a probable response, the inter- viewer must comprehend the purpose and goal of each question. This is particularly important when a team of trained interviewers conducts the survey.

Visual aids such as pictures, line drawings, cards, and other materials are also sometimes used in conducting interviews. The appropriate visuals are shown to the interviewees, who then indicate their responses to the questions posed. Marketing research, for example, benefits from such techniques in order to capture the likes and dislikes of customers with regard to different types of packaging, forms of advertising, and so on. Visual aids, including painting and drawing, are particularly useful when children are the focus of marketing research. Visual aids also come in handy while endeavoring to elicit certain thoughts and ideas that are difficult to express or awkward to articulate.

When a sufficient number of structured interviews has been conducted and adequate information obtained to understand and describe the important factors operating in the situation, the researcher stops the interviews. The information is then tabu- lated and the data analyzed. This helps the researcher to accomplish the task he set out to achieve, such as describing the phenomena, or quantifying them, or identi- fying the specific problem and evolving a theory of the factors that influence the problem, or finding answers to the research question. Much qualitative research is done in this manner.

Review of unstructured and structured interviews

The main purpose of the unstructured interview is to explore and probe into the several factors in the situation that might be central to the broad problem area. During this process it might become evident that the problem, as identified by the client, is but a symptom of a more serious and deep-rooted problem. Conducting unstructured interviews with many people could result in the identification of sev- eral critical factors in the situation. These would then be pursued further during structured interviews for eliciting more in-depth information on them. This helps identify the critical problem as well as ways of solving it. In applied research, a tent- ative theory of the factors contributing to the problem is often conceptualized on the basis of the information obtained from unstructured and structured interviews.

7.3.2 Training interviewers

When several long interviews are to be conducted, it is often not feasible for one indi- vidual to conduct all the interviews. A team of trained interviewers then becomes necessary. Interviewers have to be thoroughly briefed about the research and trained in how to start an interview, how to proceed with the questions, how to motivate respondents to answer, what to look for in the answers, and how to close an inter- view. They also need to be instructed about taking notes and coding the interview responses. The tips for interviewing, discussed later, should become a part of their repertoire for interviewing.

Good planning, proper training, offering clear guidelines to interviewers, and super- vising their work all help in profitably utilizing the interviewing technique as a viable data collection mechanism. Personal interviews provide rich data when respond- ents spontaneously offer information, in the sense that their answers do not typically fall within a constricted range of responses, as in a questionnaire. However, personal interviews are expensive in terms of time, training costs, and resource consumption.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 142

Chapter

7

Research Methods for Business

134 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

7.3.3 Some tips to follow when interviewing

The information obtained during the interviews should be as free as possible of bias. Bias refers to errors or inaccuracies in the data collected. Bias could be introduced by the interviewer, the interviewee, or the situation. The interviewer could bias the data if proper trust and rapport are not established with the interviewee, or when the responses are either misinterpreted or distorted, or when the interviewer unin- tentionally encourages or discourages certain types of response through gestures and facial expressions.

Listening attentively to the interviewee, evincing keen interest in what the respond- ent has to say, exercising tact in questioning, repeating and/or clarifying the ques- tions posed, and paraphrasing some of the answers to ensure their thorough under- standing go a long way in keeping alive the interest of the respondent throughout the interview. Recording the responses accurately is equally important.

Interviewees can bias the data when they do not come out with their true opinions but provide information that they think is what the interviewer expects of them or would like to hear. Also, if they do not understand the questions, they may feel diffident or hesitant to seek clarification. They may then answer questions without knowing their importance, and thus introduce bias.

Some interviewees may be turned off because of personal likes and dislikes, or the dress of the interviewer, or the manner in which the questions are put. They may, therefore, not provide truthful answers, but instead, deliberately offer incorrect responses. Some respondents may also answer questions in a socially acceptable manner rather than indicating their true sentiments.

Biases could be situational as well, in terms of (1) nonparticipants, (2) trust levels and rapport established, and (3) the physical setting of the interview. Nonparticipation, either because of unwillingness or the inability of the interviewee to participate in the study, can bias data inasmuch as the responses of the participants may be different from those of the nonparticipants (which implies that a biased, rather than a representative, set of responses is likely to result). Bias also occurs when different interviewers establish different levels of trust and rapport with their interviewees, thus eliciting answers of varying degrees of openness. The actual setting in which the interview is conducted might sometimes introduce bias. Some individuals, for instance, may not feel quite at ease when interviewed at the workplace and therefore may not respond frankly and honestly.

In door-to-door or telephone interviews, when the respondent cannot be reached due to unavailability at that time, callbacks and further contacts should be attemp- ted so that the sample does not become biased (discussed in Chapter 13 on Sampling). The interviewer can also reduce bias by being consistent with the questioning mode as each person is interviewed, by not distorting or falsifying the information received, and by not influencing the responses of the subjects in any manner.

The above biases can be minimized in several ways. The following strategies will be useful for the purpose.

Establishing credibility and rapport, and motivating individuals to respond

The projection of professionalism, enthusiasm, and confidence is important for the interviewer. For instance, a manager hiring outside researchers to deal with a problem within an organization would be interested in assessing their abilities and personality predispositions. Researchers must establish rapport with, and gain the confidence and approval of, the hiring client before they can even start their work in

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 143

Chapter

7

Data collection methods: Introduction and interviews

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 135

the organization. Knowledge, skills, ability, confidence, articulateness, and enthu- siasm are therefore qualities a researcher must demonstrate in order to establish credibility with the hiring organization and its members.

To obtain honest information from the respondents, the researcher/interviewer should be able to establish rapport and trust with them. In other words, the researcher should be able to make the respondent sufficiently at ease to give inform- ative and truthful answers without fear of adverse consequences. To this end, the researcher should state the purpose of the interview and assure complete confiden- tiality about the source of the responses. Establishing rapport with the respondents may not be easy, especially when interviewing employees at lower levels. They are likely to be suspicious of the intentions of the researchers; they may believe that the researchers are on the management’s “side,” and therefore likely to propose a reduction in the labor force, an increase in the workload, and so on. Thus, it is important to ensure that everyone concerned is aware of the researchers’ purpose as being one of merely understanding the true state of affairs in the organization. The respondents must be tactfully made to understand that the researchers do not intend to take sides; they are not there to harm the staff, and will provide the results of research to the organization only in aggregates, without disclosing the identity of the individuals. This should encourage the respondents to feel secure about responding.

The researcher can establish rapport by being pleasant, sincere, sensitive, and none- valuative. Evincing a genuine interest in the responses and allaying any anxieties, fears, suspicions, and tensions sensed in the situation will help respondents to feel more comfortable with the researchers. If the respondent is told about the purpose of the study and how he or she was chosen to be one of those interviewed, there should be better communication between the parties. Researchers can motivate respondents to offer honest and truthful answers by explaining to them that their contribution will indeed help, and that they themselves may stand to gain from such a survey, in the sense that the quality of life at work for most of them may improve significantly.

Certain other strategies in how questions are posed also help participants to offer less biased responses. These are discussed below.

The questioning technique

Funneling

At the beginning of an unstructured interview, it is advisable to ask open-ended questions to get a broad idea and form some impressions about the situation. For example a question that could be asked would be:

What are some of your feelings about working for this organization?

From the responses to this broad question, further questions that are progressively more focused may be asked as the researcher processes the interviewees’ responses and notes some possible key issues relevant to the situation. This transition from broad to narrow themes is called the funneling technique.

Unbiased questions

It is important to ask unbiased questions to ensure that you minimize bias in the responses. For example, “Tell me how you experience your job” is a better question than, “Boy, the work you do must be really boring; let me hear how you experience it.” The latter question is “loaded” in terms of the interviewer’s own perceptions of

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 144

Chapter

7

Research Methods for Business

136 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

the job. A loaded question might influence the types of answers received from the respondent. Bias could also be introduced by emphasizing certain words, by tone and voice inflections, and through inappropriate suggestions.

Clarifying issues

To make sure that the researcher understands issues as the respondent intends to represent them, it is advisable to restate or rephrase important information given by the respondent. For instance, if the interviewee says, “There is an unfair promotion policy in this organization; seniority does not count at all− it is the juniors who always get promoted,” the researcher might interject, “So you are saying that juniors always get promoted over the heads of even capable seniors.” Rephrasing in this way clarifies the issue of whether or not the respondent considers ability important. If certain things that are being said are not clear, the researcher should seek clarification. For example, if the respondent happens to say, “The facilities here are really poor; we often have to continue working even when we are dying of thirst,” the researcher might ask if there is no water fountain or drinking water available in the building. The respondent’s reply to this might well indicate that there is a water fountain across the hall, but the respondent would like one on his side of the work area as well.

Helping the respondent to think through issues

If the respondent is not able to verbalize her perceptions, or replies, “I don’t know,” the researcher should ask the question in a simpler way or rephrase it. For instance, if a respondent is unable to specify what aspects of the job he dislikes, the researcher might ask the question in a simpler way. For example, the respondent might be asked which task he would prefer to do: serve a customer or do some filing work. If the answer is “serve the customer,” the researcher might use another aspect of the respondent’s job and ask the paired-choice question again. In this way, the respondent can sort out which aspects of the job he likes better than others.

Taking notes

When conducting interviews, it is important that the researcher makes written notes as the interviews are taking place, or as soon as the interview is terminated. The interviewer should not rely on memory, because information recalled from memory is imprecise and often likely to be incorrect. Furthermore, if more than one interview is scheduled for the day, the amount of information received increases, as do possible sources of error in recalling from memory who said what. Information based solely on recall introduces bias into the research.

The interviews can be recorded on tape if the respondent has no objection. However, taped interviews might bias the respondents’ answers because they know that their voices are being recorded, and their anonymity is not preserved in full. Hence, even if the respondents do not object to being taped, there could be some bias in their responses. Before recording or videotaping interviews, one should be reasonably certain that such a method of obtaining data is not likely to bias the information received. Any audio or videotaping should always be done only after obtaining the respondent’s permission.

Review of tips to follow when interviewing

Establishing credibility as able researchers is important for the success of the research project. Researchers need to establish rapport with the respondents and

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 145

Chapter

7

Data collection methods: Introduction and interviews

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 137

motivate them to give responses relatively free from bias by allaying whatever sus- picions, fears, anxieties, and concerns they may have about the research and its consequences. This can be accomplished by being sincere, pleasant, and nonevalu- ative. While interviewing, the researcher has to ask broad questions initially and then narrow them down to specific areas, ask questions in an unbiased way, offer clarification when needed, and help respondents to think through difficult issues. The responses should be transcribed immediately and should not be trusted to memory and later recall.

Having looked at unstructured and structured interviews and learned something about how to conduct the interviews, we can now discuss face-to-face and telephone interviews.

Face-to-face and telephone interviews

Interviews can be conducted either face to face or over the telephone. They may also be computer-assisted. Although most unstructured interviews in business research are conducted face to face, structured interviews may be either face to face or through the medium of the telephone, depending on the level of complexity of the issues involved, the likely duration of the interview, the convenience of both parties, and the geographical area covered by the survey. Telephone interviews are best suited when information from a large number of respondents spread over a wide geographic area is to be obtained quickly, and the likely duration of each inter- view is, say, ten minutes or less. Many market surveys, for instance, are conducted through structured telephone interviews. In addition, computer-assisted telephone interviews (CATI) are also possible, and easy to manage.

Face-to-face interviews and telephone interviews have other advantages and dis- advantages. These will now be briefly discussed.

Face-to-face interviews: advantages and disadvantages

The main advantage of face-to-face or direct interviews is that the researcher can adapt the questions as necessary, clarify doubts, and ensure that the responses are properly understood, by repeating or rephrasing the questions. The researcher can also pick up nonverbal cues from the respondent. Any discomfort, stress, or problem that the respondent experiences can be detected through frowns, nervous tapping, and other body language unconsciously exhibited by her. This would be impossible to detect in a telephone interview.

The main disadvantages of face-to-face interviews are the geographical limitations they may impose on the surveys and the vast resources needed if such surveys need to be done nationally or internationally. The costs of training interviewers to minimize interviewer bias (e.g., differences in questioning methods, interpretation of responses) are also high. Another drawback is that respondents might feel uneasy about the anonymity of their responses when they interact face to face with the interviewer.

Telephone interviews: advantages and disadvantages

The main advantage of telephone interviewing, from the researcher’s point of view, is that a number of different people can be reached (if need be, across the country or even internationally) in a relatively short period of time. From the respondents’ standpoint it eliminates any discomfort that some of them might feel in facing the interviewer. It is also possible that most of them might feel less uncomfortable disclosing personal information over the phone than face to face.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 146

Chapter

7

Research Methods for Business

138 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

A main disadvantage of telephone interviewing is that the respondent could uni- laterally terminate the interview without warning or explanation, by hanging up the phone. Caller ID might further aggravate the situation. This is understandable, given the numerous telemarketing calls people are bombarded with on a daily basis. To minimize this type of nonresponse problem, it is advisable to call the interviewee ahead of time to request participation in the survey, giving an approximate idea of how long the interview will last, and setting up a mutually convenient time. Inter- viewees usually tend to appreciate this courtesy and are more likely to cooperate. It is a good policy not to prolong the interview beyond the time originally stated. As mentioned earlier, another disadvantage of the telephone interview is that the researcher will not be able to see the respondent to read the nonverbal communic- ation.

7.3.4 Additional sources of bias in interview data

We have already discussed several sources of bias in data collection. Biased data will be obtained when respondents are interviewed while they are extremely busy or are not in good humor. Responses to issues such as strikes, layoffs, or the like could also be biased. The personality of the interviewer, the introductory sentence, inflection of the voice, and such other aspects could introduce additional bias. Awareness of the many sources of bias will enable interviewers to obtain relatively valid information.

Sampling biases, which include inability to contact persons whose telephone num- bers have changed, could also affect the quality of the research data. Likewise, people with unlisted numbers who are not contacted could also bias the sample (discussed in Chapter 13), and, hence, the data obtained. With the introduction of caller ID, it is possible for telephone interviews to be ridden with complexity.

7.3.5 Computer-assisted interviewing

With computer-assisted interviews (CAI) questions are flashed onto the computer screen and interviewers can enter the answers of the respondents directly into the computer. The accuracy of data collection is considerably enhanced since the software can be programmed to flag the “offbase” or “out-of-range” responses. CAI software also prevents interviewers from asking the wrong questions or in the wrong sequence since the questions are automatically flashed to the respondent in an ordered sequence. This, to some extent, eliminates interviewer-induced bias.

CATI and CAPI

There are two types of computer-assisted interview programs: CATI (computer- assisted telephone interviewing) and CAPI (computer-assisted personal interview- ing).

CATI, used in research organizations, is useful inasmuch as responses to surveys can be obtained from people all over the world. The computer prompts the questions with the help of software and the respondent provides the answers. The computer selects the telephone number, dials, and places the responses in a file. The data are analyzed later. Computerized, voice-activated telephone interviews are also possible for short surveys. Data can also be gathered during field surveys through handheld computers that record and analyze responses.

CAPI involves rather big investments in hardware and software. CAPI has an advant- age in that it can be self-administered; that is, respondents can use their own com- puters to run the program by themselves once they receive the software and enter

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 147

Chapter

7

Data collection methods: Introduction and interviews

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 139

their responses, thereby reducing errors in recording. However, not everyone is comfortable using a personal computer and some may not have access to one.

The voice recording system assists CATI programs by recording interviewees’ responses. Courtesy, ethics, and legal requirements require that the respondents’ permission to record be obtained before the voice capture system (VCS) is activated. The VCS allows the computer to capture respondents’ answers, which are recorded in a digital mode and stored in a data file. They can be played back later, for example, to listen to customers by region, industry, or any combination of different sets of factors.

In sum, the advantages of computer-assisted interviews can be stated simply as quick and more accurate information gathering, plus faster and easier analysis of data. The field costs are low and automatic tabulation of results is possible. It is more efficient in terms of costs and time, once the initial heavy investment in equipment and software has been made. However, to be really cost-effective, large surveys should be done frequently enough to warrant the heavy front-end investment and programming costs.

Advantages of software packages

Field notes taken by interviewers as they collect data generally have to be tran- scribed, hand-coded, hand-tabulated, and so on − all of which are tedious and time consuming. Computers vastly ease the interviewers’ job with regard to these activities. Automatic indexing of the data can be done with special programs. The two modes in operation are:

1. Indexing such that specific responses are coded in a particular way.

2. Retrieval of data with a fast search speed.

A text-oriented database management retrieval program allows the user to go through the text, inserting marks that link related units of text. The associative links formed are analytical categories specified by the researcher. Once the links are created, the program allows the user to activate them by opening multiple windows on the screen.

We can thus see that computers make a big impact on data collection. With greater technological advancement and a reduction in hardware and software costs, computer-assisted interviews promise to become a primary method of data collec- tion in the future.

7.3.6 Review of interviewing

Interviews are one method of obtaining data; they can be either unstructured or structured, and can be conducted face to face, over the telephone, or via the computer. Unstructured interviews are usually conducted to obtain definite ideas about what is, and is not, important and relevant to particular problem situations. Structured interviews give more in-depth information about specific variables of interest. To minimize bias in responses, the interviewer must establish rapport with the respondents and ask unbiased questions. The face-to-face interview and that conducted over the telephone have their advantages and disadvantages, and both have their uses in different circumstances. Computer-assisted interviewing, which entails heavy initial investment, is an asset for interviewing and for the analysis of qualitative, spontaneous responses. Computer interactive interviews have become an increasingly important mode of data collection in recent years.

The advantages and disadvantages of personal or face-to-face interviews and tele- phone interviews are presented in Table 7.1.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 148

Chapter

7

Research Methods for Business

140 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Table 7.1 Advantages and disadvantages of interviews

Mode of data collection Advantages Disadvantages

Personal or face-to-face interviews

Can establish rapport and motivate respond- ents. Can clarify the questions, clear doubts, add new questions. Can read nonverbal cues. Can use visual aids to clarify points. Rich data can be obtained. CAPI can be used and responses entered in a portable computer.

Takes personal time. Costs more when a wide geographic region is covered. Respondents may be concerned about confid- entiality of information given. Interviewers need to be trained. Can introduce inter- viewer bias.

Telephone interviews Less costly and speedier than personal interviews. Can reach a wide geo- graphic area. Greater anonymity than personal interviews. Can be done using CATI.

Nonverbal cues cannot be read. Interviews will have to be kept short. Obsolete telephone numbers could be con- tacted, and unlisted ones omitted from the sample. Respondents can termin- ate the interview at any time.

7.4 PROJECTIVE METHODS

Certain ideas and thoughts that cannot be easily verbalized or that remain at the unconscious levels in the respondents’ minds can usually be brought to the surface through motivational research. This is typically done by trained professionals who apply different probing techniques in order to bring to the surface deep-rooted ideas and thoughts in the respondents. Familiar techniques for gathering such data are word association, sentence completion, thematic apperception tests, inkblot tests, and the like.

Word association techniques, such as asking the respondent to quickly associate a word − say, work − with the first thing that comes to mind, are often used to get at true attitudes and feelings. The reply gives an indication of what work means to the individual. Similarly, sentence completion asks the respondent to quickly complete a sentence, such as “Work is . . . ,” one respondent might say, “Work is a lot of fun,” whereas another might say “Work is drudgery.” These responses may provide some insights into individuals’ feelings and attitudes toward work.

Thematic apperception tests (TAT) call for the respondent to weave a story around a picture that is shown. Several need patterns and personality characteristics of respondents can be traced through these tests.

Inkblot tests, another form of motivational research, use colored inkblots that are interpreted by the respondents, who explain what they see in the various patterns and colors.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 149

Chapter

7

Data collection methods: Introduction and interviews

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 141

Although these types of projective tests are useful for tapping attitudes and feelings that are difficult to obtain otherwise, they cannot be resorted to by researchers who are not trained to conduct motivational research.

Consumer preferences, buying attitudes and behaviors, product development, and other marketing research strategies make substantial use of in-depth probing. TAT and inkblot tests are on their way out in marketing research since advertisers and others now use sentence completion tests and word association tests more fre- quently. Sketch drawings, collages from magazine pictures, filling in the balloon captions of cartoon characters, and other strategies are also being followed to see how individuals associate different products, brands, advertisements, and so on, in their minds. Agencies frequently ask subjects to sketch “typical” users of vari- ous brands and narrate stories about them. The messages conveyed through the unsophisticated drawings are said to be very powerful, helping the development of different marketing strategies.

The idea behind motivational research is that “emotionality” (“I identify with it” feeling) rather than “rationality” (“it is good for me” thought), which is what keeps a product or practice alive, is captured. Emotions are powerful motivators of actions, and knowledge of what motivates individuals to act is very useful. The failure of attempts to trade in the “New Coke” for “Classic Coke” is an oft-cited example of the emotional aspect. Emotionality is clearly at the nonrational, subconscious level, lending itself to capture by projective techniques alone.

SUMMARY In this chapter we examined various sources of data. We have explained that the three main data collection methods in survey research are interviewing, observing people, and administering questionnaires. We discussed various types of interviews and the advantages and disadvantages as well as the bias inherent in interviews. We also examined the impact of technology on data collection via interviewing.

In the next chapter, we discuss observation as a method of collecting data.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

Describe the different data sources, explaining their usefulness and disadvant- ages.

As a manager, you have invited a research team to come in, study, and offer suggestions on how to improve the performance of your staff. What steps will you take to relieve staff apprehensions and worries even before the research team sets foot in your department?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 150

Chapter

7

Research Methods for Business

142 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

What is bias, and how can it be reduced during interviews?

Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of personal and telephone inter- views.

What are projective techniques and how can they be used profitably?

How has the advancement in technology helped data gathering via interview- ing?

Now do Exercise 7.1 and 7.2.

Exercise 7.1

First conduct an unstructured and later a structured interview, to learn about how people use and process information to choose among alternative brands when they are looking for furniture, clothing, household appliances, and the like. Select a specific product and ask people, for instance, about the product attributes they consider, and how important these attributes are. Write up the results, and include the formats you used for both stages of the research.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 151

Chapter

7

Data collection methods: Introduction and interviews

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 143

Exercise 7.2

Design an interview schedule to assess the “intellectual capital” as perceived by employees in an organization − the dimensions and elements for which you developed earlier.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 152

Chapter

8

144 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Chapter 8

Data collection methods: Observation

Topics discussed:

� Definition and purpose of observation

� Four key dimensions that characterize the type of observation

� Two important approaches to observation

� Advantages and disadvantages of observation

Chapter objectives

After completing Chapter 8 you should be able to:

1. Define observation.

2. Discuss how observation may help to solve business problems.

3. Explain the difference between various approaches to observation.

4. Demonstrate familiarity with various observational methods.

5. Make an informed decision on an appropriate type of observational method for a specific study.

6. Understand the issues related to participant observation and structured observation.

7. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of observation.

Actions and behavior of employees, consumers, investors, and the like may play an important role in business research. Researchers and managers might be interested in the way workers carry out their jobs, the impact of new manufacturing tech- niques on employee activity, in how consumers watch commercials, use products, or behave in waiting areas, or in how a merchant bank trades and operates. A useful and natural technique to collect data on actions and behavior is observation. Obser- vation involves going into “the field” − the factory, the supermarket, the waiting room, the office, or the trading room − watching what workers, consumers, or day traders do, and describing, analyzing, and interpreting what one has seen.

Examples of observation discussed in further detail later in this chapter

• Shadowing a Wall Street broker engaged in his daily routine.

• Observing in-store shopping behavior of consumers via a camera.

• Sitting in the corner of an office to observe how a merchant bank trader operates.

• Working in a plant to study factory life.

• Studying the approach skills of sales people disguised as a shopper.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 153

Chapter

8

Data collection methods: Observation

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 145

Observational methods are best suited for research requiring non-self-report descript- ive data; that is, when behavior is to be examined without directly asking the respondents themselves. Observational data are rich and uncontaminated by self- report bias. However, observational methods are also time consuming and challen- ging in a lot of other ways as you will learn in this chapter. Indeed, they are not without difficulties for the untrained researcher.

This chapter starts with a definition of observation, followed by an overview of observational methods distinguished by four basic dimensions: control, group membership, structure, and concealment. Subsequently we examine two import- ant observational methods, participant observation and structured observation, in more detail. Finally, we discuss advantages and disadvantages of observation.

8.1 DEFINITION AND PURPOSE OF RESEARCH

Observation concerns the planned watching, recording, analysis, and interpretation of behavior, actions, or events. Various approaches of observation have been used in business research. These may be distinguished by four key dimensions that charac- terize the way observation is conducted: (1) control (are the observations conducted in an artificial or in a natural setting?), (2) whether the observer is a member of the group that is observed or not (participant versus nonparticipant observation), (3) structure (to what extent the observation is focused, predetermined, systematic, and quantitative in nature), and (4) concealment of observation (are the members of the social group under study told that they are being studied or not?). These key dimensions that distinguish particular methods of observation are discussed next.

8.2 FOUR KEY DIMENSIONS THAT CHARACTERIZE THE TYPE OF OBSERVATION

8.2.1 Controlled versus uncontrolled observational studies

A distinction can be made between observation conducted in controlled (or artifi- cial) versus uncontrolled (or natural) settings. Observation is often conducted in a natural setting. However, observation is also a potential method of data collection within an experimental, controlled research tradition. In experimental research, relevant conditions (related to the independent variable under study) are manipu- lated or contrived in a systematic way. The effect of the independent variable on the dependent variable (e.g., specified behavior) is subsequently measured. This allows the researcher to determine cause-and-effect relationships.

An observational study is said to be high in control when the situation or setting is manipulated or contrived by the researcher; the exposure of subjects (for instance, consumers, employees, or investors) to a certain situation or condition (for instance a specific store layout, specific labor conditions, or a certain amount of time pres- sure) allows the researcher to observe differences between individual behavioral reactions to the situation. Controlled observation may be carried out in a laborat- ory (for instance, a simulated store environment or trading room) or in the field (for instance, a store).

Controlled observation occurs when observational research is carried out under carefully arranged conditions. Uncontrolled observation is an observational tech- nique that makes no attempt to control, manipulate, or influence the situation. Events are running their natural course and the researcher observes these events without interfering in the real-life setting. An advantage of uncontrolled observa- tion is that people can be observed in their natural shopping or work environment. A major drawback of uncontrolled observation is, however, that it is usually difficult

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 154

Chapter

8

Research Methods for Business

146 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

to untangle the often complex situation since we do not control any factor in this. Accordingly, it is very hard to distinguish the causes of events, actions, and behavior.

8.2.2 Participant versus nonparticipant observation

The researcher can play one of two roles while gathering observational data − that of a nonparticipant or a participant observer. In the case of nonparticipant observation, the researcher is never directly involved in the actions of the actors, but observes them from outside the actors’ visual horizon, for instance via a one-way mirror or a camera.

Participant observation is an approach that has frequently been used in case studies, ethnographic studies, and grounded theory studies (see Box 8.1 for a discussion on the relationship between participant observation and ethnography). In participant observation the researcher gathers data by participating in the daily life of the group or organization under study.

BOX 8.1: ETHNOGRAPHY AND PARTICIPANT OBSERVATION

Ethnography is a research methodology that has its roots in anthropology. It is “a research process in which the anthropologist closely observes, records, and engages in the daily life of another culture [ . . . ] and then writes accounts of this culture, emphasizing descriptive detail” (Markus & Fischer, 1986, p. 18). Ethno- graphy involves immersion in the particular culture of the social group (such as, for instance, the Manu’a people of Samoa) that is being studied, observing behavior, listening to what is said in conversations, and asking questions. It thus aims to generate an understanding of the culture and behavior of a social group from an “insider’s point of view.”

Participant observation is closely related to ethnography. However, different people have different ideas about the exact relationship between the two. Eth- nography and participant observation are sometimes used interchangeably in the literature. For some, both ethnography and participant observation are research strategies that involve spending long periods watching people and talk- ing to them about what they are doing, thinking, and saying, with the objective of generating an understanding of the social group under study (Delamont, 2004). For others, ethnography is a more inclusive term, whereas participant observation is more specific and related to a particular method of data col- lection. From this perspective, participant observation is a primary source of ethnographic data. However, it is just one of a number of methods, and rarely the only method, used by a researcher to generate an understanding of a culture or a social group. Along these lines, observation− observing behavior through a long-term engagement in the field setting where ethnography takes place − is regarded as one of several methods for ethnographic research. Other meth- ods, such as interviews and questionnaires, may also be used to collect data in ethnographic research.

Spradley (1980) has developed a typology to describe a continuum in the degree of participation of researchers. The lowest level of participant observation is passive participation. Passive participation allows the researcher to collect the required data without becoming an integral part of the (organizational) system. For example, the researcher might sit in the corner of an office and watch and record how a merchant bank trader spends her time. Moderate participation occurs when the researcher does not actively participate and only occasionally interacts with the social group under study. In new research settings, in which the researcher is not

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 155

Chapter

8

Data collection methods: Observation

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 147

familiar with the activities, habits, and/or the jargon of the group, many researchers begin at the level of moderate participation until a more active role is possible. Active participation is when the researcher actually engages in almost everything that the group under study is doing as a means of trying to learn about their behavior. The researcher may also play the role of the complete participant-observer. In complete participant observation, the researcher becomes a member of the social group under study. Complete participant observation involves “immersion” in the social group under study. For instance, if a researcher wants to study group dynamics in work organizations, then she may join the organization as an employee and observe the dynamics in groups while being a part of the work organization and work groups. Like this, complete participant observation aims to generate an understanding of a social group from an “insider’s point of view” (Hume & Mulcock, 1994).

EXAMPLE

A famous example of complete participant observation in a business context is Beynon’s (1975) study. Beynon spent much of 1967 in Ford’s Halewood plant to study factory life and the experience of people who worked at the assembly lines of the Ford Motor Company. Beynon entered the Ford Motor Company and became a member of the social group under study (workers within a car assembly plant) to investigate “life on the line.”

8.2.3 Structured versus unstructured observational studies

As we have seen, observational studies can be of either the nonparticipant-observer or the participant-observer type. Both of these, again, can be either structured or unstructured. Where the observer has a predetermined set of categories of activities or phenomena planned to be studied, it is a structured observational study. Formats for recording the observations can be specifically designed and tailored to each study to suit the goal of that research. Structured observation is generally quantitative in nature.

Usually, matters that pertain to the feature of interest, such as the duration and frequency of an event (for instance, how long does it take to get a meal at a fast-food restaurant?), as well as certain activities that precede and follow it, are recorded. Environmental conditions (for instance, labor conditions) and any changes in set- ting are also noted, if considered relevant. Task-relevant behaviors of the actors, their perceived emotions, verbal and nonverbal communication, and the like, may also be recorded. Observations that are recorded in worksheets or field notes are then systematically analyzed.

At the beginning of a study, it is also possible that the observer has no definite ideas of the particular aspects that need focus. Observing events as they take place may also be a part of the plan as in many other forms of exploratory and qualitative research. In such cases, the observer will record practically everything that is observed. Such a study will be an unstructured observational study. Unstructured observational studies are claimed to be the hallmark of qualitative research. Qualitative data analysis (Chapter 16) is used to analyze and interpret what the researcher has seen.

Unstructured observation may eventually lead to a set of tentative hypotheses that are tested in subsequent research that is deductive in nature. Hence, inductive discovery via observation can pave the way for subsequent theory building and hypotheses testing.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 156

Chapter

8

Research Methods for Business

148 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

8.2.4 Concealed versus unconcealed observation

Concealment of observation relates to whether the members of the social group under study are told that they are being investigated. A primary advantage of con- cealed observation is that the research subjects are not influenced by the awareness that they are being observed. Indeed, reactivity or the extent to which the observer affects the situation under observation could be a major threat to the validity of the results of observational studies. Unconcealed observation is more obtrusive, perhaps upsetting the authenticity of the behavior under study.

The Hawthorne Studies

A famous example of subject responses to unconcealed observation is the “Hawthorne effect.” In a relay assembly line, many experiments were conducted that increased lighting and the like, based on the original hypothesis that these would account for increases in productivity. However, as it turned out, the mere fact that people were chosen for the study gave them a feeling of importance that increased their productivity whether or not lighting, heating, or other effects were improved, thus the coining of the term the Hawthorne effect.

Concealed observation

To avoid reactivity, McClung, Grove & Hughes (1989) used researchers disguised as shoppers to collect data on the approach skills of salespeople. They decided to employ concealed observation because unconcealed observation could have an effect on the validity of their observations.

Concealed observation has some serious ethical drawbacks. While less reactive, concealed observation raises ethical concerns since it may violate the principles of informed consent, privacy, and confidentiality (Burgess, 1989; Lauder, 2003). For this reason concealed observation may harm the subjects in several ways. However, in some situations, for instance when a (marketing) researcher watches a service encounter between a bus driver and a bus passenger, the researcher is likely to be less culpable than in other situations, for instance when the researcher immerses herself in a certain social group such as a specific department within an organization (cf. Grove and Fisk, 1992). Note that there are no strict rules for assessing the ethicality of concealed observational research. Instead, a careful, well-judged assessment of the potential harmful consequences of concealed observational research should be made by the researcher. Frederichs and Ludtke (1975, p. 12) provide an elegant guideline for such an assessment: the research plan “should be able to justify itself to the members of the scientific community as well as to those involved in the study.”

8.3 TWO IMPORTANT APPROACHES TO OBSERVATION

We have just briefly discussed the key dimensions that differentiate various approaches to observation. Two important, distinct approaches to observation are participant observation and structured observation. The remaining part of this chapter will dis- cuss these two approaches in more detail.

8.3.1 Participant observation: introduction

Earlier in this chapter we have explained that the researcher can play one of two roles while gathering observational data: that of a nonparticipant or a participant observer. A key characteristic of participant observation is that the researcher gath- ers data by participating in the daily life of the group or organization under study.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 157

Chapter

8

Data collection methods: Observation

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 149

This enables the researcher to learn about the activities of the group under study in a natural setting from an insider’s point of view through observing and participating in these activities. When Malinowski introduced this method in his influential work Argonauts of the Western Pacific he argued that it puts the researcher in a position “to grasp the native’s point of view, his relation to life, to realize his vision of his world” (Malinowksi, 1992, p. 25). Today, this is still regarded as the key objective and one of the main strengths of participant observation. Since the time of Malinowski, the method of participant observation has been thoroughly developed and refined. It is now common to distinguish between two basic ways of conceiving of the method (Zahle, 2012). It may be narrowly identified as participation in the way of life of the social group under study combined with observing what is going on. Or, it may be labeled more broadly to involve not only participation and observation but also the use of other methods such as interviews. In this chapter, we take on a more narrow view of participant observation; we look at participant observation as one of several qualitative research methods aiming to understand the nature of phenomena.

8.3.2 The participatory aspect of participant observation

Participant observation combines the processes of participation and observation. Nonetheless, participant observation should be distinguished from both pure obser- vation and pure participation (Bernard, 1994). Pure observation seeks to remove the researcher from the observed actions and behavior; the researcher is never directly involved in the actions and behavior of the group under study. Pure participation has been described as “going native”; the researcher becomes so involved with the group under study that eventually every objectivity and research interest is lost (Jorgenson, 1989; DeWalt & DeWalt, 2002). Within these two extremes, participant observation has been successfully employed by many researchers engaged in busi- ness research.

A distinctive feature of participant observation is that the researcher participates in the social group under study. As we have explained earlier in this chapter, the researcher may do so to different extents. The highest degree of participation occurs with complete participation. In this case, the researcher lives or works with the subjects under study and tends to assume a pre-established role (for instance, the role of coworker). In complete participation, the researcher may conceal that she is an observer, behaving as naturally as possible and seeking to become an accepted member of the social group. This technique assures close intimacy with the subjects; the researcher interacts with the subjects and also carries out their activities. A disadvantage of this method is that complete participation may limit freedom of movement outside the adopted role: it is difficult to abandon the role of complete participant as the research proceeds. What’s more, the methodological problem of “going native” may result in a fading research perspective and an increased likelihood of biased research findings. Finally, there are important ethical problems with concealed complete participation. Becoming a member of a social group and deliberately deceiving the members of this group is regarded as unethical by many. For these reasons, complete participation has become increasingly rare.

In many situations, observational studies are based on moderate participation. In the case of moderate participation, the researcher assumes an intermediate position between being a complete insider (a complete participant) and being a complete outsider (as in nonparticipation observational studies). In moderate participation, the researcher observes the scene under study, maintaining a certain distance from it and never intervening. Indeed, the role of the researcher is often the role of a passive witness or bystander. Another technique that is sometimes used is “shadowing.” Shadowing implies that the researcher closely follows a subject (for instance, a manager or a Wall Street broker) engaged in his or her daily routine.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 158

Chapter

8

Research Methods for Business

150 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

EXAMPLE

Typical examples of passive participation are observations conducted in service consumption settings, such as in a lecture room, a theater, a waiting room, or a theme park.

In the case of active participation, the researcher is not satisfied with the role of the bystander. In this case, the researcher does not conceal that she is an observer but explains the fact that she is an observer to the social group under study right from the start. This allows the researcher to not only observe the everyday activities of the subjects (workers, managers, consumers, brokers), but also to engage in those activities and thus to put them into practice. The goal of active participation is not to become like the subjects, and to immerse in their activities, but to carry out certain activities and hence to acquire a better understanding of their practices.

To what extent should I participate?

The extent to which the researcher participates depends on a range of factors. For instance, it may be determined by the research questions, ethical consider- ations, methodological considerations, but also by more practical factors such us by how much the researcher feels happy about participating or by the extent to which either contextual factors or the members of the group under study are willing to let the researcher participate.

8.3.3 The observation aspect of participant observation

While participating, the researcher should observe and record, and at a later stage analyze behavior, actions, interactions, events, and the like. Getting started with participant observation and becoming a part of a social group is not without its difficulties. There are several issues that must be addressed. These include choosing a “site” (a specific department, business unit, plant, supermarket, etc.), gaining permission, the selection of key informants, and familiarizing oneself with the research setting (Bernard, 1994).

In most observational studies, gaining access begins with obtaining permission to carry out research from highly ranked people within the organization, preferably from top management. To gain permission to carry out the study, it is important to carefully explain the purpose of the research. If the purpose of the research is understood (and accepted) you will eventually get permission to carry out your research project. You may also benefit from letters of introduction (for instance, from the sponsor of the study) that will ease entry.

Getting permission is only the first step in carrying out participant observation. Becoming an accepted member of the social group under study is the next. Numer- ous ethnographers have noticed that some members of the social group under study are more open and more likely to approach the researcher early in the fieldwork than others (DeWalt & DeWalt, 2002).

On “deviants” and “professional stranger handlers”

Agar suggests that the researcher be careful to accept the first people she encounters as key informants, since they are often either “deviants” or “profes- sional stranger handlers.” Deviants are “members who are on the boundaries

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 159

Chapter

8

Data collection methods: Observation

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 151

of the group in some low-status position” (Agar, 1996, p. 136). Association with deviants may alienate the researcher from the rest of the group and provide the researcher with a flawed view on the social group under study. Professional stranger handlers are persons who take it upon themselves to check out the new person and what it is this person is after. “They can [ . . . ] quickly improvise some information that satisfies her without representing anything potentially harmful to the group” (Agar, 1996, p. 135).

Agar suggests that the researcher finds a well-liked and respected person who can act as a sponsor. This “sponsor” is a group member who is willing to introduce you to the group, to vouch for you, and to explain your presence to the other group members.

An essential aspect of participant observation is establishing “rapport.” Establishing rapport involves establishing a trusting relationship with the social group under study, by showing respect, being truthful, and showing commitment to the well- being of the group or the individual members of the group, so that they feel secure in sharing (sensitive) information with the researcher. Jorgensen (1989) has argued that the degree to which rapport is established influences the degree to which the information that is collected in participant observation is accurate and dependable. In a similar vein, rapport has been referred to as “the only basis on which really reliable information can be obtained” (Villa Rojas, 1979, p. 59).

How do I establish rapport?

Rapport is built over time. Hanging out with the subjects under study − that is, meeting and chatting with them to develop relationships over an extended period of time − is the process through which the researcher gains trust and establishes rapport with participants (DeMunck & Sobo, 1998). Establishing rapport involves active listening, reciprocity (giving back something to the subjects under study), and confidentiality; the subjects must be assured that they can share personal and sensitive information without their identity being exposed to others.

8.3.4 What to observe

A potential problem with observational studies is getting overwhelmed by massive amounts of often disconnected data. For this reason, the researcher should try to keep a certain focus during the various stages of the observation process. Generally speaking, the most important factor in determining what to observe is the aim or purpose of the study. However, “[w]here to begin looking depends on the research question, but where to focus or stop action cannot be determined ahead of time” (Merriam, 1988, p. 97). Werner and Schoepfle (1987) discern three consecutive processes in observation that may provide an increasingly deep understanding of the setting that is being studied: (1) descriptive observation, (2) focused observation, and (3) selective observation.

In descriptive observation, the researcher is open to everything that is going on; data are collected that describe the setting, the subjects, and the events that are taking place.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 160

Chapter

8

Research Methods for Business

152 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

What to observe in the descriptive observation stage

Spradley (1980) distinguishes the following dimensions on which descriptive data might be collected:

• space layout of the physical setting such as the factory floor layout;

• objects physical elements such as office equipment, machines, and power tools;

• actors relevant details of the persons involved;

• feelings, emotions, activities, actions, and goals of the actors;

• events for instance meetings, and

• time or the time sequence of events, feelings, actions, and the like.

The data collected during descriptive observation provide an initial story or narrat- ive account which may serve as a basis for the development of a set of concepts, a theory, or even a conceptual framework. The development of concepts, theories, and conceptual frameworks is facilitated by a greater focus via focused and select- ive observation. Focused observation emphasizes observation (often supported by interviews) in which the researcher will concentrate on particular types of feelings, emotions, actions, activities, and/or events and look for emerging themes. Finally, in selective observation the researcher focuses on different types of actions, activit- ies, or events and look for regularities in them, while being open to variations from or exceptions to emerging patterns (Emerson, Fretz & Shaw, 1995).

What to observe in the focused and selective observation stages

To help researchers decide on what to observe in the focused and selective observation stages, DeWalt & DeWalt (2002) suggest that they:

• Observe events, actions, and behavior and look for a story line;

• Sort out the regular from the irregular activities;

• Look for variation in the storyline;

• Look for negative cases or exceptions; and,

• In case the observation is structured, develop a plan for systematic obser- vation, including an estimate of how many observations will be enough.

The most important method of capturing data in participant observation is writing field notes. Notes taken to capture data include records of what is observed, records of informal conversations with the subjects under study, and journal notes that are kept on a daily basis. Most researchers write down words, phrases, or even whole sentences during the course of the day or the event and write more expanded notes during quieter times. The quality of field notes relies heavily on the level of detail and the accuracy of the description (Schensul, Schensul & LeCompte, 1999). The documentation of observations should therefore be as accurate, complete, detailed, and objective as possible. How much is actually written down during the course of the day or the event depends on the quality of the memory of the researcher and the circumstances under which the researcher is working (DeWalt & DeWalt, 2002).

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 161

Chapter

8

Data collection methods: Observation

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 153

Schensul, Schensul & LeCompte (1999) provide a range of characteristics of good field notes. These are summarized in Box 8.2.

BOX 8.2: CHARACTERISTICS OF GOOD FIELD NOTES

Good field notes:

• use exact quotes when possible;

• use pseudonyms to protect confidentiality;

• describe activities in the order in which they occur;

• provide descriptions without inferring meaning;

• include relevant background information to situate the event;

• separate one’s own thoughts and assumptions from what one actually observes;

• record the date, time, place, and name of researcher on each set of notes.

Schensul, Schensul & LeCompte (1999)

One should be aware of the fact that field notes are a construction of the researcher; it is the researcher who decides what goes into the field notes, the level of detail to include, how much context to include, and so on. For this reason field notes are often regarded as being simultaneously data and data analysis, or as the first step in the process of data analysis (e.g., DeWalt & DeWalt, 2002).

To summarize, participant observation requires many skills, such as commitment, the ability to fit in, tact, the ability to communicate with different members of the social group at their level, patience, the ability to observe, the ability to separate the role of participant from that of observer, and so on. Therefore, before com- mitting yourself to participant observation you need to be certain you have the time, resources, and skills required to carry out and carry through this exceptionally challenging type of research.

We conclude our discussion of participant observation with some suggestions for conducting participant observation adapted, from DeWalt & DeWalt (2002), Mer- riam (1998), and Wolcott (2001). These suggestions are specified in Box 8.3.

BOX 8.3: SUGGESTIONS FOR CONDUCTING PARTICIPANT OBSERVATION

1. Be unobtrusive in your actions.

2. Become familiar with the setting before collecting other types of data.

3. Be tolerant of ambiguity: this includes being adaptive and flexible.

4. Pay attention, and alternate between a wide (a view of the overall situ- ation) and a narrow (focusing on a single person, activity, or interaction) perspective.

5. Look at interactions in the setting: who talks to whom, who is respected, and how are decisions made.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 162

Chapter

8

Research Methods for Business

154 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

6. Listen carefully to conversations, look for key words in conversations, and write these down to prompt later recollection of the conversation.

7. Concentrate on the first and last remarks of a conversation, as these are most easily remembered.

8. Being attentive for a long time is difficult; pay attention off and on. Capit- alize on moments of attention.

9. Field work often involves more than observation. It may also involve (informal) interviews and structured interviews, such as questionnaires.

10. Be determined and have faith in yourself.

Adapted from DeWalt & DeWalt (2002), Merriam (1998), and Wolcott (2001)

8.3.5 Structured observation: introduction

Structured observation is focused in nature, as it looks selectively at predetermined phenomena. The focus of structured observation is fragmented into small and manageable pieces of information (such as information on behavior, actions, inter- actions, or events).

There are different levels of structure in structured observation. For instance, the researcher may have decided on the observation categories in a rather precise and mutually exclusive way in advance (highly structured observation) or start with a detailed plan of what will be observed and how, but collect the data in a less systematic or predetermined way (semi-structured observation).

An example of the use of (nonexperimental) structured observation in marketing is the employment of mystery shoppers − thoroughly trained researchers who accurately record employee behavior using checklists and codes− to gather specific information on service performance. Service providers such as fast-food chains use this particular type of observation to monitor the quality of their service.

Structured observation can also be used to generate numerical data to test hypo- theses, as the following example illustrates.

EXAMPLE

A master’s student of Tilburg University, Thomas Perks, is currently engaged in a research project aimed at investigating the effect of GDA labels on the consumption of candy bars. (A GDA label shows the number of calories and grams of sugars, fat, saturates (saturated fat), and salt per portion of food, and expresses these quantities as a percentage of your Guideline Daily Amount.)

To be able to observe the effect of GDA labels on the consumption of candy bars, Thomas is allegedly waiting for his car at a car dealer. In fact, he is observing the behavior of people who are waiting for their cars, sitting at a large table. To test one of the hypotheses of his study − GDA labels have a negative effect on the consumption of candy bars − he has put two bowls filled with candy bars on this table. In the experimental condition, the candy bars in the bowls contain a GDA-label; in the control condition they do not contain such a label.

In order to minimize possible observer effects, Thomas is keeping a low profile: he avoids eye contact and he smiles politely when people are trying to start a conversation. Nonetheless, he gets engaged in conversations about the weather,

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 163

Chapter

8

Data collection methods: Observation

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 155

computer problems, gas prices, and so on every now and then. While Thomas is waiting for his car (observing the behavior of the subjects under study) he is working on his laptop (keeping a detailed account of the behavior of the subjects).

Thomas is using a coding scheme that allows him to collect data in a structured way. His coding scheme contains predetermined categories that enable him to systematically generate information on characteristics of the subjects, events, and behavior of the subjects. The categories are closely related to the variables (including a range of confounding variables) in Thomas’ conceptual causal model.

8.3.6 The use of coding schemes in structured observation

The development of a coding scheme is a crucial aspect of structured observation. Coding schemes contain predetermined categories for recording what is observed. Such schemes come in many forms and shapes. Some of them are very simple; they merely allow the researcher to note whether or not a particular event has taken place. Other schemes are more complex; they include multiple categories, timescales, and the like. Note that the development of an adequate coding scheme is never a straightforward task.

The type of coding scheme you will use depends on the information that you want to collect. Again, the research questions of your study serve as the starting point, in this case for the development of a coding scheme. Based on the research questions, sometimes refined via a pilot study, you define the important concepts (variables) in your study and develop a coding scheme that allows you to collect information on these concepts.

The following considerations should be taken into account with regard to the con- struction of a coding scheme.

• Focus. From the coding scheme it should be clear what is to be observed. For instance, Thomas’ coding scheme should help him to establish which aspects of the setting (for instance, how many people are waiting for their car) and which types of behavior (for instance, the subject is walking through the showroom of the car dealer, the subject is eating a candy bar) are to be observed and recorded.

• Objective. The coding scheme and the categories should require little inference or interpretation from the researcher. Clear guidelines and detailed definitions of categories should help the observer to objectively code events, actions, and behavior.

• Ease of use. A good coding scheme is easy to use.

• Mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive. Categories in a coding scheme should be mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive. Categories are mutu- ally exclusive if none of the categories overlap one another. A coding scheme that is collectively exhaustive covers all possibilities (for instance, all the relev- ant events, actions, and behavior) so that it is always possible to code.

Standard coding schemes may help you to develop your own coding scheme, allow- ing you to provide an answer to your research questions. In some cases, frequency measures suffice to provide an answer to the research questions. For instance, a researcher who is merely interested in how often a manager attends scheduled and unscheduled meetings, answers telephone calls, or writes emails may simply wait

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 164

Chapter

8

Research Methods for Business

156 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

for these activities to happen and record the incidences on a simple checklist. How- ever, many researchers are not only interested in how often certain events take place, but also in the circumstances under which these events take place. In these cases, the researcher is not only interested in the frequency of certain behavior, but also in the timing of certain behavior.

Figure 8.1 illustrates various ways in which the researcher can code events: (a) a simple checklist provides information about how often a certain event has occurred; (b) a sequence record allows the researcher to collect information on how often an event occurs and about the order in which the events occur; and, finally, (c) a sequence record on a timescale adds a further level of detail, showing the time intervals between the events.

Figure 8.1 Alternative ways of coding events

Simple checklists and sequence records are often very useful to the researcher conducting structured observation. Sometimes, however, the researcher may need information about the duration of particular events. In that case the researcher will also code the start and the finish of a certain activity or event.

You have probably noticed by now that structured observation is largely quantit- ative in nature. Indeed, structured observation allows you to collect quantitative information that may be used to test the hypotheses of your study. The specific instrument for collecting the necessary data is your coding scheme. It is therefore important that your coding scheme is good; in other words, that it is valid and reliable. Validity indicates the extent to which observations accurately record the behavior in which you are interested. Reliability refers to the consistency of obser- vations, usually whether two (or more) observers, or the same observer on separate occasions, observing the same event attain the same results.

We have just discussed two important approaches to observation. Of course, there is much more to say about both participant observation and structured observation. If you are interested in learning more about these approaches you may benefit from a range of excellent books and research articles such as, for instance, Participant Observation: A Guide for Fieldworkers by DeWalt and DeWalt (2002). We will now conclude this chapter on observation by discussing advantages and disadvantages of observation.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 165

Chapter

8

Data collection methods: Observation

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 157

8.4 ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF OBSERVATION

One of the main advantages of observation is its directness. Whereas interviews and questionnaires elicit verbal responses about actions and behavior from the subjects (which merely allows behavior to be inferred from these verbal responses), observation allows the researcher to gather behavioral data without asking questions. People can be observed in their natural work environment or in the lab setting, and their activities and behaviors or other items of interest can be noted, recorded, analyzed, and interpreted.

Apart from the activities performed by the individuals under study, their move- ments, work habits, the statements made and meetings conducted by them, other − environmental − factors such as layout, work-flow patterns, the closeness of the seating arrangement, and the like, can also be noted. In observational stud- ies, it is also relatively easy to discern situational factors such as the weather (hot, cold, rainy), the day of the week (midweek as opposed to Monday or Friday), and other factors that might have a bearing on, for example, productivity, the sales of a product, traffic patterns, absenteeism, and the like. These factors can be recorded and meaningful patterns might emerge from this type of data. However, note that it is often very difficult to establish the specific effects of situational factors on behavior and actions of the subjects under study. As we explained earlier in this chapter, it is often difficult to untangle the often complex situation. Accordingly, it is sometimes very difficult to establish cause-and-effect relationships between situational factors and events, actions, and behavior.

Another advantage of observation is that is possible to observe certain groups of individuals − for example, very young children and extremely busy executives − from whom it may be otherwise difficult to obtain information. Children can be observed as to their interests and attention span with various stimuli, such as their involvement with different toys. Such observation would help toy manufacturers, child educators, day-care administrators, and others deeply involved in or respons- ible for children’s development, to design and model ideas based on children’s interests, which are more easily observed than traced in any other manner. The data obtained through observation of events as they normally occur are generally more reliable and free from respondent bias.

Observation is not without challenges and difficulties. The following drawbacks of observational studies have to be noted. Reactivity (the extent to which the observer affects the situation under study) could be a major threat to the validity of the results of observational studies, because those who are observed may behave dif- ferently during the period of the study. Observational research may be particularly vulnerable to reactivity if the observations are confined to a short period of time. In studies of longer duration, the subjects under study will become more relaxed as the study progresses and tend to behave normally, as illustrated in the follow- ing passage, provided by Malinowski, who carried out ethnographic field work in Omarkana Trobriand Islands:

It must be remembered that the natives saw me constantly every day, they ceased to be interested or alarmed, or made self-conscious by my presence, and I ceased to be a disturbing element in the tribal life which I was to study, altering it by my very approach, as always happens to a newcomer to every savage community. In fact, as they knew that I would thrust my nose into everything, even where a well-mannered native would not dream of intruding, they finished by regarding me as a part and parcel of their life, a necessary evil or nuisance, mitigated by donations of tobacco.

Malinowski, 1992, pp. 7−8

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 166

Chapter

8

Research Methods for Business

158 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Researchers doing observational studies often discount the data recorded in the first few days, especially if they seem to be (very) different from what is observed later.

Data observed from the researcher’s point of view are likely to be prone to observer biases. For instance, a possible problem in participant observation is that the research perspective fades or even disappears completely because the role that the researcher has adopted in the group has taken over: the researcher has “gone native.” This may lead to deficient, flawed, and biased accounts; there could be recording errors and errors in interpreting activities, behaviors, events, and non- verbal cues.

Observation of the happenings day in and day out, over extended periods of time, could also afflict the observer with ennui and could also introduce biases in the recording of the observations.

To minimize observer bias, observers are usually given training on how to observe and what to record. Good observational studies would also establish interobserver reliability. This could also be established during the training of the observers, when videotaped stimuli could be used to determine interobserver reliability. A simple formula can be used for the purpose − dividing the number of agreements among the trainees by the number of agreements and disagreements − thus establishing the reliability coefficient.

Observation is an obvious and appropriate technique to study actions and behavior. Though moods, feelings, and attitudes can be guessed by observing facial expres- sions and other nonverbal behaviors, the cognitive thought processes of individuals cannot be captured. In other words, it is very difficult to identify reasons behind behavior of the subjects under study. Observation is therefore often used as a tech- nique to collect data that complement data obtained by other techniques such as interviews.

A practical problem of observation is that it is time consuming. Many forms of obser- vation require the observer to be physically present, often for prolonged periods of time. For instance, participant observation entails the immersion of the researcher into the social group that is under study for many months and often even years. For this reason, this method of collecting data is not only slow, but also tedious and expensive.

In the following chapter, we turn to another method of collecting data: namely, questionnaires.

SUMMARY

In this chapter we examined observation. We explained that observation involves going into “the field,” watching what people do and describing, analyzing, and inter- preting what one has seen. We discussed various approaches to observation based on four key dimensions that characterize the way observation is conducted: control, whether the observer is a member of the group that is observed or not, structure, and concealment observation. Two important approaches to observation − par- ticipant observation and structured observation − were discussed in more detail. Finally, we discussed advantages and disadvantages of observation. We explained that one of the main advantages of observation is its directness, whereas reactivity and observer bias are important disadvantages of observation.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 167

Chapter

8

Data collection methods: Observation

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 159

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS Describe the key purpose of observation.

Discuss four dimensions that distinguish various approaches to observation.

Under which circumstances would you prefer observation as a method to col- lect data over other methods of data collection such as interviews and ques- tionnaires?

How does participant observation differ from structured observation?

Discuss how ethnography and participant observation are related.

How does moderate participation differ from complete participation?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 168

Chapter

8

Research Methods for Business

160 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Although participant observation combines the processes of participation and observation it should be distinguished from both pure observation and pure participation. Explain.

What is rapport and how is rapport established in participant observation?

Field notes are often regarded as being simultaneously data and data analysis. Why?

Is it possible to test hypotheses with structured observation? Why (not)?

How does a simple checklist differ from a sequence record on time-scale?

“One of the main advantages of observation is its directness.” Discuss.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 169

Chapter

8

Data collection methods: Observation

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 161

What is reactivity?

A disadvantage of observation is observer bias. Discuss at least two ways of minimizing observer bias.

Discuss the ethics of concealed observation.

Now do Exercises 8.1, 8.2, and 8.3.

Exercise 8.1

You are investigating the service quality of restaurants. You are collecting primary data through interviews and observation. Your task is to go to a res- taurant and collect descriptive observational data on the following factors: space (layout of the physical setting), objects (physical elements such as equip- ment, tables, chairs, and the like), actors (staff and clients), and interactions between staff members and clients.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 170

Chapter

8

Research Methods for Business

162 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Exercise 8.2

Seek permission from a professor to sit in two sessions of his or her class, and do an unstructured, nonparticipant-observer study. Give your conclusions on the data, and include in the short report your observation sheets and tabulations.

Exercise 8.3

Read all relevant information regarding Thomas Perks’ study. From this inform- ation, develop a coding scheme to test the effect of GDA labelsGDA labels show the number of calories and grams of sugars, fat, saturates (saturated fats), and salt per portion of food, and expresses these quantities as a percentage of your “Guideline Daily Amount.”

on the consumption of candy bars (chocolate bars). Do not forget to include categories allowing you to collect data on relevant covariates.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 171

Chapter

9

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 163

Chapter 9

Data collection methods: Questionnaires

Topics discussed:

� Types of questionnaire

� Guidelines for questionnaire design

� International dimensions of surveys

� Review of the advantages and disadvantages of different data collection meth- ods and when to use each

� Multimethods of data collection

� Managerial implications

� Ethics in data collection

Chapter objectives

After completing Chapter 9 you should be able to:

1. Be able to design questionnaires to tap different variables.

2. Be able to evaluate questionnaires, distinguishing the “good” and “bad” questions therein.

3. Understand the issues related to cross-cultural research.

4. Be conversant with the various data collection methods in survey research.

5. Know the advantages and disadvantages of each method.

6. Be able to make logical decisions as to the appropriate data collection methods(s) for specific studies.

7. Be able to discuss the advantages of multisources and multimethods of data collection.

8. Be able to apply what you have learned to class assignments and projects.

In Chapter 7, we have already explained that in survey research, the three main data collection methods are interviewing, observing people, and administering questionnaires. We have discussed interviewing in Chapter 7 and observation in in Chapter 8. In this chapter, we will discuss questionnaires and questionnaire design.

9.1 TYPES OF QUESTIONNAIRE

A questionnaire is a preformulated written set of questions to which respondents record their answers, usually within rather closely defined alternatives. They are an efficient data collection mechanism when a study is descriptive or explanatory in nature. Questionnaires are generally less expensive and time consuming than interviews and observation, but they also introduce a much larger chance of non- response and nonresponse error. An overview of the advantages and disadvantages of questionnaires (and other methods of data collection) and a section on when to use each of these methods is provided later in this chapter.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 172

Chapter

9

Research Methods for Business

164 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Questionnaires are generally designed to collect large numbers of quantitative data. They can be administered personally, mailed to the respondents, or electronically distributed.

9.1.1 Personally administered questionnaires

When the survey is confined to a local area a good way to collect data is to personally administer the questionnaires. The main advantage of this is that the researcher or a member of the research team can collect all the completed responses within a short period of time. Any doubts that the respondents might have on any ques- tion can be clarified on the spot. The researcher is also afforded the opportunity to introduce the research topic and motivate the respondents to offer their frank answers. Administering questionnaires to large numbers of individuals at the same time is less expensive and consumes less time than interviewing; equally, it does not require as much skill to administer a questionnaire as it does to conduct interviews. Wherever possible, questionnaires are best administered personally to groups of people because of these advantages. A disadvantage of personally administered questionnaires is that the researcher may introduce a bias by explaining questions differently to different people; participants may be in fact answering different ques- tions as compared to those to whom the questionnaire was mailed. What’s more, personally administered questionnaires take time and a lot of effort. For this reason, mail and electronic questionnaires are widely used these days.

9.1.2 Mail and electronic questionnaires

The main advantage of mail and electronic questionnaires is that a wide geograph- ical area can be covered in the survey. They are sent to the respondents, who can complete them at their convenience, in their homes, and at their own pace. How- ever, the return rates of such questionnaires are typically low. A 30% response rate is considered acceptable. Another disadvantage of the mail and the electronic ques- tionnaire is that any doubts the respondents might have cannot be clarified. Also, with very low return rates it is difficult to establish the representativeness of the sample because those responding to the survey may not at all represent the popu- lation they are supposed to. However, some effective techniques can be employed for improving the rates of response to mail and electronic questionnaires. Sending follow-up mails or letters and keeping the questionnaire brief all help. Mail and electronic questionnaires are also expected to meet with a better response rate when respondents are notified in advance about the forthcoming survey, and a reputed research organization administers them with its own introductory cover letter. In the case of mail questionnaires, enclosing some small monetary incent- ive and providing the respondent with self-addressed, stamped return envelopes are also effective techniques to increase response rates. Electronic questionnaire surveys are easily designed and administered in this day and age. These will, of course, be helpful only when the respondents know how to use the computer and feel comfortable responding in this manner. As time moves on, obviously, more and more respondents will gain the knowledge and ability to use computers and related technology efficiently. However, large groups of people still do not feel comfortable in responding via the computer.

The advantages and disadvantages of personally administered questionnaires, mail questionnaires, and electronic questionnaires are presented in Table 9.1.

The choice of using the questionnaire as a data gathering method might be restric- ted if the researcher has to reach subjects with very little education. Adding pictures to the questionnaires, if feasible, might be of help in such cases. For most business research, however, after the variables for the research have been identified and the

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 173

Chapter

9

Data collection methods: Questionnaires

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 165

Table 9.1 Advantages and disadvantages of different questionnaires

Mode of data collection Advantages Disadvantages

Personally administered questionnaires

Can establish rapport and motivate respond- ent. Doubts can be clarified. Less expensive when administered to groups of respondents. Almost 100% response rate ensured. Anonymity of respondent is high.

Explanations may intro- duce a bias. Take time and effort.

Mail questionnaires Anonymity is high. Wide geographic regions can be reached. Token gifts can be enclosed to seek com- pliance. Respondent can take more time to respond at convenience. Can be administered electronic- ally, if desired.

Response rate is almost always low. A 30% rate is quite acceptable. Cannot clarify questions. Follow-up procedures for nonresponses are neces- sary.

Electronic questionnaires Easy to administer. Can reach globally. Very inexpensive. Fast delivery. Respondents can answer at their convenience like the mail questionnaire.

Computer literacy is a must. Respondents must have access to the facility. Respondent must be will- ing to complete the sur- vey.

measures therefore found or developed, the questionnaire is a convenient data col- lection mechanism. Field studies, comparative surveys, and experimental designs often use questionnaires to measure the variables of interest. Because question- naires are in common use in surveys, it is necessary to know how to design them effectively. A set of guidelines for questionnaire construction follows.

9.2 GUIDELINES FOR QUESTIONNAIRE DESIGN

Sound questionnaire design principles should focus on three areas. The first relates to the wording of the questions. The second refers to the planning of issues with regard to how the variables will be categorized, scaled, and coded after receipt of the responses. The third pertains to the general appearance of the questionnaire. All three are important issues in questionnaire design because they can minim- ize bias in research. These issues are discussed below. The important aspects are schematically depicted in Figure 9.1.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 174

Chapter

9

Research Methods for Business

166 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Figure 9.1 Principles of questionnaire design

9.2.1 Principles of wording

The principles of wording refer to such factors as:

1. The appropriateness of the content of the questions;

2. How questions are worded and the level of sophistication of the language used;

3. The type and form of questions asked;

4. The sequencing of the questions;

5. The personal data sought from the respondents.

Each of these is explained below.

Content and purpose of the questions

The nature of the variable tapped − subjective feelings or objective facts − will determine what kinds of questions are asked. If the variables tapped are of a subject- ive nature (e.g., satisfaction, involvement), where respondents’ beliefs, perceptions, and attitudes are to be measured, the questions should tap the dimensions and ele- ments of the concept. Where objective variables, such as age and educational levels of respondents, are tapped, a single direct question − preferably one that has an ordinal scaled set of categories− is appropriate. Thus, the purpose of each question should be carefully considered so that the variables are adequately measured and yet no superfluous questions are asked.

Language and wording of the questionnaire

The language of the questionnaire should approximate the level of understanding of the respondents. The choice of words will depend on their educational level,

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 175

Chapter

9

Data collection methods: Questionnaires

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 167

the usage of terms and idioms in the culture, and the frames of reference of the respondents. For instance, even when English is the spoken or official language in two cultures, certain words may be alien to one culture. Terms such as “working here is a drag” and “she is a compulsive worker” may not be interpreted the same way in different cultures. Some blue-collar workers may not understand terminology such as “organizational structure.” Thus, it is essential to word the questions in a way that can be understood by the respondent. If some questions are either not understood or are interpreted differently by the respondent, the researcher will obtain the wrong answers to the questions, and responses will thus be biased. Hence, the questions asked, the language used, and the wording should be appropriate to tap respondents’ attitudes, perceptions, and feelings.

Type and form of questions

The type of question refers to whether the question is open-ended or closed. The form of the question refers to whether it is positively or negatively worded.

Open-ended versus closed questions

Open-ended questions allow respondents to answer them in any way they choose. An example of an open-ended question is asking the respondent to state five things that are interesting and challenging in the job. Another example is asking what the respondents like about their supervisors or their work environment. A third example is to invite their comments on the investment portfolio of the firm.

A closed question, in contrast, asks the respondents to make choices among a set of alternatives given by the researcher. For instance, instead of asking the respondent to state any five aspects of the job that she finds interesting and challenging, the researcher might list 10 or 15 aspects that might seem interesting or challenging in jobs and ask the respondents to rank the first five among these in the order of their preference. All items in a questionnaire using a nominal, ordinal, Likert, or ratio scale are considered closed.

Closed questions help the respondents to make quick decisions to choose among the several alternatives before them. They also help the researcher to code the information easily for subsequent analysis. Care has to be taken to ensure that the alternatives are mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive. If there are overlap- ping categories, or if all possible alternatives are not given (i.e., the categories are not exhaustive), the respondents might get confused and the advantage of their being enabled to make a quick decision is thus lost.

Some respondents may find even well-delineated categories in a closed question rather confining and might avail themselves of the opportunity to make additional comments. This is the reason why many questionnaires end with a final open-ended question that invites respondents to comment on topics that might not have been covered fully or adequately. The responses to such open-ended questions have to be edited and categorized for subsequent data analysis.

Positively and negatively worded questions

Instead of phrasing all questions positively, it is advisable to include some negatively worded questions as well, so the tendency in respondents to mechanically circle the points toward one end of the scale is minimized. For example, let us say that a set of six questions is used to tap the variable “perceived success” on a five-point scale, with 1 being “very low” and 5 being “very high” on the scale. A respondent who is not particularly interested in completing the questionnaire is more likely to stay involved and remain alert while answering the questions when positively and

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 176

Chapter

9

Research Methods for Business

168 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

negatively worded questions are interspersed in it. For instance, if the respondent has circled 5 for a positively worded question such as, “I feel I have been able to accomplish a number of different things in my job,” he cannot circle number 5 again to the negatively worded question, “I do not feel I am very effective in my job.” The respondent is now shaken out of any likely tendency to mechanically respond to one end of the scale. In case this does still happen, the researcher has an opportunity to detect such bias. A good questionnaire should therefore include both positively and negatively worded questions. The use of double negatives and excessive use of the words “not” and “only” should be avoided in negatively worded questions because they tend to confuse respondents. For instance, it is better to say “Coming to work is not great fun” than to say “Not coming to work is greater fun than coming to work.” Likewise, it is better to say “The rich need no help” than to say “Only the rich do not need help.”

Double-barreled questions

A question that lends itself to different possible responses to its subparts is called a double-barreled question. Such questions should be avoided and two or more separate questions asked instead. For example, the question “Do you think there is a good market for the product and that it will sell well?” could bring a “yes” response to the first part (i.e., there is a good market for the product) and a “no” response to the latter part (i.e., it will not sell well for various other reasons). In this case, it would be better to ask two questions: (1) “Do you think there is a good market for the product?” and (2) “Do you think the product will sell well?” The answers might be “yes” to both, “no” to both, “yes” to the first and “no” to the second, or “yes” to the second and “no” to the first. If we combined the two questions and asked a double-barreled question, we would confuse the respondents and obtain ambiguous responses. Hence, double-barreled questions should be eliminated.

Ambiguous questions

Even questions that are not double-barreled might be ambiguously worded and the respondent may not be sure what exactly they mean. An example of such a question is “To what extent would you say you are happy?” Respondents might find it difficult to decide whether the question refers to their state of feelings in the workplace, or at home, or in general. Thus, responses to ambiguous questions have built-in bias inasmuch as different respondents might interpret such items in the questionnaire differently. The result is a mixed bag of ambiguous responses that do not accurately provide the correct answer to the question.

Recall-dependent questions

Some questions might require respondents to recall experiences from the past that are hazy in their memory. Answers to such questions might have bias. For instance, if an employee who has had 30 years’ service in the organization is asked to state when he first started working in a particular department and for how long, he may not be able to give the correct answers and may be way off in his responses. A better source for obtaining that information would be the personnel records.

Leading questions

Questions should not be phrased in such a way that they lead the respondents to give the responses that the researcher would like them to give. An example of such a question is: “Don’t you think that in these days of escalating costs of living, employees should be given good pay rises?” By asking a leading question, we are signaling and pressuring respondents to say “yes.” Tagging the question to rising living costs

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 177

Chapter

9

Data collection methods: Questionnaires

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 169

makes it difficult for most respondents (unless they are the top bosses in charge of budget and finances) to say, “No; not unless their productivity increases too!” Another way of asking the question about pay rises to elicit less biased responses would be: “To what extent do you agree that employees should be given higher pay rises?” If respondents think that the employees do not deserve a higher pay rise at all, their response will be “Strongly Disagree”; if they think that respondents should definitely be given a high pay rise, they will respond to the “Strongly Agree” end of the scale, and the in-between points will be chosen depending on the strength of their agreement or disagreement. In this case, the question is not framed in a suggestive manner as in the previous instance.

Loaded questions

Another type of bias in questions occurs when they are phrased in an emotionally charged manner. An example of such a loaded question is asking employees: “To what extent do you think management is likely to be vindictive if the union decides to go on strike?” The words “strike” and “vindictive” are emotionally charged terms, polarizing management and unions. Hence, asking a question such as the above would elicit strongly emotional and highly biased responses. If the purpose of the question is twofold− that is, to find (1) the extent to which employees are in favor of a strike and (2) the extent to which they fear adverse reactions if they do go on strike − then these are the two specific questions that need to be asked. It may turn out that the employees are not strongly in favor of a strike and they also do not believe that management would retaliate if they did go on strike!

Social desirability

Questions should not be worded such that they elicit socially desirable responses. For instance, a question such as “Do you think that older people should be laid off?” would elicit a response of “no,” mainly because society would frown on a person who said that elderly people should be fired even if they are capable of performing their jobs satisfactorily. Hence, irrespective of the true feelings of the respondent, a socially desirable answer would be provided. If the purpose of the question is to gauge the extent to which organizations are seen as obligated to retain those above 65 years of age, a differently worded question with less pressure toward social desirability would be: “There are advantages and disadvantages to retaining senior citizens in the workforce. To what extent do you think companies should continue to keep the elderly on their payroll?”

Sometimes certain items that tap social desirability are deliberately introduced at various points in the questionnaire and an index of each individual’s social desirabil- ity tendency is calculated therefrom. This index is then applied to all other responses given by the individual in order to adjust for social desirability bias (Crowne & Mar- lowe, 1980; Edwards, 1957).

Length of questions

Finally, simple, short questions are preferable to long ones. As a rule of thumb, a question or a statement in the questionnaire should not exceed 20 words, or exceed one full line in print (Horst, 1968; Oppenheim, 1986).

Sequencing of questions

The sequence of questions in the questionnaire should be such that the respondent is led from questions of a general nature to those that are more specific, and from questions that are relatively easy to answer to those that are progressively more

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 178

Chapter

9

Research Methods for Business

170 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

difficult. This funnel approach, as it is called (Festinger & Katz, 1966), facilitates the easy and smooth progress of the respondent through the items in the questionnaire. The progression from general to specific questions might mean that the respondent is first asked questions of a global nature that pertain to the issue, and then is asked more incisive questions regarding the specific topic. Easy questions might relate to issues that do not involve much thinking; the more difficult ones might call for more thought, judgment, and decision making in providing the answers.

In determining the sequence of questions, it is advisable not to place contiguously a positively worded and a negatively worded question tapping the same element or dimension of a concept. For instance, placing two questions such as the following, one immediately after the other, is not only awkward but might also seem insulting to the respondent.

I have opportunities to interact with my colleagues during work hours.

I have few opportunities to interact with my colleagues during work hours.

First, there is no need to ask the very same question in both a positive and a negative way. Second, if for some reason this is deemed necessary (e.g., to check the consistency of the responses), the two questions should be placed in different parts of the questionnaire, as far apart as possible.

The way questions are sequenced can also introduce certain biases, frequently referred to as ordering effects. Though randomly placing the questions in the ques- tionnaire reduces any systematic bias in the responses, it is very rarely done, because of subsequent confusion while categorizing, coding, and analyzing the responses.

In sum, the language and wording of the questionnaire focus on such issues as the type and form of questions asked (i.e., open-ended and closed questions, and positively and negatively worded questions), as well as avoiding double-barreled questions, ambiguous questions, leading questions, loaded questions, questions prone to tap socially desirable answers, and those involving distant recall. Questions should also not be unduly long. Using the funnel approach helps respondents to progress through the questionnaire with ease and comfort.

Classification data or personal information

Classification data, also known as personal information or demographic questions, elicit such information as age, educational level, marital status, and income. Unless absolutely necessary, it is best not to ask for the name of the respondent. If, how- ever, the questionnaire has to be identified with the respondents for any reason, then the questionnaire can be numbered and connected by the researcher to the respondent’s name, in a separately maintained, private document. This procedure should be clearly explained to the respondent. The reason for using the numerical system in questionnaires is to ensure the anonymity of the respondent.

Whether questions seeking personal information should appear at the beginning or at the end of the questionnaire is a matter of choice for the researcher. Some researchers ask for personal data at the end rather than the beginning of the ques- tionnaire (Oppenheim, 1986). Their reasoning may be that by the time the respond- ent reaches the end of the questionnaire he or she has been convinced of the legitimacy and genuineness of the questions framed by the researcher and, hence, is more inclined and amenable to share personal information. Researchers who prefer to elicit most of the personal information at the very beginning may opine that once respondents have shared some of their personal history, they may have psychologically identified themselves with the questionnaire, and may feel a com- mitment to respond. Thus, whether one asks for this information at the beginning or

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 179

Chapter

9

Data collection methods: Questionnaires

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 171

at the end of the questionnaire is a matter of individual choice. However, questions seeking details of income, or other highly sensitive information− if deemed neces- sary− are best placed at the very end of the questionnaire. Even so, it is a wise policy to ask for such information by providing a range of response options, rather than seeking exact figures. For example, the variables may be tapped as shown below:

Age Annual income

Under 20 Less than $20 000

20−30 $20 000−30 000

31−40 $30 001−40 000

41−50 $40 001−50 000

51−60 $50 001−70 000

Over 60 $70 001−90 000

Over $90 000

In surveys, it is advisable to gather certain demographic data such as age, sex, educational level, job level, department, and number of years in the organization, even if the theoretical framework does not necessitate or include these variables. Such data help to describe the sample characteristics in the report written after data analysis. However, when there are only a few respondents in a department, then questions likely to reveal their identity might render them futile, objectionable, and threatening to employees. For instance, if there is only one female in a department, then she might refrain from responding to the question on gender, because it would establish the source of the data; this apprehension is understandable.

To sum up, certain principles of wording need to be followed while designing a ques- tionnaire. The questions asked must be appropriate for tapping the variable. The language and wording used should be such that it is meaningful to the employees. The form and type of questions should be geared to minimize respondent bias. The sequencing of the questions should facilitate the smooth progress of the responses from start to finish. The personal data should be gathered with due regard to the sensitivity of the respondents’ feelings, and with respect for privacy.

9.2.2 Principles of measurement

Just as there are guidelines to be followed to ensure that the wording of the ques- tionnaire is appropriate to minimize bias, so also are there some principles of measurement to be followed to ensure that the data collected are appropriate to test our hypotheses. These refer to the scales and scaling techniques used in meas- uring concepts, as well as the assessment of reliability and validity of the measures used, which are all discussed in Chapter 12.

Appropriate scales have to be used depending on the type of data that need to be obtained. The different scaling mechanisms that help us to anchor our scales appropriately should be properly used. Wherever possible, the interval and ratio scales should be used in preference to nominal or ordinal scales. Once data are obtained, the “goodness of data” should be assessed through tests of validity and reliability. Validity establishes how well a technique, instrument, or process meas- ures a particular concept, and reliability indicates how stably and consistently the instrument taps the variable. Finally, the data have to be obtained in a manner that makes for easy categorization and coding, both of which are discussed later.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 180

Chapter

9

Research Methods for Business

172 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

General appearance or “getup” of the questionnaire

Not only is it important to address issues of wording and measurement in question- naire design, but it is also necessary to pay attention to how the questionnaire looks. An attractive and neat questionnaire with appropriate introduction, instructions, and well-arrayed set of questions and response alternatives will make it easier for the respondents to answer them. A good introduction, well-organized instructions, and neat alignment of the questions are all important. These elements are briefly discussed with examples.

A good introduction

A proper introduction that clearly discloses the identity of the researcher and con- veys the purpose of the survey is absolutely necessary. It is also essential to establish some rapport with the respondents and motivate them to respond to the questions in the questionnaire wholeheartedly and enthusiastically. Assurance of confiden- tiality of the information provided by them will allow for less biased answers. The introduction section should end on a courteous note, thanking the respondent for taking the time to respond to the survey. The following is an example of an appropriate introduction.

Organizing questions, giving instructions and guidance, and good alignment

Organizing the questions logically and neatly in appropriate sections and providing instructions on how to complete the items in each section will help the respondents to answer them without difficulty. Questions should also be neatly aligned in a way that allows the respondent to complete the task of reading and answering the questionnaire by expending the least time and effort and without straining the eyes.

A specimen of the portion of a questionnaire incorporating the above points follows.

EXAMPLE

Dear Participant Date

This questionnaire is designed to study aspects of life at work. The informa- tion you provide will help us better understand the quality of our work life. Because you are the one who can give us a correct picture of how you exper- ience your work life, I request you to respond to the questions frankly and honestly.

Your response will be kept strictly confidential. Only members of the research team will have access to the information you give. In order to ensure the utmost privacy, we have provided an identification number for each participant. This number will be used by us only for follow-up proced- ures. The numbers, names, and the completed questionnaires will not be made available to anyone other than the research team. A summary of the results will be mailed to you after the data are analyzed.

Thank you very much for your time and cooperation. I greatly appreci- ate the help of your organization and yourself in furthering this research endeavor.

Cordially, (Sd)

A. Professor, PhD

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 181

Chapter

9

Data collection methods: Questionnaires

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 173

Section Two: About Work Life

The questions below ask about how you experience your work life. Think in terms of your everyday experiences and accomplishments on the job and put the most appropriate response number for you beside each item, using the scale below.

Strongly Agree Agree

Slightly Agree Neutral

Slightly Disagree Disagree

Strongly Disagree

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

I do my work best when my job assignments are fairly difficult. __

When I have a choice, I try to work in a group instead of by myself.

__

In my work assignments, I try to be my own boss. __

I seek an active role in the leadership of a group. __

I try very hard to improve on my past performance at work. __

I pay a good deal of attention to the feelings of others at work. __

I go my own way at work, regardless of the opinions of others. __

I avoid trying to influence those around me to see things my way. __

I take moderate risks, sticking my neck out to get ahead at work. __

I prefer to do my own work, letting others do theirs. __

I disregard rules and regulations that hamper my personal free- dom.

__

Personal data

Demographic or personal data could be organized as in the example that follows. Note the ordinal scaling of the age variable.

Section One: About Yourself

Please circle the numbers representing the most appropriate responses for you in respect of the following items.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 182

Chapter

9

Research Methods for Business

174 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

1. Your age 2. Your highest completed level of education

3. Your gender

1. Under 20 2. 0−35 3. 36−50 4. 51−65 5. Over 65

1. Elementary school 2. High school 3. College degree 4. Graduate degree 5. Other (specify)

1. Female 2. Male

4. Your marital status 5. Number of preschool children (under 5 years of age)

6. Age of the eldest child in your care (years)

1. Married 2. Single 3. Widowed 4. Divorced or separ-

ated 5. Other (specify)

1. None 2. One 3. Two 4. Three or more

1. Under 5 2. 5-12 3. 13−19 4. Over 19 5. Not applicable

7. Number of years worked in the organiz- ation

8. Number of other organ- izations worked for before joining this organization

9. Present work shift

1. Less than 1 2. 1−2 3. 3−5 4. 6−10 5. Over 10

1. None 2. One 3. Two 4. Three 5. Four or more

1. First 2. Second 3. Third

10. Job status

1. Top management 2. Middle manage-

ment 3. First-level super-

visor 4. Nonmanagerial

Information on income and other sensitive personal data

Although demographic information can be sought either at the beginning or at the end of the questionnaire, information of a very private and personal nature such as income, state of health, and so on, if considered at all necessary for the survey, should be asked at the end of the questionnaire, rather than the beginning. Also, such questions should be justified by explaining how this information might contribute to knowledge and problem solving, so that respondents do not perceive them to be of an intrusive or prying nature (see example below). Postponing such questions to the end will help reduce respondent bias if the individual is vexed by the personal nature of the question.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 183

Chapter

9

Data collection methods: Questionnaires

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 175

EXAMPLE

Because many people believe that income is a significant factor in explaining the type of career decisions individuals make, the following two questions are very important for this research. Like all other items in this questionnaire, the responses to these two questions will be kept confidential. Please circle the most appropriate number that describes your position.

Roughly, my total yearly income before taxes and other deductions is:

Roughly, the total yearly income before taxes and other deductions of my immediate family− including my own job income, income from other sources, and the income of my spouse− is:

1. Less than $36 000 2. $36 001−50 000 3. $50 001−70 000 4. $70 001−90 000 5. Over $90 000

1. Less than $36 000 2. $36 001−50 000 3. $50 001−70 000 4. $70 001−90 000 5. $90 001−120 000 6. $120 001−150 000 7. Over $150 000

Open-ended question at the end

The questionnaire could include an open-ended question at the end, allowing respondents to comment on any aspect they choose. It should end with an expres- sion of sincere thanks to respondents. The last part of the questionnaire could look as follows.

EXAMPLE

The questions in the survey may not be all-embracing and comprehensive and may not therefore have afforded you an opportunity to report some things you may want to say about your job, the organization, or yourself. Please make any additional comments needed in the space provided.

How did you feel about completing this questionnaire? Check the face in the following diagram that reflects your feelings.

Concluding the questionnaire

The questionnaire should end on a courteous note, reminding the respondent to check that all the items have been completed, as per the example below.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 184

Chapter

9

Research Methods for Business

176 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

EXAMPLE

I sincerely appreciate your time and cooperation. Please check to make sure that you have not skipped any questions inadvertently, and then drop the questionnaire in the locked box, clearly marked for the purpose, at the entrance of your department.

Thank you!

9.2.3 Review of questionnaire design

We have devoted a lot of attention to questionnaire design because questionnaires are the most common method of collecting data. The principles of questionnaire design relate to how the questions are worded and measured, and how the entire questionnaire is organized. To minimize respondent bias and measurement errors, all the principles discussed have to be followed carefully.

Questionnaires are most useful as a data collection method, especially when large numbers of people are to be reached in different geographical regions. They are a popular method of collecting data because researchers can obtain information fairly easily, and the questionnaire responses are easily coded. When well-validated instruments are used, the findings of the study benefit the scientific community since the results can be replicated and additions to the theory base made.

There are several ways of administering questionnaires. Questionnaires can be per- sonally administered to respondents, inserted in magazines, periodicals, or news- papers, mailed to respondents, or electronically distributed through email− either via the Internet or an intranet. Software is also available to frame subsequent ques- tions based on the subject’s response to the preceding question. Companies’ web- sites can also elicit survey responses; for example, reactions to customer service, product utility, and the like. Global research is now vastly facilitated by the Internet.

9.2.4 Pretesting of structured questions

Whether it is a structured interview where the questions are posed to the respondent in a predetermined order, or a questionnaire that is used in a survey, it is important to pretest the instrument to ensure that the questions are understood by the respond- ents (i.e., there is no ambiguity in the questions) and that there are no problems with the wording or measurement. Pretesting involves the use of a small number of respondents to test the appropriateness of the questions and their comprehension. This helps to rectify any inadequacies before administering the instrument orally or through a questionnaire to respondents, and thus reduces bias.

It would be good to debrief the results of the pretest and obtain additional inform- ation from the small group of participants (who serve the role of a focus group) on their general reactions to the questionnaire and how they felt about completing the instrument.

9.2.5 Electronic questionnaire and survey design

We have explained earlier in this chapter that electronic questionnaire surveys are easily designed and administered. Electronic survey design systems (for instance, The Survey System, Keypoint, SurveyGold, Statpac, SurveyMonkey, SurveyPro), which facilitate the preparation and administration of questionnaires, are particularly useful for marketing research. Such systems usually include a range of programs enabling the user to design sophisticated questionnaires, computerize the data

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 185

Chapter

9

Data collection methods: Questionnaires

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 177

collection process, check for syntactical or logical errors in the coding, and analyze the data collected. More reliable data are likely to result since the respondent can go back and forth and easily change a response, and various on- and off-screen stimuli are provided to sustain respondents’ interest.

Even as the survey is in progress, descriptive summaries of the cumulative data can be obtained either on the screen or in printed form. After data collection is complete, a data-editing program identifies missing or out-of-range data (e.g., a 6 in response to a question on a five-point scale). The researcher can set the parameters to either delete missing responses if there are too many of them, or compute the mean of other responses and substitute this figure for the missing response. Such systems also include data analytic programs such as ANOVA, multiple regression, and oth- ers (discussed later in the book). Randomization of questions and the weighting of respondents to ensure more representative results (in cases where the sample either overrepresents or underrepresents certain population groups − discussed in Chapter 13 on Sampling) are some of the attractive features of survey design systems.

Electronic questionnaires are very popular at the moment, also because electronic nonresponse rates may not be any lower than those for mail questionnaires. With the increased computer literacy, we can expect electronic questionnaire administration to keep on growing in the future.

9.3 INTERNATIONAL DIMENSIONS OF SURVEYS

We have so far discussed instrument development for eliciting responses from sub- jects within a country. With the globalization of business operations, managers often need to compare the business effectiveness of their subsidiaries in different countries. Researchers engaged in cross-cultural research also endeavor to trace the similarities and differences in the behavioral and attitudinal responses of employ- ees at various levels in different cultures. When data are collected through ques- tionnaires and occasionally through interviews, one should pay attention to the measuring instruments and how data are collected, in addition to being sensitive to cultural differences in the use of certain terms. Surveys should also be tailored to the different cultures, as discussed below.

9.3.1 Special issues in instrumentation for cross-cultural research

Certain special issues need to be addressed while designing instruments for collect- ing data from multiple countries. Since different languages are spoken in different countries, it is important to ensure that the translation of the instrument to the local language matches accurately to the original language. For this purpose, the instrument should be first translated by a local expert. Supposing a comparative survey is to be done between Japan and the United States, and the researcher is a US national, then the instrument has first to be translated from English to Japanese. Then, another bilinguist should translate it back to English. This back translation, as it is called, ensures vocabulary equivalence (i.e., that the words used have the same meaning). Idiomatic equivalence could also become an issue, where some idioms unique to one language just do not lend themselves for translation to another lan- guage. Conceptual equivalence, where the meanings of certain words could differ in different cultures, is yet another issue to which attention has to be paid. For instance, the meaning of the concept “love” may differ in different cultures. All these issues can be taken care of through good back translation by persons who are fluent with the relevant languages and are also knowledgeable about the customs and usages in the cultures concerned.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 186

Chapter

9

Research Methods for Business

178 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

The following examples culled from BusinessWeek show the pitfalls in cross-cultural advertising and emphasize the need for back translation of messages for idiomatic and conceptual equivalence. Not only is the meaning lost in some advertisement messages by literally translating the English words into the native languages, but in some cases they actually become offensive.

EXAMPLE

1. Pepsi’s “Come alive with the Pepsi generation” when translated into Chinese means “Pepsi brings your ancestors from the grave.”

2. Frank Perdue’s chicken slogan “It takes a strong man to make a tender chicken” translates in Spanish to “It takes an aroused man to make a chicken affectionate.”

3. When American Airlines wanted to advertise its new leather first-class seats to Mexico, its “Fly in Leather” campaign would have literally translated to “Fly Naked” in Spanish.

9.3.2 Issues in data collection

At least three issues are important for cross-cultural data collection − response equivalence, timing of data collection, and the status of the individual collecting the data. Response equivalence is ensured by adopting uniform data collection procedures in the different cultures. Identical methods of introducing the study, the researcher, task instructions, and closing remarks, in personally administered questionnaires, provide equivalence in motivation, goal orientation, and response attitudes. Timing of data collected across cultures is also critical for cross-cultural comparison. Data collection should be completed within acceptable time frames in the different countries− say within three to four months. If too much time elapses in collecting data in the different countries, much might change during the time interval in any one country or all the countries.

As pointed out as early as 1969 by Mitchell, in interview surveys, the egalitarian- oriented interviewing style used in the West may not be appropriate in societies that have well-defined status and authority structures. Also, when a foreigner comes to collect data, the responses might be biased for fear of portraying the country to a “foreigner” in an “adverse light” (Sekaran, 1983). The researcher has to be sensit- ive to these cultural nuances while engaging in cross-cultural research. It is worth while collaborating with a local researcher while developing and administering the research instrument, particularly when the language and customs of the respond- ents are different from those of the researcher.

9.4 REVIEW OF THE ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF DIFFERENT DATA COLLECTION METHODS AND WHEN TO USE EACH

Having discussed the various data collection methods, we will now briefly recount the advantages and disadvantages of the three most commonly used methods − interviews, observation, and questionnaires− and examine when each method can be most profitably used.

Face-to-face interviews provide rich data, offer the opportunity to establish rapport with the interviewees, and help to explore and understand complex issues. Many ideas ordinarily difficult to articulate can also be brought to the surface and dis- cussed during such interviews. On the negative side, face-to-face interviews have

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 187

Chapter

9

Data collection methods: Questionnaires

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 179

the potential for introducing interviewer bias and can be expensive if a large number of subjects are involved. Where several interviewers become necessary, adequate training becomes a necessary first step. Face-to-face interviews are best suited to the exploratory stages of research when the researcher is trying to get an overarching view of the concepts or the situational factors.

Telephone interviews help to contact subjects dispersed over various geographic regions and obtain immediate responses from them. They are, hence, an efficient way of collecting data when one has specific, structured questions to ask, needs the responses quickly, and has a sample spread over a wide area. On the negative side, the interviewer cannot observe the nonverbal responses of the respondents, and the interviewee can block the call.

Observational studies help us to comprehend complex issues through direct obser- vation (either as a participant or a nonparticipant observer) and then, if possible, asking questions to seek clarification on certain issues. The data obtained are rich and uncontaminated by self-report bias. On the negative side, they are expensive, since long periods of observation (usually encompassing several weeks or even months) are required, and observer bias may well be present in the data. Because of the costs involved, very few observational studies are done in business. Henry Mintzberg’s study of managerial work is one of the best-known published works that used an observational data collection method. Observational studies are best suited for research requiring non-self-report descriptive data; that is, when beha- viors are to be understood without directly asking the respondents themselves. Observational studies can also capture marketing information such as the in-store buying behavior of customers.

Personally administering questionnaires to groups of individuals helps to (1) estab- lish rapport with the respondents while introducing the survey, (2) provide clari- fication sought by the respondents on the spot, and (3) collect the questionnaires immediately after they are completed. In that sense, there is a 100% response rate. On the negative side, administering questionnaires personally is expensive, especially if the sample is widely dispersed geographically. Personally administered question- naires are best suited when data are collected from subjects that are located in close proximity to one another and groups of respondents can be conveniently assembled.

Mail questionnaires and electronic questionnaires are advantageous when responses to many questions have to be obtained from a sample that is geographically dis- persed, or it is difficult or not possible to conduct telephone interviews without much expense. On the negative side, such questionnaires usually have a low response rate and one cannot be sure if the data obtained are unbiased since the non- respondents may be different from those who did respond. The mailed or elec- tronic questionnaire survey is best suited (and perhaps the only alternative open to the researcher) when information is to be obtained on a substantial scale through structured questions, at a reasonable cost, from a sample that is widely dispersed geographically.

9.5 MULTIMETHODS OF DATA COLLECTION

Because almost all data collection methods have some bias associated with them, collecting data through multimethods and from multiple sources lends rigor to research. For instance, if the responses collected through interviews, questionnaires, and observation are strongly correlated with one another, then we will have more confidence about the goodness of the collected data. If the same question fetches discrepant answers in the questionnaire and during the interview, then an air of uncertainty emerges and we will be inclined to discard both data as being biased.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 188

Chapter

9

Research Methods for Business

180 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Likewise, if data obtained from several sources bear a great degree of similarity, we will have stronger conviction in the goodness of the data. For example, if an employee rates his performance as 4 on a five-point scale, and his supervisor gives him a similar rating, we may be inclined to consider him a better than average worker. On the contrary, if he gives himself a 5 on the five-point scale and his supervisor gives him a rating of 2, then we will not know to what extent there is a bias and from which source. Therefore, high correlations among data obtained on the same variable from different sources and through different data collection methods lend more credibility to the research instrument and to the data obtained through these instruments. Good research entails collection of data from multiple sources and through multiple data collection methods. Such research, though, is more costly and time consuming.

9.6 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS

As a manager, you will perhaps engage consultants to do research and may not be collecting data yourself through interviews, questionnaires, or observation. How- ever, during those instances, when you will perforce have to obtain work-related information through interviews with clients, employees, or others, you will know how to phrase unbiased questions to elicit the right types of useful response. Moreover, you, as the sponsor of research, will be able to decide at what level of sophistication you want data to be collected, based on the complexity and gravity of the situation. Moreover, as a constant participant-observer of all that goes on around you at the workplace, you will be able to understand the dynamics oper- ating in the situation. Also, as a manager, you will be able to differentiate between good and bad questions used in surveys, with sensitivity to cultural variations, not only in scaling but also in developing the entire survey instrument, and in collecting data, as discussed in this chapter.

9.7 ETHICS IN DATA COLLECTION

Several ethical issues should be addressed while collecting data. As previously noted, these pertain to those who sponsor the research, those who collect the data, and those who offer them. The sponsors should ask for the study to be done to better the purpose of the organization, and not for any other self-serving reason. They should respect the confidentiality of the data obtained by the researcher, and not ask for the individual or group responses to be disclosed to them, or ask to see the questionnaires. They should have an open mind in accepting the results and recommendations in the report presented by the researchers.

9.7.1 Ethics and the researcher

1. Treating the information given by the respondent as strictly confidential and guarding his or her privacy is one of the primary responsibilities of the researcher. If the vice president or some other top executive wishes to take a look at the completed questionnaires, the obligatory need to preserve the confidentiality of the documents should then be pointed out. They should be reminded that prior understanding of this had already been reached with them before starting the survey.

Also, data for a subgroup of, say, less than ten individuals, should be dealt with tactfully to preserve the confidentiality of the group members. The data can be combined with others, or treated in another unidentifiable manner. It is difficult to sanitize reports to protect sources and still preserve the richness of

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 189

Chapter

9

Data collection methods: Questionnaires

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 181

detail of the study. An acceptable alternative has to be found, since preserving confidentiality is the fundamental goal.

2. The researcher should not misrepresent the nature of the study to subjects, especially in lab experiments. The purpose of the research must be explained to them.

3. Personal or seemingly intrusive information should not be solicited, and if it is absolutely necessary for the project, it should be tapped with high sensitivity to the respondent, offering specific reasons.

4. Whatever the nature of the data collection method, the self-esteem and self- respect of the subjects should never be violated.

5. No one should be forced to respond to the survey and if someone does not want to avail themselves of the opportunity to participate, the individual’s desire should be respected. Informed consent of the subjects should be the goal of the researcher. This holds true even when data are collected through mechanical means, such as recording interviews, videotaping, and the like.

6. Nonparticipant observers should be as unintrusive as possible. In qualitat- ive studies, personal values could easily bias the data. It is necessary for the researcher to make explicit his or her assumptions, expectations, and biases, so that informed decisions regarding the quality of the data can be made by the manager.

7. In lab studies, the subjects should be debriefed with full disclosure of the reason for the experiment after they have participated in the study.

8. Subjects should never be exposed to situations where they could be subject to physical or mental harm. The researcher should take personal responsibility for their safety.

9. There should be absolutely no misrepresentation or distortion in reporting the data collected during the study.

9.7.2 Ethical behavior of respondents

1. The subject, once having exercised the choice to participate in a study, should cooperate fully in the tasks ahead, such as responding to a survey or taking part in an experiment.

2. The respondent also has an obligation to be truthful and honest in the responses. Misrepresentation or giving information, knowing it to be untrue, should be avoided.

SUMMARY

In this chapter we examined questionnaires and questionnaire design. We also pointed out some issues in cross-cultural research, such as back translation, and alerted the reader to the pitfalls while collecting data in a different culture. We discussed the advantages and disadvantages as well as the bias inherent in each data collection method in survey research: interviews, observation, and questionnaires. Because of the inherent bias in each of the data collection methods, the collection of data from multiple sources and through multiple methods was recommended. The final decision will, of course, be governed by considerations of cost, and the degree of rigor that the given research goal calls for.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 190

Chapter

9

Research Methods for Business

182 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

Discuss the advantages and disadvantages of personally administered, ques- tionnaires, mail questionnaires, and electronic questionnaires.

Explain the principles of wording, stating how these are important in question- naire design, citing examples not in the book.

How are multiple methods of data collection and from multiple sources related to the reliability and validity of the measures?

“Every data collection method has its own built-in biases. Therefore, resorting to multimethods of data collection is only going to compound the biases.” How would you critique this statement?

“One way to deal with discrepancies found in the data obtained from multiple sources is to average the figures and take the mean as the value of the variable.” What is your reaction to this?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 191

Chapter

9

Data collection methods: Questionnaires

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 183

How has the advancement in technology helped data gathering via question- naires?

Now do Exercises 9.1, 9.2, and 9.3.

Exercise 9.1

David Shen Liang is a business student engaged in a management project for Ocg Business Services (OBS), a supplier of office equipment to a large group of (international) customers. OBS operates in the Business-to-business market. David wants to test the following hypotheses:

1. Service quality has a positive effect on customer satisfaction.

2. Price perception has a negative effect on customer satisfaction.

For this purpose he has developed the following questionnaire:

Dear Sir,

My name is David Shen Liang. I am a business student currently engaged in a management project for Ocg Business Services (OBS). I am interested in how satisfied you− as a client of OBS− are about your relationship with OBS. For this purpose I would like you to fill in the following questionnaire. It will take no more than five minutes to fill in the questionnaire. Thank you so much for your time.

Kind regards,

David Shen Liang.

OBS is in an easily accessible location

Strongly disagree -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Strongly agree

OBS has convenient opening hours

Strongly disagree -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Strongly agree

OBS delivers fast service

Strongly disagree -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Strongly agree

OBS informs you on the status of your order

Strongly disagree -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Strongly agree

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 192

Chapter

9

Research Methods for Business

184 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

OBS provides its services on the agreed time

Strongly disagree -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Strongly agree

OBS offers a range of products and services that fits your needs

Strongly disagree -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Strongly agree

The end-products of OBS are sound

Strongly disagree -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Strongly agree

The facilities of OBS look well-cared for

Strongly disagree -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Strongly agree

Employees of OBS are helpful and friendly

Strongly disagree -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Strongly agree

Employees of OBS give good advice

Strongly disagree -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Strongly agree

Employees of OBS respond to your requests promptly

Strongly disagree -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Strongly agree

OBS is reliable

Strongly disagree -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Strongly agree

When a problem occurs, OBS will help you adequately

Strongly disagree -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Strongly agree

OBS is innovative

Strongly disagree -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Strongly agree

OBS has your best interests at heart

Strongly disagree -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Strongly agree

OBS fully informs you about the products and services it provides within your organization and about everything else you may want to learn from OBS or its employees

Strongly disagree -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Strongly agree

The price of OBS products is:

Very Low -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Very high

In general, how satisfied are you about the services you received?

Very satisfied -1—2—3—4—5—6—7- Very dissatisfied

Which services do you miss at Ocg Business Services? ____________

When was your first contact with Ocg? ____________ ago.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 193

Chapter

9

Data collection methods: Questionnaires

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 185

Are the services of Ocg Business Services of added value to your organization?

[_] Yes, they are.

[_] Irrelevant, the services are not better or worse than those of other providers.

[_] No, I would prefer another provider.

General Questions

Age _________

Gender Male/Female

[_] Secretarial [_] Management [_] Administration

[_] Facility [_] Marketing/sales [_] Project

[_] Engineers [_] Purchasing [_] Other

Th is was the final question of this questionnaire. Th ank you very much for your cooperation!

Comment on the foregoing questionnaire. Pay attention to:

F principles of wording

F the classification data (personal information)

F the general appearance or “getup” of the questionnaire.

Exercise 9.2

A production manager wants to assess the reactions of the blue-collar workers in his department (including foremen) to the introduction of computer-integrated manufacturing (CIM) systems. He is particularly interested to know how they perceive the effects of CIM on:

1. their future jobs.

2. additional training that they will have to receive.

3. future job advancement.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 194

Chapter

9

Research Methods for Business

186 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Design a questionnaire for the production manager.

Exercise 9.3

H1: There is a positive relationship between the service quality of the on-campus dining facilities and customer loyalty.

H2: The relationship between service quality and customer loyalty is mediated by customer satisfaction.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 195

Chapter

10

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 187

Chapter 10

Experimental designs

Topics discussed:

� Lab and field experiments

� Control

� Manipulation

� Controlling the contaminating variables

� Internal validity

� External validity

� Trade-off between internal and external validity

� Factors aff ecting validity

� Internal validity in case studies

� Types of experimental designs and validity

� Simulation

� Ethical issues in experimental research

� Managerial implications

� Appendix: Further experimental designs

Chapter objectives

After completing Chapter 10 you should be able to:

1. Distinguish between causal and correlational analysis.

2. Explain the difference between lab and field experiments.

3. Explain the following terms: nuisance variables, manipulation, experimental and control groups, treatment effect, matching, and randomization.

4. Discuss internal and external validity in experimental designs.

5. Discuss the seven possible threats to internal validity in experimental designs.

6. Describe the different types of experimental designs.

7. Discuss the Solomon four-group design and its implications for internal and external validity.

8. Apply what has been learned to class assignments and exams.

In Chapter 6, we examined the basic research designs. We distinguished causal from correlational studies and explained that experimental studies are typically used when the researcher is interested in establishing cause-and-effect relationships.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 196

Chapter

10

Research Methods for Business

188 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Consider the following three scenarios.

Cause-and-effect relationship after randomization

Scenario A A manufacturer of luxury cars has decided to launch a global brand communications campaign to reinforce the image of its cars. An 18-month campaign is scheduled that will be rolled out worldwide, with advertising in television, print, and elec- tronic media. Under the title “Bravura”, a renowned advert- ising agency developed three different campaign concepts. To determine which of these concepts is most effective, the car manufacturer wants to test their effects on the brand’s image. But how can the car manufacturer test the effectiveness of these concepts?

Scenario B A study of absenteeism and the steps taken to curb it indicates that companies use the following incentives to reduce it:

14% give bonus days 39% offer cash 39% present recognition awards 4% award prizes 4% pursue other strategies.

Asked about their effectiveness, 22% of the companies said they were very effective 66% said they were somewhat effective 12% said they were not at all effective.

What does the above information tell us? How do we know what kinds of incentives cause people not to absent them- selves? What particular incentive(s) did the 22% of companies that found their strategies to be “very effective” offer? Is there a direct causal connection between one or two specific incent- ives and absenteeism?

Scenario C The dagger effect of layoffs is that there is a sharp drop in the commitment of workers who are retained, even though they might well understand the logic of the reduction in the work- force. Does layoff really cause employee commitment to drop off, or is something else operating in this situation?

The answers to the questions raised in Scenarios A, B, and C might be found by using experimental designs in researching the issues.

In Chapter 6 we touched on experimental designs. In this chapter, we will discuss both lab experiments and field experiments in detail. Experimental designs, as we know, are set up to examine possible cause-and-effect relationships among vari- ables, in contrast to correlational studies, which examine the relationships among variables without necessarily trying to establish if one variable causes another.

We have already explained that in order to establish that a change in the independ- ent variable causes a change in the dependent variable: (1) the independent and the dependent variable should covary; (2) the independent variable should pre- cede the dependent variable; (3) no other factor should be a possible cause of the

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 197

Chapter

10

Experimental designs

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 189

change in the dependent variable; (4) a logical explanation is needed about why the independent variable affects the dependent variable.

The third condition implies that to establish causal relationships between two vari- ables in an organizational setting, several variables that might covary with the dependent variable have to be controlled. This then allows us to say that variable X, and variable X alone, causes the dependent variable Y. However, it is not always possible to control all the covariates while manipulating the causal factor (the inde- pendent variable that is causing the dependent variable) in organizational settings, where events flow or occur naturally and normally. It is, however, possible to first isolate the effects of a variable in a tightly controlled artificial setting (the lab set- ting), and after testing and establishing the cause-and-effect relationship under these tightly controlled conditions, see how generalizable such relationships are to the field setting.

Let us illustrate this with an example.

EXAMPLE

Suppose a manager believes that staffing the accounting department com- pletely with personnel with M.Acc. (Master of Accountancy) degrees will increase its productivity. It is well nigh impossible to transfer all those without the M.Acc. degree currently in the department to other departments and recruit fresh M.Acc. degree holders to take their place. Such a course of action is bound to disrupt the work of the entire organization inasmuch as many new people will have to be trained, work will slow down, employees will get upset, and so on. However, the hypothesis that possession of an M.Acc. degree would cause increases in productivity can be tested in an artificially created setting (i.e., not at the regular workplace) in which an accounting job can be given to three groups of people: those with an M.Acc. degree, those without an M.Acc. degree, and a mixed group of those with and without an M.Acc. degree (as is the case in the present work setting). If the first group performs exceedingly well, the second group poorly, and the third group falls somewhere in the middle, there will be evidence to indicate that the M.Acc. degree qualification might indeed cause productivity to rise. If such evidence is found, then planned and sys- tematic efforts can be initiated to gradually transfer those without the M.Acc. degree in the accounting department to other departments and recruit others with this degree to this department. It is then possible to see to what extent pro- ductivity does, in fact, go up in the department because all the staff members are M.Acc. degree holders.

As we saw earlier, experimental designs fall into two categories: experiments done in an artificial or contrived environment, known as lab experiments, and those done in the natural environment in which activities regularly take place, known as field experiments.

10.1 THE LAB EXPERIMENT

As stated earlier, when a cause-and-effect relationship between an independent and a dependent variable of interest is to be clearly established, then all other variables that might contaminate or confound the relationship have to be tightly controlled. In other words, the possible effects of other variables on the dependent variable have to be accounted for in some way, so that the actual causal effects of the investigated independent variable on the dependent variable can be determined. It is also necessary to manipulate the independent variable so that the extent of its

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 198

Chapter

10

Research Methods for Business

190 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

causal effects can be established. The control and manipulation are best done in an artificial setting (the laboratory), where the causal effects can be tested. When con- trol and manipulation are introduced to establish cause-and-effect relationships in an artificial setting, we have laboratory experimental designs, also known as lab experiments.

Because we use the terms control and manipulation, let us examine what these concepts mean.

10.1.1 Control

When we postulate cause-and-effect relationships between two variables X and Y, it is possible that some other factor, say A, might also influence the dependent variable Y. In such a case, it will not be possible to determine the extent to which Y occurred only because of X, since we do not know how much of the total variation in Y was caused by the presence of the other factor A. For instance, a Human Resource Development manager might arrange special training for a set of newly recruited secretaries in creating web pages, to prove to the VP (his boss) that such training causes them to function more effectively. However, some of the new secretaries might function more effectively than others mainly or partly because they have had previous intermittent experience with using the web. In this case, the manager cannot prove that the special training alone caused greater effectiveness, since the previous intermittent web experience of some secretaries is a contaminating factor. If the true effect of the training on learning is to be assessed, then the learners’ previous experience has to be controlled. This might be done by not including in the experiment those who already have had some experience with the web. This is what we mean when we say we have to control the contaminating factors, and we will later see how this is done.

10.1.2 Manipulation

To examine the causal effects of an independent variable on a dependent variable, certain manipulations need to be tried. Manipulation simply means that we create different levels of the independent variable to assess the impact on the dependent variable. For example, we may want to test the theory that depth of knowledge of various manufacturing technologies is caused by rotating the employees on all the jobs on the production line and in the design department, over a four-week period. Then we can manipulate the independent variable, “rotation of employees,” by rotating one group of production workers and exposing them to all the systems during the four-week period, rotating another group of workers only partially during the four weeks (i.e., exposing them to only half of the manufacturing technologies), and leaving the third group to continue to do what they are currently doing, without any special rotation. By measuring the depth of knowledge of these groups both before and after the manipulation (also known as the treatment), it is possible to assess the extent to which the treatment caused the effect, after controlling the contaminating factors. If deep knowledge is indeed caused by rotation and exposure, the results will show that the third group had the lowest increase in depth of knowledge, the second group had some significant increase, and the first group had the greatest gains!

Let us look at another example of how causal relationships are established by manip- ulating the independent variable.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 199

Chapter

10

Experimental designs

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 191

EXAMPLE

Let us say we want to test the effects of lighting on worker production levels among sewing machine operators. To establish a cause-and-effect relationship, we must first measure the production levels of all the operators over a 15-day period with the usual amount of light they work with − say 60 watt lamps. We might then want to split the group of 60 operators into three groups of 20 members each, and while allowing one subgroup to continue to work under the same conditions as before (60 watt electric light bulbs), we might want to manipulate the intensity of the light for the other two subgroups, by making one group work with 75 watt and the other with 100 watt light bulbs. After the different groups have worked with these varying degrees of light exposure for 15 days, each group’s total production for these 15 days may be analyzed to see if the difference between the pre-experimental and the post-experimental production among the groups is directly related to the intensity of the light to which they have been exposed. If our hypothesis that better lighting increases the production levels is correct, then the subgroup that did not have any change in the lighting (called the control group), should have no increase in production and the other two groups should show increases, with those having the most light (100 watts) showing greater increases than those who had the 75 watt lighting.

In the above case the independent variable, lighting, has been manipulated by exposing different groups to different degrees of changes in it. This manipulation of the independent variable is also known as the treatment, and the results of the treatment are called treatment effects.

Let us illustrate how variable X can be both controlled and manipulated in the lab setting through another example.

EXAMPLE

Let us say an entrepreneur− the owner of a toy factory− is rather disappointed with the number of imitation Batman action figures produced by his workers, who are paid wages at an hourly rate. He might wonder whether paying them piece rates would increase their production levels. However, before implement- ing the piece-rate system, he wants to make sure that switching over to the new system would indeed achieve the objective.

In a case like this, the researcher might first want to test the causal relationships in a lab setting, and if the results are encouraging, conduct the experiment later in a field setting. In designing the lab experiment, the researcher should first think of possible factors affecting the production level of the workers, and then try to control these. Other than piece rates, previous job experience might also influence the rate of production because familiarity with the job makes it easy for people to increase their productivity levels. In some cases, where the jobs are very strenuous and require muscular strength, gender differences may affect productivity. Let us say that for the type of production job discussed earlier, age, gender, and prior experience of the employees are the factors that influence the production levels of the employees. The researcher needs to control these three variables. Let us see how this can be done.

Suppose the researcher intends to set up four groups of 15 people each for the lab experiment − one to be used as the control group, and the other three subjected to three different pay manipulations. Now, the variables that may

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 200

Chapter

10

Research Methods for Business

192 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

have an impact on the cause-and-effect relationship can be controlled in two different ways: either by matching the groups or through randomization. These concepts are explained before we proceed further.

10.1.3 Controlling the contaminating exogenous or “nuisance” variables

Matching groups

One way of controlling the contaminating or “nuisance” variables is to match the various groups by picking the confounding characteristics and deliberately spread- ing them across groups. For instance, if there are 20 women among the 60 members, then each group will be assigned five women, so that the effects of gender are distrib- uted across the four groups. Likewise, age and experience factors can be matched across the four groups, such that each group has a similar mix of individuals in terms of gender, age, and experience. Because the suspected contaminating factors are matched across the groups, we can be confident in saying that variable X alone causes variable Y (if, of course, that is the result of the study).

Randomization

Another way of controlling the contaminating variables is to assign the 60 members randomly (i.e., with no predetermination) to the four groups. That is, every member will have a known and equal chance of being assigned to any of these four groups. For instance, we might throw the names of all the 60 members into a hat and draw their names. The first 15 names drawn may be assigned to the first group, the second 15 to the second group, and so on, or the first person drawn might be assigned to the first group, the second person drawn to the second group, and so on. Thus, in randomization, the process by which individuals are drawn (i.e., everybody has a known and equal chance of being drawn) and their assignment to any particular group (each individual could be assigned to any one of the groups set up) are both random. By thus randomly assigning members to the groups we are distributing the confounding variables among the groups equally. That is, the variables of age, sex, and previous experience− the controlled variables−will have an equal probability of being distributed among the groups.

The process of randomization ideally ensures that each group is comparable to the others, and that all variables, including the effects of age, sex, and previous exper- ience, are controlled. In other words, each of the groups will have some members who have more experience mingled with those who have less or no experience. All groups will have members of different age and sex composition. Thus, randomiza- tion ensures that if these variables do indeed have a contributory or confounding effect, we have controlled their confounding effects (along with those of other unknown factors) by distributing them across groups. This is achieved because when we manipulate the independent variable of piece rates by having no piece rate system at all for one group (control) and having different piece rates for the other three groups (experimental), we can determine the causal effects of the piece rates on production levels. Any errors or biases caused by age, sex, and previous experience are now distributed equally among all four groups. Any causal effects found will be over and above the effects of the confounding variables.

To make it clear, let us illustrate this with some actual figures, as in Table 10.1. Note that because the effects of experience, sex, and age were controlled in all the four groups by randomly assigning the members to them, and the control group had no increase in productivity, it can be reliably concluded from the result that the percentage increases in production are a result of the piece rate (treatment

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 201

Chapter

10

Experimental designs

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 193

effects). In other words, piece rates are the cause of the increase in the number of toys produced. We cannot now say that the cause-and-effect relationship has been confounded by other “nuisance” variables, because they have been controlled through the process of randomly assigning members to the groups. Here, we have high internal validity or confidence in the cause-and-effect relationship.

Table 10.1 Cause-and-effect relationship after randomization

Groups Treatment

Treatment effect (% increase in production over

pre-piece rate system)

Experimental group 1 $1.00 per piece 10

Experimental group 2 $1.50 per piece 15

Experimental group 3 $2.00 per piece 20

Control group (no treat- ment)

Old hourly rate 0

Advantages of randomization

The difference between matching and randomization is that in the former case individuals are deliberately and consciously matched to control the differences among group members, whereas in the latter case we expect that the process of randomization will distribute the inequalities among the groups, based on the laws of normal distribution. Thus, we need not be particularly concerned about any known or unknown confounding factors.

In sum, compared to randomization, matching might be less effective, since we may not know all the factors that could possibly contaminate the cause-and-effect relationship in any given situation, and hence fail to match some critical factors across all groups while conducting an experiment. Randomization, however, will take care of this, since all the contaminating factors will be spread across all groups. Moreover, even if we know the confounding variables, we may not be able to find a match for all such variables. For instance, if gender is a confounding variable, and if there are only two women in a four-group experimental design, we will not be able to match all the groups with respect to gender. Randomization solves these dilemmas as well. Thus, lab experimental designs involve control of the contamin- ating variables through the process of either matching or randomization, and the manipulation of the treatment.

10.1.4 Internal validity of lab experiments

Internal validity refers to the confidence we place in the cause-and-effect relation- ship. In other words, it addresses the question, “To what extent does the research design permit us to say that the independent variable A causes a change in the depend- ent variable B?” As Kidder and Judd (1986) note, in research with high internal valid- ity, we are relatively better able to argue that the relationship is causal, whereas in studies with low internal validity, causality cannot be inferred at all. In lab experi- ments where cause-and-effect relationships are substantiated, internal validity can be said to be high.

So far we have talked about establishing cause-and-effect relationships within the lab setting, which is an artificially created and controlled environment. You might yourself have been a subject taking part in one of the lab experiments conducted by the psychology or other departments on campus at some time. You might not

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 202

Chapter

10

Research Methods for Business

194 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

have been specifically told what cause-and-effect relationships the experimenter was looking for, but you would have been told what is called a “cover story.” That is, you would have been apprised in general terms of some reason for the study and your role in it, without divulging its true purpose. After the end of the experiment you would also have been debriefed and given a full explanation of the experiment, and any questions you might have had would have been answered. This is how lab experiments are usually conducted: subjects are selected and assigned to different groups through matching or randomization; they are moved to a lab setting; they are given some details of the study and a task to perform; and some kind of ques- tionnaire or other tests are administered both before and after the task is completed. The results of these studies indicate the cause-and-effect relationship between the variables under investigation.

10.1.5 External validity or generalizability of lab experiments

To what extent are the results found in the lab setting transferable or generalizable to actual organizational or field settings? In other words, if we do find a cause-and- effect relationship after conducting a lab experiment, can we then confidently say that the same cause-and-effect relationship will also hold true in the organizational setting?

Consider the following situation. If, in a lab experimental design, the groups are given the simple production task of screwing bolts and nuts onto a plastic frame, and the results indicate that the groups who were paid piece rates were more productive than those who were paid hourly rates, to what extent can we then say that this would be true of the sophisticated nature of the jobs performed in organizations? The tasks in organizational settings are far more complex, and there might be several confounding variables that cannot be controlled− for example, experience. Under such circumstances, we cannot be sure that the cause-and-effect relationship found in the lab experiment is necessarily likely to hold true in the field setting. To test the causal relationships in the organizational setting, field experiments are carried out. These will now be briefly discussed.

10.2 THE FIELD EXPERIMENT

A field experiment, as the name implies, is an experiment done in the natural environment in which work goes on as usual, but treatments are given to one or more groups. Thus, in the field experiment, even though it may not be possible to control all the nuisance variables because members cannot be either randomly assigned to groups, or matched, the treatment can still be manipulated. Control groups can also be set up in field experiments. The experimental and control groups in the field experiment may be made up of the people working at several plants within a certain radius, or from the different shifts in the same plant, or in some other way. If there are three different shifts in a production plant, for instance, and the effects of the piece-rate system are to be studied, one of the shifts can be used as the control group, and the two other shifts given two different treatments or the same treatment − that is, different piece rates or the same piece rate. Any cause-and- effect relationship found under these conditions will have wider generalizability to other similar production settings, even though we may not be sure to what extent the piece rates alone were the cause of the increase in productivity, because some of the other confounding variables could not be controlled.

10.2.1 External validity

What we just discussed can be referred to as an issue of external validity versus internal validity. External validity refers to the extent of generalizability of the results

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 203

Chapter

10

Experimental designs

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 195

of a causal study to other settings, people, or events, and internal validity refers to the degree of our confidence in the causal effects (i.e., that variable X causes variable Y). Field experiments have more external validity (i.e., the results are more generalizable to other similar organizational settings), but less internal validity (i.e., we cannot be certain of the extent to which variable X alone causes variable Y). Note that in the lab experiment, the reverse is true: the internal validity is high but the external validity is rather low. In other words, in lab experiments we can be sure that variable X causes variable Y because we have been able to keep the other confounding exogenous variables under control, but we have so tightly controlled several variables to establish the cause-and-effect relationship that we do not know to what extent the results of our study can be generalized, if at all, to field settings. In other words, since the lab setting does not reflect the “real-world” setting, we do not know to what extent the lab findings validly represent the realities in the outside world.

10.3 TRADE-OFF BETWEEN INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL VALIDITY

There is thus a trade-off between internal validity and external validity. If we want high internal validity, we should be willing to settle for lower external validity and vice versa. To ensure both types of validity, researchers usually try first to test the causal relationships in a tightly controlled artificial or lab setting, and once the relationship has been established, they try to test the causal relationship in a field experiment. Lab experimental designs in the management area have thus far been done to assess, among other things, gender differences in leadership styles and managerial aptitudes. However, gender differences and other factors found in the lab settings are frequently not found in field studies (Osborn & Vicars, 1976). These problems of external validity usually limit the use of lab experiments in the man- agement area. Field experiments are also infrequently undertaken because of the resultant unintended consequences − personnel becoming suspicious, rivalries and jealousies being created among departments, and the like.

10.4 FACTORS AFFECTING THE VALIDITY OF EXPERIMENTS

Even the best designed lab studies may be influenced by factors that might affect the internal validity of the lab experiment. That is, some confounding factors might still be present that could offer rival explanations as to what is causing the dependent variable. These possible confounding factors pose a threat to internal validity. The seven major threats to internal validity are the effects of history, maturation, (main) testing, selection, mortality, statistical regression, and instrumentation, and these are explained below with examples. Two threats to external validity are (interactive) testing and selection. These threats to the validity of experiments are discussed next.

10.4.1 History effects

Certain events or factors that have an impact on the independent variable−dependent variable relationship might unexpectedly occur while the experiment is in pro- gress, and this history of events would confound the cause-and-effect relationship between the two variables, thus affecting the internal validity. For example, let us say that the manager of a Dairy Products Division wants to test the effects of the “buy one, get one free” sales promotion on the sale of the company-owned brand of packaged cheese for a week. She carefully records the sales of the packaged cheese during the previous two weeks to assess the effect of the promotion. However, on the very day that her sales promotion goes into effect, the Dairy Farmers’ Association unexpectedly launches a multimedia advertisement on the benefits of consuming

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 204

Chapter

10

Research Methods for Business

196 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

dairy products, especially cheese. The sales of all dairy products, including cheese, go up in all the stores, including the one where the experiment had been in progress. Here, because of an unexpected advertisement, one cannot be sure how much of the increase in sales of the packaged cheese in question was due to the sales promotion and how much to the advertisement by the Dairy Farmers’ Association! The effects of history have reduced the internal validity or the faith that can be placed on the conclusion that the sales promotion caused the increase in sales. The history effects in this case are illustrated in Figure 10.1.

Figure 10.1 Illustration of history effects in experimental design

To give another example, let us say a bakery is studying the effects of adding to its bread a new ingredient that is expected to enrich it and offer more nutritional value to children under 14 years of age within 30 days, subject to a certain daily intake. At the start of the experiment the bakery takes a measure of the health of 30 children through some medical yardsticks. Thereafter, the children are given the prescribed intakes of bread daily. Unfortunately, on day 20 of the experiment, a flu virus hits the city in epidemic proportions affecting most of the children studied. This unforeseen and uncontrollable effect of history, flu, has contaminated the cause-and-effect relationship study for the bakery.

10.4.2 Maturation effects

Cause-and-effect inferences can also be contaminated by the effects of the passage of time− another uncontrollable variable. Such contamination effects are denoted maturation effects. The maturation effects are a function of the processes − both biological and psychological − operating within the respondents as a result of the passage of time. Examples of maturation processes include growing older, getting tired, feeling hungry, and getting bored. In other words, there could be a maturation effect on the dependent variable purely because of the passage of time. For instance, let us say that an R&D director contends that increases in the efficiency of workers will result within three months’ time if advanced technology is introduced in the work setting. If, at the end of the three months, increased efficiency is indeed found, it will be difficult to claim that the advanced technology (and it alone) increased the efficiency of workers because, with the passage of time, employees will also have gained experience, resulting in better job performance and therefore in improved efficiency. Thus, the internal validity also gets reduced owing to the effects of maturation inasmuch as it is difficult to pinpoint how much of the increase is attributable to the introduction of the enhanced technology alone. Figure 10.2 illustrates the maturation effects in the above example.

10.4.3 Testing effects

Frequently, to test the effects of a treatment, subjects are given what is called a pretest. That is, first a measure of the dependent variable is taken (the pretest), then

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 205

Chapter

10

Experimental designs

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 197

Figure 10.2 Illustration of maturation effects on a cause-and-effect relationship

the treatment is given, and after that a second measure of the dependent variable is taken (the posttest). The difference between the posttest and the pretest scores is then attributed to the treatment. However, the exposure of participants to the pretest may affect both the internal and external validity of the findings. Indeed, the aforementioned process may lead to two types of testing effects.

A main testing effect occurs when the prior observation (the pretest) affects the later observation (the posttest). Main testing effects typically occur because participants want to be consistent. Let us assume that we have tested the effect of a television commercial (the treatment) on attitudes toward the brand using a pretest and a post- test. Suppose that no significant difference in attitude toward the brand was found. This finding could lead to the conclusion that the commercial was ineffective. How- ever, an alternative explanation is that our participants tried to be consistent and answered the later questions so that their answers were similar to the answers they gave the first time. The pretest may thus have affected the results of the experiment. Along these lines, main testing effects are another threat to internal validity.

Interactive testing effects occur when the pretest affects the participant’s reaction to the treatment (the independent variable). Again, let’s assume that we are testing the effect of a television commercial on attitude toward the brand using a pretest and a posttest. It is possible that because of the pretest, the participants watch the television commercial more closely than consumers that do not take part in the experiment. For this reason, any effects that are found may not necessarily be generalizable to the population. Hence, interactive treatment effects are a threat to the external validity of an experiment.

In sum, testing effects may affect both the internal and external validity of our find- ings. Main testing effects threaten the internal validity, whereas interactive testing effects threaten the external validity.

10.4.4 Selection bias effects

Another threat to both the internal and external validity of our findings is the selection of participants. First, we will discuss how selection may affect the external validity of our findings. Then, we will discuss how selection may affect the internal validity.

In a lab setting, the types of participants selected for the experiment may be very different from the types of employees recruited by organizations. For example, stu- dents in a university might be allotted a task that is manipulated to study the effects on their performance. The findings from this experiment cannot be generalized, however, to the real world of work, where the employees and the nature of the jobs are both quite different. Thus, subject selection poses a threat to external validity.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 206

Chapter

10

Research Methods for Business

198 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

The threat to internal validity comes from improper or unmatched selection of sub- jects for the experimental and control groups. For example, if a lab experiment is set up to assess the impact of the working environment on employees’ attitudes toward work, and if one of the experimental conditions is to have a group of subjects work for about two hours in a room with a mildly unpleasant smell, an ethical researcher might disclose this condition to prospective subjects, who may decline to particip- ate in the study. However, some volunteers might be lured through incentives (say, a payment of $70 for the two hours of participation in the study). The volunteers so selected may be quite different from the others (inasmuch as they may come from an environment of deprivation) and their responses to the treatment might be quite different. Such bias in the selection of the subjects might contaminate the cause-and-effect relationships and pose a threat to internal validity as well. Hence, newcomers, volunteers, and others who cannot be matched with the con- trol groups pose a threat to internal validity in certain types of experiment. For this reason, randomization or matching groups is highly recommended.

10.4.5 Mortality effects

Another confounding factor on the cause-and-effect relationship is the mortality or attrition of the members in the experimental or control group, or both, as the experiment progresses. When the group composition changes over time across the groups, comparison between the groups becomes difficult, because those who dropped out of the experiment may confound the results. Again, we will not be able to say how much of the effect observed arises from the treatment, and how much is attributable to the members who dropped out, since those who stayed with the experiment may have reacted differently from those who dropped out. Let us see an example.

EXAMPLE

A sales manager had heard glowing reports about three different training pro- grams that train salespersons in effective sales strategies. All three were of six weeks’ duration. The manager was curious to know which one would offer the best results for the company. The first program took the trainees daily on field trips and demonstrated effective and ineffective sales strategies through prac- tical experience. The second program trained groups on the same strategies but indoors in a classroom setting, with lectures, role playing, and answering questions from the participants. The third program used mathematical mod- els and simulations to increase sales effectiveness. The manager chose eight trainees each for the three different programs and sent them to training. By the end of the fourth week, three trainees from the first group, one from the second group, and two from the third group had dropped out of the training programs for a variety of reasons, including ill health, family exigencies, trans- portation problems, and a car accident. This attrition from the various groups made it impossible to compare the effectiveness of the various programs. Thus, mortality can also lower the internal validity of an experiment.

10.4.6 Statistical regression effects

The effects of statistical regression are brought about when the members chosen for the experimental group have extreme scores on the dependent variable to begin with. For instance, if a manager wants to test whether he can increase the “sales- manship” repertoire of the sales personnel through Dale Carnegie-type programs, he should not choose those with extremely low or extremely high abilities for the

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 207

Chapter

10

Experimental designs

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 199

experiment. This is because we know from the laws of probability that those with very low scores on a variable (in this case, current sales ability) have a greater prob- ability of showing improvement and scoring closer to the mean on the posttest after being exposed to the treatment. This phenomenon of low scorers tending to score closer to the mean is known as “regressing toward the mean” (statistical regression). Likewise, those with very high abilities also have a greater tendency to regress toward the mean − they will score lower on the posttest than on the pretest. Thus, those who are at either end of the continuum with respect to a variable will not “truly” reflect the cause-and-effect relationship. The phenomenon of statistical regression is thus yet another threat to internal validity.

10.4.7 Instrumentation effects

Instrumentation effects are yet another source of threat to internal validity. These might arise because of a change in the measuring instrument between pretest and posttest, and not because of the treatment’s differential impact at the end (Cook & Campbell, 1979a). For instance, an observer who is involved in observing a particular pattern of behavior in respondents before a treatment might start concentrating on a different set of behaviors after the treatment. The frame of measurement of behavior (in a sense, the measuring instrument) has now changed and will not reflect the change in behavior that can be attributed to the treatment. This is also true in the case of physical measuring instruments like the spring balance or other finely calibrated instruments that might lose their accuracy due to a loss of tension with constant use, resulting in erroneous final measurement.

In organizations, instrumentation effects in experimental designs are possible when the pretest is done by the experimenter, treatments are given to the experimental groups, and the posttest on measures such as performance is done by different managers. One manager might measure performance by the final units of output, a second manager might take into account the number of rejects as well, and a third manager might also take into consideration the amount of resources expended in getting the job done! Here, there are at least three different measuring instruments, if we treat each manager as a performance measuring instrument.

Thus, instrumentation effects also pose a threat to internal validity in experimental design.

10.5 IDENTIFYING THREATS TO VALIDITY

Let us examine each of the possible seven threats to validity in the context of the following scenario.

EXAMPLE

An organizational consultant wanted to demonstrate to the president of a com- pany, through an experimental design, that the democratic style of leadership best enhances the morale of employees. She set up three experimental groups and one control group for the purpose and assigned members to each of the groups randomly. The three experimental groups were headed by an autocratic leader, a democratic leader, and a laissez-faire leader, respectively.

The members in the three experimental groups were administered a pretest. Since the control group was not exposed to any treatment, they were not given a pretest. As the experiment progressed, two members in the democratic treat- ment group got quite excited and started moving around to the other members saying that the participative atmosphere was “great” and “performance was

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 208

Chapter

10

Research Methods for Business

200 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

bound to be high in this group.” Two members from each of the autocratic and laissez-faire groups left after the first hour saying they had to go and could no longer participate in the experiment. After two hours of activities, a posttest was administered to all the participants, including the control group members, on the same lines as the pretest.

1. History effects. The action of the two members in the participative group by way of unexpectedly moving around in an excited manner and remarking that participative leadership is “great” and the “performance is bound to be high in this group” might have boosted the morale of all the members in the group. It would be difficult to separate out how much of the increase in morale was due to the participative condition alone and how much to the sudden enthusiasm displayed by the two members.

2. Maturation effects. It is doubtful that maturation had any effect on morale in this situation, since the passage of time, in itself, may not have anything much to do with increases or decreases in morale.

3. Testing effects. The pretests are likely to have sensitized the respondents to both the treatment and the posttest. Thus, main and interactive testing effects exist. However, if all the groups had been given both the pre- and the posttests, the main testing effects (but not the interactive testing effects!) across all groups would have been taken care of (i.e., nullified) and the posttests of each of the experimental groups could have been compared with that of the control group to detect the effects of the treatment. Unfortunately, the control group was not given the pretest, and thus this group’s posttest scores were not biased by the pretest− a phenomenon that could have occurred in the experimental groups. Hence, it is incorrect, on the face of it, to compare the experimental groups’ scores with those of the control group. Interactive testing poses a threat to the external validity of the findings.

4. Selection bias effects. Since members were randomly assigned to all groups, selection bias should not have affected the internal validity of the findings. The external validity of the findings should also not have been threatened by selection: there is no reason to assume that the participants selected for the experiment are different from the other employees of the organization.

5. Mortality effects. Since members dropped out of two experimental groups, the effects of mortality could affect internal validity.

6. Statistical regression effects. Though not specifically stated, we can assume that all the members participating in the experiment were selected randomly from a normally distributed population, in which case the issue of statistical regression contaminating the experiment does not arise.

7. Instrumentation effects. Since the same questionnaire measured morale both before and after the treatment for all members, there should not have been any instrumentation bias.

In effect, three of the seven threats to internal validity do apply in this case. The history, main testing, and mortality effects are of concern and, therefore, the internal validity will not be high. Interactive testing effects threaten the external validity of the findings.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 209

Chapter

10

Experimental designs

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 201

10.6 INTERNAL VALIDITY IN CASE STUDIES

If there are several threats to internal validity even in a tightly controlled lab exper- iment, it should be quite clear why we cannot draw conclusions about causal rela- tionships from case studies that describe the events that occurred during a particu- lar time. Unless a well-designed experimental study, randomly assigning members to experimental and control groups, and successfully manipulating the treatment indicates possible causal relationships, it is impossible to say which factor causes another. For instance, there are several causes attributed to “Slice,” the soft drink introduced by PepsiCo Inc., not taking off after its initial success. Among the reasons given are: (1) a cutback in advertisements for Slice, (2) operating on the mistaken premise that the juice content in Slice would appeal to health-conscious buyers, (3) PepsiCo’s attempts to milk the brand too quickly, (4) several strategic errors made by PepsiCo, (5) underestimation of the time taken to build a brand, and the like. While all the above could provide the basis for developing a theoretical framework for explaining the variance in the sales of a product such as Slice, conclusions about cause-and-effect relationships cannot be determined from anecdotal events.

10.7 REVIEW OF FACTORS AFFECTING INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL VALIDITY

Whereas internal validity raises questions about whether it is the treatment alone or some additional extraneous factor that causes the effects, external validity raises issues about the generalizability of the findings to other settings.

Interactive testing and selection effects may restrict the external validity of our find- ings. These threats to external validity can be combated by creating experimental conditions that are as close as possible to the situations to which the results of the experiment are to be generalized.

At least seven contaminating factors exist that might affect the internal validity of experimental designs. These are the effects of history, maturation, (main) test- ing, instrumentation, selection, statistical regression, and mortality. It is, however, possible to reduce these biases by enhancing the level of sophistication of the exper- imental design. Whereas some of the more sophisticated designs, discussed next, help to increase the internal validity of the experimental results, they also become expensive and time consuming.

The different types of experimental design and the extent to which internal and external validity are met in each are discussed next.

10.8 TYPES OF EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN AND VALIDITY

Let us consider some of the commonly used experimental designs and determine the extent to which they guard against the seven factors that could contaminate the internal validity of experimental results. The shorter the time span of the experi- ments, the less the chances are of encountering history, maturation, and mortality effects. Experiments lasting an hour or two do not usually meet with many of these problems. It is only when experiments are spread over an extended period of, say, several months, that the possibility of encountering more of the confounding factors increases.

10.8.1 Quasi-experimental designs

Some studies expose an experimental group to a treatment and measure its effects. Such an experimental design is the weakest of all designs, and it does not measure the true cause-and-effect relationship. This is so because there is no comparison

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 210

Chapter

10

Research Methods for Business

202 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

between groups, nor any recording of the status of the dependent variable as it was prior to the experimental treatment and how it changed after the treatment. In the absence of such control, the study is of no scientific value in determining cause- and-effect relationships. Hence, such a design is referred to as a quasi-experimental design. The following three designs are quasi-experimental designs.

Pretest and posttest experimental group design

An experimental group (without a control group) may be given a pretest, exposed to a treatment, and then given a posttest to measure the effects of the treatment. This can be illustrated as in Table 10.2, where O refers to some process of observation or measurement, X represents the exposure of a group to an experimental treatment, and the X and Os in the row are applied to the same specific group. Here, the effects of the treatment can be obtained by measuring the difference between the posttest and the pretest (O2 −O1). Note, however, that testing effects might contaminate both the internal (main testing effects) and external (interactive testing effects) validity of the findings. If the experiment is extended over a period of time, history, mortality, and maturation effects may also confound the results.

Table 10.2 Pretest and posttest experimental group design

Group Pretest score Treatment Posttest score

Experimental group

O 1 X O 2

Treatment effect = (O2 −O1)

Posttests only with experimental and control groups

Some experimental designs are set up with an experimental and a control group, the former alone being exposed to a treatment and not the latter. The effects of the treatment are studied by assessing the difference in the outcomes − that is, the posttest scores of the experimental and control groups. This is illustrated in Table 10.3 Here is a case where the testing effects have been avoided because there is no pretest, only a posttest. Care has to be taken, however, to make sure that the two groups are matched for all the possible contaminating “nuisance” variables. Otherwise, the true effects of the treatment cannot be determined by merely looking at the difference in the posttest scores of the two groups. Randomization would take care of this problem.

Table 10.3 Posttest only with experimental and control groups

Group Treatment Outcome

Experimental group X O 1

Control group O 2

Treatment effect = (O1 −O2)

Mortality (the dropping out of individuals from groups) is a problem for all exper- imental designs, including this one. It can confound the results, and thus pose a threat to internal validity.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 211

Chapter

10

Experimental designs

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 203

Time series design

A time series design (sometimes called an interrupted time series design) differs from the aforementioned designs in that it collects data on the same variable at regular intervals (for instance weeks, months, or years). A time series design thus allows the researcher to assess the impact of a treatment over time. Figure 10.3 visually describes a time series design. It shows that a series of measurements on the dependent variable is taken before and after the treatment is administered (either by the researcher or naturally).

Figure 10.3 Time series design

Figure 10.4 depicts the results of a time series experiment testing the effect of price reduction (in week 4) on sales. The horizontal scale (x-axis) is divided into weeks, and the vertical scale (y-axis) shows the values of sales (the dependent variable) as they fluctuate over a period of nine weeks. Assuming that other factors, such as the other marketing-mix variables and the marketing mix of competitors, stay the same, the impact of the price cut is the difference in sales before and after the change. From Figure 10.4 it is easy to see that there was an increase in sales after the price of the product went down. The question is, however, whether the increase in sales, depicted by the two horizontal lines in Figure 10.4, is significant. Bayesian moving average models (for instance, Box & Jenkins, 1970) are frequently used to test the impact of a treatment on the dependent variable when a time series design is used.

Figure 10.4 Effect of price cut in week 4

A key problem of time series is history: certain events or factors that have an impact on the independent variable−dependent variable relationship might unexpectedly occur while the experiment is in progress. Other problems are main and interactive testing effects, mortality, and maturation.

10.8.2 True experimental designs

Experimental designs that include both the treatment and control groups and record information both before and after the experimental group is exposed to the treat- ment are known as ex post facto experimental designs. These are discussed below.

Pretest and posttest experimental and control group design

This design can be visually depicted as in Table 10.4. Two groups−one experimental and the other control − are both exposed to the pretest and the posttest. The only

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 212

Chapter

10

Research Methods for Business

204 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

difference between the two groups is that the former is exposed to a treatment whereas the latter is not. Measuring the difference between the differences in the post- and pretest scores of the two groups gives the net effects of the treatment. Both groups have been exposed to both the pre- and posttests, and both groups have been randomized; thus we can expect the history, maturation, main testing, and instrumentation effects to have been controlled. This is so due to the fact that whatever happened with the experimental group (e.g., maturation, history, main testing, and instrumentation) also happened with the control group, and in measuring the net effects (the difference in the differences between the pre- and posttest scores) we have controlled these contaminating factors. Through the process of randomization, we have also controlled the effects of selection bias and statistical regression.

Table 10.4 Pretest and posttest experimental and control groups

Group Pretest Treatment Posttest

Experimental group

O 1 X O 2

Control group O 3 O 4

Treatment effect = [(O2 −O1)− (O4 −O3)]

Mortality could, again, pose a problem in this design. In experiments that take several weeks, as in the case of assessing the impact of training on skill development, or measuring the impact of technology advancement on effectiveness, some of the subjects in the experimental group may drop out before the end of the experiment. It is possible that those who drop out are in some way different from those who stay on until the end and take the posttest. If so, mortality could offer a plausible rival explanation for the difference between O2 and O1. Interactive testing effects could also cause a problem in this design; the fact that the participants in the experimental group are asked to do a pretest could make them more sensitive to the manipulation.

Solomon four-group design

To gain more confidence in internal validity in experimental designs, it is advisable to set up two experimental groups and two control groups for the experiment. One experimental group and one control group can be given both the pretest and the posttest, as shown in Table 10.5. The other two groups will be given only the posttest. Here, the effects of the treatment can be calculated in several different ways, as indicated below. To the extent that we come up with almost the same results in each of the different calculations, we can attribute the effects to the treatment. This increases the internal validity of the results of the experimental design. This design, known as the Solomon four-group design, is perhaps the most comprehensive and the one with the least number of problems with internal validity.

Table 10.5 Solomon four-group design

Group Pretest Treatment Posttest

1. Experimental O 1 X O 2

2. Control O 3 O 4

3. Experimental X O 5

4. Control O 6

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 213

Chapter

10

Experimental designs

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 205

Solomon four-group design and threats to validity

The Solomon four-group design, also known as the four-group six-study design, is a highly sophisticated experimental design. This design controls for all the threats to internal validity, except for mortality (which is a problem for all experimental designs) and also for interactive testing effects. For this reason, the Solomon four- group design is very useful when interactive testing effects are expected.

Treatment effect (E) could be judged by:

E = (O2 −O1) E = (O2 −O4) E = (O5 −O6) E = (O5 −O3) E = [(O2 −O1)− (O4 −O3)]

If all Es are similar, the cause-and-effect relationship is highly valid.

To be able to calculate the effect of the experimental treatment, an estimate of the prior measurements is needed for Groups 3 and 4. The best estimate of this premeasure is the average of the two pretests; that is, (O1 + O3)/2. Together with the six pre- and posttest observations, the estimates of the premeasures can then be used to generate estimations of the impact of the experimental treatment (E), interactive testing effects (I), and the effects of uncontrolled variables (U). Estimates of these effects are made by comparing the before and after measures of the four groups.

The following equations provide an overview of the potential impact of the experi- mental treatment (E), interactive testing effects (I), and uncontrolled variables (U) for each group:

Group 1: (O2 −O1) = E + I + U Group 2: (O4 −O3) = U Group 3: [O5 − 1/2 (O1 +O3)] = E + U Group 4: [O6 − 1/2 (O1 +O3)] = U

We can use these equations to estimate the effects of E, I, and U by comparing the pre- and posttests of the groups. For instance, to estimate the effect of the experimental stimulus (E) the results of Groups 3 and 4 are used:[

O5 − 1 2

(O1 +O3) ] − [ O6 −

1 2

(O1 +O3) ]

= [E + U ]− U = E

To calculate the effect of I (the interactive testing effect) the results of Groups 1 and 3 are used:

(O2 −O1)− [ O5 −

1 2

(O1 +O3) ]

= (E + I + U)− (E + U) = I.

Thus we are able to control for interactive testing effects that threaten the external validity of our findings. Let us now examine how the threats to internal validity are taken care of in the Solomon four-group design.

It is important to note that subjects should be randomly selected and randomly assigned to groups. This removes the statistical regression and selection biases. Group 2, the control group that was exposed to both the pre- and post-test, helps us to see whether or not history, maturation, (main) testing, instrumentation, or

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 214

Chapter

10

Research Methods for Business

206 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

regression threaten internal validity. Mortality (the loss of participants during the course of the experiment) is a potential problem for all experimental designs, even for this one.

Thus, the Solomon four-group experimental design guarantees the maximum internal and external validity, ruling out many other rival hypotheses. Where establishing a cause-and-effect relationship is critical for the survival of businesses (e.g., phar- maceutical companies, which often face lawsuits for questionable products) the Solomon four-group design is eminently useful. However, because of the num- ber of subjects that need to be recruited, the care with which the study has to be designed, the time that needs to be devoted to the experiment, and other reasons, the cost of conducting such an experiment is high. For this reason it is rarely used.

Table 10.6 summarizes the threats to validity covered by the different experimental designs. If the subjects have all been randomly assigned to the groups, then selection bias and statistical regression are eliminated in all cases.

Table 10.6 Major threats to validity in different experimental designs when members are randomly selected and assigned

Types of experimental design Major threats to validity

1. Pretest and posttest with one experi- mental group only

History, maturation, main testing, interactive testing, mortality

2. Pretest and posttest with one experi- mental and one control group

Interactive testing, mortality

3. Posttests only with one experimental and one control group

Mortality

4. Solomon four-group design Mortality

Double-blind studies

When extreme care and rigor are needed in experimental designs, as in the case of discovery of new medicines that could have an impact on human lives, blind studies are conducted to avoid any bias that might creep in. For example, pharmaceutical companies experimenting with the efficacy of newly developed drugs in the pro- totype stage ensure that the subjects in the experimental and control groups are kept unaware of who is given the drug, and who the placebo. Such studies are called blind studies.

When Aviron tested and announced the Flu-mist vaccine, neither the subjects nor the researchers who administered the vaccine to them were aware of the “true” versus the “placebo” treatment. The entire process was conducted by an outside testing agency, which alone knew who got what treatment. Since, in this case, both the experimenter and the subjects are blinded, such studies are called double- blind studies. Since there is no tampering with the treatment in any way, such experimental studies are the least biased.

As mentioned previously, managers rarely undertake the study of cause-and-effect relationships in organizations using experimental designs because of the incon- venience and disruption they cause to the system.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 215

Chapter

10

Experimental designs

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 207

10.8.3 Ex post facto designs

Cause-and-effect relationships are sometimes established through what is called the ex post facto experimental design. Here, there is no manipulation of the inde- pendent variable in the lab or field setting, but subjects who have already been exposed to a stimulus and those not so exposed are studied. For instance, training programs might have been introduced in an organization two years earlier. Some might have already gone through the training while others might not. To study the effects of training on work performance, performance data might now be collected for both groups. Since the study does not immediately follow after the training, but much later, it is an ex post facto design.

More advanced experimental designs such as the completely randomized design, randomized block design, Latin square design, and the factorial design are described in the appendix to this chapter, for those students interested in these.

10.9 SIMULATION

An alternative to lab and field experimentation currently being used in business research is simulation. Simulation uses a model-building technique to determine the effects of changes, and computer-based simulations are becoming popular in business research. A simulation can be thought of as an experiment conducted in a specially created setting that very closely represents the natural environment in which activities are usually carried out. In that sense, the simulation lies some- where between a lab and a field experiment, insofar as the environment is artificially created but not too different from “reality.” Participants are exposed to real-world experiences over a period of time, lasting anywhere from several hours to several weeks, and they can be randomly assigned to different treatment groups. If mana- gerial behavior as a function of a specific treatment is to be studied, subjects will be asked to operate in an environment very much like an office, with desks, chairs, cabinets, telephones, and the like. Members will be randomly assigned the roles of directors, managers, clerks, and so on, and specific stimuli will be presented to them. Thus, while the researcher retains control over the assignment and manipulation, the subjects are left free to operate as in a real office. In essence, some factors will be built into or incorporated in the simulated system and others left free to vary (par- ticipants’ behavior, within the rules of the game). Data on the dependent variable can be obtained through observation, videotaping, audio recording, interviews, or questionnaires.

Causal relationships can be tested since both manipulation and control are possible in simulations. Two types of simulation can be made: one in which the nature and timing of simulated events are totally determined by the researcher (called experimental simulation), and the other (called free simulation) where the course of activities is at least partly governed by the reaction of the participants to the various stimuli as they interact among themselves. Looking Glass, the free simulation developed by Lombardo, McCall, and DeVries (1983) to study leadership styles, has been quite popular in the management area.

Cause-and-effect relationships are better established in experimental simulations where the researcher exercises greater control. In simulations involving several weeks, however, there may be a high rate of attrition of members. Experimental and free simulations are both expensive, since creating real-world conditions in an artifi- cial setting and collecting data over extended periods of time involve the deployment of many types of resources. Simulations can be done in specially created settings using subjects, computers, and mathematical models. Steufert, Pogash, and Piasecki (1988), who assessed managerial competence through a six-hour computer-assisted

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 216

Chapter

10

Research Methods for Business

208 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

simulation, are of the opinion that simulation technology may be the only viable method to simultaneously study several types of executive style.

Computer-based simulations are frequently used in the accounting and finance areas. For example, the effectiveness of various analytic review procedures in detect- ing errors in account balances has been tested through simulations (Knechel, 1986). In the finance area, risk management has been studied through simulations. Simula- tions have also been used to understand the complex relationships in the financing of pension plans and making important investment decisions (Perrier & Kalwarski, 1989). It is possible to vary several variables (workforce demographics, inflation rates, etc.) singly or simultaneously in such models.

Prototypes of machines and instruments are often the result of simulated mod- els. Simulation has also been used by many companies to test the robustness and efficacy of various products. We are also familiar with flight simulators, driving simulators, and even nuclear reactor simulators. Here, the visual patterns presen- ted keep changing in response to the reactions of the individual (the pilot, the driver, or the emergency handler) to the previous stimulus presented, and not in any predetermined order. Entire business operations, from office layout to prof- itability, can be simulated using different prospective scenarios. With increasing access to sophisticated technology, and the advancement of mathematical mod- els, simulation is becoming an important managerial decision-making tool. It is quite likely that we will see simulation being used as a managerial tool, to enhance motivation, leadership, and the like, in the future. Simulation can also be applied as a problem-solving managerial tool in other behavioral and administrative areas. Programmed, computer-based simulation models in behavioral areas could serve managerial decision making very well indeed.

10.10 ETHICAL ISSUES IN EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN RESEARCH

It is appropriate at this juncture to briefly discuss a few of the many ethical issues involved in doing research, some of which are particularly relevant to conducting lab experiments. The following practices are considered unethical:

• Putting pressure on individuals to participate in experiments through coercion, or applying social pressure.

• Giving menial tasks and asking demeaning questions that diminish parti- cipants’ self-respect.

• Deceiving subjects by deliberately misleading them as to the true purpose of the research.

• Exposing participants to physical or mental stress.

• Not allowing subjects to withdraw from the research when they want to.

• Using the research results to disadvantage the participants, or for purposes not to their liking.

• Not explaining the procedures to be followed in the experiment.

• Exposing respondents to hazardous and unsafe environments.

• Not debriefing participants fully and accurately after the experiment is over.

• Not preserving the privacy and confidentiality of the information given by the participants.

• Withholding benefits from control groups.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 217

Chapter

10

Experimental designs

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 209

The last item is somewhat controversial in terms of whether or not it should be an ethical dilemma, especially in organizational research. If three different incentives are offered for three experimental groups and none is offered to the control group, it is a fact that the control group has participated in the experiment with absolutely no benefit. Similarly, if four different experimental groups receive four different levels of training but the control group does not, the other four groups have gained expertise that the control group has been denied. But should this be deemed an ethical dilemma preventing experimental designs with control groups in organizational research? Perhaps not, for at least three reasons. One is that several others in the system who did not participate in the experiment did not benefit either. Second, even in the experimental groups, some would have benefited more than others (depending on the extent to which the causal factor was manipulated). Finally, if a cause-and-effect relationship is found, the system will, in all probability, implement the new-found knowledge sooner or later and everyone will ultimately stand to gain. The assumption that the control group did not benefit from participating in the experiment may not be a sufficient reason not to use lab or field experiments.

Many universities have a “human subjects committee” to protect the right of indi- viduals participating in any type of research activity involving people. The basic function of these committees is to discharge the moral and ethical responsibilities of the university system by studying the procedures outlined in the research propos- als and giving their stamp of approval to the study. The human subjects committee might require the investigators to modify their procedures or inform the subjects fully, if occasion demands it.

10.11 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS

Before using experimental designs in research studies, it is essential to consider whether they are necessary at all, and if so, at what level of sophistication. This is because experimental designs call for special efforts and varying degrees of inter- ference with the natural flow of activities. Some questions that need to be addressed in making these decisions are the following:

1. Is it really necessary to identify causal relationships, or would it suffice if the correlates that account for the variance in the dependent variable were known?

2. If it is important to trace the causal relationships, which of the two, internal validity or external validity, is needed more, or are both needed? If only internal validity is important, a carefully designed lab experiment is the answer; if gen- eralizability is the more important criterion, then a field experiment is called for; if both are equally important, then a lab study should be first undertaken, followed by a field experiment (if the results of the former warrant the latter).

3. Is cost an important factor in the study? If so, would a less rather than a more sophisticated experimental design do?

These decision points are illustrated in the chart in Figure 10.5.

Though managers may not often be interested in cause-and-effect relationships, a good knowledge of experimental designs could foster some pilot studies to be undertaken to examine whether factors such as bonus systems, piece rates, rest pauses, and so on lead to positive outcomes such as better motivation, improved job performance, and other favorable working conditions at the workplace. Mar- keting managers could use experimental designs to study the effects on sales of advertisements, sales promotions, pricing, and the like. Awareness of the usefulness of simulation as a research tool can also result in creative research endeavors in the management area, as it currently does in the manufacturing side of businesses.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 218

Chapter

10

Research Methods for Business

210 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Figure 10.5 Decision points for embarking on an experimental design

SUMMARY

This chapter covered experimental designs, with particular reference to lab and field experiments. We examined how the contaminating variables in detecting the cause-and-effect relationship can be controlled through the processes of matching and randomization. Issues of internal and external validity and the seven factors that can affect internal validity were discussed. Also, some types of experimental designs that can be used to test cause-and-effect relationships and their usefulness in the context of validity and practicality were examined. We also described the ethical issues involved in conducting experimental research and the implications for managers in using experimental designs.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

What are the differences between causal and correlational studies?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 219

Chapter

10

Experimental designs

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 211

In what ways do lab experiments differ from field experiments?

Define the terms control and manipulation. Describe a possible lab experiment where you would need to control a variable. Include also a variable over which you would have no control but which could affect your experiment.

Explain the possible ways in which you can control “nuisance” variables.

What is internal validity and what are the threats it stands exposed to?

Explain the concept of “trade-off between internal validity and external valid- ity.”

Explain how the selection of participants may affect both the internal and external validity of your experiments.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 220

Chapter

10

Research Methods for Business

212 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Explain the difference between main and interactive testing effects. Why is this difference important?

History is a key problem in a time series design. Other problems are main and interactive testing effects, mortality, and maturation. Explain.

Explain why mortality remains a problem even when a Solomon four-group design is used.

“If a control group is a part of an experimental design, one need not worry about controlling other exogenous variables.” Discuss this statement.

“The Solomon four-group design is the answer to all our research questions pertaining to cause-and-effect relationships because it guards against all the threats to internal validity.” Comment.

Below is an adapted note from BusinessWeek published some time ago. After reading it, apply what you have learned in this chapter, and design a study after sketching the theoretical framework.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 221

Chapter

10

Experimental designs

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 213

The vital role of self-esteem

Why do some people earn more than others? Economists focused on the importance of education, basic skills, and work experience − what they called human capital − on increased productivity, and said these were reflected in greater earning power. Researchers also found that self-esteem was instrumental in acquiring human capital.

Design a study to examine the following situation.

An organization would like to introduce one of two types of new manufacturing process to increase the productivity of workers, and both involve heavy invest- ment in expensive technology. The company wants to test the efficacy of each process in one of its small plants.

10.12 Appendix: Further experimental designs In this chapter we discussed different types of experimental design where groups were subjected to one or more treatments and the effects of the manipulation measured. However, we may sometimes wish to assess the simultaneous effects of two or more variables on a dependent variable, and this calls for more complex designs. Among the many advanced experimental designs available, we will examine here the completely randomized design, the randomized block design, the Latin square design, and the factorial design.

It would be useful to understand some terms before describing the various designs. The term “factor” is used to denote an independent variable − for example, price. The term “level” is used to denote various gradations of the factor− for example, high price, medium price, low price − while making it clear as to what these gradations signify (e.g., high price is anything over $2 per piece; medium is $1−2 per piece; low price is anything less than $1 per piece). “Treatment” refers to the various levels of the factors. A “blocking factor” is a preexisting variable in a given situation that might have an effect on the dependent variable in addition to the treatment, the impact of which is important to assess. In effect, a blocking factor is an independent variable that has an effect on the dependent variable, but which preexists in a given situation: for example, the number of women and men in an organization; or teenagers, middle-aged men, and senior citizens as customers of a store; and so on.

10.12.1 The completely randomized design

Let us say that a bus transportation company manager wants to know the effects of fare reduction by 5, 7, and 10 cents on the average daily increase in the number of

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 222

Chapter

10

Research Methods for Business

214 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

passengers using the bus as a means of transportation. He may take 27 routes that the buses usually ply, and randomly assign nine routes for each of the treatments (i.e., reduction of fares by 5, 7, and 10 cents) for a two-week period. His experimental design is shown in Table 10.7, where the Os on the left indicate the number of passengers that used the bus for the two weeks preceding the treatment; X1, X2, and X3 indicate the three different treatments (fare reductions of 5, 7, and 10 cents per mile), and the Os on the right indicate the number of passengers that used the bus as a transportation mode during the two weeks when the fares were reduced. The manager will be able to assess the impact of the three treatments by deducting each of the three Os on the left from its corresponding O on the right. The results of this study will provide the answer to the bus company manager’s question.

Table 10.7 Illustration of a completely randomized design

Routes Number of

passengers before Treatment Number of

passengers after

Group 1 of nine routes

O 1 X 1 O 2

Group 2 of nine routes

O 3 X 2 O 4

Group 3 of nine routes

O 5 X 3 O 6

10.12.2 Randomized block design

In the foregoing case, the bus company manager was interested only in the effects of different levels of price reduction on the increase in the number of passengers in general. He may be more interested, however, in targeting the price reduction on the right routes or sectors. For example, it is likely that the reduction in fares will be more welcome to senior citizens and residents of crowded urban areas where driving is stressful, than to car owners living in the suburbs, who may not be equally appreciative of and sensitive to price reduction. Thus, reductions in fares will probably attract more passengers if targeted at the right groups (i.e., the right blocking factor − the residential areas). In this case, the bus company manager should first identify the routes that fall into the three blocks − those in suburbs, crowded urban areas, or residential areas with retirees. Thus, the 27 routes will get assigned to one or other of three blocks and will then be randomly assigned, within the blocks, to the three treatments. The experimental design is shown in Table 10.8.

Table 10.8 Illustration of a randomized block design

Blocking factor: residential areas

Fare reduction Suburbs Crowded

urban areas Retirement areas

5c X 1 X 1 X 1

7c X 2 X 2 X 2

10c X 3 X 3 X 3

Through the above randomized block design, not only can the direct effect of each treatment (i.e., the main effect of the level, which is the effect of each type of fare reduction) be assessed, but also the joint effects of price and the residential area

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 223

Chapter

10

Experimental designs

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 215

route (the interaction effect). For example, the general effect of a 5 cent reduction for all routes will be known by the increase in passengers across all three residential areas, and the general effect of a 5 cent reduction on those in the suburbs alone will also be known by seeing the effects in the first cell. If the highest average daily number of increased passengers is 75 for a 7 cent decrease for the crowded urban area route, followed by an increase of 30 for the retirees’ areas for the 10 cent decrease, and an increase of five passengers for a 5 cent reduction for the suburbs, the bus company manager can work out a cost−benefit analysis and decide on the course of action to be taken. Thus, the randomized block design is a more powerful technique, providing more information for decision making. However, the cost of this experimental design will be higher.

10.12.3 Latin square design

Whereas the randomized block design helps the experimenter to minimize the effects of one nuisance variable (variation among the rows) in evaluating the treat- ment effects, the Latin square design is very useful when two nuisance blocking factors (i.e., variations across both the rows and the columns) are to be controlled. Each treatment appears an equal number of times in any one ordinal position in each row. For instance, in studying the effects of bus fare reduction on passen- gers, two nuisance factors could be: (1) the day of the week, (a) midweek (Tuesday through Thursday), (b) weekend, (c) Monday and Friday; and (2) the (three) res- idential localities of the passengers. A three by three Latin square design can be created in this case, to which will be randomly assigned the three treatments (5, 7, and 10 cent fare reductions), such that each treatment occurs only once in each row and column intersection. The Latin square design is shown in Table 10.9. After the experiment is carried out and the net increase in passengers under each treatment calculated, the average treatment effects can be gauged. The price reduction that offers the best advantage can also be assessed.

Table 10.9 Illustration of the Latin square design

Day of the week

Residential area Midweek Weekend Monday/Friday

Suburbs X 1 X 2 X 3

Urban X 2 X 3 X 1

Retirement X 3 X 1 X 2

A problem with the Latin square design is that it presupposes the absence of inter- action between the treatments and blocking factors, which may not always be the case. We also need as many cells as there are treatments. Furthermore, it is an uneconomical design compared to some others.

10.12.4 Factorial design

Thus far we have discussed experimental designs in the context of examining a cause-and-effect relationship between one independent variable and the depend- ent variable. The factorial design enables us to test the effects of two or more manipulations at the same time on the dependent variable. In other words, two treatments can be simultaneously manipulated and their single and joint (known as main and interaction) effects assessed. For example, the manager of the bus com- pany might be interested in knowing passenger increases if he used three different types of buses (Luxury Express, Standard Express, and Regular) and manipulated

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 224

Chapter

10

Research Methods for Business

216 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

both the fare reduction and the type of vehicle used, simultaneously. Table 10.10 illustrates the 3× 3 factorial design that would be used for the purpose.

Table 10.10 Illustration of a 3× 3 factorial design

Bus fare reduction rates

Type of bus 5c 7c 10c

Luxury Express X 1 Y 1 X 2 Y 1 X 3 Y 1

Standard Express X 2 Y 2 X 1 Y 2 X 3 Y 2

Regular X 3 Y 3 X 2 Y 3 X 1 Y 3

Here, two factors are used with three levels in each. The above is completely random- ized, since the fares are randomly assigned to one of nine treatment combinations. A wealth of information can be obtained from this design. For example, the bus company manager will know the increase in passengers for each fare reduction, for each type of vehicle, and for the two in combination. Thus, the main effects of the two independent variables, as well as the interactions among them, can be assessed. For this reason, the factorial design is more efficient than several single-factor ran- domized designs.

It is also statistically possible to control one or more variables through covariance analysis. For example, it may be suspected that even after randomly assigning mem- bers to treatments, there is a further “nuisance” factor. It is possible to statistically block such factors while analyzing the data.

Several other complex experimental designs are also available and are treated in books devoted to experimental designs.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 225

Chapter

11

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 217

Chapter 11

Measurement of variables: Operational definition

Topics discussed:

� How variables are measured

� Operational defi nition (operationalization)

� International dimensions of operational definition

Chapter objectives

After completing Chapter 11 you should be able to:

1. Explain when operationalization of variables is necessary.

2. Operationally define (or operationalize) variables.

3. Describe the advantages of using existing measurement scales to operationalize variables.

Measurement of the variables in the theoretical framework is an integral part of research and an important aspect of research design (see shaded portion in Figure 11.1). Unless the variables are measured in some way, we will not be able to test our hypotheses and find answers to our research questions. Field studies and experimental designs, discussed in Chapter 9 and Chapter 10, often use ques- tionnaires to measure the variables of interest. In this chapter we will discuss how variables lend themselves to measurement.

Figure 11.1 Research design and where this chapter fits in

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 226

Chapter

11

Research Methods for Business

218 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

11.1 HOW VARIABLES ARE MEASURED

To test the hypothesis that workforce diversity affects organizational effectiveness we have to measure workforce diversity and organizational effectiveness. Measure- ment is the assignment of numbers or other symbols to characteristics (or attributes) of objects according to a prespecified set of rules. Objects include persons, strategic business units, companies, countries, bicycles, elephants, kitchen appliances, res- taurants, shampoo, yogurt, and so on. Examples of characteristics of objects are arousal-seeking tendency, achievement motivation, organizational effectiveness, shopping enjoyment, length, weight, ethnic diversity, service quality, conditioning effects, and taste. It is important that you realize that you cannot measure objects (for instance, a company); you measure characteristics or attributes of objects (for instance, the organizational effectiveness of a company). In a similar fashion, you can measure the length (the attribute) of a person (the object), the weight of an elephant, the arousal-seeking tendency of stockbrokers, the shopping enjoyment of women, the service quality of a restaurant, the conditioning effects of a shampoo, and the taste of a certain brand of yogurt. To be able to measure you need an object and attributes of the object, but you also need a judge. A judge is someone who has the necessary knowledge and skills to assess “the quality” of something, such as the taste of yogurt, the arousal-seeking tendency of stockbrokers, or the communica- tion skills of students. In many cases the object and the judge are the same person. For instance, if you want to measure the gender (the attribute) of your employees (the objects), or the shopping enjoyment (the attribute) of women (the objects), you can simply ask the objects (employees and women respectively) to provide you with the necessary details via a self-administered questionnaire. However, it is unlikely that the object has the necessary knowledge and skills to act as a judge when you want to measure the taste (the attribute) of yogurt (the object), the service quality of a restaurant, the communication skills of students, or even the managerial expertise of supervisors.

Now do Exercise 11.1.

Exercise 11.1

Identify the object and the attribute. Give your informed opinion about who would be an adequate judge.

a. Price consciousness of car buyers.

b. Self-esteem of dyslexic children.

c. Organizational commitment of school teachers.

d. Marketing orientation of companies.

e. Product quality of tablets (such as the Apple iPad and the Samsung Galaxy Tab).

Attributes of objects that can be physically measured by some calibrated instru- ments pose no measurement problems. For example, the length and width of a

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 227

Chapter

11

Measurement of variables: Operational definition

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 219

rectangular office table can be easily measured with a measuring tape or a ruler. The same is true for measuring the office floor area and for measuring the weight of an elephant (at least to some extent). Data representing several demographic characteristics of office personnel are also easily obtained by asking employees simple, straightforward questions, such as: “How long have you been working in this organization?” or “What is your marital status?”

The measurement of more abstract and subjective attributes is more difficult, how- ever. For instance, it is relatively difficult to measure the level of achievement motiv- ation of office clerks, the shopping enjoyment of women, or the need for cognition of students. Likewise, it is not straightforward to test hypotheses on the relationship between workforce diversity, managerial expertise, and organizational effective- ness. The problem is that we cannot simply ask questions like “How diverse is your company’s workforce?” or “How effective is your organization?” because of the abstract nature of the variables “workforce diversity” and “organizational effect- iveness.” Of course, there are solutions to this problem. One of these solutions is discussed next. But let us, before we discuss the solution, summarize the problem.

Certain variables lend themselves to easy measurement through the use of appro- priate measuring instruments; for example, physiological phenomena pertaining to human beings, such as blood pressure, pulse rates, and body temperature, as well as certain physical attributes such as length and weight. But when we get into the realm of people’s subjective feelings, attitudes, and perceptions, the measurement of these factors or variables becomes more difficult. Accordingly, there are at least two types of variables: one lends itself to objective and precise measurement; the other is more nebulous and does not lend itself to accurate measurement because of its abstract and subjective nature.

11.2 OPERATIONAL DEFINITION (OPERATIONALIZATION)

Despite the lack of physical measuring devices to measure the more nebulous vari- ables, there are ways of tapping these types of variable. One technique is to reduce these abstract notions or concepts to observable behavior and/or characteristics. In other words, the abstract notions are broken down into observable behavior or characteristics. For instance, the concept of thirst is abstract; we cannot see it. How- ever, we would expect a thirsty person to drink plenty of fluids. In other words, the expected reaction of people to thirst is to drink fluids. If several people say they are thirsty, then we may determine the thirst levels of each of these individuals by the measure of the quantity of fluids that they drink to quench their thirst. We will thus be able to measure their levels of thirst, even though the concept of thirst itself is abstract and nebulous. Reduction of abstract concepts to render them measurable in a tangible way is called operationalizing the concepts.

Operationalizing is done by looking at the behavioral dimensions, facets, or prop- erties denoted by the concept. These are then translated into observable and meas- urable elements so as to develop an index of measurement of the concept. Opera- tionalizing a concept involves a series of steps. The first step is to come up with a definition of the construct that you want to measure. Then, it is necessary to think about the content of the measure; that is, an instrument (one or more items or questions) that actually measures the concept that one wants to measure has to be developed. Subsequently, a response format (for instance, a seven-point rating scale with end-points anchored by “strongly disagree” and “strongly agree”) is needed, and, finally, the validity and reliability of the measurement scale has to be assessed. The next chapter discusses steps 3 and 4. In this chapter we will discuss step 2: the development of an adequate and representative set of items or questions.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 228

Chapter

11

Research Methods for Business

220 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Operationalizing the concept of need for cognition

We have just reduced the abstract concept thirst into observable behavior by measuring the amount of drinks people use to quench their thirst. Other abstract concepts such as need for cognition (the tendency to engage in and enjoy thinking (Cacioppo & Petty, 1982) can be reduced to observable behavior and/or characteristics in a similar way. For instance, we would expect indi- viduals with a high need for cognition to prefer complex to simple problems, to find satisfaction in deliberating hard and for long hours, and to enjoy tasks that involve coming up with new solutions to problems (examples taken from Cacioppo & Petty, 1982). We may thus identify differences between individuals in need of cognition by measuring to what extent people prefer complex to simple problems, find satisfaction in deliberating hard and for long hours, and enjoy tasks that involve coming up with new solutions to problems.

In 1982, Cacioppo and Petty reported four studies to develop and validate a measurement scale to assess need for cognition. In a first study, a pool of 45 items that appeared relevant to need for cognition was generated (based on prior research) and administered to groups “known to differ in need for cognition.” The results of this study revealed that the 45 items exhibited a high degree of interrelatedness and thus suggested that need for cognition is a unidimensional construct (that is, it does not have more than one main component or dimension; we will come back to this issue further on in this chapter). This finding was replicated in a second study. Two further studies (studies three and four) were carried out to validate the findings of the first two studies. The outcome of this validation process was a valid and reliable need for cognition measure containing 34 items, such as “I would prefer complex to simple problems,” “I find satisfaction in deliberating hard and for long hours,” and “I really enjoy tasks that involve coming up with new solutions to problems.”

Now do Exercise 11.2.

Exercise 11.2

Read the paper by Cacioppo & Petty (1982) and describe how the authors gen- erated the pool of 45 scale items that appeared relevant to need for cognition.

Why do we need 34 items to measure “need for cognition”? Why do three or four items not suffice?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 229

Chapter

11

Measurement of variables: Operational definition

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 221

11.2.1 Operationalization: dimensions and elements

The examples of thirst and need for cognition illustrate how abstract concepts are operationalized by using observable and measurable elements, such as the amount of drinks people use to quench their thirst, and the extent to which people prefer complex to simple problems. You may have noticed that whereas only one item is needed to measure thirst (“how many drinks did you use to quench your thirst?”), 34 items are needed to measure need for cognition. These 34 items are needed because if we used fewer than these 34 items, our measurement scale would probably not represent the entire domain or universe of need for cognition; in other words, our measure would probably not include an adequate and representative set of items (or elements). As a consequence, our measure would not be valid. A valid measure of need for cognition thus contains 34 items even though need for cognition is a unidimensional construct.

An example of a construct with more than one dimension is aggression. Aggres- sion has at least two dimensions: verbal aggression and physical aggression. That is, aggression might include behavior such as shouting and swearing at a person (verbal aggression), but also throwing objects, hitting a wall, and physically hurting others (physical aggression). A valid measurement scale of aggression would have to include items that measure verbal aggression and items that measure physical aggression. A measurement scale that would only include items measuring physical aggression would not be valid if our aim were to measure aggression. Likewise, a scale that would only include items measuring verbal aggression would also not be a valid measure of aggression. Thus, a valid measurement scale includes quantit- atively measurable questions or items (or elements) that adequately represent the domain or universe of the construct; if the construct has more than one domain or dimension, we have to make sure that questions that adequately represent these domains or dimensions are included in our measure.

Now do Exercise 11.3.

Exercise 11.3

Try to come up with two unidimensional and two multidimensional abstract concepts. Explain why these concepts have either one or more than one dimension.

11.2.2 Operationalizing the (multidimensional) concept of achievement motivation

Suppose that we are interested in establishing a relationship between gender and achievement motivation. To test this relationship we will have to measure both gender and achievement motivation. At this point, you will probably understand that whereas measuring gender will not cause any problems, measuring achieve- ment motivation probably will, because the latter construct is abstract and subject- ive in nature. For this reason we must infer achievement motivation by measuring behavioral dimensions, facets, or characteristics we would expect to find in people with high achievement motivation. Indeed, without measuring these dimensions,

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 230

Chapter

11

Research Methods for Business

222 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

facets, or characteristics we will not be able to arrive at bottom-line statements about the relationship between gender and achievement motivation.

After we have defined the construct, the next step in the process of measuring abstract constructs such as achievement motivation is to go through the literature to find out whether there are any existing measures of the concept. Both scientific journals and “scale handbooks” are important sources of existing measures. As a rule, empirical articles published in academic journals provide a detailed descrip- tion of how specific constructs were measured; information is often provided on what measures were used, when and how these measures were developed, by whom, and for how long they have been in use. Scale handbooks are also a useful source of existing measurement scales. Scale handbooks, such as the Marketing Scales Handbook by Bruner, Hensel, and James (2005) or the Handbook of Organizational Measurement by Price and Mueller (1986), provide an exhaustive overview of meas- urement scales that have appeared in the academic literature. These handbooks help you to determine whether a measurement scale exists and, if more than one measurement scale exists, to make a logical selection between available measures. The use of existing measurement scales has several advantages. First, it saves you a lot of time and energy. Second, it allows you to verify the findings of others and to build on the work of others (this is very important in scientific research but impossible if you use measures that differ from those that our predecessors have used!). Hence, if you want to measure something, see if it has been measured before and then use this measure (adapt it to your specific needs whenever this is needed). Make sure that you document the use of existing measurement scales properly.

Documenting the use of existing measurement scales

Service encounter dissatisfaction and anger were measured with seven-point, multi-item rating scales adapted from previous studies (Crosby & Stephens, 1987; Izard, 1977). These scales were introduced with the following question: “How did you feel about your service experience on this particular occasion?” A seven-point, multi-item measurement scale adapted from prior research (Nasr-Bechwati & Morrin, 2003) was used to measure the desire to get even with the service provider. Scales measuring customers’ behavioral intentions closely followed existing scales measuring reactions to service failure. Inten- tions to engage in negative word-of-mouth communication, complaint fil- ing (Zeithaml, Berry & Parasuraman, 1996), and switching (Oliver, 1996) were assessed by having participants indicate the degree to which they were inclined to such behavior on a seven-point rating scale, anchored by “not at all” and “very much.”

There are several measures of achievement motivation available from the literature (Amabile, Hill, Hennessey & Tighe, 1994; Gordon, 1973; Heggestad & Kanfer, 1999; Super, 1970). But what if there were no existing measure available? In such a case, we would have to develop a measure ourselves; this means that we would have to break down the concept “achievement motivation” into observable behavior or characteristics, as detailed next.

Dimensions and elements of achievement motivation

Let us try to operationalize “achievement motivation,” a concept of interest to educators, managers, and students alike. What behavioral dimensions, facets, or characteristics would we expect to find in people with high achievement motivation? They would probably have the following five typical broad characteristics, which we will call dimensions:

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 231

Chapter

11

Measurement of variables: Operational definition

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 223

1. They would be driven by work; that is, they would be working almost round the clock in order to derive the satisfaction of having “achieved and accomplished.”

2. Many of them would generally be in no mood to relax and direct their attention to anything other than work-related activity.

3. Because they want always to be achieving and accomplishing, they would prefer to work on their own rather than with others.

4. With mind and heart set on accomplishment and achievement, they would rather engage in challenging jobs than easy, hum-drum ones. However, they would not want to take on excessively challenging jobs because the expectation and probability of accomplishment and achievement in such jobs would not be very high.

5. They would be yearning to know how they are progressing in their jobs as they go along. That is, they would like to get frequent feedback in direct and subtle ways from their superiors, colleagues, and on occasion even their subordinates, to know how they are progressing.

Thus, we would expect those with high achievement motivation to drive themselves hard at work, find it difficult to relax, prefer to work alone, engage in challenging (but not too challenging) jobs, and seek feedback. Although breaking the concept into these five dimensions has somewhat reduced its level of abstraction, we have still not operationalized the concept into measurable elements of behavior. This could be done by examining each of the five dimensions and breaking each one down further into its elements, thus delineating the actual patterns of behavior that would be exhibited. These should somehow be quantitatively measurable so that we can distinguish those who have high motivation from those with less. Let us see how this can be done.

Elements of dimension 1

It is possible to describe the behavior of a person who is driven by work. Such a person will (1) be at work all the time, (2) be reluctant to take time off from work, and (3) persevere even in the face of some setbacks. These types of behavior lend themselves to measurement. For instance, we can count the number of hours employees engage themselves in work-related activities during work hours, beyond working hours at the workplace, and at home, where they are likely to pursue their unfinished assignments. Thus, the number of hours put in by them on their work is an index of the extent to which work “drives” them.

Next, keeping track of how frequently people persevere with their job despite failures is a reflection of how persevering they are in achieving their goals. A student who drops out of school due to failure to pass the first exam can by no means be deemed to be a highly persevering, achievement-oriented individual. However, a student who, despite getting D grades on three quizzes, toils day and night unceasingly in order to understand and master a course he considers difficult, is exhibiting perseverance and achievement-oriented behavior. Achievement-motivated individuals do not usually want to give up on their tasks even when confronted by initial failures. Perseverance urges them to continue. Hence, a measure of perseverance could be obtained by the number of setbacks people experience on the task and yet continue to work, undaunted by failures. For example, an accountant might find that she is unable to balance the books. She spends an hour trying to detect the error, fails to do so, gives up, and leaves the workplace. Another employee in the same position stays patiently on the job, discovers the error, and balances the books, spending the entire evening in the process. In this case it is easy to tell which of the two is the more persevering by merely observing them.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 232

Chapter

11

Research Methods for Business

224 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Finally, in order to measure reluctance to take time off, we need only know how frequently people take time off from their jobs, and for what reasons. If an employee is found to have taken seven days off during the previous six months to watch football games, attend an out-of-town circus, and visit friends, we can conclude that the individual probably would not hesitate in taking time away from the job. However, if an individual has not been absent even a single day during the past 15 months, and has not missed work even when slightly indisposed, it is evident that he is too dedicated to work to take time off from the job.

Thus, if we can measure how many hours per week individuals spend on work- related activities, how persevering they are in completing their daily tasks, and how frequently and for what reasons they take time off from their jobs, we will have a measure of the extent to which employees are driven by work. This variable, when thus measured, would place individuals on a continuum ranging from those who are least driven by work to those whose very life is work. This, then, would give some indication of the extent of their achievement motivation.

Figure 11.2 schematically outlines the dimensions (the several facets or main char- acteristics) and the elements (representative behaviors) for the concept of achieve- ment motivation. Frequent reference to this figure will help you follow the ensuing discussions.

Figure 11.2 Dimensions (D) and elements (E) of the concept (C) “achievement motivation”

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 233

Chapter

11

Measurement of variables: Operational definition

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 225

Elements of dimension 2

The degree of unwillingness to relax can be measured by asking persons such questions as:

1. How often do you think about work while you are away from the workplace?

2. What are your hobbies?

3. How do you spend your time when you are away from the workplace?

Those who are able to relax would indicate that they do not generally think about work or the workplace while at home, that they spend time on hobbies, engage in leisure-time activities, and spend their waking hours with the family or in other social or cultural activities.

Thus, we can place employees on a continuum ranging from those who relax very well to those who relax very little. This dimension also then becomes measurable.

Elements of dimension 3

Individuals with high achievement motivation have no patience with ineffective people and are reluctant to work with others. Whereas achievement-motivated persons in the organization may rank very high on these behavioral predispositions, there may be others who are not highly achievement motivated. The latter may not at all mind ineffectiveness in either themselves or others, and may be quite willing to work with almost anybody. Thus, impatience with ineffectiveness can also be measured by observing behavior.

Elements of dimension 4

A measure of how excited people are at seeking challenging jobs can be had by asking employees what kinds of jobs they prefer. A number of different job descriptions could be presented − some jobs entailing stereotyped work of a routine nature, and others with gradations of challenge built into them. Employee preferences for different types of jobs could then be placed on a continuum ranging from those who prefer fairly routine jobs to those who prefer jobs with a progressive increase in challenge. Those opting for medium degrees of challenge are likely to be more achievement motivated than those who opt for either lower or higher degrees of challenge. Achievement-oriented individuals tend to be realistic and choose jobs that are reasonably challenging and within reach of accomplishment. Heedless and overconfident persons would perhaps choose the highly challenging jobs where the success is slow in coming, oblivious to whether or not the end results will be achieved. Those who are low in achievement motivation would perhaps choose the more routine jobs. Thus, those seeking moderate challenges can also be identified.

Elements of dimension 5

Those who desire feedback seek it from their superiors, coworkers, and sometimes even from their subordinates. They want to know others’ opinions on how well they are performing. Feedback, both positive and negative, indicates to them how much they are achieving and accomplishing. If they receive messages suggesting a need for improvement, they will act on them. Hence, they constantly seek feedback from several sources. By keeping track of how often individuals seek feedback from others during a certain period of time − say, over several months − employees can again be placed on a continuum ranging from those who seek extensive feedback from all sources to those who never seek any feedback from anyone at any time.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 234

Chapter

11

Research Methods for Business

226 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Having thus operationalized the concept of achievement motivation by reducing its level of abstraction to observable behaviors, it is possible to develop a good measure to tap the concept of achievement motivation. Its usefulness is that others could use the same measure, thus ensuring replicability. It should, however, be recognized, that any operationalization is likely to, first, exclude some of the important dimen- sions and elements arising from failure to recognize or conceptualize them, and, second, include certain irrelevant features, mistakenly thought to be relevant. You will recall that we earlier pointed out that management research cannot be 100% scientific because we do not have the “perfect” measuring instruments.

Operationalizing the concept, nevertheless, is the best way to measure it. However, actually observing and counting the number of times individuals behave in partic- ular ways, even if practical, would be too laborious and time consuming. So, instead of actually observing the behavior of individuals, we could ask them to report their own behavior patterns by asking them appropriate questions, which they could respond to on some (rating) scale that we provide. In the following example we will look at the type of questions that may be asked to tap achievement motivation.

EXAMPLE

Answers to the following questions from respondents would be one way of tapping the level of achievement motivation.

1. To what extent would you say you push yourself to get the job done on time?

2. How difficult do you find it to continue to do your work in the face of initial failure or discouraging results?

3. How often do you neglect personal matters because you are preoccupied with your job?

4. How frequently do you think of your work when you are at home?

5. To what extent do you engage yourself in hobbies?

6. How disappointed would you feel if you did not reach the goals you had set for yourself?

7. How much do you concentrate on achieving your goals?

8. How annoyed do you get when you make mistakes?

9. To what extent would you prefer to work with a friendly but incompetent colleague, rather than a difficult but competent one?

10. To what extent would you prefer to work by yourself rather than with others?

11. To what extent would you prefer a job that is difficult but challenging, to one that is easy and routine?

12. To what extent would you prefer to take on extremely difficult assignments rather than moderately challenging ones?

13. During the past three months, how often have you sought feedback from your superiors on how well you are performing your job?

14. How often have you tried to obtain feedback on your performance from your coworkers during the past three months?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 235

Chapter

11

Measurement of variables: Operational definition

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 227

15. How often during the past three months have you checked with your sub- ordinates that what you are doing is not getting in the way of their efficient performance?

16. To what extent would it frustrate you if people did not give you feedback on how you are progressing?

The foregoing illustrates a possible way to measure variables relating to the subject- ive domain of people’s attitudes, feelings, and perceptions by first operationalizing the concept. Operationalization consists of the reduction of the concept from its level of abstraction, by breaking it into its dimensions and elements, as discussed. By tapping the behaviors associated with a concept, we can measure the variable. Of course, the questions will ask for responses on some scale attached to them (such as “very little” to “very much”), which we will discuss in the next chapter.

11.2.3 What operationalization is not

Just as it is important to understand what operationalization is, it is equally import- ant to remember what it is not. An operationalization does not describe the correl- ates of the concept. For example, success in performance cannot be a dimension of achievement motivation, even though a motivated person is likely to meet with it in large measure. Thus, achievement motivation and performance and/or success may be highly correlated, but we cannot measure an individual’s level of motivation through success and performance. Performance and success may have been made possible as a consequence of achievement motivation, but in and of themselves, the two are not measures of it. To elaborate, a person with high achievement motiva- tion might have failed for some reason, perhaps beyond her control, to perform the job successfully. Thus, if we judge the achievement motivation of this person with performance as the yardstick, we will have measured the wrong concept. Instead of measuring achievement motivation − our variable of interest − we will have measured performance, another variable we did not intend to measure nor were interested in.

Thus, it is clear that operationalizing a concept does not consist of delineating the reasons, antecedents, consequences, or correlates of the concept. Rather, it describes its observable characteristics in order to be able to measure the concept. It is important to remember this because if we either operationalize the concepts incorrectly or confuse them with other concepts, then we will not have valid meas- ures. This means that we will not have “good” data, and our research will not be scientific.

11.2.4 Review of operationalization

We have thus far examined how to operationally define concepts. Operationaliza- tions are necessary to measure abstract and subjective concepts such as feelings and attitudes. More objective variables such as age or educational level are easily measured through simple, straightforward questions and do not have to be opera- tionalized. We have pointed out that operationalization starts with a definition of the concept. The next step is to either find or develop an adequate (set of) closed- end question(s) that allow(s) you to measure the concept in a reliable and valid way. Luckily, measures for many concepts that are relevant in business research have already been developed by researchers. While you review the literature in a given area, you might want to particularly note the reference that discusses the instru- ment used to tap the concept in the study, and read it. The article will tell you when the measure was developed, by whom, and for how long it has been in use. If you

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 236

Chapter

11

Research Methods for Business

228 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

cannot find or use an existing measure, you have to develop your own measure. To be able to do this, you will need to become an expert in a particular domain; this enables you to include the relevant dimensions and elements in your measure. Only a well-developed instrument, which has been operationalized with care, will be accepted and frequently used by other researchers.

Now do Exercises 11.4, 11.5 and 11.6.

Exercise 11.4

Provide an operational definition of the concept of “service quality” and develop questions that would measure service quality.

Exercise 11.5

Compare your service quality measure to the measure of Zeithaml, Berry & Parasuraman, 1996 presented in the Journal of Retailing.

How does your measure differ from this measure in terms of dimensions and elements?

Would you prefer using your own measure or the measure of Zeithaml, Berry, and Parasuraman? Why?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 237

Chapter

11

Measurement of variables: Operational definition

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 229

Exercise 11.6

Find the paper “Consumer values orientation for materialism and its meas- urement: Scale development and validation,” written by Marsha Richins and Scott Dawson.

Provide an overview of the dimensions and elements of Richins and Dawson’s materialism scale.

Use Bruner, Hensel, and James’ the Marketing Scales Handbook to find at least two other materialism scales. Compare the scales you have found with the Richins and Dawson scale.

11.3 INTERNATIONAL DIMENSIONS OF OPERATIONALIZATION

In conducting transnational research, it is important to remember that certain vari- ables have different meanings and connotations in different cultures. For instance, the term “love” is subject to several interpretations in different cultures and has at least 20 different interpretations in some countries. Likewise, the concept “know- ledge” is equated with “jnana” in some Eastern cultures and construed as “real- ization of the Almighty.” Thus, it is wise for researchers who hail from a country speaking a different language to recruit the help of local scholars to operationalize certain concepts while engaging in cross-cultural research.

SUMMARY

In this chapter, we saw that any concept can be broken down into dimensions and elements for measurement through a set of items. We also discussed briefly the nuances in operational definition in cross-cultural research and were alerted to the dangers of operationalizing certain concepts in other cultures that might have different connotations.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 238

Chapter

11

Research Methods for Business

230 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

Define measurement.

Explain why it is impossible to measure an object.

Provide (relevant) measurable attributes for the following objects:

a restaurant

a businessperson

a consumer

a car

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 239

Chapter

11

Measurement of variables: Operational definition

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 231

a tennis racket

a strategic business unit.

Why is it wrong to use correlates of a concept to measure that concept?

What is meant by operational definition, when is it necessary, and why is it necessary?

Operationalize the following:

customer loyalty

price consciousness

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 240

Chapter

11

Research Methods for Business

232 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

career success.

Is it useful to draw on existing measures to measure abstract and subjective constructs such as customer loyalty? Why (not)?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 241

Chapter

12

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 233

Chapter 12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Topics discussed:

� Scales

� Rating scales

� Ranking scales

� International dimensions of scaling

� Goodness of measures

� Reflective versus formative measurement scales

Chapter objectives

After completing Chapter 12 you should be able to:

1. Know the characteristics and power of the four types of scales−nominal, ordinal, interval, and ratio.

2. Know how and when to use the different forms of rating scales and ranking scales.

3. Be able to explain stability and consistency and how they are established.

4. Be able to explain the difference between reflective and formative scales.

5. Be conversant with the different forms of validity.

6. Be able to discuss what “goodness” of measures means, and why it is necessary to establish it in research.

Measurement is the assignment of numbers or other symbols to characteristics (or attributes) of objects according to a prespecified set of rules. Now that we have learned how to operationally define (or operationalize) a concept (or variable), we need to assign numbers (or other symbols) to it in some manner. Note that it is important that the rules for assigning numbers to characteristics (attributes) of objects should be standardized and applied in a consistent manner.

Numbers allow us to perform statistical analysis on the resulting data and to test the hypotheses that we have developed. What’s more, they facilitate the communication of our research results. We will examine in this chapter the types of scales that can be applied to assign numbers to characteristics of objects and subsequently see how we actually apply them. We will first discuss four different types of scales (nominal, ordinal, interval, and ratio scales) and point out that the statistical analysis we can perform later on in the research process is directly related to the type of scales we use. We will also discuss two main categories of attitudinal scales (not to be confused with the four different types of scales, discussed first in this chapter) − the rating scale and the ranking scale. Rating scales have several response categories and are used to elicit responses with regard to the object, event, or person studied. Ranking scales, on the other hand, make comparisons between or among objects, events, or persons and elicit the preferred choices and ranking among them.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 242

Chapter

12

Research Methods for Business

234 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

12.1 FOUR TYPES OF SCALES

Measurement means gathering data in the form of numbers. To be able to assign numbers to attributes of objects we need a scale. A scale is a tool or mechanism by which individuals are distinguished as to how they differ from one another on the variables of interest to our study. Scaling involves the creation of a continuum on which our objects are located.

Suppose that we want to measure consumer attitudes toward soft drink consump- tion. After we have developed one or more scale items or questions, the next step in measurement is to decide on a scale that allows us to assign numbers to the attribute (attitude toward soft drink consumption) of our objects (consumers). This allows us to subsequently classify our objects (consumers) in terms of how unfavorable or favorable they are towardt drinking a soft drink. One of the many options we have to classify consumers is a Likert scale. The Likert scale is a scale designed to examine how strongly respondents agree with a statement (such as “I enjoy having a soft drink”) on a five-point scale with the following anchors: 1=Strongly Disagree, 2=Disagree, 3=Neither Agree Nor Disagree, 4=Agree, 5=Strongly Agree (further on in this chapter we will thoroughly discuss a wide variety of rating and ranking scales, including the Likert scale). Hence, the Likert scale allows us to distinguish consumers in terms of how they differ from one another in their attitude toward soft drinks, each respondent being assigned a number indicating a more or less unfavorable, neutral, or more or less favorable.

The million dollar question is: What is the meaning of the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5? Does the scale that we have used allow us for instance to rank our objects (2 is more than 1)? Does it allow us to compare differences between objects (in other words is the difference between 1 and 2 is the same as the difference between 2 and 3? And does it allow us to calculate certain statistics such as a mean (or average) and a standard deviation? The answer is: it depends. It depends on the type of scale (that is, the basic scale type) that we have used.

There are four basic types of scales: nominal, ordinal, interval, and ratio. The degree of sophistication to which the scales are fine-tuned increases progressively as we move from the nominal to the ratio scale. That is, information on the variables can be obtained in greater detail when we employ an interval or a ratio scale rather than using the other two scales. As the calibration or fine-tuning of the scale increases in sophistication, so does the power of the scale. With more powerful scales, increas- ingly sophisticated data analyses can be performed, which, in turn, means that more meaningful answers can be found to our research questions. However, certain variables lend themselves with greater ease to more powerful scaling than others. Let us now examine each of these four scales.

12.1.1 Nominal scale

A nominal scale is one that allows the researcher to assign subjects to certain cat- egories or groups. For example, with respect to the variable of gender, respondents can be grouped into two categories − male and female. These two groups can be assigned code numbers 1 and 2. These numbers serve as simple and convenient category labels with no intrinsic value, other than to assign respondents to one of two nonoverlapping, or mutually exclusive, categories. Note that the categories are also collectively exhaustive. In other words, there is no third category into which respondents would normally fall. Thus, nominal scales categorize individuals or objects into mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive groups. The information that can be generated from nominal scaling is the calculation of the percentage (or frequency) of males and females in our sample of respondents. For example, if we had interviewed 200 people, and assigned code number 1 to all male respondents

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 243

Chapter

12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 235

and number 2 to all female respondents, then computer analysis of the data at the end of the survey may show that 98 of the respondents are men and 102 are women. This frequency distribution tells us that 49% of the survey’s respondents are men and 51% women. Other than this marginal information, such scaling tells us nothing more about the two groups. Thus, the nominal scale gives some basic, categorical, gross information.

EXAMPLE

Let us take a look at another variable that lends itself to nominal scaling − the nationality of individuals. We could nominally scale this variable in the following mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive categories.

American Japanese

Australian Polish

Chinese Russian

German Swiss

Indian Zambian

Other

Note that every respondent has to fit into one of the above 11 categories and that the scale allows computation of the numbers and percentages of respondents that fit into them.

Now do Exercise 12.1.

Exercise 12.1

Suggest two variables that would be natural candidates for nominal scales, and set up mutually exclusive and collectively exhaustive categories for each.

12.1.2 Ordinal scale

An ordinal scale not only categorizes the variables in such a way as to denote dif- ferences among the various categories, it also rank-orders the categories in some meaningful way. With any variable for which the categories are to be ordered accord- ing to some preference, the ordinal scale would be used. The preference would be ranked (e.g., from best to worst; first to last) and numbered 1, 2, and so on. For example, respondents might be asked to indicate their preferences by ranking the importance they attach to five distinct characteristics in a job that the researcher might be interested in studying. Such a question might take the form shown in the following example.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 244

Chapter

12

Research Methods for Business

236 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

The ordinal scale helps the researcher to determine the percentage of respondents who consider interaction with others as most important, those who consider using a number of different skills as most important, and so on. Such knowledge might help in designing jobs that are seen as most enriched by the majority of the employees.

We can now see that the ordinal scale provides more information than the nom- inal scale. The ordinal scale goes beyond differentiating the categories to providing information on how respondents distinguish them by rank-ordering them. Note, however, that the ordinal scale does not give any indication of the magnitude of the differences among the ranks. For instance, in the job characteristics example, the first-ranked job characteristic might be only marginally preferred over the second- ranked characteristic, whereas the characteristic that is ranked third might be pre- ferred in a much larger degree than the one ranked fourth. Thus, in ordinal scaling, even though differences in the ranking of objects, persons, or events investigated are clearly known, we do not know their magnitude. This deficiency is overcome by interval scaling, which is discussed next.

EXAMPLE

Rank the following five characteristics in a job in terms of how important they are for you. You should rank the most important item as 1, the next in importance as 2, and so on, until you have ranked each of them 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5.

Job characteristic Ranking of importance

The opportunity provided by the job to:

Interact with others —

Use a number of different skills. —

Complete a whole task from begin- ning to end.

Serve others. —

Work independently. —

Now do Exercise 12.2.

Exercise 12.2

Develop an ordinal scale for consumer preferences for different brands of beer.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 245

Chapter

12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 237

12.1.3 Interval scale

An interval scale allows us to perform certain arithmetical operations on the data collected from the respondents. Whereas the nominal scale allows us only to qual- itatively distinguish groups by categorizing them into mutually exclusive and col- lectively exhaustive sets, and the ordinal scale to rank-order the preferences, the interval scale lets us measure the distance between any two points on the scale. This helps us to compute the means and the standard deviations of the responses on the variables. In other words, the interval scale not only groups individuals according to certain categories and taps the order of these groups, it also measures the magnitude of the differences in the preferences among the individuals. If, for instance, employees think that (1) it is more important for them to have a variety of skills in their jobs than to complete a task from beginning to end and (2) it is more important for them to serve people than to work independently on the job, then the interval scale would indicate whether the first preference is to the same extent, a lesser extent, or a greater extent than the second. This can be done by changing the scale from the ranking type to make it appear as if there are several points on a scale that represent the extent or magnitude of the importance of each of the five job characteristics. Such a scale could be indicated for the job design case as shown in the following example.

EXAMPLE

Indicate the extent to which you agree with the following statements as they relate to your job, by circling the appropriate number against each, using the scale given below.

Strongly Disagree Disagree

Neither Agree Nor Disagree Agree

Strongly Agree

1 2 3 4 5

The following opportunities offered by the job are very important to me:

a. Interacting with others 1 2 3 4 5

b. Using a number of different skills 1 2 3 4 5

c. Completing a task from beginning to end 1 2 3 4 5

d. Serving others 1 2 3 4 5

e. Working independently 1 2 3 4 5

Let us illustrate how the interval scale establishes the equality of the magnitude of differences in the scale points. Let us suppose that employees circle the numbers 3, 1, 2, 4, and 5 for the five items in the above example. They then indicate to us that the extent of their preference for skill utilization over doing the task from beginning to end is the same as the extent of their preference for serving customers over working independently. That is, the magnitude of difference represented by the space between points 1 and 2 on the scale is the same as the magnitude of difference represented by the space between points 4 and 5, or between any other two points. Any number can be added to or subtracted from the numbers on the scale, still retaining the magnitude of the difference. For instance, if we add 6 to all five points

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 246

Chapter

12

Research Methods for Business

238 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

on the scale, the interval scale will have the numbers 7 to 11 (instead of 1 to 5). The magnitude of the difference between 7 and 8 is still the same as the magnitude of the difference between 9 and 10. Thus, the origin, or the starting point, may be any arbitrary number. The clinical thermometer is a good example of an interval-scaled instrument; it has an arbitrary origin and the magnitude of the difference between 98.6 degrees (supposed to be the normal body temperature) and 99.6 degrees is the same as the magnitude of the difference between 104 and 105 degrees. Note, however, that one may not be seriously concerned if one’s temperature rises from 98.6 to 99.6, but one is likely to be so when the temperature goes up from 104 to 105 degrees!

The interval scale, then, taps the differences, the order, and the equality of the magnitude of the differences in the variable. As such, it is a more powerful scale than the nominal and ordinal scales, and has for its measure of central tendency the arithmetic mean. Its measures of dispersion are the range, the standard deviation, and the variance.

Now do Exercises 12.3 and 12.4.

Exercise 12.3

Measure any three variables on an interval scale.

Exercise 12.4

Mention one variable for each of the four scales in the context of a market survey, and explain how or why it would fit into the scale.

12.1.4 Ratio scale

The ratio scale overcomes the disadvantage of the arbitrary origin point of the interval scale, in that it has an absolute (in contrast to an arbitrary) zero point, which is a meaningful measurement point. Thus, the ratio scale not only measures the magnitude of the differences between points on the scale but also taps the proportions in the differences. It is the most powerful of the four scales because it has a unique zero origin (not an arbitrary origin) and subsumes all the properties of the other three scales. The weighing balance is a good example of a ratio scale. It has an absolute (and not arbitrary) zero origin calibrated on it, which allows us to calculate the ratio of the weights of two individuals. For instance, a person

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 247

Chapter

12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 239

weighing 250 pounds is twice as heavy as one who weighs 125 pounds. Note that multiplying or dividing both of these numbers (250 and 125) by any given number will preserve the ratio of 2:1. The measure of central tendency of the ratio scale may be either the arithmetic or the geometric mean and the measure of dispersion may be either the standard deviation, or variance, or the coefficient of variation. Some examples of ratio scales are those pertaining to actual age, income, and the number of organizations individuals have worked for.

The properties of the scales, as fine-tuning is increasingly achieved, are summarized in Table 12.1. We may also see from the table how the power of the statistic increases as we move away from the nominal scale (where we group subjects or items under some categories), to the ordinal scale (where we rank-order the categories), to the interval scale (where we tap the magnitude of the differences), to the ratio scale (which allows us to measure the proportion of the differences).

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 248

Chapter

12

Research Methods for Business

240 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

T ab

le 12

.1 P

ro p

er ti

es of

th e

fo u

r sc

al es

H ig

h li

gh ts

Sc al

e D

if fe

re n

ce O

rd er

D is

ta n

ce U

n iq

u e

o ri

gi n

M ea

su re

s o

fc en

tr al

te n

d en

cy M

ea su

re s

o f

d is

p er

si o

n So

m e

te st

s o

f si

gn ifi

ca n

ce

N o

m in

al Ye

s N

o N

o N

o M

o d

e —

χ 2

O rd

in al

Ye s

Ye s

N o

N o

M ed

ia n

Se m

i- in

te rq

u ar

ti le

ra n

ge R

an k-

o rd

er co

rr el

a- ti

o n

s

In te

rv al

Ye s

Ye s

Ye s

N o

A ri

th m

et ic

m ea

n St

an d

ar d

d ev

ia ti

o n

, va

ri an

ce ,c

o ef

fi ci

en t

o fv

ar ia

ti o

n

t, F

R at

io Ye

s Ye

s Ye

s Ye

s A

ri th

m et

ic o

r ge

o m

et -

ri c

m ea

n St

an d

ar d

d ev

ia ti

o n

o r

va ri

an ce

o r

co ef

fi ci

en t

o fv

ar ia

ti o

n

t, F

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 249

Chapter

12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 241

You must have surmised by now that some variables, such as gender, can be meas- ured only on the nominal scale, while others, such as temperature, can be measured on a nominal scale (high/low), or ordinal scale (hot/medium/low), or the interval scale through the thermometer. Whenever it is possible to use a more powerful scale, it is wise to do so.

Now that we have looked at the four types of scales, let us see, through the following examples, when and how they should be used.

Use of the nominal scale

The nominal scale is always used for obtaining personal data such as gender or department in which one works, where grouping of individuals or objects is useful, as shown below.

1. Your gender 2. Your department

__ Male __ Production

__ Female __ Sales

__ Accounting

__ Finance

__ Personnel

__ R&D

__ Other (specify)

Use of the ordinal scale

The ordinal scale is used to rank the preferences or usage of various brands of a product by individuals and to rank-order individuals, objects, or events, as per the examples below.

1. Rank the following personal computers with respect to their usage in your office, assigning the number 1 to the most used system, 2 to the next most used, and so on. If a particular system is not used at all in your office, put a 0 next to it.

__ Apple __ Hewlett-Packard

__ Compaq __ IBM

__ Comp USA __ Packard Bell

__ Dell Computer __ Sony

__ Gateway __ Toshiba

__ Other (Specify)

2. Rank the cities listed below in the order that you consider suitable for opening a new plant. The city considered the most suitable should be ranked 1, the next 2, and so on.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 250

Chapter

12

Research Methods for Business

242 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

__ Cincinnati __ Milwaukee

__ Detroit __ Pittsburgh

__ Des Moines __ St Louis

__ Houston

Use of the interval scale

The interval scale is used when responses to various items that measure a variable can be tapped on a five-point (or seven-point or any other number of points) scale, which can thereafter be summed across the items. See the following example of a Likert scale.

Using the scale below, please indicate your response to each of the items that follow, by circling the number that best describes your feeling.

Strongly Disagree Disagree

Neither Agree Nor Disagree Agree

Strongly Agree

1 2 3 4 5

1. My job offers me a chance to test myself and my abilities.

1 2 3 4 5

2. Master- ing this job meant a lot to me.

1 2 3 4 5

3. Doing this job well is a reward in itself.

1 2 3 4 5

4. Consid- ering the time spent on the job, I feel thor- oughly familiar with my tasks and responsib- ilities.

1 2 3 4 5

Use of the ratio scale

Ratio scales are usually used in business research when exact numbers on objective (as opposed to subjective) factors are called for, as in the following questions:

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 251

Chapter

12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 243

1. How many other organizations did you work for before joining this system? __

2. Please indicate the number of children you have in each of the following categories:

__ below 3 years of age

__ between 3 and 6

__ over 6 years but under 12

__ 12 years and over

3. How many retail outlets do you operate? __

The responses to the questions could range from 0 to any reasonable figure.

12.1.5 Review of scales

The four scales that can be applied to the measurement of variables are the nominal, ordinal, interval, and ratio scales. The nominal scale highlights the differences by classifying objects or persons into groups, and provides the least amount of inform- ation on the variable. The ordinal scale provides some additional information by rank-ordering the categories of the nominal scale. The interval scale not only ranks, but also provides us with information on the magnitude of the differences in the variable. The ratio scale indicates not only the magnitude of the differences but also their proportion. Multiplication or division would preserve these ratios. As we move from the nominal to the ratio scale, we obtain progressively increasing precision in quantifying the data, and greater flexibility in using more powerful statistical tests. Hence, whenever possible and appropriate, a more powerful rather than a less powerful scale should be used to measure the variables of interest.

The specific scaling techniques commonly used in business research can be classi- fied into rating scales and the ranking scales. In rating scales each object is scaled independently of the other objects under study. Ranking scales, on the other hand, make comparisons between or among objects and elicit the preferred choices and ranking among them. Specific rating and ranking scales are discussed next.

12.2 RATING SCALES

The following rating scales are often used in business research:

• Dichotomous scale

• Category scale

• Semantic differential scale

• Numerical scale

• Itemized rating scale

• Likert scale

• Fixed or constant sum rating scale

• Stapel scale

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 252

Chapter

12

Research Methods for Business

244 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

• Graphic rating scale

• Consensus scale.

Other scales, such as the Thurstone Equal Appearing Interval Scale, and the mul- tidimensional scale, are less frequently used. We will briefly describe each of the above attitudinal scales.

12.2.1 Dichotomous scale

The dichotomous scale is used to elicit a Yes or No answer, as in the example below. Note that a nominal scale is used to elicit the response.

EXAMPLE

Do you own a car? Yes No

12.2.2 Category scale

The category scale uses multiple items to elicit a single response, as per the following example. This also uses the nominal scale.

EXAMPLE

Where in London do you reside?

__ East London

__ South London

__ West London

__ North London

__ Outskirts

12.2.3 Semantic differential scale

Several bipolar attributes are identified at the extremes of the scale, and respondents are asked to indicate their attitudes, on what may be called a semantic space, toward a particular individual, object, or event on each of the attributes. The bipolar adjectives used might employ such terms as Good−Bad; Strong−Weak; Hot−Cold. The semantic diff erential scale is used to assess respondents’ attitudes toward a particular brand, advertisement, object, or individual. The responses can be plotted to obtain a good idea of their perceptions. This is treated as an interval scale. An example of the semantic differential scale follows.

EXAMPLE

Responsive — — — — — — Unresponsive

Beautiful — — — — — — Ugly

Courageous — — — — — — Timid

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 253

Chapter

12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 245

12.2.4 Numerical scale

The numerical scale is similar to the semantic differential scale, with the differ- ence that numbers on a five-point or seven-point scale are provided, with bipolar adjectives at both ends, as illustrated below. This is also an interval scale.

EXAMPLE

How pleased are you with your new estate agent?

Extremely Pleased 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Extremely Displeased

12.2.5 Itemized rating scale

A five-point or seven-point scale with anchors, as needed, is provided for each item and the respondent states the appropriate number on the side of each item, or circles the relevant number against each item, as per the examples that follow. The responses to the items are then summed. This uses an interval scale.

EXAMPLE

Respond to each item using the scale below, and indicate your response number on the line by each item.

1 Very Unlikely

2 Unlikely

3 Neither Unlikely

Nor Likely 4

Likely 5

Very Likely

1 I will be changing my job within the next 12 months.

2 I will take on new assignments in the near future.

3 It is possible that I will be out of this organization within the next 12 months.

Note that the above is a balanced rating scale with a neutral point.

Not at All Interested

1

Somewhat Interested

2

Moderately Interested

3

Very Much Interested

4

How would you rate your interest in chan- ging cur- rent organ- izational policies?

1 2 3 4

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 254

Chapter

12

Research Methods for Business

246 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

This is an unbalanced rating scale which does not have a neutral point.

The itemized rating scale provides the flexibility to use as many points in the scale as considered necessary (4, 5, 7, 9, or whatever), and it is also possible to use different anchors (e.g., Very Unimportant to Very Important; Extremely Low to Extremely High). When a neutral point is provided, it is a balanced rating scale, and when it is not, it is an unbalanced rating scale.

Research indicates that a five-point scale is just as good as any, and that an increase from five to seven or nine points on a rating scale does not improve the reliability of the ratings (Elmore & Beggs, 1975).

The itemized rating scale is frequently used in business research, since it adapts itself to the number of points the researcher wishes to use, as well as the nomenclature of the anchors, as is considered necessary to accommodate the needs of the researcher for tapping the variable.

12.2.6 Likert scale

The Likert scale is designed to examine how strongly subjects agree or disagree with statements on a five-point scale with the following anchors:

Strongly Disagree Disagree

Neither Agree nor Disagree Agree

Strongly Agree

1 2 3 4 5

The responses over a number of items tapping a particular concept or variable can be analyzed item by item, but it is also possible to calculate a total or summated score for each respondent by summing across items. The summated approach is widely used, and therefore the Likert scale is also referred to as a summated scale.

In the following example, the scores on the second item have to be reversed before calculating the summated score, because a high score on this item reflects an unfa- vorable attitude to work, whereas a high score on items 1 and 3 reflects a favorable attitude to work. This will lead to high total scores for respondents who have a favorable attitude toward work and to low total scores for respondents who have an unfavorable attitude toward work.

EXAMPLE

Using the preceding Likert scale, state the extent to which you agree with each of the following statements:

My work is very interesting 1 2 3 4 5

I am not engrossed in my work all day 1 2 3 4 5

Life without my work would be dull 1 2 3 4 5

Whether a Likert scale is an ordinal or an interval scale is a subject of much debate. People who treat a Likert scale as an ordinal scale argue that one cannot assume that

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 255

Chapter

12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 247

all pairs of adjacent levels are equidistant. Nonetheless, Likert scales are generally treated as interval scales.

12.2.7 Fixed or constant sum scale

The respondents are here asked to distribute a given number of points across various items as per the example below. This is more in the nature of an ordinal scale.

EXAMPLE

In choosing a toilet soap, indicate the importance you attach to each of the following five aspects by allotting points for each to total 100 in all.

Fragrance —

Color —

Shape —

Size —

Texture of lather —

Total points 100

12.2.8 Stapel scale

This scale simultaneously measures both the direction and intensity of the attitude toward the items under study. The characteristic of interest to the study is placed at the center with a numerical scale ranging, say, from +3 to -3, on either side of the item, as illustrated in the example below. This gives an idea of how close or distant the individual response to the stimulus is. Since this does not have an absolute zero point, this is an interval scale.

EXAMPLE

State how you would rate your supervisor’s abilities with respect to each of the characteristics mentioned below, by circling the appropriate number.

+3 +3 +3

+2 +2 +2

+1 +1 +1

Adopting modern technology

Product innovation Interpersonal skills

-1 -1 -1

-2 -2 -2

-3 -3 -3

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 256

Chapter

12

Research Methods for Business

248 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

12.2.9 Graphic rating scale

A graphical representation helps the respondents to indicate on this scale their answers to a particular question by placing a mark at the appropriate point on the line, as in the following example. This is an ordinal scale, though the following example might make it look like an interval scale.

EXAMPLE

On a scale of 1 to 10, how would you rate your supervisor?

− 10 Excellent

− 5 Adequate

− 1 Very bad

This scale is easy to respond to. The brief descriptions on the scale points are meant to serve as a guide in locating the rating rather than representing discrete categories. The faces scale, which depicts faces ranging from smiling to sad (illustrated in Chapter 9), is also a graphic rating scale used to obtain responses regarding people’s feelings with respect to some aspect− say, how they feel about their jobs.

12.2.10 Consensus scale

Scales can also be developed by consensus, where a panel of judges selects certain items, which in its view measure the relevant concept. The items are chosen par- ticularly based on their pertinence or relevance to the concept. Such a consensus scale is developed after the selected items have been examined and tested for their validity and reliability. One such consensus scale is the Thurstone Equal Appearing Interval Scale, where a concept is measured by a complex process followed by a panel of judges. Using a pile of cards containing several descriptions of the concept, a panel of judges offers inputs to indicate how close or not the statements are to the concept under study. The scale is then developed based on the consensus reached. However, this scale is rarely used for measuring organizational concepts because of the time necessary to develop it.

12.2.11 Other scales

There are also some advanced scaling methods such as multidimensional scal- ing, where objects, people, or both, are visually scaled, and a conjoint analysis is

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 257

Chapter

12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 249

performed. This provides a visual image of the relationships in space among the dimensions of a construct.

It should be noted that the Likert or some form of numerical scale is the one most frequently used to measure attitudes and behaviors in business research.

12.3 RANKING SCALES

As already mentioned, ranking scales are used to tap preferences between two or among more objects or items (ordinal in nature). However, such ranking may not give definitive clues to some of the answers sought. For instance, let us say there are four product lines and the manager seeks information that would help decide which product line should get the most attention. Let us also assume that 35% of the respondents choose the first product, 25% the second, and 20% choose each of products three and four as being of importance to them. The manager cannot then conclude that the first product is the most preferred, since 65% of the respondents did not choose that product! Alternative methods used are paired comparisons, forced choice, and the comparative scale, which are discussed below.

12.3.1 Paired comparison

The paired comparison scale is used when, among a small number of objects, respondents are asked to choose between two objects at a time. This helps to assess preferences. If, for instance, in the previous example, during the paired comparis- ons, respondents consistently show a preference for product one over products two, three, and four, the manager can reliably understand which product line demands his utmost attention. However, as the number of objects to be compared increases, so does the number of paired comparisons. The number of paired choices for n objects will be (n)(n - 1)/2. The greater the number of objects or stimuli, the greater the number of paired comparisons presented to the respondents, and the greater the respondent fatigue. Hence, paired comparison is a good method if the number of stimuli presented is small.

12.3.2 Forced choice

The forced choice enables respondents to rank objects relative to one another, among the alternatives provided. This is easier for the respondents, particularly if the number of choices to be ranked is limited in number.

EXAMPLE

Rank the following magazines that you would like to subscribe to in the order of preference, assigning 1 to the most preferred choice and 5 to the least preferred.

Fortune —

Playboy —

Time —

People —

Prevention —

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 258

Chapter

12

Research Methods for Business

250 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

12.3.3 Comparative scale

The comparative scale provides a benchmark or a point of reference to assess attitudes toward the current object, event, or situation under study. An example of the use of the comparative scale follows.

EXAMPLE

In a volatile financial environment, compared to stocks, how wise or useful is it to invest in Treasury bonds? Please circle the appropriate response.

More useful About the same

Less useful

1 2 3 4 5

In sum, nominal data lend themselves to dichotomous or category scales; ordinal data to any one of the ranking scales−paired comparison, forced choice, or compar- ative scales; and interval or interval-like data to the other rating scales, as seen from the various examples above. The semantic differential and the numerical scales are, strictly speaking, not interval scales, though they are often treated as such in data analysis.

Rating scales are used to measure most behavioral concepts. Ranking scales are used to make comparisons or rank the variables that have been tapped on a nominal scale.

12.4 INTERNATIONAL DIMENSIONS OF SCALING

Apart from sensitivity to operational definition of concepts in other cultures, the issue of scaling also needs to be addressed in cross-cultural research. Different cultures react differently to issues of scaling. For instance, a five-point or a seven- point scale may make no difference in the United States, but could in the responses of subjects in other countries (see Sekaran & Martin, 1982; Sekaran & Trafton, 1978). Barry (1969), for instance, found that in some countries, a seven-point scale is more sensitive than a four-point scale in eliciting unbiased responses.

Recent research has shown that people from different countries differ in both their tendency to use the extremes of the rating scale (for instance 1 and 5 or 1 and 7) and to respond in a socially desirable way (De Jong, 2006). These findings illustrate that analyzing and interpreting data that are collected in multiple countries is an extremely challenging undertaking.

12.5 GOODNESS OF MEASURES

Now that we have seen how to operationally define variables and apply different scaling techniques, it is important to make sure that the instrument that we develop to measure a particular concept is indeed accurately measuring the variable, and that, in fact, we are actually measuring the concept that we set out to measure. This ensures that in operationally defining perceptual and attitudinal variables, we have not overlooked some important dimensions and elements or included some irrelevant ones. The scales developed can often be imperfect, and errors are prone to occur in the measurement of attitudinal variables. The use of better instruments will ensure more accuracy in results, which in turn will enhance the scientific quality of the research. Hence, in some way, we need to assess the “goodness” of the measures

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 259

Chapter

12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 251

developed. That is, we need to be reasonably sure that the instruments we use in our research do indeed measure the variables they are supposed to, and that they measure them accurately.

Let us now examine how we can ensure that the measures developed are reasonably good. First, an item analysis of the responses to the questions tapping the variable is carried out, and then the reliability and validity of the measures are established, as described below.

12.5.1 Item analysis

Item analysis is carried out to see if the items in the instrument belong there or not. Each item is examined for its ability to discriminate between those subjects whose total scores are high and those with low scores. In item analysis, the means between the high-score group and the low-score group are tested to detect significant dif- ferences through the t-values. The items with a high t-value (test which is able to identify the highly discriminating items in the instrument) are then included in the instrument. Thereafter, tests for the reliability of the instrument are carried out and the validity of the measure is established.

Very briefly, reliability is a test of how consistently a measuring instrument measures whatever concept it is measuring. Validity is a test of how well an instrument that is developed measures the particular concept it is intended to measure. In other words, validity is concerned with whether we measure the right concept, and reliability with stability and consistency of measurement. Validity and reliability of the measure attest to the scientific rigor that has gone into the research study. These two criteria will now be discussed. The various forms of reliability and validity are depicted in Figure 12.1.

Figure 12.1 Testing goodness of measures: forms of reliability and validity

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 260

Chapter

12

Research Methods for Business

252 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

12.5.2 Validity

In Chapter 10 we examined the terms internal validity and external validity in the context of experimental designs. That is, we will be concerned about the issue of the authenticity of the cause-and-effect relationships (internal validity), and their generalizability to the external environment (external validity). For now, we are going to examine the validity of the measuring instrument itself. That is, when we ask a set of questions (i.e., develop a measuring instrument) with the hope that we are tapping the concept, how can we be reasonably certain that we are indeed measuring the concept we set out to measure and not something else? This can be determined by applying certain validity tests.

Several types of validity test are used to test the goodness of measures and writers use different terms to denote them. For the sake of clarity, we may group validity tests under three broad headings: content validity, criterion-related validity, and construct validity.

Content validity

Content validity ensures that the measure includes an adequate and representative set of items that tap the concept. The more the scale items represent the domain or universe of the concept being measured, the greater the content validity. To put it differently, content validity is a function of how well the dimensions and elements of a concept have been delineated.

A panel of judges can attest to the content validity of the instrument. Kidder and Judd (1986) cite the example where a test designed to measure degrees of speech impairment can be considered as having validity if it is so evaluated by a group of expert judges (i.e., professional speech therapists).

Face validity is considered by some a basic and minimum index of content validity. Face validity indicates that the items that are intended to measure a concept, do, on the face of it, look like they measure the concept. Some researchers do not see fit to treat face validity as a valid component of content validity.

Criterion-related validity

Criterion-related validity is established when the measure differentiates individuals on a criterion it is expected to predict. This can be done by establishing concurrent validity or predictive validity, as explained below.

Concurrent validity is established when the scale discriminates individuals who are known to be different; that is, they should score differently on the instrument, as in the example that follows.

EXAMPLE

If a measure of work ethic is developed and administered to a group of wel- fare recipients, the scale should differentiate those who are enthusiastic about accepting a job and glad of an opportunity to be off welfare, from those who do not want to work, even when offered a job. Obviously, those with high work ethic values do not want to be on welfare and yearn for employment to be on their own. Those who are low on work ethic values, on the other hand, might exploit the opportunity to survive on welfare for as long as possible, deeming work to be drudgery. If both types of individual have the same score on the

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 261

Chapter

12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 253

work ethic scale, then the test is not a measure of work ethic, but of something else.

Predictive validity indicates the ability of the measuring instrument to differentiate among individuals with reference to a future criterion.

EXAMPLE

If an aptitude or ability test administered to employees at the time of recruit- ment is to differentiate individuals on the basis of their future job performance, then those who score low on the test should be poor performers and those with high scores good performers.

Construct validity

Construct validity testifies to how well the results obtained from the use of the measure fit the theories around which the test is designed. This is assessed through convergent and discriminant validity, which are explained below.

Convergent validity is established when the scores obtained with two different instruments measuring the same concept are highly correlated.

Discriminant validity is established when, based on theory, two variables are pre- dicted to be uncorrelated, and the scores obtained by measuring them are indeed empirically found to be so. Validity can thus be established in different ways. Pub- lished measures for various concepts usually report the kinds of validity that have been established for the instrument, so that the user or reader can judge the “good- ness” of the measure. Table 12.2 summarizes the kinds of validity discussed here.

Table 12.2 Types of validity

Validity Description

Content validity Does the measure adequately measure the concept?

Face validity Do “experts” validate that the instrument measures what its name suggests it measures?

Criterion-related validity

Does the measure differentiate in a manner that helps to predict a criterion variable?

Concurrent validity Does the measure differentiate in a manner that helps to predict a criterion variable currently?

Predictive validity Does the measure differentiate individuals in a manner that helps predict a future criterion?

Construct validity Does the instrument tap the concept as theorized?

Convergent validity Do two instruments measuring the concept correlate highly?

Discriminant validity

Does the measure have a low correlation with a variable that is supposed to be unrelated to this variable?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 262

Chapter

12

Research Methods for Business

254 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Some of the ways in which the above forms of validity can be established are through the following:

1. Correlational analysis (as in the case of establishing concurrent and predictive validity or convergent and discriminant validity).

2. Factor analysis, a multivariate technique that confirms the dimensions of the concept that have been operationally defined, as well as indicating which of the items are most appropriate for each dimension (establishing construct validity).

3. The multitrait, multimethod matrix of correlations derived from measuring concepts by different forms and different methods, additionally establishing the robustness of the measure.

In sum, the goodness of measures is established through the different kinds of valid- ity and reliability depicted in Figure 12.1. The results of any research can only be as good as the measures that tap the concepts in the theoretical framework. We need to use well-validated and reliable measures to ensure that our research is scientific. Fortunately, measures have been developed for many important concepts in busi- ness research and their psychometric properties (i.e., the reliability and validity) established by the developers. Thus, researchers can use the instruments already reputed to be “good,” rather than laboriously developing their own measures. When using these measures, however, researchers should cite the source (i.e., the author and reference) so that the reader can seek more information if necessary.

It is not unusual for two or more equally good measures to be developed for the same concept. For example, there are several different instruments for measuring the concept of “job satisfaction”. One of the most frequently used scales for the purpose, however, is the Job Descriptive Index (JDI) developed by Smith, Kendall, and Hulin (1969). When more than one scale exists for any variable, it is preferable to use the measure that has better reliability and validity, and is also more frequently used.

At times, we may also have to adapt an established measure to suit the setting. For example, a scale that is used to measure job performance, job characteristics, or job satisfaction in the manufacturing industry may have to be modified slightly to suit a utility company or a health care organization. The work environment in each case is different and the wordings in the instrument may have to be suitably adapted. However, in doing this, we are tampering with an established scale, and it is advisable to test it for the adequacy of the validity and reliability afresh.

A sample of a few measures used to tap some frequently researched concepts in the management and marketing areas is provided in the appendix to this chapter.

Finally, it is important to note that validity is a necessary but not sufficient condition of the test of goodness of a measure. A measure should not only be valid but also reliable. A measure is reliable if it provides consistent results. We will now discuss the concept of reliability.

12.5.3 Reliability

The reliability of a measure indicates the extent to which it is without bias (error free) and hence ensures consistent measurement across time and across the various items in the instrument. In other words, the reliability of a measure is an indication of the stability and consistency with which the instrument measures the concept and helps to assess the “goodness” of a measure.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 263

Chapter

12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 255

Stability of measures

The ability of a measure to remain the same over time − despite uncontrollable testing conditions or the state of the respondents themselves − is indicative of its stability and low vulnerability to changes in the situation. This attests to its “goodness” because the concept is stably measured, no matter when it is done. Two tests of stability are test−retest reliability and parallel-form reliability.

Test−retest reliability

The reliability coefficient obtained by repetition of the same measure on a second occasion is called the test−retest reliability. That is, when a questionnaire contain- ing some items that are supposed to measure a concept is administered to a set of respondents, now and again to the same respondents, say several weeks to six months later, then the correlation between the scores obtained at the two different times from one and the same set of respondents is called the test−retest coefficient. The higher it is, the better the test−retest reliability and, consequently, the stability of the measure across time.

Parallel-form reliability

When responses on two comparable sets of measures tapping the same construct are highly correlated, we have parallel-form reliability. Both forms have similar items and the same response format, the only changes being the wording and the order or sequence of the questions. What we try to establish here is the error variability resulting from wording and ordering of the questions. If two such comparable forms are highly correlated (say 8 and above), we may be fairly certain that the measures are reasonably reliable, with minimal error variance caused by wording, ordering, or other factors.

Internal consistency of measures

The internal consistency of measures is indicative of the homogeneity of the items in the measure that taps the construct. In other words, the items should “hang together as a set,” and be capable of independently measuring the same concept so that the respondents attach the same overall meaning to each of the items. This can be seen by examining whether the items and the subsets of items in the measuring instrument are correlated highly. Consistency can be examined through the interitem consistency reliability and split-half reliability tests.

Interitem consistency reliability

The interitem consistency reliability is a test of the consistency of respondents’ answers to all the items in a measure. To the degree that items are independent meas- ures of the same concept, they will be correlated with one another. The most popular test of interitem consistency reliability is Cronbach’s coefficient alpha (Cronbach, 1946), which is used for multipoint-scaled items, and the Kuder−Richardson for- mulas (Kuder & Richardson, 1937), used for dichotomous items. The higher the coefficients, the better the measuring instrument.

Split-half reliability

Split-half reliability reflects the correlations between two halves of an instrument. The estimates will vary depending on how the items in the measure are split into two halves. Split-half reliabilities may be higher than Cronbach’s alpha only in the circumstance of there being more than one underlying response dimension tapped

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 264

Chapter

12

Research Methods for Business

256 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

by the measure and when certain other conditions are met as well (for complete details, refer to Campbell, 1976). Hence, in almost all cases, Cronbach’s alpha can be considered a perfectly adequate index of the inter-item consistency reliability.

12.6 REFLECTIVE VERSUS FORMATIVE MEASUREMENT SCALES

At this moment, it is important to come back to the contention that the items of a multi-item measure should hang together as a set and be capable of independently measuring the same concept (it may give you a headache right now, but it most certainly will save you an even bigger headache in your future career as a researcher, so bear with us). The fact is that the items that measure a concept should not always hang together: this is only true for reflective, but not for formative, scales.

12.6.1 What is a reflective scale?

In a refl ective scale, the items (all of them!) are expected to correlate. Unlike the items used in a formative scale, discussed next, each item in a reflective scale is assumed to share a common basis (the underlying construct of interest). Hence, an increase in the value of the construct will translate into an increase in the value for all the items representing the construct. An example of a reflective scale is the Attitude Toward the Offer scale developed by Burton and Lichtenstein (1988). This is a six-item, nine-point summated ratings scale measuring a person’s atti- tude about a certain product offered at a certain price. The scale is composed of five bipolar adjectives (unfavorable−favorable; bad−good; harmful−beneficial; unattractive−attractive; poor−excellent) and one disagree−agree item (introduced by the stem: “I like this deal”), measured on a nine-point graphic scale. Indeed, we would expect that a more favorable attitude toward the offer would translate into an increase in the value of all the six items representing attitude toward the offer. Hence, we would expect all the six items to correlate. Note that the direction of “causality” is from the construct to the items.

12.6.2 What is a formative scale and why do the items of a formative scale not necessarily hang together?

A formative scale is used when a construct is viewed as an explanatory combination of its indicators (Fornell & Bookstein, 1982; Fornell, 1987). Take the Job Description Index (Smith, Kendall & Hulin, 1969), a composite measure purporting to evaluate job satisfaction. This measure includes five dimensions: type of work (18 items), opportunities for promotion (9 items), satisfaction with supervision (18 items), coworkers (18 items), and pay (9 items). The five dimensions are seen as the five defining characteristics of job satisfaction.

The five dimensions are translated into 72 observable and measureable elements such as “Good opportunity for advancement”, “Regular promotions,” “Fairly good chance for promotion,” “Income adequate for normal expenses,” “Highly paid,” and “Gives sense of accomplishment.” The idea is that we would expect the first three items (“Good opportunity for advancement,” “Regular promotions,” and “Fairly good chance for promotion”) to be correlated (after all, they all aim to measure one particular dimension of job satisfaction, i.e., “opportunities for promotion”). However, these items do not necessarily correlate with the items that measure “Pay” (a second dimension), such as “Income adequate for normal expenses” and “Highly paid,” because the dimension “Good opportunities for advancement” is not necessarily related to the dimension “Pay.” Indeed, a first worker may have a very good salary but no opportunities for promotion, a second worker may have very

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 265

Chapter

12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 257

good opportunities for promotion but a very poor salary, and a third worker may have a very good salary and very good opportunities for promotion.

Likewise, we would expect the items “Income adequate for normal expenses” and “Highly paid” to be correlated to each other (since both items measure pay), but we would not necessarily expect these items to correlate with the item “Gives sense of accomplishment” (because this last item does not measure pay but another dimension of the Job Description Index).

In summary, the Job Description Index includes five dimensions and 72 items. These 72 items are not necessarily related to each other, because the five dimensions they represent do not necessarily hang together.

A scale that contains items that are not necessarily related is called a formative scale. We have already explained that formative scales are used when a construct (such as job satisfaction) is viewed as an explanatory combination of its indicators (promotions, pay, satisfaction with supervision, coworkers, and work); that is, when a change in any one of the indicators (dimensions) is expected to change the score of the overall construct, regardless of the value of the other indicators (dimensions). The Job Description Index is formative in nature, since an increase in the value of one of its indicators, such as “opportunities for promotion,” is expected to translate into a higher score for job satisfaction, regardless of the value of the other indicators. Thus, the Job Description Index conceptualizes job satisfaction as the total weighted score across the 72 job satisfaction items, where each item corresponds to a specific independent dimension of job satisfaction.

A good (that is, a valid) formative scale is one that represents the entire domain of the construct. This means that a valid scale should represent all the relevant aspects of the construct of interest, even if these aspects do not necessarily correlate.

While it makes sense to test the interitem consistency of reflective scales, it does not make sense to test the interitem consistency of formative scales. The reason is that we do not expect the items in a formative scale to be homogeneous; in other words, we do not expect all the items to correlate. For this reason, tests of the consistency of respondents’ answers to the items of a formative measure do not tell us anything about the quality of our measuring instrument. Note that there are other methods to assess the goodness of formative scales (see, for instance, Jarvis, MacKenzie & Podsakoff, 2003).

SUMMARY

Measurement is the assignment of numbers or other symbols to characteristics (or attributes) of objects according to a prespecified set of rules. Numbers allow us to perform statistical analysis of the data, to test hypotheses, and to effectively communicate research results. To be able to assign numbers to attributes of objects we need a scale. A scale is a tool or mechanism by which individuals are distinguished in terms of how they differ from one another on the variables of interest to our study. In this chapter, we examined the four types of scales − nominal, ordinal, interval, and ratio. We also saw what kinds of attitude rating scales and ranking scales can be used in developing instruments after a concept has been operationally defined (or operationalized). We also discussed how the goodness of measures is established by means of item analysis, and reliability and validity tests. We noted that the Likert scale and other interval-type scales, such as the numerical scale, are extensively used in business research since they lend themselves to more sophisticated data analysis. Finally, we discussed the goodness of measures in terms of reliability and validity and the various ways in which these can be established.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 266

Chapter

12

Research Methods for Business

258 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Knowledge of the different scales and scaling techniques helps managers to admin- ister short surveys by designing questions that use ranking or rating scales, as appropriate. Awareness of the fact that measures are already available for many organizational concepts further facilitates mini-exploratory surveys by managers.

In the next chapter, we will address sampling and sampling designs.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

Describe the four types of scales.

How is the interval scale more sophisticated than the nominal and ordinal scales?

Why is the ratio scale considered to be the most powerful of the four scales?

Briefly describe the difference between attitude rating scales and ranking scales and indicate when the two are used.

Why is it important to establish the “goodness” of measures and how is this done?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 267

Chapter

12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 259

Describe the difference between formative and reflective scales.

Explain why it does not make sense to assess the internal consistency of a formative scale.

“The job involvement measure described in the appendix is reflective in nature.” Comment on this statement.

Construct a semantic differential scale to assess the properties of a particular brand of coffee or tea.

Whenever possible, it is advisable to use instruments that have already been developed and repeatedly used in published studies, rather than developing our own instruments for our studies. Do you agree? Discuss the reasons for your answer.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 268

Chapter

12

Research Methods for Business

260 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

“A valid instrument is always reliable, but a reliable instrument may not always be valid.” Comment on this statement.

Now do Exercises 12.5 and 12.6.

Exercise 12.5

Develop and name the type of measuring instrument you would use to tap the following:

a. Which brands of beer are consumed by how many individuals?

b. Among the three types of exams −multiple choice, essay type, and a mix of both−which is the one preferred most by students?

c. To what extent do individuals agree with your definition of accounting principles?

d. How much people like an existing organizational policy.

e. The age of employees in an organization.

f. The number of employees in each of the 20 departments of a company.

Exercise 12.6

“The SERVQUAL-scale described in the appendix is formative in nature.” Com- ment on this statement. Explain why it does not make sense to assess the interitem consistency of this scale.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 269

Chapter

12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 261

12.7 Appendix: Examples of some measures

Some of the measures used in business research can be found in the Marketing Scales Handbook by Bruner and Hensel. The latest volume (Volume 5, with K. E. James) was published in 2009 and contains reviews of over 700 scales used in mar- keting studies. Other useful (but somewhat outdated) sources are the Handbook of Organizational Measurement by Price (1997) and the Michigan Organizational Assessment Package published by the Institute of Survey Research in Ann Arbor, Michigan. Several measures can also be seen in Psychological Measurement Year- books and in other published books. A sample of measures from the accounting, finance, management, and marketing areas is provided in this appendix.

12.7.1 Measures from behavioral finance research

Below is a sample of scales used to measure variables related to behavioral finance research.

Information overload

Information Overload Measure (on a scale of 1 to 6, from strongly disagree to strongly agree)

1. There were too many different options to consider. _____

2. This decision required a great deal of thought. _____

3. This was a difficult decision. _____

4. I found this decision to be overwhelming. _____

5. It was difficult to comprehend all of the information available to me.

_____

6. This task was stressful. _____

7. It was a relief to make a decision. _____

Source: Julie R. Agnew & Lisa R. Szykman (2010) Asset allocation and information overload: The influence of information display, asset choice, and investor experi- ence. Journal of Behavioral Finance, 6(2), 57−70. Reproduced with permission.

Orientation towards finance: interest in financial information

Interest in Financial Information Measure (on a scale of 1 to 5, from strongly disagree to strongly agree)

I never read the financial pages of my newspaper (reverse coding). _____

I try to keep track of general economic trends. _____

I am not attracted by the financial part of life (reverse coding). _____

I regularly look for interesting investment opportunities for my money. _____

I am interested in the evolution of currency rates. _____

Source: E. Loix, R. Pepermans, C. Mentens, M. Goedee & M. Jegers (2005) Orienta- tion toward finances: Development of a measurement scale. Journal of Behavioral Finance, 6(4), 192−201. Reproduced with permission.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 270

Chapter

12

Research Methods for Business

262 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

12.7.2 Measures from management accounting research

Below is a sample of scales used to measure variables related to management accounting research.

Formality of performance evalu- ation:

My superior does not explicitly document work objectives in writing.

1 2 3 4 5 My superior explicitly docu- ments work objectives in writ- ing.

When judging my performance, my superior uses his/her per- sonal judgment of my perform- ance.

1 2 3 4 5 When judging my performance, my superior relies on objective information from the informa- tion system.

My pay is based on my super- ior’s personal judgment of my performance.

1 2 3 4 5 My pay is based on objective information from the informa- tion system.

Source: F. Hartmann & S. Slapničar (2012) The perceived fairness of performance evaluation: The role of uncertainty. Management Accounting Research, 23(1), 17−33. Reproduced with permission.

Organizational performance (measured on a scale of 1 to 5, from strongly disagree to strongly agree):

Your company performance on return on Investment is better than your competitors.

_____

Your company performance on gross margin is better than your com- petitors.

_____

Your company performance on Customer satisfaction is better than your competitor.

_____

Your company performance on quality of product/service is better than your competitors.

_____

Your company performance on employee productivity is better than your competitors.

_____

Source: C. Lee & H. Yang (2011). Organization structure, competition and perform- ance measurement systems and their joint effects on performance. Management Accounting Research, 22(2), 84−104. Reproduced with permission.

12.7.3 Measures from management research

Below is a sample of scales used to measure variables related to management research.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 271

Chapter

12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 263

Job involvement

Strongly Disagree Disagree

Neither Agree nor Disagree Agree

Strongly Agree

1. My job means a lot more to me than just money.

1 2 3 4 5

2. The major satisfaction in my life comes from my job.

1 2 3 4 5

3. I am really interested in my work.

1 2 3 4 5

4. I would prob- ably keep work- ing even if I didn’t need the money.

1 2 3 4 5

5. The most important things that happen to me involve my work.

1 2 3 4 5

6. I will stay overtime to fin- ish a job, even if I am not paid for it.

1 2 3 4 5

7. For me, the first few hours at work really fly by.

1 2 3 4 5

8. I actually enjoy perform- ing the daily activities that make up my job.

1 2 3 4 5

9. I look forward to coming to work each day.

1 2 3 4 5

Source: J. K. White and R. A. Ruh (1973). Effects of personal values on the relationship between participation and job attitudes. Administrative Science Quarterly, 18(4), p. 509. Reproduced with permission.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 272

Chapter

12

Research Methods for Business

264 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Participation in decision making

Not at all Very little Somewhat

To a moderate

extent To a large

extent

1. In general, how much say or influence do you have on how you perform your job?

1 2 3 4 5

2. To what extent are you able to decide how to do your job?

1 2 3 4 5

3. In general, how much say or influence do you have on what goes on in your work group?

1 2 3 4 5

4. In general, how much say or influence do you have on decisions that affect your job?

1 2 3 4 5

5. My superiors are receptive and listen to my ideas and suggestions.

1 2 3 4 5

Source: J. K. White and R. A. Ruh (1973) Effects of personal values on the relationship between participation and job attitudes. Administrative Science Quarterly, 18(4), 509. Reproduced with permission.

Career salience

Strongly Disagree Disagree

Slightly Disagree Neutral

Slightly Agree Agree

Strongly Agree

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1 My career choice is a good occupational decision for me.

_____

2 My career enables me to make significant contributions to society.

_____

3 The career I am in fits me and reflects my personality.

_____

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 273

Chapter

12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 265

4 My education and training are not tailored for this career.

_____

5 I don’t intend changing careers. _____

6 All the planning and thought I gave to pursu- ing this career are a waste.

_____

7 My career is an integral part of my life. _____

Source: U. U. Sekaran (1986) Dual-Career Families: Contemporary Organizational and Counseling Issues. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. Reproduced with permission.

12.7.4 Measures from marketing research

Below is a sample of some scales used to measure commonly researched concepts in marketing. Bruner and Hensel have done extensive work since 1992 in documenting and detailing several scores of scales in marketing research. For each scale examined, they have provided the following information:

1. Scale description

2. Scale origin

3. Samples in which the scale was used

4. Reliability of the scale

5. Validity of the scale

6. How the scale was administered

7. Major findings of the studies using the scale.

The interested student should refer to the five volumes of Marketing Scales Hand- book by G. C. Bruner and P. J. Hensel (Volume 1 and 2); G. C. Bruner, P. J. Hensel, and K. E. James published by the American Marketing Association (Volume 1, 2, and 3) and Thomson (Volume 4 and 5). The first volume covers scales used in articles pub- lished in the 1980s, and volume two covers scales used in articles published from 1990 to 1993. The third volume covers the period from 1994 to 1997. The fourth volume covers marketing scales that were reported in articles published from 1998 to 2001. The fifth volume covers the period from 2001 to 2005.

Complaint success likelihood

The likelihood of the complaint being successful (5-point scale with end-points labeled “very unlikely” and “very likely”):

At the moment of the service failure, how likely was it that the service provider would . . .

. . . take appropriate action to take care of your problem if you reported the incident?

_____

. . . solve your problem and give better service to you in the future if you reported the incident?

_____

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 274

Chapter

12

Research Methods for Business

266 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

. . . be more careful in the future and everyone would benefit if you reported the incident.

_____

Source: R. Bougie, R. Pieters, and M. Zeelenberg (2003) Angry customers don’t come back, they get back: The experience and behavioral implications of anger and dis- satisfaction in services. Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, 31, 377−393. Reproduced with permission.

SERVQUAL: A multidimensional scale to capture customer perceptions and expectations of service quality

Reliability items:

1. When XYZ Company promises to do something by a certain time, it does so.

2. When you have a problem, XYZ Company shows a sincere interest in solving it.

3. XYZ Company performs the service right the first time.

4. XYZ Company provides its services at the time it promises to do so.

5. XYZ Company keeps customers informed about when services will be per- formed.

Responsiveness items:

1. Employees in XYZ Company give you prompt service.

2. Employees in XYZ Company are always willing to help you.

3. Employees in XYZ Company are never too busy to respond to your request.

Assurance items:

1. The behavior of employees in XYZ Company instills confidence in you.

2. You feel safe in your transactions with XYZ Company.

3. Employees in XYZ Company are consistently courteous with you.

4. Employees in XYZ Company have the knowledge to answer your questions.

Empathy items:

1. XYZ Company gives you individual attention.

2. XYZ Company has employees who give you individual attention.

3. XYZ Company has your best interests at heart.

4. Employees of XYZ Company understand your specific needs.

Tangibles items:

1. XYZ Company has modern-looking equipment.

2. XYZ Company’s physical facilities are visually appealing.

3. XYZ Company’s employees appear neat.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 275

Chapter

12

Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 267

4. Materials associated with the service (such as pamphlets or statements) are visually appealing at XYZ Company.

5. XYZ Company has convenient business hours.

Source: A. Parasuraman, Valarie A. Zeithaml, and Leonard L. Berry (1988) SERVQUAL: A multi-item scale for measuring consumer perceptions of service quality. Journal of Retailing 64(1) (Spring). Reproduced with permission.

Role ambiguity (salesperson)

Very False Very True

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1. I feel certain about how much authority I have in my selling position. __

2. I have clearly planned goals for my selling job. __

3. I am sure I divide my time properly while performing my selling tasks. __

4. I know my responsibilities in my selling position. __

5. I know exactly what is expected of me in my selling position. __

6. I receive lucid explanations of what I have to do in my sales job. __

Source: Modified from J. R. Rizzo, R. J. House, and S. L. Lirtzman (1970) Role conflict and role ambiguity in complex organizations. Administrative Science Quarterly, 15, 156

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 276

Chapter

13

268 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Chapter 13

Sampling

Topics discussed:

� Population, element, sample, sampling unit, and subject

� Parameters

� Reasons for sampling

� Representativeness of samples

� Normality of distributions

� The sampling process

� Probability sampling

� Nonprobability sampling

� Examples of when certain sampling designs would be appropriate

� Sampling in cross-cultural research

� Issues of precision and confi dence in determining sample size

� Sample data, precision, and confidence in estimation

� Trade-off between confi dence and precision

� Sample data and hypothesis testing

� Determining the sample size

� Importance of sampling design and sample size

� Efficiency in sampling

� Sampling as related to qualitative studies

� Managerial implications

Chapter objectives

After completing Chapter 13 you should be able to:

1. Define sampling, sample, population, element, sampling unit, and subject.

2. Describe and discuss the sampling process.

3. Describe and discuss the different sampling designs.

4. Identify the use of appropriate sampling designs for different research purposes.

5. Explain why sample data are used to test hypotheses.

6. Discuss precision and confidence.

7. Estimate sample size.

8. Discuss the factors to be taken into consideration for determining sample size.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 277

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 269

9. Discuss efficiency in sampling.

10. Discuss generalizability in the context of sampling designs.

11. Apply the material learned in this chapter to class assignments and projects.

Surveys are useful and powerful in finding answers to research questions through data collection and subsequent analyses, but they can do more harm than good if the population is not correctly targeted. That is, if data are not collected from the people, events, or objects that can provide the correct answers to solve the problem, the survey will be in vain. The process of selecting the right individuals, objects, or events as representatives for the entire population is known as sampling, which we will examine in some detail in this chapter (see shaded portion in Figure 13.1).

Figure 13.1 The research process and where this chapter fits in

13.1 POPULATION, ELEMENT, SAMPLE, SAMPLING UNIT, AND SUBJECT

In learning how representative data (i.e., as reflected in the universe) can be collec- ted, a few terms, as described below, have first to be understood.

13.1.1 Population

The population refers to the entire group of people, events, or things of interest that the researcher wishes to investigate. It is the group of people, events, or things of interest for which the researcher wants to make inferences (based on sample statistics). For instance, if the CEO of a computer firm wants to know the kinds of advertising strategies adopted by computer firms in the Silicon Valley, then all computer firms situated there will be the population. If an organizational consultant is interested in studying the effects of a four-day work week on the white-collar workers in a telephone company in Ireland, then all white-collar workers in that company will make up the population. If regulators want to know how patients in nursing homes run by a company in France are cared for, then all the patients in all the nursing homes run by them will form the population. If, however, the regulators

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 278

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

270 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

are interested only in one particular nursing home run by that company, then only the patients in that specific nursing home will form the population.

13.1.2 Element

An element is a single member of the population. If 1000 blue-collar workers in a particular organization happen to be the population of interest to a researcher, each blue-collar worker therein is an element. If 500 pieces of machinery are to be approved after inspecting a few, there will be 500 elements in this population. Incidentally, the census is a count of all elements in the human population.

13.1.3 Sample

A sample is a subset of the population. It comprises some members selected from it. In other words, some, but not all, elements of the population form the sample. If 200 members are drawn from a population of 1000 blue-collar workers, these 200 members form the sample for the study. That is, from a study of these 200 members, the researcher will draw conclusions about the entire population of 1000 blue-collar workers. Likewise, if there are 145 in-patients in a hospital and 40 of them are to be surveyed by the hospital administrator to assess their level of satisfaction with the treatment received, then these 40 members will be the sample.

A sample is thus a subgroup or subset of the population. By studying the sample, the researcher should be able to draw conclusions that are generalizable to the population of interest.

13.1.4 Sampling unit

The sampling unit is the element or set of elements that is available for selection in some stage of the sampling process. Examples of sampling units in a multistage sample are city blocks, households, and individuals within the households.

13.1.5 Subject

A subject is a single member of the sample, just as an element is a single member of the population. If 200 members from the total population of 1000 blue-collar workers form the sample for the study, then each blue-collar worker in the sample is a subject. As another example, if a sample of 50 machines from a total of 500 machines is to be inspected, then every one of the 50 machines is a subject, just as every single machine in the total population of 500 machines is an element.

13.2 PARAMETERS

The characteristics of the population such as µ (the population mean), σ (the pop- ulation standard deviation), and σ2 (the population variance) are referred to as its parameters. The central tendencies, the dispersions, and other statistics in the sample of interest to the research are treated as approximations of the central tend- encies, dispersions, and other parameters of the population. As such, all conclusions drawn about the sample under study are generalized to the population. In other words, the sample statistics− X (the sample mean), S (the standard deviation), and S2 (the variation in the sample) − are used as estimates of the population para- meters µ, σ, and σ2. Figure 13.2 shows the relationship between the sample and the population.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 279

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 271

Figure 13.2 The relationship between sample and population

13.3 REASONS FOR SAMPLING

The reasons for using a sample, rather than collecting data from the entire popu- lation, are self-evident. In research investigations involving several hundreds and even thousands of elements, it would be practically impossible to collect data from, or test, or examine every element. Even if it were possible, it would be prohibitive in terms of time, cost, and other human resources. Study of a sample rather than the entire population is also sometimes likely to produce more reliable results. This is mostly because fatigue is reduced and fewer errors therefore result in collecting data, especially when a large number of elements is involved. In a few cases, it would also be impossible to use the entire population to gain knowledge about, or test, something. Consider, for instance, the case of electric light bulbs. In testing the life of bulbs, if we were to burn every single bulb produced, there would be none left to sell! This is known as destructive sampling.

13.4 REPRESENTATIVENESS OF SAMPLES

The need to choose the right sample for a research investigation cannot be overem- phasized. We know that rarely will the sample be an exact replica of the population from which it is drawn. For instance, very few sample means (X) are likely to be exactly equal to the population means (µ). Nor is the standard deviation of the sample (S) likely to be the same as the standard deviation of the population (σ). However, if we choose the sample in a scientific way, we can be reasonably sure that the sample statistic (e.g., X, S, or S2) is fairly close to the population parameter (i.e., µ, σ, or σ2). To put it differently, it is possible to choose the sample in such a way that it is representative of the population. There is always a slight probability, however, that sample values might fall outside the population parameters.

13.5 NORMALITY OF DISTRIBUTIONS

Attributes or characteristics of the population are generally normally distributed. For instance, when attributes such as height and weight are considered, most people will be clustered around the mean, leaving only a small number at the extremes who are either very tall or very short, very heavy or very light, and so on, as indicated in Figure 13.3. If we are to estimate the population characteristics from those rep- resented in a sample with reasonable accuracy, the sample has to be so chosen that the distribution of the characteristics of interest follows the same pattern of normal distribution in the sample as it does in the population. From the central limit theorem, we know that the sampling distribution of the sample mean is nor- mally distributed. As the sample size n increases, the means of the random samples taken from practically any population approach a normal distribution with mean µ and standard deviation σ. In sum, irrespective of whether or not the attributes

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 280

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

272 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

of the population are normally distributed, if we take a sufficiently large number of samples and choose them with care, we will have a sampling distribution of the means that has normality. This is the reason why two important issues in sampling are the sample size (n) and the sampling design, as discussed later.

Figure 13.3 Normal distribution in a population

When the properties of the population are not overrepresented or underrepresented in the sample, we have a representative sample. When a sample consists of elements in the population that have extremely high values on the variable we are studying, the sample mean X will be far higher than the population mean µ. If, in contrast, the sample subjects consist of elements in the population with extremely low values on the variable of interest, the sample mean will be much lower than the true population mean µ. If our sampling design and sample size are right, however, the sample mean X will be within close range of the true population mean µ. Thus, through appropriate sampling design, we can ensure that the sample subjects are not chosen from the extremes, but are truly representative of the properties of the population. The more representative of the population the sample is, the more generalizable are the findings of the research. Recall that generalizability is one of the hallmarks of scientific research, as we saw in Chapter 2.

While, in view of our concern about generalizability, we may be particular about choosing representative samples for most research, some cases may not call for such regard to generalizability. For instance, at the exploratory stages of fact finding, we may be interested only in “getting a handle” on the situation, and therefore limit the interview to only the most conveniently available people. The same is true when time is of the essence, and urgency in getting information overrides a high level of accuracy in terms of priority. For instance, a film agency might want to find out quickly the impact on the viewers of a newly released film shown the previous evening. The interviewer might question the first 20 people leaving the theater after seeing the film and obtain their reactions. On the basis of their replies, she may form an opinion as to the likely success of the film. As another example, a restaurant manager might want to find the reactions of customers to a new item added to the menu to determine whether or not it has been a popular and worth while addition. For this purpose, the first 15 people who chose the special item might be interviewed, and their reactions obtained. In such cases, having instant information may be more gainful than obtaining the most representative facts. It should, however, be noted that the results of such convenient samples are not reliable and can never be generalized to the population.

13.6 THE SAMPLING PROCESS

Sampling is the process of selecting a sufficient number of the right elements from the population, so that a study of the sample and an understanding of its properties or characteristics make it possible for us to generalize such properties or characteristics to the population elements. The major steps in sampling include:

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 281

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 273

1. Define the population.

2. Determine the sample frame.

3. Determine the sampling design.

4. Determine the appropriate sample size.

5. Execute the sampling process.

13.6.1 Defining the population

Sampling begins with precisely defining the target population. The target popu- lation must be defined in terms of elements, geographical boundaries, and time. For instance, for a banker interested in saving habits of blue-collar workers in the mining industry in the United States, the target population might be all blue-collar workers in that industry throughout the country. For an advertising agency inter- ested in reading habits of elderly people, the target population might be the German population aged 50 and over. These examples illustrate that the research objective and the scope of the study play a crucial role in defining the target population.

13.6.2 Determining the sample frame

The sampling frame is a (physical) representation of all the elements in the popu- lation from which the sample is drawn. The payroll of an organization would serve as the sampling frame if its members are to be studied. Likewise, the university registry containing a listing of all students, faculty, administrators, and support staff in the university during a particular academic year or semester could serve as the sampling frame for a study of the university population. A roster of class students could be the sampling frame for the study of students in a class. The telephone directory is also frequently used as a sampling frame for some types of study, even though it has an inherent bias inasmuch as some numbers are unlisted and certain others may have become obsolete.

Although the sampling frame is useful in providing a listing of each element in the population, it may not always be a current, up-to-date document. For instance, the names of members who have recently left the organization or dropped out of the university, as well as members who have only recently joined the organization or the university may not appear in the organization’s payroll or the university registers on a given day. The most recently installed or disconnected telephones will not, likewise, be included in the current telephone directory. Hence, though the sampling frame may be available in many cases, it may not always be entirely correct or complete. When the sampling frame does not exactly match the population coverage error occurs. In some cases, the researcher might recognize this problem and not be too concerned about it, because the discrepancy between the target population and the sampling frame is small enough to ignore. However, in most cases, the researcher should deal with this error by either redefining the target population in terms of the sampling frame, screening the respondents with respect to important characteristics to ensure that they meet the criteria for the target population, or adjusting the collected data by a weighting scheme to counterbalance the coverage error.

13.6.3 Determining the sampling design

There are two major types of sampling design: probability and nonprobability sampling. In probability sampling, the elements in the population have some known, nonzero chance or probability of being selected as sample subjects. In

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 282

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

274 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

nonprobability sampling, the elements do not have a known or predetermined chance of being selected as subjects. Probability sampling designs are used when the representativeness of the sample is of importance in the interests of wider gener- alizability. When time or other factors, rather than generalizability, become critical, nonprobability sampling is generally used. Each of these two major designs has different sampling strategies. Depending on the extent of generalizability desired, the demands of time and other resources, and the purpose of the study, different types of probability and nonprobability sampling design are chosen.

The choice of the sampling procedure is a very important one. Therefore, this chapter will elaborately discuss the different types of sampling designs, bearing in mind the following points in the determination of the choice:

• What is the relevant target population of focus to the study?

• What exactly are the parameters we are interested in investigating?

• What kind of a sampling frame is available?

• What costs are attached to the sampling design?

• How much time is available to collect the data from the sample?

13.6.4 Determining the sample size

Is a sample size of 40 large enough? Or do you need a sample size of 75, 180, 384, or 500? Is a large sample better than a small sample; that is, is it more representative? The decision about how large the sample size should be can be a very difficult one. We can summarize the factors affecting decisions on sample size as:

1. The research objective.

2. The extent of precision desired (the confidence interval).

3. The acceptable risk in predicting that level of precision (confidence level).

4. The amount of variability in the population itself.

5. The cost and time constraints.

6. In some cases, the size of the population itself.

Thus, how large your sample should be is a function of these six factors. We will have more to say about sample size later on in this chapter, after we have discussed sampling designs.

13.6.5 Executing the sampling process

The following two examples illustrate how, in the final stage of the sampling process, decisions with respect to the target population, the sampling frame, the sample technique, and the sample size have to be implemented.

EXAMPLE

A satisfaction survey was conducted for a computer retailer in New Zealand. The objective of this survey was to improve internal operations and thus to retain more customers. The survey was transactional in nature; service satisfac- tion and several related variables were measured following a service encounter (i.e., a visit to the retailer). Hence, customer feedback was obtained while the

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 283

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 275

service experience was still fresh. To obtain a representative sample of cus- tomers of the computer retailer (the target population), every tenth person, leaving one out of ten randomly selected stores, in randomly selected cities, in randomly selected regions, was approached during a one-week period (the sampling technique). Trained interviewers that were sent out with standardized questionnaires approached 732 customers leaving the stores (the sample size).

A young researcher was investigating the antecedents of salesperson perform- ance. To examine his hypotheses, data were collected from chief sales execut- ives in the United Kingdom (the target population) via mail questionnaires. The sample was initially drawn from a published business register (the sampling frame), but supplemented with respondent recommendations and other addi- tions, in a judgment sampling methodology. Before distributing the question- naires, the young researcher called each selected company to obtain the name of the chief sales executive, who was contacted and asked to participate in the study. The questionnaires were subsequently distributed to chief sales exec- utives of 450 companies (the sample size). To enhance the response rate, pre- addressed and stamped envelopes were provided, anonymity was assured, and a summary of the research findings as an incentive to the participants was offered. Several follow-up procedures, such as telephone calls and new mail- ings, were planned in order to receive as many responses as possible.

BOX 13.1: NONRESPONSE AND NONRESPONSE ERROR

A failure to obtain information from a number of subjects included in the sample (nonresponse) may lead to nonresponse error. Nonresponse error exists to the extent that those who did respond to your survey are different from those who did not on (one of the) characteristics of interest in your study. Two import- ant sources of nonresponse are not-at-homes and refusals. An effective way to reduce the incidence of not-at-homes is to call back at another time, preferably at a different time of day. The rate of refusals depends, among other things, on the length of the survey, the data collection method, and the patronage of the research. Hence, a decrease in survey length, in the data collection method (personal interviews instead of mail questionnaires), and the auspices of the research often improve the overall return rate. Personalized cover letters, a small incentive for participating in the study, and an advance notice that the survey is taking place may also help you to increase the response rate. Nonetheless, it is almost impossible to entirely avoid nonresponse in surveys. In these cases you may have to turn to methods to deal with nonresponse error, such as gener- alizing the results to the respondents only or statistical adjustment (weighting the data by observable variables).

13.7 PROBABILITY SAMPLING

When elements in the population have a known, nonzero chance of being chosen as subjects in the sample, we resort to a probability sampling design. Probability sampling can be either unrestricted (simple random sampling) or restricted (com- plex probability sampling) in nature.

13.7.1 Unrestricted or simple random sampling

In the unrestricted probability sampling design, more commonly known as simple random sampling, every element in the population has a known and equal chance of being selected as a subject. Let us say there are 1000 elements in the population,

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 284

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

276 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

and we need a sample of 100. Suppose we were to drop pieces of paper in a hat, each bearing the name of one of the elements, and draw 100 of those from the hat with our eyes closed. We know that the first piece drawn will have a 1/1000 chance of being drawn, the next one a 1/999 chance of being drawn, and so on. In other words, we know that the probability of any one of them being chosen is 1 in the number of the population, and we also know that each single element in the hat has the same or equal probability of being chosen. We certainly know that computers can generate random numbers and one does not have to go through the tedious process of pulling out names from a hat!

When we thus draw the elements from the population, it is most likely that the distribution patterns of the characteristics we are interested in investigating in the population are also likewise distributed in the subjects we draw for our sample. This sampling design, known as simple random sampling, has the least bias and offers the most generalizability. However, this sampling process could become cumbersome and expensive; in addition, an entirely updated listing of the population may not always be available. For these and other reasons, other probability sampling designs are often chosen instead.

13.7.2 Restricted or complex probability sampling

As an alternative to the simple random sampling design, several complex probability sampling (restricted probability) designs can be used. These probability sampling procedures offer a viable, and sometimes more efficient, alternative to the unres- tricted design we just discussed. Efficiency is improved in that more information can be obtained for a given sample size using some of the complex probability sampling procedures than the simple random sampling design. The five most com- mon complex probability sampling designs − systematic sampling, stratified ran- dom sampling, cluster sampling, area sampling, and double sampling − will now be discussed.

Systematic sampling

The systematic sampling design involves drawing every nth element in the popu- lation starting with a randomly chosen element between 1 and n. The procedure is exemplified below.

EXAMPLE

If we wanted a sample of 35 households from a total population of 260 houses in a particular locality, then we could sample every seventh house starting from a random number from 1 to 7. Let us say that the random number was 7, then houses numbered 7, 14, 21, 28, and so on, would be sampled until the 35 houses were selected. The one problem to be borne in mind in the systematic sampling design is the probability of a systematic bias creeping into the sample. In the above example, for instance, let us say that every seventh house happened to be a corner house. If the focus of the research study conducted by the construction industry was to control “noise pollution” experienced by residents through the use of appropriate filtering materials, then the residents of corner houses may not be exposed to as much noise as the houses that are in between. Information on noise levels gathered from corner house dwellers might therefore bias the researcher’s data. The likelihood of drawing incorrect conclusions from such data is thus high. In view of the scope for such systematic bias, the researcher must consider the plans carefully and make sure that the systematic sampling design is appropriate for the study, before deciding on it. For market surveys,

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 285

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 277

consumer attitude surveys, and the like, the systematic sampling design is often used, and the telephone directory frequently serves as the sampling frame for this sampling design.

Stratified random sampling

While sampling helps to estimate population parameters, there may be identifi- able subgroups of elements within the population that may be expected to have different parameters on a variable of interest to the researcher. For example, to the human resources management director interested in assessing the extent of training that the employees in the system feel they need, the entire organization will form the population for study. But the extent, quality, and intensity of training desired by middle-level managers, lower-level managers, first-line supervisors, computer analysts, clerical workers, and so on will be different for each group. Knowledge of the kinds of differences in needs that exist for the different groups will help the director to develop useful and meaningful training programs for each group in the organization. Data will therefore have to be collected in a manner that will help the assessment of needs at each subgroup level in the population. The unit of analysis then will be at the group level and the stratified random sampling process will come in handy.

Stratified random sampling, as its name implies, involves a process of stratification or segregation, followed by random selection of subjects from each stratum. The population is first divided into mutually exclusive groups that are relevant, appro- priate, and meaningful in the context of the study. For instance, if the president of a company is concerned about low motivational levels or high absenteeism rates among the employees, it makes sense to stratify the population of organizational members according to their job levels. When the data are collected and the analysis is done, we may find that, contrary to expectations, it is the middle-level managers that are not motivated. This information will help the president to focus on action at the right level and devise better methods to motivate this group. Tracing the differences in the parameters of the subgroups within a population would not be possible without the stratified random sampling procedure. If either the simple random sampling or the systematic sampling procedure were used in a case like this, then the high motivation at some job levels and the low motivation at other levels would cancel each other out, thus masking the real problems that exist at a particular level or levels.

Stratification also helps when research questions such as the following are to be answered:

1. Are the machinists more accident prone than clerical workers?

2. Are Hispanics more loyal to the organization than Native Americans?

Stratifying customers on the basis of life stages, income levels, and the like to study buying patterns and stratifying companies according to size, industry, profits, and so forth to study stock market reactions are common examples of the use of stratification as a sampling design technique.

Stratification is an efficient research sampling design; that is, it provides more information with a given sample size. Stratification should follow the lines appropri- ate to the research question. If we are studying consumer preferences for a product, stratification of the population could be by geographical area, market segment, consumers’ age, consumers’ gender, or various combinations of these. If an organ- ization contemplates budget cuts, the effects of these cuts on employee attitudes can be studied with stratification by department, function, or region. Stratification

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 286

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

278 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

ensures homogeneity within each stratum (i.e., very few differences or dispersions on the variable of interest within each stratum), but heterogeneity (variability) between strata. In other words, there will be more between-group differences than within-group differences.

Proportionate and disproportionate stratified random sampling

Once the population has been stratified in some meaningful way, a sample of members from each stratum can be drawn using either a simple random sampling or a systematic sampling procedure. The subjects drawn from each stratum can be either proportionate or disproportionate to the number of elements in the stratum. For instance, if an organization employs 10 top managers, 30 middle managers, 50 lower-level managers, 100 supervisors, 500 clerks, and 20 secretaries, and a stratified sample of about 140 people is needed for some specific survey, the researcher might decide to include in the sample 20% of members from each stratum. That is, members represented in the sample from each stratum will be proportionate to the total number of elements in the respective strata. This would mean that two from the top, six from the middle, and ten from the lower levels of management would be included in the sample. In addition, 20 supervisors, 100 clerks, and four secretaries would be represented in the sample, as shown in the third column of Table 13.1. This type of sampling is called a proportionate stratifi ed random sampling design.

Table 13.1 Proportionate and disproportionate stratified random sampling

Number of subjects in the sample

Job level Number of elements

Proportionate sampling (20%

of the elements) Disproportionate

sampling

Top management 10 2 7

Middle-level management

30 6 15

Lower-level management

50 10 20

Supervisors 100 20 30

Clerks 500 100 60

Secretaries 20 4 10

Total 710 142 142

In situations like the one above, researchers might sometimes be concerned that information from only two members at the top and six from the middle levels would not truly reflect how all members at those levels would respond. Therefore, a researcher might decide, instead, to use a disproportionate stratifi ed random sampling procedure. The number of subjects from each stratum would now be altered, while keeping the sample size unchanged. Such a sampling design is illus- trated in the far right-hand column in Table 13.1. The idea here is that the 60 clerks might be considered adequate to represent the population of 500 clerks; seven out of ten managers at the top level might also be considered representative of the top managers, and likewise 15 out of the 30 managers at the middle level. This redis- tribution of the numbers in the strata might be considered more appropriate and representative for the study than the previous proportionate sampling design.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 287

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 279

Disproportionate sampling decisions are made either when some stratum or strata are too small or too large, or when there is more variability suspected within a particular stratum. As an example, the educational levels among supervisors, which may be considered to influence perceptions, may range from elementary school to master’s degrees. Here, more people will be sampled at the supervisory level. Disproportionate sampling is also sometimes done when it is easier, simpler, and less expensive to collect data from one or more strata than from others.

In summary, stratified random sampling involves stratifying the elements along meaningful levels and taking proportionate or disproportionate samples from the strata. This sampling design is more efficient than the simple random sampling design because, for the same sample size, each important segment of the population is better represented, and more valuable and differentiated information is obtained with respect to each group.

Cluster sampling

Cluster samples are samples gathered in groups or chunks of elements that, ideally, are natural aggregates of elements in the population. In cluster sampling, the target population is first divided into clusters. Then, a random sample of clusters is drawn and for each selected cluster either all the elements or a sample of elements are included in the sample. Cluster samples offer more heterogeneity within groups and more homogeneity among groups − the reverse of what we find in stratified random sampling, where there is homogeneity within each group and heterogeneity across groups.

A specific type of cluster sampling is area sampling. In this case, clusters consist of geographic areas such as counties, city blocks, or particular boundaries within a locality. If you wanted to survey the residents of a city, you would get a city map, take a sample of city blocks and select respondents within each city block. Sampling the needs of consumers before opening a 24-hour convenience store in a particular part of town would involve area sampling. Location plans for retail stores, advertisements focused specifically on local populations, and TV and radio programs beamed at specific areas could all use an area sampling design to gather information on the interests, attitudes, predispositions, and behaviors of the local area people.

Area sampling is less expensive than most other probability sampling designs, and it is not dependent on a sampling frame. A city map showing the blocks of the city is adequate information to allow a researcher to take a sample of the blocks and obtain data from the residents therein. Indeed, the key motivation for cluster sampling is cost reduction. The unit costs of cluster sampling are much lower than those of other probability sampling designs of simple or stratified random sampling or sys- tematic sampling. However, cluster sampling exposes itself to greater bias and is the least generalizable of all the probability sampling designs, because most naturally occurring clusters in the organizational context do not contain heterogeneous ele- ments. In other words, the conditions of intracluster heterogeneity and intercluster homogeneity are often not met.

For these reasons, the cluster sampling technique is not very common in organ- izational research. Moreover, for marketing research activities, naturally occurring clusters, such as clusters of residents, buyers, students, or shops, do not have much heterogeneity among the elements. As stated earlier, there is more intracluster homogeneity than heterogeneity in such clusters. Hence, cluster sampling, though less costly, does not offer much efficiency in terms of precision or confidence in the results. However, cluster sampling offers convenience. For example, it is easier to inspect an assortment of units packed inside, say, four boxes (i.e., all the elements

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 288

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

280 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

in the four clusters) than to open 30 boxes in a shipment in order to inspect a few units from each at random.

Single-stage and multistage cluster sampling

We have thus far discussed single-stage cluster sampling, which involves the division of the population into convenient clusters, randomly choosing the required number of clusters as sample subjects, and investigating all the elements in each of the randomly chosen clusters. Cluster sampling can also be done in several stages and is then known as multistage cluster sampling. For instance, if we were to do a national survey of the average monthly bank deposits, cluster sampling would first be used to select the urban, semi-urban, and rural geographical locations for study. At the next stage, particular areas in each of these locations would be chosen. At the third stage, banks within each area would be chosen. In other words, multistage cluster sampling involves a probability sampling of the primary sampling units; from each of these primary units, a probability sample of the secondary sampling units is then drawn; a third level of probability sampling is done from each of these secondary units, and so on, until we have reached the final stage of breakdown for the sample units, when we sample every member in those units.

Double sampling

This plan is resorted to when further information is needed from a subset of the group from which some information has already been collected for the same study. A sampling design where initially a sample is used in a study to collect some prelim- inary information of interest, and later a subsample of this primary sample is used to examine the matter in more detail, is called double sampling. For example, a struc- tured interview might indicate that a subgroup of the respondents has more insight into the problems of the organization. These respondents might be interviewed again and asked additional questions. This research adopts a double sampling pro- cedure.

13.7.3 Review of probability sampling designs

There are two basic probability sampling plans: the unrestricted or simple random sampling, and the restricted or complex probability sampling plans. In the simple random sampling design, every element in the population has a known and equal chance of being selected as a subject. The complex probability plan consists of five different sampling designs. Of these five, the cluster sampling design is probably the least expensive as well as the least dependable, but is used when no list of the population elements is available. The stratified random sampling design is probably the most efficient, in the sense that for the same number of sample subjects, it offers precise and detailed information. The systematic sampling design has the built- in hazard of possible systematic bias. Area sampling is a popular form of cluster sampling, and double sampling is resorted to when information in addition to that already obtained by using a primary sample has to be collected using a subgroup of the sample.

13.8 NONPROBABILITY SAMPLING

In nonprobability sampling designs, the elements in the population do not have any probabilities attached to their being chosen as sample subjects. This means that the findings from the study of the sample cannot be confidently generalized to the population. As stated earlier, however, researchers may, at times, be less concerned about generalizability than obtaining some preliminary information in a quick and

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 289

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 281

inexpensive way. They might then resort to nonprobability sampling. Sometimes nonprobability sampling is the only way to obtain data, as discussed later.

Some of the nonprobability sampling plans are more dependable than others and could offer some important leads to potentially useful information with regard to the population. Nonprobability sampling designs, which fit into the broad categories of convenience sampling and purposive sampling, are discussed next.

13.8.1 Convenience sampling

As its name implies, convenience sampling refers to the collection of information from members of the population who are conveniently available to provide it. One would expect the “Pepsi Challenge” contest to have been administered on a convenience sampling basis. Such a contest, with the purpose of determining whether people prefer one product to another, might be held at a shopping mall visited by many shoppers. Those inclined to take the test might form the sample for the study of how many people prefer Pepsi over Coke or product X to product Y. Such a sample is a convenience sample.

Consider another example. A convenience sample of five officers who attended a competitor’s showcase demonstration at the county fair the previous evening offered the vice president of the company information on the “new” products of the competitor and their pricing strategies, which helped the VP to formulate some ideas on the next steps to be taken by the company.

Convenience sampling is most often used during the exploratory phase of a research project and is perhaps the best way of getting some basic information quickly and efficiently.

13.8.2 Purposive sampling

Instead of obtaining information from those who are most readily or conveniently available, it might sometimes become necessary to obtain information from specific target groups. The sampling here is confined to specific types of people who can provide the desired information, either because they are the only ones who have it, or they conform to some criteria set by the researcher. This type of sampling design is called purposive sampling, and the two major types of purposive sampling − judgment sampling and quota sampling−will now be explained.

Judgment sampling

Judgment sampling involves the choice of subjects who are most advantageously placed or in the best position to provide the information required. For instance, if a researcher wants to find out what it takes for women managers to make it to the top, the only people who can give first-hand information are the women who have risen to the positions of presidents, vice presidents, and important top-level executives in work organizations. They could reasonably be expected to have expert knowledge by virtue of having gone through the experiences and processes themselves, and might perhaps be able to provide good data or information to the researcher. Thus, the judgment sampling design is used when a limited number or category of people have the information that is sought. In such cases, any type of probability sampling across a cross-section of the entire population is purposeless and not useful.

Judgment sampling may curtail the generalizability of the findings, due to the fact that we are using a sample of experts who are conveniently available to us. However, it is the only viable sampling method for obtaining the type of information that is required from very specific pockets of people who alone possess the needed facts

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 290

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

282 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

and can give the information sought. In organizational settings, and particularly for market research, opinion leaders who are very knowledgeable are included in the sample. Enlightened opinions, views, and knowledge constitute a rich data source.

Judgment sampling calls for special efforts to locate and gain access to the individu- als who do have the requisite information. As already stated, this sampling design may be the only useful one for answering certain types of research question.

Quota sampling

Quota sampling, a second type of purposive sampling, ensures that certain groups are adequately represented in the study through the assignment of a quota. Gener- ally, the quota fixed for each subgroup is based on the total numbers of each group in the population. However, since this is a nonprobability sampling plan, the results are not generalizable to the population.

Quota sampling can be considered a form of proportionate stratified sampling, in which a predetermined proportion of people are sampled from different groups, but on a convenience basis. For instance, it may be surmised that the work attitude of blue-collar workers in an organization is quite different from that of white-collar workers. If there are 60% blue-collar workers and 40% white-collar workers in this organization, and if a total of 30 people are to be interviewed to find the answer to the research question, then a quota of 18 blue-collar workers and 12 white-collar workers will form the sample, because these numbers represent 60% and 40% of the sample size. The first 18 conveniently available blue-collar workers and 12 white- collar workers will be sampled according to this quota. Needless to say, the sample may not be totally representative of the population; hence the generalizability of the findings will be restricted. However, the convenience it offers in terms of effort, cost, and time makes quota sampling attractive for some research efforts. Quota sampling also becomes a necessity when a subset of the population is underrepresented in the organization − for example, minority groups, foremen, and so on. In other words, quota sampling ensures that all the subgroups in the population are adequately represented in the sample. Quota samples are basically stratified samples from which subjects are selected nonrandomly.

In a workplace (and society) that is becoming increasingly heterogeneous because of the changing demographics, quota sampling can be expected to be used more frequently in the future. For example, quota sampling can be used to gain some idea of the buying predispositions of various ethnic groups, to get a feel of how employees from different nationalities perceive the organizational culture, and so on.

Although quota sampling is not generalizable like stratified random sampling, it does offer some information, based on which further investigation, if necessary, can proceed. That is, it is possible that the first stage of research will use the non- probability design of quota sampling, and once some useful information has been obtained, a probability design will follow. The converse is also entirely possible. A probability sampling design might indicate new areas for research, and nonprob- ability sampling designs might be used to explore their feasibility.

13.8.3 Review of nonprobability sampling designs

There are two main types of nonprobability sampling design: convenience sampling and purposive sampling. Convenience sampling is the least reliable of all sampling designs in terms of generalizability, but sometimes it may be the only viable altern- ative when quick and timely information is needed, or for exploratory research purposes. Purposive sampling plans fall into two categories: judgment and quota

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 291

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 283

sampling designs. Judgment sampling, though restricted in generalizability, may sometimes be the best sampling design choice, especially when there is a limited population that can supply the information needed. Quota sampling is often used on considerations of cost and time and the need to adequately represent minor- ity elements in the population. Although the generalizability of all nonprobability sampling designs is very restricted, they have certain advantages and are sometimes the only viable alternative for the researcher.

Table 13.2 summarizes the probability and nonprobability sampling designs dis- cussed thus far, and their advantages and disadvantages. Figure 13.4 offers some decision choice points as to which design might be useful for specific research goals.

Table 13.2 Probability and nonprobability sampling designs

Sampling design Description Advantages Disadvantages

Probability sampling

1. Simple random sampling All elements in the popu- lation are considered and each element has an equal chance of being chosen as the subject.

High generalizability of find- ings.

Not as efficient as stratified sampling.

2. Systematic sampling Every nth element in the population is chosen starting from a random point in the sampling frame.

Easy to use if sampling frame is available.

Systematic biases are pos- sible.

3. Stratified random sampling (Str.R.S.) Proportionate Str.R.S. Disproportionate Str.R.S.

Population is first divided into meaningful segments; thereafter subjects are drawn in proportion to their ori- ginal numbers in the popula- tion. Based on criteria other than their original population numbers.

Most efficient among all probability designs. All groups are adequately sampled and comparisons among groups are possible.

Stratification must be mean- ingful. More time consum- ing than simple random sampling or systematic sampling. Sampling frame for each stratum is essential.

4. Cluster sampling Groups that have hetero- geneous members are first identified; then some are chosen at random; all the members in each of the ran- domly chosen groups are studied.

In geographic clusters, costs of data collection are low.

The least reliable and effi- cient among all probability sampling designs since sub- sets of clusters are more homogeneous than hetero- geneous.

5. Area sampling Cluster sampling within a particular area or locality.

Cost-effective. Useful for decisions relating to a partic- ular location.

Takes time to collect data from an area.

6. Double sampling The same sample or a sub- set of the sample is studied twice.

Offers more detailed inform- ation on the topic of study.

Original biases, if any, will be carried over. Individuals may not be happy responding a second time.

Nonprobability sampling

7. Convenience sampling The most easily accessible members are chosen as sub- jects.

Quick, convenient, less expensive.

Not generalizable at all.

8. Judgment sampling Subjects selected on the basis of their expertise in the subject investigated.

Sometimes, the only mean- ingful way to investigate.

Generalizability is question- able; not generalizable to entire population.

9. Quota sampling Subjects are conveniently chosen from targeted groups according to some predeter- mined number or quota.

Very useful where minority participation in a study is critical.

Not easily generalizable.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 292

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

284 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Figure 13.4 Choice points in sampling design

13.9 EXAMPLES OF WHEN CERTAIN SAMPLING DESIGNS WOULD BE APPROPRIATE

13.9.1 Simple random sampling

This sampling design is best when the generalizability of the findings to the whole population is the main objective of the study. Consider the following two examples.

EXAMPLE

The human resources director of a company with 82 people on its payroll has been asked by the vice president to consider formulating an implementable flextime policy. The director feels that such a policy is not necessary since everyone seems happy with the 9-to-5 hours, and no one has complained. Formulating such a policy now, in the opinion of the director, runs the risk of creating domestic problems for the staff and scheduling problems for the company. She wants, however, to resort to a simple random sampling procedure to do an initial survey, and, with the results, convince the VP that there is no need for flextime, and urge him to drop the matter. Since simple random sampling

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 293

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 285

offers the greatest generalizability of the results to the entire population, and the VP needs to be convinced, it is important to resort to this sampling design.

The regional director of sales operations of a medium-sized company, which has 20 retail stores in each of its four geographical regions of operation, wants to know what types of sales gimmicks worked best for the company overall during the past year. This is to help formulate some general policies for the company as a whole and prioritize sales promotion strategies for the coming year. Instead of studying each of the 80 stores, some dependable (i.e., representative and generalizable) information can be had, based on the study of a few stores drawn through a simple random sampling procedure. That is, each one of the 80 stores would have an equal chance of being included in the sample, and the results of the study would be the most generalizable. A simple random sampling procedure is recommended in this case since the policy is to be formulated for the company as a whole. This implies that the most representative information has to be obtained that can be generalized to the entire company. This is best accomplished through this design.

It has to be noted that in some cases, where cost is a primary consideration (i.e., resources are limited), and the number of elements in the population is very large and/or geographically dispersed, the simple random sampling design may not be the most desirable, because it could become quite expensive. Thus, both the critic- ality of generalizability and considerations of cost come into play in the choice of this sampling design.

13.9.2 Stratified random sampling

This sampling design, which is the most efficient, is a good choice when differen- tiated information is needed regarding various strata within the population, which are known to differ in their parameters. See the examples on following page.

EXAMPLE

The director of human resources of a manufacturing firm wants to offer stress management seminars to the personnel who experience high levels of stress. He conjectures that three groups are most prone to stress: the workmen who constantly handle dangerous chemicals, the foremen who are held responsible for production quotas, and the counselors who, day in and day out, listen to the problems of the employees, internalize them, and offer them counsel, with no idea of how much they have really helped the clients. To get a feel for the experienced level of stress within each of the three groups and the rest of the firm, the director might stratify the sample into four distinct categories: (1) the workmen handling the dangerous chemicals, (2) the foremen, (3) the counselors, and (4) all the rest. He might then choose a disproportionate random sampling procedure (since group (3) can be expected to be very small, and groups (2) and (1) are much smaller than group (4)).

This is the only sampling design that would allow the designing of stress man- agement seminars in a meaningful way, targeted at the right groups.

If, in the earlier example, the regional director had wanted to know which sales promotion gimmick offered the best results for each of the geographical areas, so that different sales promotion strategies (according to regional preferences) could be developed, then the 80 stores would first be stratified on the basis of the geographical region, and then a representative sample of stores would be

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 294

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

286 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

drawn from each of the geographical regions (strata) through a simple random sampling procedure. In this case, since each of the regions has 20 stores, a proportionate stratified random sampling process (say, five stores from each region) would be appropriate. If, however, the northern region had only three stores, the southern had 15, and the eastern and western regions had 24 and 38 stores, respectively, then a disproportionate stratified random sampling pro- cedure would be the right choice, with all three stores in the northern region being studied, because of the small number of elements in that population. If the sample size was retained at 20, then the north, south, east, and west regions would probably have samples respectively of three, four, five and eight. It is interesting to note that sometimes when stratified random sampling might seem logical, it might not really be necessary. For example, when test-marketing results show that Cubans, Puerto Ricans, and Mexicans perceive and consume a particular product the same way, there is no need to segment the market and study each of the three groups using a stratified sampling procedure.

13.9.3 Systematic sampling

If the sampling frame is large, and a listing of the elements is conveniently available in one place (as in the telephone directory, company payroll, chamber of commerce listings, etc.), then a systematic sampling procedure will offer the advantages of ease and quickness in developing the sample, as illustrated by the following two examples.

EXAMPLE

An administrator wants to assess the reactions of employees to a new and improved health benefits scheme that requires a modest increase in the premi- ums to be paid by the employees for their families. The administrator can assess the enthusiasm for the new scheme by using a systematic sampling design. The company’s records will provide the sampling frame, and every nth employee can be sampled. A stratified plan is not called for here since the policy is for the entire company.

If customers’ interest in a highly sophisticated telephone is to be gauged by an entrepreneur, a systematic sampling procedure with the telephone direct- ory as the sampling frame will be the easiest and quickest way to obtain the information, while still ensuring representativeness of the population studied.

BOX 13.2: NOTE

Systematic sampling is inadvisable where systematic bias can be anticipated to be present. For example, systematic sampling from the personnel directory of a company (especially when it has an equal number of employees in each department), which lists the names of the individuals department-wise, with the head of the department listed first, and the secretary listed next, has inherent bias. The possibility of systematic bias creeping into the data cannot be ruled out in this case, since the selection process may end up picking each of the heads of the department or the departmental secretaries as the sample subjects. The results from such a sample will clearly be biased and not generalizable, despite the use of a probability sampling procedure. Systematic sampling will have to be scrupulously avoided in cases where known systematic biases are possible.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 295

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 287

13.9.4 Cluster sampling

This sampling design is most useful when a heterogeneous group is to be studied at one time. Two examples are offered below.

EXAMPLE

A human resources director is interested in knowing why staff resign. Cluster sampling will be useful in this case for conducting exit interviews of all members completing their final papers in the human resources department on the same day (cluster), before resigning. The clusters chosen for interview will be based on a simple random sampling of the various clusters of personnel resigning on different days. The interviews will help to understand the reasons for turnover of a heterogeneous group of individuals (i.e., from various departments), and the study can be conducted at a low cost.

A financial analyst wishes to study the lending practices of banks in the Neth- erlands. All the banks in each city will form a cluster. By randomly sampling the clusters, the analyst will be able to draw conclusions on the lending practices.

13.9.5 Area sampling

Area sampling is best suited when the goal of the research is confined to a particular locality or area, as per the example below.

EXAMPLE

A telephone company wants to install a public telephone outlet in a locality where crime is most rampant, so that victims can have access to a telephone. Studying the crime statistics and interviewing the residents in a particular area will help to choose the right location for installation of the phone.

13.9.6 Double sampling

This design provides added information at minimal additional expenditure. See the example below.

EXAMPLE

In the previous exit interview example, some individuals (i.e., a subset of the original cluster sample) might have indicated that they were resigning because of philosophical differences with the company’s policies. The researcher might want to do an in-depth interview with these individuals to obtain further information regarding the nature of the policies disliked, the actual philosoph- ical differences, and why these particular issues were central to the individu- als’ value systems. Such additional detailed information from the target group through the double sampling design could help the company to look for ways of retaining employees in the future.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 296

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

288 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

13.9.7 Convenience sampling

This nonprobability design, which is not generalizable at all, is used at times to obtain some “quick” information to get a “feel” for the phenomenon or variables of interest. See the example below.

EXAMPLE

The accounts executive has established a new accounting system that max- imally utilizes computer technology. Before making further changes, he would like to get a feel for how the accounting clerks react to the new system without making it seem that he has doubts about their acceptability. He may then “cas- ually” talk to the first five accounting personnel that walk into his office, trying to gauge their reactions.

BOX 13.3: NOTE

Convenience sampling should be resorted to in the interests of expediency, with the full knowledge that the results are not generalizable at all.

13.9.8 Judgment sampling: one type of purposive sampling

A judgment sampling design is used where the collection of “specialized informed inputs” on the topic area researched is vital, and the use of any other sampling design would not offer opportunities to obtain the specialized information, as per the example that follows.

EXAMPLE

A pharmaceutical company wants to trace the effects of a new drug on patients with specific health problems (muscular dystrophy, sickle cell anemia, rheum- atoid arthritis, etc.). It then contacts such individuals and, with a group of vol- untarily consenting patients, tests the drug. This is a judgment sample because data are collected from appropriate special groups.

13.9.9 Quota sampling: a second type of purposive sampling

This sampling design allows for the inclusion of all groups in the system researched. Thus, groups who are small in number are not neglected, as per the example below.

EXAMPLE

A company is considering operating an on-site kindergarten facility. But before taking further steps, it wants to get the reactions of four groups to the idea: (1) employees who are parents of kindergarten-age children, and where both are working outside of the home, (2) employees who are parents of kindergarten- age children, but where one of them is not working outside of the home, (3) single parents with kindergarten-age children, and (4) all those without children of kindergarten age. If the four groups are expected to represent 60%, 7%, 23%, and 10%, respectively, in the population of 420 employees in the company, then a quota sampling will be appropriate to represent the four groups.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 297

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 289

BOX 13.4: NOTE

The last group should also be included in the sample since there is a possibility that they may perceive this as a facility that favors only the parents of kinder- garten children, and therefore resent the idea. It is easy to see that resorting to quota sampling would be important in a case such as this.

In effect, as can be seen from the discussions on sampling designs thus far, decisions on which design to use depend on many factors, including the following:

1. Extent of prior knowledge in the area of research undertaken.

2. The main objective of the study − generalizability, efficiency, knowing more about subgroups within a population, obtaining some quick (even if unreliable) information, etc.

3. Cost considerations− is exactitude and generalizability worth the extra invest- ment of time, cost, and other resources in resorting to a more, rather than less, sophisticated sampling design? Even if it is, is suboptimization because of cost or time constraints called for? (See also Figure 13.4.)

The advantages and disadvantages of the different probability and nonprobability sampling designs are listed in Table 13.2.

In sum, choosing the appropriate sampling plan is one of the more important research design decisions the researcher has to make. The choice of a specific design will depend broadly on the goal of research, the characteristics of the population, and considerations of cost.

13.10 SAMPLING IN CROSS-CULTURAL RESEARCH

Just as in instrument development and data collection, while engaging in cross- cultural research, one has to be sensitive to the issue of selecting matched samples in the different countries. The nature and types of organizations studied, whether subjects are from rural or urban areas, and the types of sampling design used, should all be similar in the different countries to enable true comparisons.

13.11 ISSUES OF PRECISION AND CONFIDENCE IN DETERMINING SAMPLE SIZE

Having discussed the various probability and nonprobability sampling designs, we now need to focus attention on the second aspect of the sampling design issue − the sample size. Suppose we select 30 people from a population of 3000 through a simple random sampling procedure. Will we be able to generalize our findings to the population with confidence, since we have chosen a probability design that has the most generalizability? What is the sample size required to make reasonably precise generalizations with confidence? What do precision and confidence mean? These issues will be considered now.

A reliable and valid sample should enable us to generalize the findings from the sample to the population under investigation. In other words, the sample statist- ics should be reliable estimates and reflect the population parameters as closely as possible within a narrow margin of error. No sample statistic (X, for instance) is going to be exactly the same as the population parameter (µ), no matter how sophisticated the probability sampling design is. Remember that the very reason for a probability design is to increase the probability that the sample statistics will be as close as possible to the population parameters. Though the point estimate X

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 298

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

290 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

may not accurately reflect the population mean,µ, an interval estimate can be made within whichµwill lie, with probabilities attached− that is, at particular confidence levels. The issues of confidence interval and confidence level are addressed in the following discussions on precision and confidence.

13.11.1 Precision

Precision refers to how close our estimate is to the true population characteristic. Usually, we estimate the population parameter to fall within a range, based on the sample estimate. For example, let us say that from a study of a simple random sample of 50 of the total 300 employees in a workshop, we find that the average daily production rate per person is 50 pieces of a particular product (X = 50). We might then (by doing certain calculations, as we shall see later) be able to say that the true average daily production of the product (µ) lies anywhere between 40 and 60 for the population of employees in the workshop. In saying this, we offer an interval estimate, within which we expect the true population mean production to be (µ = 50± 10). The narrower this interval, the greater the precision. For instance, if we are able to estimate that the population mean will fall anywhere between 45 and 55 pieces of production ( µ = 50± 5) rather than 40 and 60 (µ = 50± 10), then we have more precision. That is, we now estimate the mean to lie within a narrower range, which in turn means that we estimate with greater exactitude or precision.

Precision is a function of the range of variability in the sampling distribution of the sample mean. That is, if we take a number of different samples from a population, and take the mean of each of these, we will usually find that they are all different, are normally distributed, and have a dispersion associated with them. The smaller this dispersion or variability, the greater the probability that the sample mean will be closer to the population mean. We need not necessarily take several different samples to estimate this variability. Even if we take only one sample of 30 subjects from the population, we will still be able to estimate the variability of the sampling distribution of the sample mean. This variability is called the standard error, denoted by SX. The standard error is calculated by the following formula:

SX = S√ n

where S is the standard deviation of the sample, n is the sample size, andSX indicates the standard error or the extent of precision offered by the sample.

Note that the standard error varies inversely with the square root of the sample size. Hence, if we want to reduce the standard error given a particular standard deviation in the sample, we need to increase the sample size. Another noteworthy point is that the smaller the variation in the population, the smaller the standard error, which in turn implies that the sample size need not be large. Thus, low variability in the population requires a smaller sample size.

In sum, the closer we want our sample results to reflect the population characterist- ics, the greater the precision we should aim at. The greater the precision required, the larger the sample size needed, especially when the variability in the population itself is large.

13.11.2 Confidence

Whereas precision denotes how close we estimate the population parameter based on the sample statistic, confidence denotes how certain we are that our estimates will really hold true for the population. In the previous example of production rate, we know we are more precise when we estimate the true mean production (µ) to fall

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 299

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 291

somewhere between 45 and 55 pieces than somewhere between 40 and 60. However, we may have more confidence in the latter estimation than in the former. After all, anyone can say with 100% certainty or confidence that the mean production (µ) will fall anywhere between zero and infinity! Other things being equal, the narrower the range, the lower the confidence. In other words, there is a trade-off between precision and confidence for any given sample size, as we shall see later in this chapter.

In essence, confidence reflects the level of certainty with which we can state that our estimates of the population parameters, based on our sample statistics, will hold true. The level of confidence can range from 0 to 100%. A 95% confidence is the conventionally accepted level for most business research, most commonly expressed by denoting the significance level as p≤0.05. In other words, we say that at least 95 times out of 100 our estimate will reflect the true population characteristic.

13.12 SAMPLE DATA, PRECISION, AND CONFIDENCE IN ESTIMATION

Precision and confidence are important issues in sampling because when we use sample data to draw inferences about the population, we hope to be fairly “on tar- get,” and have some idea of the extent of possible error. Because a point estimate provides no measure of possible error, we do an interval estimation to ensure a relat- ively accurate estimation of the population parameter. Statistics that have the same distribution as the sampling distribution of the mean are used in this procedure, usually a z or a t statistic.

For example, we may want to estimate the mean dollar value of purchases made by customers when they shop at department stores. From a sample of 64 customers sampled through a systematic sampling design procedure, we may find that the sample mean X = 105, and the sample standard deviation S = 10.X, the sample mean, is a point estimate of µ, the population mean. We could construct a confid- ence interval around X to estimate the range within which µ will fall. The standard error SX and the percentage or level of confidence we require will determine the width of the interval, which can be represented by the following formula, where K is the t statistic for the level of confidence desired.

µ = X ±KS

We already know that:

SX = S√ n

Here,

SX = 10√ 64

= 1.25

From the table of critical values for t in any statistics book (see Table II, columns 5, 6, and 9, in the statistical tables given toward the end of this book), we know that:

For a 90% confidence level, the K value is 1.645.

For a 95% confidence level, the K value is 1.96.

For a 99% confidence level, the K value is 2.576.

If we desire a 90% confidence level in the above case, thenµ = 105±1.645 (1.25) (i.e., µ = 105 ± 2.056). µ thus falls between 102.944 and 107.056. These results indicate that using a sample size of 64, we could state with 90% confidence that the true population mean value of purchases for all customers would fall between $102.94

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 300

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

292 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

and $107.06. If we now want to be 99% confident of our results without increasing the sample size, we necessarily have to sacrifice precision, as may be seen from the following calculation:µ = 105±2.576 (1.25). The value ofµnow falls between 101.78 and 108.22. In other words, the width of the interval has increased and we are now less precise in estimating the population mean, though we are a lot more confident about our estimation. It is not difficult to see that if we want to maintain our original precision while increasing the confidence, or maintain the confidence level while increasing precision, or we want to increase both the confidence and the precision, we need a larger sample size.

In sum, the sample size, n, is a function of:

1. the variability in the population.

2. precision or accuracy needed.

3. confidence level desired.

4. type of sampling plan used − for example, simple random sampling versus stratified random sampling.

13.13 TRADE-OFF BETWEEN CONFIDENCE AND PRECISION

We have noted that if we want more precision, or more confidence, or both, the sample size needs to be increased − unless, of course, there is very little variability in the population itself. However, if the sample size (n) cannot be increased, for whatever reason − say, we cannot afford the costs of increased sampling − then, with the same n, the only way to maintain the same level of precision is to forsake the confidence with which we can predict our estimates. That is, we reduce the confidence level or the certainty of our estimate. This trade-off between precision and confidence is illustrated in Figure 13.5 (a) and (b). Figure 13.5 (a) indicates that 50% of the time the true mean will fall within the narrow range indicated in the figure, the 0.25 in each tail representing the 25% nonconfidence, or the probability of making errors, in our estimation on either side. Figure 13.5 (b) indicates that 99% of the time we expect the true mean µ to fall within the much wider range indicated in the figure and there is only a 0.005% chance that we are making an error in this estimation. That is, in Figure 13.5 (a), we have more precision but less confidence (our confidence level is only 50%). In Figure 13.5 (b), we have high confidence (99%), but then we are far from being precise − that is, our estimate falls within a broad interval range.

(a) More precision but less confidence; (b) more confidence but less precision.

Figure 13.5 Illustration of the trade-off between precision and confidence

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 301

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 293

It thus becomes necessary for researchers to consider at least four aspects while making decisions on the sample size needed to do the research:

1. How much precision is really needed in estimating the population character- istics of interest− that is, what is the margin of allowable error?

2. How much confidence is really needed− that is, how much chance can we take of making errors in estimating the population parameters?

3. To what extent is there variability in the population on the characteristics investigated?

4. What is the cost−benefit analysis of increasing the sample size?

13.14 SAMPLE DATA AND HYPOTHESIS TESTING

So far we have discussed sample data as a means of estimating the population parameters, but sample data can also be used to test hypotheses about population values rather than simply to estimate population values. The procedure for this testing incorporates the same information as in interval estimation, but the goals behind the two methods are somewhat different.

Referring to the earlier example of the average dollar value purchases of customers in a department store, instead of trying to estimate the average purchase value of the store’s customers with a certain degree of accuracy, let us say that we now wish to determine whether or not customers expend the same average amount in purchases in Department Store A as in Department Store B. From Chapter 5, we know that we should first set the null hypothesis, which will state that there is no difference in the dollar values expended by customers shopping at the two different stores. This is expressed as:

H0 : µA − µB = 0

The alternate hypothesis of differences will be stated nondirectionally (since we have no idea whether customers buy more at Store A or Store B) as:

HA : µA − µB 6= 0

If we take a sample of 20 customers from each of the two stores and find that the mean dollar value purchases of customers in Store A is 105 with a standard deviation of 10, and the corresponding figures for Store B are 100 and 15, respectively, we see that:

XA −XB = 105− 100 = 5

whereas our null hypothesis had postulated no difference (difference=0). Should we then conclude that our alternate hypothesis is to be accepted? We cannot say! To determine this we must first find the probability or likelihood of the two group means having a difference of 5 in the context of the null hypothesis or a difference of 0. This can be done by converting the difference in the sample means to a t statistic and seeing what the probability is of finding a t of that value. The t distribution has known probabilities attached to it (see Table II (t distribution) in the statistical tables given toward the end of the book). Looking at the t distribution table, we find that, with two samples of 20 each (the degrees of freedom become (n1 + n2) − 2 = 38), for the t value to be significant at the 0.05 level, the critical value should be around 2.021 (see t distribution table column 6 against v40). We need to use the two-tailed test since we do not know whether the difference between Store A and Store B will be positive or negative. For even a 90% probability, it should be at least 1.684 (see

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 302

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

294 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

the number to the left of 2.021). The t statistic can be calculated for testing our hypothesis as follows:

t = (

X1−X2 ) −(µ1−µ2)

S X1−X2

SX1−X2 = √ n1s21+n2s

2 2

(n1+n2−2)

( 1 n1

+ 1n2 )

= √

(20×102)+(20×152) 20+20−2

( 1 20 +

1 20 )

t = (

XA−XB ) −(µA−µB)

4.136

We already know that

XA − XB = 5 (the difference in the means of the two stores)

and

µA − µB = 0 (from our null hypothesis)

Then

t = 5− 0 4.136

= 1.209

This t value of 1.209 is way below the value of 2.021 (for 40 degrees of freedom for a two-population t-test, the closest to the actual 38 degrees of freedom [(20 + 20)− 2]) required for the conventional 95% probability, and even for the 90% probability, which requires a value of 1.684. We can thus say that the difference of 5 that we found between the two stores is not significantly different from 0. The conclusion, then, is that there is no significant difference between how much customers buy (dollars expended) at Department Store A and Department Store B. We will thus accept the null hypothesis and reject the alternative.

Sample data can thus be used not only for estimating the population parameters, but also for testing hypotheses about population values, population correlations, and so forth, as we will see more fully in Chapter 15.

13.15 DETERMINING THE SAMPLE SIZE

Now that we are aware of the fact that the sample size is governed by the extent of precision and confidence desired, how do we determine the sample size required for our research? The procedure can be illustrated through an example.

EXAMPLE

Suppose a manager wants to be 95% confident that the expected monthly withdrawals in a bank will be within a confidence interval of ±$500. Let us say that a study of a sample of clients indicates that the average withdrawals made by them have a standard deviation of $3500. What would be the sample size needed in this case?

We noted earlier that the population mean can be estimated by using the formula:

µ = X±KSX

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 303

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 295

Since the confidence level needed here is 95%, the applicable K value is 1.96 (t table). The interval estimate of ±$500 will have to encompass a dispersion of (1.96× standard error). That is,

500 = 1.96× SX X

We already know that:

SX = S√ n

255.10 = 3500√ n

n = 188

The sample size indicated above is 188. However, let us say that this bank has a total clientele of only 185. This means we cannot sample 188 clients. We can, in this case, apply a correction formula and see what sample size would be needed to have the same level of precision and confidence given the fact that we have a total of only 185 clients. The correction formula is as follows:

SX = S√ n × √ N − n N − 1

where N is the total number of elements in the population, n is the sample size to be estimated, S ¯¯

XX

is the standard error of the estimate of the mean, and S is the

standard deviation of the sample mean.

Applying the correlation formula, we find that

255.10 = 3500√ n × √

185−n 184

n = 94

We would now sample 94 of the total 185 clients.

To understand the impact of precision and/or confidence on the sample size, let us try changing the confidence level required in the bank withdrawal example, which needed a sample size of 188 for a confidence level of 95%. Let us say that the bank manager now wants to be 99% sure that the expected monthly withdrawals will be within the interval of±$500. What will be the sample size now needed?

SX will now be:

500 2.576 = 194.099 194.099 = 3500√

n

n = 325

The sample has now to be increased 1.73 times (from 188 to 325) to increase the confidence level from 95% to 99%!

Try calculating the sample size if the precision has to be narrowed down from $500 to $300 for a 95% and a 99% confidence level! Your answers should show the sample sizes needed as 523 and 902, respectively. These results dramatically highlight the costs of increased precision, confidence, or both. It is hence a good idea to think through how much precision and confidence one really needs, before determining the sample size for the research project.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 304

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

296 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

So far we have discussed sample size in the context of precision and confidence with respect to one variable only. However, in research, the theoretical framework has several variables of interest, and the question arises as to how one should come up with a sample size when all the factors are taken into account. Krejcie and Morgan (1970) greatly simplified the size decision by providing a table that ensures a good decision model. Table 13.3 provides that generalized scientific guideline for sample size decisions. The interested student is advised to read Krejcie and Morgan (1970)) as well as Cohen (1969) for decisions on sample size.

13.16 IMPORTANCE OF SAMPLING DESIGN AND SAMPLE SIZE

It is now possible to see how both sampling design and the sample size are important to establish the representativeness of the sample for generalizability. If the appro- priate sampling design is not used, a large sample size will not, in itself, allow the findings to be generalized to the population. Likewise, unless the sample size is adequate for the desired level of precision and confidence, no sampling design, however sophisticated, will be useful to the researcher in meeting the objectives of the study. Hence, sampling decisions should consider both the sampling design and the sample size. Too large a sample size, however (say, over 500) could also become a problem inasmuch as we would then be prone to committing Type II errors. That is, we would accept the findings of our research, when in fact we should reject them. In other words, with too large a sample size, even weak relationships (say a correlation of 0.10 between two variables) might reach significance levels, and we would be inclined to believe that these significant relationships found in the sample were indeed true of the population, when in reality they may not be. Thus, neither too large nor too small sample sizes help research projects.

Another point to consider, even with the appropriate sample size, is whether stat- istical significance is more relevant than practical significance. For instance, a cor- relation of 0.25 may be statistically significant, but since this explains only about 6% of the variance (0.252), how meaningful is it in terms of practical utility?

Roscoe (1975) proposes the following rules of thumb for determining sample size:

1. Sample sizes larger than 30 and less than 500 are appropriate for most research.

2. Where samples are to be broken into subsamples (males/females, juniors/seniors, etc.), a minimum sample size of 30 for each category is necessary.

3. In multivariate research (including multiple regression analyses), the sample size should be several times (preferably ten times or more) as large as the number of variables in the study.

4. For simple experimental research with tight experimental controls (matched pairs, etc.), successful research is possible with samples as small as 10 to 20 in size.

13.17 EFFICIENCY IN SAMPLING

Efficiency in sampling is attained when, for a given level of precision (standard error), the sample size could be reduced, or for a given sample size (n), the level of precision could be increased. Some probability sampling designs are more efficient than others. The simple random sampling procedure is not always the most efficient plan to adopt; some other probability sampling designs are often more efficient. A stratified random sampling plan is often the most efficient, and a disproportionate stratified random sampling design has been shown to be more efficient than a proportionate sampling design in many cases. Cluster sampling is less efficient than

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 305

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 297

Table 13.3 Sample size for a given population size

N S N S N S

10 10 220 140 1200 291

15 14 230 144 1300 297

20 19 240 148 1400 302

25 24 250 152 1500 306

30 28 260 155 1600 310

35 32 270 159 1700 313

40 36 280 162 1800 317

45 40 290 165 1900 320

50 44 300 175 2000 322

55 48 320 181 2200 327

60 52 340 191 2400 331

65 56 360 196 2600 335

70 59 380 205 2800 338

75 63 400 210 3000 341

80 66 420 217 3500 346

85 70 440 226 4000 351

90 73 460 242 4500 354

95 76 480 248 5000 357

100 80 500 260 6000 361

110 86 550 265 7000 364

120 92 600 274 8000 367

130 97 650 278 9000 368

140 103 700 169 10000 370

150 108 750 186 15000 375

160 113 800 201 20000 377

170 118 850 214 30000 379

180 123 900 234 40000 380

190 127 950 254 50000 381

200 132 1000 269 75000 382

210 136 1100 285 1000000 384

simple random sampling because there is generally more homogeneity among the subjects in the clusters than is found in the elements in the population. Multistage cluster sampling is more efficient than single-stage cluster sampling when there is more heterogeneity found in the earlier stages. There is often a trade-off between time and cost efficiencies (as achieved in nonprobability sampling designs) and

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 306

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

298 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

precision efficiencies (as achieved in many probability sampling plans). The choice of a sampling plan thus depends on the objectives of the research, as well as on the extent and nature of efficiency desired.

13.18 SAMPLING AS RELATED TO QUALITATIVE STUDIES

Sampling for qualitative research is as important as sampling for quantitative research. Qualitative sampling begins with precisely defining the target popula- tion. As a sampling technique, qualitative research generally uses nonprobability sampling as it does not aim to draw statistical inference. Purposive sampling is one technique that is often employed in qualitative investigation: subjects are selected on the basis of expertise in the subject that is being investigated. It is important that the subjects are chosen in such a way that they reflect the diversity of the population.

One form of purposive sampling is theoretical sampling, introduced by Glaser and Strauss (1967) in their work on grounded theory. The term grounded theory expresses the idea that theory will emerge from data through an iterative pro- cess that involves repeated sampling, collection of data, and analysis of data until “theoretical saturation” is reached. Theoretical saturation is reached when no new information about the subject emerges in repeated cases. Theoretical sampling may or may not begin with purposive sampling, but the sampling of additional subjects is directed by the emerging theoretical framework. According to Glaser, theoretical sampling takes place when “the analyst jointly collects, codes, and analyzes his data and decides what data to collect next and where to find them, in order to develop his theory as it emerges” (1978, p. 36).

Because it is impossible to predict when theoretical saturation is reached, you cannot determine how many subjects will need to be sampled at the beginning of your study. Instead, the general rule in qualitative research is that you continue to sample until you are not getting any new information or are no longer gaining new insights. Note that the sample size will, therefore, at least partly, depend on the heterogeneity of the population.

13.19 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS

Awareness of sampling designs and sample size helps managers to understand why a particular method of sampling is used by researchers. It also facilitates under- standing of the cost implications of different designs, and the trade-off between precision and confidence vis-à-vis the costs. This enables managers to understand the risk they take in implementing changes based on the results of the research study. While reading journal articles, this knowledge also helps managers to assess the generalizability of the findings and analyze the implications of trying out the recommendations made therein in their own system.

SUMMARY

Sampling design decisions are important aspects of research design and include both the sampling plan to be used and the sample size that will be needed. Probabil- ity sampling plans lend themselves to generalizability and nonprobability sampling designs, though not generalizable, offer convenience and timely information. Some probability plans are more efficient than others. Though nonprobability sampling plans have limitations in terms of generalizability, they are often the only designs available for certain types of investigation, as in the case of exploratory research, or where information is needed quickly, or is available with only certain special groups.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 307

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 299

The sample size is determined by the level of precision and confidence desired in estimating the population parameters, as well as the variability in the population itself. Cost considerations could also play a part. The generalizability of the findings from a study of the sample to the population is dependent on its representativeness − that is, the sophistication of the sampling design used and the sample size. Sample data are used for both estimating population parameters and hypothesis testing.

Care should be taken not to overgeneralize the results of any study to populations that are not represented by the sample. This is a problem common in some research studies.

In the next two chapters, we will see how the data gathered from a sample of respondents in the population are analyzed to test the hypotheses generated and find answers to the research questions.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

Identify the relevant population for the following research foci, and suggest the appropriate sampling design to investigate the issues, explaining why they are appropriate. Wherever necessary, identify the sampling frame as well.

A company wants to investigate the initial reactions of heavy soft-drink users to a new “all natural” soft drink.

A hospital administrator wants to find out if the single parents working in the hospital have a higher rate of absenteeism than parents who are not single.

A researcher would like to assess the extent of pilferage in the materials storage warehouses of manufacturing firms.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 308

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

300 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

The director of human resources wants to investigate the relationship between drug abuse and dysfunctional behavior of blue-collar workers in a particular plant.

A marketer wants to generate some ideas on how women differ from men in acquiring product knowledge about cars.

Explain why cluster sampling is a probability sampling design.

What are the advantages and disadvantages of cluster sampling?

Describe a situation where you would consider the use of cluster sampling.

Explain what precision and confidence are and how they influence sample size.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 309

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 301

Discuss what is meant by the statement: “There is a trade-off between precision and confidence under certain conditions.”

The use of a convenience sample used in organizational research is correct because all members share the same organizational stimuli and go through almost the same kinds of experience in their organizational life. Comment.

“Use of a sample of 5000 is not necessarily better than one of 500.” How would you react to this statement?

Nonprobability sampling designs ought to be preferred to probability sampling designs in some cases. Explain with an example.

Because there seems to be a trade-off between accuracy and confidence for any given sample size, accuracy should always be considered more important than precision. Explain with reasons why you do or do not agree.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 310

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

302 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Overgeneralizations give rise to much confusion and other problems for research- ers who try to replicate the findings. Explain what is meant by this.

Double sampling is probably the least used of all sampling designs in organiz- ational research. Do you agree? Provide reasons for your answer.

Why do you think the sampling design should feature in a research proposal?

Now do Exercises 13.1 to 13.6.

For the situations presented in Exercises 13.1 to Exercise 13.6 below, indicate what would be the relevant population and the most appropriate sampling design. Make sure you discuss the reasons for your answers.

Exercise 13.1

A medical inspector wants to estimate the overall average monthly occupancy rates of the cancer wards in 80 different hospitals that are evenly located in the northwestern, southeastern, central, and southern suburbs of New York City.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 311

Chapter

13

Sampling

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 303

Exercise 13.2

A magazine article suggested that “Consumers aged 35 to 44 will soon be the nation’s biggest spenders, so advertisers must learn how to appeal to this over- the-thrill crowd.” If this suggestion appeals to an apparel manufacturer, what should the sampling design be to assess the tastes of this group?

Exercise 13.3

The McArthur Co. produces special vacuum cleaners for conveniently cleaning the inside of cars. About a thousand of these, with stamped serial numbers, are produced every month and stored serially in a stockroom. Once a month an inspector does a quality control check on 50 of these. When he certifies them as to quality, the units are released from the stockroom for sale. The production and sales managers, however, are not satisfied with the quality control check since, quite often, many of the units sold are returned by customers because of various types of defect. What would be the most useful sampling plan to test the 50 units?

Exercise 13.4

A consultant had administered a questionnaire to some 285 employees using a simple random sampling procedure. As she looked at the responses, she suspected that two questions might not have been clear to the respondents. She would like to know if her suspicion is well-founded.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 312

Chapter

13

Research Methods for Business

304 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Exercise 13.5

The executive board of a relatively small university located in Europe wants to determine the attitude of their students toward various aspects of the univer- sity. The university, founded in 1928, is a fully accredited government-financed university with 11000 students. The university specializes in the social sciences and humanities and has five faculties, six service departments, eight research centers, and two graduate schools. The executive board has asked you to come up with a sampling plan. Develop a sampling plan and pay attention to the fol- lowing aspects: target population, the sampling frame, the sample technique, and the sample size.

Exercise 13.6

T-Mobile is a mobile network operator headquartered in Bonn, Germany. The company has enlisted your help as a consultant to develop and test a model on the determinants of subscriber churn in the German mobile telephone market. Develop a sampling plan and pay specific attention to the following aspects.

Define the target population. Discuss in as much detail as possible the sampling frame and the sampling design that you would use. Give reasons for your choice.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 313

Chapter

14

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 305

Chapter 14

Quantitative data analysis

Topics discussed:

� Getting the data ready for analysis

� Getting a feel for the data

� Excelsior Enterprises− descriptive statistics part 1

� Testing goodness of data

� Excelsior Enterprises− descriptive statistics part 2

Chapter objectives

After completing Chapter 14 you should be able to:

1. Code and enter interview responses.

2. Edit interview responses.

3. Handle omissions.

4. Transform data.

5. Create a data file.

6. Get a feel for the data.

7. Test the goodness of data.

After data have been collected from a representative sample of the population, the next step is to analyze them to test the research hypotheses. However, before we can start analyzing the data to test hypotheses, some preliminary steps need to be completed. These help to ensure that the data are accurate, complete, and suitable for further analysis. This chapter addresses these preliminary steps in detail.

The easiest way to illustrate data analysis is through a case. We will therefore intro- duce the Excelsior Enterprises case first.

EXAMPLE

Excelsior Enterprises is a medium-sized company, manufacturing and selling instruments and supplies needed by the health care industry, including blood pressure instruments, surgical instruments, dental accessories, and so on. The company, with a total of 360 employees working three shifts, is doing reasonably well but could do far better if it did not experience employee turnover at almost all levels and in all departments. The president of the company called in a research team to study the situation and to make recommendations on the turnover problem.

Since access to those who had left the company would be difficult, the research team suggested to the president that they talk to the current employees and,

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 314

Chapter

14

Research Methods for Business

306 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

based on their input and a literature survey, try to get at the factors influ- encing employees’ intentions to stay with, or leave, the company. Since past research has shown that intention to leave (ITL) is an excellent predictor of actual turnover, the president concurred.

The team first conducted an unstructured interview with about 50 employees at various levels and from different departments. Their broad statement was: “We are here to find out how you experience your work life. Tell us whatever you consider is important for you in your job, as issues relate to your work, the environment, the organization, supervision, and whatever else you think is relevant. If we get a good handle on the issues involved, we may be able to make appropriate recommendations to management to enhance the quality of your work life. We would just like to talk to you now, and administer a questionnaire later.”

Each interview typically lasted about 45 minutes, and notes on the responses were written down by the team members. When the responses were tabulated, it became clear that the issues most frequently brought up by the respondents, in one form or another, related to three main areas: the job (employees said the jobs were dull or too complex; there was lack of freedom to do the job as one wanted to, etc.), perceived inequities (remarks such as “I put much more in my work than I get out of it”); and burnout (comments such as “there is so much work to be done that by the end of the day we are physically and emotionally exhausted”; “we feel the frequent need to take time off because of exhaustion”; etc.).

A literature survey confirmed that these variables were good predictors of inten- tion to leave and subsequent turnover. In addition, job satisfaction was also found to be an important predictor of intention to leave. A theoretical frame- work was developed based on the interviews and the literature survey, and four hypotheses (stated later) were developed.

Next, a questionnaire was designed incorporating well-validated and reliable measures for job enrichment, perceived equity, burnout, job satisfaction, and intention to leave. Perceived equity was measured by five survey items: (1) “I invest more in my work than I get out of it”; (2) “I exert myself too much consid- ering what I get back in return”; (3) “For the efforts I put into the organization, I get much in return” (reversed); (4) “If I take into account my dedication, the company ought to give me better training”; and (5) “In general, the benefits I receive from the organization outweigh the effort I put in it” (reversed). Job enrichment was measured on a four-item Likert scale: (1) “The job is quite simple and repetitive” (reversed); (2) “The job requires me to use a number of complex or higher-level skills”; (3) “The job requires a lot of cooperative work with other people”; and (4) “The job itself is not very significant or important in the broader scheme of things” (reversed). Participants responded to these items on a five-point scale, ranging from “I disagree completely” (1) to “I agree com- pletely” (5). Burnout was measured with The Burnout Measure Short Version (BMS). The BMS includes ten items that measure levels of physical, emotional, and mental exhaustion of the individual. Respondents are asked to rate the frequency with which they experience each of the items appearing in the ques- tionnaire (e.g., being tired or helpless) on a scale ranging from 1 (“never”) to 5 (“always”). Job satisfaction was measured by a single-item rating of “satisfaction with your current job,” using a five-point “not at all−very much” scale. Intention to leave was measured using two survey items: “With what level of certainty do you intend to leave this organization within the next year for another type of job?” (item 1) “for a similar type of job?” (item 2). Participants indicated on a four-point rating scale their level of certainty. Demographic variables such as

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 315

Chapter

14

Quantitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 307

age, education, gender, tenure, department, and work shift were also included in the questionnaire.

The questionnaire was administered personally to 174 employees who were chosen on a disproportionate stratified random sampling basis. The responses were entered into the computer. Thereafter, the data were submitted for analysis to test the following hypotheses, which were formulated by the researchers:

H1: Job enrichment has a negative effect on intention to leave.

H2: Perceived equity has a negative effect on intention to leave.

H3: Burnout has a positive effect on intention to leave.

H4: Job satisfaction mediates the relationship between job enrichment, per- ceived equity, and burnout on intention to leave.

It may be pertinent to point out here that the four hypotheses derived from the theoretical framework are particularly relevant for finding answers to the turnover issue. The results of testing the hypotheses will certainly offer insights into how much of the variance in intention to leave can be explained by the independent variables, and what corrective action, if any, needs to be taken.

14.1 GETTING THE DATA READY FOR ANALYSIS

After data are obtained through questionnaires, they need to be coded, keyed in, and edited. That is, a categorization scheme has to be set up before the data can be typed in. Then, outliers, inconsistencies, and blank responses, if any, have to be handled in some way. Each of these stages of data preparation is discussed below.

14.1.1 Coding and data entry

The first step in data preparation is data coding. Data coding involves assigning a number to the participants’ responses so they can be entered into a database. In Chapter 9, we discussed the convenience of electronic surveys for collecting questionnaire data; such surveys facilitate the entry of the responses directly into the computer without manual keying in of the data. However, if, for whatever reason, this cannot be done, then it is perhaps a good idea to use a coding sheet first to transcribe the data from the questionnaire and then key in the data. This method, in contrast to flipping through each questionnaire for each item, avoids confusion, especially when there are many questions and a large number of questionnaires as well.

Coding the responses

In the Excelsior Enterprises questionnaire, we have 22 items measuring perceived justice, job enrichment, burnout, job satisfaction, and intention to leave, and six demographic variables, as shown in Figure 14.1, a sample questionnaire.

The responses of this particular employee (participant # 1 in the data file) to the first 22 questions can be coded by using the actual number circled by the respondent (1, 2, 3, 1, 4, 5, 1, 3, 3, etc.). Coding the demographic variables is somewhat less obvious. For instance, tenure is a special case, because it is a two-category variable. It is possible to use a coding approach that assigns a 1=part-time and a 2=full-time. However, using 0=part-time and 1=full-time (this is called dummy coding) is by far the most popular and recommended approach because it makes our lives easier

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 316

Chapter

14

Research Methods for Business

308 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Figure 14.1 Sample questionnaire

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 317

Chapter

14

Quantitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 309

in the data analysis stage. Hence, we code tenure (full-time) with 1 for participant #1. Work shift (third shift) can be coded 3, department (production) 2, and age 54. Gender can be coded 0 (male) Finally, education (less than high school) can be coded 1.

At this stage you should also think about how you want to code nonresponses. Some researchers leave nonresponses blank, others assign a “9,” a “99” or a “.” All the approaches are fine, as long as you code all the nonresponses in the same way.

Human errors can occur while coding. At least 10% of the coded questionnaires should therefore be checked for coding accuracy. Their selection may follow a sys- tematic sampling procedure. That is, every nth form coded could be verified for accuracy. If many errors are found in the sample, all items may have to be checked.

Data entry

After responses have been coded, they can be entered into a database. Raw data can be entered through any software program. For instance, the SPSS Data Editor, which looks like a spreadsheet and is shown in Figure 14.2, can enter, edit, and view the contents of the data file.

Figure 14.2 The SPSS Data Editor

Each row of the editor represents a case or observation (in this case a participant of our study− 174 in the Excelsior Enterprises study), and each column represents a variable (here variables are defined as the different items of information that you collect for your cases; there are thus 28 variables in the Excelsior Enterprises questionnaire).

It is important to always use the first column for identification purposes; assign a number to every questionnaire, write this number on the first page of the question- naire, and enter this number in the first column of your data file. This allows you to compare the data in the data file with the answers of the participants, even after you have rearranged your data file.

Then, start entering the participants’ responses into the data file.

14.1.2 Editing data

After the data are keyed in, they need to be edited. For instance, the blank responses, if any, have to be handled in some way, and inconsistent data have to be checked and followed up. Data editing deals with detecting and correcting illogical, inconsistent,

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 318

Chapter

14

Research Methods for Business

310 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

or illegal data and omissions in the information returned by the participants of the study.

An example of an illogical response is an outlier response. An outlier is an obser- vation that is substantially different from the other observations. An outlier is not always an error even though data errors (entry errors) are a likely source of outliers. Because outliers have a large impact on the research results they should be invest- igated carefully to make sure that they are correct. You can check the dispersion of nominal and/or ordinal variables by obtaining minimum and maximum values and frequency tables. This will quickly reveal the most obvious outliers. For interval and ratio data, visual aids (such as a scatterplot or a boxplot) are good methods to check for outliers.

Inconsistent responses are responses that are not in harmony with other information. For instance, a participant in our study might have answered the perceived equity statements as in Figure 14.3. Note that all the answers of this employee indicate that the participant finds that the benefits she receives from the organization balance the efforts she puts into her job, except for the answer to the third statement. From the other four responses we might infer that the participant in all probability feels that, for the efforts she puts into the organization, she does get much in return and has made a mistake in responding to this particular statement. The response to this statement could then be edited by the researcher.

Figure 14.3 Example of a possible inconsistent answer

It is, however, possible that the respondent deliberately indicated that she does not get much in return for the efforts she puts into the organization. If such were to be the case, we would be introducing a bias by editing the data. Hence, great care has to be taken in dealing with inconsistent responses such as these. Whenever possible, it is desirable to follow up with the respondent to get the correct data, even though this is an expensive solution.

Illegal codes are values that are not specified in the coding instructions. For example, a code of “6” in question 1 (I invest more in my work than I get out of it) would be an illegal code. The best way to check for illegal codes is to have the computer produce a frequency distribution and check it for illegal codes.

Not all respondents answer every item in the questionnaire. Omissions may occur because respondents did not understand the question, did not know the answer, or were not willing to answer the question.

If a substantial number of questions− say, 25% of the items in the questionnaire− have been left unanswered, it may be a good idea to throw out the questionnaire and not include it in the data set for analysis. In this event, it is important to mention the number of returned but unused responses due to excessive missing data in the final report submitted to the sponsor of the study. If, however, only two or three items are left blank in a questionnaire with, say, 30 or more items, we need to decide how these blank responses are to be handled.

One way to handle a blank response is to ignore it when the analyses are done. This approach is possible in all statistical programs and is the default option in most of

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 319

Chapter

14

Quantitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 311

them. A disadvantage of this approach is that, of course, it will reduce the sample size, sometimes even to an inappropriate size, whenever that particular variable is involved in the analyses. Moreover, if the missing data are not missing completely at random, this method may bias the results of your study. For this reason, ignoring the blank responses is best suited to instances in which we have gathered a large amount of data, the number of missing data is relatively small, and relationships are so strong that they are not affected by the missing data (Hair et al., 1995).

An alternative solution would be to look at the participant’s pattern of responses to other questions and, from these answers, deduce a logical answer to the question for the missing response. A second alternative solution would be to assign to the item the mean value of the responses of all those who have responded to that particular item. In fact, there are many ways of handling blank responses (see Hair et al., 1995), each of them having its own particular advantages and disadvantages.

Note that if many of the respondents have answered “don’t know” to a particular item or items, further investigation may well be worth while. The question might not have been clear or, for some reason, participants could have been reluctant or unable to answer the question.

14.1.3 Data transformation

Data transformation, a variation of data coding, is the process of changing the original numerical representation of a quantitative value to another value. Data are typically changed to avoid problems in the next stage of the data analysis process. For example, economists often use a logarithmic transformation so that the data are more evenly distributed. If, for instance, income data, which are often unevenly distributed, are reduced to their logarithmic value, the high incomes are brought closer to the lower end of the scale and provide a distribution closer to a normal curve.

Another type of data transformation is reverse scoring. Take, for instance, the per- ceived inequity measure of the Excelsior Enterprises case. Perceived inequity is measured by five survey items: (1) “I invest more in my work than I get out of it”; (2) “I exert myself too much considering what I get back in return”; (3) “For the efforts I put into the organization, I get much in return” (reversed); (4) “If I take into account my dedication, the organization ought to give me a better practical training”; and (5) “In general, the benefits I receive from the organization outweigh the effort I put in” (reversed). For the first, second, and fourth items, a score indicating high agreement would be negative, but for the third and fifth questions, a score indicat- ing high agreement would be positive. To maintain consistency in the meaning of a response, the first, second, and fourth items have to be reverse scored (note that we are measuring equity and not inequity). In this case, a 5 (“I completely agree”) would be transformed to a 1 (“I completely disagree”), a 4 to a 2, and so forth.

Data transformation is also necessary when several questions have been used to measure a single concept. In such cases, scores on the original questions have to be combined into a single score (but only after we have established that the interitem consistency is satisfactory (see Testing goodness of data, later on in this chapter). For instance, because five items have been used to measure the concept “perceived equity”, a new “perceived equity” score has to be calculated from the scores on the five individual items (but only after items 1, 2, and 4 have been reverse coded). This involves calculating the summed score (per case/participant) and then dividing it by the number of items (five in this case). For example, our employee # 1 has circled, respectively, 1, 2, 3, 1, and 4 on the five participation in decision-making questions; his or her scores on the items, once items 1, 2, and 4 have been reverse coded, are 5, 4, 3, 5, and 4. The combined score on perceived justice would be

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 320

Chapter

14

Research Methods for Business

312 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

5 + 4 + 3 + 5 + 4 = 21/5 = 4.2). This combined score is included in a new column in SPSS. It is easy to compute the new variables, using the Compute dialog box, which opens when the Transform icon is chosen (Figure 14.4).

Figure 14.4 Transforming data with SPSS

Note that it is useful to set up a scheme for categorizing the responses such that the several items measuring a concept are all grouped together. If the questions measuring a concept are not contiguous but scattered over various parts of the questionnaire, care has to be taken to include all the items without any omission or wrong inclusion.

14.2 GETTING A FEEL FOR THE DATA

We can acquire a feel for the data by obtaining a visual summary or by checking the central tendency and the dispersion of a variable. We can also get to know our data by examining the relation between two variables. In Chapter 12, we explained that different statistical operations on variables are possible, depending on the level at which a variable is measured. Table 14.1 summarizes the relationship between scale type, data analysis, and methods of obtaining a visual summary for variables.

Table 14.1 shows that, depending on the scale of our measures, the mode, median, or mean, and the semi-interquartile range, standard deviation, or variance will give us a good idea of how the participants in our study have reacted to the items in the questionnaire. These statistics can be easily obtained, and will indicate whether the responses range satisfactorily over the scale. If the response to each individual item in a scale does not have a good spread (range) and shows very little variability, then the researcher may suspect that the particular question was probably not properly worded. Biases, if any, may also be detected if the respondents have tended to respond similarly to all items − that is, they have stuck to only certain points on the scale. Remember that if there is no variability in the data, then no variance can be explained! Getting a feel for the data is thus the necessary first step in all data

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 321

Chapter

14

Quantitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 313

Table 14.1 Scale type, data analysis, and methods of obtaining a visual summary for variables

Scale Examples

Measures of central tendency . . . for a single variable

Measures of dispersion . . . for a single variable

Visual sum- mary . . . for a single vari- able

Measure of relation . . . between variables

Visual sum- mary of relation . . . between variables

Nominal Social secur- ity number, gender

Mode — Bar chart, pie chart

Contingency table (Cross- tab)

Stacked bars, Clustered bars

Ordinal Satisfaction rat- ing on a 5-point scale (1=not satisfied at all; 5=extremely satisfied)

Median Semi- interquartile range

Bar chart, pie chart

Contingency table (Cross- tab)

Stacked bars, Clustered bars

Interval Arithmetic mean

Minimum, maximum, standard devi- ation, variance, coefficient of variation

Histogram, scatterplot, box-and- whisker plot

Correlations Scatterplots

Ratio Age, Sales Arithmetic or geometric mean

Minimum, maximum, standard devi- ation, variance, coefficient of variation

Histogram, scatterplot, box-and- whisker plot

Correlations Scatterplots

analysis. Based on this initial feel, further detailed analyses may be undertaken to test the goodness of the data.

Researchers go to great lengths to obtain the central tendency, the range, the disper- sion, and other statistics for every single item measuring the dependent and inde- pendent variables, especially when the measures for a concept are newly developed.

Descriptive statistics for a single variable are provided by frequencies, measures of central tendency, and dispersion. These are now described.

14.2.1 Frequencies

Frequencies simply refer to the number of times various subcategories of a certain phenomenon occur, from which the percentage and the cumulative percentage of their occurrence can be easily calculated.

Excelsior Enterprises: frequencies

The frequencies for the number of individuals in the various departments for the Excelsior Enterprises sample are shown in Output 14.1. It may be seen therefrom that the greatest number of individuals in the sample came from the production department (28.1%), followed by the sales department (25.3%). Only three individu- als (1.7%) came from public relations, and five individuals each from the finance, maintenance, and accounting departments (2.9% from each). The low numbers in the sample in some of the departments are a function of the total population (very few members) in those departments.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 322

Chapter

14

Research Methods for Business

314 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

OUTPUT 14.1: FREQUENCIES

From the menus, choose:

Analyze

Descriptive Statistics

Frequencies

[Select the relevant variables]

Choose needed:

Statistics . . .

Charts . . .

Format [for the order in which the results are to be displayed]

OUTPUT: RESPONDENT’S DEPARTMENT

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 323

Chapter

14

Quantitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 315

Frequency Percent Valid percent Cumulative

percent

Marketing 13 7.5 7.5 7.5

Production 49 28.1 28.1 35.6

Sales 44 25.3 25.3 60.9

Finance 5 2.9 2.9 63.8

Servicing 34 19.5 19.5 83.3

Maintenance 5 2.9 2.9 86.2

Personnel 16 9.2 9.2 95.4

Public Relations

3 1.7 1.7 97.1

Accounting 5 2.9 2.9 100.0

Total 174 100.0 100.0 100.0

From the frequencies obtained for the other variables (results not shown here) it was found that 79.9% of the respondents were men and 20.1% women; about 62% worked the first shift, 20% the second shift, and 18% the third shift. About 16% of the respondents worked part time and 84% full time. About 8% had less than a high school diploma, 39% a high school diploma, 32% a college degree, 20% a master’s degree, and 1% had doctoral degrees.

We thus have a profile of the employees in this organization, which is useful for describing the sample in the “methods” section of the written report (see Chapter 17). Other instances where frequency distributions would be useful are when: (1) a marketing manager wants to know how many units (and what propor- tions or percentages) of each brand of coffee are sold in a particular region during a given period; (2) a tax consultant wishes to keep count of the number of times different sizes of firms (small, medium, large) are audited by the IRS; and (3) the financial analyst wants to keep track of the number of times the shares of manufac- turing, industrial, and utility companies lose or gain more than ten points on the New York Stock Exchange over a six-month period.

Bar charts and pie charts

Frequencies can also be visually displayed as bar charts, histograms, or pie charts. Bar charts, histograms, and pie charts help us to understand our data.

Excelsior Enterprises: bar chart

Figure 14.5 provides a graphic representation of the results listed in the table in Output 14.1.

Frequency distributions, bar charts, histograms, and pie charts provide a great deal of basic information about the data. Measures of central tendency and dispersion will help us to further understand our data. These are discussed next.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 324

Chapter

14

Research Methods for Business

316 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Figure 14.5 Bar chart of categories of employees

14.2.2 Measures of central tendency and dispersion

There are three measures of central tendency: the mean, the median, and the mode. Measures of dispersion include the range, the standard deviation, the variance (where the measure of central tendency is the mean), and the interquartile range (where the measure of central tendency is the median).

Measures of central tendency

The mean

The mean, or the average, is a measure of central tendency that offers a general picture of the data without unnecessarily inundating one with each of the obser- vations in a data set. For example, the production department might keep detailed records on how many units of a product are being produced each day. However, to estimate the raw materials inventory, all that the manager might want to know is how many units per month, on average, the department has been producing over the past six months. This measure of central tendency − that is, the mean −might offer the manager a good idea of the quantity of materials that need to be stocked.

The mean or average of a set of, say, ten observations, is the sum of the ten individual observations divided by ten (the total number of observations).

The median

The median is the central item in a group of observations when they are arrayed in either an ascending or a descending order. Let us take an example to examine how the median is determined as a measure of central tendency.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 325

Chapter

14

Quantitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 317

EXAMPLE

Let’s say the annual salaries of nine employees in a department are as fol- lows: $65 000, $30 000, $25 000, $64 000, $35 000, $63 000, $32 000, $60 000, and $61 000. The mean salary here works out to be about $48 333, but the median is $60 000. That is, when arrayed in ascending order, the figures will be as follows: $25 000, $30 000, $32 000, $35 000, $60 000, $61 000, $63 000, $64 000, $65 000, and the figure in the middle is $60 000. If there is an even number of employees, then the median will be the average of the middle two salaries.

The mode

In some cases, a set of observations does not lend itself to a meaningful repres- entation through either the mean or the median, but can be signified by the most frequently occurring phenomenon. For instance, in a department where there are 10 white women, 24 white men, 3 African American women, and 2 Asian women, the most frequently occurring group − the mode − is the white men. Neither a mean nor a median is calculable or applicable in this case. There is also no way of indicating any measure of dispersion.

We have illustrated how the mean, median, and the mode can be useful measures of central tendency, based on the type of data we have. We will now examine dispersion.

Measures of dispersion

Apart from knowing that the measure of central tendency is the mean, median, or mode (depending on the type of available data), one would also like to know about the variability that exists in a set of observations. Like the measure of central tendency, the measure of dispersion is also unique to nominal and interval data.

Two sets of data might have the same mean, but the dispersions could be different. For example, if Company A sold 30, 40, and 50 units of a product during the months of April, May, and June, respectively, and Company B sold 10, 40, and 70 units during the same period, the average units sold per month by both companies is the same − 40 units− but the variability or the dispersion in the latter company is larger.

The three measurements of dispersion connected with the mean are the range, the variance, and the standard deviation, which are explained below.

Range

Range refers to the extreme values in a set of observations. The range is between 30 and 50 for Company A (a dispersion of 20 units), while the range is between 10 and 70 units (a dispersion of 60 units) for Company B. Another more useful measure of dispersion is the variance.

Variance

The variance is calculated by subtracting the mean from each of the observations in the data set, taking the square of this difference, and dividing the total of these by the number of observations. In the above example, the variance for each of the two companies is:

Variance for Company A = (30−40) 2+(40−40)2+(50−50)2

3 = 66.7

Variance for Company B = (10−40) 2+(40−40)2+(70−40)2

3 = 600

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 326

Chapter

14

Research Methods for Business

318 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

As we can see, the variance is much larger in Company B than Company A. This makes it more difficult for the manager of Company B to estimate how many goods to stock than it is for the manager of Company A. Thus, variance gives an indication of how dispersed the data in a data set are.

Standard deviation

The standard deviation, which is another measure of dispersion for interval and ratio scaled data, offers an index of the spread of a distribution or the variability in the data. It is a very commonly used measure of dispersion, and is simply the square root of the variance. In the case of the above two companies, the standard deviation for Companies A and B would be√66.7 and√600 or 8.167 and 24.495, respectively.

The mean and standard deviation are the most common descriptive statistics for interval and ratio scaled data. The standard deviation, in conjunction with the mean, is a very useful tool because of the following statistical rules, in a normal distribution:

1. Practically all observations fall within three standard deviations of the average or the mean.

2. More than 90% of the observations are within two standard deviations of the mean.

3. More than half of the observations are within one standard deviation of the mean.

Other measures of dispersion

When the median is the measure of central tendency, percentiles, deciles, and quart- iles become meaningful. Just as the median divides the total realm of observations into two equal halves, the quartile divides it into four equal parts, the decile into ten, and the percentile into 100 equal parts. The percentile is useful when huge masses of data, such as the GRE or GMAT scores, are handled. When the area of observations is divided into 100 equal parts, there are 99 percentile points. Any given score has a probability of 0.01 that it will fall in any one of those points. If John’s score is in the 16th percentile, it indicates that 84% of those who took the exam scored better than he did, while 15% did worse.

Oftentimes we are interested in knowing where we stand in comparison to others − are we in the middle, in the upper 10 or 25%, or in the lower 20 or 25%, or where? For instance, if in a company-administered test, Mr Chou scores 78 out of a total of 100 points, he may be unhappy if he is in the bottom 10% among his colleagues (the test-takers), but may be reasonably pleased if he is in the top 10%, despite the fact that his score remains the same. His standing in relation to the others can be determined by the central tendency median and the percentile he falls in.

The measure of dispersion for the median, the interquartile range, consists of the middle 50% of the observations (i.e., observations excluding the bottom and top 25% quartiles). The interquartile range is very useful when comparisons are to be made among several groups. For instance, telephone companies can compare long- distance charges of customers in several areas by taking samples of customer bills from each of the cities to be compared. By plotting the first and third quartiles and comparing the median and the spread, they can get a good idea of where billings tend to be highest, to what extent customers vary in the frequency of use of long- distance calls, and so on. This is done by creating a box-and-whisker plot for each area. The box-and-whisker plot is a graphic device that portrays central tendency, percentiles, and variability. A box is drawn, extending from the first to the third

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 327

Chapter

14

Quantitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 319

quartile, and lines are drawn from either side of the box to the extreme scores, as shown in Figure 14.6(a). Figure 14.6(b) has the median represented by a dot within each box. Side-by-side comparisons of the various plots clearly indicate the highest value, the range, and the spread for each area or city. For a fuller discussion on this, refer to Salvia (1990).

(a) Box-and-whisker plot; (b) comparison of telephone bills in three cities

Figure 14.6

In sum, we have illustrated how the mean, median, and the mode can be useful measures of central tendency, depending on the type of available data. Likewise, we have shown how the standard deviation (and variance, which is the square of standard deviation), and the interquartile range are useful measures of dispersion. Obviously, there is no measure of dispersion associated with the mode.

14.2.3 Relationships between variables

In a research project that includes several variables, beyond knowing the descriptive statistics of the variables, we would often like to know how one variable is related to another. That is, we would like to see the nature, direction, and significance of the bivariate relationships of the variables used in the study (i.e., the relationship between any two variables among the variables tapped in the study).

Nonparametric tests are available to assess the relationship between variables meas- ured on a nominal or an ordinal scale. Spearman’s rank correlation and Kendall’s rank correlation are used to examine relationships between two ordinal variables. A correlation matrix is used to examine relationships between interval and/or ratio variables.

Relationship between two nominal variables: χ2 test

We might sometimes want to know if there is a relationship between two nominal variables or whether they are independent of each other. As examples: (1) Is viewing a television advertisement of a product (yes/no) related to buying that product by individuals (buy/don’t buy)? (2) Is the type of job done by individuals (white- collar job/blue-collar job) a function of the color of their skin (white/nonwhite)? Such comparisons are possible by organizing data by groups or categories and seeing if there are any statistically significant relationships. For example, we might collect data from a sample of 55 individuals whose color of skin and nature of jobs, culled from a frequency count, might be illustrated as in Table 14.2 in a two-by-two contingency table. Just by looking at Table 14.2, a clear pattern seems to emerge that those who are white hold white-collar jobs. Only a few of the nonwhites hold

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 328

Chapter

14

Research Methods for Business

320 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

white-collar jobs. Thus, there does seem to be a relationship between the color of the skin and the type of job handled; the two do not seem to be independent. This can be statistically confirmed by the chi-square (χ2) test− a nonparametric test− which indicates whether or not the observed pattern is due to chance. As we know, nonparametric tests are used when normality of distributions cannot be assumed as in nominal or ordinal data. The χ2 test compares the expected frequency (based on probability) and the observed frequency, and the χ2 statistic is obtained by the formula:

χ2 = ∑ (Oi− Ei)2

Ei

where χ2 is the chi-square statistic;Oi is the observed frequency of the ith cell; and Ei is the expected frequency. The χ2 statistic with its level of significance can be obtained for any set of nominal data through computer analysis.

Table 14.2 Contingency table of skin color and job type

Skin color White collar Blue collar Total

White 30 5 35

Nonwhite 2 18 20

Total 32 23 55

Thus, in testing for differences in relationships among nominally scaled variables, the χ2 (chi-square) statistic comes in handy. The null hypothesis would be set to state that there is no significant relationship between two variables (color of skin and nature of the job, in the above example), and the alternate hypothesis would state that there is a significant relationship.

The chi-square statistic is associated with the degrees of freedom (df), which denote whether or not a significant relationship exists between two nominal variables. The number of degrees of freedom is one less than the number of cells in the columns and rows. If there are four cells (two in a column and two in a row), then the number of degrees of freedom would be 1: [(2− 1)× (2− 1)]. The chi-square statistic for various df is provided in Table III in the statistical tables toward the end of the book.

The χ2 statistic can also be used for multiple levels of two nominal variables. For instance, one might be interested to know if four groups of employees−production, sales, marketing, and R&D personnel− react to a policy in four different ways (i.e., with no interest at all, with mild interest, moderate interest, and intense interest). Here, the χ2 value for the test of independence is generated by cross-tabulating the data in 16 cells − that is, classifying the data in terms of the four groups of employees and the four categories of interest. The degrees of freedom here will be 9: [(4− 1)× (4− 1)].

Theχ2 test of significance thus helps us to see whether or not two nominal variables are related. Besides the χ2 test, other tests, such as the Fisher exact probability test and the Cochran Q test are used to determine the relationship between two nominally scaled variables.

Correlations

A Pearson correlation matrix will indicate the direction, strength, and significance of the bivariate relationships among all the variables that were measured at an interval or ratio level. The correlation is derived by assessing the variations in one variable as another variable also varies. For the sake of simplicity, let us say we have collected

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 329

Chapter

14

Quantitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 321

data on two variables − price and sales − for two different products. The volume of sales at every price level can be plotted for each product, as shown in the scatter diagrams in Figure 14.7(a) and Figure 14.7(b).

(a) Scatter diagram with no discernible pattern; (b) scatter diagram indicating a downward or negative

slope

Figure 14.7

Figure 14.7 (b) indicates a discernible pattern of how the two factors vary simul- taneously (the trend of the scatter is that of a downward straight line), whereas Figure 14.7 (a) does not. Looking at the scatter diagram in Figure 14.7 (b), it would seem there is a direct negative correlation between price and sales for this product. That is, as the price increases, sales of the product drop consistently. Figure 14.7 (a) suggests no interpretable pattern for the other product.

A correlation coefficient that indicates the strength and direction of the relationship can be computed by applying a formula that takes into consideration the two sets of figures− in this case, different sales volumes at different prices.

Theoretically, there could be a perfect positive correlation between two variables, which is represented by 1.0 (plus 1), or a perfect negative correlation which would be -1.0 (minus 1). However, neither of these will be found in reality when assessing correlations between any two variables expected to be different from each other.

While the correlation could range between -1.0 and +1.0, we need to know if any correlation found between two variables is significant or not (i.e., if it has occurred solely by chance or if there is a high probability of its actual existence). As we know, a significance of p = 0.05 is the generally accepted conventional level in social science research. This indicates that 95 times out of 100, we can be sure that there is a true or significant correlation between the two variables, and there is only a 5% chance that the relationship does not truly exist. If there is a correlation of 0.56 (denoted as r = 0.56) between two variables A and B, with p < 0.01, then we know that there is a positive relationship between the two variables and the probability of this not being true is 1% or less. That is, over 99% of the time we would expect this correlation to exist. The correlation of 0.56 also indicates that the variables explain the variance in one another to the extent of 31.4% (0.562).

We do not know which variable causes which, but we do know that the two variables are associated with each other. Thus, a hypothesis that postulates a significant positive (or negative) relationship between two variables can be tested by examining the correlation between the two.

The Pearson correlation coefficient is appropriate for interval- and ratio-scaled variables, and the Spearman Rank or the Kendall’s tau coefficients are appropriate when variables are measured on an ordinal scale. Any bivariate correlation can be

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 330

Chapter

14

Research Methods for Business

322 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

obtained by clicking the relevant menu, identifying the variables, and seeking the appropriate parametric or nonparametric statistics.

14.3 EXCELSIOR ENTERPRISES: DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS PART 1

Descriptive statistics such as maximum, minimum, means, standard deviations, and variance were obtained for the interval-scaled items of the Excelsior Enterprises study. The procedure is shown in Output 14.2.

OUTPUT 14.2: DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS: CENTRAL TENDENCIES AND DIS- PERSIONS

From the menus, choose:

Analyze

Descriptive Statistics

Descriptives

[Select the variables]

Options . . .

[Choose the relevant statistics needed]

Output

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 331

Chapter

14

Quantitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 323

dj1 dj2 dj3 dj4 dj5

job

char1

job

char2

job

char3

job

char4

burn

out1

burn

out2

N

valid

171 171 171 171 171 170 170 170 170 171 171

N

miss-

ing

3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 3 3

Mean 2.351 2.240 2.509 2.304 2.211 3.517 3.435 3.165 3.471 2.474 2.433

Std

devi-

ation

1.014 0.968 1.129 0.895 0.965 1.132 1.082 1.253 1.116 2.474 2.433

Vari-

ance

1.029 0.936 1.275 0.801 0.932 1.281 1.170 1.570 1.245 1.557 1.047

Min-

imum

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Max-

imum

5 5 5 5 5 6 5 5 5 5 5

burn

out3

burn

out4

burn

out5

burn

out6

burn

out7

burn

out8

burn

out9

burn

out10

job

sat itl1 itl2

N

valid

171 171 173 173 173 173 173 174 173 174 174

N

miss-

ing

3 3 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0

Mean 2.462 2.526 2.653 2.567 2.761 2.792 2.792 2.264 3.243 2.224 2.161

Std

devi-

ation

1.014 0.968 1.129 0.895 0.965 1.132 1.082 1.253 1.116 2.474 2.433

Vari-

ance

1.029 0.936 1.275 0.801 0.932 1.281 1.170 1.570 1.245 1.557 1.047

Min-

imum

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Max-

imum

6 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 5 4 5

The results presented in the table in Output 14.2 indicate that:

• there are missing observations for every item except for the items burnout10, itl1, and itl2;

• there are illegal codes for items jobchar1 (a 6 has been entered in at least one cell), burnout3 (again, a 6 has been entered in at least one cell), and itl2 (a 5 has been entered in at least one cell);

• the responses to each individual item have a good spread.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 332

Chapter

14

Research Methods for Business

324 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Appropriate actions were taken to correct the illegal entries. A further inspection of the missing data revealed that every participant answered either all or the vast majority of the questions. Therefore, no questionnaires were thrown out. Missing data will be ignored during subsequent analyses.

From here, we can proceed with further detailed analyses to test the goodness of our data.

14.4 TESTING GOODNESS OF DATA The reliability and validity of the measures can now be tested.

14.4.1 Reliability

As discussed in Chapter 12, the reliability of a measure is established by testing for both consistency and stability. Consistency indicates how well the items measur- ing a concept hang together as a set. Cronbach’s alpha is a reliability coefficient that indicates how well the items in a set are positively correlated to one another. Cronbach’s alpha is computed in terms of the average intercorrelations among the items measuring the concept. The closer Cronbach’s alpha is to 1, the higher the internal consistency reliability.

Another measure of consistency reliability used in specific situations is the split-half reliability coefficient. Since this reflects the correlations between two halves of a set of items, the coefficients obtained will vary depending on how the scale is split. Sometimes split-half reliability is obtained to test for consistency when more than one scale, dimension, or factor, is assessed. The items across each of the dimensions or factors are split, based on some predetermined logic (Campbell, 1976). In almost every case, Cronbach’s alpha is an adequate test of internal consistency reliability. You will see later in this chapter how Cronbach’s alpha is obtained through computer analysis.

As discussed in Chapter 12, the stability of a measure can be assessed through par- allel form reliability and test−retest reliability. When a high correlation between two similar forms of a measure (see CChapter 12) is obtained, parallel form reliability is established. Test−retest reliability can be established by computing the correlation between the same tests administered at two different time periods.

Excelsior Enterprises: checking the reliability of the multi-item measures

Because distributive justice, burnout, job enrichment, and intention to leave were measured with multi-item scales, the consistency of the respondents’ answers to the scale items has to be tested for each measure. In Chapter 12, we explained that Cronbach’s alpha is a popular test of interitem consistency. Table 14.3 provides an overview of Cronbach’s alpha for the four variables. This table shows that the alphas were all well above 0.60.

Table 14.3 Reliability of the Excelsior Enterprises measures

Variable Number of items Cronbach’s alpha

Distributive justice 5 0.862

Job enrichment 4 0.715

Burnout 10 0.806

Intention to leave 2 0.866

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 333

Chapter

14

Quantitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 325

In general, reliabilities less than 0.60 are considered to be poor, those in the 0.70 range, acceptable, and those over 0.80 good. Thus, the internal consistency reliability of the measures used in this study can be considered to be acceptable for the job enrichment measure and good for the other measures.

It is important to note that all the negatively worded items in the questionnaire should first be reversed before the items are submitted for reliability tests. Unless all the items measuring a variable are in the same direction, the reliabilities obtained will be incorrect.

A sample of the result obtained for the Cronbach’s alpha test for job enrichment, together with instructions on how it is obtained, is shown in Output 14.3.

OUTPUT 14.3: RELIABILITY ANALYSIS

From the menus, choose:

Analyze

Scale

Reliability Analysis . . .

[Select the variables constituting the scale]

Choose Model Alpha [this is the default option]

Click on Statistics.

Select Scale if item deleted under Descriptives

Output

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 334

Chapter

14

Research Methods for Business

326 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Reliability statistics

Cronbach’s alpha Number of items

0.715 4

Item-total statistics

Scale mean if item deleted

Scale variance if

item deleted

Corrected item-total variation

Cronbach’s alpha if item

deleted

Jobchar1 10.0706 6.480 0.624 0.577

Jobchar2 10.1471 6.552 0.646 0.568

Jobchar3 10.4176 8.481 0.171 0.851

Jobchar4 10.1118 6.325 0.664 0.552

The reliability of the job enrichment measure is presented in the first table in Output 14.3. The second table provides an overview of the alphas if we take one of the items out of the measure. For instance, it is shown that if the first item (Jobchar1) is taken out, Cronbach’s alpha of the new three-item measure will be 0.577. This means that the alpha will go down if we take item 1 out of our measure. On the other hand, if we take out item 3, our alpha will go up and become 0.851. Note that, in this case, we would not take out item 3 for two reasons. First, our alpha is above 0.7 so we do not have to take any remedial actions. Second, if we took item 3 out, the validity of our measure would probably decrease. We did not include item 3 for nothing in the original measure!

If, however, our Cronbach’s alpha was too low (under 0.60) then we could use this table to find out which of the items would have to be removed from our measure to increase the interitem consistency. Note that, usually, taking out an item, although improving the reliability of our measure, affects the validity of our measure in a negative way.

Now that we have established that the interitem consistency is satisfactory for perceived equity, job enrichment, burnout, and intention to leave, the scores on the original questions can be combined into a single score. For instance, a new “perceived equity” score can be calculated from the scores on the five individual “perceived equity” items (but only after items 1, 2, and 4 have been reverse coded). Likewise, a new “job enrichment” score can be calculated from the scores on the four individual “job enrichment” items, and so on. We have already explained that this involves calculating the summed score (per case/participant) and then dividing it by the number of items.

14.4.2 Validity

Factorial validity can be established by submitting the data for factor analysis. The results of factor analysis (a multivariate technique) will confirm whether or not the theorized dimensions emerge. Recall from Chapter 11 that measures are developed by first delineating the dimensions so as to operationalize the concept. Factor ana- lysis reveals whether the dimensions are indeed tapped by the items in the measure, as theorized. Criterion-related validity can be established by testing for the power of the measure to differentiate individuals who are known to be different (refer to dis- cussions regarding concurrent and predictive validity in Chapter 12). Convergent

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 335

Chapter

14

Quantitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 327

validity can be established when there is a high degree of correlation between two different sources responding to the same measure (e.g., both supervisors and sub- ordinates respond similarly to a perceived reward system measure administered to them). Discriminant validity can be established when two distinctly different con- cepts are not correlated to each other (e.g., courage and honesty; leadership and motivation; attitudes and behavior). Convergent and discriminant validity can be established through the multitrait multimethod matrix, a full discussion of which is beyond the scope of this book. The student interested in knowing more about factor analysis and the multitrait multimethod matrix can refer to books on those subjects. When well-validated measures are used, there is no need, of course, to establish their validity again for each study. The reliability of the items can, however, be tested.

14.5 EXCELSIOR ENTERPRISES: DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS PART 2

Once the new scores for perceived equity, job enrichment, burnout, and intention to leave have been calculated, we are ready to further analyze the data. Descriptive statistics such as maximum, minimum, means, standard deviations, and variance can now be obtained for the multi-item, interval-scaled independent and depend- ent variables. What’s more, a correlation matrix can also be obtained to examine how the variables in our model are related to each other.

This will help us to answer questions like:

• What are the employees’ perceptions on job enrichment?

• How many employees have which degrees of burnout?

• Are the employees satisfied with their jobs?

• Is there much variance in the extent to which employees perceive the relation- ship with the company as equitable?

• What percentage of employees is inclined to leave the organization?

• What are the relationships between perceived equity, burnout, job enrichment, job satisfaction, and intention to leave?

Descriptive statistics such as maximum, minimum, means, standard deviations, and variance were obtained for the interval-scaled independent and dependent variables in the Excelsior Enterprises study. The results are shown in Table 14.4. It may be mentioned that all variables except ITL were tapped on a five-point scale. ITL was measured on a four-point scale.

Table 14.4 Descriptive statistics for independent and dependent variables

N Min-

imum Max-

imum Mean Std

deviation Variance

ITL 174 1.00 4.00 2.19 0.97 0.94

Job satisfaction

173 1.00 5.00 3.24 1.32 1.74

Perceived equity

171 1.00 5.00 2.32 0.97 0.94

Burnout 171 1.00 5.00 2.55 0.66 0.43

Jobchar 170 1.50 5.00 3.40 0.84 0.706

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 336

Chapter

14

Research Methods for Business

328 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

From the results, it may be seen that the mean on perceived equity is rather low (2.32 on a five-point scale), as is the mean on experienced burnout (2.55). Job satisfaction is about average (3.22 on a five-point scale), and the job is perceived as somewhat enriched (3.40). The mean of 2.21 on a four-point scale for ITL indicates that most of the respondents are neither bent on leaving nor staying. The minimum of 1 indicates that there are some who do not intend to leave at all, and the maximum of 4 indicates that some are seriously considering leaving. Table 14.5 provides a more detailed account of employees’ intentions to leave. This table shows that a large group of employees seriously considers leaving Excelsior Enterprises! Testing our hypotheses will improve our understanding of why employees consider leaving Excelsior Enterprises and will provide us with useful tools to reduce employees’ intentions to leave the company.

Table 14.5 Frequency table intention to leave

Frequency Percentage Valid percentage Cumulative percentage

1.00 39 22.4 22.4 22.4

1.50 23 13.2 13.2 35.6

2.00 49 28.2 28.2 63.8

2.50 7 4.0 4.0 67.8

3.00 21 12.1 12.1 79.9

3.50 22 12.6 12.6 92.5

4.00 13 7.5 7.5 100.0

Total 174 100.0 100.0

In sum, the perceived equity is rather low, not much burnout is experienced, the job is perceived to be fairly enriched, there is average job satisfaction, and there is neither a strong intention to stay with the organization nor to leave it. The variance for all the variables is rather high, indicating that participants’ answers are not always very close to the mean on all the variables.

The Pearson correlation matrix obtained for the five interval-scaled variables is shown in Table 14.6.

From the results, we see that the intention to leave is, as would be expected, signific- antly negatively correlated to job satisfaction, perceived equity, and job enrichment. That is, the intention to leave is low if job satisfaction and equitable treatment are experienced, and the job is enriched. However, when individuals experience burnout (physical and emotional exhaustion), their intention to leave also increases (positive correlation of 0.531). Job satisfaction is also positively correlated to per- ceived equity, and an enriched job. It is negatively correlated to burnout and ITL. The correlations are all in the expected direction.

It is important to note that no correlation exceeded 0.55 for this sample. If correla- tions between the dependent variables were higher (say, 0.75 and above), we might have had a collinearity problem in our regression analysis.

After we have obtained descriptive statistics for the independent and dependent variables in our study, we can test our hypotheses. Hypothesis testing is discussed in the next chapter.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 337

Chapter

14

Quantitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 329

Table 14.6 Correlations between independent and dependent variables

Intention to leave Job satisfaction

Perceived equity Burnout Job enrichment

Intention to leave

1.000 -0.489 -0.366 0.531 -0.387

Sig. (two- tailed)

0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

N 174 173 171 170 170

Job satisfac- tion

-0.489 1.000 0.270 -0.349 0.212

Sig. (two- tailed)

0.000 0.000 0.000 0.006

N 173 173 170 169 169

Perceived equity

-0.366 0.270 1.000 -0.208 0.364

Sig. (two- tailed)

0.000 0.000 0.007 0.000

N 171 170 171 167 167

Burnout 0.531 -0.349 -0.208 1.000 -0.320

Sig. (two- tailed)

0.000 0.000 0.007 0.000

N 170 170 167 166 166

Job enrich- ment

-0.387 0.212 0.364 -0.320 1.000

Sig. (two- tailed)

0.000 0.006 0.000 0.000

N 170 169 167 166 170

SUMMARY

In this chapter we covered the initial steps of the procedure for analyzing data once they are collected. Through the example of the research on Excelsior Enterprises, we saw the steps necessary to get the data ready for analysis− editing, coding, and categorizing. We also obtained descriptive statistics for the variables in the Excelsior Enterprises case. Finally we tested the goodness of data using Cronbach’s alpha.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

What activities are involved in getting the data ready for analysis?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 338

Chapter

14

Research Methods for Business

330 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

What does coding the data involve?

Data editing deals with detecting and correcting illogical, inconsistent, or illegal data in the information returned by the participants of the study. Explain the difference between illogical, inconsistent, and illegal data.

How would you deal with missing data?

What is reverse scoring and when is reverse scoring necessary?

There are three measures of central tendency: the mean, the median, and the mode. Measures of dispersion include the range, the standard deviation, and the variance (where the measure of central tendency is the mean), and the interquartile range (where the measure of central tendency is the median). Describe these measures and explain which of these measures you would use to provide an overview of (a) nominal, (b) ordinal, and (c) interval data?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 339

Chapter

14

Quantitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 331

A researcher wants to provide an overview of the gender of the respondents in his sample. The gender is measured like this: What is your gender? OMale O Female. What is the best way to provide an overview of the gender of the respondents?

Consider the following reliability analysis for the variable customer differenti- ation. What could you conclude from it?

Item-total statistics

Scale Scale Corrected

Mean if item deleted

Variance if item deleted

Item-total correlation

Alpha if item deleted

CUSDIF1 10.0405 5.4733 0.2437 0.7454

CUSDIF2 9.7432 5.0176 0.5047 0.3293

CUSDIF3 9.6486 5.3754 0.4849 0.3722

Reliability coefficients

N of Cases = 111.0

N of Items = 3

Alpha = 0.5878

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 340

Chapter

14

Research Methods for Business

332 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Exercise 14.1

The following data are available:

Respondent Age Exam mark Paper mark Sex Year in college IQ

1 21 87 83 M 2 80

2 19 83 80 M 1 100

3 23 85 86 M 4 98

4 21 81 75 F 1 76

5 21 81 75 F 3 82

6 20 67 68 F 3 99

7 26 75 88 F 2 120

8 24 92 78 F 4 115

9 26 78 92 M 4 126

10 30 89 95 F 3 129

11 21 72 80 F 1 86

12 19 81 65 M 2 80

13 17 75 77 M 1 70

14 19 76 85 F 1 99

15 35 80 83 F 3 99

16 27 75 60 F 2 60

17 21 85 80 M 3 89

18 27 79 75 M 4 70

19 21 90 93 F 3 140

20 22 97 95 M 3 165

21 21 90 82 M 2 115

22 19 87 86 F 3 119

23 32 95 90 M 2 120

24 19 68 57 F 3 89

Note: Maximum exam mark = 100, Maximum paper mark = 100, Sex: M = male, F = female, Year

in college: 1 = Freshman; 2 = Sophomore; 3 = Junior; 4 = Senior.

1. Data handling

a. Enter the data in SPSS. Save the file to your USB flashdrive. Name the file “resmethassignment1.”

b. Provide appropriate variable labels, value labels, and scaling indica- tions to the variables.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 341

Chapter

14

Quantitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 333

2. Descriptives

a. Use Analyze, Descriptive statistics, Descriptives to summarize metric variables.

b. Use Analyze, Descriptive statistics, Frequencies to summarize nonmet- ric variables.

c. Create a pie-chart for Year in college.

d. Create a histogram for IQ and include the normal distribution.

e. Make a scatter plot with IQ on the x-axis and exam grade on the y-axis. What do you conclude?

f. Recode the sex variable such that it is 1 for females and 0 for males.

g. Make a scatter plot with sex on the x-axis and IQ on the y-axis. What do you conclude?

h. Compute the mean IQ for males and for females. Conclusion?

i. Create a new dummy variable, IQdum, which is 1 if the IQ is larger than or equal to 100, and 0 otherwise.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 342

Chapter

15

334 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Chapter 15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Topics discussed:

� Type I errors, type II errors, and statistical power

� Choosing the appropriate statistical technique

� Testing a hypothesis about a single mean

� Testing hypotheses about two related means

� Testing hypotheses about two unrelated means

� Testing hypotheses about several means

� Regression analysis

� Other multivariate tests and analyses

� Excelsior Enterprises: hypothesis testing

� Data warehousing, data mining, and operations research

� Some software packages useful for data analysis

Chapter objectives

After completing Chapter 15 you should be able to:

1. Describe the process followed in hypothesis testing.

2. Describe the concepts type I error, type II error, and statistical power.

3. Describe how to choose the appropriate statistical technique to test hypotheses.

4. Explain when and how to use the most important statistical techniques to examine hypo- theses.

5. Explain how to use regression analysis to test moderation and mediation.

In Chapter 5 we discussed the steps to be followed in hypothesis development and testing. These steps are:

1. State the null and the alternate hypotheses.

2. Determine the level of significance desired (p = 0.05, or more, or less).

3. Choose the appropriate statistical test depending on the type of scales that have been used (nominal, ordinal, interval, or ratio).

4. See if the output results from computer analysis indicate that the significance level is met. When the resultant value is larger than the critical value, the null hypothesis is rejected, and the alternate accepted. If the calculated value is less than the critical value, the null hypothesis is accepted and the alternate hypothesis rejected.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 343

Chapter

15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 335

In this chapter we will discuss hypothesis testing. First, we will pay attention to type I errors, type II errors, and statistical power. Then, we will discuss various univariate and bivariate statistical tests that can be used to test hypotheses. Finally, we will come back to the Excelsior Enterprises case and test the hypotheses that were developed in the previous chapter.

15.1 TYPE I ERRORS, TYPE II ERRORS, AND STATISTICAL POWER

In Chapter 5 we explained that the hypothetico-deductive method requires hypo- theses to be falsifiable. For this reason, null hypotheses are developed. These null hypotheses (H0) are thus set up to be rejected in order to support the alternate hypothesis, termed HA.

The null hypothesis is presumed true until statistical evidence, in the form of a hypothesis test, indicates otherwise. The required statistical evidence is provided by inferential statistics, such as regression analysis or MANOVA. Inferential statistics help us to draw conclusions (or to make inferences) about the population from a sample.

The purpose of hypothesis testing is to determine accurately if the null hypothesis can be rejected in favor of the alternate hypothesis. Based on the sample data the researcher can reject the null hypothesis (and therefore accept the alternate hypo- thesis) with a certain degree of confidence: there is always a risk that the inference that is drawn about the population is incorrect.

There are two kinds of errors (or two ways in which a conclusion can be incorrect), classified as type I errors and type II errors. A type I error, also referred to as alpha (α), is the probability of rejecting the null hypothesis when it is actually true. In the Excelsior Enterprises example introduced in Chapter 14, a type I error would occur if we concluded, based on the data, that burnout affects intention to leave when, in fact, it does not. The probability of type I error, also known as the significance level, is determined by the researcher. Typical significance levels in business research are 5% (<0.05) and 1% (<0.01).

A type II error, also referred to as beta (β), is the probability of failing to reject the null hypothesis given that the alternate hypothesis is actually true; e.g., concluding, based on the data, that burnout does not affect intention to leave when, in fact, it does. The probability of type II error is inversely related to the probability of type I error: the smaller the risk of one of these types of error, the higher the risk of the other type of error.

A third important concept in hypothesis testing is statistical power (1 -β). Statistical power, or just power, is the probability of correctly rejecting the null hypothesis. In other words, power is the probability that statistical significance will be indicated if it is present.

Statistical power depends on:

1. Alpha (α): the statistical significance criterion used in the test. If alpha moves closer to zero (for instance, if alpha moves from 5% to 1%), then the probability of finding an effect when there is an effect decreases. This implies that the lower theα (i.e., the closerαmoves to zero) the lower the power; the higher the alpha, the higher the power.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 344

Chapter

15

Research Methods for Business

336 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

2. Effect size: the effect size is the size of a difference or the strength of a rela- tionship in the population: a large difference (or a strong relationship) in the population is more likely to be found than a small difference (similarity, rela- tionship).

3. The size of the sample: at a given level of alpha, increased sample sizes produce more power, because increased sample sizes lead to more accurate parameter estimates. Thus, increased sample sizes lead to a higher probability of finding what we were looking for. However, increasing the sample size can also lead to too much power, because even very small effects will be found to be statistically significant.

Along these lines, there are four interrelated components that affect the inferences you might draw from a statistical test in a research project: the power of the test, the alpha, the effect size, and the sample size. Given the values for any three of these components, it is thus possible to calculate the value of the fourth. Generally, it is recommended to establish the power, the alpha, and the required precision (effect size) of a test first, and then, based on the values of these components, determine an appropriate sample size.

BOX15.1

The focus of business research is usually on type I error. However, power (e.g., to determine an appropriate sample size) and, in some situations, type II error (e.g., if you are testing the effect of a new drug) must also be given serious consideration.

15.2 CHOOSING THE APPROPRIATE STATISTICAL TECHNIQUE

After you have selected an acceptable level of statistical significance to test your hypotheses, the next step is to decide on the appropriate method to test the hypo- theses. The choice of the appropriate statistical technique largely depends on the number of (independent and dependent) variables you are examining and the scale of measurement (metric or nonmetric) of your variable(s). Other aspects that play a role are whether the assumptions of parametric tests are met and the size of your sample.

Univariate statistical techniques are used when you want to examine two-variable relationships. For instance, if you want to examine the effect of gender on the num- ber of candy bars that students eat per week, univariate statistics are appropriate. If, on the other hand, you are interested in the relationships between many vari- ables, such as in the Excelsior Enterprises case, multivariate statistical techniques are required. The appropriate univariate or multivariate test largely depends on the measurement scale you have used, as Table 15.1 illustrates.

Chi-square analysis was discussed in the previous chapter. This chapter will discuss the other techniques listed in Table 15.1. Note that some techniques are discussed more elaborately than others. A detailed discussion of all these techniques is beyond the scope of this book.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 345

Chapter

15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 337

Table 15.1 Overview of univariate and multivariate statistical techniques

Univariate techniques:

Testing a hypothesis on a single mean:

Metric data: One sample t-test

Nonmetric data: Chi-square

Testing hypotheses about two related means:

Independent samples

Metric data: Independent samples t-test

Nonmetric data: Chi-square

Mann−Whitney U-test

Related samples

Metric data: Paired samples t-test

Nonmetric data: Chi-square

Wilcoxon

McNemar

Testing hypotheses about several means:

Metric data: One-way analysis of variance

Nonmetric data: Chi-square

Multivariate techniques:

One metric dependent variable

Analysis of variance and covariance

Multiple regression an

Conjoint analysis

One nonmetric dependent variable

Discriminant analysis

Logistic regression

More than one metric dependent variable

Multivariate analysis of variance

Canonical correlation

15.3 TESTING A HYPOTHESIS ABOUT A SINGLE MEAN

The one sample t-test is used to test the hypothesis that the mean of the population from which a sample is drawn is equal to a comparison standard. Assume that you have read that the average student studies 32 hours a week. From what you have observed so far, you think that students from your university (the population from which your sample will be drawn) study more. Therefore, you ask 20 class mates

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 346

Chapter

15

Research Methods for Business

338 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

how long they study in an average week. The average study time per week turns out to be 36.2 hours, 4 hours and 12 minutes more than the study time of students in general. The question is: is this a coincidence?

In the above example, the sample of students from your university differs from the typical student. What you want to know, however, is whether your fellow students come from a different population than the rest of the students. In other words, did you select a group of motivated students by chance? Or is there a “true” difference between students from your university and students in general?

In this example the null hypothesis is:

H0: The number of study hours of students from our university is equal to the number of study hours of students in general.

The alternate hypothesis is:

H1: The number of study hours of students from our university differs from the number of study hours of students in general.

The way to decide whether there is a significant difference between students from your university and students in general depends on three aspects: the value of the sample mean (36.2 hours); the value of the comparison standard (32 hours); and the degree of uncertainty concerning how well the sample mean represents the population mean (the standard error of the sample mean).

Along these lines, the following formula is used to compute the t-value:

tn−1 = X − µ s/ √ n

Assume that the observed standard deviation is 8. Hence, the t-statistic becomes:

t = 36.2− 32 8/ √

20 = 2.438

Having calculated the t-statistic, we can now compare the t-value with a standard table of t-values with n− 1 degrees of freedom to determine whether the t-statistic reaches the threshold of statistical significance. When the t-statistic is larger than the appropriate table value, the null hypothesis (no significant difference) is rejected.

Our t-statistic (2.438) is larger than the appropriate table value (1.729). This means that the difference between 36.2 and 32 is statistically significant. The null hypo- thesis must thus be rejected: there is a significant difference in study time between students from our university and students in general.

BOX 15.2: HOW DOES THIS WORK IN SPSS?

Under the Analyze menu, choose Compare Means, then One-Sample T Test. Move the dependent variable into the “Test Variable(s)” box. Type in the value you wish to compare your sample to in the box called “Test Value.”

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 347

Chapter

15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 339

15.4 TESTING HYPOTHESES ABOUT TWO RELATED MEANS

We can also do a (paired samples) t-test to examine the differences in the same group before and after a treatment. For example, would a group of employees perform better after undergoing training than they did before? In this case, there would be two observations for each employee, one before the training and one after the training. We would use a paired samples t-test to test the null hypothesis that the average of the differences between the before and after measure is zero.

BOX 15.3: HOW DOES THIS WORK IN SPSS?

Under the Analyze menu, choose Compare Means, then Paired-Samples T Test. Move each of the two variables whose means you want to compare to the “Paired Variables” list.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 348

Chapter

15

Research Methods for Business

340 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

EXAMPLE

A university professor was interested in the effect of her teaching program on the performance of her students. For this reason, ten students were given a math test in the first week of the semester and their scores were recorded. Subsequently, the students were given an equivalent test during the last week of the semester. The professor now wants to know whether the students’ math scores have increased.

Table 15.2 depicts the scores of students on the math test in the first and in the last week of the semester.

To find out if there is a significant difference in math scores we need a test statistic. The test statistic is the average difference /sdifference/

√ n.

In this example we get: 22.5/13.79412/√10.

Having calculated the t-statistic, we can now compare the t-value with a stand- ard table of t-values with n − 1 degrees of freedom to determine whether the t-statistic reaches the threshold of statistical significance. Again, when the t-statistic is larger than the appropriate table value, the null hypothesis (no significant difference) is rejected.

Our t-statistic is larger than the appropriate table value (1.83). This means that the difference between 70 and 57.5 is statistically significant. The null hypothesis must thus be rejected: there is a significant increase in math score.

The Wilcoxon signed-rank test is a nonparametric test for examining significant differences between two related samples or repeated measurements on a single sample. It is used as an alternative to a paired samples t-test when the population cannot be assumed to be normally distributed.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 349

Chapter

15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 341

Table 15.2 Math scores of ten students in the first and last week of the semester

Math scores

Student Score first week Score last week Difference

1 55 75 +20

2 65 80 +15

3 70 75 +5

4 55 60 +5

5 40 45 +5

6 60 55 -5

7 80 75 -5

8 35 70 +35

9 55 75 +20

10 60 90 +30

Average score 57.5 70 22.5

BOX 15.4: HOW DOES THIS WORK IN SPSS?

Under the Analyze menu, choose Nonparametric Tests, then Two Related Samples. Move the variables you want to compare into the “Test Pairs” box. Select Wilcoxon from the Test Type group and click OK.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 350

Chapter

15

Research Methods for Business

342 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

McNemar’s test is a nonparametric method used on nominal data. It assesses the significance of the difference between two dependent samples when the variable of interest is dichotomous. It is used primarily in before-after studies to test for an experimental effect.

In the following example, a researcher wants to determine whether the use of a new training method (called CARE) has an effect on the performance of ath- letes. Counts of individual athletes are given in Table 15.3. The performance (aver- age/good) before the treatment (the new training method) is given in the columns (244 athletes delivered an average performance before they trained with the CARE method, whereas 134 athletes delivered a good performance before they adopted this method). You can find the performance after the treatment (average/good) in the rows (190 athletes delivered an average performance after using the new training method, while the number of athletes that delivered a good performance increased to 188).

Table 15.3 Performance of athletes before and after new training method

Before

average good totals

average 112 78 190

After good 132 56 188

totals 244 134 378

The cells of Table 15.3 can be represented by the letters a, b, c, and d. The totals across rows and columns are marginal totals (a + b, c + d, a + c, and b + d). The grand total is represented by n, as shown in Table 15.4.

Table 15.4 A more abstract representation of Table 15.3

Before

average good totals

average a b a + b

After good c d c + d

totals a + c b + d n

McNemar’s test is a rather straightforward technique to test marginal homogeneity. Marginal homogeneity refers to equality (or the lack of a significant difference) between one or more of the marginal row totals and the corresponding marginal column totals. In this example, marginal homogeneity implies that the row totals are equal to the corresponding column totals, or

a+ b = a+ c c+ d = b+ d

Marginal homogeneity would mean there was no effect of the treatment. In this case it would mean that the new training method would not affect the performance of athletes.

The McNemar test uses theχ2 distribution, based on the formula: (|b− c| − 1)2/ (b+ c). χ2 is a statistic with 1 degree of freedom [(# rows - 1)× (# columns -1)]. The marginal frequencies are not homogeneous if the χ2 result is significant at p < 0.05.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 351

Chapter

15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 343

The χ2 value in this example is:

(|78− 132| − 1)2/ (78 + 132) = 532/210 = 13.376

The table of the distribution of chi-square, with 1 degree of freedom, reveals that the difference between samples is significant at the 0.05 level: the critical value of chi-square is 3.841. Since 13.376 computed for the example above exceeds this value, the difference between samples is significant. Hence, we can conclude that the new training method has a positive effect on the performance of athletes.

Note that if b and/or c are small ( b + c < 20) then χ2 is not approximated by the chi-square distribution. Instead a sign test should be used.

BOX 15.5: HOW DOES THIS WORK IN SPSS?

Under the Analyze menu, choose Nonparametric Tests, then Two Related Samples. Move the variables you want to compare into the “Test Pairs” box. Select McNemar from the “Test Type” group and click OK.

15.5 TESTING HYPOTHESES ABOUT TWO UNRELATED MEANS

There are many instances when we are interested to know whether two groups are different from each other on a particular interval-scaled or ratio-scaled variable of interest. For example, would men and women press their case for the introduction of flextime at the workplace to the same extent, or would their needs be different? Do MBAs perform better in organizational settings than business students with only a bachelor’s degree? Do individuals in urban areas have a different investment pattern for their savings than those in semi-urban areas? Do CPAs perform better than non-CPAs in accounting tasks? To find answers to such questions, an inde- pendent samples t-test is carried out to see if there are any significant differences in the means for two groups in the variable of interest. That is, a nominal variable

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 352

Chapter

15

Research Methods for Business

344 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

that is split into two subgroups (e.g., smokers and nonsmokers; employees in the marketing department and those in the accounting department; younger and older employees) is tested to see if there is a significant mean difference between the two split groups on a dependent variable, which is measured on an interval or ratio scale (for instance, extent of wellbeing; pay; or comprehension level).

BOX 15.6: HOW DOES THIS WORK IN SPSS?

Under the Analyze menu, choose Compare Means, then Independent Samples T Test. Move the dependent variable into the “Test Variable(s)” box. Move the independent variable (i.e., the variable whose values define the two groups) into the “Grouping Variable” box. Click “Define Groups” and specify how the groups are defined (for instance 0 and 1 or 1 and 2).

15.6 TESTING HYPOTHESES ABOUT SEVERAL MEANS

Whereas the (independent samples) t-test indicates whether or not there is a signi- ficant mean difference in a dependent variable between two groups, an analysis of variance (ANOVA) helps to examine the significant mean differences among more than two groups on an interval or ratio-scaled dependent variable. For example, is there a significant difference in the amount of sales by the following four groups of salespersons: those who are sent to training schools; those who are given on-the-job training during field trips; those who have been tutored by the sales manager; and those who have had none of the above? Or is the rate of promotion significantly different for those who have assigned mentors, choose their own mentors, and have no mentors in the organizational system?

The results of ANOVA show whether or not the means of the various groups are significantly different from one another, as indicated by the F statistic. The F statistic shows whether two sample variances differ from each other or are from the same population. The F distribution is a probability distribution of sample variances and the family of distributions changes with changes in the sample size.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 353

Chapter

15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 345

Details of the F statistic may be seen in Table IV in the statistical tables toward the end of the book.

BOX 15.7: HOW DOES THIS WORK IN SPSS?

Under the Analyze menu, choose Compare Means, then One-Way ANOVA. Move the dependent variable into the “Dependent List”. Move the Independent variable (i.e., the variable whose values define the groups) into the “Factor” box. Click OK.

When significant mean differences among the groups are indicated by the F statistic, there is no way of knowing from the ANOVA results alone where they lie; that is, whether the significant difference is between Groups A and B, or between B and C, or A and C, and so on. It is therefore unwise to use multiple t-tests, taking two groups at a time, because the greater the number of t-tests done, the lower the confidence we can place on results. For example, three t-tests done simultaneously decrease the confidence level from 95% to 86% (0.95)3. However, several tests, such as Scheffe’s test, Duncan Multiple Range test, Tukey’s test, and Student-Newman-Keul’s test are available and can be used, as appropriate, to detect where exactly the mean differences lie.

15.7 REGRESSION ANALYSIS

Simple regression analysis is used in a situation where one independent variable is hypothesized to affect one dependent variable. For instance, assume that we propose that the propensity to buy a product depends only on the perceived quality of that product.∗ In this case we would have to gather information on perceived

In reality, any effort to model the effect of perceived quality on propensity to buy a product without∗

careful attention to other factors that affect propensity to buy would cause a serious statistical problem

(“omitted variables bias”).

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 354

Chapter

15

Research Methods for Business

346 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

quality and propensity to buy a product. We could then plot the data to obtain some first ideas on the relationship between these variables.

From Figure 15.1 we can see that there is a linear relationship between perceived quality and propensity to buy the product. We can model this linear relationship by a least squares function.

Figure 15.1 Scatter plot of perceived quality versus propensity to buy

A simple linear regression equation represents a straight line. Indeed, to summarize the relationship between perceived quality and propensity to buy, we can draw a straight line through the data points, as in Figure 15.2

We can also express this relationship in an equation:

Yi = β0 + β1X1i + �i

The parameters β and β are called regression coefficients. They are the inter- cept (β ) and the slope (β ) of the straight line relating propensity to buy (Y ) to perceived quality ( X1). The slope can be interpreted as the number of units by which propensity to buy would increase if perceived quality increased by a unit. The error term denotes the error in prediction or the difference between the estim- ated propensity to buy and the actual propensity to buy.

In this example the intercept (β ) was not significant whereas the slope (β ) was. The unstandardized regression coefficient β was 0.832. Recall that the unstand- ardized regression coefficient represents the amount of change in the dependent variable (propensity to buy in this case) for a one-unit change in the independent variable (perceived quality). Hence, the regression coefficient β indicates that the propensity to buy increases by 0.832 (on a five-point scale) for a one unit change in perceived quality. In other words, the propensity to buy for consumer A, who appraises perceived quality with a 4 (on a five-point scale) is estimated to be 0.832 units higher (on a five-point scale) than the propensity to buy for consumer B, who appraised perceived quality with a 3 (on a five-point scale).

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 355

Chapter

15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 347

Figure 15.2 Regression of propensity to buy on perceived quality

The coefficient of determination, R2, provides information about the goodness of fit of the regression model: it is a statistical measure of how well the regression line approximates the real data points.R2 is the percentage of variance in the dependent variable that is explained by the variation in the independent variable. If R2 is 1, the regression model using perceived quality perfectly predicts propensity to buy. In other words, the regression model fits the data perfectly. On the other hand, ifR2

is 0, none of the variation in propensity to buy can be attributed to the independent variable, perceived quality. In this case, the R2 for the model is 0.519. This means that almost 52% of the variation in propensity to buy is explained by variation in perceived quality.

The basic idea of multiple regression analysis is similar to that of simple regression analysis. Only in this case, we use more than one independent variable to explain variance in the dependent variable. Multiple regression analysis is a multivariate technique that is used very often in business research. The starting point of multiple regression analysis is, of course, the conceptual model (and the hypotheses derived from that model) that the researcher has developed in an earlier stage of the research process.

Multiple regression analysis provides a means of objectively assessing the degree and the character of the relationship between the independent variables and the dependent variable: the regression coefficients indicate the relative importance of each of the independent variables in the prediction of the dependent variable. For example, suppose that a researcher believes that the variance in performance can be explained by four independent variables, A, B, C, and D (say, pay, task difficulty, supervisory support, and organizational culture). When these variables are jointly regressed against the dependent variable in an effort to explain the variance in it, the sizes of the individual regression coefficients indicate how much an increase of one unit in the independent variable would affect the dependent variable, assuming that all the other independent variables remain unchanged. What’s more, the individual correlations between the independent variables and the dependent variable collapse into what is called a multiple r or multiple correlation

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 356

Chapter

15

Research Methods for Business

348 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

coefficient. The square of multiple r, R-square, or R2 as it is commonly known, is the amount of variance explained in the dependent variable by the predictors.

BOX 15.8: HOW DOES THIS WORK IN SPSS?

Under the Analyze menu, choose Regression, then Linear. Move the dependent variable into the “Dependent” box. Move the independent variables into the “Independent(s)” list and click OK.

15.7.1 Standardized regression coefficients

Standardized regression coefficients (or beta coefficients) are the estimates res- ulting from a multiple regression analysis performed on variables that have been standardized (a process whereby the variables are transformed into variables with a mean of 0 and a standard deviation of 1). This is usually done to allow the researcher to compare the relative effects of independent variables on the dependent variable, when the independent variables are measured in different units of measurement (e.g., income measured in dollars and household size measured in number of indi- viduals).

15.7.2 Regression with dummy variables

A dummy variable is a variable that has two or more distinct levels, which are coded 0 or 1. Dummy variables allow us to use nominal or ordinal variables as independent variables to explain, understand, or predict the dependent variable.

Suppose that we are interested in the relationship between work shift and job satisfaction. In this case, the variable “work shift,” which has three categories (see the Excelsior Enterprises case), would have to be coded in terms of two dummy variables, since one of the three categories should serve as the reference category. This might be done as shown in Table 15.5. Note that the third shift serves as the reference category.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 357

Chapter

15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 349

Table 15.5 Recoding work shift into dummy codes

Work shift Original code Dummy D1 Dummy D2

First shift 1 1 0

Second shift 2 0 1

Third shift 3 0 0

Next, the dummy variablesD1 and D2 have to be included in a regression model. This would look like this:

Yi = β0 + β1D1i + β2iD2i + �i

In this example workers from the third shift have been selected as the reference category. For this reason, this category has not been included in the regression equation. For workers in the third shift, D1 and D2 assume a value of 0, and the regression equation thus becomes:

Yi = β0 + �i

For workers in the first shift the equation becomes:

Yi = β0 + β1D1i + �i

The coefficient β is the difference in predicted job satisfaction for workers in the first shift, as compared to workers in the third shift. The coefficient β has the same interpretation. Note that any of the three shifts could have been used as a reference category.

Now do Exercises 15.1 and 15.2.

Exercise 15.1

Provide the equation for workers in the second shift.

Exercise 15.2

Use the data of the Excelsior Enterprises case to estimate the effect of work shift on job satisfaction.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 358

Chapter

15

Research Methods for Business

350 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

15.7.3 Multicollinearity

Multicollinearity is an often encountered statistical phenomenon in which two or more independent variables in a multiple regression model are highly correlated. In its most severe case (if the correlation between two independent variables is equal to 1 or -1) multicollinearity makes the estimation of the regression coefficients impossible. In all other cases it makes the estimates of the regression coefficients unreliable.

The simplest and most obvious way to detect multicollinearity is to check the cor- relation matrix for the independent variables. The presence of high correlations (most people consider correlations of 0.70 and above high) is a first sign of sizeable multicollinearity. However, when multicollinearity is the result of complex relation- ships among several independent variables, it may not be revealed by this approach. More common measures for identifying multicollinearity are therefore the tolerance value and the variance inflation factor (VIF − the inverse of the tolerance value). These measures indicate the degree to which one independent variable is explained by the other independent variables. A common cutoff value is a tolerance value of 0.10, which corresponds to a VIF of 10.

Note that multicollinearity is not a serious problem if the purpose of the study is to predict or forecast future values of the dependent variable, because even though the estimations of the regression coefficients may be unstable, multicollinearity does not affect the reliability of the forecast. However, if the objective of the study is to reliably estimate the individual regression coefficients, multicollinearity is a problem. In this case, we may use one or more of the following methods to reduce it:

• Reduce the set of independent variables to a set that are not collinear (but note that this may lead to omitted variable bias, which is also a serious problem).

• Use more sophisticated ways to analyze the data, such as ridge regression.

• Create a new variable that is a composite of the highly correlated variables.

BOX 15.9: HOW DOES THIS WORK IN SPSS?

Under the Analyze menu, choose Regression, then Linear. Move the dependent variable into the “Dependent” box. Move the independent variables into the “Independent(s)” list. Select “Statistics” by clicking the button on the right- hand side. Select “Collinearity diagnostics” and click continue. Then click OK.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 359

Chapter

15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 351

15.7.4 Testing moderation using regression analysis: interaction effects

Earlier in this book we described a moderating variable as a variable that modifies the original relationship between an independent variable and the dependent vari- able. This means that the effect of one variable (X1) on Y depends on the value of another variable, the moderating variable (X2). Such interactions are included as the product of two variables in a regression model.

Suppose that we have developed the following hypothesis:

H1: The students’ judgment of the university’s library is affected by the students’ judgment of the computers in the library.

Now suppose that we also believe that, even though this relationship will hold for all students, it will be nonetheless contingent on computer ownership. That is, we believe that the relationship between the judgment of computers in the library and the judgment of the library is affected by computer ownership (indeed computer ownership is a dummy variable). Therefore, we hypothesize that:

H2: The relationship between the judgment of the library and judgment of com- puters in the library is moderated by computer ownership.

The relationship between the judgment of the library and judgment of computers in the library can be modeled as follows:

Yi = β0 + β1X1i + �i (15.1)

We have also hypothesized that the effect ofX1 on Y depends onX2. This can be modeled as follows:

β1 = γ0 + γ1X2i (15.2)

Adding the second equation into the first one leads to the following model:

Yi = β0 + γ0X1i + γ1 (X1i ·X2i) + �i (15.3)

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 360

Chapter

15

Research Methods for Business

352 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Model states that the slope of model is a function of variable X2. Although this model allows us to test moderation, the following model is better:

Yi = β0 + γ0X1i + γ1 (X1i ·X2i) + γ2X2i + �i (15.4)

You may have noticed that model (4) includes a direct effect of X2 on Y . This allows us to differentiate between pure moderation and quasi moderation (compare Sharma, Durand & Gur-Arie, 1981), as explained next.

If γ1 = 0 and γ2 6= 0, X2 is not a moderator but simply an independent predictor variable. If γ1 6= 0, X2 is a moderator. Model (4) allows us to differentiate between pure moderators and quasi moderators as follows: if γ1 6= 0 and γ2 = 0,X2 is a pure moderator (i.e., X2 moderates the relationship between X1 and Y , but it has no direct effect on Y ). If γ1 6= 0 and γ2 6= 0,X2 is a quasi moderator (i.e.,X2 moderates the relationship betweenX1 and Y , but it also has a direct effect on Y ).

Suppose that data analysis leads to the following model:

Yi = 4.3 + 0.4X1i − 0.01X2i − 0.2 (X1i ·X2i) (15.5)

where β0 6= 0, γ0 6= 0, γ1 6= 0, and γ2 = 0.

Based on the results we can conclude that: (1) the judgment of computers in the lib- rary has a positive effect on the judgment of the library and (2) that this effect is mod- erated by computer possession: If a student has no computer (X2i = 0) (X2i = 0) the marginal effect is 0.4; if the student has a computer (X2i = 1) (X2i = 1) the marginal effect is 0.2. Thus, computer possession has a negative moderating effect.

Now do Exercises 15.3, 15.4 and 15.5.

Exercise 15.3

Why could it be important to differentiate between quasi moderators and pure moderators?

Exercise 15.4

Is computer possession a pure moderator or a quasi moderator? Explain.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 361

Chapter

15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 353

Exercise 15.5

Provide a logical explanation for the negative moderating effect of computer possession.

The previous example shows that dummy variables can be used to allow the effect of one independent variable on the dependent variable to change depending on the value of the dummy variable. It is, of course, also possible to include metric variables as moderators in a model. In such cases, the procedure to test moderation is exactly the same as in the previous example.

In this section, we have explained how moderation can be tested with regression analysis. Note that it is also possible to test mediation with regression analysis. We will explain this later on in this chapter using the Excelsior Enterprises data.

15.8 OTHER MULTIVARIATE TESTS AND ANALYSES We will now briefly describe five other multivariate techniques: discriminant ana- lysis, logistic regression, conjoint analysis, multivariate analysis of variance (MAN- OVA), and canonical correlations.

BOX 15.10: HOW DOES THIS WORK IN SPSS? Under the Analyze menu, choose Classify, then Discriminant. Move the depend- ent variable into the “Grouping” box. Move the independent variables into the “Independent(s)” list and click OK.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 362

Chapter

15

Research Methods for Business

354 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

15.8.1 Discriminant analysis

Discriminant analysis helps to identify the independent variables that discriminate a nominally scaled dependent variable of interest − say, those who are high on a variable from those who are low on it. The linear combination of independent variables indicates the discriminating function showing the large difference that exists in the two group means. In other words, the independent variables measured on an interval or ratio scale discriminate the groups of interest to the study.

15.8.2 Logistic regression

Logistic regression is also used when the dependent variable is nonmetric. How- ever, when the dependent variable has only two groups, logistic regression is often preferred because it does not face the strict assumptions that discriminant ana- lysis faces and because it is very similar to regression analysis. Although regression analysis and logistic regression analysis are very different from a statistical point of view, they are very much alike from a practical viewpoint. Both methods produce prediction equations and in both cases the regression coefficients measure the pre- dictive capability of the independent variables. Thus, logistic regression allows the researcher to predict a discrete outcome, such as “will purchase the product/will not purchase the product,” from a set of variables that may be continuous, discrete, or dichotomous.

BOX 15.11: HOW DOES THIS WORK IN SPSS?

Under the Analyze menu, choose Regression, then Binary Logistic. Move the dependent variable into the “Dependent” box. Move the independent variables into the “Covariate(s)” list and click OK.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 363

Chapter

15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 355

15.8.3 Conjoint analysis

Conjoint analysis is a statistical technique that is used in many fields including mar- keting, product management, and operations research. Conjoint analysis requires participants to make a series of trade-offs. In marketing, conjoint analysis is used to understand how consumers develop preferences for products or services. Conjoint analysis is built on the idea that consumers evaluate the value of a product or service by combining the value that is provided by each attribute. An attribute is a general feature of a product or service, such as price, product quality, or delivery speed. Each attribute has specific levels. For instance, for the attribute “price,” levels might be €249, €279, and €319. Along these lines, we might describe a mobile phone using the attributes “memory,” “battery life,” “camera,” and “price”. A specific mobile phone would be described as follows: memory, 12 Mbytes; battery life, 24 hours; camera 5 megapixels; and price €249.

Conjoint analysis takes these attribute and level descriptions of products and ser- vices and uses them by asking participants to make a series of choices between different products. For instance:

Would you choose phone X or phone Y?

Phone X Phone Y

Memory 12 Mbytes 16 Mbytes

Battery life 24 hours 12 hours

Camera 5 megapixels 8 megapixels

Price €249 €319

By asking for enough choices, it is possible to establish how important each of the levels is relative to the others; this is known as the utility of the level. Conjoint analysis is traditionally carried out with some form of multiple regression analysis. More recently, the use of hierarchical Bayesian analysis has become widespread to develop models of individual consumer decision-making behavior.

15.8.4 Two-way ANOVA

Two-way ANOVA can be used to examine the effect of two nonmetric independ- ent variables on a single metric dependent variable. Note that, in this context, an independent variable is often referred to as a factor and this is why a design that aims to examine the effect of two nonmetric independent variables on a single metric dependent variable is often called a factorial design. The factorial design is very popular in the social sciences. Two-way ANOVA enables us to examine main effects (the effects of the independent variables on the dependent variable) but also interaction effects that exist between the independent variables (or factors). An interaction effect exists when the effect of one independent variable (or one factor) on the dependent variable depends on the level of the other independent variable (factor).

15.8.5 MANOVA

MANOVA is similar to ANOVA, with the difference that ANOVA tests the mean differ- ences of more than two groups on one dependent variable, whereas MANOVA tests mean differences among groups across several dependent variables simultaneously, by using sums of squares and cross-product matrices. Just as multiple t-tests would

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 364

Chapter

15

Research Methods for Business

356 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

bias the results (as explained earlier), multiple ANOVA tests, using one dependent variable at a time, would also bias the results, since the dependent variables are likely to be interrelated. MANOVA circumvents this bias by simultaneously test- ing all the dependent variables, cancelling out the effects of any intercorrelations among them.

In MANOVA tests, the independent variable is measured on a nominal scale and the dependent variables on an interval or ratio scale.

The null hypothesis tested by MANOVA is:

H0 : µ1 = µ2 = µ3 = . . .µn

The alternate hypothesis is:

HA : µ1 6= µ2 6= µ3 6= . . .µn

15.8.6 Canonical correlation

Canonical correlation examines the relationship between two or more dependent variables and several independent variables; for example, the correlation between a set of job behaviors (such as engrossment in work, timely completion of work, and number of absences) and their influence on a set of performance factors (such as quality of work, the output, and rate of rejects). The focus here is on delineating the job behavior profiles associated with performance that result in high-quality production.

In sum, several univariate, bivariate, and multivariate techniques are available to analyze sample data. Using these techniques allows us to generalize the results obtained from the sample to the population at large. It is, of course, very important to use the correct statistical technique to test the hypotheses of your study. We have explained earlier in this chapter that the choice of the appropriate statistical technique depends on the number of variables you are examining, on the scale of measurement of your variable(s), on whether the assumptions of parametric tests are met, and on the size of your sample.

15.9 EXCELSIOR ENTERPRISES: HYPOTHESIS TESTING

The following hypotheses were generated for this study, as stated earlier:

H1: Job enrichment has a negative effect on intention to leave.

H2: Perceived equity has a negative effect on intention to leave.

H3: Burnout has a positive effect on intention to leave.

H4: Job satisfaction mediates the relationship between job enrichment, perceived equity, and burnout on intention to leave.

These hypotheses call for the use of mediated regression analysis (all the variables are measured at an interval level). The results of these tests and their interpretation are discussed below.

To test the hypothesis that job satisfaction mediates the effect of perceived justice, burnout, and job enrichment on employees’ intentions to leave three regression models were estimated, following Baron and Kenny (1986): model 1, regressing job satisfaction on perceived justice, burnout, and job enrichment; model 2, regressing intention to leave on perceived justice, burnout, and job enrichment; and model 3,

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 365

Chapter

15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 357

regressing employees’ intentions to leave on perceived justice, burnout, job enrich- ment, and job satisfaction. Separate coefficients for each equation were estimated and tested. To establish mediation the following conditions must hold: perceived justice, burnout, and job enrichment must affect job satisfaction in model 1; per- ceived justice, burnout, and job enrichment must be shown to have an impact on employees’ intention to leave in model 2; and job satisfaction must affect employ- ees’ intention to leave in model 3 (while controlling for perceived justice, burnout, and job enrichment). If these conditions all hold in the predicted direction, then the effect of perceived justice, burnout, and job enrichment must be less in model 3 than in model 2. Perfect mediation holds if perceived justice, burnout, and job enrichment have no effect on intention to leave (in other words, the effect of these variables on intention to leave is no longer significant) when the effect of job sat- isfaction is controlled for (model 3); partial mediation is established if perceived justice, burnout, and job enrichment still affect intention leave in model 3.

BOX 15.12: HOW DOES THIS WORK IN SPSS?

Under the Analyze menu, choose General Linear Model, then Multivariate. Move the dependent variables into the “Dependent” box. Move the independ- ent variables into the “Fixed Factor(s)” list. Select any of the dialog boxes by clicking the buttons on the right-hand side.

The R-square of the first regression model (model 1) was 0.165 and the model was statistically significant. In this model perceived justice and burnout were significant predictors of job satisfaction, whereas job enrichment was not. The R-square of the second regression model (model 2) was 0.393 and this model was also statistic- ally significant. Model 2, as depicted in Table 15.6 indicated that perceived justice, burnout, and job enrichment affected employees’ intention to leave. The R-square of the last model (model 3) was 0.487 and again the model was statistically signific- ant. In this model, job satisfaction was a significant predictor of intention to leave. Perceived justice and burnout were significant predictors of intention to leave when

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 366

Chapter

15

Research Methods for Business

358 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

job satisfaction was controlled for. The effect of perceived justice and burnout on intention to leave was less in the third model than in the second model. Thus, all conditions for partial mediation were met for perceived justice and burnout. Job enrichment was related to neither job satisfaction nor to intention to leave (when job satisfaction was controlled for).

Table 15.6 Mediation analysis

Step 1 model, with job satisfaction as the dependent variable

Coefficient p-value

Constant 3.575 0.000

Perceived justice 0.302 0.018

Burnout -0.538 0.000

Job enrichment 0.120 0.332

Model fit=0.165

Step 2 model, with intention to leave (ITL) as the dependent variable

Coefficient p-value

Constant 1.840 0.000

Perceived justice -0.307 0.000

Burnout 0.643 0.000

Job enrichment -0.165 0.039

Model fit=0.393

Step 3 model, including job satisfaction as an independent variable and with ITL as the dependent variable

Coefficient p-value

Constant 2.744 0.000

Perceived justice -0.231 0.003

Burnout 0.507 0.000

Job enrichment -0.134 0.068

Job satisfaction -0.253 0.000

Model fit=0.487

We performed follow-up analyses to test for the indirect effect of perceived justice and burnout on intention to leave via job satisfaction. Baron and Kenny (1986) provide an approximate significance test for the indirect effect of perceived justices and burnout on employees’ intentions. The path from, respectively, perceived justice and burnout to job satisfaction is denoted a and its standard error sa the path from job satisfaction to intention to leave is denoted b and its standard error sb. The product ab is the estimate of the indirect effect of perceived justice and burnout on employees’ intentions to leave. The standard error of ab is:

SEab = √ b2s2a + a2s2b + s2as2b

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 367

Chapter

15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 359

The ratio ab/SEab can be interpreted as a z statistic. Indirect effects of perceived justice (2.175, p < 0.05) and burnout (2.985, p < 0.01) were both significant.

BOX 15.13: RESEARCH REALITY

A method of testing mediation and moderation that is becoming more and more popular is bootstrapping (Bullock, Green & Ha, 2010; Preacher, Rucker & Hayes, 2007; Shrout & Bolger, 2002). Bootstrapping is a statistical method based on building a sampling distribution for a statistic by resampling from the data at hand. A big advantage of bootstrapping is that no assumptions about the shape of the sampling distribution of the statistic are necessary when conducting inferential tests. Two software packages that are often used to bootstrap are Mplus and AMOS.

15.9.1 Overall interpretation and recommendations to the president

From the results of the hypothesis tests, it is clear that perceived justice and burnout affect employees’ intentions to leave through job satisfaction. From the descriptive results, we have already seen that the mean on perceived equity is rather low (2.32 on a five-point scale), as is the mean on experienced burnout (2.55). Hence, if retention of employees is a top priority for the president, it is important to formulate policies and practices that help to enhance justice perceptions and to reduce or prevent burnout. Whatever is done to improve employees’ perceptions of justice and to either prevent or to reduce burnout will improve job satisfaction and thus help employees to think less about leaving and induce them to stay.

The president would therefore be well advised to rectify inequities in the system, if they really exist, or to clear misperceptions of inequities if this is actually the case. Preventing or remedying burnout may require both individual and organizational change. To solve the problem of burnout, the president may need to change the work environment and educate workers on how to adapt to, and cope better with, the stresses of the workplace.

The fact that only 50% of the variance in “intention to leave” was explained by the four independent variables considered in this study still leaves 50% unexplained. In other words, there are other additional variables that are important in explaining ITL that have not been considered in this study. Further research might be necessary to explain more of the variance in ITL, if the president wishes to pursue the matter further.

Now do Exercises 15.6. 15.7 and 15.8.

Exercise15.6

Discuss: what do the unstandardized coefficients and their p-values in the first model imply? In other words, what happens to job satisfaction if perceived justice, burnout, and job enrichment change by one unit?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 368

Chapter

15

Research Methods for Business

360 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Exercise15.7

Provide the tolerance values and the variance inflation factors for all the inde- pendent variables in model 1. Discuss: do we have a multicollinearity problem?

Exercise15.8

Does work shift moderate the relationship between job satisfaction and inten- tion to leave for Excelsior Enterprises employees?

We have now seen how different hypotheses can be tested by applying the appro- priate statistical tests in data analysis. Based on the interpretation of the results, the research report is then written, making necessary recommendations and discussing the pros and cons of each, together with cost-benefit analysis.

15.10 DATA WAREHOUSING, DATA MINING, AND OPERATIONS RESEARCH

Data warehousing and data mining are aspects of information systems. Most com- panies are now aware of the benefits of creating a data warehouse that serves as the central repository of all data collected from disparate sources, including those pertaining to the company’s finance, manufacturing, sales, and the like. The data warehouse is usually built from data collected through the different departments of the enterprise and can be accessed through various online analytical processing (OLAP) tools to support decision making. Data warehousing can be described as the process of extracting, transferring, and integrating data spread across multiple external databases and even operating systems, with a view to facilitating analysis and decision making.

Complementary to the functions of data warehousing, many companies resort to data mining as a strategic tool for reaching new levels of business intelligence. Using algorithms to analyze data in a meaningful way, data mining more effectively leverages the data warehouse by identifying hidden relations and patterns in the data stored in it. For instance, data mining makes it possible to trace retail sales patterns by ZIP code and the time of day of the purchases, so that optimal stocking of items becomes possible. Such “mined” data pertaining to the vital areas of the organization can be easily accessed and used for different purposes. For example, staffing for different times of the day can be planned, as can the number of check- out counters that need to be kept open in retail stores, to ensure efficiency as well as

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 369

Chapter

15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 361

effectiveness. We can see that data mining helps to clarify the underlying patterns in different business activities, which in turn facilitates decision making.

Operations research (OR) or management science (MS) is another sophisticated tool used to simplify and thus clarify certain types of complex problem that lend themselves to quantification. OR uses higher mathematics and statistics to identify, analyze, and ultimately solve intricate problems of great complexity faced by the manager. It provides an additional tool to the manager by using quantification to supplement personal judgment. Areas of problem solving that easily lend them- selves to OR include those relating to inventory, queuing, sequencing, routing, and search and replacement. OR helps to minimize costs and increase efficiency by resorting to decision trees, linear programming, network analysis, and mathemat- ical models.

Other information systems such as management information systems (MIS), decision support systems, executive information systems, and expert systems are good decision- making aids, but not necessarily involved with data collection and analyses in the strict sense.

In sum, a good information system collects, mines, and provides a wide range of pertinent information relating to aspects of both the external and internal envir- onments of the organization. By using the wide variety of tools and techniques available for solving problems of differing magnitude, executives, managers, and others entrusted with responsibility for results at various levels of the organiza- tion can find solutions to various concerns merely by securing access to the data available in the system and analyzing them.

It should be ensured that the data in the information system are error-free and are frequently updated. After all, decision making can only be as good as the data made available to managers.

15.11 SOME SOFTWARE PACKAGES USEFUL FOR DATA ANALYSIS

There is a wide variety of analytical software that may help you to analyze your data. Based on your specific needs, your research problem, and/or your conceptual model, you might consider the following software packages:

• LISREL: from Scientific Software International;

• MATLAB®: from the MathWorks, Inc.;

• Mplus: developed by Linda and Bengt Muthén;

• SAS/STAT: from SAS Institute;

• SPSS: from SPSS Inc.;

• SPSS AMOS: from SPSS Inc.;

• Stata: from Stata Corporation.

LISREL is designed to estimate and test structural equation models. Structural equa- tion models are complex, statistical models of linear relationships among latent (unobserved) variables and manifest (observed) variables. You can also use LISREL to carry out exploratory factor analysis and confirmatory factor analysis.

MATLAB is a computer program that was originally designed to simplify the imple- mentation of numerical linear algebra routines. It is used to implement numerical algorithms for a wide range of applications.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 370

Chapter

15

Research Methods for Business

362 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Mplus is a statistical modeling program that offers researchers a wide choice of models, estimators, and algorithms. Mplus allows the analysis of a wide variety of data such as cross-sectional and longitudinal data, single-level and multilevel data, and data that come from different populations with either observed or unob- served heterogeneity. In addition, Mplus has extensive capabilities for Monte Carlo simulation studies.

SAS is an integrated system of software products, capable of performing a broad range of statistical analyses such as descriptive statistics, multivariate techniques, and time series analyses. Because of its capabilities, it is used in many disciplines, including medical sciences, biological sciences, social sciences, and education.

SPSS (Statistical Package for the Social Sciences) is a data management and analysis program designed to do statistical data analysis, including descriptive statistics such as plots, frequencies, charts, and lists, as well as sophisticated inferential and multivariate statistical procedures like analysis of variance (ANOVA), factor analysis, cluster analysis, and categorical data analysis.

SPSS AMOS is designed to estimate and test structural equation models.

Stata is a general purpose statistical software package that supports various statist- ical and econometric methods, graphics, and enhanced features for data manipu- lation, programming, and matrix manipulation.

SUMMARY

In this chapter we covered the procedure for hypothesis testing. We have discussed type I errors, type II errors, and statistical power. We have observed various statistical analyses and tests used to examine different hypotheses to answer research ques- tions. We discussed the use of dummy variables, multicollinearity, and moderated regression analysis. Through the example of the research on Excelsior Enterprises, we observed hypothesis testing using mediated regression analysis and learned how the computer results are interpreted.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

What kinds of biases do you think could be minimized or avoided during the data analysis stage of research?

When we collect data on the effects of treatment in experimental designs, which statistical test is most appropriate to test the treatment effects?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 371

Chapter

15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 363

A tax consultant wonders whether he should be more selective about the class of clients he serves so as to maximize his income. He usually deals with four categories of clients: the very rich, rich, upper middle class, and middle class. He has records of each and every client served, the taxes paid by them, and how much he has charged them. Since many particulars in respect of the clients vary (number of dependants, business deductibles, etc.), irrespective of the category they belong to, he would like an appropriate analysis to be done to see which among the four categories of clientele he should choose to continue to serve in the future. What kind of analysis should be done in this case and why?

What is bootstrapping and why do you think that this method is becoming more and more popular as a method of testing for moderation and mediation?

Now do Exercises 15.9. 15.10 and 15.11.

Exercise 15.9

Open the file “resmethassignment1” (you created this file doing the exercise from the previous chapter). Answer the following questions.

Is the exam grade significantly larger than 75?

Are there significant differences in the exam grade for men and women?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 372

Chapter

15

Research Methods for Business

364 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Is there a significant difference between the exam grade and the paper grade?

Are there significant differences in the paper grade for the four year groups?

Is the sample representative for the IQ level, for which it is known that 50% of the population has an IQ below 100, and 50% has an IQ of 100 or higher?

Obtain a correlation matrix for all relevant variables and discuss the results.

Do a multiple regression analysis to explain the variance in paper grades using the independent variables of age, sex (dummy coded), and IQ, and interpret the results.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 373

Chapter

15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 365

Exercise 15.10

Tables 15.A to 15.D below summarize the results of data analyses of research conducted in a sales organization that operates in 50 different cities of the country and employs a total sales force of about 500. The number of salesper- sons sampled for the study was 150.

Table 15.A Means, standard deviations, minimum, and maximum

Variable Mean Std.

deviation Minimum Maximum

Sales (in 1000s of $) 75.1 8.6 45.2 97.3

No of salespersons 25 6 5 50

Population (in 100s) 5.1 0.8 2.78 7.12

Per capita income (in 1000s of $)

20.3 20.1 10.1 75.9

Advertising (in 1000s of $)

10.3 5.2 6.1 15.7

Table 15.B Correlations among the variables

Sales Sales-

persons Popu- lation Income

Ad. expendit-

ure

Sales 1.0

No. of salespersons

0.76 1.0

Population 0.62 0.06 1.0

Income 0.56 0.21 0.11 1.0

Ad. expenditure 0.68 0.16 0.36 0.23 1.0

Table 15.C Results of one-way ANOVA: sales by level of education

Source of variation Sums of squares df

Mean squares F

Significance of F

Between groups 50.7 4 12.7 3.6 0.01

Within groups 501.8 145 3.5

Total 552.5 150

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 374

Chapter

15

Research Methods for Business

366 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Table 15.D Results of regression analysis

Multiple R 0.65924

R-square 0.43459

Adjusted R-square 0.35225

Standard error 0.41173

df (5.144)

F 5.278

Sig. 0.000

Variable Beta t Sig. t

Training of salespersons 0.28 2.768 0.0092

No. of salespersons 0.34 3.55 0.00001

Population 0.09 0.97 0.467

Per capita income 0.12 1.200 0.089

Advertisement 0.47 4.54 0.00001

Interpret the information contained in each of the tables in as much detail as possible.

Summarize the results for the CEO of the company.

Make recommendations based on your interpretation of the results.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 375

Chapter

15

Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 367

Exercise 15.11

Visit David Kenny’s website (http://davidakenny.net/cm/mediate.htm) and search for a link to SPSS and SAS macros that can be downloaded for tests of indirect effects.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 376

Chapter

16 368 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Chapter 16

Qualitative data analysis

Topics discussed:

� Data reduction

� Data display

� Drawing conclusions

� Reliability and validity in qualitative research

� Some other methods of gathering and analyzing qualitative data

Chapter objectives

After completing Chapter 16 you should be able to:

1. Understand the general approach to qualitative data analysis.

2. Describe three important steps in qualitative data analysis: data reduction, data display, and drawing conclusions.

3. Describe how reliability and validity have a different meaning in qualitative research in comparison to quantitative research.

4. Explain how reliability and validity are achieved in qualitative research.

Qualitative data are data in the form of words. Examples of qualitative data are interview notes, transcripts of focus groups, answers to open-ended questions, transcriptions of video recordings, accounts of experiences with a product on the Internet, news articles, and the like. Qualitative data can come from a wide variety of primary sources and/or secondary sources, such as individuals, focus groups, com- pany records, government publications, and the Internet. The analysis of qualitative data is aimed at making valid inferences from the often overwhelming amount of collected data.

Earlier in this book we explained that you can search the Internet for books, journ- als articles, conference proceedings, company publications, and the like. However, the Internet is more than a mere source of documents; it is also a rich source of textual information for qualitative research. For instance, there are many social networks on the Internet structured around products and services such as com- puter games, mobile telephones, movies, books, and music. Through an analysis of these social networks researchers may learn a lot about the needs of consumers, about the amount of time consumers spend in group communication, or about the social network that underlies the virtual community. In this way, social networks on the Internet may provide researchers and marketing and business strategists with valuable, strategic information.

The possibilities for qualitative research on the Internet are unlimited, as the fol- lowing example illustrates. In an effort to find out what motivates consumers to construct protest websites, Ward and Ostrom (2006) examined and analyzed protest websites. A content analysis revealed that consumers construct complaint web- sites to demonstrate their power, to influence others, and to gain revenge on the organization that betrayed them. This example illustrates how the Internet can be

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 377

Chapter

16

Qualitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 369

a valuable source of rich, authentic qualitative information. With increasing usage of the Internet, it will undoubtedly become even more important as a source of qualitative and quantitative information.

Qualitative research may involve repeated sampling, collection of data, and analysis of data. As a result, qualitative data analysis may start after only some of the data have been collected. The analysis of qualitative data is not easy. The problem is that, in comparison with quantitative data analysis, there are relatively few well-established and commonly accepted rules and guidelines for analyzing qualitative data. Over the years, however, some general approaches for the analysis of qualitative data have been developed. The approach discussed in this chapter is largely based on work of Miles and Huberman (1994). According to them, there are generally three steps in qualitative data analysis: data reduction, data display, and the drawing of conclusions.

The first step in qualitative data analysis is concerned with data reduction. Data reduction refers to the process of selecting, coding, and categorizing the data. Data display refers to ways of presenting the data. A selection of quotes, a matrix, a graph, or a chart illustrating patterns in the data may help the researcher (and eventually the reader) to understand the data. In this way, data displays may help you to draw conclusions based on patterns in the reduced set of data.

Note that qualitative data analysis is not a step-by-step, linear process. Instead, data coding may help you simultaneously to develop ideas on how the data may be displayed, as well as to draw some preliminary conclusions. In turn, preliminary conclusions may feed back into the way the raw data are coded, categorized, and displayed.

This chapter will discuss data reduction, data display, and drawing and verifying conclusions in some detail. To illustrate these steps in qualitative data analysis, we will introduce a case. We will use the case, by means of boxes throughout the chapter, to illustrate key parts of the qualitative research process.

16.1 DATA REDUCTION

Qualitative data collection produces large amounts of data. The first step in data ana- lysis is therefore the reduction of data through coding and categorization. Coding is the analytic process through which the qualitative data that you have gathered are reduced, rearranged, and integrated to form theory. The purpose of coding is to help you to draw meaningful conclusions about the data. Codes are labels given to units of text which are later grouped and turned into categories. Coding is often an iterative process; you may have to return to your data repeatedly to increase your understanding of the data (i.e., to be able to recognize patterns in the data, to discover connections between the data, and to organize the data into coherent categories).

CASE: INSTIGATIONS OF CUSTOMER ANGER

INTRODUCTION

Suppose that you are in a fashion shop and that you have just found a clothing item that you like. You go to the counter to pay for the item. At the counter you find a shop assistant who is talking to a friend on her mobile phone. You have to wait. You wait for a couple of minutes, but the shop assistant is in no hurry to finish the call.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 378

Chapter

16

Research Methods for Business

370 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

This event may make you angry. Waiting for service is a common cause of anger: the longer the delay, the angrier customers tend to be (Taylor, 1994).

RESEARCH OBJECTIVE

Prior research in marketing has applied appraisal theory to understand why anger is experienced in such situations (e.g., Folkes, Koletsky & Graham, 1987; Nyer, 1997; Taylor, 1994). Appraisal refers to the process of judging the signific- ance of an event for personal well-being. The basic premise of appraisal theory is that emotions are related to the interpretations that people have about events: people may differ in the specific appraisals that are elicited by a particular event (for instance, waiting for service), but the same patterns of appraisal give rise to the same emotions. Most appraisal theories see appraisals as being a cause of emotions (Parrott, 2001). Along these lines, appraisal theory has been used to understand why anger is experienced in service settings.

Although appraisal theory provides useful insights into the role of cognition in emotional service encounters, recent research suggests that, although they are clearly associated with anger, none of the aforementioned appraisals is a necessary or sufficient condition for anger to arise (Kuppens et al., 2003; Smith & Ellsworth, 1987). What’s more, for the specific purpose of avoiding customer anger, appraisal theory is too abstract to be diagnostic for services management. That is, service firm management may benefit more from a classification of incidents that are considered to be unfair (for instance, waiting for service and core service failures), than from the finding that unfair events are generally associated with customer anger.

In other words, to be able to avoid customer anger, it is crucial that service firm management knows what specific precipitating events typically elicit this emotion in customers. After all, it is easier to manage such events than the appraisals that may or may not be associated with these particular events.

Therefore, this study investigates events that typically instigate customer anger in services. This study builds on a rich tradition of research in psychology that has specified typical instigations of anger in everyday life. In addition, it builds on research in marketing that has identified and classified service failures, retail failures, and behaviors of service firms that cause customers to switch services (Bitner, Booms & Tetreault, 1990; Keaveney, 1995; Kelley, Hoffman & Davis, 1993).

METHOD

Procedure. Following related research in marketing, the critical incident technique (CIT) was used to identify critical behaviors of service providers that instigate customer anger (e.g., Bitner, Booms & Tetreault, 1990; Keave- ney, 1995; Kelley, Hoffman & Davis, 1993; Mangold, Miller & Brockway, 1999). Critical incidents were collected by 30 trained research assistants, who were instructed to collect 30 critical incidents each. In order to obtain a sample representative of customers of service organizations, they were instructed to collect data from a wide variety of people. Participants were asked to record their critical incidents on a standardized form in the pres- ence of the interviewer. This has several advantages, such as availability of the interviewer to answer questions and to provide explanations.

Questionnaire. Participants were asked to record their answers on a stand- ardized questionnaire, which was modeled after previous applications of CIT in services (e.g., Keaveney, 1995; Kelley, Hoffman & Davis, 1993). The questionnaire began by asking participants to indicate which of 30 differ- ent services they had purchased during the previous six-month period.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 379

Chapter

16

Qualitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 371

Next, participants were asked to recall the last negative incident with a service provider that made them feel angry. They were asked to describe the incident in detail by means of open-ended questions. The open-ended questions were “What service are you thinking about?”, “Please tell us, in your own words, what happened. Why did you get angry?”, and “Try to tell us exactly what happened: where you were, what happened, what the service provider did, how you felt, what you said, and so forth.”

Sample. Critical incidents were defined as events, combinations of events, or series of events between a customer and a service provider that caused customer anger. The interviewers collected 859 incidents. The participants (452 males, 407 females) represented a cross-section of the population. Their ages ranged between 16 and 87 with a mean age of 37.4. Approxim- ately 2% of the participants had less than a completed high school educa- tion, whereas 45.1% had at least a bachelor’s degree. The reported incidents covered more than 40 different service businesses, including banking and insurance, personal transportation (by airplane, bus, ferry, taxi, or train), hospitals, physicians, and dentists, repair and utility services, (local) gov- ernment and the police, (virtual) stores, education and child care, enter- tainment, hospitality, restaurants, telecommunication companies, health clubs, contracting firms, hairdressers, real-estate agents, driving schools, rental companies, and travel agencies. On average, the negative events that participants reported had happened 18 weeks earlier.

Coding begins with selecting the coding unit. Indeed, qualitative data can be ana- lyzed at many levels. Examples of coding units include words, sentences, para- graphs, and themes. The smallest unit that is generally used is the word. A larger, and often more useful, unit of content analysis is the theme: “a single assertion about a subject” (Kassarjian, 1977, p. 12). When you are using the theme as a cod- ing unit, you are primarily looking for the expression of an idea (Minichiello et al., 1990). Thus, you might assign a code to a text unit of any size, as long as that unit of text represents a single theme or issue. Consider, for instance, the following critical incident:

After the meal I asked for the check. The waitress nodded and I expected to get the check. After three cigarettes there was still no check. I looked around and saw that the waitress was having a lively conversation with the bartender.

This critical incident contains two themes:

1. The waitress does not provide service at the time she promises to: “The waitress nodded and I expected to get the check. After three cigarettes there was still no check.”

2. The waitress pays little attention to the customer: she is not late because she is very busy; instead of bringing the check, she is engaged in a lively conversation with the bartender.

Accordingly, the aforementioned critical incident was coded as: “delivery promises” (that were broken) and “personal attention” (that was not provided).

This example illustrates how the codes “delivery promises” and “personal attention” help to reduce the data to a more manageable amount. Note that proper coding not only involves reducing the data but also making sure that no relevant data are eliminated. Hence, it is important that the codes “delivery promises” and “personal attention” capture the meaning of the coded unit of text.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 380

Chapter

16

Research Methods for Business

372 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

BOX 16.1: DATA ANALYSIS

Unit of analysis Since the term “critical incident” can refer to either the overall story of a participant or to discrete behaviors contained within this story, the first step in data analysis is to determine the appropriate unit of analysis (Kas- sarjian, 1977). In this study, critical behavior was chosen as the unit of analysis. For this reason, 600 critical incidents were coded into 886 critical behaviors. For instance, a critical incident in which a service provider does not provide prompt service and treats a customer in a rude manner was coded as containing two critical behaviors (“unresponsiveness” and “insulting behavior”).

Categorization is the process of organizing, arranging, and classifying coding units. Codes and categories can be developed both inductively and deductively. In situ- ations where there is no theory available, you must generate codes and categories inductively from the data. In its extreme form, this is what has been called grounded theory (see Chapter 6).

In many situations, however, you will have a preliminary theory on which you can base your codes and categories. In these situations you can construct an initial list of codes and categories from the theory, and, if necessary, change or refine these during the research process as new codes and categories emerge inductively (Miles & Huberman, 1994). The benefit of the adoption of existing codes and categories is that you are able to build on and/or expand prevailing knowledge.

BOX 16.2: DATA ANALYSIS

Categorization Qualitative data analysis was used to examine the data (Kas- sarjian, 1977). As a first step, two judges coded critical incidents into critical behaviors. Next, (sub)categories were developed based on these critical beha- viors. Two judges (A and B) independently developed mutually exclusive and exhaustive categories and subcategories for responses 1 to 400 (587 critical behaviors). Two other trained judges (C and D) independently sorted the crit- ical behaviors into the categories provided by judges A and B. Finally, a fifth, independent judge (E) carried out a final sort.

As you begin to organize your data into categories and subcategories you will begin to notice patterns and relationships between the data. Note that your list of cat- egories and subcategories may change during the process of analyzing the data. For instance, new categories may have to be identified, definitions of categories may have to be changed, and categories may have to be broken into subcategories. This is all part of the iterative process of qualitative data analysis.

BOX 16.3: RESULTS

Categories Participants reported a wide range of critical behaviors that made them angry. Some of these behaviors were closely related to the outcome of the service process (e.g., “My suitcase was heavily damaged”). Other behaviors were related to service delivery (e.g., “For three days in a row I tried to make an appointment [ . . . ] via the telephone. The line was always busy”) or inter- personal relationships (e.g., “She did not stir a finger. She was definitely not intending to help me”). Finally, customers got angry because of inadequate responses to service failures (e.g., “He did not even apologize” or “He refused

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 381

Chapter

16

Qualitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 373

to give me back my money”). These four specific behavior types represent the four overarching categories of events that instigate customer anger.

Two of these categories were further separated into, respectively, three categor- ies representing service delivery or procedural failures (“unreliability,” “inac- cessibility,” and “company policies”) and two categories representing interper- sonal relationships or interactional failures (“insensitive behavior” and “impol- ite behavior”). The main reason for this was that the categories “procedural fail- ures” and “interactional failures” would otherwise be too heterogeneous with respect to their composition and, more importantly, with respect to ways of avoiding or dealing with these failures. For instance, avoiding anger in response to unreliability (not performing in accordance with agreements) will most likely call for a different− and maybe even opposite− approach than avoiding anger in response to company policies (performing in accordance with company rules and procedures), even though these failures are both procedural; that is, related to service delivery.

Sometimes you may want to capture the number of times a particular theme or event occurs, or how many respondents bring up certain themes or events. Quantification of your qualitative data may provide you with a rough idea about the (relative) importance of the categories and subcategories.

BOX 16.4

Table 16.1 indicates that “price agreements that were broken” (category “unre- liability”, subcategory “pricing”) was mentioned 12 times as a cause of anger. Hence, broken price agreements represent 1.35% of the total number of critical behaviors (886) and 2% of the total number of the reported critical incidents (600). The sixth column indicates that nine participants mentioned broken price agreements as the sole cause of their anger, whereas three participants mentioned at least one additional critical behavior (column 7).

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 382

Chapter

16

Research Methods for Business

374 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

T ab

le 16

.1 .

In st

ig at

io n

s of

an ge

r in

se rv

ic e

co n

su m

p ti

on se

tt in

gs

(S u

b )c

at eg

o ry

(S u

b )c

at eg

o ry

d efi

n i-

ti o

n N

o. o

fb eh

av io

rs

N o.

o fb

eh av

io rs

in %

o f

b eh

av io

rs

N o.

o fb

eh av

io rs

in %

o fi

n ci

d en

ts

N o.

o fb

eh av

io rs

in si

n gl

e- fa

ct o

r

in ci

d en

ts

N o.

o fb

eh av

io rs

in m

u lt

i- fa

ct o

r

in ci

d en

ts E

xa m

p le

(s )

P ro

ce d

u ra

lf ai

lu re

s

U n

re li

ab il

it y

Se rv

ic e

fi rm

d oe

s n

ot

p er

fo rm

th e

se rv

ic e

d ep

en d

ab ly

.

15 6

17 .6

1 26

.0 0

73 83

D el

iv er

y p

ro m

is es

Se rv

ic e

p ro

vi d

er d

o es

n o

tp ro

vi d

e se

rv ic

es at

th e

ti m

e it

p ro

m is

es to

d o

so .

10 4

11 .7

4 17

.3 3

42 62

W ai

tf o

r ap

p o

in tm

en t

w it

h d

en ti

st ,p

h ys

ic ia

n ,o

r

h ai

rd re

ss er

,o r

o n

a p

la n

e,

tr ai

n ,o

r ta

xi .

Se rv

ic e

p ro

vi si

o n

Se rv

ic e

p ro

vi d

er d

o es

n o

tp ro

vi d

e th

e se

rv ic

e

th at

w as

ag re

ed u

p o

n .

40 4.

52 6.

67 22

18 C

lie n

tr ec

ei ve

s d

if fe

re n

tc ar

th an

ag re

ed u

p o

n w

it h

ca r

re n

ta lc

o m

p an

y o

r d

if fe

re n

t

ap ar

tm en

tt h

an ag

re ed

u p

o n

w it

h tr

av el

ag en

t. B

ic yc

le

re p

ai re

rs ,c

ar m

ec h

an ic

s, o

r

b u

ild in

g co

n tr

ac to

rs ca

rr y

o u

t

d if

fe re

n tw

o rk

th an

ag re

ed

u p

o n

o r

w o

rk th

at w

as n

o t

ag re

ed u

p o

n w

it h

th ei

r cl

ie n

ts .

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 383

Chapter

16

Qualitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 375

T ab

le 16

.1 .(

co n

ti n

u ed

) In

st ig

at io

n s

of an

ge r

in se

rv ic

e co

n su

m p

ti on

se tt

in gs

P ri

ci n

g P

ri ce

ag re

em en

ts ar

e

b ro

ke n

.

12 1.

35 2.

00 9

3 “A

ft er

a p

ar ty

w e

ca lle

d a

ca b.

W e

w er

e w

it h

a p

ar ty

o ffi

ve .

A va

n w

o u

ld ta

ke u

s h

o m

e fo

r

a fi

xe d

,l ow

p ri

ce .H

ow ev

er ,

u p

o n

ar ri

va l,

th e

d ri

ve r

as ke

d

th e

re gu

la r

cl o

ck p

ri ce

.”

In ac

ce ss

ib il

it y

C u

st om

er s

ex p

er ie

n ce

d if

fi cu

lt ie

s w

it h

en ga

-

gi n

g in

th e

se rv

ic e

p ro

-

ce ss

.

47 5.

30 7.

83 17

30

C o

m m

u n

ic at

iv e

in ac

ce ss

ib ili

ty

In ac

ce ss

ib ili

ty vi

a te

le -

p h

o n

e, fa

x, e-

m ai

l,

an d

/o r

th e

In te

rn et

.

26 2.

93 4.

33 9

17 “F

o r

th re

e d

ay s

in a

ro w

I tr

ie d

to m

ak e

an ap

p o

in tm

en tw

it h

m y

p h

ys ic

ia n

vi a

th e

te le

-

p h

o n

e. T

h e

li n

e w

as al

w ay

s

b u

sy .”

P h

ys ic

al in

ac ce

ss ib

il it

y

o fs

er vi

ce el

em en

ts

C u

st o

m er

s ex

p er

ie n

ce

d if

fi cu

lt ie

s w

it h

ac ce

ss -

in g

a ce

rt ai

n el

em en

to r

p ar

to ft

h e

se rv

ic e.

12 1.

35 2.

00 4

8 C

h ec

k- in

co u

n te

r o

fa n

ai rl

in e

co m

p an

y, ca

sh -p

o in

to fa

su p

er m

ar ke

t, se

rv ic

e d

es k

o f

a h

o li

d ay

re so

rt ,o

r b

ag ga

ge

cl ai

m at

an ai

rp o

rt .

P h

ys ic

al in

ac ce

ss ib

ili ty

o fs

er vi

ce p

ro vi

d er

D if

fi cu

lt p

h ys

ic al

ac ce

ss ib

ili ty

o fs

er -

vi ce

p ro

vi d

er b

ec au

se

o fi

n co

n ve

n ie

n tl

o ca

-

ti o

n s

o r

o p

en in

g h

o u

rs .

9 1.

02 1.

50 4

5 “I

tw as

th re

e o’

cl o

ck o

n a

Sa t-

u rd

ay af

te rn

o o

n an

d th

e d

ry

cl ea

n er

w as

al re

ad y

cl o

se d

.”

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 384

Chapter

16

Research Methods for Business

376 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

T ab

le 16

.1 .(

co n

ti n

u ed

) In

st ig

at io

n s

of an

ge r

in se

rv ic

e co

n su

m p

ti on

se tt

in gs

C om

p an

y p

ol ic

ie s

Se rv

ic e

p ro

vi d

er ’s

ru le

s

an d

p ro

ce d

u re

s or

th e

ex ec

u ti

on of

ru le

s an

d

p ro

ce d

u re

s by

se rv

ic e

st af

fi s

p er

ce iv

ed to

be

u n

fa ir

.

76 8.

57 12

.6 7

45 31

R u

le s

an d

p ro

ce d

u re

s In

ef fi

ci en

t, ill

-t im

ed ,

an d

u n

cl ea

r ru

le s

an d

p ro

ce d

u re

s.

66 7.

45 11

.0 0

38 28

“I tt

u rn

ed o

u tt

h at

th e

[C ys

ti c

Fi b

ro si

s] fo

u n

d at

io n

u se

d

u n

fa ir

p ro

ce d

u re

s fo

r as

si gn

-

in g

fa m

ili es

w it

h cy

st ic

fi b

ro si

s to

va ca

ti o

n s.

Fo r

ex am

p le

,s o

m e

fa m

ili es

w er

e

in vi

te d

fo r

ye ar

s in

a ro

w ev

en

th o

u gh

th is

is n

o ta

llo w

ed .”

“O n

ly tw

o d

ay s

b ef

o re

o u

r

w ed

d in

g m

y w

if e

w as

o rd

er ed

to le

av e

th e

co u

n tr

y b

y th

e

im m

ig ra

ti o

n o

ffi ce

.”

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 385

Chapter

16

Qualitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 377

T ab

le 16

.1 .(

co n

ti n

u ed

) In

st ig

at io

n s

of an

ge r

in se

rv ic

e co

n su

m p

ti on

se tt

in gs

“I w

en tt

o th

e lo

ca la

d m

in is

-

tr at

io n

to re

p o

rt a

ch an

ge o

f

ad d

re ss

.A tt

h e

sa m

e ti

m e

I

w an

te d

to ap

p ly

fo r

a p

ar ki

n g

li ce

n se

.I n

th at

ca se

yo u

m u

st

d ra

w a

n u

m b

er fo

r th

e

ch an

ge o

fa d

d re

ss fi

rs ta

n d

la te

r o

n yo

u m

u st

d ra

w a

se co

n d

n u

m b

er fo

r th

e p

ar k-

in g

lic en

se .I

go ta

n gr

y an

d

as ke

d w

h y

o n

ea rt

h th

at w

as

n ec

es sa

ry .”

In fl

ex ib

le se

rv ic

e st

af f

Se rv

ic e

st af

fd o

es n

o t

ad ap

tr u

le s

an d

p ro

-

ce d

u re

s to

re fl

ec ti

n d

i-

vi d

u al

ci rc

u m

st an

ce s

o f

cu st

o m

er .

10 1.

12 1.

67 7

3 “I

tw as

an ex

ce p

ti o

n al

ly h

o t

d ay

.T h

e se

co n

d -c

la ss

co m

-

p ar

tm en

ts o

ft h

e tr

ai n

w er

e

ov er

cr ow

d ed

.T o

av o

id th

e

b ad

at m

o sp

h er

e I

w en

tt o

a fi

rs t-

cl as

s co

m p

ar tm

en t.

W h

en th

e gu

ar d

ca m

e h

e se

n t

u s

aw ay

.A tt

h at

m o

m en

tI

fl ew

in to

a ra

ge .”

In te

ra ct

io n

al fa

il u

re s

Im p

ol it

e be

h av

io r

Se rv

ic e

p ro

vi d

er

be h

av es

ru d

el y.

84 9.

48 14

.0 0

46 38

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 386

Chapter

16

Research Methods for Business

378 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

T ab

le 16

.1 .(

co n

ti n

u ed

) In

st ig

at io

n s

of an

ge r

in se

rv ic

e co

n su

m p

ti on

se tt

in gs

In su

lt in

g b

eh av

io r

Se rv

ic e

p ro

vi d

er is

b eh

av in

g o

ff en

si ve

ly .

32 3.

61 5.

33 15

17 “T

h e

p h

ys ic

ia n

w as

ge tt

in g

fl u

id o

u to

fm y

kn ee

.T h

is

w as

ra th

er p

ai n

fu l,

so I

to ld

h im

th at

it h

u rt

.H e

d ir

ec tl

y

st o

p p

ed ev

en th

o u

gh th

er e

w as

so m

e fl

u id

le ft

.W h

en

I as

ke d

h im

w h

y h

e h

ad

st o

p p

ed h

e sa

id ‘b

ec au

se yo

u

ar e

su ch

a m

o an

er ’.

T h

at ’s

n o

w ay

to tr

ea tp

eo p

le .”

N o

tt ak

in g

cl ie

n t

se ri

o u

sl y

Se rv

ic e

p ro

vi d

er d

o es

n o

tt ak

e cl

ie n

ts er

i-

o u

sl y.

28 3.

16 4.

67 15

13 “F

o r

so m

e ti

m e

I w

as h

ea ri

n g

st ra

n ge

n o

is es

w h

en I

w as

d ri

vi n

g m

y ca

r. A

ga in

an d

ag ai

n th

ey [g

ar ag

e] fo

b b

ed

m e

o ff

w it

h ‘Y

es ,d

ea r

.. .’

an d

‘Y es

,l ov

e ..

.’ E

ve n

tu al

ly th

ey

h ad

to re

p la

ce th

e en

gi n

e. ”

D is

h o

n es

ty Se

rv ic

e p

ro vi

d er

tr ie

s

to ea

rn m

o n

ey in

an

im p

ro p

er m

an n

er .

16 1.

81 2.

67 10

6 “A

ft er

w e

w en

tt o

th e

th ea

te r,

w e

to o

k a

ca b.

T h

e d

ri ve

r

m ad

e a

h u

ge d

et o

u r.

I w

as

m ad

b ec

au se

th is

w as

a p

la in

ri p

-o ff

.”

D is

cr im

in at

io n

Pe rs

o n

o r

gr o

u p

is

tr ea

te d

u n

fa ir

ly ,u

su -

al ly

b ec

au se

o fp

re ju

-

d ic

e ab

o u

tr ac

e, et

h n

ic

gr o

u p,

ag e

gr o

u p,

o r

ge n

d er

.

8 0.

90 1.

33 6

2 “I

w as

re fu

se d

ac ce

ss to

th e

b ar

b ec

au se

o fm

y ra

ce ,e

ve n

th o

u gh

I w

as im

m ac

u la

te ly

d re

ss ed

.T h

ey li

te ra

lly to

ld m

e

th at

th ey

d id

n o

tc ar

e fo

r m

y

ki n

d o

fp eo

p le

.”

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 387

Chapter

16

Qualitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 379

T ab

le 16

.1 .(

co n

ti n

u ed

) In

st ig

at io

n s

of an

ge r

in se

rv ic

e co

n su

m p

ti on

se tt

in gs

In se

n si

ti ve

be h

av io

r Se

rv ic

e p

ro vi

d er

d oe

s

n ot

m ak

e an

ef fo

rt to

ap p

re ci

at e

th e

cu s-

to m

er ’s

n ee

d s

an d

/o r

p ay

s li

tt le

at te

n ti

on

to cu

st om

er s

or th

ei r

be lo

n gi

n gs

.

19 5

22 .0

1 32

.5 0

76 11

9

U n

re sp

o n

si ve

n es

s U

n re

sp o

n si

ve st

af fd

o es

n o

tp ro

vi d

e p

ro m

p t

se rv

ic e

to cu

st o

m er

s

o r

d o

es n

o tr

es p

o n

d to

cu st

o m

er s’

re q

u es

ts at

al l.

80 9.

03 13

.3 3

33 47

“I w

en tt

o a

ca sh

d es

k [o

fa

d ru

gs to

re ]b

u tt

h e

sa le

sp er

-

so n

w al

ke d

aw ay

.A ta

n o

th er

ca sh

d es

k tw

o p

er so

n s

w er

e

h el

p in

g o

n e

cl ie

n t.

O n

e o

f

th em

lo o

ke d

at m

e b

u td

id n

o t

sh ow

an y

in te

n ti

o n

to h

el p

m e.

It to

o k

fo re

ve r

b ef

o re

I

w as

fi n

al ly

se rv

ed .”

“I as

ke d

a gi

rl to

h el

p m

e fi

n d

th e

ri gh

ts iz

e [c

lo th

es ]f

o r

m y

gr an

d so

n .S

h e

d id

n o

ts ti

r a

fi n

ge r.

Sh e

w as

d efi

n it

el y

n o

t

in te

n d

in g

to h

el p

m e.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 388

Chapter

16

Research Methods for Business

380 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

T ab

le 16

.1 .(

co n

ti n

u ed

) In

st ig

at io

n s

of an

ge r

in se

rv ic

e co

n su

m p

ti on

se tt

in gs

In co

m p

le te

/i n

co rr

ec t

in fo

rm at

io n

Se rv

ic e

p ro

vi d

er w

it h

-

h o

ld s

in fo

rm at

io n

fr o

m cl

ie n

to r

p ro

vi d

es

in co

m p

le te

,i m

p re

ci se

,

o r

in co

rr ec

ti n

fo rm

a-

ti o

n .

61 6.

88 10

.1 7

21 40

“O u

r p

la n

e w

as n

o tt

h er

e. I

go t

m ad

b ec

au se

th ey

d id

n o

tt el

l

u s

w h

y n

o to

r w

h at

to d

o. ”

In ac

cu ra

cy w

it h

p er

so n

al d

at a

Se rv

ic e

p ro

vi d

er

h an

d le

s p

er so

n al

in fo

rm at

io n

o fc

lie n

t

ra th

er ca

re le

ss ly

.

16 1.

81 2.

67 5

11 “I

w as

lo o

ki n

g fo

r a

su m

-

m er

jo b

an d

si gn

ed u

p at

an

em p

lo ym

en ta

ge n

cy .W

h en

I as

ke d

th em

ab o

u tt

h e

st at

e

o fa

ff ai

rs a

co u

p le

o fw

ee ks

la te

r, I

fo u

n d

o u

tt h

at I

h ad

n o

tb ee

n si

gn ed

u p

ye t.

T h

ey

to ld

m e

th at

th ey

h ad

lo st

m y

ap p

li ca

ti o

n fo

rm .”

Pe rs

o n

al at

te n

ti o

n Se

rv ic

e p

ro vi

d er

p ay

s

lit tl

e at

te n

ti o

n to

th e

cu st

o m

er .

15 1.

69 2.

50 8

7 “A

ft er

th e

m ea

lI as

ke d

fo r

th e

ch ec

k. T

h e

w ai

tr es

s n

o d

-

d ed

an d

I ex

p ec

te d

to ge

t

th e

ch ec

k. A

ft er

th re

e ci

ga r-

et te

s th

er e

w as

st ill

n o

ch ec

k.

I lo

o ke

d ar

o u

n d

an d

sa w

th at

th e

w ai

tr es

s w

as h

av in

g a

li ve

ly co

n ve

rs at

io n

w it

h th

e

b ar

te n

d er

.”

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 389

Chapter

16

Qualitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 381

T ab

le 16

.1 .(

co n

ti n

u ed

) In

st ig

at io

n s

of an

ge r

in se

rv ic

e co

n su

m p

ti on

se tt

in gs

Im p

er so

n al

tr ea

tm en

t Se

rv ic

e p

ro vi

d er

d o

es

n o

tp ro

vi d

e ta

ilo r-

m ad

e

so lu

ti o

n s.

9 1.

02 1.

50 3

6 “I

go ta

n gr

y b

ec au

se sh

e

[h ai

rd re

ss er

]d id

n o

tc u

tm y

h ai

r th

e w

ay I

h ad

as ke

d h

er

to ..

.”

“T h

e m

o rt

ga ge

co u

n se

lo r

w as

ve ry

d o

m in

an td

u ri

n g

th e

co n

ve rs

at io

n .M

y ow

n p

o in

t

o fv

ie w

w as

n o

ts u

ffi ci

en tl

y

ad d

re ss

ed .”

In co

n ve

n ie

n ce

C u

st o

m er

en d

s u

p

in in

co n

ve n

ie n

to r

u n

co m

fo rt

ab le

si tu

-

at io

n ,o

ft en

le ad

in g

to

p h

ys ic

al d

is tr

es s.

8 0.

90 1.

33 2

6 “A

ft er

la n

d in

g [a

ir p

la n

e] ,w

e

h ad

to st

ay in

o u

r se

at s

fo r

1. 5

h o

u rs

.I tw

as ve

ry u

n co

m fo

rt -

ab le

”.

P ri

va cy

m at

te rs

Se rv

ic e

p ro

vi d

er

in va

d es

o r

d is

re ga

rd s

a p

er so

n’ s

p ri

va cy

.

3 0.

34 0.

50 2

1 “T

h e

w el

fa re

w o

rk er

le ft

th e

d o

o r

o p

en d

u ri

n g

o u

r p

ri va

te

co n

ve rs

at io

n .”

Ir re

sp o

n si

b le

b eh

av io

r Se

rv ic

e st

af fb

eh av

es

ir re

sp o

n si

b ly

.

3 0.

34 0.

50 2

1 “T

h e

sc h

o o

lt ea

ch er

le tm

y

ve ry

yo u

n g

ch il

d re

n w

al k

to

th ei

r h

o m

es o

n th

ei r

ow n

w h

en I

w as

a lit

tl e

la te

to p

ic k

th em

u p.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 390

Chapter

16

Research Methods for Business

382 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

T ab

le 16

.1 .(

co n

ti n

u ed

) In

st ig

at io

n s

of an

ge r

in se

rv ic

e co

n su

m p

ti on

se tt

in gs

O u

tc om

e fa

il u

re s

Q u

al it

y of

co re

se rv

ic e

it se

lf .

19 1

21 .5

6 31

.8 4

76 11

5

Se rv

ic e

m is

ta ke

s Sm

al lo

r b

ig m

is ta

ke s,

w h

ic h

m ay

ca u

se d

am -

ag e

to th

e cu

st o

m er

o r

b el

o n

gi n

gs o

ft h

e cu

s-

to m

er .

11 5

12 .9

8 18

.5 0

47 68

“T h

e w

ai tr

es s

b ro

u gh

tt h

e

w ro

n g

m ea

l.”

“T h

e p

h ys

ic ia

n p

re sc

ri b

ed th

e

w ro

n g

m ed

ic in

e. ”

“A s

a co

n se

q u

en ce

o ft

h e

o p

er at

io n

I w

il ln

o tb

e ab

le

to ev

er w

al k

ag ai

n .”

“M y

su it

ca se

w as

h ea

vi ly

d am

ag ed

.”

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 391

Chapter

16

Qualitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 383

T ab

le 16

.1 .(

co n

ti n

u ed

) In

st ig

at io

n s

of an

ge r

in se

rv ic

e co

n su

m p

ti on

se tt

in gs

D ef

ec ti

ve ta

n gi

b le

s In

o p

er at

iv e,

b ro

ke n

,

b ad

ly p

re p

ar ed

,o r

u n

sa ti

sf ac

to ry

ta n

-

gi b

le s.

35 3.

95 5.

83 6

29 “M

y ca

sh ca

rd w

as n

o tw

o rk

-

in g.

“A ft

er th

re e

w ee

ks th

e co

ff ee

m ac

h in

e [b

o u

gh ti

n sh

o p

]

b ro

ke d

ow n

.”

“T h

e fo

o d

w as

co ld

.”

“W e

b o

o ke

d a

ve ry

ex p

en si

ve

h o

li d

ay .H

ow ev

er ,t

h e

h o

te l

w as

an o

ld ,d

ir ty

,r u

n -d

ow n

sl u

m ,w

it h

h o

le s

in th

e ca

rp et

-

in g.

T h

e sw

im m

in g

p o

o lw

as

u n

p ai

n te

d an

d 95

ce n

ti m

et er

s

d ee

p. T

h e

d in

in g

ro o

m lo

o ke

d

li ke

a st

ab le

.”

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 392

Chapter

16

Research Methods for Business

384 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

T ab

le 16

.1 .(

co n

ti n

u ed

) In

st ig

at io

n s

of an

ge r

in se

rv ic

e co

n su

m p

ti on

se tt

in gs

B ill

in g

er ro

rs C

u st

o m

er s

ar e

m is

-

ch ar

ge d

fo r

se rv

ic es

.

25 2.

82 4.

17 10

15

H ig

h p

ri ce

s Se

rv ic

e p

ro vi

d er

’s

p ri

ce s

ar e

co n

si d

er ed

to b

e to

o h

ig h

re la

ti ve

to an

in te

rn al

re fe

r-

en ce

p ri

ce o

r re

la ti

ve to

p ri

ce s

o fc

o m

p et

it o

rs .

16 1.

81 2.

67 13

3 “I

o rd

er ed

tw o

d ri

n ks

at th

e

b ar

.I h

ad to

p ay

€1 2.

T h

at is

re al

ly an

ab su

rd p

ri ce

!”

“T h

e p

ri ce

o ft

h e

D V

D -p

la ye

r

w as

€1 25

0. A

ta n

o th

er st

o re

it

w as

o n

ly €9

00 .”

In ad

eq u

at e

re sp

on se

s to

se rv

ic e

fa il

u re

s

13 7

15 .4

6 22

.8 3

10 12

7

In te

ra ct

io n

al u

n fa

ir n

es s

Se rv

ic e

em p

lo ye

es ’

in te

rp er

so n

al b

eh a-

vi o

r d

u ri

n g

th e

se rv

ic e

re co

ve ry

.

80 9.

03 13

.3 3

4 76

“H e

[w ai

te r]

d id

n o

te ve

n ap

o -

lo gi

ze .”

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 393

Chapter

16

Qualitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 385

T ab

le 16

.1 .(

co n

ti n

u ed

) In

st ig

at io

n s

of an

ge r

in se

rv ic

e co

n su

m p

ti on

se tt

in gs

O u

tc o

m e

u n

fa ir

n es

s T

h e

o u

tc o

m e

o ft

h e

se rv

ic e

re co

ve ry

.

37 4.

17 6.

17 5

32 “I

d id

n o

tr ec

ei ve

th e

n ew

s-

p ap

er .I

ca lle

d th

em o

n th

e

p h

o n

e an

d th

ey p

ro m

is ed

th at

I w

o u

ld re

ce iv

e th

e n

ew sp

a-

p er

th at

sa m

e d

ay .N

o th

in g

h ap

p en

ed .”

“H e

[h ai

rd re

ss er

]r ef

u se

d to

gi ve

m e

b ac

k m

y m

o n

ey .”

P ro

ce d

u ra

lu n

fa ir

n es

s T

h e

p er

ce iv

ed fa

ir n

es s

o ft

h e

se rv

ic e

re co

ve ry

p ro

ce ss

.

20 2.

26 3.

33 1

19 “R

ec en

tl y

I b

o u

gh ta

h o

u se

.

A ft

er m

ov in

g in

I n

o ti

ce d

th at

th e

b at

h ro

o m

ta p

w as

d ef

ec t-

iv e.

T h

e co

n tr

ac to

r ad

m it

te d

th at

it w

as th

e fi

rm ’s

re sp

o n

s-

ib ili

ty .H

ow ev

er ,i

tt o

o k

fo re

ve r

b ef

o re

th ey

to o

k ac

ti o

n .O

n ly

af te

r th

e ch

ie fe

xe cu

ti ve

o ft

h e

co m

p an

y in

te rv

en ed

d id

th ey

co ve

r th

e ex

p en

se s.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 394

Chapter

16

Research Methods for Business

386 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

16.2 DATA DISPLAY

According to Miles and Huberman (1994), data display is the second major activ- ity that you should go through when analyzing your qualitative data. Data display involves taking your reduced data and displaying them in an organized, condensed manner. Along these lines, charts, matrices, diagrams, graphs, frequently mentioned phrases, and/or drawings may help you to organize the data and to discover pat- terns and relationships in the data so that the drawing of conclusions is eventually facilitated.

In our example, a matrix was considered to be the appropriate display to bring together the qualitative data. The selected data display technique may depend on researcher preference, the type of data set, and the purpose of the display. A matrix is, by and large, descriptive in nature, as the aforementioned example illustrates. Other displays, such as networks or diagrams, allow you to present causal relationships between concepts in your data.

BOX 16.5: DATA ANALYSIS

In our study into events that typically elicit customer anger in service con- sumption settings, we developed a matrix to organize and arrange the qualit- ative data. This allowed us to extract higher order themes from the data: we were able to combine the 28 subcategories into seven categories and four “super-categories.” The seven categories were “unreliability,” “inaccessibil- ity,” and “company policies” (procedural failures); “insensitive behaviour” and “impolite behavior” (interactional failures); “outcome failures”; and “inad- equate responses to service failures.” These categories and subcategories are defined in the second column of Table 16.1. The eighth column provides typical examples of critical behavior per subcategory.

Table 16.1 illustrates how data display organizes qualitative information in a way that helps you to draw conclusions. Categories and corresponding sub- categories of events that typically instigate anger are presented in column 1 and defined in column 2. Column 3 provides information on how many times specific themes were mentioned by the participants. Column 4 provides information about how many times a specific theme was mentioned as a per- centage of the total number of themes (885). Column 5 contains the percentage of participants that mentioned a specific category or subcategory. Columns 6 and 7 provide an overview of the distribution of incidents over one- or multi- factor incidents. Column 8 provides (verbatim) examples of critical behaviors, attitudes, and manners of service providers.

16.3 DRAWING CONCLUSIONS

Conclusion drawing is the “final” analytical activity in the process of qualitative data analysis. It is the essence of data analysis; it is at this point where you answer your research questions by determining what identified themes stand for, by thinking about explanations for observed patterns and relationships, or by making contrasts and comparisons.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 395

Chapter

16

Qualitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 387

BOX 16.6: DISCUSSION

The identification of precipitating events of anger is critical to understanding this emotion. What’s more, for service firm management, it is important to understand what critical behaviors from their side typically elicit anger in cus- tomers. For this reason, this exploratory study investigated precipitating events of customer anger in services.

The results of this study provide an adequate, unambiguous representation of precipitating events of customer anger and expand existing (appraisal) theor- ies of antecedents of customer anger. Specifically, seven event categories were found to instigate anger, including unreliability, inaccessibility, and company policies (the procedural failures), insensitive behavior and impolite behavior (the interactional failures), outcome failures, and inadequate responses to ser- vice failures. Each of these events was found to be a sufficient cause of customer anger. However, the compound incidents that were reported by the participants in this study suggest that critical behaviors of service providers may also interact in their effects on customer anger.

The foregoing findings imply certain extensions to service marketing research. Researchers have previously examined the effects of core service failures and waiting for service on anger. However, this study shows that the antecedents of anger are not limited to these two factors. For service firm management, the seven categories suggest areas in which managers might take action to prevent customer anger. For example, the finding that inaccessibility of services causes customers to get angry suggests that service providers may benefit from being easily accessible for consumers. The finding that customer anger may be caused by insensitivity and impoliteness of service staff implies that hiring the right people, adequate training of service employees, and finding ways to motivate service staff to adequately perform services also reduces customer anger.

The present results partly converge with prior studies that have categorized dissatisfying experiences with service firm employees (Bitner, Booms & Tetr- eault, 1990) and retail failures (Kelley, Hoffman & Davis, 1993). Besides these similarities, there are important differences with the aforementioned studies as well. For instance, incidents reported by the participants of this study include difficulties with engaging in the service process and unfair rules and proced- ures (company policies). These behaviors, which account for more than 20% of the reported anger-provoking incidents, did not come forward as unfavorable behaviors of service providers in earlier research. This shows how the classific- ation scheme developed here builds on and extends earlier models of service and retail failures.

16.4 RELIABILITY AND VALIDITY IN QUALITATIVE RESEARCH

It is important that the conclusions that you have drawn are verified in one way or another. That is, you must make sure that the conclusions that you derive from your qualitative data are plausible, reliable, and valid.

Reliability and validity have a slightly different meaning in qualitative research in comparison to quantitative research. Reliability in qualitative data analysis includes category and interjudge reliability. Category reliability “depends on the analyst’s ability to formulate categories and present to competent judges definitions of the categories so they will agree on which items of a certain population belong in a category and which do not” (Kassarjian, 1977, p. 14). Thus, category reliability relates to the extent to which judges are able to use category definitions to classify

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 396

Chapter

16

Research Methods for Business

388 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

the qualitative data. Well-defined categories will lead to higher category reliability and eventually to higher interjudge reliability (Kassarjian, 1977), as discussed next. However, categories that are defined in a very broad manner will also lead to higher category reliability. This can lead to the oversimplification of categories, which reduces the relevance of the research findings. For instance, McKellar (1949) in an attempt to classify instigations of anger distinguished between need situations and personality instigations. Need situations were defined as “any interference with the pursuit of a personal goal,” such as missing a bus. Personality situations included the imposition of physical or mental pain or the violation of personal values, status, and possession. This classification, which focuses on whether an anger-provoking event can be classified as a personality situation or a need situation, will undoubtedly lead to high category and interjudge reliability, but it seems to be too broad to be relevant to service firm management trying to avoid customer anger. Therefore, Kassarjian (1977) suggests that the researcher must find a balance between category reliability and the relevance of categories. Interjudge reliability can be defined as a degree of consistency between coders processing the same data (Kassarjian, 1977). A commonly used measure of interjudge reliability is the percentage of coding agreements out of the total number of coding decisions. As a general guideline, agreement rates at or above 80% are considered to be satisfactory.

Earlier in this book, validity was defined as the extent to which an instrument meas- ures what it purports to measure. In this context, however, validity has a different meaning. It refers to the extent to which the research results (1) accurately repres- ent the collected data (internal validity) and (2) can be generalized or transferred to other contexts or settings (external validity). Two methods that have been developed to achieve validity in qualitative research are:

• Supporting generalizations by counts of events. This can address common concerns about the reporting of qualitative data: that anecdotes supporting the researcher’s theory have been selected, or that too much attention has been paid to a small number of events, at the expense of more common ones.

• Ensuring representativeness of cases and the inclusion of deviant cases (cases that may contradict your theory). The selection of deviant cases provides a strong test of your theory.

Triangulation, discussed in Chapter 6, is a technique that is also often associated with reliability and validity in qualitative research. Finally, you can also enhance the validity of your research by providing an in-depth description of the research project. Anyone who wishes to transfer the results to another context is then responsible for judging how valid such a transfer is.

BOX 16.7: RELIABILITY AND VALIDITY

A rigorous classification system should be “intersubjectively unambiguous” (Hunt, 1983), as measured by interjudge reliability. The interjudge reliability averaged 0.84, and no individual coefficients were lower than 0.80. The content validity of a critical incident classification scheme is regarded as satisfactory if themes in the confirmation sample are fully represented by the categories and subcategories developed in the classification sample. In order to determine whether the sample size was appropriate, two confirmation samples (hold- out samples from the original 859 samples) of 100 new incidents (299 critical behaviors) were sorted into the classification scheme with an eye to developing new categories. No new categories emerged, indicating that the set of analyzed critical incidents forms an adequate representation of the precipitating events of anger in services.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 397

Chapter

16

Qualitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 389

16.5 SOME OTHER METHODS OF GATHERING AND ANALYZING QUALITATIVE DATA

16.5.1 Content analysis

Content analysis is an observational research method that is used to systematically evaluate the symbolic contents of all forms of recorded communications (Kolbe & Burnett, 1991). Content analysis can be used to analyze newspapers, websites, advertisements, recordings of interviews, and the like. The method of content ana- lysis enables the researcher to analyze (large amounts of) textual information and systematically identify its properties, such as the presence of certain words, con- cepts, characters, themes, or sentences. To conduct a content analysis on a text, the text is coded into categories and then analyzed using conceptual analysis or relational analysis.

Conceptual analysis establishes the existence and frequency of concepts (such as words, themes, or characters) in a text. Conceptual analysis analyzes and interprets text by coding the text into manageable content categories. Relational analysis builds on conceptual analysis by examining the relationships among concepts in a text.

The results of conceptual or relational analysis are used to make inferences about the messages within the text, the effects of environmental variables on message content, the effects of messages on the receiver, and so on. Along these lines, content analysis has been used to analyze press coverage of election campaigns, to assess the effects of the content of advertisements on consumer behavior, and to provide a systematic overview of tools that online media use to encourage interactive communication processes.

16.5.2 Narrative analysis

A narrative is a story or “an account involving the narration of a series of events in a plotted sequence which unfolds in time” (Denzin, 2000). Narrative analysis is an approach that aims to elicit and scrutinize the stories we tell about ourselves and their implications for our lives. Narrative data are often collected via interviews. These interviews are designed to encourage the participant to describe a certain incident in the context of his or her life history. In this way, narrative analysis differs from other qualitative research methods; it is focused on a process or temporal order, for instance by eliciting information about the antecedents and consequences of a certain incident in order to relate this incident to other incidents. Narrative analysis has thus been used to study impulsive buying (Rook, 1987), customers’ responses to advertisements (Mick & Buhl, 1992), and relationships between service providers and consumers (Stern, Thomson & Arnould, 1998).

16.5.3 Analytic induction

Another (more general) strategy of qualitative data analysis is analytic induction. Analytic induction is an approach to qualitative data analysis in which universal explanations of phenomena are sought by the collection of (qualitative) data until no cases that are inconsistent with a hypothetical explanation of a phenomenon are found. Analytic induction starts with a (rough) definition of a problem (“why do people use marijuana” is a famous example), continues with a hypothetical explan- ation of the problem (e.g., “people use marijuana for pleasure”), and then proceeds with the examination of cases (e.g., the collection of data via in-depth interviews). If a case is inconsistent with the researcher’s hypothesis (e.g., “I use marijuana for health reasons”), the researcher either redefines the hypothesis or excludes the “deviant” case that does not confirm the hypothesis. Analytic induction involves

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 398

Chapter

16

Research Methods for Business

390 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

inductive − rather than deductive − reasoning, allowing for the modification of a hypothetical explanation for phenomena throughout the process of doing research.

SUMMARY

The analysis of qualitative data is aimed at making valid inferences from data in the form of words. There are relatively few well-established and commonly accepted rules and guidelines for analyzing qualitative data. Over the years, however, some general approaches for the analysis of qualitative data have been developed. In this chapter we have briefly discussed the approach of Miles and Huberman (1999). We have explained that, during the first step in qualitative data analysis, data are reduced, rearranged, and integrated to form theory through coding and categor- ization. The second major activity, data display, helps you to present the data and eventually to draw conclusions from the data (step three). These conclusions should be verified; that is, you must assess the reliability and validity of your findings.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

What is qualitative data? How do qualitative data differ from quantitative data?

Describe the main steps in qualitative data analysis.

Define reliability and validity in the context of qualitative research.

How can you assess the reliability and validity of qualitative research?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 399

Chapter

16

Qualitative data analysis

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 391

What is grounded theory?

How does narrative analysis differ from content analysis?

Why is analytic induction inductive (rather than deductive) in nature?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 400

Chapter

17 392 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Chapter 17

The research report

Topics discussed:

� The written report

� Integral parts of the report

� Oral presentation

� Appendix: Examples

Chapter objectives

After completing Chapter 17 you should be able to:

1. Know what the contents of a research report are.

2. Be able to tailor the report format to meet the needs of different types of research (basic and applied), different research goals that need reports of varying lengths, and different audiences.

3. Be able to write a good:

F Executive summary or abstract

F Introductory section

F Methods section

F Data analysis section

F Interpretation of the results (using tables and pictorial representations wherever appro- priate.)

4. Give your recommendations and suggestions for implementation, as necessary.

5. Write the summary and acknowledgment.

6. Provide the appropriate references.

7. Include appropriate materials in the appendix

8. Critique research reports and published studies.

9. Know the components of, and be able to make, a good oral presentation.

The key purpose of any research report is to offer a clear description of what has been done in the various stages of the research process. Hence, a research report may possibly include information on the formulation of the problem statement, the development of a theoretical framework, the collection of data, the analysis of the data, and the interpretation of the results.

When researchers describe what has been done in the research, they should keep in mind that they started the research with a definite aim or purpose. It is imperative to inform the reader about the specific aim or purpose of the research project as soon as possible; that is, in the introductory section of the research report. The

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 401

Chapter

17

The research report

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 393

researcher should also keep the criterion of replicability in mind; a research report is well written when a colleague researcher is able to replicate the research after reading the report. It is also important that the results of the study and the recom- mendations for solving the problem are objectively and effectively communicated to the sponsor, so that the suggestions made are accepted and implemented. Other- wise, all the effort hitherto expended on the investigation would have been in vain. Writing the report concisely, convincingly, and with clarity is perhaps as important as conducting a rigorous research study. Indeed, a well-thought-out written report and oral presentation are critical.

The exact contents and organization of both modes of communication− the written report and the oral presentation − depend on the purpose of the research study, and the audience to which it is targeted. The relevant aspects of the written report and oral presentation are discussed in this chapter.

17.1 THE WRITTEN REPORT

The written report starts with a description of the management problem and the research objective. This allows the reader to quickly become familiar with “the why” of the research project. The written report should also allow the reader to weigh the facts and arguments presented therein, to examine the results of the study, to reflect on the conclusions and recommendations, and eventually to implement the acceptable recommendations presented in the report, with a view to closing the gap between the existing state of affairs and the desired state. To achieve its goal, the written report has to focus on the issues discussed below.

17.1.1 The purpose of the written report

Research reports can have different purposes and hence the form of the written report will vary according to the situation. It is important to identify the purpose of the report, so that it can be tailored accordingly. If the purpose is simply to offer details on some specific areas of interest requested by a manager, the report can be very narrowly focused and provide the desired information to the manager in a brief format, as in the example below. A different form of report will be prescribed in some cases, where a manager asks for several alternative solutions or recommend- ations to rectify a problem in a given situation. Here the researcher provides the requested information and the manager chooses from among the alternatives and makes the final decision. In this case, a more detailed report surveying past stud- ies, the methodology used for the present study, different perspectives generated from interviews and current data analyses, and alternative solutions based on the conclusions drawn therefrom will have to be provided. How each alternative helps to improve the problem situation will also have to be discussed. The advantage and disadvantages of each of the proposed solutions, together with a cost−benefit analysis in terms of dollars and/or other resources, will also have to be presented to help the manager make the decision. A situation like that in the third example would warrant this kind of a report. Such a report can also be found in Report 2 of the appendix to this chapter.

Yet another type of report might require the researcher to identify the problem and provide the final solution as well. That is, the researcher might be called in to study a situation, determine the nature of the problem, and offer a report of the findings and recommendations. Such a report has to be very comprehensive, following the format of a full-fledged study, as detailed later in this chapter. A fourth kind of research report is the very scholarly publication presenting the findings of a basic study that one usually finds published in academic journals.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 402

Chapter

17

Research Methods for Business

394 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

A simple descriptive report

If a study is undertaken to understand, in detail, certain factors of interest in a given situation (variations in production levels, composition of employees, and the like), then a report describing the phenomena of interest, in the manner desired, is all that is called for.

For instance, let us say a human resources manager wants to know how many employees have been recruited during the past 18 months in the organization, their gender composition, educational level, and the average proportion of days that these individuals have absented themselves since recruitment. A simple report giving the desired information would suffice.

In this report, a statement of the purpose of the study will be first given (e.g., “It was desired that a profile of the employees recruited during the past 18 months in the company, and an idea of their rate of absenteeism be provided. This report offers those details”). The methods or procedures adopted to collect the data will then be given (e.g., “The payroll of the company and the personal files of the employees were examined”). Finally, a narration of the actual results, reinforced by visual tabular and graphical forms of representation of the data, will be provided. Frequency distributions, cross-tabulations, and other data will be presented in a tabular form, and illustrations will include bar charts (for gender), pie charts (to indicate the proportions of individuals at various educational levels), and so on. This section will summarize the data and may look as follows:

A total of 27 employees were recruited during the past 18 months, of whom 45% are women and 55% are men. Twenty percent have a master’s degree, 68% a bachelor’s degree, and 12% a high school diploma. The average proportion of days that these employees remained absent during the past 18 months is six.

These details provide the information required by the manager. It may, how- ever, be a good idea to provide a further gender-wise breakdown of the mean proportion of days of absence of the employees in an appendix, even though this information might not have been specifically requested. If considered rel- evant, a similar breakdown can also be furnished for people at different job levels.

A short simple report of the type discussed above is provided in Report 1 in the appendix to this chapter.

A situation where a comprehensive report, offering alternative solutions, is needed

The president of a tire company wants several recommendations to be made on planning for the future growth of the company, taking into consideration the manufacturing, marketing, accounting, and financial perspectives. In this case, only a broad objective is stated: corporate growth. There may currently be several impediments that retard growth. One has to carefully examine the situ- ation to determine the obstacles to expansion and how these may be overcome through strategic planning from production, marketing, management, finan- cial, and accounting perspectives. Identification of the problems or impedi- ments in the situation would call for intensive interviews, literature review, industry analysis, formulation of a theoretical perspective, generation of sev- eral hypotheses to come up with different alternative solutions, data gathering,

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 403

Chapter

17

The research report

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 395

data analysis, and then exploration of alternative ways of attaining corporate growth through different strategies. To enable the president to evaluate the alternatives proposed, the pros and cons of implementing each of the alternat- ive solutions, and a statement of the costs and benefits attached to each, would follow.

This report will be more elaborate than the previous one, detailing each of the steps in the study, emphasizing the results of data analysis, and furnishing a strong basis for the various recommendations. The alternatives generated and the pros and cons of each in a report such as this are likely to follow the format of Report 2 in the appendix. Report 3 in the appendix relates to basic research on an issue that was examined by a researcher.

As we can see, the contents and format of a report will depend on the purpose of the study and the needs of the sponsors to whom it is submitted.

17.1.2 The audience for the written report

The organization of a report, its length, focus on details, data presentation, and illustrations will, in part, be a function of the audience for whom it is intended. The letter of transmittal of the report will clearly indicate to whom the report is being sent. An executive summary placed at the beginning will offer (busy) executives just the right amount of vital details − usually in less than one page. This will help the managers to quickly grasp the essentials of the study and its findings, and turn to the pages that offer more detailed information on aspects that are of special interest to them.

Some managers are distracted by data presented in the form of tables and feel more comfortable with graphs and charts, while others want to see “facts and figures.” Both tables and figures are visual forms of representation and need to be presented in reports. Which of these are to be prominently highlighted in the report and which relegated to an appendix is a function of the awareness of the idiosyncracies of the ultimate user of the report. If a report is to be handled by different executives, with different orientations, it should be packaged such that they know where to find the information that meets their preferred mode of information processing. The length, organization, and presentation modes of the report will, among other things, depend at least in part on the target audience. Some businesses might also prescribe their own format for report writing. In all cases, a good report is a function of the audience for whom it is intended and its exact purpose. As we have seen, some reports may have to be long and detailed, and others brief and specific.

Sometimes, the findings of a study may be unpalatable to the executive (e.g., the organizational policies are outdated and the system is very bureaucratic), or may reflect poorly on management, tending to make them react defensively (e.g., the sys- tem has an ineffective top-down approach). In such cases, tact should be exercised in presenting the conclusions without compromising on the actual findings. That is, while there is no need to suppress the unpleasant findings, they can be presented in a nonjudgmental, non-fault-finding or finger-pointing manner, using objective data and facts that forcefully lead to, and convince the managers of the correctness of, the conclusions drawn. If this is not done, the report will be read defensively, the recommendations will not be accepted, and the problem will remain unsolved.

17.1.3 Characteristics of a well-written report

Despite the fact that report writing is a function of the purpose of the study and the type of audience to which it is presented, and accordingly has to be tailored to meet

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 404

Chapter

17

Research Methods for Business

396 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

both, certain basic features are integral to all written reports. Clarity, conciseness, coherence, the right emphasis on important aspects, meaningful organization of paragraphs, smooth transition from one topic to the next, apt choice of words, and specificity are all important features of a good report. The report should, to the extent possible, be free of technical or statistical jargon unless it happens to be of a technical or statistical nature. Care should also be taken to eliminate grammatical and spelling errors.

Any assumptions made by the researcher should be clearly stated in the report, and facts, rather than opinions, provided. The report should be organized in a manner that enhances the meaningful and smooth flow of materials, as the reader progresses through it. Indeed, every reader loves to read a well-built “story.” The balance between the academic standpoint and the writing of a good story is not always easy to find though; some trial and error is often needed.

The importance of the appearance of the report and its readability cannot be over- emphasized. Appropriate headings and subheadings help organize the report in a logical manner and allow the reader to follow the transitions easily. A double- spaced, typed report with wide margins on all sides enables the reader to make notes/comments while perusing the contents.

17.1.4 Contents of the research report

A research report has a title page, an executive summary (in the case of applied research) or an abstract (in the case of basic research), a preface, a table of contents, and sometimes a copy of the authorization to conduct the study.

All reports should have an introductory section detailing the purpose of the study, giving some background of what it relates to, and stating the problem studied, setting the stage for what the reader should expect in the rest of the report. The body of the report should contain details regarding the framework of the study, hypotheses, if any, sampling design, data collection methods, analysis of data, and the results obtained. The final part of the report should present the findings and draw conclusions. If recommendations have been called for, they will be included, with a cost−benefit analysis provided with respect to each. Such information clarifies the net advantages of implementing each of the recommendations. The details provided in the report should be such as to convince the reader of the thoroughness of the study, and induce confidence in accepting the results and the recommendations made. Every professional report should also point out the limitations of the study (e.g., in sampling, data collection, and the like). A list of references cited in the report should then follow.

Appendices, if any, should be attached to the report. A report on the factors influen- cing the upward mobility of women in accounting firms can be found in Report 3 of the appendix to this chapter. We will now discuss the different parts of the report.

17.2 INTEGRAL PARTS OF THE REPORT

17.2.1 The title and the title page

The title of your research report (together with the abstract or management sum- mary) permits potential readers to obtain a first idea of your study and to decide whether they want to read your report in its entirety. For this reason you may decide to come up with a descriptive title that accurately reflects the contents of your research or that indicates the methodology used in the research. Examples of descriptive titles are: “The Impact of Venture Capital Investments on Public

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 405

Chapter

17

The research report

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 397

Firm Stock Performance”;“Compulsive Buying: An Exploration into Self-Esteem and Money Attitudes”; and “How Advertising Really Works: A Meta-Analysis.” Hence, a descriptive title may inform potential readers about the contents of the research, the method that was used, the results of the research report, and the like.

A good title also grabs attention and entices people to read the research report in its entirety. References to well-known (literary) quotes, proverbs, or popular movie and song titles are only some of the possibilities you have to stand out. “Scents and sensibility: When do (in) congruent ambient scents influence product evaluations?” is an excellent example of a title that is both informative and persuasive. Indeed, do not be afraid to use a subtitle. If you have a catchy title, but feel it does not provide enough information, use it to clarify the contents of your research.

In addition to the title of the project, the title page will also indicate further relevant information. Note that it is important that you are familiar with your institution’s rules and recommendations about what should be included here. You may need to enter your name, your student number, the name of your institution, department, sponsors, supervisor(s), the date of your final report, and so on.

17.2.2 The executive summary or abstract

An executive summary or abstract of your research report is placed on the page immediately following the title page. The executive summary is a brief account of the entire research study. It provides an overview, and highlights the following important information related to it: the problem statement, sampling design, data collection methods used, results of data analysis, conclusions, and recommendations, with suggestions for their implementation.

The executive summary is probably the first part of your research report that is read by the sponsors of your study. They will use it to get an initial idea about (the results) of your study. The executive summary will be brief− and is usually restricted to one page or less in length.

An example of a management summary of a study of customer satisfaction with the website of a Dutch investment bank follows.

Management Summary

The aim of this study was to determine the variables that drive website user satisfaction in the Dutch investment banking industry. The results of this study aim to help Peeters & Co.’s Structured Products (SP) desk to improve the quality of its website. The following problem statement was formulated:

“What elements are of importance in driving website user satisfaction in the Dutch investment banking industry and how can the results of this study be used to ensure users spend more time on the website of the SP desk and use it as their main information source?”

Based on a literature review and exploratory interviews, a conceptual model of website user satisfaction was constructed. The conceptual model includes web- site user satisfaction and its expected (hypothesized) antecedents: information quality, system quality, interactivity, and system design quality. To examine the effect of the independent variables on website user satisfaction, an online sur- vey was used. The results of this survey showed that the current level of user satisfaction with the website of the SP desk is below Peeters & Co.’s standards. Furthermore, the results showed that the variables information quality, system

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 406

Chapter

17

Research Methods for Business

398 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

quality, interactivity, and system design quality all have a linear and positive influence on website user satisfaction.

Based on the results of this study, it is recommended that the SP desk improves the information quality and interactivity of its website. Information quality can be improved by including more relevant content on the website and by making the information on the website more transparent, objective, and up to date. Interactivity can be improved by improving customer support and by including customization options and financial tools on the website.

17.2.3 Table of contents

The logic of the structure of your research report becomes evident not only through an apt choice of words in the titles of the sections, but also as a result of the arrangement of the different components of the work. For the reader, the table of contents serves as a guide through your research report. The table of contents usually lists the important headings and subheadings in the report with page references. A separate list of tables and figures should also be listed in the table of contents. Your institution may have guidelines or recommendations about the form the contents pages should take. An example of the guidelines of the TiasNimbas Business School is provided next.

TiasNimbas Business School guidelines for the table of contents

The table of contents contains the headings and subheadings of the chapters and sections of your research project, with the numbers of the pages on which these chapters and sections begin. The outer cover page and management summary are not entered in the table of contents and therefore the first item to be listed is the preface.

The minimum content of the table of contents should be the preface, each chapter or main division title, each appendix and the bibliography. All head- ings should correspond exactly in wording, arrangement, punctuation, and capitalisation with the headings as they appear in the body of the dissertation.

A main heading or chapter title is given entirely in capitals and begins at the left-hand margin of the page. Main subheadings should be indented and typed in upper and lower case. Subordinate subheadings should also be inden- ted. Chapters, sections of chapters, and subsections, etc., are numbered using Arabic numerals in a decimal sequence. Thus the third subsection of the second section of chapter three is numbered 3.2.3.

The number of the page on which the division begins in the text of the man- agement project is given in the table of contents in Arabic numerals flush with the right-hand margin of the page. Double-spacing is used except for overrun lines, which are single-spaced.

17.2.4 List of tables, figures, and other materials

If the research report contains charts, figures, maps, tables, photographs, or other types of material, each series of these should be listed separately in an appropriate list on the page or pages immediately following the table of contents. Each such list should appear on a separate page. In format, such lists should follow the general style of the table of contents.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 407

Chapter

17

The research report

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 399

The number of the item is given at the left-hand margin of the page under the appropriate column headings entitled, “Charts,” “Figures,” “Maps,” “Tables,” or “Photographs.” This is followed by the title of the item, given exactly as it appears in the text of the research report. The number of the page on which the item appears in the body of the research report is given flush with the right-hand margin of the page. Tables, figures, etc., should be numbered according to their chapter and position in the chapter. Thus Figure 2.10 is the tenth figure in chapter two.

17.2.5 Preface

The preface is used primarily to mention matters of background necessary for an understanding of the subject that do not logically fit into the text. Items such as the following may also be mentioned here unless they are more extensively considered in the body of the research report: why the report has been written (e.g., Manage- ment Project Report for . . . ), reason for the selection of the subject, difficulties encountered along the way, etc. It is customary to include a brief expression of the author’s appreciation of help and guidance received in the research. Note that the preface is not the same as an introduction, which is a part of the main body of the research report.

17.2.6 The authorization letter

A copy of the letter of authorization from the sponsor of the study approving the investigation and detailing its scope is sometimes attached at the beginning of the research report. The authorization letter makes clear to the reader that the goals of the study have the full blessing of the organization.

17.2.7 The introductory section

The layout of the first chapter is more or less standard. This chapter could contain, in the following order:

1. Introduction (§1.1).

2. Reason for the research (problem indication) and the purpose of the research (§1.2).

3. Problem statement and research questions (§1.3).

4. The scope of the study (§1.4).

5. Research method (approach) (§1.5).

6. Managerial relevance (§1.6).

7. Structure and division of chapters in the research report (§1.7).

The introductory section starts with a short introduction providing background information on why and how the study was initiated. The introduction is followed by a section describing the reason for and the purpose of the research project, and a section providing the statement of the problem under investigation. Brief (!) descriptions of the scope of the study, the research method, and the managerial relevance of the study are also provided in the introductory section. The last section offers an overview of the structure and division of chapters in the research report.

17.2.8 The body of the report

The central part of a research report usually has two large sections: a theoretical part and an empirical part. The theoretical part contains an in-depth exploration

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 408

Chapter

17

Research Methods for Business

400 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

and a clear explication of the relevant literature. It documents the relevant findings from earlier research and should be selective, goal oriented, thorough, and critical − a literature review is more than just a summary of the literature! The literature review can be concluded with a number of hypotheses, which will be tested in the empirical part of your study. Avoid elaborations that will ultimately not contribute to hypotheses or to a better understanding of the research question.

The design details − such as sampling and data collection methods, as well as the nature and type of study, the time horizon, the field setting, and the unit of analysis − and the results of the study are described in the empirical part of the research report. The information provided here should enable the reader to replicate the research. In the case of experiments, the empirical part should therefore at the very least contain the components “participants,” “material,” and “method.” In the case of survey research you should include the components “participants,” “method,” and, if relevant, “material.”

The “participants” section clarifies who took part in the research, the number of participants, and how and why participants were selected. The section “material” describes the instruments (such as stimuli and measurement scales) that were used and their functions. The description should be detailed enough to allow another researcher to replicate your research at a later stage. Stimuli can, for example, be a series of product packages that you showed your participants during an exper- iment. This part also informs the reader about the measurement scales that were used in the research. If an existing measurement scale (to measure a construct from your conceptual model) is used, the source of the material should be mentioned. Self-developed measurement scales should be tested for validity and internal con- sistency. For existing and previously published scales, a mention of a coefficient of internal consistence usually suffices (e.g., Cronbach’s alpha). The “method” section provides a step-by-step description of the execution of the research. Again, it is important that the full course of the research that was followed by the participants is given in enough detail to allow another person to carry out an exact replication of the research.

In the “results” part of the research report the data are presented that were uncovered through your empirical research and subsequent data analysis. In this part you do not come forward with an explanation for the results yet, or the implications that follow from the results; this information should be offered in the final part of the report. At this place you provide a well-organized and understandable overview of the results of your study, using the appropriate procedures for statistical analysis. The specific form in which you present your results depends on the type of research. It is customary in descriptive statistics always to process information in tables or graphs (e.g., means, standard deviations, number of subjects per cell, and so on) and to include statistical tests in the text. A few of the various ways in which data can be pictorially presented in written reports and oral presentations are illustrated in Figure 17.1.

Note that all relevant results should be reported: that is, also those that contradict your hypotheses. However, avoid an overflow of numbers and figures in your text. Only include the most relevant statistical data; incorporate the rest of the results in the appendices.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 409

Chapter

17

The research report

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 401

Figure 17.1 Pictorial representation of data

17.2.9 The final part of the report

The aim of this part of the research report is to interpret the results of the research with regard to the research questions. This is a very important aspect of the research report. Readers (managers) often skip the method section and move straight to the conclusions of the research. For this reason, the discussion should stand on its own, and should form a whole with a beginning and an ending. Include the following aspects in your discussion:

1. The main findings of your research.

2. The (managerial) implications of these findings (vis-à-vis your research ques- tions).

3. Recommendations for implementation and a cost–benefit analysis of these recommendations.

4. The limitations of your study and suggestions for future research following up on your research project.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 410

Chapter

17

Research Methods for Business

402 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

17.2.10 References

Immediately after the final part of the research report, starting on a fresh page, a list of the references cited in the literature review and in other places in the report will be given. The format of the references has been discussed and illustrated in the appendix to Chapter 4. Footnotes, if any in the text, are referenced either separately at the end of the report, or at the bottom of the page where the footnote occurs.

17.2.11 Appendix

The appendix, which comes last, is the appropriate place for the organization chart, newspaper clippings or other materials that substantiate the text of the report, detailed verbatim narration of interviews with members, and whatever else might help the reader follow the text. It should also contain a copy of the questionnaire administered to the respondents. If there are several appendices, they should be referenced as Appendix A, Appendix B, and so on, and appropriately labeled.

The above will make clear that the table of contents (mentioned earlier), following the title page and the letter of transmittal, will look somewhat as indicated below, with some possible variations.

Table of contents

• Preface

• Introduction to your research report

F Introduction

F Problem identification and purpose of the research

F Problem statement and research questions

F The scope of the study

F Research method

F Managerial relevance

F Structure of the research report

• Theoretical framework

• Research design

• Results

• Conclusions

• Recommendations

• Limitations of study and suggestions for further research

• References

• Appendices

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 411

Chapter

17

The research report

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 403

17.3 ORAL PRESENTATION

Usually organizations (and instructors in classes) require about a 20-minute oral presentation of the research project, followed by a question-and-answer session. The oral presentation calls for considerable planning. Imagine a study that spanned several months having to be presented in 20 minutes to a live audience! Those who have not read the report at all, or at best only superficially, have to be convinced that the recommendations made therein will indeed prove to be beneficial to the organization. All this will have to be effectively accomplished in the matter of a few minutes.

The challenge is to present the important aspects of the study so as to hold the interest of the audience, while still providing statistical and quantitative informa- tion, which may drive many to ennui. Different stimuli (overheads, slides, charts, pictorial and tabular depiction, etc.) have to be creatively provided to the audi- ence to consistently sustain their interest throughout the presentation. To make all this possible, time and effort have to be expended in planning, organizing, and rehearsing the presentation.

Slides, overheads, charts, graphs, handouts− all in large, bold print, and preferably in multiple colors− help the presenter to sustain the interest of the audience. They also help the presenter discuss and explain the research project coherently, without reading from prepared notes.

Factors irrelevant to the written report, such as dress, mannerisms, gestures, voice modulation, and the like, take on added importance in oral presentations. Speaking audibly, clearly, without distracting mannerisms, and at the right speed for the audience to comprehend is vital for holding their attention. Varying the length of the sentences, establishing eye contact, tone variations, voice modulation, and the rate of flow of information make all the difference to audience receptivity. Thus, the contents of the presentation and the style of delivery should both be planned in detail.

17.3.1 Deciding on the content

Because a lot of material has to be covered in, perhaps, a 20-minute presentation, it becomes necessary to decide on the points to focus on and the importance to be given to each. Remembering that the listener absorbs only a small proportion of all that he or she has heard, it is important to determine what the presenter would like the listener to walk away with, and then organize the presentation accordingly.

Obviously, the problem investigated, the results found, the conclusions drawn, the recommendations made, and the ways in which they can be implemented are of vital interest to organizational members, and need to be emphasized during the presentation. The design aspects of the study, details of the sample, data collection methods, details of data analysis, and the like, can be mentioned in passing to be picked up at the question-and-answer session by interested members.

However, depending on the type of audience, it may become necessary to put more stress on the data analytic aspects. For example, if the presentation is being made to a group of statisticians in the company, or in a research methods class, the data analyses and results will receive more time than if the project is being presented to a group of managers whose main interest lies in the solution to the problem and implementation of the recommendations. Thus, the time and attention devoted to the various components of the study will require adjustment, depending on the audience.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 412

Chapter

17

Research Methods for Business

404 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

17.3.2 Visual aids

Graphs, charts, and tables help to drive home the points one wishes to make much faster and more effectively, true to the adage that a picture is worth a thousand words. Visual aids provide a captivating sensory stimulus that sustains the attention of the audience. Modern PowerPoint technology makes it possible for color graphics to be produced on personal computers and projected onto a screen. Slides, transpar- encies, flip charts, the chalkboard, and handout materials also help the audience to easily follow the points of the speaker’s focus. The selection of specific visual modes of presentation will depend, among other things, on the size of the room, the availability of a good screen for projection, and the cost constraints of developing sophisticated visuals. Visuals that present side-by-side comparisons of the existing and would-be state of affairs via graphs or pie charts drive home the points made much more forcefully than elaborate and laborious verbal explanations.

Integrated multimedia presentations using PowerPoint, Prezi, and other visuals are quite common in this technological age. When planning a presentation using PowerPoint or Prezi, it is important to ensure before the presentation starts that the related equipment is properly hooked up and tested so that the presentation can go smoothly without interruptions.

17.3.3 The presenter

An effective presentation is also a function of how “unstressed” the presenter is. The speaker should establish eye contact with the audience, speak audibly and under- standably, and be sensitive to the nonverbal reactions of the audience. Strict adher- ence to the time frame and concentration on the points of interest to the audience are critical aspects of presentation. A display of extreme nervousness throughout the presentation, stumbling for words, fumbling with the notes or audiovisuals, speaking inaudibly and/or with distracting mannerisms, straying away from the main focus of the study, and exceeding the time limit all detract from effectiveness. One should also not minimize the importance of the impression created on the audience by dress, posture, bearing, and the confidence with which one carries oneself. Such simple things as covering the materials on the visuals until they need to be exhibited, and voice modulation, help to focus the attention of the audience on the discussion.

17.3.4 The presentation

The opening remarks set the stage for riveting the attention of the audience. Certain aspects such as the problem investigated, the findings, the conclusions drawn, the recommendations made and their implementation are, as previously mentioned, important aspects of the presentation. The speaker should drive home these points at least three times − once in the beginning, again when each of these areas is covered, and finally, while summarizing and bringing the presentation to a conclu- sion.

17.3.5 Handling questions

Concentrated and continuous research on the research topic over a considerable period of time indisputably makes the presenter more knowledgeable about the project than anyone else in the audience. Hence, it is not difficult to handle questions from the members with confidence and poise. It is important to be nondefensive when questions are posed that seemingly find fault with some aspect of the research. Openness to suggestions also helps, as the audience might, at times, come up with some excellent ideas or recommendations that the researcher might not have

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 413

Chapter

17

The research report

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 405

thought of. Such ideas must always be acknowledged graciously. If a question or a suggestion from a member in the audience happens to be flawed, it is best addressed in a nonjudgmental fashion.

The question-and-answer session, when handled well, leaves the audience with a sense of involvement and satisfaction. Questioning should be encouraged and responded to with care. This interactive question-and-answer session offers an exciting experience both to the audience and to the presenter.

As may be readily seen, a 20-minute presentation and a short question-and-answer session thereafter do call for substantial planning, anticipation of audience con- cerns, psychological preparedness, and good impression management skills.

Reporting has to be done in an honest and straightforward manner. It is unethical to fail to report findings that are unpalatable to the sponsors or that reflect poorly on management. As suggested earlier, it is possible to be tactful in presenting such find- ings without withholding or distorting information to please the sponsors. Internal researchers, in particular, will have to find ways of presenting unpopular informa- tion in a tactful manner. It is also important to state the limitations of the study − and practically every study has some limitation− so that the audience is not misled.

SUMMARY

The components of various types of written research report were discussed in this chapter. It was emphasized that the purpose of the report and the composition of the intended audience are critical factors in deciding what aspects of the study will be stressed the most. Examples of different kinds of reports were offered and additional examples can be found in the appendix to this chapter. Ways of making effective oral presentations were also discussed, stressing both the contents of the presentation and the style of delivery.

DISCUSSION QUESTIONS

Discuss the purpose and contents of the executive summary.

What are the similarities and differences between basic and applied research reports?

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 414

Chapter

17

Research Methods for Business

406 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

How have technological advancements helped in writing and presenting research reports?

Why is it necessary to specify the limitations of the study in the research report?

What aspects of a class research project would be stressed by you in the written report and in the oral presentation?

Now do Exercises 17.1 and 17.2.

Exercise 17.1

Critique Report 3 in the appendix. Discuss it in terms of good and bad research, suggesting how the study could have been improved, what aspects of it are good, and how scientific it is.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 415

Chapter

17

The research report

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 407

Exercise 17.2

Give a title to and write the introductory section of any study you might like to conduct.

17.4 APPENDIX: Examples

17.4.1 REPORT 1: SAMPLE OF A REPORT INVOLVING A DESCRIPTIVE STUDY

Sekras Company

TO:

Mr L. Raiburn, Chairman

Strategic Planning Committee

FR:

Joanne Williams

Public Relations Officer

RE:

Report requested by Mr Raiburn

Attached is the report requested by Mr Raiburn. If any further information or clari- fication is needed, please let me know.

Encl: Report

Report for the strategic planning committee

Introduction

Vice President Raiburn, Chairman of the Strategic Planning Committee, requested two pieces of information:

1. The sales figures of the top five retailers in the country.

2. Customers’ ideas of what improvements can be made to Sekras to enhance their satisfaction. For this purpose, he desired that a quick survey of the company’s customers be done to elicit their opinions.

Method used for obtaining the requisite information

Figures of sales of the top five retailers in the country were obtained from Business- Week, which periodically publishes many kinds of industry statistics.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 416

Chapter

17

Research Methods for Business

408 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

To obtain customers’ inputs on improvements that could be made by the company, a short questionnaire (specimen in Appendix A) was mailed to 300 of our credit card customers− 100 who had most frequently used the card in the last 18 months, 100 who most infrequently used it during the same period, and 100 average users. Questionnaires in three different colors were sent to the three groups. Respondents were offered a complimentary magnet for responses received within a week. The questionnaire asked for responses to three questions:

1. What are some of the things you like best about shopping at Sekras?

2. What are some of the things that you dislike and would like to see improved at Sekras? Please explain in as much detail as possible.

3. What are your specific suggestions for making improvements to enhance the quality of our service to customers like you?

Findings

Sales figures of the top five retailers

Information regarding sales of the top five retailers in 2000 and 2003 is provided in Table 17.1.

Table 17.1 Comparative sales figures of the five top retail companies during 2000 and 2003

Top retailers in 2000 Top retailers in 2003

Company Sales in

billions of $

Share among top five Company

Sales in billions of $

Share among top five

Wal-Mart Stores

191.33 54.7% Wal-Mart Stores

256.0 53.4%

Home Depot

45.74 13.1% Home Depot

73.10 15.2%

Sears, Roebuck

40.94 11.7% Kroger 56.40 11.8%

Kmart 36.50 10.3% Costco 47.15 9.8%

Target 35.51 10.2% Tagget 46.80 9.8%

Source: BusinessWeek

As can be seen, Wal-Mart and Home Depot retained their top positions in 2003. Kroger (a supermarket chain with 2532 grocery stores in 32 states) which was not among the top five in 2000, occupied the third place in 2003, whereas Costco (an international chain of membership warehouses, primarily under the “Costco Wholesale” name) occupied the fourth place. Target (the company’s stores offer men’s and women’s clothing, home furnishings, electronic products, sports products, toys, and entertainment products) retained the fifth position in 2003. Sears, Roebuck and Kmart did not find a place among the top five retailers during 2003. It may be observed that even though Wal-Mart increased its sales by about 1.33 times during the three-year period, its share among the top five did not increase.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 417

Chapter

17

The research report

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 409

Customer suggestions for improvements

Of the 300 surveys sent out, 225 were received, a 75% response rate. Of the 100 most frequent users of our credit card to whom questionnaires were sent, 80 responded; among the most infrequent users, 60 responded; and among the average users, 85 responded.

About 75% of the respondents were women. The majority of the customers were between the ages of 35 and 55 (62%).

The responses to the three open-ended questions were analyzed. The informa- tion needed by the Committee on the suggested improvements is tabulated (see Table 17.2). Responses to the other two questions on features liked by the custom- ers, and their specific suggestions for improvement, are provided in the two tables in the appendix. The following are suggestions received from one or two respondents only:

1. Have more water fountains on each floor.

2. The pushcarts could be lighter, so they will be less difficult to push.

3. More seats for resting after long hours of shopping would help.

4. Prices of luxury items are too high.

From looking at Table 17.2, it can be seen that the most dissatisfaction stems from (1) out-of-stock small appliances, and (2) inability to locate store assistants who could guide customers in locating what they need (44% each). The need for child care services is expressed by 38% of the customers. Twenty percent also indicate that the cafeteria should cater to tastes for international spicy type of foods. The next two important items pertain to the temperature (18%) and billing mistakes (16%). Some customers (16%) also wish the store was open 24 hours.

A note of caution is in order at this juncture. We are not sure how representative our sample is. We thought that a mix of high, average, and infrequent users of our credit card would provide us with some useful insights. If a more detailed study obtaining information from a sample of all the customers who come to the store is considered necessary, we will initiate it quickly. In the meantime, we are also interviewing a few of the customers who shop here daily. If we find anything of significance from these interviews, we will inform you.

The rest of the suggestions were offered by less than 10% of the customers and, hence, can perhaps be attended to later.

Improvements indicated by these suggestions

Based on the current sample of customers who have responded to our survey, the following improvements and actions seem called for:

1. Small appliances need to be adequately stocked (44% complained about this). An effective reorder inventory system has to be developed for this department to minimize customer dissatisfaction and avoid loss of sales for lack of sufficient stock. The research team can help in this, if requested.

2. Customers seem to need help to locate store items and would appreciate help from store assistants (44% expressed this need). If providing assistance is a primary concern, it would be a good idea to have liveried store personnel with badges to indicate they are there to assist customers. During idle hours, if any (when there are no customers seeking help), these individuals can be deployed as shelf organizers.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 418

Chapter

17

Research Methods for Business

410 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Table 17.2 Suggested areas for improvement

Features

Frequent

users no.

Medium

users no.

Infrequent

users no. Total no. %

1. Small appliances such

as mixers, blenders are

often not in stock. This is

irritating.

30 48 22 100 44

2. The cafeteria serves only

bland, uninteresting food.

How about some spicy

international food?

26 14 5 45 20

3. Often, we are unable to

locate where the items we

want are!

3 6 14 23 10

4. It would be nice if you

could have a child care ser-

vice so we can shop without

distractions.

28 32 25 85 38

5. It is often difficult to loc-

ate an assistant who can

help us with answers to our

questions.

29 49 22 100 44

6. I wish it were a 24-hour

store.

17 13 7 37 16

7. Sometimes, there is a

mistake in billing. We have

to make some telephone

calls before charges are

corrected. This is a waste of

our time.

4 12 14 20 16

8. Allocate some floor

space for kids to play video

games.

2 — 4 6 2

9. Import more Eastern

apparel like the kimono,

sarees, sarongs.

— 8 4 12 5

10. Regulate the temperat-

ure better; often, it is too

cold or too hot.

15 12 17 44 18

3. Need for child care has been expressed by more than a third of our customers (38%). It would be a good idea to earmark a portion of the front of the building for parents to drop off their children while shopping. The children will have to be supervised by a trained child care professional recruited by the organization. An assistant could be recruited later if needed. From the cost−benefit analysis in Exhibit 7, it may be seen that this additional expenditure will pay off multifold in sales revenue, and at the same time, create a fund of goodwill for the company.

4. Adding to the variety of foods served in the cafeteria (a need expressed by 20%) is at once a simple and a complex matter. We need further ideas and details

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 419

Chapter

17

The research report

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 411

as to what types of food need to be added. This information can be obtained through a short survey, if Mr Raiburn so desires.

5. Billing errors should not occur (16% indicated this). The billing department should be warned that such mistakes should be avoided and should not recur. Performance assessment should be tied to such mistakes.

6. Regulation of temperature (16% identified this) is easy. This, in fact, could be immediately attended to by the engineering department personnel.

I hope this report contains all the information sought by Mr Raiburn. As stated earlier, if the non-credit card customers also have to be sampled, this can be easily arranged.

17.4.2 REPORT 2: SAMPLE OF A REPORT OFFERING ALTERNATIVE SOLUTIONS AND EXPLAINING THE PROS AND CONS OF EACH ALTERNATIVE

TO: Mr Charles Orient, CEO, Lunard Manufacturing Company

FR: Alex Ventura, Senior Researcher, Beam Research Team

RE: Suggestions on alternative ways of cutting costs in anticipation of recession.

Enclosed is the report requested by Mr Orient. If any additional Information or clarification is needed, please let me know.

Encl: Report

Report on alternative ways of handling recessionary times without massive layoffs

Introduction

The Beam Research Team was asked to suggest alternative ways of tiding over the anticipated recession of the next several months, when a slowdown of the economy is expected. A recent article in BusinessWeek entitled “Hunkering Down in a Hurry” indicated that executives in a large number of companies are slashing costs mostly through layoffs and restructuring. Mr Orient wanted the Beam Research Team to suggest other alternatives besides layoffs.

This report provides five alternatives citing the advantages and disadvantages of each.

Method used for developing the alternatives

The team studied the economic indicators and the published industry analyses, read the Federal Reserve Board Chairman’s speeches, examined the many ways in which companies cut costs during nonrecessionary periods as well as recessions, and, based on these, suggests the following five alternatives.

Alternatives suggested:

1. A moratorium on all capital expenditure.

2. Hiring freeze.

3. Recovery of bad debts through sustained efforts.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 420

Chapter

17

Research Methods for Business

412 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

4. Trimming of operating expenditure with substantial reduction in travel and entertainment expenditure.

5. Discontinuance of the manufacture of low-profit-margin products.

Advantages and disadvantages of each of the above

Itemized details of the cost−benefit analysis for each of the above suggestions are furnished in the appendix. We give only the net benefits for each alternative here.

Moratorium on all capital expenditure

It makes good sense to desist from all capital expenditure since manufacture of most of the items will slow down during recession. Except for parts for existing machines, there is no need to buy capital equipment, and all proposals in this regard should be shelved.

This strategy will cut down expenditure to the extent of 7 to 10% of revenue. See appendix for full details. A reserve fund can be created to catch up with future orders when the economy returns to normal.

Hiring freeze

The annual increase in the strength of staff during the past four years has been about 15%. With a slowdown of the economy, a hiring freeze in all branch offices will save over $10 million annually.

This might initially result in some extra workload for the staff and cause some job dissatisfaction, but once they get used to it, and the impact of the actual recession hits them, employees will be thankful for the job they have. It will be a good idea to explain in advance the reasons for the hiring freeze to the employees so that they understand the motive behind the company’s policy, and appreciate having been informed.

Recovery of bad debts through aggressive efforts

Bad debts of the company have been on the increase over the past three years, and no intensive efforts to recover them seem to have been made hitherto.

We suggest that collection agents who have successfully recovered bad debts for other companies be hired immediately. Such agents may have to be paid more than other collection agents, but the extra cost will be well worth it. About a billion dollars can be collected within a few weeks of their being on the job, and this will help the financial cash flow of the company.

Trimming of operating expenditure

Several operating expenses can be cut down − the travel expenses of managers in particular − as shown in Exhibit 4 of the appendix. Videoconferencing costs much less and is quicker, and should be encouraged for most of the meetings and negotiations. This alone will result in savings of more than $175000 per month.

Another way of considerably curtailing expenditure is to restrict entertainment expenses only for such purposes and to such managers as actively promote the business of the company or are essential for public relations.

These changes will have a negative impact on morale, but managers understand the economic situation, and will adjust to the new system once the initial mental resistance wears off.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 421

Chapter

17

The research report

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 413

Eliminating the manufacture of low-margin products

The team found from a detailed study of the company records of manufacturing, sales, and profits figures for the various products that all the items listed in Exhibit 5 of the appendix have very low profit margins. It is evident from the data provided that considerable time and effort are expended in manufacturing and selling these items.

It will be useful to phase out the manufacture of these items and divert the resources to the high-profit items suggested in Exhibit 6. From the cost−benefit analysis in Exhibit 7, it may be seen that several billions can be saved through this strategy.

It is possible to put into effect all of the five alternatives above and handle the onslaught of the recession with confidence.

17.4.3 REPORT 3: EXAMPLE OF AN ABRIDGED BASIC RESEARCH REPORT

Factors affecting the upward mobility of women in public accounting

Introduction

A substantial number of women have entered the public accounting profession in the past 15 years or so. However, less than 4% of the partners in the big eight accounting firms are women, indicating a lack of upward mobility for women in the accounting profession. Against the backdrop of the fact that the women stu- dents perform significantly better during their academic training than their male counterparts, it is unfortunate that their intellectual ability and knowledge remain underutilized during their professional careers. The recent costly litigation and dis- crimination suits filed make it imperative for us to study the factors that affect the upward mobility of women and examine how the situation can be rectified.

A brief literature review

Studies of male and female accounting majors indicate that the percentage of women accounting students has increased severalfold since 1977 (Kurian, 1998). Based on the analysis of longitudinal data collected over a 15-year period, Mulcher, Turner, and Williams (2000) found that female students’ grades in senior account- ing courses were significantly higher than those of the male students. This higher level of academic performance has been theorized as being due to the higher need and desire that women have to achieve and overcome stereotypes (Messing, 2000), having higher career aspirations (Tinsley et al., 1999), or having a higher aptitude for accounting (Jones & Alexander, 2001; Riley, 2001). Empirical studies by Fraser, Lytle, and Stolle (1998) and Johnson and Meyer (1999), however, found no signific- ant differences in personality predispositions or behavioral traits among male and female accounting majors.

Several surveys of women accountants in the country pinpoint three major factors that hinder women’s career progress in the public accounting field (see, for instance, Kaufman, 1986; Larson, 1999; Walkup & Fenman, 2001). They are: (1) the long hours of work demanded by the profession (a factor that conflicts with family demands); (2) failure to be entrusted with responsible assignments; and (3) discrimination. In sum, the lack of upward mobility seems to be due to factors over which the organization has some control.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 422

Chapter

17

Research Methods for Business

414 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

Research question

Do long work hours, failure to be handed greater responsibilities, and discrimination account for the lack of upward mobility of women in public accounting?

Theoretical framework

The variance in the dependent variable, upward mobility, can be explained by the three independent variables: long hours of work, not handling greater responsibilit- ies, and discrimination. As women are expected to, and do indeed, take on respons- ibility for household work and childrearing, they are not able to work beyond regular work hours at the workplace. This creates the wrong impression among higher- ups in the organization that women are less committed to their work. Because of this perception, they are not entrusted with significant responsibilities. This fur- ther hinders their progress as they are not afforded exposure to the intricacies of accounting practices as much as men. Hence, women are overlooked at the time of promotion.

Deliberate discriminatory practices due to sex-role stereotypes, as evidenced in the well-known case of Hopkins vs. Price Waterhouse & Co., also arrest women’s progress. If women are not valued for their potential and are expected to conform to sex-typed behavior (which confines them to inconspicuous roles), their chances of moving up the career ladder are significantly reduced.

Thus, the three independent variables considered here would significantly explain the variance in the upward mobility of women in public accounting. The imprac- ticability of putting in long hours of work, lack of opportunities to handle greater responsibilities, and sex-role stereotyping all negatively impact upward mobility.

Hypotheses

If women spend more hours on the job after regular work hours, they will be given greater responsibilities.

If women are entrusted with higher levels of responsibility, they will have more opportunities to move up in the organization.

If women are not expected to conform to stereotypical behavior, their chances for upward mobility will increase.

All three independent variables will significantly explain the variance in women CPAs’ upward mobility.

Method section

Study design

In this cross-sectional correlational field study, data on the three independent vari- ables and the dependent variable were collected from women CPAs in several public accounting organizations in the country through mail questionnaires.

Population and sample

The population for the study comprised all women CPAs in the country. A systematic sampling procedure was first used to select 30 cities from the various regions of the country, from which a sample of accounting firms would be drawn. Then, through a simple random sampling procedure, five CPA firms from each of the cities were chosen for the study. Data were collected from all the women in each of the firms

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 423

Chapter

17

The research report

Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 415

so chosen. The total sample size was 300 and responses were received from 264 women CPAs, for an 88% response rate for the mail questionnaires, which is pretty good. The unit of analysis was the individuals who responded to the survey.

All respondents had, as expected, the CPA degree. Their ages ranged from 28 to 66. About 60% of the women were over 45 years of age. The average number of children in the house below the age of 13 was two. The average number of years of work in the organization was 15, and the average number of organizations worked for was two. The average number of hours spent daily at home on office-related matters was 1.4.

Variables and measures

All demographic variables such as age, number of years in the organization, number of other organizations in which the individual had worked, number of hours spent at home on office-related matters, and number of children in the house and their ages, were tapped by direct single questions.

Upward mobility. This dependent variable indicates the extent to which indi- viduals are expected to progress in their career during the succeeding three to ten years. Hall (1986) developed four items to measure this variable, a sample item being: “I see myself being promoted to the next level quite eas- ily.” The measure is reported to have convergent and discriminant validity, and Cronbach’s alpha for the four items for this sample was 0.86.

Sex-role stereotyping. This independent variable was measured using Hall and Humphreys’ (1972) eight-item measure. An example item is: “Men in this organ- ization do not consider women’s place to be primarily in the home.” Cronbach’s alpha for the measure for this sample was 0.82.

Responsibilities assigned. This was tapped by three items from Sonnenfield and McGrath (1983), which asked respondents to indicate their levels of assigned responsibility to (a) make important decisions, (b) handle large accounts, and (c) account for the annual profits of the firm. Cronbach’s alpha for the three items was 0.71 for this sample.

Data collection method

Questionnaires were mailed to 300 women CPAs in the United States. After two reminders, 264 completed questionnaires were received within a period of six weeks. The high return rate of 88% can be attributed to the shortness of the questionnaire and perhaps the motivation of the women CPAs to respond to a topic close to their heart.

Questionnaires were not electronically administered for various reasons, including the advantage it afforded to the busy respondents to reply without switching on the computer.

Data analysis and results

After determining the reliabilities (Cronbach’s alpha) for the measures for this sample, frequency distributions for the demographic variables were obtained. These may be seen in Exhibit 1. Then a Pearson correlation matrix was obtained for the four independent and dependent variables. This may be seen in Exhibit 2. It is to be noted that no correlation exceeded 0.6.

Each hypothesis was then tested. The correlation matrix provided the answer to the first three hypotheses. The first hypothesis stated that the number of hours put in beyond work hours on office-related matters would be positively correlated to the responsibilities assigned. The correlation of 0.56 (p < 0.001) between the

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 424

Chapter

17

Research Methods for Business

416 Copyright material reproduced under license from John Wiley and Sons, Inc.

number of hours spent on office work beyond regular work hours and the entrusted responsibilities substantiates this hypothesis.

The second hypothesis stated that if women were given higher responsibilities, their upward mobility would improve. The positive correlation of 0.59 (p < 0.001) between the two variables substantiates this hypothesis. That is, the greater the entrusted responsibilities, the higher are the perceived chances of being promoted.

The third hypothesis indicated that sex-role stereotyping would be negatively cor- related to upward mobility. The correlation of −0.54 (p < 0.001) substantiates this hypothesis as well. That is, the greater the expected conformity to stereotyped beha- vior, the less the chances of upward mobility.

To test the fourth hypothesis that the number of hours spent beyond regular work hours on job-related matters, assignment of higher responsibilities, and expecta- tions of conformity with stereotyped behavior will significantly explain the vari- ance in perceived upward mobility, the three independent variables were regressed against the dependent variable. The results, which are shown in Exhibit 3, indicate that this hypothesis is also substantiated. That is, the R2 value of 0.43 at a signific- ance level of p < 0.001, with df (3.238), confirms that 43% of the variance in upward mobility is significantly explained by the three independent variables.

Discussion of results

The results of this study confirm that the variables considered in the theoretical framework are important. By focusing solely on the number of hours worked, ignoring the quality of work done, the organization is perhaps not harnessing the full potential and encouraging the development of the talents of the women CPAs adequately. It seems worth while to remedy this situation.

It would be useful if the top executive were to assign progressively higher levels of responsibility to women. This would utilize their abilities fully and, in turn, enhance the effectiveness of the firm. If executives are helped to modify their mental attitudes and sex-role expectations, they should tend to expect less stereotypical behavior and encourage the upward mobility of women CPAs. Knowing women bring a different kind of perspective to organizational matters (Smith, 1999; Vernon, 2001), it is quite possible that having them as partners of the firm will enhance the organizational effectiveness as well.

Recommendations

It is recommended that a system be set up to assess the value of the contributions of each individual in discharging his or her duties, and use that, rather than the number of hours of work put in, as a yardstick for promotion.

Second, women CPAs should be given progressively more responsibility after they have served three to five years in the system. Assigning a mentor to train them will facilitate smooth functioning of the firm.

Third, a short seminar should be organized for executives to sensitize them to the adverse effects of sex-role stereotyping at the workplace. This will help them to beneficially utilize the talents of women CPAs. If viewed as professionals with career goals and aspirations, rather than in stereotyped ways, women CPAs will be enabled to handle more responsibilities and advance in the system. The organization also stands to benefit from their contributions.

In conclusion, it would be worth while for public accounting firms to modify their mental orientations toward, and expectations of, women CPAs. It is a national waste if their potential is not fully tapped and utilized.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 425

417

Appendix

A A FINAL NOTE TO STUDENTS

If you have enjoyed learning about research and built up a repertoire of research skills, you are prepared and ready for your professional life. Earlier in the book we have explained how research helps managers to get a grip on issues, concerns, and conflicts within the company or in its environment, to take effective decisions and to develop effective courses of action. As you must have realized from these and other discussions in this book, research is an integral part of organizational reality that helps businesses to continuously improve and grow progressively.

Though you may not have become an expert researcher after one semester of course- work, and perhaps a research project, we are sure you would have gained an intel- ligent appreciation of, and an adequate depth of knowledge for, business research − great assets in dealing effectively with consultants. The ability to discriminate between the good and the not-so-good research will also be invaluable to you in sifting through the materials you will undoubtedly read in the practitioner and academic journals in your professional life as managers. And, more important, as you get deluged by all the information from various sources, including the Internet, newspapers, talk shows, and the like, you will be better able to evaluate the validity of the messages and judge them for what they truly represent. You are thus armed to handle the information overload that one faces in today’s information age.

If you have satisfactorily met the following objectives, you can be confident that you have taken a giant step toward becoming even more effective as a manager:

• Developing a sensitivity to, and being able to identify, important issues operat- ing in a particular situation.

• Being able to sense problems that may be surfacing from time to time in your environment.

• Being able to translate a broad problem into a feasible topic for research. • Knowing that there is more than one viewpoint on what makes good research. • Understanding your personal ideas on research and how it should be done. • Determining which kinds of research questions are important to you and what

methods for collecting and analyzing data will give you the best answer to these questions.

• Being able to gather information quickly by asking the appropriate questions. • Locating and being able to extract relevant information from published sources. • Knowing which aspects of a study could be advantageously applied to a problem

encountered in your own work situation.

• Being able to clearly conceptualize the logical relationships among variables in any given situation.

• Recognizing the limitations of a research study, even though they may not have been enumerated in the report.

• Being able to carry out a small research project in an organization. • Becoming sensitive to sources of biases in both published articles and project

reports given to you by consultants and researchers, and thus becoming a more discriminating and sophisticated consumer of research.

Research is the excitement of exploring avenues for problem solving, and as a manager you will find the research knowledge and skills you have now acquired to be extremely useful. Research, when applied with good common sense, yields the desired results.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 426

Research Methods for Business

418

We wish you success in your personal, academic, and professional careers!

Uma Sekaran and Roger Bougie

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 427

419

Appendix

B STATISTICAL TABLES

Table I Cumulative Normal Probabilities

z F(z) z F(z) z F(z)

0.00 0.5000000 0.30 0.6179114 0.60 0.7257469

0.01 0.5039894 0.31 0.6217195 0.61 0.7290691

0.02 0.5079783 0.32 0.6255158 0.62 0.7323711

0.03 0.5119665 0.33 0.6293000 0.63 0.7356527

0.04 0.5159534 0.34 0.6330717 0.64 0.7389137

0.05 0.5199388 0.35 0.6368307 0.65 0.7421539

0.06 0.5239222 0.36 0.6405764 0.66 0.7453731

0.07 0.5279032 0.37 0.6443088 0.67 0.7485711

0.08 0.5318814 0.38 0.6480273 0.68 0.7517478

0.09 0.5358564 0.39 0.6517317 0.69 0.7549029

0.10 0.5398278 0.40 0.6554217 0.70 0.7580363

0.11 0.5437953 0.41 0.6590970 0.71 0.7611479

0.12 0.5477584 0.42 0.6627573 0.72 0.7642375

0.13 0.5517168 0.43 0.6664022 0.73 0.7673049

0.14 0.5556700 0.44 0.6700314 0.74 0.7703500

0.15 0.5596177 0.45 0.6736448 0.75 0.7733726

0.16 0.5635595 0.46 0.6772419 0.76 0.7763727

0.17 0.5674949 0.47 0.6808225 0.77 0.7793501

0.18 0.5714237 0.48 0.6843863 0.78 0.7823046

0.19 0.5753454 0.49 0.6879331 0.79 0.7852361

0.20 0.5792597 0.50 0.6914625 0.80 0.7881446

0.21 0.5831662 0.51 0.6949743 0.81 0.7910299

0.22 0.5870604 0.52 0.6984682 0.82 0.7938919

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 428

Research Methods for Business

420

0.23 0.5909541 0.53 0.7019440 0.83 0.7967306

0.24 0.5948349 0.54 0.7054015 0.84 0.7995458

0.25 0.5987063 0.55 0.7088403 0.85 0.8023375

0.26 0.6025681 0.56 0.7122603 0.86 0.8051055

0.27 0.6064199 0.57 0.7156612 0.87 0.8078498

0.28 0.6102612 0.58 0.7190427 0.88 0.8105703

0.29 0.6140919 0.59 0.7224047 0.89 0.8132671

0.90 0.8159399 1.37 0.9146565 1.84 0.9671159

0.91 0.8185887 1.38 0.9162067 1.85 0.9678432

0.92 0.8212136 1.39 0.9177356 1.86 0.9685572

0.93 0.8238145 1.40 0.9192433 1.87 0.9692581

0.94 0.8263912 1.41 0.9207302 1.88 0.9699460

0.95 0.8289439 1.42 0.9221962 1.89 0.9706210

0.96 0.8314724 1.43 0.9236415 1.90 0.9712834

0.97 0.8339768 1.44 0.9250663 1.91 0.9719334

0.98 0.8364569 1.45 0.9264707 1.92 0.9725711

0.99 0.8389129 1.46 0.9278550 1.93 0.9731966

1.00 0.8413447 1.47 0.9292191 1.94 0.9738102

1.01 0.8437524 1.48 0.9305634 1.95 0.9744119

1.02 0.8461358 1.49 0.9318879 1.96 0.9750021

1.03 0.8484950 1.50 0.9331928 1.97 0.9755808

1.04 0.8508300 1.51 0.9344783 1.98 0.9761482

1.05 0.8531409 1.52 0.9357445 1.99 0.9767045

1.06 0.8554277 1.53 0.9369916 2.00 0.9772499

1.07 0.8576903 1.54 0.9382198 2.01 0.9777844

1.08 0.8599289 1.55 0.9394292 2.02 0.9783083

1.09 0.8621434 1.56 0.9406201 2.03 0.9788217

1.10 0.8643339 1.57 0.9417924 2.04 0.9793248

1.11 0.8665005 1.58 0.9429466 2.05 0.9798178

1.12 0.8686431 1.59 0.9440826 2.06 0.9803007

1.13 0.8707619 1.60 0.9452007 2.07 0.9807738

1.14 0.8728568 1.61 0.9463011 2.08 0.9812372

1.15 0.8749281 1.62 0.9473839 2.09 0.9816911

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 429

STATISTICAL TABLES

421

1.16 0.8769756 1.63 0.9484493 2.10 0.9821356

1.17 0.8789995 1.64 0.9494974 2.11 0.9825708

1.18 0.8809999 1.65 0.9505285 2.12 0.9829970

1.19 0.8829768 1.66 0.9515428 2.13 0.9834142

1.20 0.8849303 1.67 0.9525403 2.14 0.9838226

1.21 0.8868606 1.68 0.9535213 2.15 0.9842224

1.22 0.8887676 1.69 0.9544860 2.16 0.9846137

1.23 0.8906514 1.70 0.9554345 2.17 0.9849966

1.24 0.8925123 1.71 0.9563671 2.18 0.9853713

1.25 0.8943502 1.72 0.9572838 2.19 0.9857379

1.26 0.8961653 1.73 0.9581849 2.20 0.9860966

1.27 0.8979577 1.74 0.9590705 2.21 0.9864474

1.28 0.8997274 1.75 0.9599408 2.22 0.9867906

1.29 0.9014747 1.76 0.9607961 2.23 0.9871263

1.30 0.9031995 1.77 0.9616364 2.24 0.9874545

1.31 0.9049021 1.78 0.9624620 2.25 0.9877755

1.32 0.9065825 1.79 0.9632730 2.26 0.9880894

1.33 0.9082409 1.80 0.9640697 2.27 0.9883962

1.34 0.9098773 1.81 0.9648521 2.28 0.9886962

1.35 0.9114920 1.82 0.9656205 2.29 0.9889893

1.36 0.9130850 1.83 0.9663750 2.30 0.9892759

2.31 0.9895559 2.45 0.9928572 2.59 0.9952012

2.32 0.9898296 2.46 0.9930531 2.60 0.9953388

2.33 0.9900969 2.47 0.9932443 2.70 0.9965330

2.34 0.9903581 2.48 0 9934309 2.80 0.9974449

2.35 0.9906133 2.49 0.9936128 2.90 0.9981342

2.36 0.9908625 2.50 0.9937903 3.00 0.9986501

2.37 0.9911060 2.51 0.9939634 3.20 0.9993129

2.38 0.9913437 2.52 0.9941323 3.40 0.9996631

2.39 0.9915758 2.53 0.9942969 3.60 0.9998409

2.40 0.9918025 2.54 0.9944574 3.80 0.9999277

2.41 0.9920237 2.55 0.9946139 4.00 0.9999683

2.42 0.9922397 2.56 0.9947664 4.50 0.9999966

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 430

Research Methods for Business

422

2.43 0.9924506 2.57 0.9949151 5.00 0.9999997

2.44 0.9926564 2.58 0.9950600 5.50 0.9999999

This table is condensed from Table 1 of the Biometrika Tables for Statisticians, Vol 1 (1st edn), edited by E.S. Pearson adn H.O Hartley: Reproduced with kind permission of E.S. Pearson and the trustees of Biometrika

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 431

STATISTICAL TABLES

423

Table II Upper Percentage Points of the t Distribution

Q=0.4 0.25 0.1 0.05 0.025 0.01 0.005 0.001

v 2Q=0.8 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.05 0.02 0.01 0.002

1 0.325 1.000 3.078 6.314 12.706 31.821 63.657 318.31

2 0.289 0.816 1.886 2.920 4.303 6.965 9.925 22.326

3 0.277 0.765 1.638 2.353 3.182 4.541 5.841 10.213

4 0.271 0.741 1.533 2.132 2.776 3.747 4.604 7.173

5 0.267 0.727 1.476 2.015 2.571 3.365 4.032 5.893

6 0.265 0.718 1.440 1.943 2.447 3.143 3.707 5.208

7 0.263 0.711 1.415 1.895 2.365 2.998 3.499 4.785

8 0.262 0.706 1.397 1.860 2.306 2.896 3.355 4.501

9 0.261 0.703 1.383 1.833 2.262 2.821 3.250 4.297

10 0.260 0.700 1.372 1.812 2.228 2.764 3.169 4.144

11 0.260 0.697 1.363 1.796 2.201 2.718 3.106 4.025

12 0.259 0.695 1.356 1.782 2.179 2.681 3.055 3.930

13 0.259 0.694 1.350 1.771 2.160 2.650 3.012 3.852

14 0.258 0.692 1.345 1.761 2.145 2.624 2.977 3.787

15 0.258 0.691 1.341 1.753 2.131 2.602 2.947 3.733

16 0.258 0.690 1.337 1.746 2.120 2.583 2.921 3.686

l7 0.257 0.689 1.333 1.740 2.110 2.567 2.898 3.646

18 0.257 0.688 1.330 1.734 2.101 2.552 2.878 3.610

19 0.257 0.688 1.328 1.729 2.093 2.539 2.861 3.579

20 0.257 0.687 1.325 1.725 2.086 2.528 2.845 3.552

21 0.257 0.686 1.323 1.721 2.080 2.518 2.831 3.527

22 0.256 0.686 1.321 1.717 2.074 2.508 2.819 3.505

23 0.256 0.685 1.319 1.714 2.069 2.500 2.807 3.485

24 0.256 0.685 1.318 1.711 2.064 2.492 2.797 3.467

25 0.256 0.684 1.316 1.708 2.060 2.485 2.787 3.450

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 432

Research Methods for Business

424

26 0.256 0.684 1.315 1.706 2.056 2.479 2.779 3.435

27 0.256 0.684 1.314 1.703 2.052 2.473 2.771 3.421

28 0.256 0.683 1.313 1.701 2.048 2.467 2.763 3.408

29 0.256 0.683 1.311 1.699 2.045 2.462 2.756 3396

30 0.256 0.683 1.310 1.697 2.042 2.457 2.750 3.385

40 0.255 0.681 1.303 1.684 2.021 2.423 2.704 3.307

60 0.254 0.679 1.296 1.671 2.000 2.390 2.660 3.232

120 0.254 0.677 1.289 1.658 1.980 2.358 2.617 3.160

∞ 0.253 0.674 1.282 1.645 1.960 2.326 2.576 3.090

This table is condensed from Table 1 of the Biometrika Tables for Statisticians, Vol 1 (1st edn), edited by E.S. Pearson adn H.O Hartley: Reproduced with kind permission of E.S. Pearson and the trustees of Biometrika

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 433

STATISTICAL TABLES

425

Table III Upper Percentage Points of the χ2 Distribution

Q

v 0.995 0.990 0.975 0.950 0.900 0.750 0.500

1 392704.10-10157088.10-9982069.10-9393214.10-80.0157908 0.1015308 0.454937

2 0.0100251 0.0201007 0.0506356 0.102587 0.210720 0.575364 1.38629

3 0.0717212 0.114832 0.215795 0.351846 0.584375 1.212534 2.36597

4 0.206990 0.297110 0.484419 0.710721 1.063623 1.92255 3.35670

5 0.411740 0.554300 0.831211 1.145476 1.61031 2.67460 4.35146

6 0.675727 0.872085 1.237347 1.63539 2.20413 3.45460 5.34812

7 0.989265 1.239043 1.68987 2.16735 2.83311 4.25485 6.34581

8 1.344419 1.646482 2.17973 2.73264 3.48954 5.07064 7.34412

9 1.734926 2.087912 2.70039 3.32511 4.16816 5.89883 8.34283

10 2.15585 2.55821 3.24697 3.94030 4.86518 6.73720 9.34182

11 2.60321 3.05347 3.81575 4.57481 5.57779 7.58412 10.3410

12 3.07382 3.57056 4.40379 5.22603 6.30380 8.43842 11.3403

13 3.56503 4.10691 5.00874 5.89186 7.04150 9.29906 12.3398

14 4.07468 4.66043 5.62872 6.57063 7.78953 10.1653 13.3393

15 4.60094 5.22935 6.26214 7.26094 8.54675 11.0365 14.3389

16 5.14224 5.81221 6.90766 7.96164 9.31223 11.9122 15.3385

17 5.69724 6.40776 7.56418 8.67176 10.0852 12.7919 16.3381

18 6.26481 7.01491 8.23075 9.39046 10.8649 13.6753 17.3379

19 6.84398 7.63273 8.90655 10.1170 11.6509 14.5620 18.3376

20 7.43386 8.26040 9.59083 10.8508 12.4426 15.4518 19.3374

21 8.03366 8.89720 10.28293 11.5913 13.2396 16.3444 20.3372

22 8.64272 9.54249 10.9823 12.3380 14.0415 17.2396 21.3370

23 9.26042 10.19567 11.6885 13.0905 14.8479 18.1373 22.3369

24 9.88623 10.8564 12.4011 13.8484 15.6587 19.0372 23.3367

25 10.5197 11.5240 13.1197 14.6114 16.4734 19.9393 24.3366

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 434

Research Methods for Business

426

26 11.1603 12.1981 13.8439 15.3791 17.2919 20.8434 25.3364

27 11.8076 12.8786 14.5733 16.1513 18.1138 21.7494 26.3363

28 12.4613 13.5648 15.3079 16.9279 18.9392 22.6572 27.3363

29 13.1211 14.2565 16.0471 17.7083 19.7677 23.5666 28.3362

30 13.7867 14.9535 16.7908 18.4926 20.5992 24.4776 29.3360

40 20.7065 22.1643 24.4331 26.5093 29.0505 33.6603 39.3354

50 27.9907 29.7067 32.3574 34.7642 37.6886 42.9421 49.3349

60 35.5346 37.4848 40.4817 43.1879 46.4589 52.2938 59.3347

70 43.2752 45.4418 48.7576 51.7393 55.3290 61.6983 69.3344

80 51.1720 53.5400 57.1532 60.3915 64.2778 71.1445 79.3343

90 59.1963 61.7541 65.6466 69.1260 73.2912 80.6247 89.3342

100 67.3276 70.0648 74.2219 77.9295 82.3581 90.1332 99.3341

Z Q -2.5758 -2.3263 -1.9600 -1.6449 -1.2816 -0.6745 0.0000

Q

v 0.250 0.100 0.050 0.025 0.010 0.005 0.001

1 1.32330 2.70554 3.84146 5.02389 6.63490 7.87944 10.828

2 2.77259 4.60517 5.99147 7.37776 9.21034 10.5966 13.816

3 4.10835 6.25139 7.81473 9.34840 11.3449 12.8381 16.266

4 5.38527 7.77944 9.48773 11.1433 13.2767 14.8602 18.467

5 6.62568 9.23635 11.0705 12.8325 15.0863 16.7496 20.515

6 7.84080 10.6446 12.5916 14.4494 16.8119 18.5476 22.458

7 9.03715 12.0170 14.0671 16.0128 18.4753 20.2777 24.322

8 10.2188 13.3616 15.5073 17.5346 20.0902 21.9550 26.125

9 11.3887 14.6837 16.9190 19.0228 21.6660 23.5893 27.877

10 12.5489 15.9871 18.3070 20.4831 23.2093 25.1882 29.588

11 13.7007 17.2750 19.6751 21.9200 24.7250 26.7569 31.264

12 14.8454 18.5494 21.0261 23.3367 26.2170 28.2995 32.909

13 15.9839 19.8119 22.3621 24.7356 27.6883 29.8194 34.528

14 17.1170 21.0642 23.6848 26.1190 29.1413 31.3193 36.123

15 18.2451 22.3072 24.9958 27.4884 30.5779 32.8013 37.697

16 19.3688 23.5418 26.2962 28.8454 31.9999 34.2672 39.252

17 20.4887 24.7690 27.5871 30.1910 33.4087 35.7185 40.790

18 21.6049 25.9894 28.8693 31.5264 34.8053 37.1564 42.312

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 435

STATISTICAL TABLES

427

19 22.71578 27.2036 30.1435 32.8523 36.1908 38.5822 43.820

20 23.8277 28.4120 31.4104 34.1696 37.5662 39.9968 45.315

21 24.9348 29.6151 32.6705 35.4789 38.9321 41.4010 46.797

22 26.0393 30.8133 33.9244 36.7807 40.2894 42.7956 48.268

23 27.1413 32.0069 35.1725 38.0757 41.6384 44.1813 49.728

24 28.2412 33.1963 36.4151 39.3641 42.9798 45.5585 51.179

25 29.3389 34.3816 37.6525 40.6465 44.3141 46.9278 52.620

26 30.4345 35.5631 38.8852 41.9232 45.6417 48.2899 54.052

27 31.5284 36.7412 40.1133 43.1944 46.9630 49.6449 55.476

28 32.6205 37.9159 41.3372 44.4607 48.2782 50.9933 56.892

29 33.7109 39.0875 42.5569 45.7222 49.5879 52.3356 58.302

30 34.7998 40.2560 43.7729 46.9792 50.8922 53.6720 59.703

40 45.6160 51.8050 55.7585 59.3417 63.6907 66.7659 73.402

50 56.3336 63.1671 67.5048 71.4202 76.1539 79.4900 86.661

60 66.9814 74.3970 79.0819 83.2976 88.3794 91.9517 99.607

70 77.5766 85.5271 90.5312 95.0231 100.425 104.215 112.317

80 88.1303 96.5782 101.879 106.629 112.329 116.321 124.839

90 98.6499 107.565 113.145 118.136 124.116 128.299 137.208

100 109.141 118.498 124.342 129.561 135.807 140.169 149.449

Z Q +0.6745 +1.2816 +1.6449 +1.9600 +2.3263 +2.5758 +3.0902

This table is condensed from Table 1 of the Biometrika Tables for Statisticians, Vol 1 (1st edn), edited by E.S. Pearson adn H.O Hartley: Reproduced with kind permission of E.S. Pearson and the trustees of Biometrika

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 436

Table IV Percentage Points of the F Distribution: Upper 5% points

v 1

v 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 24 30 40 60 120 ∞

1 161.4 199.5 215.7 224.6 230.2 234.0 236.8 238.9 240.5 241.9 243.9 245.9 248.0 249.1 230.1 231.1 252.2 253.3 243.3

2 18.51 19.00 19.16 19.25 19.30 19.33 19.35 19.37 19.38 19.40 19.41 19.43 19.45 19.45 19.46 19.47 19.48 19.49 19.50

3 10.13 9.55 9.28 9.12 9.01 8.94 8.89 8.83 8.81 8.79 8.74 8.70 8.66 8.64 8.62 8.59 8.57 8.55 8.53

4 7.71 6.94 6.59 6.39 6.26 6.16 6.09 6.04 6.00 3.96 3.91 5.86 5.80 5.77 5.75 5.72 5.69 3.66 5.63

5 6.61 5.79 5.41 3.19 5.05 4.95 4.88 4.82 4.77 4.74 4.68 4.62 4.56 4.53 4.30 4.46 4.43 4.40 4.36

6 5.99 5.14 4.76 4.53 4.39 4.28 4.21 4.13 4.10 4.06 4.00 3.94 3.87 3.84 3.81 3.77 3.74 3.70 3.67

7 5.59 4.74 4.33 4.12 3.97 3.87 3.79 3.73 3.68 3.64 3.57 3.51 3.44 3.41 3.38 3.34 3.30 3.27 3.23

8 5.32 4.46 4.07 3.84 3.69 3.58 3.50 3.44 3.39 3.35 3.28 3.22 3.15 3.12 3.08 3.04 3.01 2.97 2.93

9 5.12 4.26 3.86 3.63 3.48 3.37 3.29 3.23 3.18 3.14 3.07 3.01 2.94 2.90 2.86 2.83 2.79 2.75 2.71

10 4.96 4.10 3.71 3.48 3.33 3.22 3.14 3.07 3.02 2.98 2.91 2.85 2.77 2.74 2.70 2.66 2.62 2.38 2.54

11 4.84 3.98 3.59 3.36 3.20 3.09 3.01 2.95 2.90 2.85 2.79 2.72 2.65 2.61 2.57 2.53 2.49 2.45 2.41

12 4.75 3.89 3.49 3.26 3.11 3.00 2.91 2.85 2.80 2.75 2.69 2.62 2.54 2.31 2.47 2.43 2.38 2.34 2.30

13 4.67 3.81 3.41 3.18 3.03 2.92 2.83 2.77 2.71 2.67 2.60 2.33 2.46 2.42 2.38 2.34 2.30 2.25 2.21

14 4.60 3.74 3.34 3.11 2.96 2.85 2.76 2.70 2.65 2.60 2.53 2.46 2.39 2.35 2.31 2.27 2.22 2.18 2.13

15 4.34 3.68 3.29 3.06 2.90 2.79 2.71 2.64 2.39 2.54 2.48 2.40 2.33 2.29 2.25 2.20 2.16 2.11 2.07

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 437

STATISTICAL TABLES

429

16 4.49 3.63 3.24 3.01 2.85 2.74 2.66 2.59 2.34 2.49 2.42 2.35 2.28 2.24 2.19 2.15 2.11 2.06 2.01

17 4.45 3.59 3.20 2.96 2.81 2.70 2.61 2.55 2.49 2.43 2.38 2.31 2.23 2.19 2.13 2.10 2.06 2.01 1.96

18 4.41 3.55 3.16 2.93 2.77 2.66 2.58 2.31 2.46 2.41 2.34 2.27 2.19 2.15 2.11 2.06 2.02 1.97 1.92

19 4.38 3.52 3.13 2.90 2.74 2.63 2.54 2.48 2.42 2.38 2.31 2.23 2.16 2.11 2.07 2.03 1.98 1.93 1.88

20 4.35 3.49 3.10 2.87 2.71 2.60 2.51 2.45 2.39 2.35 2.28 2.20 2.12 2.08 2.04 1.99 1.93 1.90 1.84

21 4.32 3.47 3.07 2.84 2.68 2.57 2.49 2.42 2.37 2.32 2.25 2.18 2.10 2.05 2.01 1.96 1.92 1.87 1.81

22 4.30 3.44 3.05 2.82 2.66 2.55 2.46 2.40 2.34 2.30 2.23 2.15 2.07 2.03 1.98 1.94 1.89 1.84 1.78

23 4.28 3.42 3.03 2.80 2.64 2.53 2.44 2.37 2.32 2.27 2.20 2.13 2.03 2.01 1.96 1.91 1.86 1.81 1.76

24 4.26 3.40 3.01 2.78 2.62 2.51 2.42 2.36 2.30 2.25 2.18 2.11 2.03 1.98 1.94 1.89 1.84 1.79 1.73

25 4.24 3.39 2.99 2.76 2.60 2.49 2.40 2.34 2.28 2.24 2.16 2.09 2.01 1.96 1.92 1.87 1.82 1.77 1.71

26 4.23 3.37 2.98 2.74 2.59 2.47 2.39 2.32 2.27 2.22 2.15 2.07 1.99 1.95 1.90 1.83 1.80 1.75 1.69

27 4.21 3.35 2.96 2.73 2.57 2.46 2.37 2.31 2.25 2.20 2.13 2.06 1.97 1.93 1.88 1.84 1.79 1.73 1.67

28 4.20 3.34 2.93 2.71 2.56 2.13 2.36 2.29 2.24 2.19 2.12 2.04 1.96 1.91 1.87 1.82 1.77 1.71 1.65

29 4.18 3.33 2.93 2.70 2.55 2.43 2.25 2.28 2.22 2.18 2.10 2.03 1.94 1.90 1.85 1.81 1.75 1.70 1.64

30 4.17 3.32 2.92 2.69 2.53 2.42 2.33 2.27 2.21 2.16 2.09 2.01 1.93 1.89 1.84 1.79 1.74 1.68 1.62

40 4.08 3.23 2.84 2.61 2.45 2.34 2.25 2.18 2.12 2.08 2.00 1.92 1.84 1.79 1.74 1.69 1.64 1.58 1.31

60 4.00 3.15 2.76 2.53 2.37 2.25 2.17 2.10 2.03 1.99 1.92 1.84 1.75 1.70 1.65 1.59 1.53 1.47 1.39

120 3.92 3.07 2.68 2.45 2.29 2.17 2.09 2.02 1.96 1.91 1.83 1.75 1.66 1.61 1.55 1.30 1.43 1.35 1.25

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 438

∞ 3.84 3.00 2.60 2.37 2.21 2.10 2.01 1.94 1.88 1.83 1.75 1.67 1.57 1.52 1.46 1.39 1.32 1.22 1.00

Upper 2.5% Points

v 1

v 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 24 30 40 60 120 ∞

1 647.8 799.5 864.2 899.6 921.8 937.1 948.2 95.67 96.33 968.6 976.7 984.9 993.1 997.2 10.01 10.06 10.10 10.14 1018

2 38.51 39.00 39.17 39.25 39.30 39.33 39.36 39.37 39.39 39.40 39.41 39.43 39.45 39.46 39.46 39.47 39.48 39.49 39.50

3 17.44 16.04 15.44 15.10 14.88 14.73 14.62 14.54 14.47 14.42 14.34 14.25 14.17 14.12 14.08 14.04 13.99 13.95 13.90

4 12.22 10.65 9.98 9.60 9.36 9.20 9.07 8.98 8.90 8.84 8.75 8.66 8.56 8.51 8.46 8.41 8.36 8.31 8.26

5 10.01 8.43 7.76 7.39 7.15 6.98 6.85 6.76 6.68 6.62 6.52 6.43 6.33 6.28 6.25 6.18 6.12 6.07 6.02

6 8.81 7.26 6.60 6.23 5.99 5.82 5.70 5.60 5.52 5.46 5.37 5.27 5.17 5.12 5.07 5.01 4.96 4.90 4.85

7 8.07 6.54 5.89 5.52 5.29 5.21 4.99 4.90 4.82 4.76 4.67 4.57 4.47 4.42 4.36 4.31 4.25 4.20 4.14

8 7.57 6.06 5.08 5.05 4.82 4.65 4.53 4.43 4.36 4.30 4.20 4.10 4.00 3.95 3.89 3.84 3.78 3.73 3.67

9 7.21 5.71 5.08 4.72 4.48 4.32 4.20 4.10 4.03 3.96 3.87 3.77 3.67 3.61 3.56 3.51 3.45 3.39 3.33

10 6.94 5.46 4.83 4.47 4.24 4.07 3.95 3.85 3.78 3.72 3.62 3.52 3.42 3.37 3.31 3.26 3.20 3.14 3.08

11 6.72 5.26 4.63 4.28 4.04 3.88 3.76 3.66 3.59 3.53 3.43 3.33 3.23 3.17 3.12 3.06 3.00 2.94 2.88

12 6.55 5.10 4.47 4.12 3.89 3.73 3.61 3.51 3.44 3.37 3.28 3.18 3.07 3.02 2.96 2.91 2.85 2.79 2.72

13 6.41 4.97 4.35 4.00 3.77 3.60 3.48 3.39 3.31 3.25 3.15 3.05 2.95 2.89 2.84 2.78 2.72 2.66 2.60

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 439

STATISTICAL TABLES

431

14 6.30 4.86 4.24 3.89 3.66 3.50 3.38 3.29 3.21 3.15 3.05 2.95 2.84 2.79 2.73 2.67 2.61 2.55 2.49

15 6.20 4.77 4.15 3.80 3.58 3.41 3.29 3.20 3.12 3.06 2.96 2.86 2.76 2.70 2.64 2.59 2.52 2.46 2.40

16 6.12 4.69 4.08 3.73 3.50 3.34 3.22 3.12 3.05 2.99 2.89 2.79 2.68 2.63 2.57 2.51 2.45 2.38 2.32

17 6.04 4.62 4.01 3.66 3.44 3.28 3.16 3.06 2.98 2.92 2.82 2.72 2.62 2.56 2.50 2.44 2.38 2.32 2.25

18 5.98 4.56 3.95 3.61 3.38 3.22 3.10 3.01 2.93 2.87 2.77 2.67 2.56 2.50 2.44 2.38 2.32 2.26 2.19

19 5.92 4.51 3.90 3.56 3.33 3.17 3.05 2.96 2.88 2.82 2.72 2.62 2.51 2.45 2.39 2.33 2.27 2.20 2.13

20 5.87 4.46 3.86 3.51 3.29 3.13 3.01 2.91 2.84 2.77 2.68 2.57 2.46 2.41 2.35 2.29 1.11 2.16 2.19

21 5.83 4.42 3.82 3.48 3.25 3.09 2.97 2.87 2.80 2.73 2.64 2.53 2.42 2.37 2.31 2.25 2.18 2.11 2.04

22 5.79 4.38 3.78 3.44 3.22 3.05 2.93 2.84 2.76 2.70 2.60 2.50 2.39 2.33 2.27 2.21 2.14 2.08 2.00

23 5.75 4.35 3.75 3.41 3.18 3.02 2.90 2.81 2.73 2.67 2.57 2.47 2.36 2.30 2.24 2.18 2.11 2.04 1.97

24 5.72 4.32 3.72 3.38 3.15 2.99 2.87 2.78 2.70 2.64 2.54 2.44 2.33 2.27 2.21 2.15 2.08 2.01 1.94

25 5.69 4.29 3.69 3.35 3.13 2.97 2.85 2.75 2.68 2.61 2.51 2.41 2.30 2.24 2.18 2.12 2.05 1.98 1.91

26 5.66 4.27 3.67 3.33 3.10 2.94 2.82 2.73 2.65 2.59 2.49 2.39 2.28 2.22 2.16 2.09 2.03 1.95 1.88

27 5.63 4.24 3.65 3.11 3.08 2.92 2.80 2.71 2.63 2.57 2.47 2.36 2.25 2.19 2.13 2.07 2.00 1.93 1.85

28 5.61 4.22 3.63 3.29 3.06 2.90 2.78 2.69 2.61 2.55 2.46 2.34 2.23 2.17 2.11 2.05 1.98 1.91 1.83

29 5.59 4.20 3.61 3.27 3.04 2.88 2.76 2.67 2.59 2.53 2.43 2.32 2.21 2.15 2.09 2.03 1.96 1.89 1.81

30 5.57 4.18 3.59 3.25 3.03 2.87 2.75 2.65 2.57 2.51 2.41 2.31 2.20 2.14 2.07 2.01 1.94 1.87 1.79

40 5.42 4.05 3.46 3.13 2.90 2.74 2.62 2.53 2.45 2.39 2.29 2.18 2.07 2.01 1.94 1.88 1.80 1.72 1.64

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 440

60 5.29 3.93 3.34 3.01 2.79 2.63 2.51 2.41 2.33 2.27 2.17 2.06 1.94 1.88 1.82 1.74 1.67 1.58 1.48

120 5.15 3.80 3.23 2.89 2.67 2.52 2.39 2.30 2.22 2.16 2.05 1.94 1.82 1.76 1.69 1.61 1.53 1.43 1.31

∞ 5.02 3.69 3.12 2.79 2.57 2.41 2.29 2.19 2.11 2.05 1.94 1.83 1.71 1.64 1.57 1.48 1.39 1.27 1.00

Upper 1% Points

v 1

v 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 12 15 20 24 30 40 60 120 ∞

1 4052 4999.5 5403 5625 5764 5859 5928 5982 6022 6056 6106 6157 6209 6235 6261 6287 6313 6339 6366

2 98.50 99.00 99.17 99.25 99.30 99.33 99.36 99.37 99.39 99.40 99.42 99.43 99.45 99.46 99.47 99.47 99.48 99.49 99.50

3 34.12 30.82 29.46 28.17 28.24 27.91 27.67 27.49 27.35 22.23 27.05 26.87 26.69 26.60 26.50 26.41 26.32 26.22 26.13

4 21.20 18.00 16.69 15.98 15.52 15.21 14.98 14.80 14.66 14.55 14.37 14.20 14.02 13.93 13.84 13.75 13.65 13.56 13.46

5 16.26 13.27 12.06 11.39 10.97 10.67 10.16 10.29 10.16 11.05 9.89 9.72 9.05 9.47 9.38 9.29 9.20 9.11 9.06

6 13.75 10.92 9.78 9.15 8.75 8.47 8.26 8.10 7.98 7.87 7.72 7.56 7.40 7.31 7.23 7.14 7.06 6.97 6.88

7 12.25 9.55 8.45 7.85 7.46 7.19 6.99 6.84 6.72 6.62 6.47 6.31 6.61 6.07 5.99 5.91 5.82 5.74 5.65

8 11.26 8.65 7.59 7.01 6.63 6.37 6.18 6.03 5.91 5.81 5.67 5.52 5.36 5.28 5.20 5.12 5.03 4.95 4.86

9 10.56 8.02 6.99 6.42 6.06 5.80 5.61 5.47 5.35 5.26 5.11 4.96 4.81 4.73 4.65 4.57 4.48 4.40 4.31

10 10.04 7.56 6.55 5.99 5.64 5.39 5.20 5.06 4.94 4.85 4.71 4.56 4.41 4.33 4.25 4.17 4.08 4.00 3.91

11 9.65 7.21 6.22 5.67 5.32 5.07 4.89 4.74 4.63 4.54 4.40 4.25 4.10 4.02 3.94 3.86 3.78 3.69 3.60

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 441

STATISTICAL TABLES

433

12 9.33 6.93 5.95 5.41 5.06 4.82 4.64 4.50 4.39 4.30 4.16 4.01 3.86 3.78 3.70 3.62 3.54 3.45 336

13 9.07 6.70 5.74 5.21 4.86 4.62 4.44 4.30 4.19 4.10 3.96 3.82 3.66 3.59 3.51 3.43 3.34 3.25 3.17

14 8.86 6.51 5.56 5.04 4.69 4.46 4.28 4.14 4.03 3.94 1.80 3.66 3.51 3.43 3.35 3.27 3.18 3.09 3.00

15 8.68 6.36 5.42 4.89 4.56 4.32 4.14 4.00 3.89 3.80 3.67 3.52 3.37 3.29 1.21 3.13 3.05 2.96 2.87

16 8.53 6.23 5.29 4.77 4.44 4.20 4.03 3.89 3.78 3.69 3.55 3.41 3.26 3.18 3.10 3.02 2.93 2.84 2.75

17 8.40 6.11 5.18 4.67 4.34 4.10 3.93 3.79 3.68 3.59 3.46 3.31 3.16 3.08 3.00 2.92 2.83 2.75 2.65

18 8.29 6.01 5.09 4.58 4.25 4.01 3.84 3.71 3.60 3.51 3.37 3.23 3.08 3.00 2.92 2.84 2.75 2.66 2.57

19 8.18 5.93 5.01 4.50 4.17 3.94 3.77 3.63 3.52 3.43 3.30 3.15 3.00 2.92 2.84 2.76 2.67 2.58 2.49

20 8.10 5.85 4.94 4.43 4.10 3.87 3.70 3.56 3.46 3.37 3.23 3.09 2.94 2.86 2.78 2.69 2.61 2.52 2.42

21 8.02 5.78 4.87 4.37 4.04 3.81 3.64 3.51 3.40 3.31 3.17 3.03 2.88 2.80 2.72 2.64 2.55 2.46 2.36

22 7.95 5.72 4.82 4.31 3.99 3.76 3.59 3.45 3.35 3.26 3.12 2.98 2.83 2.75 2.67 2.58 2.50 2.40 2.31

23 7.88 5.66 4.76 4.26 3.94 3.71 3.54 3.41 3.30 3.21 3.07 2.93 2.78 2.70 2.62 2.54 2.45 2.35 2.26

24 7.82 5.61 4.72 4.22 3.90 3.67 3.50 3.36 3.26 3.17 3.03 2.89 2.74 2.66 2.58 2.49 2.40 2.31 2.21

25 7.77 5.57 4.68 4.18 3.85 3.63 3.46 3.32 1.22 3.13 2.99 2.85 2.70 2.62 2.54 2.45 2.36 2.27 2.17

26 7.72 5.53 4.64 4.60 3.82 3.59 3.42 3.29 3.18 3.09 2.96 2.81 2.66 2.58 2.50 2.42 2.33 2.23 2.13

27 7.68 5.49 4.60 4.11 3.78 3.56 3.39 3.26 3.15 3.06 2.93 2.78 2.63 2.55 2.47 2.38 2.29 2.20 2.10

28 7.64 5.45 4.57 4.07 3.75 3.53 3.36 3.23 3.12 3.03 2.90 2.75 2.60 2.52 2.44 2.35 2.26 2.17 2.06

29 7.60 5.42 4.54 4.04 3.73 3.50 3.33 3.20 3.09 3.00 2.87 2.73 2.57 2.49 2.41 2.33 2.23 2.14 2.03

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 442

30 7.56 5.39 4.51 4.02 3.70 3.47 3.30 3.17 3.07 2.98 2.84 2.70 2.55 2.47 2.39 2.30 2.21 2.11 2.01

40 7.31 5.18 4.31 3.83 3.51 3.29 3.12 2.99 2.89 2.80 2.66 2.52 2.37 2.29 2.20 2.11 2.02 1.92 1.80

60 7.08 4.98 4.13 3.65 3.34 3.12 2.95 2.82 2,72 2.63 2.50 2.35 2.20 2.12 2.03 1.94 1.84 1.73 1.60

120 6.85 4.79 3.95 3.48 3.17 2.96 2.79 2.66 2.56 2.47 2.34 2.19 2.03 1.95 1.86 1.76 1.66 1.53 1.38

∞ 6.63 4.61 3.78 3.32 3.02 2.80 2.64 2.51 2.41 2.32 2.18 2.04 1.88 1.79 1.70 1.59 1.47 1.32 1.00

This table is condensed from Table 1 of the Biometrika Tables for Statisticians, Vol 1 (1st edn), edited by E.S. Pearson adn H.O Hartley: Reproduced with kind permission of E.S.

Pearson and the trustees of Biometrika

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 443

435

Appendix

C Bibliography

References

© Abbott, C. C. (1966) Basic Research in Finance: Needs and Prospects. Charlottesville, VA: Univer- sity Press.

© Abdel-khalik, A. R. & Ajinkya, B. B. (1979) Empirical Research in Accounting: A Methodological Viewpoint. Sarasota, FL: American Accounting Association.

© Agar, M. (1996) The Professional Stranger: An Informal Introduction to Ethnography, 2nd ed. New York: Academic Press.

© Amabile, T. M., Hill, K. G., Hennessey, B. A. & Tighe, E. M. (1994) The work preference inventory: Assessing intrinsic and extrinsic motivational orientations. Journal of Personality and Social

Psychology, 66, 950−967. © American Psychological Association (2009) Publication Manual of the American Psychological

Association, 6th ed. Washington, DC. © Angell, R. C. & Freedman, R. (1966) The use of documents, records, census materials, and

indices. In L. Festinger & D. Katz (Eds.), Research Methods in the Behavioral Sciences. New York:

Holt, Rinehart and Winston. © Baker, R. L. & Schutz, R. E. (Eds.) (1972) Instructional Product Research. New York: Van Nostrand. © Balsley, H. L. & Clover, V. T. (1988) Research for Business Decisions. Business research methods,

4th ed. Columbus, OH: Publishing Horizons. © Baron, R. M. & Kenny, D. A. (1986) The moderator-mediator variable distinction in social psy-

chological research: conceptual, strategic, and statistical considerations. Journal of Personality

and Social Psychology, 51, 1173−1182. © Barry, H. (1969) Cross-cultural research with matched pairs of societies. Journal of Social Psy-

chology, 79, 25−33. © Bending, A. W. (1954) Transmitted information and the length of rating scales. Journal of Exper-

imental Psychology, 47, 303−308. © Bentley, T. J. & Forkner, I. H. (1983) Making Information Systems Work for You: How to Make

Better Decisions using Computer-generated Information. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. © Bernard, R. H. (1994) Research Methods in Anthropology: Qualitative and Quantitative Approaches,

2nd ed. Walnut Creek, CA: AltaMira Press. © Beynon, H. (1975) Working for Ford. London: EP Publishing. © Billings, R. S. & Wroten, S. P. (1978) Use of path analysis in industrial/organizational psychology:

Criticisms and suggestions. Journal of Applied Psychology, 63(6), 677−688. © Bitner, M. J., Booms, B. H. & Tetreault, M. S. (1990) The service encounter−diagnosing favorable

and unfavorable incidents. Journal of Marketing, 54, 71−84. © Blank, G. (1989). Finding the right statistic with statistical navigator. PC Magazine, March 14, p.

97. © Boot, J. C. G. & Cox, E. B. (1970) Statistical Analysis for Managerial Decisions. New York: McGraw-

Hill. © Bordens, K. S. & Abbott, B. B. (1988) Research Design and Methods: A Process Approach. Mountain

View, CA: Mayfield Publishing. © Bougie, R., Pieters, R. & Zeelenberg, M. (2003) Angry customers don’t come back, they get back:

The experience and behavioral implications of anger and dissatisfaction in services. Journal of

the Academy of Marketing Science, 31, 377−393. © Box, G. & Jenkins, G. (1970) Time Series Analysis: Forecasting and Control. San Francisco: Holden-

Day. © Brown, L. D. & Vasarhelyi, M. A. (1985) Accounting Research Directory: The Database of Account-

ing Literature. New York: Markus Wiener Publishing. © Bruner II, G. C., Hensel, P. J. & James, K. E. (2005) Marketing Scales Handbook. Chicago: Thomson

South-Western Co.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 444

Research Methods for Business

436

© Bullock, J. G., Green, D. P. & Ha, S. E. (2010) Yes, but what’s the mechanism? (Don’t expect an easy answer). Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 98 (April), 550−558.

© Burgess, R (Ed.) (1989) The Ethics of Educational Research. Lewes: Falmer Press. © Burton, S. & Lichtenstein, D. R. (1988) The effect of ad claims and ad context on attitude toward

the advertisement. Journal of Advertising, 17, 3−11. © Cacioppo, J. T. & Petty, R. E. (1982) The need for cognition. Journal of Personality and Social

Psychology, 42, 116−131. © Campbell, A. A. & Katona, G. (1966) The sample survey: A technique for social science research.

In L. Festinger & D. Katz (Eds.), Research Methods in the Behavioral Sciences. New York: Holt,

Rinehart and Winston. © Campbell, D. T. (1976) Psychometric theory. In M. D. Dunnette (Ed.), Handbook of Industrial

and Organizational Psychology. Chicago: Rand McNally. © Campbell, D. T. & Fiske, D. W. (1959) Convergent and discriminant validation by the multitrait-

multimethod matrix. Psychological Bulletin, 56, 81−105. © Campbell, D. T. & Stanley, J. C. (1966) Experimental and Quasi-experimental Designs for Research.

Chicago: Rand McNally. © Cannell, C. F. & Kahn, R. L. (1966) The collection of data by interviewing. In L. Festinger & D.

Katz (Eds.), Research Methods in the Behavioral Sciences. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. © Carlsmith, M., Ellsworth, P. C. & Aronson, E. (1976) Methods of Research in Social Psychology.

Reading, MA: Addison-Wesley. © Cattell, R. B. (1966) The screen test for the number of factors. Multivariate Behavioral Research,

1, 245−276. © Chein, L. (1959) An introduction to sampling. In C. Selltiz, M. Jahoda, M. Deutsch, & S. W. Cook

(Eds.), Research Methods in Social Relations. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. © Chicago Manual of Style, 16th ed. (2010) Chicago: University of Chicago Press. © Churchill, G. A. (1987) Marketing Research: Methodological Foundations. Chicago: Dryden Press. © Clark, D. & Bank, D. (1998) Microsoft and Sony agree to work together to link consumer-

electronic devices. Wall Street Journal, April 8, p. B6. © Cohen, J. (1969) Statistical Power Analysis for the Behavioral Sciences. New York: Academic Press. © Cohen, J. (1990) Things I have learned (so far). American Psychologist, 1304−1312. © Cook, T. D. & Campbell, D. T. (1979a) Quasi-experimentation: Design and Analysis Issues for

Field Settings. Boston: Houghton-Mifflin. © Cook, T. D. & Campbell, D. T. (1979b) Four kinds of validity. In R. T. Mowday & R. M. Steers (Eds.),

Research in Organizations: Issues and Controversies. Santa Monica, CA: Goodyear Publishing. © Cooke, A. (2001) A Guide to Finding Quality Information on the Internet: Selection and Evaluation

Strategies, 2nd ed. London: Library Association. © Coombs, C. H. (1966) Theory and methods of social measurement. In L. Festinger & D. Katz

(Eds.), Research Methods in the Behavioral Sciences. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. © Cortada, J. W. (1996) Information Technology as Business History: Issues in the History and

Management of Computers. Westport, CT: Greenwood Press. © Coulter, M. K. (2002) Strategic Management in Action. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. © Cronbach, L. J. (1946) Response sets and test validating. Educational and Psychological Meas-

urement, 6, 475−494. © Cronbach, L. J. (1990) Essentials of Psychological Testing, 5th ed. New York: Harper & Row. © Cronin, M. J. (1998a) Business secrets of the billion-dollar website. Fortune, February 2, p. 142. © Cronin, M. J. (1998b) Ford’s Intranet success. Fortune, March 30, p. 158. © Crosby, L. A. & Stephens N. (1987) Effects of relationship marketing on satisfaction, retention,

and prices in the life insurance industry. Journal of Marketing Research, 24, 404−411. © Crowne, D. P. & Marlowe, D. (1980) The Approval Motive: Studies in Evaluative Dependence.

Westport, CT: Greenwood Press. © Cummings, L. L. (1977) Emergence of the instrumental organization. In P. S. Goodman & J. M.

Pennings (Eds.), New Perspectives on Organizational Effectiveness. San Francisco, CA: Jossey-

Bass, pp. 56−62. © Davies, G. R. & Yoder, D. (1937) Business Statistics. New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. © Davis, D. & Cosenza, R. M. (1988) Business Research for Decision Making, 2nd ed. Boston: PWS-

Kent Publishing.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 445

Bibliography

437

© DeArmond, S., Tye, M., Chen, P. Y., Krauss, A., Rogers, D. A. & Sintek, E. (2006) Age and gender stereotypes: New challenges in a changing workplace and workforce. Journal of Applied Social

Psychology, 36, 2184−2214. © DeJong, M. (2006) Response bias in international marketing research, Doctoral Dissertation,

Tilburg University. © Delamont, S. (2004) Ethnography and participant observation. In C. Seale, G. Gobo & J. Gubrium

(Eds.) Qualitative Research Practices, pp. 217−229. London: Sage. © DeMunck, V. C. & Sobo, E. J. (Eds.) (1998) Using Methods in the Field: A Practical Introduction

and Casebook. Walnut Creek, CA: AltaMira Press. © Denzin, N. K. (2000) The practices and politics of interpretation. In N. K. Denzin & Y. S. Lincoln

(Eds.), Handbook of Qualitative Research, 2nd ed. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage. © DeWalt, K. M. & DeWalt, B. R. (2002) Participant Observation: A Guide for Fieldworkers. Walnut

Creek, CA: AltaMira Press. © Drenkow, G. (1987) Data acquisition software that adapts to your needs. Research and Develop-

ment, April, 84−87. © Dubé, L. & Maute, M. (1996) The antecedents of brand switching, brand loyalty and verbal

responses to service failure. Advances in Services Marketing and Management, 5, 127−151. © Dubé-Rioux, L., Schmitt, B. H. & LeClerc, F. (1988) Consumers’ reactions to waiting: When delays

affect the perception of service quality. In T. Snull (Ed.), Advances in Consumer Research, Volume

16(1). © Edwards, A. L. (1957) Manual for the Edwards Personal Preference Schedule. New York: Psycho-

logical Corporation. © Elmore, P. E. & Beggs, D. L. (1975) Salience of concepts and commitment to extreme judgements

in response pattern of teachers. Education, 95(4), 325−334. © Emerson, R., Fretz, R. & Shaw, L. (1995) Writing Ethnographic Fieldnotes. Chicago: University of

Chicago Press. © Emory, C. W. (1985) Business Research Methods, 3rd ed. Homewood, IL: Richard D. Irwin. © Etzioni, A. (1960) Interpersonal and structural factors in the study of mental hospitals. Psychi-

atry, 23, 13−22. © Express Computer (1998) Data mining captures the imagination, March 2, p. 19. © Express Computer (1998) Beyond microprocessors, May 11, p. 22. © Ferris, K. R. (1988) Behavioral Accounting Research: A Critical Analysis. Columbus, OH: Century

VII Publishing. © Festinger, L. (1966) Laboratory experiments. In L. Festinger & D. Katz (Eds.), Research Methods

in the Behavioral Sciences. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. © Festinger, L. & Katz, D. (1966) Research Methods in the Behavioral Sciences. New York: Holt,

Rinehart and Winston. © Fiedler, F. (1967) A Theory of Leadership Effectiveness. New York: McGraw-Hill. © Fink, A. (2003) The Survey Kit, 2nd ed. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage. © Fishbein, M. (1967) Readings in Attitude Theory and Measurement. New York: John Wiley. © Folkes, V. S., Koletsky, S. & Graham, J. L. (1987) A field study of causal inferences and consumer

reaction: The view from the airport. Journal of Consumer Research, 13, 534−539. © Fornell, C. (1987) A second generation of multivariate analysis: Classification of methods and

implications for marketing research. In M. Houston (Ed.), Review of Marketing. Chicago, IL:

American Marketing Association. © Fornell, C. & Bookstein, F. L. (1982) Two structural equation models: LISREL and PLS applied to

consumer exit-voice theory. Journal of Marketing Research, 19, 440−452. © Frederichs, J. & Ludtke, H. (1975) Participant Observation: Theory and Practice. Lexington, MA:

Lexington Books. © French, J. R. P. (1966) Experiments in field settings. In L. Festinger & D. Katz (Eds.), Research

Methods in the Behavioral Sciences. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. © Garten, J. E. (1998) Why the global economy is here to stay. Business Week, March 23, p. 21. © Gaski, J. F. & Etzel, M. J. (1986) The index of consumer sentiment toward marketing. Journal of

Marketing, 50, 71−81. © Georgopolous, B. S. & Tannenbaum, A. S. (1957) The study of organizational effectiveness.

American Sociological Review, 22, 534−540.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 446

Research Methods for Business

438

© Glaser, B. (1978) Theoretical Sensitivity. Mill Valley, CA: Sociology Press. © Glaser, B. G. & Strauss, A. L. (1967) The Discovery of Grounded Theory. Chicago: Aldine. © Gordon, R. A. (1973) An explicit estimation of the prevalence of commitment to a training school,

to age 18, by race and by sex. Journal of the American Statistical Association, 68, 547−553. © Gorsuch, R. L. (1974) Factor Analysis. Philadelphia: Saunders. © Gorsuch, R. L. (1983) Factor Analysis, 2nd ed. Philadelphia: Saunders. © Green, P. E., Kedia, P. K. & Nikhil, R. S. (1985) Electronic Questionnaire Design and Analysis with

CAPPA. Palo Alto, CA: The Scientific Press. © Grove, S. J. & Fisk, R. P. (1992) Observational data collection methods for services marketing: An

overview. Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, 20(3), 217−224. © Hair, J. F., Jr., Anderson, R. E., Tatham, R. L. & Black, W. C. (1995) Multi-variate Data Analysis.

Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. © Harnett, D. L. & Horrell, J. F. (1998) Data, Statistics, and Decision Models with Excel. New York:

John Wiley & Sons, Inc. © Hart, C. (1998) Doing a Literature Review. London: Sage. © Heggestad, E. D. & Kanfer, R. (1999) Individual differences in trait motivation: Development of

the motivational trait questionnaire. Poster presented at the Annual Meetings of the Society of

Industrial and Organizational Psychology, Atlanta, Georgia, April. © Hoel, P. G. & Jessen, R. J. (1971) Basic Statistics for Business and Economics. New York: John Wiley. © Horst, P. (1968) Personality: Measurement of Dimensions. San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. © Hume, L. & Mulcock J. (Eds) (1994) Anthropologists in the Field: Cases in Participant Observation.

New York: Columbia University Press. © Hunt, S. D. (1983) Marketing Theory: The Philosophy of Marketing Science. Homewood, IL:

Richard D. Irwin. © IJzermans, M. G. & Van Schaaijk, G. A. F. M. (2007) Oefening baart kunst. Onderzoeken, argu-

menteren en presenteren voor juristen. Den Haag: Boom Juridische uitgevers. © Izard, C. E. (1977) Human Emotions. New York: Plenum. © Jarvis, C. B., MacKenzie, S. B. & Podsakoff, P. M. (2003) A critical review of construct indicators

and measurement model misspecification in marketing and consumer research. Journal of

Consumer Research, 30(2), 199−218. © Jorgensen, D. L. (1989) Participant Observation: Methodology for Human Studies. Newbury, CA:

Sage. © Kanuk, L. & Berenson, C. (1975) Mail surveys and response rates: A literature review. Journal of

Marketing Research, 12, 440−453. © Kaplan, A. (1979) The Conduct of Inquiry: Methodology for Behavioral Science. New York: Harper

& Row. © Kassarjian, H. H. (1977) Content-analysis in consumer research. Journal of Consumer Research,

4, 8−18. © Katz, D. (1966) Research Methods in the Behavioral Sciences. New York: Holt, Rinehart and

Winston. © Katz, D. & Kahn, R. L. (1966) Organizations and the System Concept: The Social Psychology

of Organizations. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. Reprinted in Shafritz, J. & Ott, J. S. (2001) Classics of

Organization Theory. Fort Worth: Harcourt College Publishers. © Keaveney, S. M. (1995) Customer Switching Behavior in Service Industries − an Exploratory

Study. Journal of Marketing, 59, 71−82. © Kelley, S. W., Hoffman, K. D. & Davis, M. A. (1993) A typology of retail failures and recoveries.

Journal of Retailing, 69, 429−452. © Kelly, F. J., Beggs, D. L., McNeil, K. A., Eichelberger, T. & Lyon, J. (1969) Research Design in the

Behavioral Sciences: Multiple Regression Approach. Carbondale, IL: Southern Illinois University

Press. © Kerlinger, R. N. (1986) Foundations of Behavioral Research, 3rd ed. New York: Holt, Rinehart and

Winston. © Kidder, L. H. & Judd, C. H. (1986) Research Methods in Social Relations. New York: Holt, Rinehart

and Winston. © Kilmer, B. & Harnett, D. L. (1998) KADDSTAT: Statistical Analysis Plug-in to Microsoft Excel. New

York: John Wiley.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 447

Bibliography

439

© Kirby, C. (2001) Snail mail’s loss could be e-mail’s gain. San Francisco Chronicle, October 23, p. B1.

© Kirk, R. E. (1982) Experimental Design: Procedures for the Behavioral Sciences. Belmont, CA: Brooks/Cole.

© Kish, L. (1965) Survey Sampling. New York: John Wiley. © Kish, L. (1966) Selection of the sample. In L. Festinger & D. Katz (Eds.), Research Methods in the

Behavioral Sciences. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. © Knechel, W. R. (1986) A simulation study of the relative effectiveness of alternative analytical

review procedures. Decision Sciences, 17(3), 376−394. © Kolbe, R. H. & Burnett, M. S. (1991) Content analysis research: an examination of applications

with directives for improving research reliability and objectivity. Journal of Consumer Research,

18, 243−250. © Kornhauser, A. & Sheatsley, P. B. (1959) Questionnaire construction and interview procedure. In

C. Sellitz, M. Jahoda, M. Deutsch & S. W. Cook (Eds.), Research Methods in Social Relations. New

York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. © Krejcie, R. & Morgan, D. (1970) Determining sample size for research activities. Educational and

Psychological Measurement, 30, 607−610. © Kuder, G. F. & Richardson, M. W. (1937) The theory of the estimation of test reliability. Psycho-

metrika, 2, 151−160. © Kuppens, P., VanMechelen, I., Smits, D. J. M. & DeBoeck, P. (2003) The appraisal basis of anger:

Specificity, necessity, and sufficiency of components. Emotion, 3(3), 254−269. © Labaw, P. (1980) Advanced Questionnaire Design. Cambridge, MA: Abt Books. © Lauder, M. A. (2003) Covert participant observation of a deviant community: Justifying the use

of deception. Journal of Contemporary Religion, 18(2), 185−196. © Lazarsfeld, P. F. (1935) The art of asking why. National Marketing Research, 1, 26−38. © Leedy, P. D. (1985) Practical Research: Planning and Design, 3rd ed. New York: Macmillan Pub-

lishing. © Leshin, C. B. (1997) Management on the World Wide Web. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. © Likert, R. (1932) A technique for the measurement of attitudes. Archives of Psychology, No. 140. © Lombardo, M. L., McCall, M. & DeVries, D. L. (1983) Looking Glass. Glenview, IL: Scott Foresman,

Co. © Luconi, F. L., Malone, T. W. & Scott Morton, M. S. (1986) Expert systems: The next challenge for

managers. Sloan Management Review, 27(4), 3−14. © Luftman, J. N. (1996) Competing in the Information Age: Strategic Alignment in Practice. New

York: Oxford University Press. © Malinowski, B. (1992) Argonauts of the Western Pacific. New York: Dutton (First Published 1922). © Mangold, W. G., Miller, F. & Brockway, G. R. (1999) Word-of-mouth communication in the service

marketplace. Journal of Services Marketing, 13, 73−89. © Marascuilo, L. A. & McSweeney, M. (1977) Nonparametric and Distribution-free Methods for the

Social Sciences. Monterey, CA: Brooks/Cole. © Marcus, G. E. & Fischer, M. M. J. (1986) Anthropology as Cultural Critique. An Experimental

Moment in the Human Sciences. Chicago: University of Chicago Press. © Martin, M. H. (1998) Smart managing: Best practices, careers, and ideas. Fortune, February 2,

p. 149. © McClave, J. T. & Benson, P. G. (1988) Statistics for Business and Economics, 4th ed. San Francisco:

Dellen Publishing Co. © McClung, J., Grove S. J., & Hughes, M. A. (1989) An investigation of the impact and situation as

determinants of customers’ approach skills in retailing. In P. Bloom et al. (Eds.), Proceedings:

Summer Conference of the American Marketing Association. Chicago. 92. © McKellar, P. (1949) The emotion of anger in the expression of human aggressiveness. British

Journal of Psychology, 39, 148−155. © McNeil, K. A., Kelly, F. J. & McNeil, J. T. (1975) Testing Research Hypotheses using Multiple Linear

Regression. Carbondale, IL: Southern Illinois University Press. © Meltzer, M. E. (1981) Information: The Ultimate Management Resource. New York: Amacom. © Merriam, S. B. (1988). Case Study Research in Education: A Qualitative Approach. San Francisco:

Jossey-Bass Publishers.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 448

Research Methods for Business

440

© Merton, R. K. & Kendall, P. L. (1955) The focused interview. In P. F. Lazarsfeld & M. Rosenberg (Eds.), The Language of Social Research. New York: The Free Press.

© Mick, D. & Buhl, C. (1992) A meaning-based model of advertising experiences. Journal of Con- sumer Research, 19, 317−338.

© Miles, M. B. & Huberman, A. M. (1994) Qualitative Data Analysis, 2nd ed. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage.

© Miller, E. G., Kahn, B., & Luce M. F. (2008), Consumer wait management strategies for negative service events: A coping approach. Journal of Consumer Research, 34(5), 635−648.

© Minichiello, V., Aroni, R., Timewell, E. & Alexander, L. (1990) In-depth Interviewing: Researching People. Melbourne: Longman Cheshire.

© Mitchell, R. E. (1969) Survey materials collected in developing countries: Sampling, measure- ment, and interviewing obstacles to intra- and international comparisons. In J. Boddewyn (Ed.),

Comparative Management and Marketing, pp. 232−252. Glenview, IL: Scott, Foresman & Co. © Mittal, B. & Lassar, W. M. (1996) The role of personalization in service encounters. Journal of

Retailing, 72, 95−109. © Muehling, D. D. (1987) An investigation of factors underlying attitude toward advertising in

general. Journal of Advertising, 16(1), 32−40. © Murdick, P. G. & Cooper, D. R. (1982) Business Research: Concepts and Guides. Columbus, OH:

Grid Publishing. © Namboodiri, N. K., Carter, L. F. & Blalock, H. M. (1975) Applied Multivariate Analysis and

Experimental Designs. New York: McGraw-Hill. © Nasr-Bechwati, N. & Morrin, M. (2003) Outraged consumers: Getting even at the expense of

getting a good deal. Journal of Consumer Psychology, 13, 440−453. © Norusis, M. J. (1998) SPSS 8.0 Guide to Data Analysis. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. © Nyer, P. U. (1997) A study of the relationships between cognitive appraisals and consumption

emotions. Journal of the Academy of Marketing Science, 25, 296−304. © Oliver, R. L. (1996) Satisfaction: A Behavioral Perspective on the Consumer. New York: McGraw-

Hill. © O’Neil, D., Hopkins, M. M. & Bilimoria, D. (2008) Women’s careers at the start of the 21st century:

Patterns and paradoxes. Journal of Business Ethics, 80, 727−743. © Oppenheim, A. N. (1986) Questionnaire Design and Attitude Measurement. Gower Publishing. © Osborn, R. N. & Vicars, W. M. (1976) Sex stereotypes: An artifact in leader behavior and subor-

dinate satisfaction analysis? Academy of Management Journal, 19, 439−449. © Parrott, W. G. (2001) Emotions in Social Psychology: Essential Readings. Philadelphia: Psychology

Press. © Payne, S. L. (1951) The Art of Asking Questions. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press. © Peak, H. (1966) Problems of objective observation. In L. Festinger & D. Katz (Eds.), Research

Methods in the Behavioral Sciences. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. © Pedhazur, E. J. (1982) Multiple Regression in Behavioral Research: Explanation and Prediction,

2nd ed. New York: CBS College Publishing. © Pelosi, M. K., Sandifer, T. M. & Letkowski, J. J. (1998) Doing Statistics with ExcelTM 97: Software

Instruction and Exercise Activity Supplement. New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. © Perrier, C. & Kalwarski, G. (1989) Stimulating Simulations: Technique shows relationship between

risk, funding. Pensions and Investment Age, October 30, 41−43. © Pfeffer, J. (1977) The ambiguity of leadership. The Academy of Management Review, 2. © Popper, K. R. (2002a) The Logic of Scientific Discovery, London: Routledge. © Popper, K. R. (2002b) Conjectures and Refutations, London: Routledge. © Preacher, K. J., Rucker, D. D. & Hayes, A. F. (2007) Adressing moderated mediated hypotheses:

Theory, methods, and prescriptions. Multivariate Behavioral Research, 42, 185−227. © Price, J. (1997) Handbook of Organizational Measurement. International Journal of Manpower,

18(4/5/6), 301−558. © Price, J. L. & Mueller, C. W. (1986) Handbook of Organizational Measurement. Marshfield, MA:

Pitman. © Rao, C. R. (1973) Linear Statistical Inference and its Applications, 2nd ed. New York: John Wiley. © Resta, P. A. (1972) The Research Report. New York: American Book Co.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 449

Bibliography

441

© Richins, M. L. & Dawson, S. (1992) Consumer values orientation for materialism and its meas- urement: Scale development and validation. Journal of Consumer Research, 19, 303−316.

© Riley, M. W. & Nelson, E. E. (1974) Sociological Observation: A Strategy for New Social Knowledge. New York: Basic Books.

© Rizzo, J. R., House, R. J. & Lirtzman, S. L. (1970) Role conflict and role ambiguity in complex organizations. Administrative Science Quarterly, 15, 150−163.

© Rook, D. W. (1987) The buying impulse. Journal of Consumer Research, 14(2), 189−199. © Roscoe, J. T. (1975) Fundamental Research Statistics for the Behavioral Sciences, 2nd ed. New

York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. © Runkel, P. J. & McGrath, J. E. (1972) Research on Human Behavior: A Systematic Guide to Method.

New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. © Salvia, A. A. (1990) Introduction to Statistics. Philadelphia, PA: Saunders. © Schein, V. E. (2007) Women in management: Reflections and projections. Women in Manage-

ment Review, 22(1), 6−18. © Schensul, S. L., Schensul, J. J. & LeCompte, M. D. (1999) Essential Ethnographic Methods: Obser-

vations, Interviews, and Questionnaires (Book 2 in Ethnographer’s Toolkit). Walnut Creek, CA:

AltaMira Press. © Schmitt, N. W. & Klimoski, R. J. (1991) Research Methods in Human Resources Management.

Cincinnati, OH: South-Western Publishing. © Sekaran, U. (1983) Methodological and theoretical issues and advancements in cross-cultural

research. Journal of International Business, Fall, 61−73. © Sekaran, U. (1986) Dual-career Families: Contemporary Organizational and Counseling Issues.

San Francisco: Jossey-Bass. © Sekaran, U. & Martin, H. J. (1982) An examination of the psychometric properties of some

commonly researched individual differences, job, and organizational variables in two cultures.

Journal of International Business Studies, Spring/Summer, 51−66. © Sekaran, U. & Trafton, R. S. (1978) The dimensionality of jobs: Back to square one. Twenty-fourth

Midwest Academy of Management Proceedings, pp. 249−262. © Selltiz, C., Jahoda, M., Deutsch, M. & Cook, S. W. (1959) Research Methods in Social Relations,

rev. ed. New York: Holt, Rinehart, and Winston. © Selltiz, C., Wrightsman, L. S. & Cook, S. W. (1981) Research Methods in Social Relations, 4th ed.

New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. © Shapira, Z. (1995) Risk Taking: A Managerial Perspective. New York: Russell Sage Foundation. © Sharma, S., Durand, R. M. & Gur-Arie, O. (1981) Identification and analysis of moderator vari-

ables. Journal of Marketing Research, 18, 291−300. © Shrout, P. E. & Bolger, N. (2002) Mediation in experimental and nonexperimental studies: New

procedures and recommendations. Psychological Methods, 7(4), 422−445. © Shurter, R. L., Williamson, J. P. & Broehl, W. G., Jr. (1965) Business Research and Report Writing.

New York: McGraw-Hill. © Smith, C. A. & Ellsworth, P. C. (1987) Patterns of appraisals and emotions related to taking an

exam. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 52, 475−488. © Smith, C. B. (1981) A Guide to Business Research: Developing, Conducting, and Writing Research

Projects. Chicago, IL: Nelson-Hall. © Smith, P. C., Kendall, L. & Hulin, C. (1969) The Measurement of Satisfaction in Work and Retire-

ment. Chicago: Rand McNally. © Spradley, J. P. (1980) Participant Observation. New York: Holt, Rinehart and Winston. © Stern, B. B., Thompson, C. J. & Arnould, E. J. (1998) Narrative analysis of a marketing relationship:

The consumer’s perspective. Psychology and Marketing, 15(3), 195−214. © Stern, N. B. & Stern, R. A. (1996) Computing in the Information Age, 2nd ed. New York: John

Wiley & Sons, Inc. © Steufert, S., Pogash, R. & Piasecki, M. (1988) Simulation-based assessment of managerial com-

petence: Reliability and validity. Personnel Psychology, 41(3), 537−557. © Stone, E. (1978) Research Methods in Organizational Behavior. Santa Monica, CA: Goodyear

Publishing. © Strauss, A. & Corbin, J. (1990) Basics of Qualitative Research: Grounded Theory Procedures and

Techniques. Sage Publications.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 450

Research Methods for Business

442

© Super, D. E. (1970) Work Values Inventory Manual. Boston, MA: Houghton Mifflin Co. © Taylor, S. (1994) Waiting for service− the relationship between delays and evaluations of service.

Journal of Marketing, 58, 56−69. © Tomaski, E. A. (1970) The Computer Revolution: The Executive and the New Information Tech-

nology. New York: Macmillan. © Turabian, K. L. (2007) A Manual for Writers of Term Papers, Theses, and Dissertations, 7th ed.

Chicago: University of Chicago Press. © Turban, E., McLean, E. & Wetherbe, J. (1998) Informational Technology for Management: Making

Connections for Strategic Advantage. New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc. © University of Chicago (2010) The Chicago Manual of Style, 16th ed. Chicago: University of

Chicago Press. © Villa Rojas, A. (1979) Fieldwork in the Mayan region of Mexico. In G. Foster, T. Scudder, E.

Colson & R. Kemper (Eds.), Long-Term Field Research in Social Anthropology, pp. 45−64. New York: Academic Press.

© Ward, J. C. & Ostrom, A. L. (2006) Complaining to the masses: The role of protest framing in customer-created complaint web sites. Journal of Consumer Research, 33, 220−230.

© Webb, E. J., Campbell, D. T., Schwartz, P. D. & Sechrest, L. (1966) Unobtrusive Measures: Non- reactive Research in the Social Sciences. Chicago, IL: Rand McNally.

© Werner, O. & Schoepfle, M. G. (1987) Systematic Fieldwork. Volume 1: Foundations of Ethno- graphy and Interviewing. Newbury Park, CA: Sage Publications.

© Wetherbe, J. C. (1983) Computer-based Information Systems. Englewood Cliffs, NJ: Prentice Hall. © What is Plagiarism? (n.d.) Retrieved June 22, 2011, from http://www.plagiarism.org/learning_center/

what_is_plagiarism.html © White, J. K. & Ruh, R. A. (1973) Effects of personal values on the relationship between particip-

ation and job attitudes. Administrative Science Quarterly, 18(4), 506−514. © Wildstrom, S. H. (1998) Web sites made simpler. Business Week, January 26. © Williams, C. T. & Wolfe, G. K. (1979) Elements of Research: A Guide for Writers. Sherman Oaks,

CA: Alfred Publishing. © Wolcott, H. (2001) Writing Up Qualitative Research, 2nd ed. London: Sage. © Yin, R. (2009) Case Study Research: Design and Methods, 4th ed. Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage

Publications. © Yuchtman, E. & Seashore, S. E. (1967) A system resource approach to organizational effective-

ness. American Sociological Review, 32, 891−903. © Zahle, J. (2012) Practical knowledge and participant observation. Inquiry: An Interdisciplinary

Journal of Philosophy, 55, 50−65. © Zeithaml, V. A., Berry, L. L. & Parasuraman, A. (1996) The behavioral consequences of service

quality. Journal of Retailing, 60, 31−46. © Zetterberg, H. (1955) On axiomatic theories in sociology. In P. F. Lazarsfeld & M. Rosenberg

(Eds.), The Language of Social Research. New York: The Free Press.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 451

443

Glossary

ANOVA Stands for analysis of variance, which tests for significant mean differences in variables among multiple groups.

Action research A method of initiating change processes, with an incremental focus, for narrowing the gap between the desired and actual states.

Bias Any error that creeps into the data. Biases can be introduced by the researcher, the respondent, the measuring instrument, the sample, and so on.

Canonical correlation A statistical technique that examines the relationship between two or more dependent variables and several independent variables.

Categories The process of organizing, arranging, and classifying coding units (in qualitative data analysis).

Categorization The process of organizing, arranging, and classifying coding units (in qualitative data analysis).

Categorization The process of organizing, arranging, and classifying coding units (in qualitative data analysis).

Category reliability The extent to which judges are able to use category definitions to classify qualitative data.

Classification data Personal information or demographic details of the respond- ents such as age, marital status, and educational level.

Coding The analytic process through which the qualitative data that you have gathered are reduced, rearranged, and integrated to form theory (compare Data coding).

Conceptual analysis Establishes the existence and frequency of concepts (such as words, themes, or characters) in a text.

Concurrent validity Relates to criterion-related validity, which is established at the same time the test is administered.

Confidence The probability estimate of how much reliance can be placed on the findings; the usual accepted level of confidence in social science research is 95%.

Conjoint analysis A multivariate statistical technique used to determine the rel- ative importance respondents attach to attributes and the utilities they attach to specific levels of attributes.

Construct validity Testifies to how well the results obtained from the use of the measure fit the theories around which the test was designed.

Content analysis An observational research method that is used to systematically evaluate the symbolic contents of all forms of recorded communication.

Content validity Establishes the representative sampling of a whole set of items that measures a concept, and reflects how well the dimensions and elements thereof are delineated.

Convergent validity That which is established when the scores obtained by two different instruments measuring the same concept, or by measuring the concept by two different methods, are highly correlated.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 452

444

Convergent validity That which is established when the scores obtained by two different instruments measuring the same concept, or by measuring the concept by two different methods, are highly correlated.

Criterion-related validity That which is established when the measure differenti- ates individuals on a criterion that it is expected to predict.

Criterion-related validity That which is established when the measure differenti- ates individuals on a criterion that it is expected to predict.

Data coding In quantitative research data coding involves assigning a number to the participants’ responses so they can be entered into a database.

Data display Taking the reduced qualitative data and displaying them in an organ- ized, condensed manner.

Data display Taking the reduced qualitative data and displaying them in an organ- ized, condensed manner.

Data reduction Breaking down data into manageable pieces.

Data transformation The process of changing the original numerical representa- tion of a quantitative value to another value.

Delphi Technique A forecasting method that uses a cautiously selected panel of experts in a systematic, interactive manner.

Descriptive Statistics Statistics such as frequencies, the mean, and the standard deviation, which provide descriptive information about a set of data.

Discriminant analysis A statistical technique that helps to identify the independ- ent variables that discriminate a nominally scaled dependent variable of interest.

Discriminant validity That which is established when two variables are theorized to be uncorrelated, and the scores obtained by measuring them are indeed empir- ically found to be so.

Discriminant validity That which is established when two variables are theorized to be uncorrelated, and the scores obtained by measuring them are indeed empir- ically found to be so.

Efficiency in sampling Attained when the sampling design chosen either results in a cost reduction to the researcher or offers a greater degree of accuracy in terms of the sample size.

Ethics Code of conduct or expected societal norms of behavior.

Ethnography A research process in which the anthropologist closely observes, records, and engages in the daily life of another culture and then writes accounts of this culture, emphasizing descriptive detail.

Face validity An aspect of validity examining whether the item on the scale, on the face of it, reads as if it indeed measures what it is supposed to measure.

Factorial validity That which indicates, through the use of factor analytic tech- niques, whether a test is a pure measure of some specific factor or dimension.

Focus groups A group consisting of eight to ten members randomly chosen, who discuss a product or any given topic for about two hours with a moderator present, so that their opinions can serve as the basis for further research.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 453

445

Frequencies The number of times various subcategories of a phenomenon occur, from which the percentage and cumulative percentage of any occurrence can be calculated.

Generalizability The applicability of research findings in one setting to others.

Grounded theory A systematic set of procedures to develop an inductively derived theory from the data.

History effects A threat to the internal validity of the experimental results, when events unexpectedly occur while the experiment is in progress and contaminate the cause-and-effect relationship.

Inductive reasoning A process where we observe specific phenomena and on this basis arrive at general conclusions.

Inkblot tests A motivational research technique that uses colored patterns of inkblots to be interpreted by the subjects.

Instrumentation effects The threat to internal validity in experimental designs caused by changes in the measuring instrument between the pretest and the posttest.

Interjudge reliability The degree of consistency between coders processing the same (qualitative) data.

Likert scale An interval scale that specifically uses the five anchors of Strongly Disagree, Disagree, Neither Disagree nor Agree, Agree, and Strongly Agree.

Logistic regression A specific form of regression analysis in which the dependent variable is a nonmetric, dichotomous variable.

MANOVA A statistical technique that is similar to ANOVA, with the difference that ANOVA tests the mean differences of more than two groups on one dependent variable, whereas MANOVA tests mean differences among groups across several dependent variables simultaneously, by using sums of squares and cross-product matrices.

Manipulation How the researcher exposes the subjects to the independent vari- able to determine cause-and-effect relationships in experimental designs.

McNemar’s test A nonparametric method used on nominal data. It assesses the significance of the difference between two dependent samples when the variable of interest is dichotomous.

Multicollinearity A statistical phenomenon in which two or more independent variables in a multiple regression model are highly correlated.

Narrative analysis A qualitative approach that aims to elicit and scrutinize the stories we tell about ourselves and their implications for our lives.

Nonresponse error Exists to the extent that those who did respond to your survey are different from those who did not on (one of the) characteristics of interest in your study. Two important sources of non-response are not-at-homes and refusals.

Objectivity Interpretation of the results on the basis of the results of data analysis, as opposed to subjective or emotional interpretations.

Open-ended questions Questions that the respondent can answer in a free-flowing format without restricting the range of choices to a set of specific alternatives suggested by the researcher.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 454

446

Operations research A quantitative approach taken to analyze and solve problems of complexity.

Parsimony Efficient explanation of the variance in the dependent variable of interest through the use of a smaller, rather than a larger number of independent variables.

Precision The degree of closeness of the estimated sample characteristics to the population parameters, determined by the extent of the variability of the sampling distribution of the sample mean.

Precision The degree of closeness of the estimated sample characteristics to the population parameters, determined by the extent of the variability of the sampling distribution of the sample mean.

Predictive validity The ability of the measure to differentiate among individuals as to a criterion predicted for the future.

Primary data Data collected first-hand for subsequent analysis to find solutions to the problem researched.

Qualitative data Data that are not immediately quantifiable unless they are coded and categorized in some way.

Questionnaire A preformulated written set of questions to which the respondent records the answers, usually within rather closely delineated alternatives.

Quota sampling A form of purposive sampling in which a predetermined propor- tion of people from different subgroups is sampled.

Range The spread in a set of numbers indicated by the difference in the two extreme values in the observations.

Ranking scales Scale used to tap preferences between two or among more objects or items.

Rating scales Scale with several response categories that evaluate an object on a scale.

Relational analysis Builds on conceptual analysis by examining the relationships among concepts in a text.

Reliability Attests to the consistency and stability of the measuring instrument.

Replicability The extent to which a re-study is made possible by the provision of the design details of the study in the research report.

Research An organized, systematic, critical, scientific inquiry or investigation into a specific problem, undertaken with the objective of finding answers or solutions thereto.

Sample A subset or subgroup of the population.

Secondary data Data that already exist and do not have to be collected by the researcher.

Solomon four-group design The experimental design that sets up two experimental groups and two control groups, subjecting one experimental group and one con- trol group to both the pretest and the posttest, and the other experimental group and control group to only the posttest.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 455

447

Split-half reliability The correlation coefficient between one half of the items measuring a concept and the other half.

Standardized regression coefficients (or beta coefficients) The estimates resulting from a multiple regression analysis performed on variables that have been standard- ized (a process whereby the variables are transformed into variables with a mean of 0 and a standard deviation of 1).

Stratified random sampling A probability sampling design that first divides the population into meaningful, nonoverlapping subsets, and then randomly chooses the subjects from each subset.

Structured interviews Interviews conducted by the researcher with a predeter- mined list of questions to be asked of the interviewee.

Testability The ability to subject the data collected to appropriate statistical tests, in order to substantiate or reject the hypotheses developed for the research study.

Testing effects The distorting effects on the experimental results (the posttest scores) caused by the prior sensitization of the respondents to the instrument through the pretest.

Thematic apperception tests A projective test that requires the respondent to develop a story around a picture.

Two-way ANOVA A statistical technique that can be used to examine the effect of two nonmetric independent variables on a single metric dependent variable.

Uncontrolled observation An observational technique that makes no attempt to control, manipulate, or influence the situation.

Unit of analysis The level of aggregation of the data collected during data analysis.

Unobtrusive measures Measurement of variables through data gathered from sources other than people, such as examination of birth and death records or a count of the number of cigarette butts in the ashtray.

Unstructured interviews Interviews conducted with the primary purpose of identi- fying some important issues relevant to the problem situation, without prior preparation of a planned or predetermined sequence of questions.

Validity Evidence that the instrument, technique, or process used to measure a concept does indeed measure the intended concept.

Validity Evidence that the instrument, technique, or process used to measure a concept does indeed measure the intended concept.

Wilcoxon signed-rank test A nonparametric test used to examine differences between two related samples or repeated measurements on a single sample. It is used as an alternative to a paired samples t-test when the population cannot be assumed to be normally distributed.

Word association A projective method of identifying respondents’ attitudes and feelings by asking them to associate a specified word with the first thing that comes to their mind.

alternate hypothesis An educated conjecture that sets the parameters one expects to find. The alternate hypothesis is tested to see whether or not the null is to be rejected.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 456

448

ambiguous questions Questions that are not clearly worded and are likely to be interpreted by respondents in different ways.

applied research Research conducted in a particular setting with the specific objective of solving an existing problem in the situation.

area sampling Cluster sampling within a specified area or region; a probability sampling design.

bibliography A listing of books, articles, and other relevant materials, alphabetized according to the last name of the authors, referencing the titles of their works, and indicating where they can be located.

category scale A scale that uses multiple items to seek a single response.

causal study A research study conducted to establish cause-and-effect relation- ships among variables.

closed question Questions with a clearly delineated set of alternatives that confine the respondents’ choice to one of them.

cluster sampling A probability sampling design in which the sample comprises groups or chunks of elements with intragroup heterogeneity and intergroup homogeneity.

comparative scale A scale that provides a benchmark or point of reference to assess attitudes, opinions, and the like.

complex probability sampling Several probability sampling designs (such as sys- tematic and stratified random), which offer an alternative to the cumbersome, simple random sampling design.

computer-assisted telephone interviews (CATI) Interviews in which questions are prompted onto a PC monitor that is networked into the telephone system, to which respondents provide their answers.

confidence The probability estimate of how much reliance can be placed on the findings; the usual accepted level of confidence in social science research is 95%.

consensus scale A scale developed through consensus or the unanimous agree- ment of a panel of judges as to the items that measure a concept.

constructionism An approach to research that is based on the idea that the world as we know it is fundamentally mental or mentally constructed. Constructionists aim to understand the rules people use to make sense of the world by investigating what happens in people’s minds.

contrived settings An artificially created or “lab” environment in which research is conducted.

control group The group that is not exposed to any treatment in an experiment.

convenience sampling A nonprobability sampling design in which information or data for the research are gathered from members of the population conveniently accessible to the researcher.

critical realism A school of thought combining the belief in an external reality (an objective truth) with the rejection of the claim that this external reality can be objectively measured. The critical realist is critical of our ability to understand the world with certainty.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 457

449

cross-sectional studies A research study for which data are gathered just once (stretched though it may be over a period of days, weeks, or months) to answer the research question.

data coding In quantitative research data coding involves assigning a number to the participants’ responses so they can be entered into a database.

data mining Helps to trace patterns and relationships in the data stored in the data warehouse.

data warehouse A central repository of all information gathered by the company.

deductive reasoning The application of a general theory to a specific case.

dependent variable See Criterion variable.

dependent variables See Criterion variable.

descriptive study A research study that describes the variables in a situation of interest to the researcher.

dichotomous scale Scale used to elicit a Yes/No response, or an answer to two different aspects of a concept.

disproportionate stratified random sampling A probability sampling design that involves a procedure in which the number of sample subjects chosen from vari- ous strata is not directly proportionate to the total number of elements in the respective strata.

double sampling A probability sampling design that involves the process of col- lecting information from a set of subjects twice− such as using a sample to collect preliminary information, and later using a subsample of the primary sample for more information.

double-barreled question Refers to the improper framing of a question that should be posed as two or more separate questions, so that the respondent can give clear and unambiguous answers.

dummy variable A variable that has two or more distinct levels, which are coded 0 or 1.

dynamic panel Consists of a changing composition of members in a group who serve as the sample subjects for a research study conducted over an extended period of time.

element A single member of the population.

elements A single member of the population.

epistemology Theory about the nature of knowledge or how we come to know.

ex post facto experimental design Studying subjects who have already been exposed to a stimulus and comparing them to those not so exposed, so as to establish cause-and-effect relationships (in contrast to establishing cause-and-effect rela- tionships by manipulating an independent variable in a lab or a field setting).

ex post facto experimental designs Studying subjects who have already been exposed to a stimulus and comparing them to those not so exposed, so as to establish cause-and-effect relationships (in contrast to establishing cause-and-effect rela- tionships by manipulating an independent variable in a lab or a field setting).

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 458

450

experimental designs A study design in which the researcher might create an arti- ficial setting, control some variables, and manipulate the independent variable to establish cause-and-effect relationships.

exploratory study A research study where very little knowledge or information is available on the subject under investigation.

field experiment An experiment done to detect cause-and-effect relationships in the natural environment in which events normally occur.

field experiments An experiment done to detect cause-and-effect relationships in the natural environment in which events normally occur.

field experiments An experiment done to detect cause-and-effect relationships in the natural environment in which events normally occur.

field studies A study conducted in the natural setting with a minimal amount of researcher interference in the flow of events in the situation.

forced choice Elicits the ranking of objects relative to one another.

formative scale Used when a construct is viewed as an explanatory combination of its indicators.

funneling technique The questioning technique that consists of initially asking general and broad questions, and gradually narrowing the focus thereafter to more specific themes.

grounded theory A systematic set of procedures to develop an inductively derived theory from the data.

grounded theory A systematic set of procedures to develop an inductively derived theory from the data.

hypothesis A tentative, yet testable, statement that predicts what you expect to find in your empirical data.

hypothesis A tentative, yet testable, statement that predicts what you expect to find in your empirical data.

hypothetico-deductive method A seven-step research process of identifying a broad problem area, defining the problem statement, developing hypotheses, determining measures, data collection, data analysis, and the interpretation of data.

independent variable A variable that influences the dependent or criterion vari- able and accounts for (or explains) its variance.

internal consistency Homogeneity of the items in the measure that tap a con- struct.

interval scale A multipoint scale that taps the differences, the order, and the equal- ity of the magnitude of the differences in the responses.

judgment sampling A purposive, nonprobability sampling design in which the sample subject is chosen on the basis of the individual’s ability to provide the type of special information needed by the researcher.

lab experiments An experimental design set up in an artificially contrived setting where controls and manipulations are introduced to establish cause-and-effect relationships among variables of interest to the researcher.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 459

451

lab experiments An experimental design set up in an artificially contrived setting where controls and manipulations are introduced to establish cause-and-effect relationships among variables of interest to the researcher.

leading question Questions phrased in such a manner as to lead the respondent to give the answers that the researcher would like to obtain.

literature review A step-by-step process that involves the identification of pub- lished and unpublished work from secondary data sources on the topic of interest, the evaluation of this work in relation to the problem, and the documentation of this work.

loaded question Questions that elicit highly biased emotional responses from subjects.

longitudinal studies A research study for which data are gathered at several points in time to answer a research question.

maturation effects A threat to internal validity that is a function of the biological, psychological, and other processes taking place in the respondents as a result of the passage of time.

mean The average of a set of figures.

median The central item in a group of observations arranged in an ascending or descending order.

mediating variable A variable that surfaces as a function of the independent vari- able, and helps in conceptualizing and explaining the influence of the independ- ent variable on the dependent variable.

mode The most frequently occurring number in a data set.

moderating variable A variable on which the relationship between two other vari- ables is contingent. That is, if the moderating variable is present, the theorized relationship between the two variables will hold good, but not otherwise.

mortality The loss of research subjects during the course of the experiment, which confounds the cause-and-effect relationship.

multiple regression analysis A statistical technique to predict the variance in the dependent variable by regressing the independent variables against it.

multistage cluster sampling A probability sampling design that is a stratified sampling of clusters.

nominal scale A scale that categorizes individuals or objects into mutually exclus- ive and collectively exhaustive groups, and offers basic, categorical information on the variable of interest.

noncontrived settings Research conducted in the natural environment where activities take place in the normal manner (i.e., the field setting).

nonparticipant The researcher is never directly involved in the actions of the actors, but observes them from outside the actors’ visual horizon, for instance via a one-way mirror or a camera.

nonprobability sampling A sampling design in which the elements in the popu- lation do not have a known or predetermined chance of being selected as sample subjects.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 460

452

nonprobability sampling A sampling design in which the elements in the popu- lation do not have a known or predetermined chance of being selected as sample subjects.

null hypothesis The conjecture that postulates no differences or no relationship between or among variables.

numerical scale A scale with bipolar attributes with five points or seven points indicated on the scale.

one-shot See Cross-sectional study.

ontology The philosophical study of what can be said to exist.

ordinal scale A scale that not only categorizes the qualitative differences in the variable of interest, but also allows for the rank-ordering of these categories in a meaningful way.

paired comparison Respondents choose between two objects at a time, with the process repeated with a small number of objects.

panel study Studies conducted over a period of time to determine the effects of certain changes made in a situation, using a panel or group of subjects as the sample base.

parallel-form reliability That form of reliability which is established when responses to two comparable sets of measures tapping the same construct are highly cor- related.

population The entire group of people, events, or things that the researcher desires to investigate.

population The entire group of people, events, or things that the researcher desires to investigate.

positivism A school of thought employing deductive laws and quantitative meth- ods to get at the truth. For a positivist, the world operates by laws of cause and effect that one can discern if one uses a scientific approach to research.

posttest A test given to the subjects to measure the dependent variable after expos- ing them to a treatment.

pragmatism A viewpoint on research that does not take on a particular position on what makes good research. Pragmatists feel that research on both objective, observable phenomena and subjective meanings can produce useful knowledge, depending on the research questions of the study.

pretest A test given to subjects to measure the dependent variable before exposing them to a treatment.

primary data Data collected first-hand for subsequent analysis to find solutions to the problem researched.

probability sampling The sampling design in which the elements of the popula- tion have some known chance or probability of being selected as sample subjects.

proportionate stratified random sampling A probability sampling design in which the number of sample subjects drawn from each stratum is proportionate to the total number of elements in the respective strata.

pure research See Basic research.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 461

453

purposive sampling A nonprobability sampling design in which the required information is gathered from special or specific targets or groups of people on some rational basis.

questionnaire A preformulated written set of questions to which the respondent records the answers, usually within rather closely delineated alternatives.

randomization The process of controlling the nuisance variables by randomly assigning members among the various experimental and control groups, so that the confounding variables are randomly distributed across all groups.

ratio scale A scale that has an absolute zero origin, and hence indicates not only the magnitude, but also the proportion, of the differences.

ratio scale A scale that has an absolute zero origin, and hence indicates not only the magnitude, but also the proportion, of the differences.

reactivity The extent to which the observer affects the situation under observation.

reflective scale Each item in a reflective scale is assumed to share a common basis (the underlying construct of interest).

regression analysis Used in a situation where one or more metric independent variable(s) is (are) hypothesized to affect a metric dependent variable.

reliability Attests to the consistency and stability of the measuring instrument.

research proposal A document that sets out the purpose of the study and the research design details of the investigation to be carried out by the researcher.

restricted probability See Complex probability sampling.

rigor The theoretical and methodological precision adhered to in conducting research.

sample A subset or subgroup of the population.

sample A subset or subgroup of the population.

sampling The process of selecting items from the population so that the sample characteristics can be generalized to the population. Sampling involves both design choice and sample size decisions.

sampling unit The element or set of elements that is available for selection in some stage of the sampling process.

scale A tool or mechanism by which individuals, events, or objects are distin- guished on the variables of interest in some meaningful way.

scientific investigation A step-by-step, logical, organized, and rigorous effort to solve problems.

secondary data Data that already exist and do not have to be collected by the researcher.

secondary data Data that already exist and do not have to be collected by the researcher.

semantic differential scale Usually a seven-point scale with bipolar attributes indicated at its extremes.

wiley-rmb-bk-en-GB-uws August 19, 2014 - 16:36 462

simple random sampling A probability sampling design in which every single element in the population has a known and equal chance of being selected as a subject.

simulation A model-building technique for assessing the possible effects of changes that might be introduced in a system.

standard deviation A measure of dispersion for parametric data; the square root of the variance.

static panel A panel that consists of the same group of people serving as subjects over an extended period of time for a research study.

statistical regression The threat to internal validity that results when various groups in the study have been selected on the basis of their extreme (very high or very low) scores on some important variables.

structured observational study Studies in which the researcher observes and notes specific activities and behavior that have been clearly delineated as important factors for observation, before the commencement of the study.

subject A single member of the sample.

systematic sampling A probability sampling design that involves choosing every nth element in the population for the sample.

test−retest reliability A way of establishing the stability of the measuring instru- ment by correlating the scores obtained through its administration to the same set of respondents at two different points in time.

theoretical framework A logically developed, described, and explained network of associations among variables of interest to the research study.

treatment The manipulation of the independent variable in experimental designs so as to determine its effects on a dependent variable of interest to the researcher.

unbalanced rating scale An even-numbered scale that has no neutral point.

unbiased questions Questions posed in accordance with the principles of wording and measurement, and the right questioning technique, so as to elicit the least biased responses.

unit of analysis The level of aggregation of the data collected during data analysis.

unrestricted probability sampling See Simple random sampling.

unstructured observational study Studies in which the researcher observes and makes notes of almost all activities and behavior that occur in the situation without predetermining what particular variables will be of specific interest to the study.

validity Evidence that the instrument, technique, or process used to measure a concept does indeed measure the intended concept.

variable Anything that can take on differing or varying values.

variable Anything that can take on differing or varying values.

variance Indicates the dispersion of a variable in the data set, and is obtained by subtracting the mean from each of the observations, squaring the results, summing them, and dividing the total by the number of observations.

  • Chapter 1: Introduction to research
    • 1.1 WHAT IS RESEARCH?
    • 1.2 BUSINESS RESEARCH
      • 1.2.1 Definition of business research
      • 1.2.2 Research and the manager
    • 1.3 TYPES OF BUSINESS RESEARCH: APPLIED AND BASIC
      • 1.3.1 Applied research
      • 1.3.2 Basic or fundamental research
    • 1.4 MANAGERS AND RESEARCH
    • 1.5 THE MANAGER AND THE CONSULTANT$-$RESEARCHER
      • 1.5.1 The manager$-$researcher relationship
    • 1.6 INTERNAL VERSUS EXTERNAL CONSULTANTS/RESEARCHERS
      • 1.6.1 Internal consultants/researchers
      • 1.6.2 External consultants/researchers
    • 1.7 KNOWLEDGE ABOUT RESEARCH AND MANAGERIAL EFFECTIVENESS
    • 1.8 ETHICS AND BUSINESS RESEARCH
  • Chapter 2: The scientific approach and alternative approaches to investigation
    • 2.1 THE HALLMARKS OF SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH
      • 2.1.1 Purposiveness
      • 2.1.2 Rigor
      • 2.1.3 Testability
      • 2.1.4 Replicability
      • 2.1.5 Precision and confidence
      • 2.1.6 Objectivity
      • 2.1.7 Generalizability
      • 2.1.8 Parsimony
    • 2.2 THE HYPOTHETICO-DEDUCTIVE METHOD
      • 2.2.1 The seven-step process in the hypothetico-deductive method
      • 2.2.2 Review of the hypothetico-deductive method
    • 2.3 SOME OBSTACLES TO CONDUCTING SCIENTIFIC RESEARCH IN THE MANAGEMENT AREA
    • 2.4 ALTERNATIVE APPROACHES TO RESEARCH
      • 2.4.1 Positivism
      • 2.4.2 Constructionism
      • 2.4.3 Critical realism
      • 2.4.4 Pragmatism
  • Chapter 3: The broad problem area and defining the problem statement
    • 3.1 THE BROAD PROBLEM AREA
    • 3.2 PRELIMINARY INFORMATION GATHERING
      • 3.2.1 Nature of information to be gathered
    • 3.3 DEFINING THE PROBLEM STATEMENT
      • 3.3.1 What makes a good problem statement?
    • 3.4 THE RESEARCH PROPOSAL
    • 3.5 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS
    • 3.6 ETHICAL ISSUES IN THE PRELIMINARY STAGES OF INVESTIGATION
  • Chapter 4: The critical literature review
    • 4.1 THE PURPOSE OF A CRITICAL LITERATURE REVIEW
    • 4.2 HOW TO APPROACH THE LITERATURE REVIEW
      • 4.2.1 Data sources
      • 4.2.2 Searching for literature
      • 4.2.3 Evaluating the literature
      • 4.2.4 Documenting the literature review
    • 4.3 ETHICAL ISSUES
  • Chapter 5: Theoretical framework and hypothesis development
    • 5.1 THE NEED FOR A THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK
    • 5.2 VARIABLES
      • 5.2.1 Dependent variable
      • 5.2.2 Independent variable
      • 5.2.3 Moderating variable
      • 5.2.4 Mediating variable
    • 5.3 THEORETICAL FRAMEWORK
      • 5.3.1 The components of the theoretical framework
      • 5.3.2 Theoretical framework for the example of air safety violations
    • 5.4 HYPOTHESIS DEVELOPMENT
      • 5.4.1 Definition of a hypothesis
      • 5.4.2 Statement of hypotheses: formats
      • 5.4.3 Directional and nondirectional hypotheses
      • 5.4.4 Null and alternate hypotheses
    • 5.5 HYPOTHESIS TESTING WITH QUALITATIVE RESEARCH: NEGATIVE CASE ANALYSIS
    • 5.6 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS
  • Chapter 6: Elements of research design
    • 6.1 THE RESEARCH DESIGN
    • 6.2 PURPOSE OF THE STUDY: EXPLORATORY, DESCRIPTIVE, CAUSAL
      • 6.2.1 Exploratory study
      • 6.2.2 Descriptive study
      • 6.2.3 Causal study
    • 6.3 EXTENT OF RESEARCHER INTERFERENCE WITH THE STUDY
    • 6.4 STUDY SETTING: CONTRIVED AND NONCONTRIVED
    • 6.5 RESEARCH STRATEGIES
      • 6.5.1 Experiments
      • 6.5.2 Survey research
      • 6.5.3 Observation
      • 6.5.4 Case studies
      • 6.5.5 Grounded theory
      • 6.5.6 Action research
      • 6.5.7 Mixed methods
    • 6.6 UNIT OF ANALYSIS: INDIVIDUALS, DYADS, GROUPS, ORGANIZATIONS, CULTURES
    • 6.7 TIME HORIZON: CROSS-SECTIONAL VERSUS LONGITUDINAL STUDIES
      • 6.7.1 Cross-sectional studies
      • 6.7.2 Longitudinal studies
    • 6.8 REVIEW OF ELEMENTS OF RESEARCH DESIGN
    • 6.9 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS
  • Chapter 7: Data collection methods: Introduction and interviews
    • 7.1 SOURCES OF DATA
      • 7.1.1 Primary sources of data
      • 7.1.2 Secondary sources of data
    • 7.2 METHODS OF DATA COLLECTION
    • 7.3 INTERVIEWING
      • 7.3.1 Unstructured and structured interviews
      • 7.3.2 Training interviewers
      • 7.3.3 Some tips to follow when interviewing
      • 7.3.4 Additional sources of bias in interview data
      • 7.3.5 Computer-assisted interviewing
      • 7.3.6 Review of interviewing
    • 7.4 PROJECTIVE METHODS
  • Chapter 8: Data collection methods: Observation
    • 8.1 DEFINITION AND PURPOSE OF RESEARCH
    • 8.2 FOUR KEY DIMENSIONS THAT CHARACTERIZE THE TYPE OF OBSERVATION
      • 8.2.1 Controlled versus uncontrolled observational studies
      • 8.2.2 Participant versus nonparticipant observation
      • 8.2.3 Structured versus unstructured observational studies
      • 8.2.4 Concealed versus unconcealed observation
    • 8.3 TWO IMPORTANT APPROACHES TO OBSERVATION
      • 8.3.1 Participant observation: introduction
      • 8.3.2 The participatory aspect of participant observation
      • 8.3.3 The observation aspect of participant observation
      • 8.3.4 What to observe
      • 8.3.5 Structured observation: introduction
      • 8.3.6 The use of coding schemes in structured observation
    • 8.4 ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF OBSERVATION
  • Chapter 9: Data collection methods: Questionnaires
    • 9.1 TYPES OF QUESTIONNAIRE
      • 9.1.1 Personally administered questionnaires
      • 9.1.2 Mail and electronic questionnaires
    • 9.2 GUIDELINES FOR QUESTIONNAIRE DESIGN
      • 9.2.1 Principles of wording
      • 9.2.2 Principles of measurement
      • 9.2.3 Review of questionnaire design
      • 9.2.4 Pretesting of structured questions
      • 9.2.5 Electronic questionnaire and survey design
    • 9.3 INTERNATIONAL DIMENSIONS OF SURVEYS
      • 9.3.1 Special issues in instrumentation for cross-cultural research
      • 9.3.2 Issues in data collection
    • 9.4 REVIEW OF THE ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES OF DIFFERENT DATA COLLECTION METHODS AND WHEN TO USE EACH
    • 9.5 MULTIMETHODS OF DATA COLLECTION
    • 9.6 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS
    • 9.7 ETHICS IN DATA COLLECTION
      • 9.7.1 Ethics and the researcher
      • 9.7.2 Ethical behavior of respondents
  • Chapter 10: Experimental designs
    • 10.1 THE LAB EXPERIMENT
      • 10.1.1 Control
      • 10.1.2 Manipulation
      • 10.1.3 Controlling the contaminating exogenous or ``nuisance'' variables
      • 10.1.4 Internal validity of lab experiments
      • 10.1.5 External validity or generalizability of lab experiments
    • 10.2 THE FIELD EXPERIMENT
      • 10.2.1 External validity
    • 10.3 TRADE-OFF BETWEEN INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL VALIDITY
    • 10.4 FACTORS AFFECTING THE VALIDITY OF EXPERIMENTS
      • 10.4.1 History effects
      • 10.4.2 Maturation effects
      • 10.4.3 Testing effects
      • 10.4.4 Selection bias effects
      • 10.4.5 Mortality effects
      • 10.4.6 Statistical regression effects
      • 10.4.7 Instrumentation effects
    • 10.5 IDENTIFYING THREATS TO VALIDITY
    • 10.6 INTERNAL VALIDITY IN CASE STUDIES
    • 10.7 REVIEW OF FACTORS AFFECTING INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL VALIDITY
    • 10.8 TYPES OF EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN AND VALIDITY
      • 10.8.1 Quasi-experimental designs
      • 10.8.2 True experimental designs
      • 10.8.3 Ex post facto designs
    • 10.9 SIMULATION
    • 10.10 ETHICAL ISSUES IN EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN RESEARCH
    • 10.11 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS
    • 10.12 Appendix: Further experimental designs
      • 10.12.1 The completely randomized design
      • 10.12.2 Randomized block design
      • 10.12.3 Latin square design
      • 10.12.4 Factorial design
  • Chapter 11: Measurement of variables: Operational definition
    • 11.1 HOW VARIABLES ARE MEASURED
    • 11.2 OPERATIONAL DEFINITION (OPERATIONALIZATION)
      • 11.2.1 Operationalization: dimensions and elements
      • 11.2.2 Operationalizing the (multidimensional) concept of achievement motivation
      • 11.2.3 What operationalization is not
      • 11.2.4 Review of operationalization
    • 11.3 INTERNATIONAL DIMENSIONS OF OPERATIONALIZATION
  • Chapter 12: Measurement: Scaling, reliability, validity
    • 12.1 FOUR TYPES OF SCALES
      • 12.1.1 Nominal scale
      • 12.1.2 Ordinal scale
      • 12.1.3 Interval scale
      • 12.1.4 Ratio scale
      • 12.1.5 Review of scales
    • 12.2 RATING SCALES
      • 12.2.1 Dichotomous scale
      • 12.2.2 Category scale
      • 12.2.3 Semantic differential scale
      • 12.2.4 Numerical scale
      • 12.2.5 Itemized rating scale
      • 12.2.6 Likert scale
      • 12.2.7 Fixed or constant sum scale
      • 12.2.8 Stapel scale
      • 12.2.9 Graphic rating scale
      • 12.2.10 Consensus scale
      • 12.2.11 Other scales
    • 12.3 RANKING SCALES
      • 12.3.1 Paired comparison
      • 12.3.2 Forced choice
      • 12.3.3 Comparative scale
    • 12.4 INTERNATIONAL DIMENSIONS OF SCALING
    • 12.5 GOODNESS OF MEASURES
      • 12.5.1 Item analysis
      • 12.5.2 Validity
      • 12.5.3 Reliability
    • 12.6 REFLECTIVE VERSUS FORMATIVE MEASUREMENT SCALES
      • 12.6.1 What is a reflective scale?
      • 12.6.2 What is a formative scale and why do the items of a formative scale not necessarily hang together?
    • 12.7 Appendix: Examples of some measures
      • 12.7.1 Measures from behavioral finance research
      • 12.7.2 Measures from management accounting research
      • 12.7.3 Measures from management research
      • 12.7.4 Measures from marketing research
  • Chapter 13: Sampling
    • 13.1 POPULATION, ELEMENT, SAMPLE, SAMPLING UNIT, AND SUBJECT
      • 13.1.1 Population
      • 13.1.2 Element
      • 13.1.3 Sample
      • 13.1.4 Sampling unit
      • 13.1.5 Subject
    • 13.2 PARAMETERS
    • 13.3 REASONS FOR SAMPLING
    • 13.4 REPRESENTATIVENESS OF SAMPLES
    • 13.5 NORMALITY OF DISTRIBUTIONS
    • 13.6 THE SAMPLING PROCESS
      • 13.6.1 Defining the population
      • 13.6.2 Determining the sample frame
      • 13.6.3 Determining the sampling design
      • 13.6.4 Determining the sample size
      • 13.6.5 Executing the sampling process
    • 13.7 PROBABILITY SAMPLING
      • 13.7.1 Unrestricted or simple random sampling
      • 13.7.2 Restricted or complex probability sampling
      • 13.7.3 Review of probability sampling designs
    • 13.8 NONPROBABILITY SAMPLING
      • 13.8.1 Convenience sampling
      • 13.8.2 Purposive sampling
      • 13.8.3 Review of nonprobability sampling designs
    • 13.9 EXAMPLES OF WHEN CERTAIN SAMPLING DESIGNS WOULD BE APPROPRIATE
      • 13.9.1 Simple random sampling
      • 13.9.2 Stratified random sampling
      • 13.9.3 Systematic sampling
      • 13.9.4 Cluster sampling
      • 13.9.5 Area sampling
      • 13.9.6 Double sampling
      • 13.9.7 Convenience sampling
      • 13.9.8 Judgment sampling: one type of purposive sampling
      • 13.9.9 Quota sampling: a second type of purposive sampling
    • 13.10 SAMPLING IN CROSS-CULTURAL RESEARCH
    • 13.11 ISSUES OF PRECISION AND CONFIDENCE IN DETERMINING SAMPLE SIZE
      • 13.11.1 Precision
      • 13.11.2 Confidence
    • 13.12 SAMPLE DATA, PRECISION, AND CONFIDENCE IN ESTIMATION
    • 13.13 TRADE-OFF BETWEEN CONFIDENCE AND PRECISION
    • 13.14 SAMPLE DATA AND HYPOTHESIS TESTING
    • 13.15 DETERMINING THE SAMPLE SIZE
    • 13.16 IMPORTANCE OF SAMPLING DESIGN AND SAMPLE SIZE
    • 13.17 EFFICIENCY IN SAMPLING
    • 13.18 SAMPLING AS RELATED TO QUALITATIVE STUDIES
    • 13.19 MANAGERIAL IMPLICATIONS
  • Chapter 14: Quantitative data analysis
    • 14.1 GETTING THE DATA READY FOR ANALYSIS
      • 14.1.1 Coding and data entry
      • 14.1.2 Editing data
      • 14.1.3 Data transformation
    • 14.2 GETTING A FEEL FOR THE DATA
      • 14.2.1 Frequencies
      • 14.2.2 Measures of central tendency and dispersion
      • 14.2.3 Relationships between variables
    • 14.3 EXCELSIOR ENTERPRISES: DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS PART 1
    • 14.4 TESTING GOODNESS OF DATA
      • 14.4.1 Reliability
      • 14.4.2 Validity
    • 14.5 EXCELSIOR ENTERPRISES: DESCRIPTIVE STATISTICS PART 2
  • Chapter 15: Quantitative data analysis: Hypothesis testing
    • 15.1 TYPE I ERRORS, TYPE II ERRORS, AND STATISTICAL POWER
    • 15.2 CHOOSING THE APPROPRIATE STATISTICAL TECHNIQUE
    • 15.3 TESTING A HYPOTHESIS ABOUT A SINGLE MEAN
    • 15.4 TESTING HYPOTHESES ABOUT TWO RELATED MEANS
    • 15.5 TESTING HYPOTHESES ABOUT TWO UNRELATED MEANS
    • 15.6 TESTING HYPOTHESES ABOUT SEVERAL MEANS
    • 15.7 REGRESSION ANALYSIS
      • 15.7.1 Standardized regression coefficients
      • 15.7.2 Regression with dummy variables
      • 15.7.3 Multicollinearity
      • 15.7.4 Testing moderation using regression analysis: interaction effects
    • 15.8 OTHER MULTIVARIATE TESTS AND ANALYSES
      • 15.8.1 Discriminant analysis
      • 15.8.2 Logistic regression
      • 15.8.3 Conjoint analysis
      • 15.8.4 Two-way ANOVA
      • 15.8.5 MANOVA
      • 15.8.6 Canonical correlation
    • 15.9 EXCELSIOR ENTERPRISES: HYPOTHESIS TESTING
      • 15.9.1 Overall interpretation and recommendations to the president
    • 15.10 DATA WAREHOUSING, DATA MINING, AND OPERATIONS RESEARCH
    • 15.11 SOME SOFTWARE PACKAGES USEFUL FOR DATA ANALYSIS
  • Chapter 16: Qualitative data analysis
    • 16.1 DATA REDUCTION
    • 16.2 DATA DISPLAY
    • 16.3 DRAWING CONCLUSIONS
    • 16.4 RELIABILITY AND VALIDITY IN QUALITATIVE RESEARCH
    • 16.5 SOME OTHER METHODS OF GATHERING AND ANALYZING QUALITATIVE DATA
      • 16.5.1 Content analysis
      • 16.5.2 Narrative analysis
      • 16.5.3 Analytic induction
  • Chapter 17: The research report
    • 17.1 THE WRITTEN REPORT
      • 17.1.1 The purpose of the written report
      • 17.1.2 The audience for the written report
      • 17.1.3 Characteristics of a well-written report
      • 17.1.4 Contents of the research report
    • 17.2 INTEGRAL PARTS OF THE REPORT
      • 17.2.1 The title and the title page
      • 17.2.2 The executive summary or abstract
      • 17.2.3 Table of contents
      • 17.2.4 List of tables, figures, and other materials
      • 17.2.5 Preface
      • 17.2.6 The authorization letter
      • 17.2.7 The introductory section
      • 17.2.8 The body of the report
      • 17.2.9 The final part of the report
      • 17.2.10 References
      • 17.2.11 Appendix
    • 17.3 ORAL PRESENTATION
      • 17.3.1 Deciding on the content
      • 17.3.2 Visual aids
      • 17.3.3 The presenter
      • 17.3.4 The presentation
      • 17.3.5 Handling questions
    • 17.4 APPENDIX: Examples
      • 17.4.1 REPORT 1: SAMPLE OF A REPORT INVOLVING A DESCRIPTIVE STUDY
      • 17.4.2 REPORT 2: SAMPLE OF A REPORT OFFERING ALTERNATIVE SOLUTIONS AND EXPLAINING THE PROS AND CONS OF EACH ALTERNATIVE
      • 17.4.3 REPORT 3: EXAMPLE OF AN ABRIDGED BASIC RESEARCH REPORT

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/5. ITDS&MBAOW˵����ָ��/Guidance for Turnitin submission on Moodle.doc

Guidance for Turnitin submission

Turnitin is not just a way for you to submit your assignment, it is also a plagiarism software. When you submit your assignment Turnitin scans the internet and all previous assignments submitted. It does this to identify any matching text from your assignment. It then produces an ‘similarity report’ highlighting all of the matched text and stating the source of the original text. This not only identifies text that has been copied from documents, such as in plagiarism, it also identifies areas of text that the student has just not sufficiently changed or ‘paraphrased’ from the original referenced material through inexperience in academic writing.

Therefore, although one of Turnitin’s uses is to identify and reduce the incidence of plagiarism it is also a very useful tool to assist students to improve their academic writing. Turnitin is made available to students before the assignment submission date. Students may submit the assignment to Turnitin to check the similarity report and if large areas of text are highlighted as a match to original documents the student then has the chance to reword these parts and resubmit to Turnitin to reduce the amount of highlighted text. This can be done a number of times before the actual submission date. However, it should be noted, that although the similarity report is available very quickly after the first submission, it can take up to 24 hours to produce a similarity report with resubmissions. Each time you submit a document the previous one is overwritten so there is no chance of the wrong one being marked.

You can submit an incomplete assignment to Turnitin if you just wish to view the similarity report, however on final submission you must ensure that all parts of your assignment eg, title page, content page, assignment, references and appendices (if these are required for the assignment being submitted) are all on one file for uploading. If you submit your assignment in sections each section you upload will overwrite the one before and the final document will only be the last section you uploaded.

image1.png

You will find the link to access Turnitin on your Moodle page. You should only see your own group link, however if you see more than one make sure you click on your correct group link.

This link will take you straight to Turnitin. Notification of Groups is posted in News Forum and was emailed to your student email account.

image2.png

This is what you will see when you click on the link. This page provides information on the assignment. Please check that you are submitting to the correct assignment and group.

If the information is correct, click on the highlighted tab ‘My Submissions’. This will take you to the page where you will submit your assignment.

image3.png

On the submission page there are 4 steps you must complete.

1. Enter the assignment title

2. Click on ‘Browse’ to find and attach your assignment (like attaching file to email)

3. Click on the small box to confirm assignment is your own work

4. Finally click on ‘Add Submission’ to submit assignment.

image4.png

When you click on ‘Browse’ (as previous instruction) you should see your document library from your computer in a dialogue box. Click on the assignment file and then click ‘Open’ on the dialogue box to attach file to Turnitin.

image5.png

You will then see this appear on screen as Turnitin loads your file.

image6.png

Your submission page will now show the assignment submission.

On the left hand side it should state that your submission was successful, if it has not been successful submit again.

The middle highlight arrow points to the ‘Similarity’ mentioned in the information. This will show ‘Pending’ until Turnitin finishes checking the literature/websites for similarities to original sources.

The 2 small arrows on the right will show movement while the check is running. You can leave the page/Moodle if this is taking a while and return later to check score.

image7.png

When the check is complete a percentage with a colour band will show in the ‘Similarity’ window. Green you require to look at assignment and possibly change the wording of a few parts of the assignment, Orange you definitely need to change the wording in a number of places, Red indicates major changes required. If when you check assignment the reference list is highlighted this can be ignored.

To look at your assignment to see what Turnitin has identified as a match to the literature click on the percentage score.

image8.png

1. Your assignment will show in a separate window and all of the text identified as a match will be coloured. Different colours are used to identify the different sources found. I have used the original document for information on a course which is now on the university website. As you can see most of the text is highlighted as Turnitin ‘sees’ it on the UWS website.

2. You will note that there are small parts that are not highlighted. These are words that have been changed from what is on the website. Turnitin will identify original sources and show the parts you have changed if you have not reworded the original material enough to avoid plagiarism. You should reword highlighted text as much as possible.

3. On the right hand side Turnitin lists the original sources of the information and these are matched by colour and number to the assignment. Clicking on the listed source or the number in the assignment paragraph will open the original source information is taken from (article/webpage/ebook). The only time you cannot open the original source is if the assignment is a match to another student assignment.

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/5. ITDS&MBAOW˵����ָ��/Introductory lecture.ppt

The Research Process

  • The Strategic Business Project

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

Introductory Session

  • What is research?
  • The structure of your MBA project
  • The skills needed
  • Choosing your topic
  • Choosing the research approach

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

So, what is research?

  • A form of systematic enquiry that contributes to knowledge
  • Research versus Scholarship

- scholarship is knowledge of one’s field

- research develops new knowledge

- scholarship is necessary for research

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

THE PROJECT

  • The product of a piece of personal research
  • An extended piece of academic writing that can vary from 10,000- 15,000 words
  • A structured document, usually divided up into a series of chapters
  • It contains a detailed exploration of a particular issue and demonstrates evidence of: Theory and practice which normally includes: both primary and secondary data collection

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

PROJECT STRUCTURE

  • Introduction
  • Context
  • Literature Review
  • Methodology
  • Results
  • Analysis and Discussion
  • Conclusions/Recommendations
  • References
  • Appendices

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

SKILLS NEEDED

  • Ability to carry out investigative work
  • Ability to carry out large piece of work often alone
  • Analytical skills
  • Writing skills
  • Integrating what has been learned in other modules

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

CHOOSE TOPIC

PIN POINT QUESTION

DECIDE HOW TO DO IT

COLLECT DATA

ANALYSE AND INTERPRET RESULTS

WRITE UP AS YOU GO

STAGES OF THE RESEARCH PROCESS

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

TOPIC CHOICE

  • Meets academic requirements – contributes to knowledge and/or practice
  • Interests you
  • Is useful to your organisation
  • Is feasible.....time/resources....access
  • Whatever you discover should be of value/useful
  • Something you can build on

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

GENERATING TOPICS

  • Don’t despair if you haven’t got one
  • Generate as wide a range of topics as possible
  • Engage in brainstorming and mind mapping
  • Most are in-company/in-organisation – so talk to colleagues/boss
  • Topic selection is iterative…refines
  • From your topic the research question will emerge

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

RESEARCH APPROACHES

  • There are two main approaches to research: the deductive approach, and the inductive approach.

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

DEDUCTIVE APPROACH

  • Comes from natural sciences – physics, chemistry, geology, biology
  • Data collection is used to evaluate propositions or hypotheses in relation to an existing theory.
  • Theory falsification or verification.

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

INDUCTIVE APPROACH

  • An effective approach when examining experience and perceptions of individuals

  • Data collection is used to explore a phenomenon, identify themes and patterns, and create a conceptual framework.
  • Theory generation and building.

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

RESEARCH PARADIGMS OR PHILOSOPHIES

  • POSITIVISTIC - a philosophical approach recognizing only that which can be scientifically verified or which is capable of logical or mathematical proof
  • INTERPRETIVE – a philosophical approach that concentrates on the study of consciousness and the objects of direct experience - reality consists of objects and events as they are perceived or understood in human consciousness

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

POSITIVISTIC PARADIGM

  • Comes from natural sciences – physics, chemistry, geology, biology
  • Researchers are independent observers of a pre-existing reality
  • Values and bias excluded
  • Objectivity is stressed
  • Scientific…measuring is stressed
  • Quantitative

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

INTERPRETIVE PARADIGM

  • Subjectivist...truth is not objective…it is in our minds
  • Understand behaviour from the investigator’s frame of reference
  • Cannot separate investigator from what is investigated
  • Reality is dependent on the mind/perception
  • Interpretivist…reality is socially constructed…interaction between researcher and subject
  • Qualitative

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

TWO MAIN PARADIGMS

Positivistic

  • Quantitative data
  • Large samples
  • Hypothesis testing
  • Data specific and precise
  • Reliability and validity high
  • Generalises from samples to populations

Interpretive

  • Qualitative data
  • Small samples
  • Theory generating
  • Data rich and subjective
  • Validity high
  • May be difficult to generalise from one setting to another

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

RESEARCH METHODS

  • Quantitative – Quantitative research concentrates on measuring the scale, range and the frequency of phenomena. Data from quantitative research are usually highly detailed and structured and are presented statistically.

  • Qualitative - Qualitative research is more subjective in nature and usually involves investigating less tangible aspects of a research subject, for example values and perceptions.

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

So, What Paradigm Do you Adopt?

  • Choice of research approach, method and paradigm should be determined by your topic choice and research question
  • To answer the research question ask yourself.....
  • Do I need to survey a large group of people within my organisation/other organisations?
  • Do you need to interview key people/specialists?
  • Do you need to do both?

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

Summary

  • There are different approaches to research with different assumptions and types of design
  • You need to develop a design that is robust and is credible in terms of the community to which your work seeks to contribute

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

And Remember

  • Don’t get it right
  • Get it wrote!

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/5. ITDS&MBAOW˵����ָ��/Lecture 2 Literature review for Online World.ppt

The literature review

  • The first thing an examiner looks at are the references!
  • Doing a good job requires you to engage with the subject – to really be interested in it rather than it being a chore
  • You are a detective – perseverence is key

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

What is a Literature Review?

  • A literature review is a selective analysis of existing research which is relevant to your topic, showing how it relates to your project. Therefore, it is both the selection and the evaluation of published or unpublished documents available about your proposed topic.

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

What is the Purpose of a Literature Review? 1

  • To avoid reinventing the wheel
  • To find out what other scholars are writing about your topic
  • To learn methods and approaches that are appropriate for your study
  • To learn appropriate theory to underpin your work

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

What is the purpose of a Literature Review? 2

  • To demonstrate to your audience that your contribution is new – different from everyone else’s
  • Nobody will believe you unless you can demonstrate through the literature review that you know what others have done
  • In an MBA: to demonstrate to your examiners that you can do an effective literature review
  • Because literature reviews are an accepted part of university research and your project/dissertation is not acceptable without one

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

Important question: “How can I demonstrate my skills through my project???”

What Information Should You Look For?

  • Publications that cover the same or a similar topic to yours
  • Also publications that support your methodology

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

Make this more concrete??

A Good Literature Review

  • The key is focus

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Research Topic

Specialist sub-area

Relevant

Primary

research

Your research question

Dr Christian Harrison

The Strengths and Weaknesses of the Different Sources

  • Books vs. journal articles vs conference proceedings vs. the web
  • Which types of task would each source be best for?

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

Literature search techniques

  • Keyword search
  • To find topically relevant information from digital libraries, databases, or the web
  • Good in most cases
  • Best tip – get hold of a recent article – look at the references – some of your searching may already have been done for you!
  • May need to start with a book to find a relevant article(s)

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

Keyword search was subject search

Search engines

Library will advise

Emerald

I like Science Direct, but I always start with

Google

I find Google Scholar OK but many of the references are a little old

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

Managing the literature

It pays to be organized and diligent when it comes to keeping references.

  • Keep and file copies of relevant books, articles, etc.

  • Find out about the recommended referencing style and use it from the start
  • Consider using bibliographic file management software such as Endnote

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

Writing your Literature Review

Writing a good review requires you to:

  • develop a structure
  • use headings
  • used sparingly bullets are acceptable – this is not an essay!
  • write purposefully
  • use the literature to back up your arguments
  • review and write throughout the research process
  • get feedback
  • and be prepared to redraft and redraft

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

The Project Proposal

• draw together your initial ideas into a workable project outline

• clarify to yourself and to others that your research plans are feasible

• prepare the groundwork for gathering the data or material that you need

• gain approval to proceed with the project itself

between 2,500-3,000 words long excluding references and any appendices.

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

Proposal Structure

Your project proposal should contain the following:

  • Your contact details and project title
  • Purpose of the Project and Reasons for choosing it
  • A preliminary literature review – relevant past studies
  • Sources of data
  • Proposed methodology
  • Anticipated problems
  • Expected schedule
  • References

Dr Christian Harrison

*

Dr Christian Harrison

Important question: “How can I demonstrate my skills through my project???”

Make this more concrete??

Keyword search was subject search

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/5. ITDS&MBAOW˵����ָ��/Lecture 3 Qualitative research introduction for Online World.pptx

Qualitative Research – an introduction

Dr Christian Harrison

1

What is qualitative research?

“..any kind of research that produces findings not arrived at by means of statistical procedures or other means of quantification.” (Strauss and Corbin, 1990:17)

“a non-mathematical analytic procedure” (Strauss and Corbin, 1990:18)

Dr Christian Harrison

2

Qualitative research means 1

Getting over the idea that research means counting

That the focus is on subjective experiences, or the meanings that people use.

Observations and findings depend on understanding contexts and the meanings held by the people in those contexts and the meanings of the things in those contexts.

Exploration is very often the motive, but not always.

Qualitative research is typically inductive

Good qualitative research is often the most rigorous, difficult research

Dr Christian Harrison

3

IDEAL QUANTITATIVE QUALITATIVE

Research process is deductive. Research process is inductive.
Measures objective facts. Attempt to document social reality, meaning is constructed.
Focus on variables. Focus on in-depth meaning.
Firewall between research process and researchers’ values. Values are present & explicit (empathy).
Cross-contextual. Contextual dependence.
Many cases. Few cases.

Dr Christian Harrison

4

IDEAL QUANTITATIVE QUALITATIVE

Statistical analysis Thematic analysis
Highly structured research process. More iterative research process.

Dr Christian Harrison

5

Separation from data Intimacy with data
Generalize to population Generalization difficult

History of qualitative research

Roots in anthropology and sociology

Emerged in 1920s and 1930s

Greater acceptance nowadays

Dr Christian Harrison

6

Selecting Methods

Consider the practicalities

Time

Resources

Confidentiality

Ethics

Sample

Is it the best method for my question?

Do I have the skills?

Dr Christian Harrison

7

Qualitative Research

So, qualitative research is research that involves the collection of data that is non-numeric:

Interview material

Responses to a survey

Observations of people (i.e., the researcher’s own notes)

Dr Christian Harrison

8

Population & Sample

A sample is drawn from a defined population

Sample should accurately reflect the population

Types of sample:

Probability e.g. Random sample

Non-probability e.g. Convenience sample, Purposive sample and snowball sample

Dr Christian Harrison

9

Unit of Analysis.

Individuals

Certain experiences

Experiences in particular settings

Identities such as student with disabilities, ex-con

Groups

Demographic groups

Types of people such as sales managers, secretaries

Those in one setting versus another

Organizations

Dr Christian Harrison

10

Interviews

“Often presented as virtually the ‘gold standard’ of qualitative research (Barbour, 2003), interviews nevertheless involve a somewhat rarified, in-depth exchange between researcher and researched” (Barbour, 2008:113)

Dr Christian Harrison

11

Three main types of Interview

Structured

predetermined questions

Unstructured

Use broad, open-ended questions to begin and prompts

Useful when little know about area of study

Semi-structured

set of topics/questions, which can be modified (interview guide)

More focused

Process can vary

Dr Christian Harrison

12

Case study

Bear in mind that you could focus on one ‘case’

For example, going deep into a particular issue at one organisation (case)

Or perhaps two or three organisations (cases)

Dr Christian Harrison

13

Analysis often involves Coding

What is coding?

“Codes are tags or labels for assigning units of meaning to the descriptive or inferential information compiled during a study. Codes are attached to “chunks” of varying size – words, phrases, sentences, or whole paragraphs, connected or unconnected to a specific setting” (Miles and Huberman)

Codes are used to make sense of and organize the data. In other words, coding is making up your data using words, symbols and/or category names

Dr Christian Harrison

14

Coding – the process

The first stage is a ‘trawl’ through the data to see what is there, what patterns are emerging from the data.

Any thoughts and ideas – jotted down as notes – are important. Remember to write these down as you go!

You are advised to format documents with a wide margin – this gives you the space to write in

From this ‘sort’ of your data you will have developed an initial coding scheme, which has roughly divided up your material into units

Dr Christian Harrison

15

Coding – the process

The second stage is to repeat the process, refining, expanding or rejecting initial categories

Once you have identified the significant elements in your data these need to be coded – sometimes called ‘tagging’

A code is essentially a way of identifying significant parts of the data, so it can be in any form of letters or numbers that make sense to you

Dr Christian Harrison

16

Coding Example

Dr Christian Harrison

17

Resources

Qualitative research quickly exhausts resources and time.

Limit the amount of data collected.

It’s not the size that matters, it’s what you do with the data.

Know when to stop - saturation

Dr Christian Harrison

18

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/5. ITDS&MBAOW˵����ָ��/MBA Programme Handbook 2018 2019 Sept v2_.docx

UWS Logo A LargeTransparent

School of Business and Enterprise

Strategic Business Project

Module Code: BUSN11076

Module Handbook

Academic Session 2018-19

Module Coordinator

Dr Nondas Pitticas [email protected]

CONTENTS

A

WELCOME TO THE SCHOOL

3

B

PROGRAMME AND MODULE INFORMATION

3

1

Programme Introduction

2

Programme Timetables

3

Modules

4

Virtual Learning Environment (Moodle)

5

Professional Accreditation

6

Work Based Learning

7

External Examiner Reports

C

KEY CONTACTS

4

1

Staff

2

Personal Tutors

3

School Offices

4

Student Representatives

D

KEY INFORMATION

5

1

School Info Site on Moodle

2

Programme Info Site on Moodle

3

Student Email

4

Self-Service Banner

5

Maps

E

ACADEMIC ENGAGEMENT

6

1

Academic Engagement

2

Authorised absence

F

EXAMS AND ASSESSMENT

7

1

Regulatory Frameworks

2

Assessment Information

3

Marking and Grading

4

Submission of Coursework

5

Cheating and Plagiarism

6

Extenuating Circumstances

7

Student Appeals

8

Issues, Concerns and Complaints

9

Higher Education Achievement Report

G

H

HEALTH AND SAFETY IN THE SCHOOL

STUDENT INFORMATION AND SUPPORT: USEFUL WEBLINKS

12

12

1

Your Library

2

Research Study Guide

3

Information, Technology and Digital Services

4

Student HUB

5

Careers and Skills

6

Disability Services

7

Funding and Money Advice

8

Well-being & Counselling Service

9

Advice for International Students

10

Multi-Faith Chaplaincy

11

Exchange Programmes

12

SAUWS

13

Accommodation

14

Health and Safety Matters

15

University Student Surveys

16

Accessibility Guidelines for print, electronic and web based Information

I

TERM DATES

15

A WELCOME TO THE SCHOOL

Dear Student,

We would like to take this opportunity to welcome you to your programme of study in the School of Business and Enterprise at the University of the West of Scotland (UWS). We are delighted that you have chosen to study with our School and hope that you enjoy your time with us.

The aim of this Handbook is to provide you with clear and accurate information about the University and about the regulations that govern how your programme is managed and assessed. The Handbook should be used in conjunction with the information available from the Business School and on Moodle, the Virtual Learning Environment at UWS.

Your programme of study has a modular structure, with a modern syllabus which supports the development of knowledge in your chosen subject area and the development of skills and attributes that are valued by employers. There is a significant amount of work involved in completing your studies: you will learn how to apply theory, exercise your creativity and develop personal, interpersonal and team working skills that will help prepare you for your future career. We sincerely hope that you will enjoy the experience and develop an ever-increasing interest in your chosen subject area, becoming an independent, life-long learner.

For those of you new to the University, whether you are coming from School, College, employment, or even from overseas, you may experience a period of adjustment to the new, possibly less structured University learning environment. The Business School will support you and will allocate you a Personal Tutor. We also monitor student engagement with the learning activities within modules. Staff will be in touch with students where it is felt that engagement with the learning environment is affecting their performance. The purpose of this is to work with you to address any problems you may be having that affect your studies and get you back on track.

Schools will withdraw students from modules where engagement is poor throughout the module. This can impact on how you progress through your studies. In extreme cases students will be withdrawn from their programme. Therefore it is important for you to realise that if you think you are having problems with your studies or University life (financial, academic, whatever), ask for help sooner rather than later. We are here to help you. You will find a friendly, supportive and professional community at UWS who are focussed on making your time with us enjoyable, challenging and rewarding. Your first point of call is your Personal Tutor. However, all our academic and professional staff are committed to helping you become a reflective, independent learner and a talented professional in your field: let us help you to succeed.

With best wishes for your studies in the coming year.

Professor Monika Foster

Dean

School of Business & Enterprise

B PROGRAMME AND MODULE INFORMATION

The MBA programme team would like to welcome you to the University of the West of Scotland and the start of what promises to be an exciting year as you embark on your studies on the Master of Business Administration.

This handbook gives you information specific to the MBA and is designed to help you to get the most from the programme. This handbook provides general information about University regulations, resources and support. We recommend you that you read this handbook carefully. On occasion, you may also wish to refer to highly detailed University documents, such as the University Regulatory Framework.

Every attempt has been made to ensure this handbook is as accurate as possible. However, should any changes happen during the course of the programme you will be notified as soon as possible.

The MBA team is here to help you as much as we can. So, if you have any questions or problems, please contact a member of staff. We look forward to hearing from you. During your time with us we will support and guide you but the main effort will be yours.

We wish you every success with your studies.

Dr Tom Keegan

MBA Programme Leader

1 Programme Introduction

The values of the school of Business and Enterprise underpin the philosophy of the MBA programme. It has been specifically designed to equip graduates with the essential skills to be successful managers in 21st century organisations. The curriculum is shaped to provide and strengthen the core knowledge base of participants via the modules detailed within this handbook. In addition, there are a range of options which will enable you to specialise in a number of selected areas.

The core of the curriculum is complemented by three optional pathways that link to the School Research and Knowledge Exchange centres, i.e. Finance, Enterprise and Leadership. Thus the MBA is designed to be as flexible as possible and achieves the appropriate balance by offering a degree of chosen specialism or allowing you to follow a more traditional generalist MBA route. The chosen pathways will ensure that the curriculum is informed by relevant and contemporary knowledge and research.

The MBA seeks to ensure that, as one of our graduates, you will have the knowledge, skills, creative capabilities and confidence to develop and grow a new or existing business. Beyond the mere acquisition of knowledge and technical skills, the MBA curriculum puts theory into practice … through such competencies as decision making, team work, leadership skills, entrepreneurial potential, negotiation skills, communication and presentation skills. Based around a series of integrated modules, the curriculum is applied in nature and is embedded within a strong focus on the personal development of the learner.

Fundamental to the programme is the focus on ‘managerial skills’. As such, the MBA places considerable emphasis on developing your transferable skills throughout the programme. Throughout your studies you will be have opportunities to work both individually and in teams, making regular presentations of your work. You will also have a number of opportunities to connect with local businesses, developing valuable networking skills. The managerial skills you will develop will be enhanced by the use of role playing exercises, case studies and the use of business simulation software to emulate real life situations. You will develop these skills throughout the programme and, as part of the core of the programme in the second trimester; you will be required to work with a business organisation to investigate an issue which will form the basis of your Strategic Business Project (dissertation).

One of the unique features of the MBA is the MBAOW (MBA Online World) which provides maximum opportunities for students on different modes of learning to engage in joint projects. Thus, students studying on a mode who are full time, part time or distance learning will be expected to take part in activities such as discussion threads, projects, etc. This provides you with a wider and more international perspective. The MBAOW, as well as building your scholastic capital will also enhance your cultural and social capital by facilitating linkages across the modes of learning.

Also core to the programme is the focus on developing your entrepreneurial and business creativity skills. The University of the West of Scotland strongly believes that successful companies develop and are run by managers who are entrepreneurial. The MBA seeks to ensure that, as one of our graduates, you will have the knowledge, skills, creative capabilities and confidence to develop and growth a new or existing business.

As a graduate with an MBA from the University of the West of Scotland you will be expected to bring to organisations the capacity to recognise and respond to:

· opportunities for development and growth

· volatility and complex change

· the need to re-invent organisations

MBA Programme Content

The MBA programme comprises two stages:

· Postgraduate Diploma in Strategic Management

· Master of Business Administration

The Diploma stage attracts 120 credit points as prescribed by the Scottish Qualifications and Credit Framework (SCQF). The Masters stage comprises of a project – the equivalent of a ‘triple’ module (worth 60 credits). While the main work on writing up the project will take place in the third trimester, much of the preparatory and investigative work will be undertaken in the first and second trimester.

In the initial stages, the programme is structured to build your knowledge and understanding of the core business subject areas and to integrate these to enable you to gain a systems wide perspective of business. In the second phase of the programme a more strategic overview is provided and the focus shifts to equipping you with the tools and techniques to manage within the strategic context. In the final project stage you will bring together the knowledge and skills gained to address a real organisational opportunity or problem.

The core modules and options are as follows:

Programme Structure

Module

(All Level 11)

Credit

PG Cert in Management

PG Dip in Strategic Management

Integration of Business Functions

10

10

10

Analytical Thinking and Decision Making

20

40 credits from any combination of modules

20

Managing Organisational Health

20

20

Creativity and Business Wealth

20

20

Influencing Organisational Strategy

20

20

Advanced Financial Functions

10

10 credits from any module*

30 credits from any combination of modules*

Global Financial Systems

10

Leading Change

10

Influencing Organisational Culture and Change

10

New Venture Creation

10

Business Creativity

10

Risk, Crisis and Resilience

20

DL option module

Responding to Healthcare Challenges

20

DL option module

Strategic Business Project

60

MBA Award

*(Please note that individual options will only run if there is sufficient student demand)

The University has comprehensive systems in place to assure the quality of its education provision and the academic standards of all its degrees and other awards.

Programme Information

Programme Handbook

This programme handbook is designed to answer some of the questions that you may have regarding your time as a student within the School of Business and Enterprise. If you have any additional questions, or need to discuss any aspect of your course then please contact a member of the programme team shown below. You can also email us at [email protected].

Programme Specification

The programme is outlined above in the MBA Programme Content. Further information regarding individual modules are detailed below.

Programme Delivery

The learning and teaching strategy applied throughout this programme aims to develop and integrate both academic and practical management skills. The approaches taken are all driven by an overarching strategy that emphasises applied knowledge and skills linked to real world grounding.

You will experience a variety of complementary and creative teaching and learning approaches which are designed to ensure that students not only develop knowledge and understanding of key business theories in a changing global environment but that they gain experience of applying that knowledge in a range of situations; within the classroom, through participation in tutorial groups, work groups and business simulation exercises and externally as students engage with people from the business community who will participate as guest lecturers and mentors as students undertake their strategic business project.

The learning and teaching approach also recognises that students learn from one another. Engagement on the MBAOW and in class will capitalise on this informal learning, this will be supported by your programme leader and module leaders. As well as providing a forum for networking and developing relationships, the MBAOW gives you the opportunity to share knowledge and experiences in addition to supporting each other in the preparation for undertaking the Strategic Business Project.

Whilst undertaking your Strategic Business Project; you will have the opportunity to either work with an identified organisation from the locality or with an organisation with which you will have personal links. The organisations identified by UWS will encompass the public and private sector as well as the voluntary and not for profit organisations. This approach will ensure that you will have the opportunity to apply the knowledge gained throughout your studies in a real situation and provide experience for you to develop employability skills and competencies. We will, as far as practical, aim to connect you with your own particular areas of interests. You will be supported throughout the project by a project supervisor who will have particular knowledge, skills and experience in the subject area. You will also have access to an organisational mentor.

Particular attention has been taken to ensure that students are exposed to a range of situations where they have opportunities to develop, practice and reflect upon skills and capabilities required in managers operating at a strategic level within organisations and that they are given the support and guidance needed to reflect upon their development, preparing them to be reflective management practitioners and lifelong learners.

The MBA Programme – Mode of Delivery

MBA intakes are normally September, January and May. The MBA programme is delivered full-time, part-time and distance learning.

Full-time MBA - students would normally complete their studies within one year (they would study 60 credits per trimester). Tutoring is face-to-face.

The part-time MBA - is delivered through a series of monthly one day workshops, students normally study 30 credits per trimester. The part-time MBA is normally completed within 24 months. Workshops are held on Hamilton campus normally the first Saturday of every month.

The distance learning MBA - is delivered using the MBAOW with support from the module tutor through Skype, email and phone. Students on the distance learning MBA can study between 10 and 60 credits per trimester and have up to 5 years to complete their MBA.

The MBA structure and trimester teaching allows students to switch between different delivery modes – so it is possible for a student to move from full-time to part-time or distance learning.

The MBAOW allows students from full-time, part-time and distance learning deliveries to learn together through the online activities and discussion forums. It is also be possible for students from different campus to mix in the forums and share experiences, so it is possible for UK students to be online with students from all the UWS business school international partners. It is also possible for students from different cohorts to be assessed together. So for example it is possible for distance learning and part-time students to be in virtual groups working on assessments.

For all MBA students their main academic contacts are the programme leader and the module tutor, this is particularly important for distance learning students.

Enrolment

All students must complete the enrolment process online for each year of study. To make the process as quick and easy as possible, you should ensure that the funding for payment of your tuition fees is in place – you should apply to SAAS, SLC, or other funding bodies (e.g. company sponsorship) as early as possible.

If you are unsure of the modules to select during this process, please contact the Programme Leader. If you have any problems or are unable to proceed through online enrolment, contact the MBA Administrator or email [email protected] so that we can resolve your issue quickly.

Distance Learning students who are enrolling in trimester 3 will need to have their modules manually added. To do so you should email [email protected], or if you need academic advice before selecting, contact the programme leader.

ALL STUDENTS will need to re-enrol in September of each academic session regardless of entry date. Students who are being company sponsored will also need to re-submit a new sponsor form for each session unless fees have been paid in advance. If you are being funded by company sponsorship, please email [email protected] to request an up to date copy of the company sponsorship form.

To make the process as quick and easy as possible, you should ensure that the funding for payment of your tuition fees is in place – you should apply to SAAS, LEAs or other funding bodies (e.g. company sponsorship) as early as possible.

To arrange a fee payment plan, students should contact [email protected].

2 Programme Timetables

Programme timetables can be found at: http://student-timetable.uws.ac.uk/

3 Modules

Details of the programme and its modules are contained with the Programme Specification and Module Descriptor Database (PSMD). The Programme Specification can be accessed at:

http://psmd.uws.ac.uk/PGProgrammes/PGProgrammeSpecsBySchool/PGProgrammeSpec.aspx?documentGroupCode=PG00110

Details of all our modules that are contained with the Programme Specification can be accessed at http://psmd.uws.ac.uk/. By clicking on each module title below you can directly access this information. Further module information can also be found on MBAOW.

Each module is credited at 10 or 20 level 11 points except for the Strategic Business Project which is credited at 60 level 11 points (3 module equivalents).

You can check the modules that you are enrolled on via the self-service banner system. If there are any errors with your record, please contact the MBA Administrator or email [email protected] .

Core Modules

Core modules are delivered in the first two trimesters. Preparation for the Strategic Business Project begins in the first trimester when you start to consider possible projects. The Project will be completed in the third trimester.

Integration of Business Functions- 10 credits

Managers operate within increasingly complex and changing organisational and contextual circumstances, whether in the market, public or ‘third’ sectors and irrespective of the size of their organisations or the types of goods or services these enterprises produce for their customers or clients. This introductory module provides learners with an understanding of the principal internal and external environmental contexts of contemporary organisations, including the managerial and business context, within which businesses operate. These areas will be explored in more depth in other modules. The primary purpose of this module is to introduce learners to these concepts.

This module also introduces learners to a number of business structures, cultures and the political, social, economic, technological, legal and ethical considerations affecting business.

The module explores the question ‘What is a business?’ It investigates business functions including human resource management, accounting and finance, operations and marketing and considers the linkages between them and the challenges experienced in managing across functional boundaries.

This module seeks to provide an integrated and critical understanding of businesses and their core business functions including internal and external factors which impact on them. It enables learners to analyse how these functions operate in a real life context by utilising business case studies and online activities accessed through the UWS ‘MBA online interactive learning world’ website which bring together all the various functional elements to emulate 'real world' issues that need to be addressed. Specific scenarios will be created to simulate issues that impact on the on the overall success of the business.

Analytical Thinking and Decision Making – 20 credits

This module introduces students to decision making theory and the tools that might be used to aid decision making and problem solving. It will equip the student to develop an understanding of different approaches to analytical decision making. Students will develop the ability to gather relevant information and identify key issues from a base of information; relating and comparing data from different sources. They will develop the knowledge and skills to identify cause - effect relationships; determine and evaluate risk and draw conclusions use different analytical decision making techniques to support analytical thinking and problem solving required in complex decision making.

The module will enable students to focus on the definition of opportunities and develop and implement sound solutions. They will identify critical issues and implement recommendations; understanding the different roles and responsibilities of the individuals in decisive decision making.

Managing Organisational Health- 20 credits

This module considers organisational performance. Students are introduced to evaluating organisational performance and the external and internal measures that might be used. Students will analyse and evaluate organisations (at different levels) so that they can become more competitive. The module will consider the link between performance and organisational direction, goals and objectives. Students will reflect on how organisational objectives are met, the role of systems for managing performance, the tools for managing performance.

A holistic view of managing performance (economy, efficiency, effectiveness, equity and efficacy) is taken. It is important for all organisations to perform well and make the best use of their resources and as a result managers are not only judged on the profit they make but how that profit has been made. More organisations are now more open to criticism and may face legal challenges for their activities. There are many internal/external influences on organisational health. Structure, culture, appropriate systems/processes, internal performance measures, managing stakeholders needs and internal politics are typical influences.

Creativity and Business Wealth -20 credits

This module considers how creativity and innovation lead to sustainable business. Students will develop an appreciation of the culture, behaviour structures, systems, procedures and policies that develop and sustain innovation.

The module will also explore the application of creative problem solving and the process of creativity and innovation with an emphasis on the role of team leadership and management and their influence on corporate culture.

Students will become familiar with the tools and processes that will enable them to become more creative, innovative and entrepreneurial/intrapreneurial in their business attitudes and practices.

Influencing Organisational Strategy – 20 credits

This module will consider the role of managers in shaping and crafting strategy. Students will develop knowledge of strategy and strategic management. Students will explore the strategy development process and how organisations might respond to factors that influence their intended strategies.

Content – strategy, strategic management, factors influencing strategy development and implementation. The topics covered range across a number of areas - the role and tasks of top management, the nature of strategic management, strategic change and decisions. Other areas include business policy, organisational analysis, competitive position, SWOT analysis, value chain analysis, comparative analysis, resource led strategy examining the role of people, technology and information management on strategy. Influences on strategy include social and political influence, organisational objectives, power. Students learn about strategic choice, generic strategies, strategy development, techniques and approaches to strategy evaluation. The difficult task of strategy implementation, planning and resource allocation are reviewed and discussed. The role of organisation structure, systems and culture in strategy development are also investigated. Managing strategic change is also covered in this module.

Strategic Business Project – 60 credits

This module is designed to develop the research skills, knowledge and confidence in designing, developing, compiling and delivering strategic business projects. Working with an identified host organisation, the student will investigate and produce recommendations in a practical business environment.

Initially, students will participate in a series of workshops which will equip them with knowledge and understanding of a range of business research methods and techniques.

Thereafter students will submit their research proposals and undertake the data collection for the project. Each student is allocated a suitable supervisor with whom they communicate directly throughout the Masters stage.

Option Modules

Options will only run if there is sufficient student demand. Each option has 10 credits.

Global Financial Systems

This module considers the role of the financial services industry in modern society. It introduces students to the various monetary and financial markets that exist globally and examines their structure, operations and products. The module also examines the importance that regulation plays in ensuring that these markets perform efficiently and effectively, drawing on the experiences learned from the financial crisis of the latter part of the last decade.

The module will help students to understand the interaction between the various financial institutions, regulators and financial users who operate within these market systems.

Advanced Financial Functions

This module introduces students to key strategic concepts in the planning and management of organisational resources. Students will develop knowledge of a range of techniques that underpin capital investment decisions and will critically appraise the role of budgets in achieving strategic organisational objectives. Use of case studies enables students to apply techniques to analyse complex information and make decisions consistent with wider organisational objectives.

The module content includes-- Capital investment appraisal (traditional and present value approaches, dealing with risk and uncertainty), budgeting (incremental, rolling, zero-based, activity based, Beyond Budgeting, behavioural and cultural contexts) and case study work to apply appropriate analytical techniques

Leading Change

Leaders create a vision of the future and position the organisation to move forward towards this new future. On this journey the leader uses a range of tools to guide the process. This module addresses how leadership influences organisational success, creating and inspiring the future vision of the sustainable organisation. It reflects on the development of leadership theory and evaluates the tools employed by leaders in problem solving and organisational transformation.

Influencing Organisational Culture and Change

This module introduces the student to the theory and practice of managing organisational culture and change. Viewed as a key management skill, the ability to manage and lead change is critical to organisational success and plays a crucial role in supporting creativity and innovation. As well as gaining a perspective on the need for organisations to embrace change as a way of gaining competitive advantage, the student is given insight, via case studies, into the practical aspects of managing change and the essential tools for successful implementation. The student is required to analyse a specific change scenario and make associated recommendations. In addition the student is expected to reflect on their own abilities in relation to managing the process of change

Business Creativity

This module is designed to enable the student to explore the role of creativity, both as an individual skill and within the organisational context. As well as developing knowledge and understanding of the importance of creativity in the organisational process, the module introduces students to a number of creativity tools and practical techniques to enhance individual and group creativity which can be applied in a number of business settings.

Using examples from the business environment, the module will introduce the students to approaches adopted to develop their ability to think creatively in problem solving and innovation relevant to product and business development.

The class is highly practical offering a range of opportunities for students to apply the skills and techniques learned in a range of business situations. Using ‘real’ examples, presented by the business community, the student will undertake a variety of practical exercises which enable them to develop and practice the skills developed within class and present their solutions to the relevant organisations.

New Venture Creation

This module will provide students with the opportunity to identify and evaluate new business ideas/business models. Students will reflect on what it takes to generate and develop up a new business. Students will consider the skills and networks required to gain support for new business ideas.

Designed to encourage a high level of experiential learning, this module engages students in the practical and creative process of new venture formation. It requires students to take a holistic view of their current studies and past business experience to identify a scalable business idea.

A strong theoretical underpinning of the practical issues facing entrepreneurs will form the foundation of the module and students are expected to make important connections between key disciplines such as: marketing, finance, financial planning, human resources, the host country’s legal environment and basic research methods.

Distance Learning Only Option Modules:

Risk, Crisis and Resilience

This module will introduce students to the concepts of risk, crisis and resilience.  It will be of particular interest to students who may have to manage risk and security related activities within an organisational context, and will introduce the concept of risk from a variety of theoretical perspectives.  These theoretical perspectives will then be evaluated against a number of critical case studies of organisational success and failure.

You will also look at strategies for evaluating risks, and contrasting these with methods for operational risk management.  The module will reflect the role of business continuity planning, crisis management, leadership and decision making in building a resilient organization.  Issues such as reputation, whistle blowing, security, exercising and training will be considered in some detail as will the type of organization and its primary function.

This module will be of key interest to anyone in a leadership position and essential to anyone directly involved in managing compliance, strategic and operational risk.

Responding to Public Health Challenges

This module will be of interest to those who are working within the Health industry. Students will explore the policy context and its intended impact (Scottish Government, 2011; WHO, 2009;), developed across sectors to address, improve health and tackle health inequalities (Walker & John, 2012; WHO, 2012). It will allow an insight into some of the measures used in determining trends and patterns in population health, including epidemiology and health statistics, as well as a number of contemporary approaches in addressing health concerns (Douglas, 2010).

4 Virtual Learning Environment - MBA Online World (MBAOW)

UWS uses two virtual learning sites Moodle and the MBAOW.

For your studies most of the information you need will be on the MBAOW, this is the dedicated site for the MBA, all your MBA materials and assessments are on this site.

To access the MBAOW - All logins are via the page at http://mba.uws.ac.uk.

To login to MBAOW, Moodle and Student email, you need to enter your username (Banner ID) and password.  The initial password would be UWS followed by the first four characters of your surname, then 789!  So for example if your surname was Smith, it would be UWSSmit789!

After you have logged in for the first time, for security purposes you should log onto the password manager (https://passwordmanager.uws.ac.uk/) and change to something you will easily remember. 

After you have logged in for the first time, please email [email protected] and request for your modules to be added to your desktop.

Moodle

Moodle is the main VLE for most of the UWS programmes and provides online, 24/7 access to information and materials. Each School also has an ‘Info Site’ which contains important School information and announcements.

To login go to http://moodle.uws.ac.uk and enter your username (Banner ID) and password (your normal computer password).

A student guide to Moodle is available at https://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/supporting-your-studies/moodle-myday-myjourney/

For password resets you need to contact the student HUB, [email protected]

5 Professional Accreditation

This programme is currently being mapped by the Chartered Management Institute (CMI).

6 Work Based Learning

Work-based learning is not a formal part of this programme. We do encourage you to engage in CPD that builds your CV with work-based experience where possible.

7 External Examiner Reports

The University appoints external examiners to support the University in the maintenance and benchmarking of academic standards. External examiners may be appointed to Subject Panels or Progression and Awards Boards.

Each External Examiner provides an annual report. UWS students should contact their Programme Leader if they wish to request a copy of an appropriate external examiner report.

C KEY CONTACTS

1 Staff

Academic Programme Leader

Tom Keegan Email: [email protected]

Room 626, Hamilton campus Tel: 01698 283100 Ext 8600

MBA Programme Administrator

Fiona Jones Email: [email protected]

Room G103, Gardiner Building Tel: 0141 848 3218

Paisley Campus.

The Programme Administrator assists the Programme Leader and is responsible for the day-to-day administration of the programme.

Those undertaking their programme at Knowledge Universe, a TNE Collaborative partner of UWS for the delivery of the Top Up MBA (Strategic Business Project, 60 credits only)

Point of contact are as follows:

Academic Director

Associate Professor Dr Chan Chee Seng Email: [email protected]

Mobile number: +6 0123293598

MBA Programme Administrator

Ms Malini G Email: [email protected]

Tel: +6 03 79316337

Module Co-ordinators

Each Module Co-ordinator is responsible for the specification, verification, delivery and academic suitability of learning materials within her/his subject area. The Module Co-ordinator is also responsible for the provision of all elements of assessment within the subject area and of providing appropriate academic student support.

Contact Details for UWS Module Co-ordinators

Module Title

Module

Co-ordinator

Contact

Integration of Business Functions

Dr Tom Keegan

[email protected]

01698 283100 (8600)

Influencing Organisational Strategy

Dr Ying Ding

[email protected]

0141 848 3506

Analytical Thinking and Decision Making

Dan Perry

[email protected]

01698 283100 (8314)

Managing Organisational Health

Dr Bobby Mackie

[email protected]

01698 283100 (8419)

Creativity and Business Wealth

Dr Nick Telford

[email protected]

0141 849 4104

Advanced Financial Functions

Dr Xin Guo

[email protected]

01698 283100 (8268 )

Global Financial Systems

Dr.Firdu Gemech

[email protected]

0141 848 3393

Leading Change

Dr. Christian Harrison

[email protected]

01698 283100 (ext 8509)

Influencing Organisational Culture & Change

AnneClare Gillon

[email protected]

0141 848 3465

New Venture Creation

Joan Scott

[email protected]

01387 345848

Business Creativity

Dr Nick Telford

[email protected]

0141 849 4104

Risk, Crisis and Resilience

Prof Edward Borodzicz

[email protected]

0141 848 3402

Responding to Public Health Challenges

Clair Graham

[email protected]

01698 283100 (ext 8657)

MBA Strategic Business Project

Nondas Pitticas

[email protected]

0141 848 3471

2 Personal Tutors

Students will be allocated a personal tutor at the start of the programme. Students should meet with their personal tutor at least twice per trimester when progress and progression through the programme will be discussed.

A personal tutor is a named member of staff who will provide academic, pastoral and developmental support and guidance as it affects the student’s ability to successfully complete their studies.

Personal Tutors should provide support for the students’ learning in a broad sense in the spirit of equal opportunities. Support and guidance should be fair and non- discriminatory, delivered sensitively, objectively and in a non-judgemental manner that recognises and responds to a diversity of needs and situations.

Staff undertaking the role of the Personal Tutor understand the scope of the role and recognise boundaries to the support and guidance they are required to give. Personal Tutors may not be qualified to provide specialist care and are not expected to do so but should be able to refer to the appropriate specialist service.

The Personal Tutor will be proactive in engaging the student by making the first contact with their personal tutees. Where possible this should be face to face; email and telephone contacts may be appropriate later. Students should have access to a Personal Tutor at a formal session at least once per trimester to help students set realistic and achievable goals and development targets. Students will be expected to engage with their Personal Tutor as agreed.

Your Personal Tutor for the MBA is Associate Professor Dr Chan Chee Seng.

Project Supervisor

A Project supervisor is responsible for providing academic support to students allocated to them at the MBA stage. In addition to the academic support you will be supported by an organisational mentor

3 School Offices

Administrative staff in the School Offices can assist you with general enquiries on, for example, timetables, absence reporting, staff contacts and more.

Distance learning and TNE students should contact the MBA administrator through email at [email protected], or on the Paisley telephone number.

Telephone

Location

01698 894405

Hamilton

0141 848 3047

London

0141 848 3932

Paisley (For distance learning and TNE)

4 Student Representatives

At the start of Term 1 Programme Leaders will ask for volunteers to act as Student Representatives for their Programme year group at each campus. Student Reps gather feedback from their year group and liaise with staff to improve the overall learning and teaching experience for the programme. In the first instance Student Reps will attend:

· Student/Staff Liaison Group meetings: a forum for students and staff to discuss student-led agendas on learning and teaching issues.

Thereafter, there is opportunity to become involved with other School-based committees such as the programme Board, School forums and the School Board.

There are training and development opportunities for Student Reps throughout the year provided by the Students Association (SAUWS)

To find out how to become a Student Rep or how to contact the Student Rep for each Programme:

· Visit the School ‘Info Site’ on Moodle at http://moodle.uws.ac.uk.

· Contact the Student Representative Co-ordinator, Students’ Association – [email protected].

D KEY INFORMATION

1 School Info Site on Moodle

Each School has an ‘Info Site’ on Moodle – http://moodle.uws.ac.uk – which contains important School information, announcements and documents.

2 Programme Info Site on Moodle

The information site for the MBA is on the MBAOW.

3 Student Email

Every student is given a UWS student email account in the form of [email protected]. It is every student’s responsibility to check their student email account regularly as important information from lecturers and other staff will be sent to this address.

Details of how to login and forward emails from your student email account to another personal account can be found at https://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/it-printing/email-access-office-365-tools/

4 Self-Service Banner

Students can login to Self-Service Banner to enrol online and to access their student records and module results for each year. https://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/supporting-your-studies/exams-assessment-appeals/exam-results-gpa/

5 Maps

Campus maps and details of parking / local transport routes can be found at:

Ayr http://www.uws.ac.uk/about-uws/campuses/ayr/location-and-travel/

Dumfries https://www.uws.ac.uk/university-life/campuses/dumfries-campus/

Lanarkshire https://www.uws.ac.uk/university-life/campuses/lanarkshire-campus/

Paisley http://www.uws.ac.uk/about-uws/campuses/paisley/location-and-travel/

London http://www.uws.ac.uk/london/

E ACADEMIC ENGAGEMENT and AUTHORISED INTERRUPTION

1 Academic Engagement

The University is committed to providing a supportive learning environment that actively facilitates student success. The University will monitor each student’s personal engagement and attendance individually and will consider the situation of individual students on a case by case basis whilst ensuring consistency and clarity across the student population.

Full details of the engagement requirements for this programme can be found under on the programme MBAOW site. Any specific requirements for individual modules will also be advised by the module co-ordinator.

The University’s Academic Engagement and Attendance Procedure can be found here.

2 Authorised Absence

Students may be allowed a period of Authorised Interruption of Study, approved by the Dean of School. (See Regulation 1.62-1.63 for more details).

For short term absence, students should notify their School Office, and their module tutor, immediately (see section C3 School Offices above).

F EXAMS AND ASSESSMENT

1 University Regulatory Framework

The University Regulatory Framework is published each year following approval at Senate. All students are bound by the current set of regulations published on 1st August each year. The regulations for assessment can be found in Chapter 3 at: https://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/supporting-your-studies/your-rights-responsibilities/regulatory-framework/

Information on exams and assessment can be found at https://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/supporting-your-studies/exams-assessment-appeals/

Information on results and decisions can be found at:

https://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/supporting-your-studies/exams-assessment-appeals/exam-results-gpa/

2 Assessment Information

Please refer to the individual Module Descriptors which you will find at

http://psmd.uws.ac.uk/

Further information may be provided on your module or MBAOW site.

3 Marking and Grading

The University marking and grading scheme can be found at

https://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/supporting-your-studies/your-rights-responsibilities/regulatory-framework/

The University‘s regulations on assessment and reassessment applies to all programmes: See Chapter 3 of Regulatory Framework.

For Postgraduate programmes/modules at SCQF level 11 or 12

· A pass in a module will require an overall mark of 50% on aggregate, together with a mean mark of not less than 40% in each main category of assessment, i.e. practical or coursework or exam.

To illustrate this there are a couple of examples in the table below. The module below has assessment where the final mark is made up from 50% Exam and 50% Coursework.

Exam Mark

Coursework Mark

Final Mark

Result

Postgraduate (levels 11-12)

50%

50%

50%

Pass

44%

50%

47%

Resit -Exam

45%

45%

45%

Re-sit both Exam and Coursework

40%

60%

50%

Pass

35%

65%

50%

Resit Exam

All student work that contributes to a module mark and grade is assessed according to the following standard marking and grading scheme. Grade points are then allocated automatically as follows:

Grade

Numerical Range

Grade Points

A1

90-100

4.0

A2

80-89

3.5

A3

70-79

3.0

B1

60-69

2.5

B2

50-59

2.0

C

40-49

1.5

D

30-39

1.0

E

1-29

0.5

N

0

0

(See Regulation 3.18)

Award of Distinction

See Regulations 3.25-3.26 for criteria for Distinction.

Progression

The normal criterion for progression from SCQF Level 7 to Level 8 (year 1 to year 2) and from SCQF Level 8 to Level 9 (year 2 to year 3) is that you pass all the modules in your year. You may be permitted to progress with credit deficit of up to 40 credits points.

Progression with credit deficit is not normally permitted from SCQF level 9 to SCQF level 10.

Please refer to Regulation 3.13 and 3.14 for further details –

https://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/supporting-your-studies/your-rights-responsibilities/regulatory-framework/

4 Submission of Coursework

All text based coursework assignments should be submitted via Turnitin to detect possible plagiarism. .

Students will be given further information on coursework briefs and instructions on how to access Turnitin/Feedback Studio.

It is the student’s responsibility to retain a copy of any submitted coursework.

Please note that if you fail to submit any of your elements of assessment and do not submit an extenuating circumstances statement, this will result in a ‘Non Submission’. Regulation 3.40 advises that all assessments for a module must be completed within two years of first taking the module.

https://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/supporting-your-studies/your-rights-responsibilities/regulatory-framework/

Core modules

Core modules serve a fundamental role within the curriculum for a programme of study, and achievement of the credits attached to these modules is essential for the conferment of the award.

If you fail core modules and cannot progress in your programme of study, you may be eligible for a Combined Studies exit award

(see Regulation 1.61)

5 Cheating and Plagiarism

Cheating and plagiarism are defined by the University as the attempt to gain an unfair advantage in an assessment by gaining credit for work of another person or by accessing unauthorised material relating to assessment.

See Regulations 3.49-3.55. https://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/supporting-your-studies/your-rights-responsibilities/regulatory-framework/

6 Extenuating Circumstances

The University recognises that, from time to time, you may encounter issues which may prevent you from being able to submit or undertake an assessment. Where this is the case, you can submit an Extenuating Circumstances Statement (ECS) for consideration. The ECS will be forwarded to the University’s Subject Panel who will take account of this declaration in recording your module marks.

It is imperative to note that when you submit an ECS related to a particular coursework, examination or class test, you are confirming that any mark achieved for that coursework, examination or class test should not be counted. You have the right to amend or withdraw* your statement up until the deadline. However, following the deadline, any submitted statement cannot be amended or appealed.

*Please note that to withdraw your statement, you have to email [email protected] . This will ensure that a date and time are recorded for your withdrawal to ensure that it has been made within the time period stated above.

When submitting or withdrawing an ECS, it is essential that this is completed within 48 hours of the assessment date, including weekends, e.g. if your assessment is due on a Friday, you must submit or withdraw your ECS by the Sunday at the latest.

Please note that Extenuating Circumstances does NOT include the following: Requests for extensions to assignment deadlines or for other resit opportunities that fall within the normal timeframe of the module (usually one whole term). These should continue to be submitted directly to the relevant module coordinator or other named person in your School.

Information on personal and medical circumstances that entail absence from classes. These should also continue to be submitted to those nominated in your School or programme of study.

Please refer to the ECS guidance via the following link for further information https://www.uws.ac.uk/media/4071/uws_extenuating_circumstances_guidance_notes_17-18.pdf

The University's Extenuating Circumstances Statements process is online and can be accessed via self-service banner.

If you require assistance with this process you can seek help from the Students' Association www.sauws.org.uk/advice, or contact staff at the Student Hub or Student Link on your campus. If you have any problems accessing the online procedure or documentation, please email [email protected]  

7 Student Appeals

A student appeal is defined as a request to review a decision of an academic body charged with making decisions on student engagement, assessment, progression, awards and student disciplinary cases. See Chapter 5 of Regulatory Framework and Appeals procedure.

Before submitting an appeal it is important that you refer to the Appeals FAQS.  Please refer to information available via the following link:

https://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/supporting-your-studies/exams-assessment-appeals/academic-appeals-extenuating-circumstances/

8 Dealing with issues, concerns and complaints

At UWS we are committed to providing the highest level of service to our students. However, the University recognises that, on occasion, problems or difficulties can be experienced by students in their programme.

If you have an issue, concern or problem you are encouraged to raise it with the School or Support Department in which the issue arose. The purpose of this frontline resolution is to attempt to resolve your problem as quickly as possible.

In order to give your School the opportunity to investigate any difficulty you are having with the teaching, assessment or experience on your programme, you need to discuss the problem as soon as possible with any (or all) of the following:

· The lecturers on your modules

· Your Personal Tutor

· Your Programme Leader

· The School’s Education Adviser

Where you have discussed your problem with the relevant member of staff, we would expect the member of staff to investigate the issue and where appropriate look to find ways to resolve your difficulty and improve the experience you are having on your programme.

However, if you still find the issue isn’t being resolved you should contact the Assistant Dean (Education) in your School.

If after following this course of action your issue or problem hasn’t been dealt with, then you can raise a formal complaint.

Further information is available via the following link https://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/supporting-your-studies/complaints/

9 Higher Education Achievement Report (HEAR)

The University is committed to recognising the diverse range of learning experiences that students gain during their time at UWS. We have therefore introduced a new kind of degree transcript: the Higher Education Achievement Report or ‘HEAR’.

The HEAR will be given to all undergraduate students on their graduation and will show their academic achievements as well as any other extra-curricular activities that they participated in whilst an undergraduate. These can include ambassador work, involvement in societies at committee level, student representation and volunteering. Find out more at https://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/supporting-your-studies/student-records/higher-education-achievement-report-hear/

G HEALTH AND SAFETY IN THE SCHOOL

All students should be aware that they have a legal responsibility to work safely at all times and not to endanger themselves or other persons who may be affected by their acts and omissions.

University health and safety information and resources for students can be found at www.uws.ac.uk/health.

Additionally, students must follow the School’s health and safety rules, including any risk assessments specific to the work they are carrying out, whether that work is within the University or as part of a fieldwork activity. Students may not deviate from the laboratory protocols, method statements or Demonstrator/Lecturer's instructions as these are based on assessment and control of risk.

School / Programme specific health and safety information can be found on the School ‘Info Site’ on Moodle at https://moodle.uws.ac.uk.

Students must attend all health and safety training offered by the School and use any personal protective equipment required.

H STUDENT INFORMATION AND SUPPORT: USEFUL WEBLINKS

1 Your Library

There are library spaces on each campus, with a variety of study areas designed to suit your needs from silent to group study. An extensive collection of books and journals are available. More information available at www.uws.ac.uk/library.

2 Research Study Guide

The research study guide for post graduate students can be found on the following page: https://www.uws.ac.uk/research/graduate-school-doctoral-research-academy/

3 Information, Technology and Digital Services

ITDS provide information and support for systems and services such as: student email; self-service Banner; Moodle; Wi-Fi; software; equipment; and more. More information on how to access these services are at http://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/it-and-printing-services/access-to-services

4 Student HUB

The HUB (Student Link on Ayr & Dumfries Campuses) is the first point of contact for all student services and student administration queries. All students can access the following services via the Student Hub:

· Academic Skills

· Careers

· Counselling

· Disability Service (including Assistive Technology)

· Funding & Advice (including appeals and extenuating circumstances guidance)

· Information Technology & Digital Services 

· International Student Support

· Library Services (Lanarkshire Hub only)

· Multi-Faith Chaplaincy

· Finance (including payments)

· Student Administration (including ID cards)

The Hub portal hub.uws.ac.uk provides an easy way to access frequently asked questions about all these services. You can find out how to update information on your student record and how to request a status letter or academic transcript. You can also ask a question, request appointments or arrange support with our Student Services.

You can find more information at https://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/supporting-your-health-wellbeing/the-hub-student-link/

5 Careers and Skills

This team provide professional career education, advice and guidance, and support with academic skills development. You can find out more at www.uws.ac.uk/careersandskills

6 Disability Service

The Disability Service offers advice and support to all students with any disability, specific learning difficulty (e.g. dyslexia) or long-term health condition.  More information is available at https://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/supporting-your-health-wellbeing/disability/

7 Funding and Money Advice

This service offers advice on the availability of support to help you meet the cost of studying and to help you make the most of your money during your studies. You will find information at www.uws.ac.uk/fundingadvice

8 Well-being and Counselling Service

If you are experiencing any personal problems or difficulties, you can make a confidential Well-Being appointment at the Hub or Student Link on your campus or by email to [email protected].  At your Well-being appointment, a qualified counsellor, will explore what support you would find most useful in dealing with your concerns. For more information and self-help resources go to  www.uws.ac.uk/counselling   

In addition you can use Silvercloud (https://uws.silvercloudhealth.com/signup ) for on-line support with a range of issues.

9 Advice for International Students

The International Student Support Team can assist with the following: Student Immigration and Tier 4 visas; Travel advice; financial queries; Relative visits; Working in the UK and Welfare. For more information go to https://www.uws.ac.uk/international/ or access our frequently asked questions on the Hub Portal hub.uws.ac.uk

10 Multi-Faith Chaplaincy

Our multi-faith Chaplaincy team offer support, motivation and friendship to all students. They take a student-centred approach to helping students with their spiritual, religious and pastoral needs. For more information go to www.uws.ac.uk/multifaithchaplaincy

11 Exchange Programmes

The partnerships the University has with institutions across Europe, within the Erasmus + programme, and the United States, allow students to study abroad and experience the many benefits of living in another country. Further information on Exchange Programmes is available at https://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/study-abroad/erasmusplus-opportunities/

12 SAUWS

The Students’ Association at UWS exists to better the lives of those studying at the University. It provides a range of services to benefit students including sports clubs, societies and social spaces. The Students Association can also help you if you are experiencing any difficulties on your course or at university generally. Visit the Students’ Association website at http://www.sauws.org.uk/

13 Accommodation

This link provides information on University Accommodation Unit https://www.uws.ac.uk/university-life/accommodation/

14 Health and Safety Matters

A range of health and safety information for students at UWS can be found at www.uws.ac.uk/health. If you are new to UWS and have not already registered with a doctor you should do so now. The list of GP practices close to the university campuses can be found at https://www.nhsinform.scot/national-service-directory

15 University Student Surveys

Throughout your period of study at the university you may be asked to participate in several important surveys. More information available at https://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/supporting-your-studies/surveys/

16 Accessibility Guidelines for print, electronic and web based Information

Senate has approved minimum standards which must be met in relation to all materials and documents for students.

All printed documents must be made available, on request, in alternate formats. All documents should be clearly marked to indicate that they are available in alternate formats and give a point of contact for securing the document in the desired format.

Web based material must also meet accessibility guidelines. If you encounter any difficulties in accessing printed or web material, please contact your Programme Leader or Module Co-ordinator.

Student Services is also able to offer advice on accessibility requirements: [email protected].

Term Dates 2018/19

Term 1 commences

Monday 3rd September 2018

Formal examination period

Monday 10th –Saturday 15th December 2018

Term 1 ends

Saturday 15th December 2018

University Closed

Monday 24th December– Wednesday 2nd January 2019

University re-opens

Wednesday 3rd January 2019

Term 2 commences

Monday 7th January 2019

Spring break for students

Monday 1st – Saturday 13th April 2019

Term 2 continues

Monday 15th April 2019

Formal examination period

Monday 29th April –

Term 2 ends

Saturday 4th May 2019

Term 3 commences

Tuesday 7th May 2019

Formal examination period

Monday 12th – Saturday 17th August 2019

Term 3 ends

Saturday 17th August 2019

Term 1 commences

Monday 2nd September 2019

*There is also a formal examination opportunity in week 7 of each term

Term dates can be found here

*The University is closed on the following dates

University holiday

Monday 24th December 2018 – Wednesday 2nd January 2019

Public Holiday - Good Friday

Friday 19th April 2019

Public Holiday - Easter Monday

Monday 22nd April 2019

Public Holiday – May Day

Monday 6th May 2019

*Glasgow Fair Monday (Lanarkshire campus)

Monday 15th July 2019

*Paisley Fair Monday (Ayr, Dumfries, paisley campuses)

Monday 5th August 2019

*London campus and TNE and collaborative partners may have different local holidays.

28

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/5. ITDS&MBAOW˵����ָ��/MBAOW Access.ppt

Information, Technology & Digital Services (ITDS)

Student Information Fact Sheet

ITDS Contact Details

Website: http://www.uws.ac.uk/about-uws/services-for-students/ict-services/access-to-services /

Telephone: +44 (0)141 848 3999

Email: [email protected]

 

Network Password

Your network password allows you to access PC’s and thin client devices on UWS campuses.

Your initial password is UWS then your date of birth in the format ddMmmyy e.g. UWS01Jan96. This password must be changed on initial login and every 180 days thereafter. (If you find you cannot access IT resources it is likely that your password needs to be reset. See Self Service Password reset details below or contact [email protected] if you cannot change your password online ).

Network Password

MBA Online World / Moodle Virtual Learning Environments

Your network password is also your password for the MBA Online World and Moodle. So the initial password for the above is the same as your network password. If you change your network password your Moodle and MBA Online World password will also change.

 

  • MBA Online World (MBAOW)

http://uwsonline.courseworker.net or

mba.uws.ac.uk

  • Moodle - Virtual Learning Environment

moodle.uws.ac.uk

 

For both the MBAOW and Moodle your Username is your Banner ID (e.g. B00226556) and your

Password is UWS then your date of birth in the format ddMmmyy e.g. UWS01Jan96 or your network password if you have already changed it.

 

Self Service Network Password Reset

In order to reset your network password online a Self Service Profile must be created first via the following link:

https://sspassword.uws.ac.uk. It is recommended that you create this link upon commencement of your studies with UWS.

Username is uws-student\ followed by your banner ID (e.g. uws-student\b11111111)

Password is your network password (above).

Student Email

student365mail.uws.ac.uk

Username is: [email protected]

Password initially is: UWS plus your date of birth in the format ddMmmyy e.g. UWS01Jan96

Network passwords and student mail passwords are the same initially but do not sync, therefore, when you change one it does not automatically change the other. Students will be prompted to change their student email passwords change every 90 days. Please note that communication with any UWS department must be made via UWS student email.

Self Service Banner – Enrolment and Exam Results

ssb.uws.ac.uk

Username is your Banner ID and MUST have a capital “B”.

PIN is your Date of Birth as a six digit number i.e. DDMMYY

 

For your own security you should reset all passwords on first login.

Password Management

The minimum requirements for passwords are as follows:

• 8 Characters

• UPPER and lowercase letters used

• Either a number or special character included

MBA ONLINE WORLD

  • Dynamic virtual environment
  • Programme-focused content
  • Formation of international groups (Global Classes)

*

MBAOW….

  • A resource for students and tutors.
  • Allows study at your own pace.
  • Has link to core text that is also available as a pdf.
  • Has a work book/study guide for each module that allows students to reflect on their learning.

*

ACCESSING THE MBAOW:

  • The http://mba.uws.ac.uk link takes you to the Online World front page, where you can login via the top right button.

*

LOGGING IN:

  • For both the MBAOW and Moodle your Username is your Banner ID (e.g. B00226556) and your
  • Password is UWS then your date of birth in the format ddMmmyy e.g. UWS01Jan96

*

Your UWS Assigned email

All registered students will be assigned a personal UWS email account

Which you MUST USE in all correspondence with any staff of UWS,

failure to use this email account will result in UWS staff not responding

To your queries.

This protocol must be fully comply with.

Your assigned email will be your Banner ID plus @studentmail.uws.ac.uk

Example [email protected]

MBAOW FRONT PAGE:

  • The MBAOW front page allows you to access a whole host of functions. These will be discussed in more detail during the MBAOW demonstration.

*

UWS LIBRARY

  • Login via: Online World or http://www.uws.ac.uk/about-uws/services-for-students/library/
  • Username and Password is the same as the MBAOW.
  • The most useful electronic search engines for journal articles for MBA students include:
  • Emerald
  • Mintel
  • Wiley
  • Science Direct
  • Taylor and Francis
  • N.B. Always use the ‘Advanced Search’.
  • There are ‘Help’ features in all search engines
  • If an article you want is not available electronically you can require a copy via the inter-library loan scheme..

*

UWS LIBRARY

  • A range of Electronic books are also available.
  • These and other library facilities will be explained during the demonstration.

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

*

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/5. ITDS&MBAOW˵����ָ��/Methodology �C MBA Project (1).pptx

Methodology – MBA Project

Approach

Data collection

Data analysis

Limitations

1

Dr Christian Harrison- MBA project - methodology

Approach

Discuss the theory of research by all means but

Quantitative?

Qualitative?

Both?

If quantitative – why not qualitative? – and vice-versa

2

Dr Christian Harrison - MBA project - methodology

Data Collection 1

Population – size and characteristics

What’s your sample size and its characteristics?

How did you identify your sample?

Is it representative in any way?

Convenience sample – justify

3

Dr Christian Harrison - MBA project - methodology

Data Collection 2

How exactly was the research conducted?

E.g. interviews – how long, where, recorded, derivation of questions (prompts), confidentiality?

E.g. questionnaires – derivation, how issued/administered, how collected?

Piloting – provide detail – if not piloted, why not?

4

Dr Christian Harrison - MBA project - methodology

Data Analysis

How? – give as much detail about how you conducted the analysis as possible

Note – this is different to putting all of your analysis into the project

5

Dr Christian Harrison - MBA project - methodology

Dr Christian Harrison - MBA project - methodology

6

A Steps in analysis B Action
1 Field analysis Note-taking and review
2 Assimilation and initial analysis Transcription and close reading of the case
3 Immersion and sense-making Coding
4 Intra-case analysis Identifying key themes
5 Inter-case analysis Constant comparison
6 Interpretation and explanation Writing-up results

Limitations

Get your retaliation in early

7

Dr Christian Harrison- MBA project - methodology

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/5. ITDS&MBAOW˵����ָ��/Strategic Business Project Module Handbook Latest.doc

image4.png

University of the West of Scotland

School of Business and Enterprise

Strategic Business Project

Module Code: BUSN11076

Module Handbook

Academic Session 2018-19

University of the West of Scotland - Module Handbook

Module Title

Strategic Business Project

Module Coordinator

Dr Nondas Pitticas – [email protected]

MODULE AIMS:

This module is designed to develop the research skills, knowledge and confidence in designing, developing, compiling and delivering strategic business projects. Working with an identified host organisation, the student will investigate and produce recommendations in a practical business environment.

In the first trimester, students will participate in a series of workshops which will equip them with knowledge and understanding of a range of business research methods and techniques. The workshops are supported by learning sets of 4-5 students. Each set will be facilitated by an academic advisor and will be the focus for students developing their project proposals which will form the strategic business project.

In the second trimester students will submit their research proposals and undertake the data collection for the project. The learning sets will continue to provide support and encouragement as well as providing a forum for sharing information and skills.

Thereafter, each student is allocated a suitable supervisor with whom they communicate directly throughout the Masters stage in trimester three. The submitted project should be approximately 10,000 - 15,000 words.

MODULE LEARNING OBJECTIVES:

At the end of this module the student will be able to:

L1. Critically evaluate research approaches and methods in the context of business and management

L2. Critically evaluate the rigor and validity of published research and scholarship and identify areas for further investigation

L3. Gather relevant data, apply appropriate data analysis techniques and present the findings of the analysis in a clear and professional manner

L4. Plan and design an MBA project in a relevant business area

L5. Demonstrate a high level of competence in undertaking and producing a strategic business project in a clear, logical and professional manner

MODULE TEXTS

We would like to be able to recommend one book but, given the scope and level of the module, this is not possible. The MBA Online World materials are useful and provide a starting point for your journey into research. Other important books include:

Jankowicz. A. D., (2005) Business Research Projects. (4th ed). Thomson. London

Wilson, A. (2010) Essentials of Business Research. Sage. London

Paper and electronic copies of the textbooks are also available for lending in your campus library.

The section below provides a detailed description of the module

CONTENTS

Section 1: Introduction

1.1 Independent Learning

1.2 Management Skills

1.3 Self-Management

1.4 Time Management

1.5 Managing the Research

1.6 Managing Relationships

1.7 Resources Available to Help You

1.8 Passing this module – What You are Required to Produce

Section 2: The Strategic Project Proposal

2.1 What is a strategic project proposal?

2.2 The structure of a project proposal

2.3 Contact details and project title

2.4 Purpose of the project

2.5 Relevant past studies – a preliminary literature review

2.6 Sources of data

2.7 Proposed methodology

2.8 Anticipated problems

2.9 Expected schedule

Section 3: Supervision Procedures and Rules Governing Supervision

3.1 Supervision expectations

3.2 Rules governing contact with supervisors

3.3 Ethical considerations

Section 4: SUBMISSION AND MARKING GUIDELINES

4.1 Submission of draft research project

4.2 Submission of final research project

4.3 Marking guidelines

4.4 Reference and presentation requirements

Appendices

Appendix 1: Progress report

Appendix 2: UWS policy on plagiarism

Appendix 3: Ethical requirements

Appendix 4: Project title page

Appendix 5: Internal examiner’s report form

Appendix 6: Reference requirements

Appendix 7: Guidelines for the layout of the MBA project SECTION 1: INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on progressing to the MBA Project module! You will be allocated a supervisor who will offer you advice on how to build on your research proposal to produce a project that will hopefully lead to your being awarded the title of MBA. However, before a supervisor is appointed you are required to submit a research proposal. This is a vital building block in this module which will help achieve two key aims:

· it will enable you to clarify your thinking about the subject of your research project, and,

· it will enable us to allocate a suitable supervisor to you.

If for any reason, you require to change your topic after you have been allocated a supervisor, this must be discussed, approved, agreed and recorded by your supervisor. It is important that you are aware that projects will not be accepted where there has been a change of topic and the changes have not been communicated to the relevant personnel.

Please note that this handbook concentrates on the ‘operational’ issues associated with the MBA Project. It should, therefore, be read in conjunction with the guidance given on the Online World.

1.1 Independent Learning

The first fact that you need to take on board is that your project is an independent research project: this makes it both an exciting challenge yet possibly a daunting task.

It is an exciting challenge because it gives you the opportunity to develop your project proposal into a project that comprises an in-depth investigation of a topic that is largely your own choice.

There are two reasons why a project may, at this stage, seem daunting.

First, it requires you to be self-motivated and highly independent. Your supervisor is there to aid in this task. But you need to be clear that offering advice is their role, and that you, not they, are responsible for the production of the project within the required timescale.

Second, because the project is likely the single largest piece of work with the longest timescale that you are required to undertake, it contributes substantially to your final MBA mark. Remember, the responsibility for the progress of your work is yours, not your supervisors.

The benefit of undertaking a project are many, and usually, students find this element of their programme the most rewarding. This is because of the breadth and depth of learning that takes place covering both the subject matter and the project process.

Despite these obvious benefits there will be times when difficulties arise, and you may not know what you are meant to be doing! Do not worry about these times as they are part of the experience of undertaking a large piece of independent learning. There is no need to panic as this project handbook is specifically designed to help you manage these feelings!

The handbook tells you how the process is organised by the School of Business and Enterprise as well as informing you about the resources that are available to help you. A key focus in this handbook is your strategic project proposal as we want you to get off to a good start in this module.

1.2 Management Skills

You will already have some of these skills that have been developed as you progressed through the taught element of your degree. Specifically, for your project, you require self-management and time-management skills, as well as skills related to managing the research and the relationships that you develop with your supervisor and perhaps any fieldwork contacts if that turns out to be part of your project.

1.3 Self-Management

It is important that you organise your research by setting up your own system of information management. Of course, the system that you adopt will be dependent on the nature of your research but, as a general rule, it should include the following:

· Referencing systems – manual or computerised index cards or mini databases

· Filing systems – for correspondence and journal articles

· Systems for storing and updating your work – including a back-up system (memory stick, CD/DVD RWs, etc).

1.4 Time Management

Ask anyone who has completed a MBA project and they will tell you that it takes a lot longer than you would initially expect. So, you need to be clear about your priorities. How you plan your work will, of course, depend on your other work commitments, your family responsibilities, etc. So, it is not possible to tell you exactly how to do this. What is possible however is to advise you that you do need to develop a plan of work that manages your time in a way that works for both you and your supervisor.

1.5 Managing the Research

It is important that you think ahead regarding the planning, organising and monitoring of your work. Your first step will be to produce a project proposal that can and should be used as a template for your project. In your proposal, you are required to compose a set of objectives, a draft literature review and what can be used as the basis for your methodology chapter. Thus, much of the planning of your project should already have been addressed.

However, you also need to plan for

· the development of your literature review,

· the designing of your research instruments (e.g., questionnaires, interviews, format of focus group content), as well as

· the collection and analysis of data, and

· the conclusions and recommendations arising from your work

In other words, identifying and organising the work that needs to be done. The next stage is to regularly monitor (or check) that the research is still on course in terms of the time frame of the work and the task of making changes that may be necessary.

1.6 Managing Relationships

One vitally important relationship you will have to manage is the relationship with your supervisor. Your supervisor is a key contributing factor to your role as an effective and independent researcher. Your supervisor is aware of this and will work hard to maintain a good relationship with you. The most crucial factor from your point of view is to maintain regular and frequent contact and open communication. Problems arise when this advice is not adhered to. These are addressed later in this handbook.

1.7 Resources Available to Help You

There are a number of University resources available to help you.

Primarily these are library resources.

As you will know from the hopefully frequent use you have made of its resources during the taught element of your degree, the Library has a number of resources – in particular, academic journals and electronic databases. Make sure you familiarise yourself with these and with the help available from the library staff.

1.8 Passing this module – What You are Required to Produce

There are two assessed elements to this module. These are the strategic project proposal which is worth 25% of your final mark and the strategic project itself which is worth 75%. As discussed earlier, your research project is the largest single piece of work that you are required to submit. As you progress through the supervised development of this module you will become increasingly self-directed in your research activities. Remember, both required assessments, particularly the research project, which is normally between 10,000-15,000 words in length, is a major challenge. Not only does this module give you an intellectually challenging task over time, but it also gives you the opportunity to produce work that may also be of interest to others including current and future employers. By undertaking this module, you are demonstrating an ability to take personal responsibility for your work and displaying commitment to completing a major task.

Please note that the university uses a grade scale with grades C, D, E and N being fail grades:

A1 90-100

A2 80-89

A3 70-79

B1 60-69

B2 50-59

C 40-49

D 30-39

E 1-29

N 0

To achieve a pass a student must obtain 50% overall. Please note that, there is only one resit each for both assessment components and resit marks will be capped at 50%.

Presentation of Work

1.1 The University operates a very strict policy on plagiarism, details of which are available from your Module Co-ordinator, Panel Chair or Course Leader. All work which is submitted must be the work of the individual student.

1.2 Any coursework submitted after the assignment deadline, without prior permission from the Module Co-ordinator, will be subject to the following penalties:

(a) Where submission is up to one week late, the mark awarded shall be reduced by ten percentage points, so moving the student to the next lower grade;

(b) Where submission is more than one week late, the coursework shall be awarded a mark of zero. However, the examiner must be satisfied that the work submitted would otherwise have been awarded a grade C or better.   

Students who fail to submit coursework and thus fail to satisfy the module regulations will be refused admission to the degree examinations. In effect, these students will be deemed to have withdrawn themselves from the degree course.

SECTION 2: THE STRATEGIC PROJECT PROPOSAL

There are two assessed elements of the module. These are:

· the strategic project proposal which is worth 25% of your final mark, and

· the strategic project itself which is worth 75%.

Guidance on the strategic project is set out in detail in the on-line workbook. Please read this guidance in detail.

Your initial task is to prepare a strategic project proposal and guidance on what is expected of you is given below.

2.1 What is the strategic project proposal?

The proposal stage of your project is critical. If your proposal is good, the rest of your research will fall into place. The purpose of writing a strategic project proposal is for you to:

· draw together your initial ideas into a workable project outline;

· clarify to yourself and to others that your research plans are feasible;

· prepare the groundwork for gathering the data or material that you need; and

· gain approval to proceed with the project itself.

The project proposal will be between 2,500-3,000 words long excluding references and any appendices.

2.2 The structure of a project proposal

Your project proposal must provide detailed information about what you intend to do and how you will go about it. It should contain the following:

· Your contact details and project title

· Purpose of the Project and Reasons for choosing it

· A preliminary literature review – relevant past studies

· Sources of data

· Proposed methodology

· Anticipated problems

· Expected schedule

· References.

2.3 Contact details and project title

The first page of your project proposal must contain the following information:

Your name, Banner registration ID Number, email address, phone number where you can be reached during your project work, and the title of your project.

You need a working title for your strategic research. You may improve on the wording later but make sure the title you begin with means something. Project titles should be reasonably short but still convey clearly to the reader the subject matter of your enquiry and that your project has a focus. For example, “Developing an entry strategy for a new business start-up - the case of XYZ company” is more helpful than “Venture Strategies for start-ups” – this is too general, unfeasible and insufficiently focused. Other good examples are:

“How useful are models in the implementation of a change management strategy? Evidence from the XYZ company”

“Is Porter’s Five Force model still relevant? Evidence from the oil exploration industry?”

“How can recent developments in intranet technology be used to improve sales performance in XYZ company?”

As you can see it is often useful, though not essential, to set out a title as a research question – this stresses to the reader that the project is an exploration of a key business/management issue. The main reason MBA students struggle with their projects is the lack of a coherent single driving question, or one that is far too broad. For example, “Developing a change programme for small firms,” or “How to be successful in business success” are fine aspirations but not one that a strategic project should attempt to pursue. If a project is insufficiently focused it will generally result in a work that lacks coherence and integration.

2.4 Purpose of the project and the reasons for choosing it

You must inform the reader what your project is about. Why you think this area/question is worth investigating? Explain your interest or any previous work you have done on the topic. Also, describe any reading or any personal experience that has led you to want to research on the topic. Do you have a personal interest in this area? Is this an important area in academic terms? Is this area important in terms of your future career aspirations?

Please remember to confine your ambitions to what you really can accomplish in the time available and with the resources at your disposal. Work with existing theories and frameworks. You do not have the time, resources skills or credibility to invent completely new models of business and/or management.

Tip – at this point get into the habit of writing with confidence. Use positive statements which use strong verbs. Avoid weaker verbs.

Strong verbs: analyse, assess, collect, construct, classify, develop, devise, measure, produce, revise, select, synthesise, Weak verbs: appreciate, consider, enquire, learn, know, understand, be aware of,

2.5 A preliminary literature review - relevant past studies

The strategic project you eventually submit will contain a critical literature review. In your project proposal, you are required to demonstrate that you have a good knowledge and understanding of your field of study. You do this by completing a preliminary literature review. This requires you to set out the theories you will draw on to shape your research. To discuss what "leading authorities" in your subject area have to say. You will want to refer to, and where appropriate quote from, key works in your area. This is the largest section of your proposal and the one that requires the most preliminary research. Make sure you use search engines for relevant academic papers before presenting this. You do not need to discuss every work in your area, but you need to present a competent outline of your area of study. This information will help you (a) to develop and support your own views, and (b) to demonstrate to your readers that you are aware of such previous work in your field. Always include references.

Please note that your work on a preliminary literature can be form the basis of the literature review that eventually is included in the strategic project which you submit.

2.6 Sources of data

In this section of your strategic project proposal you will tell the reader about what types of information will be collecting in order to answer your project question(s). Where will you get this data from and how accessible is it? Can you get access to a Company or organisation(s)? There are two kinds of data: primary, which you collect yourself, perhaps by using interviews, questionnaires or observation, and secondary data, which has already been published and collated for some other purpose, such as annual reports, management reports, company surveys or the Internet, and which you can re-analyse to help answer your research question. Be specific about what sources of primary and/or secondary data you will use in your project.

2.7 Proposed methodology

What is your proposed research approach and research strategy? Why have you chosen this methodology? What methods will you use to collect and analyse your data? For example, if you are going to investigate a problem in a particular organisation, what research instruments, such as interviews, questionnaires, personal observations, examination of written records or of systems will you employ and how will you analyse the results? In short, how are you going to get your information and use it in order to answer your project question(s)?

2.8 Anticipated problems

What difficulties might you have to overcome in conducting your project? Is it going to be difficult for you to gain access to the information, either primary or secondary, that you will need? If so, what can you do about it? Can you foresee any other snags that might hinder your work and how do you propose to deal with them? Pre-planning will improve the chances of project success.

2.9 Expected schedule

How long do you expect to take to complete your project? State as precisely as you can:

• the overall time scale, including key milestones e.g. when are you going to conduct your interviews/issue your questionnaires?

• the target date for completion of your first two chapters,

• other deadlines which you intend to set yourself,

• when you expect your final draft to be ready, and the target date for completion of your project.

In considering your schedule of work, you are advised to work back from the final submission date of your project.

2.10 References

In this final section of your proposal set out the references which have been used.

In your academic career to date you may have used a number of different referencing systems. In this respect, please remember that there a number of variations of what is called the Harvard system of referencing and that this can confuse the inexperienced researcher.

To avoid any confusion or doubt, you must set out any references in accordance with the University guidelines which are set out on the library section of the UWS web-site.

Final point - Your proposal should be 2,500-3,000 words. Once your proposal has been submitted it will be marked and supervision will then be arranged.

SECTION 3: SUPERVISION PROCEDURES AND RULES

This section explains the supervisory arrangements as well as University and School of Business rules and procedures that have put in place to help you develop and manage your MBA project

3.1 Supervision expectations

All MBA students are allocated an individual research supervisor with a specific allocation of time. As discussed earlier, you need to manage your relationship with your supervisor. But to do so you need to know what to expect of them and what they expect of you specifically:

What students expect of their supervisors

· To be supervised

· Their work to be read in advance of meetings

· Their supervisor to be available

· Their supervisor to be approachable

· Their supervisor to be constructively critical

· Their supervisor to have a good knowledge of the research process

· That receipt of work sent electronically will be acknowledged within a maximum of a working week except where the supervisor is on approved annual leave.

What supervisors expect of their research students

· That their students be independent learners

· That their students produce and submit work at least 48 hours before any scheduled meetings

· That their students seek advice and comment on their work from peers and others.

· That students listen to advice and make informed decisions before accepting or rejecting it

· That their students accept that it is their responsibility to take the initiative in arranging regular meetings with their supervisors. In the case of remote campus students that they are responsible for the regular electronic transmission of work in progress.

· That students make and keep appointments or give adequate notice (a minimum of 24 hours) of cancellation

· That students be honest when reporting progress

3.2 Procedures and responsibilities

However, there are also a number of points that need to be made regarding the role of a supervisor in terms of their responsibilities to their students. Overall, the role of the supervisor is to guide the student by giving advice on how to complete a good project. More specifically:

The supervisor IS responsible for:

· Collaborating with the student to produce a research timetable

· Advising on the structure of the project and the feasibility of the methodology

· Critiques of draft chapters

· Giving advice regarding submission of the project.

The supervisor IS NOT responsible for:

· Designing the fieldwork

· Editing and proofreading of a student’s project.

· Arrangement of meetings

Please note that the frequency of meetings will be decided between the student and supervisor. At least two Progress Reports (see Appendix 1) will be required and the frequency of these will be the prerogative of the supervisor. Please remember that it is your responsibility, and yours alone, to maintain regular contact with your supervisor. Some comment and advice arise from the above. It is essential that you make use of spell and grammar check. Do not expect that your supervisor will correct your English usage and spelling – that is not their responsibility. What they will do, however, is tell you if your work is deficient in these areas. You are responsible for ensuring that your work is up to the expected standards in these areas.

3.2 Rules governing contact with supervisors

Another area that causes problems is related to the fact that some students, for various reasons, fail to maintain regular contact with their supervisors. This practice can have several outcomes and, depending on severity, can attract penalties.

First, and the least of these, is lack of regular contact, where students have foregone the obvious advantage of their supervisor’s advice at regular intervals during their research is that students may gain a less than optimal mark for their project by ignoring opportunities for feedback on their work.

Second, and a more serious outcome of students failing to maintain regular contact with their supervisors, is that often such students subsequently submit large sections of previously unseen work to their supervisors immediately prior to a submission date when they may find that the work cannot be accepted as the supervisor’s workload is such that they cannot review the work in time for the student to make the submission deadline. It is essential that you do not fall into the trap of expecting your supervisor to attend to your needs to the detriment of other students who have been diligent in maintaining regular contact with their supervisor. The result of missing a submission deadline can have two outcomes. First, when the student is within the maximum time frame for completion of their MBA degree they are required to make a case for an extension. Second, where they have run out of time for submission they will exit the course with a postgraduate diploma award.

The third and most serious outcome of lack of contact with supervisors is where students attempt to submit completely unsupervised projects. Such projects will not be accepted for consideration of the award of MBA, as all MBA projects must be supervised.

Remember regular contact assures the supervisor that the work you are submitting to them is not plagiarised from the work of others. University regulations pertaining to plagiarism are detailed in Appendix 2.

3.3 Ethical considerations

Once your supervisor is appointed you are advised to make contact with him/her as soon as is practicable. An early discussion which you must have with your supervisor is the extent to which ethical approval will be required for your project. There are two broad categories into which an MBA project fits – ‘low risk’ or ‘high risk’. All studies involving human participants, personal data or risk to the investigator requires independent ethical scrutiny; hence, an ethical application is required. This form is shown as Appendix 8. Every student whose project is classified as high risk will need to fill the ethics approval application form in Appendix 8. This is to be done online via the Ethical Review Manager (ERM) system of the School of Business and Enterprise. The URL for this is: https://uws.forms.ethicalreviewmanager.com

All MBA students are required to read the University’s Guidelines for Ethical Practice in Research & Scholarship. These can be found on the University web site. You should consider how ethical concerns may impact upon your research process, your findings and future dissemination of results.

Following a discussion on ethical considerations in relation to your project with your supervisor, you will able to determine whether your project is a low or high risk. Appendix 3 shows the form to be completed if the project is deemed low risk. For low risk projects, you will need to return it to your supervisor for her/his signature after completing it. Thereafter, the supervisor will forward the form to the University.

SECTION 4: SUBMISSION AND MARKING GUIDELINES

4.1 Submission of a draft strategic project

All students who progress to the MBA Strategic Project are given the opportunity of handing in a draft copy of their final document. Your supervisor will advise you in good time as to the latest date when you can do this.

The date(s) set depend upon

allowing sufficient time for your research supervisor to read your draft and comment on it,

and

allowing sufficient time for you to take account of any comments and suggestions made by your supervisor so that you can incorporate any required changes into your final document.

This is an essential stage in any MBA project so make sure that as you approach your submission deadline you discuss and agree the date when you must submit your draft project that will ensure sufficient time for feedback (see also Section 2.3). Remember, that University regulations do not allow resubmission of MBA Projects.

3.2 Submission of final research project

The specific date for handing in your final project is generally dependent upon the trimester of entry. Regardless of what date applies, you will be informed in good time as to the specific date when you are required to submit your work. This date is final and non-negotiable. However, in extenuating circumstances your supervisor may advise you to apply for a short extension. In all cases any extension granted would mean that you will submit for the next cohort’s date after the one that was previously allocated.

All MBA projects are also to be submitted through Turnitin. You should consult with your supervisor if you are unsure how to do this. In addition, all MBA Research projects require to be bound. Students must submit TWO bound copies of their project for internal and external marking purposes.

When you submit your project, you will be asked to complete and sign a declaration (see Appendix 4). This addresses a number of issues. First, whether or not all or any part of your project content contains confidential data. Confidential projects are only read by internal and external examiners and are not made available to others. Second, a declaration related to sourcing that declares that you have not plagiarised the work of others:

I certify that all material in this project which is not my own is duly acknowledged. I have read and understand the University’s policy on plagiarism.

It is therefore essential that you read and understand University regulations pertaining to plagiarism (Appendix 2).

3.3 Marking guidelines

All MBA research projects are double marked. The first marker is your research supervisor. The second marker is another research supervisor. Both markers assess your work independently, only when the project has been read and marked by both assessors independently do they get together to discuss your work and agree a final mark. Should both markers find difficulty in agreeing a final mark, a third marker may be necessary although this is not usually the case. A sample project mark sheet that details the assessment criteria is shown in Appendix 5. A sample of projects is sent to the Programme External Examiner for scrutiny, comment and approval.

It is essential that you are aware that University regulations do not allow staff to disclose the grade awarded for projects to students. The University will communicate final grades and decisions to all students after the Examination Programme panel has been held and scrutiny has taken place. Please do not pester your supervisor in an effort to have them disclose this information to you, as they are duty bound to refuse

3.4 Reference and presentation requirements

Requirements relating to the manner in which you present references are given in Appendix 6. Details of all other presentation requirements (e.g., spacing font size, margins, binding etc) that you must follow are given in Appendix 7. The title page format for the strategic project was shown earlier (Appendix 4).

Appendix 1: MBA Project

Progress Report Number _

Student Name:

Banner ID:

Project Title:

Supervisor:

image1.png

Part 2 – To be completed by Supervisor

1. Please circle as appropriate

Student attendance at meetings:

Unsatisfactory Satisfactory Good

Quality and quantity of written work submitted by student:

Unsatisfactory Satisfactory Good

Overall student progress:

Unsatisfactory Satisfactory Good

2. Any additional comments:

Student:

Supervisor:

Student Signature: Date:

Supervisor’s Signature: Date:

Note to Students:

Remember it is your responsibility to make an appointment with your supervisor to discuss and agree the contents of this form in plenty of time for you to submit by the due date.

Please return this form to by . This form cannot be accepted unless signed by your supervisor.

APPENDIX 2

Details of UWS policy on Cheating and Plagiarism

This may be found at:

http://www.uws.ac.uk/current-students/study/exams-and-assessment/

and the regulations, which may be amended from time-to-time, are set out below.

7.11 Cheating and Plagiarism

7.11.1 Definitions

a) Cheating and plagiarism are defined by the University as the attempt to gain an unfair advantage in an assessment by gaining credit for work of another person or by accessing unauthorised material relating to assessment.

b) Plagiarism is defined further as the use of the work of other students, past or present, or substantial and unacknowledged use of published material presented as the student’s own work. It includes the following:

the extensive use of another person’s material without reference or acknowledgement;

the summarising of another person’s material by changing a few words or altering the order of presentation without reference or acknowledgement;

the substantial and unauthorised use of the ideas of another person without acknowledgement;

copying the work of another student with or without the student’s knowledge or agreement;

deliberate use of commissioned material which is presented as one’s own;

the unacknowledged quotation of phrases from another’s work;

c) Cheating is defined further as inclusive of the following:

communication with or copying from another student during an examination or assessment (except in so far as assessment regulations specifically permit communication, for instance for group assessments);

knowingly introducing any unauthorised materials (written, printed or blank) on or near an examination desk unless expressly permitted by the assessment regulations;

knowingly introducing any electronically stored information into an examination hall unless expressly permitted by the assessment regulations;

obtaining a copy of an 'unseen' written examination paper prior to the date and time of its authorised release;

gaining access to unauthorised material relating to an assessment during or before the assessment;

colluding with another person by submitting work done with another person as entirely one's own work;

collaborating with another student in the completion of work which is intended to be submitted as that other student's own work

knowingly allowing another student to copy one's own work to be submitted as that student's own work;

falsifying data by presenting data of laboratory reports, projects or other assessments as one's own when these data are based on experimental work conducted by another party or obtained by unfair means;

assuming the identity of another person with intent to deceive or to gain unfair advantage;

allowing another person to assume one's own identity with the intention of deceiving or gaining unfair advantage to oneself;

the use of any other form of dishonest practice not identified above;

7.11.2 Procedures

a. Cheating and plagiarism may be regarded as substantial academic irregularities under the University Code of Discipline for Students (Regulation 12) and all instances are liable to be investigated and to be given due consideration under the terms of that Code. (Plagiarism identified in research programmes will be dealt with under Regulation 8.10.)

b) Notwithstanding the above, any suspected case of plagiarism will be referred in the first instance by the member of academic staff concerned to the Chair of a Plagiarism Panel constituted in the relevant academic School.

c) The Chair of the School Plagiarism Panel will be appointed by the Dean of School.

d) The membership of the School Plagiarism Panel will be:

the Chair

two members of academic staff from the School, appointed by the Plagiarism Panel Chair

e) The member of academic staff who refers a case of suspected plagiarism to the Panel must not serve as a member of that Panel for the purpose of giving consideration to this case, but, where required, will attend the Panel for the purpose of presenting evidence.

f) The Plagiarism Panel Chair will inform the student in writing of the alleged offence and of the requirement to attend for interview.

g) The Plagiarism Panel will determine whether an offence has been committed and, if so, whether the offence is minor, serious or major.

h) Where the Panel has determined that a MINOR offence has been committed, the Plagiarism Panel Chair will determine and inform the student of a sanction that will be a requirement that the affected student work is resubmitted:

WITHOUT loss of entitlement to an attempt, and

WITH the determination that the maximum mark assignable for the resubmitted work should be 40%.

i) Where the Panel has determined that a SERIOUS offence has been committed, the Plagiarism Panel Chair will determine and inform the student of a sanction that will be a requirement that the affected student work is resubmitted:

WITH loss of entitlement to an attempt, and

WITH the determination that the maximum mark assignable for the resubmitted work should be 40%.

j) A student will have the right to appeal the decisions of the Plagiarism Panel and its Chair taken under (h and i) above and such appeals will be referred to the Senate Disciplinary Committee (see Regulation 12).

k) Where the Plagiarism Panel has determined that a MAJOR offence has been committed, the Plagiarism Panel Chair will refer the matter to the Senate Disciplinary Committee for consideration under Regulation 12 and will inform the student in writing of this action.

l) The outcome will be communicated by University student email and 1st class post.

APPENDIX 3 ETHICAL REQUIREMENTS

HONOURS/ POSTGRADUATE TAUGHT DISSERTATION –

SESSION 2017-2018

School of Business & Enterprise

Dissertation Registration

Student Name:

Banner ID:

Student E-mail Address:

Provisional Dissertation Title:

Degree Title:

Dissertation Topic:

Please outline your proposed topic.

Methodology:

Please outline your methodology.

Dissertation Access: Please note that if you plan to carry out fieldwork within an organization, then in due course, you will be asked to provide details of the organization and a letter confirming access.

MBA PROJECT

This form must be completed and submitted to your supervisor before any field work is commenced.

· Have you read and incorporated into your research proposal the principles set out in the University’s Guidelines for Ethical Practice in Research & Scholarship?

· Have you considered how ethical concerns may impact upon your research process, its findings and future dissemination?

· Do you feel prepared for possible ethical/political dilemmas that may face you as a student researcher?

· Have you discussed ethical issues (Risk Assessment) with your supervisor/Project Coordinator

You must be able answer YES to these questions.

For “low risk” projects you need to complete this form only.

For “high risk” projects a full application (University Ethics Committee Application) should be submitted for assessment and approval. The Ethics Approval Form and guidelines can be found at http://www.uws.ac.uk/about-uws/overview/university-ethics/

Research Ethics application form must be fully completed and approved before fieldwork can commence.

Research Ethics Declaration:

I hereby declare that I have discussed research ethics with my supervisor and I will conduct my research in a manner set out in the University’s Research Code of Conduct.

Student’s Signature: Date:

I hereby declare that I have discussed research ethics with my supervisee and I am satisfied that this research will not cause harm to the researcher, the research participants or to the University

Supervisor’s Signature: Date:

APPENDIX 4 PROJECT TITLE PAGE

Surname:

First Name:

Initials:

Student ID:

Course Code:

Project Supervisor:

Project Title:

Submission Date:

Please tick appropriate box:

I give permission for my project to be made available for reference in the University of the West of Scotland library.

I do not wish my project to be made available in the University of the West of Scotland library as it contains confidential information.

I certify that all material in this project which is not my own is duly acknowledged. I have read and understand the University’s policy on plagiarism.

The copyright of this project rests with the author. No quotation from it should be published without his/her prior written consent and information derived from it should be acknowledged.

Signed…………………………………………………………………

APPENDIX 5

MBA Project Internal Examiner Report Form

Under each of the headings below would you please give the project a percentage and a margin around it that is indicative of your scope for variation up and down? To assist you, indicative maximum percentages are given under each heading and indications of what is sought in the project are given on page 3.

Having provided marks in each category, consider your overall mark. This mark is a reflection of how well the candidate has performed on the entire task. As such, the overall mark may not be a simple sum of the marks for each section. It is hoped that the margins you noted will inform your final assignment of a mark. Note on page 2 there is space for you to provide a brief, typed report. Please consult with the second examiner to arrive at an agreed mark. Where agreement is not possible please see the Module Coordinator.

Student name

Title of project

MBA Programme

Date:

Percentage

Margin (up to (5%)

Supervisor

Examiner 2

Supervisor

Examiner 2

Abstract, introduction, continuity and presentation (15%)

Literature review (25%)

Methods (20%)

image3.pngResults

Discussion

Conclusion & recommendations

(10%)

Overall mark

Name Supervisor

Mark %

Name Examiner 2

Mark: %

Agreed mark: %

Examiner’s written assessment (Please type. Typically, this would not occupy more than a page.)

In assessing project examiners are asked to consider the following questions:

(I) Introduction

(i) Does the introduction set out the overall aim and reasons for the study?

(ii) Are objectives clearly stated? Are they relevant?

(iii) Are organisational considerations given? Do they add to the reasons for the study? Are other pertinent issues discussed?

(iv) Can an understanding of the methods and approach be gleaned?

(v) Is a structure given for the document?

(II) Literature review

(i) Does it inform the hypotheses to be investigated?

(ii) Is it balanced, reflective of major developments and cognisant of major trends in relevant disciplines?

(iii) Is the literature review critical? Is the candidate evaluative?

(iv) Does this review suggest research approaches, strategies and data-collection methods?

(III) Methods

(i) Are the methodology and data-collection methods appropriate?

(ii) Is there a link to the literature review and the theory and approaches discussed there?

(iii) Has selection of them been well argued?

(iv) Does the candidate demonstrate capacity for application and accurate, appropriate use of techniques?

(IV) Results and discussion

(i) Are these parts of the project appropriately structured or separated?

(ii) Is a distinction maintained between what was discovered and the judgements made on the basis of discoveries?

(iii) Are findings presented clearly and cogently? You might consider whether there is a relationship between objectives and/or themes and order of presentation of findings.

(iv) Is the presentation of results analytical? Is there clarification of relationships between data items and their component parts?

(v) Does the candidate demonstrate a capacity for synthesis of results, theory and the work of others when discussing the findings?

(V) Conclusions

(i) Is there awareness of the limitations of the research?

(ii) Are conclusions and recommendations valid? That is, have they been reached logically? Does the evidence support them?

(iii) Are organisational implications treated appropriately? Have additions to the literature been made and recognised by the candidate? What are the implications for the current state of knowledge and practice?

(VI) Continuity and presentation

(i) Does the document build on an Introduction and Abstract to provide a coherent story that can be followed from chapter to chapter?

(ii) Is the document appropriately structured? Does it conform with the Guidelines on the Blackboard site?

(iii) Do you have an overall sense that the student has considered a flow of activity involving the broad questions?

What is the question? ( What is its answer? ( What evidence led to the answer

(iv) Are there linkages between sections and/or chapters?

(v) Where appropriate, is there an Executive Summary?

(vi) Are the conclusions germane? Are the ideas in the introduction and conclusion appropriately linked?

(vii) Is the project documented and referenced in a consistent, academic manner? Is the text free of spelling, punctuation and grammatical errors?

APPENDIX 6

REFERENCE REQUIREMENTS

When you are preparing a project, essay, report or thesis you will often need to consult other people's work, and it is important that you acknowledge the sources from which you obtained the information. As well as giving credit where due to the originator of an idea, the main reason for giving references is to enable people to check your interpretation and use of an earlier work, and to show that you have checked and are aware of earlier work in your field. For UWS submissions, there is only one way of citing, that is, referring to other works from within a text, the Harvard System. Unfortunately, there is more than one variation of what is known as the Harvard System in use. For the project, help is at hand. At UWS the variation of Harvard system that we use is set out on the UWS library web-site. A comprehensive guide can be found at:

http://moodle.uws.ac.uk/course/view.php?id=3584

Poor referencing is unacceptable in the Project. It will result in a fail if you do not reference properly. Good referencing requires hard work and discipline, and this is expected of all students at this level.

APPENDIX 7

GUIDELINES for LAYOUT of the MBA PROJECT

The project should be between 10,000 and 15,000 words (excluding appendices and references) and be produced single sided, in Arial, 12pt on good quality A4 paper.

Margins: 2.54 cm at all round (normal setting).

Spacing: Double line spacing should be used throughout. Paragraphs should be separated with a blank line.

Binding: The project should be bound, preferably spiral bound,

Pagination

Pages should be numbered consecutively throughout the project, excluding preliminaries, references and appendices.

Library Permission This should be completed as appropriate (see Appendix 4.

Abstract - not exceeding 300 words should appear alone on the next page.

Acknowledgements - It is acceptable to acknowledge any special assistance received in the course of preparing your project, particularly if assistance has come from outside organisations or individuals. Acknowledgements, however, should be kept to the minimum necessary and should appear alone on a page.

Statement of Copyright - should be included on the title page so that the author's rights are safeguarded if copies are made of the project:

"The copyright of this project rests with the author. No quotation from it should be published without his/her prior written consent and information derived from it should be acknowledged".

Table of Contents - should follow, giving chapter, section and sub-section titles and page numbers.

· Main text of project, divided into chapters, sections, etc., each with a clear title.

· Footnotes - if used place at end of text (see below).

· References

· Appendices

Footnotes – guidance

Purpose

You can use footnotes to

· amplify a point that is not central to the main argument of the text, introducing a parenthetic discussion that is not long enough to form an appendix

· provide a cross-reference to other parts of the project.

Footnotes are an interruption to the reader and should be kept to what is strictly necessary. It is recommended that you do not use footnotes in your text or at the bottom of a page. Footnotes should be placed in a separate section of the project at the end of the text and immediately before the references.

Note: please see the module workbook on Online World for more information about how to structure your strategic project.

image2

Ethics approval application form (UEC1.1)

Pre-screening questions:

(Please read the UWS and your School Guidelines for Ethical Practice in Research and Scholarship before answering these questions, which will help you decide whether or not you need to make a full ethics approval application for your work).

Does your work involve human participants? Choose an item.

Does your work involve the use of personal data? Choose an item.

Does your work involve the use of animals? Choose an item.

(For this purpose, animals are defined as captive or temporarily captive living vertebrates or cephalopods. If such work is already licensed under the terms of the Animals Scientific procedures act (ASPA) then no further ethics approval is required)

Does your work involve risk to the investigator that is not adequately mitigated by proper application of the University’s health and safety policies and procedures? Choose an item.

If you have answered YES to any of the above questions you should complete the remainder of this form and submit it to your school ethics committee for approval PRIOR to commencing any work on your project.

If you have answered NO to all of the above questions your research/scholarship would be Class 1 as defined in the UWS Guidelines for Ethical Practice in Research and Scholarship and so you do not need the approval of a School Ethics Committee for your work.

1. Name of Principal Investigator: Click here to enter text.

2. School: Choose an item.

2b. If you answered “other” above, please provide details below:

3. Position of Principal Investigator: Choose an item.

4. Name and contact details of collaborators: Click here to enter text.

5. Name of Supervisor/Director of Studies: Click here to enter text.

(for student applications only)

5a. Position of Supervisor/Director of Studies: Click here to enter text.

(for student applications only)

5b. School of Supervisor/Director of Studies: Choose an item.

(for student applications only)

6. Title of the study: Click here to enter text.

7. Primary purpose of the study: Choose an item.

If you answered “other” to this question, please provide details below:

8. Has the proposed study been considered by any other ethics committee? Choose an item.

If the study has been considered by another ethics committee, please provide details below:

9. Please give a full summary of the purpose, justification, design and methodology of the planned study:

(word limit 1000 words. A full study protocol should be attached to your application)

10. How has the scientific quality of the proposed research project been assessed?

Independent external review ☐

Review within a company ☐

Review within a multi-centre research group ☐

Review within the principal investigator’s institution ☐

Review within the research team ☐

Review by supervisor/director of studies ☐

Other ☐

If you answered “other” above, please provide details below:

11. Please explain/justify your intended sample size:

12. Please explain how you will analyse, present/disseminate the data you intend to collect:

13. Does the proposed research involve the use of individual/group interviews or questionnaires? Choose an item.

13a. Will proposed interviews or questionnaires discuss topics that might be sensitive, embarrassing or upsetting for participants or is it possible that criminal or other disclosures requiring action could occur during the study? Choose an item.

If you have answered YES to the question above, please provide details below and how you propose to deal with such issues:

14. Is the study likely to cause any discomfort or distress, either physical or psychological (see UWS Guidelines for Ethical Practice in Research and Scholarship)? Choose an item.

If you have answered Yes to the question above, please provide details below and how you propose to deal with this:

15. Does the proposed research involve any physically invasive procedures? Choose an item.

If physically invasive procedures are to be used what hazards are associated with them?

16. Please identify any other ethical considerations with the proposed study.

17. Does the proposed research involve deception regarding aims, objectives or the identity of the investigator? Choose an item.

If you have answered YES to the above question, please provide an explanation/justification of this deception:

18. Will research participants be debriefed after their participation? Choose an item.

If you have answered YES to the above question please provide details of when this debriefing will take place, who will do it and how it will be done:

19. What is the expected duration of participation in the study for each participant?

20. Please provide details of how you will recruit participants to your study:

(you should include details of how potential participants will be identified, approached and finally recruited)

21. What measures will you put in place to ensure the confidentiality of personal data gathered during your study?

22. Who will have access to the data collected during the study and how will you keep it confidential?

23. Will informed consent be obtained from study participants? Choose an item.

If you have answered YES to the above question please provide details of how you will obtain this consent and the information you will provide to potential participants to allow them to make an informed choice about whether or not to participate in your research.

If you have answered NO to the above question, please justify your decision not to obtain consent from your participants.

24. How long will potential participants have to decide whether or not to take part in the study?

25. Will participants be informed that they can withdraw from the study at any time? Choose an item.

26. Will participants be from any of the following groups?

Children under 16 ☐

Adults with learning disabilities ☐

Adults who are unconscious or severely ill ☐

Adults with a terminal illness ☐

Adults in emergency situations ☐

Adults with mental illness

(particularly if detained under the mental health act) ☐

Adults with dementia ☐

Adults in Scotland who are unable to consent for themselves ☐

Those who could be considered to have a particularly

dependent relationship with the investigator ☐

Other ☐

None of the above ☐

If you answered “other” above, please provide details:

If you intend to include participants from any of the above groups, please outline how you will mitigate the risks involved:

27. Are there any special pressures which would make it difficult for potential participants to refuse to take part in your study?

(e.g., relationship to the investigator?)

28. Will study participants be paid to take part? Choose an item.

If you have answered YES to the above question, please provide details of the payments involved:

29. Where will the proposed research take place?

30. How will the costs of the study be met?

31. Please indicate which supporting documents you are submitting with this application:

Participant information sheet (PIS) ☐

Consent form ☐

Copy of the protocol ☐

Letters to participants ☐

Letters to parent/guardians/gatekeepers etc ☐

Letter or ethical committee approval or other approvals ☐

Risk assessments ☐

Other relevant materials (please specify below) ☐

The information supplied above is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, accurate. I have read the university ethics guidelines and clearly understand my obligations and the rights of study participants, particularly in relation to obtaining valid consent.

Signature of the principal investigator(s):

Date: Click here to enter a date.

Signature of the supervisor/director of studies:

(if applicable)

Date: Click here to enter a date.

Part 1 – To be completed by Student

1. How many formal supervision sessions have you had?

2. How much written work have you submitted for comment and had returned? Please indicate the type of work, e.g. draft literature review, draft methodology chapter, questionnaires, transcripts of interviews etc.

3. Give details of any practical or other difficulties you have encountered in pursuing your research? Indicate how these have/will be overcome.

4. Are you on schedule to meet the timescale and plan of work set out in the Module Handout or agreed with your Supervisor (as appropriate)? If not, please outline how you intend to remedy this.

(30%)

PAGE

1

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/5. ITDS&MBAOW˵����ָ��/UWS ITDS Information for MBA students-UWS IT sheet.docx

University of the West of Scotland

Information, Technology & Digital Services (ITDS)

Student Information Fact Sheet

ITDS Contact Details

Website: http://www.uws.ac.uk/about-uws/services-for-students/ict-services/access-to-services/

Telephone: +44 (0)141 848 3999

Email: [email protected]

Network Password

Your network password allows you to access PC’s and thin client devices on UWS campuses.

Your initial password is UWS then your date of birth in the format ddMmmyy e.g. UWS01Jan96. This password must be changed on initial login and every 180 days thereafter. (If you find you cannot access IT resources it is likely that your password needs to be reset. See Self Service Password reset details below or contact [email protected] if you cannot change your password online ).

MBA Online World / Moodle Virtual Learning Environments

Your network password is also your password for the MBA Online World and Moodle. So the initial password for the above is the same as your network password. If you change your network password your Moodle and MBA Online World password will also change.

· MBA Online World (MBAOW)

http:// uwsonline.courseworker.net or

mba.uws.ac.uk

· Moodle - Virtual Learning Environment

moodle.uws.ac.uk

For both the MBAOW and Moodle your Username is your Banner ID (e.g. B00226556) and your

Password is UWS then your date of birth in the format ddMmmyy e.g. UWS01Jan96 or your network password if you have already changed it.

Self Service Network Password Reset

In order to reset your network password online a Self Service Profile must be created first via the following link: https://sspassword.uws.ac.uk. It is recommended that you create this link upon commencement of your studies with UWS.

Username is uws-student\ followed by your banner ID (e.g. uws-student\b11111111)

Password is your network password (above).

Student Email

student365mail.uws.ac.uk

Username is: [email protected]

Password initially is: UWS plus your date of birth in the format ddMmmyy e.g. UWS01Jan96

Network passwords and student mail passwords are the same initially but do not sync, therefore, when you change one it does not automatically change the other. Students will be prompted to change their student email passwords change every 90 days. Please note that communication with any UWS department must be made via UWS student email.

Self Service Banner – Enrolment and Exam results

ssb.uws.ac.uk

Username is your Banner ID and MUST have a capital “B”.

PIN is your Date of Birth as a six digit number i.e. DDMMYY

For your own security you should reset all passwords on first login.

Password Management

The minimum requirements for passwords are as follows:

· 8 Characters

· UPPER and lowercase letters used

· Either a number or special character included

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/5. ITDS&MBAOW˵����ָ��/UWS Ref Guide (1).pdf

2012-2013 Page 1 of 16

Applying References in UWS

Contents Adding citations in the text ......................................................................................... 2 Arranging your list of references ................................................................................ 4 Citing an item which has 2 authors............................................................................. 6 Citing an item which has 3 authors............................................................................. 7 Citing an item which has more than 3 authors ........................................................... 8 Citing an item with an organisation as author ............................................................. 9 Citing multiple items ................................................................................................. 10 Finding bibliographic details ..................................................................................... 12 Formatting titles ........................................................................................................ 13 Making direct quotations .......................................................................................... 14 Page numbers .......................................................................................................... 15 Using a secondary reference ................................................................................... 16

Please note: Author is used in this package to refer to the person or organisation deemed responsible for a work. Any related instructions also apply to creators, directors, editors and producers.

2012-2013 Page 2 of 16

Adding citations in the text The information used in the citation will vary depending on the type of item concerned (book, journal article, film, website…). The citation in the text should include:

• the surname of one or more authors OR editors OR creators OR

producers OR directors.

• OR the name of an organisation.

• OR the title of the work, if none of the above apply.

AND • the year the item was first published.

• OR the year the item was created (if this is more relevant).

• OR (n.d.) if a date cannot be found on the item.

If the citation applies to a direct quotation, the relevant page number will also be required. The term “non-paginated” can be used when an online source does not provide page numbers, e.g. (Scottish Intercollegiate Guidelines Network, 2010, non- paginated). If an item has more than one author, use the following pattern:

• 2 authors - Surname1 and Surname2, e.g. Durkin and Main.

• 3 authors - Surname1, Surname2 and Surname3, e.g. Durrant, Rhodes and Young.

• 4 or more authors - Surname1 et al., e.g. Luckin et al.

A citation can be added to your text in different ways and your selection will depend entirely on the context.

• Make the author part of your sentence and show the year, in brackets, after

the name.

• Alternatively, add the name and date as supplementary information.

Brackets appear around the name and year and this is placed at an

appropriate point in the text.

If you wish to use more than one source to highlight a point, separate the information with a semi-colon.

2012-2013 Page 3 of 16

How this may look in the text:

Cameron (2009, p.80) states that effective reading is “one of the most sophisticated skills we possess”. It is also seen as an important factor in academic success (Durrant, Rhodes and Young, 2009). The skill involves critical enquiry and analytical awareness as well as comprehension (Luckin et al., 2009). After all, learning effectively may not come naturally, but is a skill that can be developed (Gardner, 1993 cited in Cottrell, 2008; Make the Most of Your Learning Style, n.d.). An awareness of our individual learning style can help with this process (Open University, 2012).

2012-2013 Page 4 of 16

Arranging your list of references The reference list provides the publication, or availability, details, for each item mentioned in the text. People can use this information to find the item and read it for themselves.

There should be one list at the end of the work which is arranged in alphabetical order by author (or by title if the author isn’t known). Each reference in the list should include:

• The author(s) or equivalent.

• The date of publication.

• The title of the work.

• Publication or availability details.

An explanatory suffix is required after the name but before the date if an item has been attributed to:

• Editor (ed.) or (eds.).

• Creator (creator) or (creators).

• Producer (prod.) or (prods.).

• Director (dir.) or (dirs.).

If an item has more than one author, use the pattern:

• 2 authors - Name1 and Name2 E.g. Durkin, K. and Main, A.

• 3 authors - Name1, Name2 and Name3 E.g. Durrant, A., Rhodes, G. and Young, D.

• 4 or more authors - Name1, Name2, Name3 … and Name? E.g. Luckin, R., Clark, W., Graber, R., Logan, K., Mee, A. and Oliver, M.

There may be conventions you can use, if an item does not mention required elements:

• Author (or equivalent), use the title of the item.

• Date of publication or creation, use n.d.

• Place of publication, use s.l.

• Publisher, use s.n.

2012-2013 Page 5 of 16

How this applies to a sample reference list: Cameron, S. (2009) The Business Student’s Handbook: Skills for Study and Employment. 5th ed. [Online] Harlow: Pearson Education. Available: Dawsonera. [Accessed: 20 September 2010]. Cottrell, S. (2008) The Study Skills Handbook. 3rd ed. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan. Durrant, A., Rhodes, G. and Young, D. (eds.) (2009) Getting Started with University- level Work-based Learning. Hendon: Middlesex University Press. Luckin, R., Clark, W., Graber, R., Logan, K., Mee, A. and Oliver, M. (2009) Do Web 2.0 tools really open the door to learning? Practices, perceptions and profiles of 11– 16-year-old students. Learning, Media and Technology. [Online] Vol.34(2), pp.87- 104. Available: Taylor & Francis Journals (informaworld). [Accessed: 12 January 2011]. Make the Most of Your Learning Style. (n.d.) [Online] Available: http://www.brainboxx.co.uk/a3_aspects/pages/MakeMost.htm [Accessed: 29 July 2010]. Open University (2012) Skills for OU Study: Applying Yourself to the Learning Cycle. [Online] Available: http://www.open.ac.uk/skillsforstudy/applying-yourself-to-the- learning.cycle.php [Accessed: 9 May 2012].

2012-2013 Page 6 of 16

Citing an item which has 2 authors

In many instances, more than one person will be responsible for a work and all must be acknowledged. When you have 2 authors (or editors, directors etc.), use Surname1 and Surname2 in the text and Name1 and Name2 in the reference list.

How this may look in the text:

Durkin and Main (2002) highlight some of the difficulties students have when trying to learn effectively. OR Learning effectively does not come easily to some students (Durkin and Main, 2002). How this should look in the reference list: Durkin, K. and Main, A. (2002) Discipline-based study skills support for first-year undergraduate students. Active Learning in Higher Education. [Online] Vol.3(1), pp.24-39. Available: SAGE Journals Online. [Accessed: 21 September 2010].

2012-2013 Page 7 of 16

Citing an item which has 3 authors In many instances, more than one person will be responsible for a work and all must be acknowledged. When you have 3 authors (or editors, directors etc.), use Surname1, Surname2 and Surname3 in the text and Name1, Name2 and Name3 in the reference list.

How this may look in the text:

Durrant, Rhodes and Young (2009) consider effective reading an important factor in academic success. OR Effective reading is considered an important factor in academic success (Durrant, Rhodes and Young, 2009). How this should look in the reference list: Durrant, A., Rhodes, G. and Young, D. (eds.) (2009) Getting Started with University- level Work-based Learning. Hendon: Middlesex University Press.

2012-2013 Page 8 of 16

Citing an item which has more than 3 authors

In many instances, more than one person will be responsible for a work and all must be acknowledged. When you have more than 3 authors (or editors, directors etc.):

• Show the first surname followed by et al. (and others) in the text.

• List all authors in the reference list. Use the same order of names as the list

on the item.

How this may look in the text: Luckin et al. (2009) discuss the skills involved in reading effectively. OR Various skills are involved in reading effectively (Luckin et al., 2009). How this should look in the reference list: Luckin, R., Clark, W., Graber, R., Logan, K., Mee, A. and Oliver, M. (2009) Do Web 2.0 tools really open the door to learning? Practices, perceptions and profiles of 11– 16-year-old students. Learning, Media and Technology. [Online] Vol.34(2), pp.87- 104. Available: Taylor & Francis Journals (informaworld). [Accessed: 12 January 2011].

2012-2013 Page 9 of 16

Citing an item with an organisation as author

There may be occasions when you wish to refer to items published by a public institution or commercial company. Some of these publications may list an individual as the author but others will show only the name of the organisation, institution or company concerned. In such cases, consider the name of the organisation, institution or company as the author. If the item has been issued by a specific department of an organisation, use both parts of the name. For example, the University of the West of Scotland Effective Learning (2012) publication ... How this may look in the text: The Open University (2012) depicts the learning cycle in graphic form. OR The importance of the learning cycle is highlighted by the use of an illustration (Open University, 2012). How this should look in the reference list: Open University (2012) Skills for OU Study: Applying Yourself to the Learning Cycle. [Online] Available: http://www.open.ac.uk/skillsforstudy/applying-yourself-to-the- learning.cycle.php [Accessed: 9 May 2012].

2012-2013 Page 10 of 16

Citing multiple items

There may be occasions when you are referring to several items by the same author or the same item on multiple occasions. These and similar circumstances require extra care. If you have items from the same author published in different years, cite these in the

usual way but arrange your references so that the oldest item appears on the list

before the newest.

If you have items, e.g. official documents, from the same author published in the same year OR items published in the same year by different authors who share a surname, use the “a”, “b”, “c” format to differentiate between them:

• Add “a” to the citation for the relevant item mentioned first in your text, “b” to the citation for the item mentioned second in the text, “c” to the third and so on.

• Arrange your reference list so that the entry for the item marked “a” appears before the item marked “b” etc.

If you have more than one source for a particular point and wish to use them all, cite each in the usual way but separate the sources with a semi-colon.

If you have an item which you wish to cite on multiple occasions, use the same citation each time. This item should only appear once in the reference list. How this may look in the text: Effective reading is “one of the most sophisticated skills we possess” according to Cameron (2009, p.80) and the route to building an overview of a subject (Cottrell, 2007). Note taking can help to organize your thoughts by separating the facts and examples from any personal opinions mentioned by an author or lecturer (Biz/ed, 1996-2010a). An awareness of our individual learning style (Open University, 2012) can help as communicating what has been learned in a clear and concise manner is crucial to academic success (Cameron, 2009). Learning effectively may not come naturally, but is a skill that can be developed (Gardner, 1993 cited in Cottrell, 2008; Make the Most of Your Learning Style, n.d.). The importance of assignments should not be discounted as they are also a key method for markers to discriminate between candidates (Biz/ed, 1996-2010b).

2012-2013 Page 11 of 16

How this should look in the reference list: Biz/ed (1996-2010a) Study Skills: Reading. [Online] Available: http://www.bized.co.uk/reference/studyskills/reading.htm [Accessed: 9 December 2010]. Biz/ed (1996-2010b) Study Skills: Essay Writing. [Online] Available: http://www.bized.co.uk/reference/studyskills/essay.htm [Accessed: 12 July 2010]. Cameron, S. (2009) The Business Student’s Handbook: Skills for Study and Employment. 5th ed. [Online] Harlow: Pearson Education. Available: Dawsonera. [Accessed: 20 September 2010]. Cottrell, S. (2007) The Exam Skills Handbook: Achieving Peak Performance. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan. Cottrell, S. (2008) The Study Skills Handbook. 3rd ed. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan. Make the Most of Your Learning Style. (n.d.) [Online] Available: http://www.brainboxx.co.uk/a3_aspects/pages/MakeMost.htm [Accessed: 29 July 2010]. Open University (2012) Skills for OU Study: Applying Yourself to the Learning Cycle. [Online] Available: http://www.open.ac.uk/skillsforstudy/applying-yourself-to-the- learning-cycle.php [Accessed: 9 May 2012].

A range of dates is given in the Biz/ed example above as this is the only information relevant to year of publication provided on the website.

2012-2013 Page 12 of 16

Finding bibliographic details

The information required to complete the reference for an item will be found in different places depending on the type of item. The following is a guide for common item types.

• Books: use the publication details listed on the title page of the book and the

page after the title page.

• Journal articles: the details are usually listed on the first page of the article.

• Other physical items: the information may be given at the beginning or end of

the work or may appear on the packaging.

• Online resources: look all around a website as the required information may

be difficult to locate.

There may be conventions you can use, if an item does not mention required elements:

• Author (or equivalent), use the title of the item.

• Date of publication or creation, use n.d.

• Place of publication, use s.l.

• Publisher, use s.n.

How this may look in the text: Learning effectively may not come naturally, but is a skill that can be developed (Make the Most of Your Learning Style, n.d.). How this should look in the reference list: Make the Most of Your Learning Style. (n.d.) [Online] Available: http://www.brainboxx.co.uk/a3_aspects/pages/MakeMost.htm [Accessed: 29 July 2010].

2012-2013 Page 13 of 16

Formatting titles

The title of a work should be underlined to confirm the identity of the item.

If the item you are discussing is linked to a larger item e.g. an article in a journal or a track on an album, it is usually the title of the larger work which is underlined.

The principal words in the title should also be capitalised for emphasis.

Non-substantive words should be capitalised only if they appear at the beginning of the title. Words in this category include:

• a

• an

• and

• at

• for

• in

• into

• of

• on

• that

• the

• to

• with

Online Works The title of an item is underlined to show that this is the main element of a reference. For online works, a hyperlinked (underlined) URL or web address can cause confusion so this formatting should be removed. How this may look in a reference list:

Lloyd-Jones, N. and Masterson, A. (2010) Writing skills and developing an argument. In: Maslin-Prothero, S. (ed.) Bailliere’s Study Skills for Nurses and Midwives. 4th ed. Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall Elsevier, pp.121-40. Make the Most of Your Learning Style. (n.d.) [Online] Available: http://www.brainboxx.co.uk/a3_aspects/pages/MakeMost.htm [Accessed: 29 July 2010]. Whitehead, D. (2002) The academic writing experiences of a group of student nurses: a phenomenological study. Journal of Advanced Nursing. Vol.38(5), pp.498- 506.

2012-2013 Page 14 of 16

Making direct quotations There are recognised conventions to follow if you wish to quote directly from an item rather than paraphrase the content.

• Ensure that quotation marks are used at the beginning and end of the

quotation.

• Incorporate the quotation into the body of your text if it only consists of

a few words OR indent the quotation as a separate paragraph for

longer phrases or passages.

• Use ellipsis (...) if you are omitting one or more words from the middle

of the quotation.

• Add the relevant page number for each direct quotation.

If you are quoting from an online source which does not provide page numbers, add the term “non-paginated” to your citation, e.g. (Scottish Intercollegiate Guidelines Network, 2010, non-paginated). How this may appear in the text: Effective reading is “one of the most sophisticated skills we possess” according to Cameron (2009, p.80) and an important factor in academic success (Durrant, Rhodes and Young, 2009). The skill involves critical enquiry and analytical awareness as well as comprehension (Luckin et al., 2009). Note taking can help to organize your thoughts by separating the facts and examples from any personal opinions mentioned by an author or lecturer (Biz/ed, 1996-2010a). Academic writing as a whole, however, can be more problematic with many students experiencing difficulty and approaching new assignments with trepidation (Whitehead, 2002).

“Students often have difficulty in differentiating clearly between essay and report formats….and some appear to have had little practice inwriting critical evaluations”

(Durkin and Main, 2002, p.25).

Indeed, some students regard academic assignments purely as a tool to measure their grasp of a subject but it should be remembered that assignments are also a key method for markers to discriminate between candidates (Biz/ed, 1996-2010b).

2012-2013 Page 15 of 16

Page numbers

Page numbers should only be provided on the following occasions:

• In your text

o when you are making a direct quotation.

• In your reference list

o when you are giving the page range for a journal article.

o when you are giving the page range for the chapter of an edited book.

The term “non-paginated” can be used in your citation when an online source does not provide page numbers, e.g. (Scottish Intercollegiate Guidelines Network, 2010, non-paginated).

How this may look in the text: Effective reading is “one of the most sophisticated skills we possess” according to Cameron (2009, p.80) and an important factor in academic success (Durrant, Rhodes and Young, 2009). The skill involves critical enquiry and analytical awareness as well as comprehension (Luckin et al., 2009). Although a traumatic process, the resulting feedback can be a useful tool for personal development (Lloyd-Jones and Masterson, 2010). How this may look in the reference list:

Cameron, S. (2009) The Business Student’s Handbook: Skills for Study and Employment. 5th ed. [Online] Harlow: Pearson Education. Available: Dawsonera. [Accessed: 20 September 2010]. Durrant, A., Rhodes, G. and Young, D. (eds.) (2009) Getting Started with University- level Work-based Learning. Hendon: Middlesex University Press. Lloyd-Jones, N. and Masterson, A. (2010) Writing skills and developing an argument. In: Maslin-Prothero, S. (ed.) Bailliere’s Study Skills for Nurses and Midwives. 4th ed. Edinburgh: Bailliere Tindall Elsevier, pp.121-40. Luckin, R., Clark, W., Graber, R., Logan, K., Mee, A. and Oliver, M. (2009) Do Web 2.0 tools really open the door to learning? Practices, perceptions and profiles of 11– 16-year-old students. Learning, Media and Technology. [Online] Vol.34(2), pp.87- 104. Available: Taylor & Francis Journals (informaworld). [Accessed: 12 January 2011].

2012-2013 Page 16 of 16

Using a secondary reference One of the works you are using may include a section of text or a graphic or a piece of music etc. which is ideal for your assignment. If this section has not been written, produced or created by the authors of the work you are consulting, then it is a secondary reference. Where possible, use the reference listed in the work you have consulted to access the second (original) work. If this is not possible, use the convention for secondary references. A secondary reference has an extended in-text citation. This shows that you have not consulted the original work and are relying on someone else’s interpretation of it. Your in-text citation for a secondary reference should include:

• Author and year of publication of the original work.

• cited in.

• Author and year of publication of the work consulted.

Your reference list should only include the work you have consulted. Note: if the secondary work has more than 3 authors, list only the first followed by et al., e.g. (Oke et al., 1978 cited in Cottrell, 2008). How this may look in the text: Learning effectively may not come naturally, but is a skill that can be developed (Gardner, 1993 cited in Cottrell, 2008). How this should look in the reference list: Cottrell, S. (2008) The Study Skills Handbook. 3rd ed. Basingstoke: Palgrave Macmillan.

  • Please note:
  • Author is used in this package to refer to the person or organisation deemed responsible for a work. Any related instructions also apply to creators, directors, editors and producers.
  • Adding citations in the text
  • Arranging your list of references
  • Citing an item which has 2 authors
  • Citing an item which has 3 authors
  • Citing an item which has more than 3 authors
  • Citing an item with an organisation as author
  • Citing multiple items
  • A range of dates is given in the Biz/ed example above as this is the only information relevant to year of publication provided on the website.
  • Finding bibliographic details
  • Formatting titles
  • Making direct quotations
  • Page numbers
  • Using a secondary reference

SBP��ҵս����Ŀ�����IJο�����/6. ������Դ/Google Scholar Tutorial.ppt

A step-by-step introduction to

effective Google Scholar searching

What is Google Scholar?

Google Scholar is a search engine that searches for and retrieves results from scholarly literature.

How is it different from normal Google?

Google Scholar “Normal” Google
Great tool to find research information Great tool to find general information
Searches for scholarly publications: Journal articles Theses Books/book chapters Abstracts, court opinions & more Searches all Internet publications: Websites Images/Media/Maps Blogs/News Wikipedia, books & more
Ranking system considers: Relevancy Author Publisher Citation by other publications Ranking system considers: Relevancy Popularity of site Proximity Type of source & many other factors

How is it the same as normal Google?

How do I get to Google Scholar?

Go to the Google homepage (www.google.com). Look at the title bar across the top of the page and find the More link.

Click on More to make a menu drop down; from this menu you should see and click on the link that says Scholar.

Welcome to Google Scholar!

BEFORE you Search: Set your Preferences!

Welcome to Google Scholar Preferences!

Here you

can set language and display options.

This Preferences page also allows you to link directly to your library’s collection. If you follow directions and set this up, a Find It with OLinks link will start showing up in your Scholar searches whenever OhioLINK has online full- text. The next few slides will show you how to set up this super-helpful, timesaving feature.

Find the search box next to Library Links.

Type in OhioLINK and

click Find Library

Click on the box to the left of OhioLINK. Make sure

that a check mark has appeared in the box.

Be sure to scroll to the top or bottom of the page and click on SAVE PREFERENCES

Return to the Google Scholar homepage before continuing

Advanced Search Option

Advanced Search: Why use it?

Like most other resources, the Advanced Search just gives you more ways to limit your search. It gives you more boxes to enter your keywords in and search boxes devoted specifically to author, publication and date.

Use the advanced search if:

  • You like searching with more than one box
  • You want to search for your keyword in the title of the article and

not just in the article’s text

  • You are looking for a specific article or publication
  • You are looking for work by a specific author
  • You want to limit your search by date

Advanced Search Options

As promised, Advanced Search gives you many more boxes in which you can enter your keywords. Make sure you read what is written to the left and put your keywords in the correct corresponding box.

Also be sure to check the drop-down list and select the location where you want your keywords to be found – in the text of an article or in the title.

Advanced Search Options

The Advanced Search also gives you options concerning publication details. This is especially helpful if you are looking for a specific publication, or publications from a certain date range.

Return to the Google Scholar homepage before continuing

Basic Search

Google Scholar’s homepage is its basic search. This is a single search box, just like normal Google. It is a simpler format, but it will give you access to the same resources as the advanced search.

Sample Basic Search

Let’s run a sample basic search for the word “happiness”

Type happiness into the main Google scholar search box and click search.

Sample Basic Search: happiness

The total number of search results is listed here.

If you get back too many results, think about refining your search before you start scrolling through responses. Try adding “and” with another keyword to limit your search

Changing the search string to “happiness and neuroscience and chocolate” makes for a much more effective search! There are far fewer results to sort through and these results are more likely to relate closely to the topic since we’ve given the search more specific criteria. All of these results must mention happiness AND neuroscience AND chocolate somewhere in their text.

Understanding the Search Results

Title of Resource

(article, book chapter, conference paper)

Understanding the Search Results

Author(s) of Resource

Understanding the Search Results

Additional Publication Information

(date, journal

title, publisher, website

url)

Understanding the Search Results

Snippets from resource containing search keywords in bold

Understanding the Search Results

Link to a list of other articles that have cited this resource or included this resource in their references

This is helpful because it links the reference pages of these resources together and shows you who is citing whom. It also is likely to list resources that pick up where the original resource left off, either by continuing its studies or updating its findings.

When something has been cited a lot, it can mean that the resource was foundational, revolutionary, or controversial. Remember that more recent works are less likely to have been cited a lot simply because there hasn’t been time for new research to emerge.

Understanding the Search Results

Related articles

Click on related articles to see additional resources on the same topic.

Finding the Full Text of the Resource

Links to the full text of the resource

If the full-text of the resource is available freely online, Scholar will give you the link.

If the full-text of the resource is available through Defiance College, you’ll see a link to Find it with Olinks. Click and you’ll link directly into Pilgrim Library’s electronic journal holdings. This will only

happen, though, if you have set your preferences to include the OhioLINK library as demonstrated earlier in this

presentation!

Finding the Full Text of the Resource

If there is no full-text, click on OhioLINK OLinks or follow the directions above.

What if there isn’t a link to a pdf or to Find it with OLinks?

Scholar tries to help you research by giving you citations even when the full-text is not freely available. When this happens and you don’t see a link to a pdf or to Find it with OLinks, don’t despair! You still have options. The library could own a copy of the journal in print, or we can try and borrow it from another library.

Write down and keep all necessary citation information for the resource you’re interested in. Then visit the Find It page (http://library.defiance.edu/guides/articles.html ) of the library’s website and follow its directions. If you have any questions, contact a librarian at Pilgrim Library – we’re happy to help!

Why do some resources have different links than others?

Understanding Search Results

Google Scholar only lists the options that apply to each specific resource. For example, if an article has not been cited by any other works, Scholar will not give a Cited by link for that resource. If the article is available for purchase from the British Library, there will be a link; if it’s not in the British Library, there won’t be a link.

You’ve reached the end of the

Google Scholar Online Tutorial.

CONGRATULATIONS!